N EIER
a a à ; ENTE
FE TERN
EN.
N TEN
AN RCA ge fi ER - ÿ
N ER Er
АЯ SE SÅ
SKØR RER
mee
zu
TRE SES
MEDDELELSER ОМ GRØNLAND
MEDDELELSER OM GRØNLAND
UDGIVNE AF
KOMMISSIONEN FOR
LEDELSEN AF DE GEOLOGISKE OG GEOGRAFISKE
UNDERSØGELSER I GRØNLAND
Binn XLIII
МЕР 30 ТАУГЕВ
V
N
!
|
KØBENHAVN
I KOMMISSION HOS C. A. REITZEL
BIANCO LUNOS BOGTRYKKERI
1917
DANMARK-EKSPEDITIONEN
TIL GRØNLANDS NORDOSTKYST 1906—1908
UNDER LEDELSE AF
L. MYLIUS-ERICHSEN
BIND III
5 у
i x u i Å
| ay 5 О у i i ay I
[ | DUR! a
se Ве. Ge 3 KE
| ir Er 7 : я Eu
y г ° ma i | ро i 7 EL A IM on ne u 5
| 7 oe er Fi = Be
i [5 2 aon aS. u
Г 0 _ i = в 3
a vu one 8 В u и |
©: im ål В 2 i i $. Sl
му De
> _ a da id 7 u Hr ’ > le u
= u i L :
| u > is | . ui 2 В u :
| ég — а Les cael Ou 7 OS
| IB its FOR
1 te mn u в = м u my ET
ER — й в. в
7 à 2 р = etc ur a | р Bd =
7 Di В, | - = £ ри
. na и | — = > 7 Е i т |
и | EE RES и a {ve > eae
и ds | к а wr OR | dir 7 | =" a
SAN Er . i : ON a an i |
Peo oe | | nz i u a
er 7 iH № De i" u 7 NH р и 7 i u 7 AL
| LD LE 1 ot a wie a a
, Г u one FA ae Аа dE FE + 7 + a EL
| i i | 1 5 ITU var № ig И af MT ÅR NE
u un pi _ + В . а re a 28 Ae LAC cree 2
x: у u > - 7 ока г or Le aa
. à Ti eu u Fran u | u ei VE UL |
ак u Er i Ne > ate у i Br АВ «
"A ad od rats DE Я м DEN nm
eens + RO WE | HE eo Tye, чих yar) u u
. | à i mrs м bal м Rå at ки В р L th i Fan
5 5 у Ve и а г. DES i
7 d dt A D dog) us PVS Be REN is а
He В KURE ЧА рт u s x pal aoa "JEg
Fan Rn tah es er
| в. re A WA os OL, ar yey |
all M . N i ee NE у. ai № | р EX | u =
RUE VU petits Ot ee 2 LE
Pr УМЕ: hero N р
7 : est NE | u у een) ми т. eu) 12" AR с fa вы wu"
PIE we Er | Е DL. 2 ie EF ‘à го Te
in р | à D'or Je и | mer i + va Pr » |
nt. i L в = ON ел i eT u ni "” — u 1 | LE —
& ‘a ПИК | р ar x > VA »ı к Ру u
| я LÆR u we = В у D р =”)
№ $ i Fr о i = re, GS u
7 L у mr MOD = ww Fo 7 a
ae LÆR Г” x j RE Der 5 ni
i ‚ № a A > u i
NH Pi 4 i 7 ww L a / fi u Le u р
REE å Ч 7 5 m
| Ir : 2 ß у 4 | 4 be RE | «
fe 7 Le le 8 u
Guat aan er <
Fa Ir … ÆRØ RU >
à pe u my i * ry RL = AE i
| mn gh « | = Pers AX. a
& Rn 1 nu M i я ob
i . u u = vs en u
м, ie u + | к 7 5
. 7 _ Kh: u > . u a
UR a 7 à | ' i 7 i
© = _ 7 HS, Pet - v |
Ada, Le ri pe ae ee we
. | B u в Per | = | u р ie & i à
В 4 [oUF at i u tk 4% Ze;
A 5 i ~ iT ER 2 i , м | р | : : "+ У“
| PAT A р. Pe hp Ae
| A a; de AR ~ ia I . 4
u à. à u i 0 F åg г
LA 5. LU | u , =
1 i Вт (Men, NA А > | Le ie LE
Li i i 5 ‘4 р —
LE PONT LS. À KE dé 7
od À i u u
Еф @ и, | a В = ' D
7 al on Er oy hy 7 у “à bek
| f Er = i я
i | i ha! _ i 7 HD =" u É ha
u ‚u ar $: u. Gr Le .
i & АЯ" U i à hy 7 —
& Å Я ee ” U ER =
| i we w ® 5 i
i = = i i i a: . u . i 2
i FI i | Fi | Er L о о 7
_ i i i . га 7
i f > = u i ar i
i а POUSSE | | u
D & р o № 1)
~~ В т и г |
= _ FE u 7 vi . = >
Г à . 7 ik SE — =
| О — 7
im: | LE “AR: FE ' SMS
ка PO | u u ry "TIT,
u nai = | mo LER
LL « i
INDHOLD
Side
I. List of Vascular Plants from North-East Greenland (N. of 76° N. lat.), collected
by the Danmark-Expedition 1906—1908, by C. H. OSTENFELD and ANDR.
АВ (Hertil та EVE 1
II. The Insects of the Danmark-Expedition by Frirz JoHANSEN and J. С.
NIEESEN se (Hente avle УМ 33
III. Freshwater Algæ from the Danmark-Expedition to North-East Greenland
(NS < И №6 ЦЕ ВИ ES BØRGESEN SE ee eee ee . 69
IV. On the Marine Algz from North-East Greenland, collected by the Danner
Expedition, by L. KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE. ee И 91
V. Fungi Terrestres from North-East end collected by the Danmark-
Expedition, determined by С. FERDINANDSEN. (Hertil Tavle IX)... ......
VI. Systematic List of Fungi (Micromycetes) from North-East Greenland, col-
lected by the Danmark-Expedition 1906—1908, determined by J. Linn.
(HERElSRAaVlERX a ee о N Eee 147
УП. Hepaticea and Sphagnaceae from North-East Greenland, collected by the
Danmark-Expedition 1906—1908, determined by С. JENSEN............. 163
VIII. Mosses from North-East Greenland, collected by the Danmark-Expedition
1906—1908, determined by Аос. HESSELBO. (Hertil Tavle XI—XII)...... 169
IX. Lichens from North-East Greenland, collected by the Danmark-Expedition
1906—1908: determined! by OLAEZGALLOE 181
X. Diatoms from North-East Greenland, collected by the Danmark-Expedition,
determined by Ernst Osrrur. (Hertil Tavle XII—XIV) ое eee I 193
XI. Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea (W. of 6° W. long. and N. of
73°30’ N. lat.), collected during the Danmark-Expedition 1906—1908:
I. List of Diatoms and Flagellates by C. H. OSTENFELD............ 257
i Eerotozoagbys Ca Hs Отек 287
Hite eridinaless Бу OvE PAULSEN eae aeeen ee eee eee 301
IV. General remarks on the Microplankton by С. H. OSTENFELD and
OVER@RAULSEN он. ол о 319
XII. Contributions to the Carboniferous Flora of North-Eastern Greenland by
ASG wNATHORS Ts (Несе! Tayle ХУ 337
XIII. Some notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land, North-East
Greenland, by Амов. LUNDAGER. (Hertil Tavle XVII) ................... 347
AVS A Car byg [VAR VL RAGARD EH 2 20.2.0202 rc ee seh on Sey ee eerie 415
ХУ. A Marine Dorylaimus from Greenland waters by HJALMAR DITLEVSEN.
(Меры Rawle MW UM et. re ee ee ee IE CT CC 427
XVI. Bryozoa by С. М. В. LEVINSEN: (Hertil Tavle XIX—-XXIV).............. 431
XVII Report on the Porifera, collected by the Danmark-Expedition to North-
East Greenland, by H.V. Bronsrep. (Hertil Tavle XXV—XXVI)......... 473
XVIII. The Alcyonaria of East-Greenland by Нестов Е. Е. JUNGERSEN........ . 485
XIX. Actinaria and Zoantharia of the Danmark-Expedition by Oskar CaRLGREN 505
XX. The Marine Carboniferous of North-East Greenland and its Brachiopod
Fauna by KARL А. GRONWALL. (Hertil Tavle XXVII—XXX) ............. 509
XXI. Quarternary Fossils, collected by the Danmark-Expedition, Бу Ap.S.JENSEN 619
38347
ni a
sua
я LE
ile и и
О
=
Ce
= а
D
>
MER
х ру № i i
| un со, И ARE LS
ered! Pa mi 5 UT ae 4 De Le
“
en
(An
tn VEN 104 Cle ey opr 6 Pr
Vs = ae LIENS Al ROME Le В В ve! и aa BA В need
Å Kae.) м iy: “TER i и ré pe
ил ER Di OR 0 igs BEN | ПИ us к ER en,
= on) mit м 107 un he À toute к HARE Ear Le i FACE
Ass eg Lie us der ” the ) HA LY VAR ыы I CE
м вх | HUN ae НЫ i digit "al Fins a nif qu fhe un
gest, RE LOBEN Е poe Ga, Ti je sg
Be iu MA IR Г. ть в
‘hy MY une te hi Br qu ei ins à
i Wr bie о "ARNE LUE vie
ER NT | Le a Ar кои
С
na a 4 | FD te BAR Eu Le ni И в к | р | ON в:
WAR i MR oT sh AR OR var | in Be RR а =
7 u
u hd EH fa Br | ‘LI ws AN Prue :
Na, a НЙ i ER NA Hs DOUTE (Dei): Banners arte
м oy BLS iy DS Cer ae
a В k ie FLN M i Rohe MD Kød as AR ea 1%
4 i ni ” ra HP м nu "All Ir ny и т И VÆR Sl № Ия 7 VOTE ор | м NANG of
IN ¢ Wi 4 у ra ui We р | + A i nm F vi Fa |
SÅ i a ‘ 1 nr Pa) À ER L de 2 ne ai åre se A Whe fae ay) в as oy ie |
Fu Е hr > 2: SON af Hu DEAR AR ee) te Bh MO: р ye tie af | LE Bi: a.
AN Le u
Eu he ; AN
чи ie > ET FE LAN в RN ran ANT "hi SONI a VA AR Nu iil ae А "a Là а LL
i в eae eye им о nm ON и И $ и IR; An NEN Nå ager ie ne oy AU +
ne ay rule HU FA fr} " EN PK ик dj и Pa И LA a: ig Pie и И MARIE
5 Br: CRUE : i
Sy ss aoe N о N ge Br, RTL chia
a | Ra TOR ig ви re "2 A \ RUN u re И id soit "HET
vr i u PART HN у Vi Au un SER ul TX VA NR RN VA En UP EN Ma dr
oe | 7 NOR QUE Ra | Be rs eed were р fas об TR UN т %
ER К KL posite Pau a LUN ies shal AMY Syd NE i ie
nee He D: Ban: к у hig HS GL Hu Dk} MET ! р т + AR E
A à | 4 м SÅ ive ve Sy SAY un) pa
р aie и A я DE :
у N Ave О ia iG LK AN
у Si: )
LS aed LE Jam
KR
due м ECS ra an
а CIE 2 Pe
BEN: | |
w NE be gi, 7 mo we fen:
I KBU ne (å (18 DR Ta р EN Al sd |
1 и 5 Ru a SÅ oe mae А Bel, NA ADR ad re
ER NS JAR ven A! RES ae ey LE mie QUES au
nu 7 у aa FA AGE rhe Pr Un La Må y | я
ER i ze in ы At, fi LUGER ” Ve a i ne ANE A. KR
U И ont AN FR si NEO SDS
at AVG gt NU FES ИХ u K и. Е
Eu
ri о nh Dr, x р и: re. я eet A ee 0 ANER
u Dr ENS may 184: уу y an NND MM UT 4 A aie на ne de AL DTA D
Kan Fi. DR u NUL LEE SAN a KONGES SM Е Mets) 2 Pod) aa, ПОВ
oe, Fi | м. su т ad à hs N и a Ae ae th ve I Ir NE Li
<= IR
NR; TER и ul
DE, ru LUN m Ик aa NR SR tak
ar, PPT | SE Alb io <a i uk
Se a Ha SO 3 ur AL DDR 7 jane ACTE herre TE 13 Rn MY ine DUN L
m . ий 7 ER _ a | NE в ai | [4 on us Le
| > ЗОВ 2 CORE
я LT 5 ТО»
i i у u ER ar WC — ИИ
Е i ud vr Fr 7 р
i u Ts si Г fia
a р a ‘i on
| Eu LL ^ aT: etn wf
LT les el Neve 7
‘a | | х | | > — MR | . 7
LA Nase | DR 4 SM ig Dk | D KR ect AE |
| р \ р ООВ FE
TIRS и LA 1 5 br = | < +
ay 7 | ii Piles on id
nie и...
AN De at u И CA u г cu ~~ 4 и u 1
I.
LIST OF VASCULAR PLANTS
NORTH-EAST GREENLAND (N.OF76 N. LAT.)
COLLECTED BY THE DANMARK-EXPEDITION 1906—1908
BY
С. H. OSTENFELD Амр ANDR. LUNDAGER
WITH PL. I—VI
1910
XLIII, 1.
aL
oe ROR
=
В
a >
gs « oF haj
vr ” 4
_ Ps i
dim . =
2 5 ы
U
‘
=) = 4
ur i”
u A re u
| = ES
2 в
*
у i
i
Ps i i
> у | 5 | |
= u ‘
> u. 5
<
р = в | i
re ==
7 Е >
5 и ie
'
ох = — u
w
KJ a
i
1
aif d
я к В 5
= i
_ i
3 Ра
4 i
aa |
- oe
2 i Ya р i
= р
$ a
? 7 u 5 =
‘
=
:
i
,
i р
м
»
( =
> 7
\
5 ae
re M
2%
_ *
7 и
i =
i
)
у
i “
D
1 i
* =
*
4
gf
INTRODUCTION. <Я
he flora of East Greenland north of 76° М. Lat. has hitherto been
ÅR very little known. The only paper dealing with the flora of
that part of Greenland is a short list, compiled by one of us, of the
few plants gathered by Мг. Е. Korrorp during the Oceanographic
Expedition of the Duke of Orleans in 1905 (see the list of literature,
р. 5).
On the other hand, the flora of the north of East Greenland,
south of 76° №. Lat., is well known through the researches of Sco-
RESBY, JUN., Е. SABINE, CLAVERING and PANSCH, N. Hartz, А. Ц. МАТ-
HORST, P. Dusén, С. Kruuse, etc. Mr. С. Kruuse has compiled
a list of all the data concerning the flora of East Greenland between
75° and 66° 20° N. Lat., and in this paper that list will be quoted
under each species, provided that the species occurs therein.
On comparing our list with that of Kruuse it appears that
only one species is quite new to the flora of East Greenland, viz.
Alsine Rossi, which is new to the flora of the whole of
Greenland. Another species, Draba subcapitata Simm., has not
previously been recorded from East Greenland, but specimens
of it are contained in Kruuse’s collection under other names.
Our list contains 92 species, which is a rather poor number,
but several more species will undoubtedly be found by further
investigations.
The material collected originates mostly from the district around
Danmarks Havn (Harbour), 76° 46’ М. Lat. and 18° 43' W. Long.,
on Germania Land. The area thoroughly investigated extends
from 76° 43’ М. Lat. to 77° М. Lat. and from 17° 30' W. Long. to 21°
W.Long. From outside this area small collections have been brought
home from different points along the coast northwards to Hyde
Fjord on Peary Land and from some places more landward,
especially from Ymers Nunatak in the land-ice.
The greater part of the material has been collected by one of
the authors, A. LUNDAGER, but we are indebted to the sledge-expedi-
]*
4 С. H. OSTENFELD and Амов. LUNDAGER.
tion of Captain J. P. Kocu in the spring of 1907 for the few plants
(19 species) collected along the coast northwards, to another sledge
expedition over the land-ice for the species (26) from Ymers Nu-
natak and Kulhoj, and to different members of the expedition
for scattered specimens from different places, е. 5. to Mr. P. FREUCHEN
for Pedicularis flammea and Carex incurva from Rypefjeld.
The collecting places, arranged from north to south, are given
under each species: —
Peary Land, Fr. Hyde Fjord ... 83° 15’ М. Lat.
Mallemulstjeld ee ee SD 10' - -
Lamberts; Endes er TES as) hc
Bjornesker ze обоев Califa alu =
Cape St-Jacquesy 2 en 77° 36 - - 18° 05° М. Long.
Cape Am eh sn er вые 0 ST DE -
Саре Marie Valdemar:..... car. 120 1850 -
Ymers, Nunatak2 2 en И о LS - -
Germania Land: —!
Kulhoj,
Valley between Annexsg and
Sælsø,
Fuglenæbsfjeld,
Rypefjeld,
Bastionen,
Hvalrosodde,
Dove Bugt,
Moskusoksefjelde,
Lille Snenæs,
Snenæs,
Between 77? — 76° 43' N. Lat.
and 21?— 17° 30' W. Long.
Stormkap,
Harefjeld,
Danmarks Havn,
Basiskær,
Termometerfjeld,
Cape Bismarck
Maroussiay Island 2 22.222 76° 39’ N. Lat. 18° 43’ W. Long.
St. Koldewey Island....... са. 76’ 30 - 18. 50а
The three places whence Мг. KoEFoOED of the Duke of Orleans
Expedition brought plants home are Cape St. Jacques (Ile de France),
Cape Bismarck and Maroussia Island; they are inserted in the list
1 The localities given here have been arranged from NW. to SE.
List of Vascular Plants. 5
of localities above, and in the enumeration they are mentioned
under the species recerded in the list of Mr. Koefoed’s plants.
We have divided the work between us in the following manner:
Mr. A. LuNDAGER undertook the provisional determination of most
of the plants, and has added the localities, the time of flowering
and the other biological notes. Dr. С. H. OSTENFELD has finally
determined the whole material and is responsible for the correctness
of the determination, has written the synonymy, and has added the
systematical notes.
The dates concerning the time of flowering indicate the first
time a species was observed in flower during the years 1907
and 1908.
List of papers dealing with the Vascular Plants of
northern East Greenland.
1. BucHENAU, Е. u. Коске, W. O.: Gefässpflanzen, in Zweite Deutsche Nordpolfahrt,
II. 1872.
2. Duséx, P.: Zur Kenntniss der Gefässpflanzen Östgrönlands. — Bih. Sv. Vet. Akad.
Handl., Stockholm, Bd. 27. III. 3. 1901.
3. Hartz, N.: Fanerogamer og Karkryptogamer fra Nordöst-Grönland, с. 75° — 70°
N. Br. og Angmagsalik, c. 65° 40° N. Br. — Medd. om Gronland, XVIII. 1896.
4. Hooker, W.J.: List of plants from the east coast of Greenland, in Scoresby, jun.
Journ. of a voyage to the northern whale fishery, etc. 1823.
5. HOOKER, W.J.: Some account of arctic plants found by Edw. Sabine. — Transact.
Linn. Soc., XIV, 1825.
6. KRUUSE, С.: List of the phanerogams and vascular cryptogams found on the,
coast (75° — 66° 20’ N. Lat.) of East Greenland. — Medd. om Gronland, XXX, 1905.
7. OSTENFELD, С. H.: Plantes récoltées à la côte nord-est du Grönland, in Duc
d'Orléans, Croisière océanographique dans la mer du Grönland en 1905. Resultats
scientifiques. Bruxelles, 1908.
General works.
LANGE, Лон. Conspectus Florae Groenlandicae. — Meddelelser om Grönland, Ш,
Kjøbenhavn. 1880.
STENF He ‘а Arctica. Part I. Copenhagen 1902. i
OSTENFELD, C. H. Flora Arctica I g PN CA/
NT 008 N
4 SO о
igs /S See
Mr
SYSTEMATICAL LIST OF THE VASCULAR PLANTS.
Polypodiaceae.
Cystopteris Bernh.
1. Cystopteris fragilis (L.) Bernh., Vers. Anordn. Farnkr., 1806,
р: 27; Gelert. tin Ostenteld )PINArctaaba peo:
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 206.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, and landward.
Note. Owing to the unfavourable nature of the surface this species
occurs only very sparingly around Danmarks Науп; but more landward
where the higher hills afford more favourable conditions, specimens were
found about 25 cm. high.
Woodsia R. Br.
2. Woodsia glabella R. Br., in Richardson, App. Franklin Journ.,
р. 754, 1823; W.ilvensis, var. glabella Trautv., Acta Ноги Petropol.,
X 18517, р. 546; б@егь im Ostenfeld Ply A rer al, 1902797:
Kruuse, East Greenland, р. 207.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld, р. 10, 1908).
We think it more convenient to give this Woodsia as a separate
species, and not as a form. of W. ilvensis (cf. H. G. Simmons, Sec.
arct. exp. Fram, 1898—1902, No. 2, 1906, p. 184). It is an interesting
fact that only this species has been found by the Danmark Expedi-
tion, and it seems that W. ilvensis does not occur as far north, but it
has been brought home from the Sabine Island a little to the south,
and consequently we are just north of its northern limit.
Loc. Germania Land, in crevices of the cliffs and hidden between
stones on open rocky-flats.
Equisetaceae.
Kquisetum L.
3. Equisetum arvense L. Sp. pl., 1753, p. 1061; Gelert, in Osten-
feld, Е]. Arct., 15519023200:
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 208.
List of Vascular Plants. ZI
The specimens collected bear simultaneously, in July, both fertile
stems with ripe spores, and sterile stems; they may be named f.
riparia (Fr.) Milde (Monogr. Equiset., tab. 1, figs. 9—10).
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn.
Note. Is rather rare and occurs always in clayey soil, excepting a
single specimen of a peculiar form which was found on “Bastionen” in a
sheltered place (June 27th 1908).
4. Equisetum variegatum Schleich., Catal. Plant. Helvet., 1807,
pee? Gelert, in Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct. 1, 1902; p.9
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 207.
Small sterile specimens belonging to f. anceps Milde (Verhandl.
zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XIV, p. 14, 1864) have been collected, but only
in one single spot.
Loc. Germania Land: Moskusoksefjeldene in a dried-up tarn on a
gravelly hill.
Lycopodiaceae.
Lycopodium L.
5. Lycopodium selago L. Sp. pl., 1753, р. 1102; Gelert, in Osten-
feld, Fl. Arct:, Т, 1902, р. 12.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 205.
The specimens collected belong to f. appressa Desv.
Гос. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn. Very rare and always in the
Cassiope-association; snow-covered during winter.
Liliaceae.
Tofieldia Huds.
6. Tofieldia coccinea Richards., App. Franklin Journ., 1823,
р. 736; Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, р. 32.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 187.
Seems to be a very rare plant in East Greenland, which is its
eastern limit of distribution.
Loc. Germania Land: Dove Bugt.
Flow. July 11th 1908.
Note. Only one specimen was flowering. Snow-covered during the
winter.
Juncaceae.
Juneus Г.
7. Juncus castaneus Sm., Fl. Brit., I, 1800, p. 383; Gelert, in
Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, p. 24.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 188.
Loc. Germania Land: below Termometerfjeld at Danmarks Havn,
along a little water-course.
Flow. Aug. 3154 07. , С! LAN
А а.
/ CN © os HON
x
AA
8 С. Н. OSTENFELD and ANDR. LUNDAGER.
8. Juncus biglumis L. Sp. pl., 1753, p. 328; Gelert, in Ostenfeld,
Fl. Arct., I, 1902, р. 25.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 187.
Loc. Ymers Nunatak; Germania Land, rather common; St. Koldewey.
Flow. June 27th 08.
Note. Is the most common Juncus-species within the area.
9. Juncus triglumis L. Sp. pl. 1753, p. 328; Gelert in Ostenfeld,
Fl. Arct., 1902, р. 25.
Kruuse, East Greenland, р. 188.
Only collected in two localities. The specimens must be referred
to the chestnut-coloured form: f. Copelandi Buchenau (Zweite Deutsche
Nordpolarfahrt, 1869—70, Botanik, p. 51).
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn.
Flow. July 15th 08.
Note. It grows in humid places, e.g. in hollows with stagnant water.
Associated with Carex pulla and Arctagrostis latifolia.
Luzula D. C.
10. Luzula arcuata (Wahlenb.) Sw., var. confusa Lindeb., in
Botan. Notis., Lund, 1855, p. 9; Gelert, in Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, р. 29.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 189.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld, 1908, p. 9).
The rich material collected shows that the plant is rather vari-
able; some of the specimens approach the principal form, L. arcuata
(Wb.) Sw., which has not been found in Greenland.
Loc. Lambert Land; Cape St. Jaques; Ymers Nunatak; Cape Marie Val-
demar; Germania Land: common around Danmarks Hayn.
Flow. Beginning of July.
11. Luzula nivalis (Læstad.) Beurlin, in Botan. Notiser, Lund,
1853, P.55; Gelert, in Ostenteld VE wArct 111902, р. 30:
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 190.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape St. Jacques (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 9).
Loc. Саре Marie Valdemar; Germania Land: Stormkap, not common;
St. Koldewey.
Cyperaceae.
Eriophorum L.
12. Eriophorum Scheuchzeri Hoppe, Bot. Taschenb., 1800,
р. 104, App. t. 7; Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct. I, 1902, p.41; Fernald, in Rho-
dora, 7, 1905, p. 82.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 190.
Loc. Germania Land, common. It forms associations at the margins
of tarns and pools.
List of Vascular Plants. 9
13. Eriophorum polystachyum L., Sp. pl., 1753, р. 52; Osten-
feld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, p. 53; Fernald, Rhodora, 7, 1905, р. 88.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 191.
The specimens collected all belong to the high-arctic (and high-
alpine) form: Г. elegans Bab. (Man., 1843, р. 333; cf. Fernald, I. c.,
р. 89).
Гос. Germania Land, very common.
Flow. At the end of June.
Note. A prominent species which occurs everywhere, when there are
gently-sloping sandy surfaces and water flowing from snow-drifts.
Cobresia Willd.
14. Cobresia Bellardii (All.) Degland., in Loisel., Fl. gall., II,
1807, р. 626; Kükenthal, Caricoideae, in Das Pflanzenreich, 1909,
р. 37; Elyna Bellardi (All.) К. Koch, in Linnzea 1848, р. 616; Osten-
feld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, р. 44.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 191.
Гос. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, rather common.
Flow. Latter half of June.
Note. In exposed places it forms dense tufts like those of Сагех nar-
dina; there it is often snowless during winter and distinctly wind-affected.
In more sheltered places which are snow-covered during winter and rather
wet during summer, it forms grass-sward in association with Carex rupestris.
15. Cobresia bipartita (All) Dalla Torre, Anleit. Best.
Alpenpfl., 1882, р. 330; Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, p. 44; С. caricina
Willd.; Kükenthal, Caricoideae, in Das Pflanzenreich, 1909, p. 45.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 191.
Loc. Germania Land, in the depression W. of Termometerfjeld at Dan-
marks Havn; only one tuft found.
Carex L.
16. Carex nardina Fries, Mantissa II, 1839, р. 55; Kükenthal,
Caricoideae, in Das Pflanzenreich, 1909, p. 70; Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct. I,
1902, p. 48.
Kruuse, East Greenland, 1905, р. 191.
Loc. Ymers Nunatak; Cape Marie Valdemar; Germania Land: Dan-
marks Havn, very common.
Flow. End of June.
Note. Often snowless during winter.
17. Carex rupestris All., Fl. pedemont., II, 1785, р. 264, tab. 92,
fig. 1; Kükenthal, Caricoideae, in Das Pflanzenreich, 1909, р. 86;
Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, p. 86.
Kruuse, East Greenland, 1905, p. 192.
10 С. H. OSTENFELD and ANDR, LUNDAGER.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, Snenæs, not common.
Flow. June 25th 08.
Note. Prefers sheltered localities, snow-covered during winter.
18. Carex incurva Lightf., Fl. scotic. II, 1777, р. 544, tab. 24;
Kükenthal, Caricoideae, in Das Pflanzenreich, 1909, р. 113; Osten-
feld Е Arret, 1,01902,59349:
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 193.
The specimens collected belong to the f. erecta О. Е. Lang (Linnea,
24, 1851, p.507) with stiff and erect culms.
Loc. Germania Land: found only at Rypefjeld.
19. Carex rigida Good. in Transact. Linn. Soc. II, 1794, p. 193,
tab. 22; Kükenthal, Caricoideae, in Das Pflanzenreich, 1909, р. 299;
Ostenfeld ЕТ. Arct., 1,1902 pre
Kruuse, East Greenland, 1905, р. 195.
The specimens collected at Rypefjeld are in several respects
different from the type and resemble C. aquatilis, var. stans; but the
anatomy of the leaves corresponds better with that of C. rigida,
although the papillae on the under side of the leaves are very
slightly developed, not so conspicuous as in typical С. га. The
terminal spikelet bears female flowers in its lower part.
Also the specimens from Moskusoksefjelde bear some resem-
blance to C. aquatilis, var. stans.
Loc. Germania Land: Rypefjeld, Moskusoksefjelde, Lille Snenæs.
Flow. Beginning of July.
20. Carex salina Whbg., var. subspathacea (Wormskj.) Tu-
ckerm., Enum. Method., 1843, р. 12; Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902,
р. 73; С. subspathacea Wormskj., Fl. dan., 1816, tab. 1530; Какеп ай,
Caricoideae, in Das Pflanzenreich, 1909, p. 361.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 194.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn in only one place, viz. Basis-
keer, among damp moss and together with Pleuropogon.
Flow. July 17th 07.
21. Carex misandra R.Br., Chloris Melvill., 1823, p. 25; Osten-
feld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, p. 89; С. fuliginosa, 2, misandra (В. Br.) О. Е.
Lang; Kükenthal, Caricoideae, in Das Pflanzenreich, 1909, р. 557.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 194.
In the typical specimens the colour of the scales of the female
spikelets is very dark, nearly black (“atrofusca”), but in a single
series of specimens from Danmarks Havn it is light brown (pale
chestnut-brown); this form (f. ochrolochin Ostf., nov. forma) corre-
sponds with f. ochrostachys Schur of the true С. fuliginosa Schkuhr
(cf. Kükenthal, 1. с.); it has been mentioned Бу W. J. Ноокев (Bot.
List of Vascular Plants. 1151
Append. Parry 2nd. voy., 1825, p. 406) under the name C. fuliginosa,
2, squamis capsulisque раШае fuscis.
Loc. Bjornesker; Germania Land, common; St. Koldewey.
Flow. June 25th 08.
Note. The most common of all the sedges in the area investigated.
22. Carex pulla Good., Transact. Linn. Soc., III, 1797, p. 78, tab.
14; Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, р. 95; С. vesicaria, subsp. saxatilis
(L.) Almq.; Kükenthal, Caricoideae, in Das Pflanzenreich, 1909, р. 727.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 196.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn and landward around Dove Bugt.
Flow. End of July.
Note. The most common sedge in the bog, grows together with Erio-
phorum polystachyum; very conspicuous on account of its fresh-green
colour.
Gramineae.
Hierochloé Gmel.
23. Hierochloé alpina (Liljebl.) Roem. & Schult., Syst. Veget.,
wou 1817, pols; Gelert, in Ostenfeld, Fl.) Атсь 1902, 9497:
Savastana alpina Scribn., Mem. Torr. Bot. Club, V, 1894, p. 34.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 197.
Loc. Germania Land, common everywhere.
Flow. June 16th 07; June 24th 08.
Note. High and vigorous tufts often mark the burrows of the lemmings
and show at a distance where such are to be found.
Alopecurus L.
24. Alopecurus alpinus Sm., Engl. Bot., 1802, tab. 1126; Fl. Brit.
Ill, 1804, р. 1386; Gelert, in Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, р. 99.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 196.
Duc d’Orleans, Саре St. Jacques (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 9).
All the specimens collected belong to the f. mutica Sommerf.,
with awns not projecting beyond the pales.
Loc. Lambert Land; Bjorneskærene; Germania Land, very common.
Flow. June 22nd 07.
Aira L.
25a. Aira caespitosa L., var. arctica (Trin.) Simmons, Rep.
Arct. Exp. Fram, 1898—1902, No. 2, 1906, р. 173; A. arctica Trinius;
A. brevifolia (В. Br.) Lange, Сопзр. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 163; Deschampsia
brevifolia В. Br., Chloris Melvill., 1825, р. 33.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 198.
In his memoir on the Ellesmere Land flora Dr. Н. G. Simmons
has fully elucidated the synonymy of the high-arctic Aira, which
В. BROWN A. brevifolia. a
wn has named A. brevif АТН,
VÆV 008 ASIEN
D NA
fa | : А c\
12 С. Н. OSTENFELD and ANDR. LUNDAGER.
The material of Aira brought home by the Danmark Expedition
is very interesting in many points. Some of the numbers (1283,
1287, 1609, 1620) answer well to A. caespitosa, var. arctica as H. G.
SIMMONS regards it, and must bear that name. It is a low, but
rather coarse plant, with short, often somewhat involute leaves, and
coarse more or less inflated sheaths, those of the culms bearing
sometimes very short blades, sometimes almost none (see PI. I and
Das):
Trinius (Sp. Gram. icon. et descript., Ш, 1836, Petropolis, PI.
256, А et В) has given very good figures of this plant, and his
analysis of the spikelet (Pl. 256, 1—8) is also correct. The glumes
are shorter than or nearly as long as the spikelet, with tips bitten
off; awns about as long as the pales.
Besides this variety the Danmark Expedition has collected an-
other still more aberrant form of the caespitosa-group which must
be referred to: —
25b. А. caespitosa L. var. pumila Ledeb., Fl. Ross., IV, 1853,
р. 422; A. brevifolia Nathorst, Ofv. К. Sv. Vet. Akad. Förh., 1884,
p.27; А. flexuosa, var., Simmons, I. c., 1906, р. 175, et ibid., № 16
1909, p. 105.
Trinius (1. c., Pl. 256, С) has given a description and a rather
good illustration of it, based upon a specimen from Kamtchatka,
and Simmons (1. с.) describes its habit and characters very well.
Trinius’s description runs as follows: — Fig. С plantulam
depingit pumilam, caespites densissimos formantem, panicula parva,
angusta, foliis angustissimis, nunc planiusculis nunc fere capillaceo-
involutis, brevissimisque insignem, spiculis vero omnino cum A. cae-
spitosa communi congruentem.
It forms dense mats or tufts with numerous very thin, often
involute and setaceous leaves, which are much softer than those of
var. arctica, the culms are low, but generally longer than the leaves;
the culm leaves are almost without blade, and with large sheaths (see
Pl. II, fig. 2 and Pl. III). The branches of the panicle are thin and usually
not so contracted as in var. arctica. The glumes are long and acute,
as long as or nearly as long as the spikelet, not white-membraneous in
the margins; awns about as long as the pales, straight or slightly twisted.
In many of its characters it comes near A. flexuosa L., but
I cannot follow Simmons when he regards it as a form of that
species; the characters of the spikelet, especially of the awns makes
it a necessity to refer it to the caespitosa-group, and I follow LEDEBOUR
and TRINIUS in this point. It appears always to grow along the
margins of ponds or of tarns, and perhaps some of its peculiar cha-
racters are adaptations to the habitat.
List of Vascular Plants. 13
It is known, moreover from N. E. Greenland, from N. W.
Greenland! (Ivsugigsok, A. G. Nathorst), Ellesmereland (Fram Harbour,
Н. G. Simmons) and Kamtchatka (Trinius), while the var. arctica is
more widely distributed over the whole Arctic region.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Hayn, rather common.
Note. It grows in clayey and wet soil at the margins of tarns which
dry up during summer, develops late, and is not seen in flower before August.
Phippsia R. Br.
26. Phippsia algida (Soland.) В. Br., Chloris Melvill., 1823,
рой. Gelert, an Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, р. 101.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 200.
Duc d’Orleans, Саре St. Jacques (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 9).
Loc. Mallemukfjeldet; Lambert Land; Germania Land, rather com-
mon; St. Koldewey.
Flow. June 27th 08.
Note. Grows on flat sandy shores and around small tarns and bogs on
rocky-flats.
Arctagrostis Griseb.
27. Arctagrostis latifolia (В. Br.) Griseb., in Ledeb., Fl. Ross.,
IV, 1853, р. 434; Gelert, in Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, р. 107.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 200.
Loc. Germania Land, common.
Flow. July 21st 07.
Note. It flowers rarely and has not been found with ripe seed; often
the uppermost part of the panicle begins to wither before the flowering has
begun. It grows in bogs and at margins of ponds. Leaves as much as
95mm. broad.
Trisetum Pers.
28. Trisetum spicatum (L.) P. Richter, Pl. Europ. I, 1890, p. 59;
Т. subspicatum (L.) P. Beauv.; Gelert in Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, p.110.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 199.
Loc. Germania Land, rather rare.
Note. Prefers sheltered localities, as also pointed out by Н. G. Sim-
mons with regard to individuals occurring in Ellesmere Land; snow-covered
during winter.
Pleuropogon R. Br.
29. Pleuropogon Sabinei R. Br., Chloris Melvill., 1823, p. 31,
tab. D; Gelert, in Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, р. 116.
1 To this variety I refer also a very interesting Aira collected in West Greenland
on the Island of Disco (N. W. coast, Giesecke’s valley, 1902, Nr. 307) by M. P.
Ровзио. It is much higher than the true var. pumila (culms 20—30 cm. high),
but has the setaceous leaves in common with it, also the characters of the
spikelets agree with it. In habit it comes very near А. setacea Huds. (А.
discolor Thuill.; A. uliginosa Weihe).
14 С. H. OSTENFELD and ANDR. LUNDAGER.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 199.
Loc. Germania Land, rather common in coast regions and landward.
Flow. July 17th 07.
Note. It occurs both as f. lerrestris Simm. and f. aquatica Simm. with
leaves more than 20 cm. long. (cf. H. G. Simmons, Rep. Sec. Nom. Arct. Exp.
Fram, 1898—1902, No. 2, 1906, p. 170). Is a very conspicuous and characteristic
plant in bogs and swamps.
Glyceria В. Br.
30. Glyceria angustata (R. Br.) E. Fries, Mantissa III, 1842,
р. 176; Gelert in Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, р. 128.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 202.
The whole of the rich material of Glyceria (the following species
excepted) must be referred to Gl. angustata, although it varies greatly
in many respects, e. g. in the shape of the panicle, the flat or convolute
leaves. Quite another question is, whether it is possible to draw a
boundary line between this species and G. distans (L.) Wahlenb. in
its arctic aspect.
Loc. Hyde Fjord in Peary Land; Mallemukfjeld; Kulhoj (the only
occurring plant on the moraine toward the border of the ice); Germania Land,
common.
Note. Occurs often in beds of water-courses, but most frequently in
wet clayey soil, where the tufts spread themselves, and the culms and leaves
occur closely pressed to the bottom.
31. Glyceria maritima (Huds.) Wahlenb., f. reptans (Hartm.)
Simmons, Rep. Sec. Arct. Exp. Fram, 1898—1902, No. 2, 1906,
р. 159; G. mar. f. vilfoidea (Anderss.) Gelert, in Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct.,
521902772126: |.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 201.
Loc. Germania Land, rather common.
Note. Grows on low, flat sea-shores and forms occasionally a nearly
coherent grass-sward. Only found sterile.
Poa EL:
32. Poa pratensis L., f. colpodea (Th. Fries) Gelert, in Osten-
feld, EI? Arch. 1902 2222.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 204.
The few specimens collected bear viviparous spikelets in a con-
tracted panicle and agree well with Spitzbergen specimens named
P. colpodea Th. Fr. (Öfv. К. Sv. Vet. Förh., Stockholm, 1869, р. 138)
by Tu. Fries himself.
Loc. Germania Land: Hvalrosodde.
33. Poa cenisia All., Auct. Fl. Pedem., 1789, p. 40; Gelert, in
Ostenteld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, р. 122.
List of Vascular Plants. 15
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 204.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 9).
As usual, this species is rather variable. The tufted form occurs
among others.
Loc. Cape Saint-Jacques; Cape Marie Valdemar; Germania Land: Dan-
marks Науп; St. Koldewey.
34. Poa abbreviata R. Br., Chloris Melvill., 1823, p.29; Gelert
in Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., J, 1902, р. 124.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 202.
Duc d’Orleans, Maroussia Isl. (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 9).
Rich material of this high-arctic species was brought home.
It is evidently a well-defined species, and it is hard to understand
how Kruuse (1. с.) can “look on it as a high-arctic form of P. [аха.”
Loc. Hyde Fjord in Peary Land; Mallemukfjeld; Lambert Land;
Cape Saint-Jacques; Ymers Nunatak; Germania Land: Danmarks Науп,
common everywhere; St. Koldewey.
35. Poa glauca М. Vahl, Flora dan., 1790, fase. 17, р. 3, tab. 964;
Gelert, in Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, 1902, р. 124; P. caesia Sm., Fl. Brit.,
I, 1800, p. 103.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 203.
Loc. Ymers Nunatak; Germania Land: Dove Bugt, Lille Snenæs, Dan-
marks Hayn.
Festuca L.
36. Festuca ovina L., subsp. brevifolia (R. Br.) Hackel, Botan.
Centralbl., 1881, р. 406; Gelert, in Ostenfeld, Fl. Arct., I, р. 130, 1902.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 204.
Duc d’Orleans, Саре St. Jacques (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 10).
I think it is allowable to refer all the specimens to subsp.
brevifolia (R. Br.) Hack., but I must admit that I have not been
able to find any definite distinguishing character between this form
and subsp. supina Schur, as it has been defined by Scandinavian
authors. In one locality the species was viviparous (dunes at
Dove Bust).
Loc. Germania Land, rather common.
Note. It prefers fairly sheltered places and is usually snow-covered
during winter.
Salicaceae.
Salix L.
37. Salix arctica Pall., Fl. Ross. II, 1790, р. 86; A. N. Lundstrom,
Weiden Nowaja Semljas, Upsala, 1877, р. 31, fig. 1; 5. groenlandica
(Anders.) Lundstr., 1. c., р. 36; Lange. Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880,
р. 108; 5. Brownii (Anders.) Lundstr., 1. с., р. 37.
16 С. H. OSTENFELD and ANDR. LUNDAGER.
Kruuse, East Greenland, р. 186.
Duc d’Orleans, Саре St. Jacques, Maroussia Isl. and Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld,
1908, p. 8).
The material brought home varies greatly with regard to the
shape of the leaves. The most common form is var. Brownii Anders.
with — broadly obovate leaves, but the extreme form, the broad-
leaved, true 5. arctica Pallas was also found, as well as the narrow-
leaved var. groenlandica Anders.
‘ Loc. Hyde Fjord (var. Brownii); Mallemukfjeld; Bjornesker; Cape Marie
Valdemar; Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, very common, but always as
an “espalier-plant.” 1
Flow. Middle of June.
38. Salix herbacea L. Sp. pl. 1753, р. 1018; Lange, Consp. Fl.
Groenl., 1880, p. 106.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 186.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Hayn, in one place.
Flow. July 3rd 08.
Note. Was found in a boggy moor together with Empetrum and Cas-
siope; only female specimens were observed.
Polygonaceae.
Polygonum L.
39. Polygonum viviparum L. Sp. pl. 1753, p. 360; Lange,
Consp. Fl. Groenl., р. 105, 1880.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 185.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 8).
This species has been collected only around Danmarks Науп.
Two forms occur: —
(1) a form with both bulbils and flowers, and with hairs on the
under side of the leaves
(2) a form with bulbils only, and with leaves glabrous on the
under side.
Loc. Germania Land, rather common.
Flow. July 7th 08.
Oxyria Hill.
40. Oxyria digyna (L.) Hill, Hort. Kew., 1768; Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., 1860, p. 105.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 185.
Duc d Orleans, Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 8).
Loc. Germania Land, common everywhere.
7 WaRMING’S term for plants with prostrate, outspread growth.
List of Vascular Plants. 17
Caryophyllaceae.
Melandrium Rohl.
41. Melandrium apetalum (L.) Fenzl, in Ledeb., Fl. Ross., I,
1842, р. 326; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 19.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 154.
The specimens collected belong to f. arctica Th. Fries (Оу. К.
Sv. Vet. Akad. Forh., 1869, p. 133) with petals projecting beyond
the calyx.
Loc. Bjorneskerene; Germania Land, rather common.
Flow. June 29th 08.
Note. Grows by preference in humid places near lake-margins or run-
ning water; snow-covered during winter.
42. Melandrium affine J. Vahl, Fl. dan., fasc. 40, 1843, p. 5;
М. involucratum (Cham. & Schltd), 2, affine Rohrb.; Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 20.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 154.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld, 1908, p. 5).
This species appears always to be easily distinguishable from
М. apetalum and М. triflorum, and its white petals and more or less
white calyx (with dark veins and teeth) are very characteristic.
Loc. Germania Land, rather common.
Flow. Beginning of July.
43. Melandrium triflorum (R. Br.) J. Vahl, Fl. Dan., fase. 40,
1843, p.5, tab. 2356; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 20.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 154.
Petals mostly pink or rose-coloured; calyx with a dense cover-
ing of long glandular hairs.
Loc. Germania Land, common; Maroussia Isl.
Flow. June 22nd 08.
Note. Grows on rocky-flats where high, vigorous specimens mark the
burrows of lemmings.
Silene L.
44. Silene acaulis L. Sp. pl., ed. 2, vol. I, 1762, р. 603; Lange,
Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 19.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 153.
Loc. Germania Land, common everywhere.
Flow. July 3rd 07; June 24th 08.
Arenaria L. (ex pte).
45. Arenaria ciliata L., var. humifusa (Wahlenb.) Hartm. Handb.
Skand. Flora, ed. 11, р. 243, 1879; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880,
0: 27.
SET de
lo
18 С. Н. OSTENFELD and ANDR. LUNDAGER.
Kruuse, East Greenland, р. 157.
Гос. Germania Land, common.
Flow. June 29th 08.
Note. Grows on gravelly, rather flat ground near the shore. It forms
dense and large tufts with numerous flowers which attract the observer by
their snow-white colour and by their strong odour, — so rare in arctic regions.
Alsine Wahlenb.
46. Alsine verna (L.) Wahlenb., Fl. Lappon., 1812, p. 128; Lange,
Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 24.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 156.
Most of the specimens collected may be referred to f. rubella
Wahlenb. (1. с., р. 128, pro sp.), but the forms seem to be indistin-
guishable.
Loc. Ymers Nunatak; Germania Land, rather common on table-lands;
snow-covered during winter.
Flow. June 21st 08.
47. Alsine biflora (L.) Wahlenb., Fl. Lapp. 1812, p. 128; Lange,
Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 28.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 155.
Гос. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, in only one place.
Flow. July 17th 08; no flowers in 1907.
Note. It was found on a sheltered, humid slope facing south, near the
sea-shore.
48. Alsine Rossii (R. Br.) Fenzl, Verbr. d. Alsin., Wien, 1833, p. 18;
Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, p. 25: Simmons, Medd. Grönl., vol.
26, 1904, p. 470; Simmons, Sec. Arct. Exp. Fram 1898—1902, No. 2,
1906, р. 116, tab. 6, figs. 4—6; Arenaria Rossii В. Br., Chloris Melvill.,
1823, p. 14.
As Simmons (1904, 1. с.) had proved that Tayror’s records of
A. Rossii from West Greenland were improbable, it was a find of
great phyto-geographical importance when the Danmark Expedition
brought home a specimen of this species from М. Е. Greenland, thus
giving the first certain record of it as a Greenland plant.
The small bits collected are sterile (see fig. 1), but by comparison
with Ellesmere Land specimens not the slightest doubt as to its
identification remains.
Loc. Germania Land: Hvalrosodde.
Sagina L.
49. Sagina intermedia Fenzl, in Ledeb., Fl. Ross., I, 1842, р. 339;
Simmons, Sec. Arct. Exp. Fram 1898—1902, No. 2, 1906, p. 119;
5. nivalis (Lindbl.) Fries, Mantissa 3, 1842, p. 31 ex pte; Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 22.
List of Vascular Plants. 19
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 155.
Loc. Germania Land, rather rare.
Flow. July 17th 08.
Note. Grows in the black clay at the bottom of dried-up tarns and also
near the shore, when the ground has been covered with snow till late in
the summer.
Stellaria L.
50. Stellaria humifusa Rottböll, Kiöbenhavn, Selsk. Skrifter,
Deel 10, 1770, р. 447, tab. 4, fig. 14.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 157.
Loc. Germania Land, common everywhere near the sea-shore.
Flow. Middle of July.
Fig. 1. Alsine Rossii (В. Br.) Fenzl. (?lı nat. size).
51. Stellaria longipes Goldie, Edinb. Philos. Journ. 6, 1822,
р. 327; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 29.
Kruuse, East Greenland, 1905, p. 157.
Рис d’Orleans, Cape St. Jacques and Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 6).
Loc. Hyde Fjord (Peary Land); Bjorneskær (Г. humilis Fnzl.); Cape
Marie Valdemar, Germania Land: Kulhoj, Danmarks Науп, common еуегу-
where; St. Koldewey.
Flow. July 10th 07.
Cerastium L.
52. Cerastium alpinum L. Sp. pl. 1753, p. 628; Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 31.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 158.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape St. Jacques, Maroussia Isl. and Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld,
1908, p. 6).
Numerous quite typical specimens (some of them very hairy)
were collected.
20 С. Н. OSTENFELD and ANDR. LUNDAGER.
Besides the principal form the curious sterile glabrous, small-
leaved, densely cæspitose form which Simmons (Sec. Arc. Exp. Fram
1898—1902, No. 2, 1906, p. 122) has named f. pulvinata Simm., and
which has erroneously been taken for С. Edmondstonii, var. caespito-
sum Malmer. (cf. Kruuse, |. c., р. 159) was found around Danmarks Havn.
Loc. Mallemukfjeld; Bjornesker; Ymers Nunatak; Germania Land:
valley between Annexso and Selso; Danmarks Havn, common everywhere;
St. Koldewey.
Flow. June 20th 07; June 21st 08.
Note. In low-lying, humid soil it occurs as large tufts with decumbent
flowering stems, pressed close to the ground. When the flowering plant in
the autumn is suddenly covered with snow which remains during the winter,
all the parts of it are so well preserved, that in the spring when the snow
has melted, they appear again and apparently are as fresh as if they had
quite recently unfolded themselves.
Ranunculaceae.
Ranuneulus L.
53. Ranunculus glacialis L. Sp. pl., 1753, p. 553; Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., 1880, p. 54.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 167.
Loc. Germania Land, common.
Flow. June 22nd 07, June 18th 08.
Note. Around small ponds where the snow has melted early, it is one
of the spring flowers. On the other hand, where the snow-drifts are peren-
nial and irrigate the lower-lying, evenly sloping ground, it follows the drifts
as they melt and flowers here till the frost begins towards the end of August
or in the beginning of September.
54. Ranunculus sulphureus Soland. in Phipps, Voy. N. Pole,
London 1774, p.202; В. altaicus Laxman; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl.,
1880, p. 56.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 168.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape St. Jacques (Ostenfeld, 1908, p. 6).
The Expedition has brought home very rich material of this
species, while R. nivalis L., which has been recorded as far north
as Little Pendulum Isl., is completely absent from the collection.
Loc. Bjorneskærene; Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, common.
Flow. June 18th 07, June 15th 08.
55. Ranunculus pygmaeus Wahlenb., Fl. Lappon., 1812, р. 157;
Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 55.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 167.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, rather common.
Flow. July 9th 08.
Note. Prefers sheltered localities with clayey soil.
List of Vascular Plants. 21
56. Ranunculus hyperboreus Rottböll, Kiöbenhavn, Selsk.
Skrifter, Deel 10, 1770, p. 458, tab. 4, fig. 16; Lange, Consp. FI.
Groenl., р.55, 1880.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 168.
In Maroussia Isl. typical specimens were collected in fairly
large quantities, and a single specimen occurred from Danmarks
Havn.
At the border of a small tarn near Danmarks Havn a curious
Fig. 2. Ranunculus hyperboreus Rottb., var. (Nat. size).
little form (fig. 2) was found among moss. At first sight it greatly
recalls R. pygmaeus Whb. The stem is much shorter than is usual
in R. hyperboreus and has only 1—2 rooting nodes, or is, in smaller
specimens, not at all creeping; the leaf-blades are deeply 3—5-lobed
and the lobes are broadly linear or oblong. Perhaps it is a hybrid
between the two species.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn; Maroussia Isl.
Flow. July 21st 08.
iw)
bo
С. Н. OSTENFELD and ANDR. LUNDAGER.
Papaveraceae.
Рарауег L.
57. Papaver radicatum Rottböll, Kiöbenhavn, Selsk. Skrifter,
Deel 10, 1770, р. 455, tab. 8, fig. 24; Papaver nudicaule, Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 52.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 166.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape St. Jacques, Maroussia Isl. and Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld,
1908, p. 6).
Often with white petals (f. albiflora, Lange, 1. с.).
Loc. Hyde Fjord (Peary Land); Mallemukfjeld; Lambert Land; Bjor-
neskær; Ymers Nunatak; Cape Marie Valdemar, Germania Land: Danmarks
Havn, very common.
Flow. June 27th 07, June 20th 08.
Cruciferae.
Cochlearia L.
58. Cochlearia officinalis L., var. groenlandica (L.) Gelert, in
Andersson & Hesselman, Bih. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., 26, III, No. 1,
1900, p. 37; С. groenlandica (ex pte) et С. fenestrata, Lange, Consp. Fl.
Groenl., 1880, рр. 34—36.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 160.
The material collected belongs to var. groenlandica as defined
by GELERT (J.c.) and a part of it to its form f. minor (Lge.) Gelert.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, common.
Flow. June 23rd 08.
Note. It thrives very well, sheltered by the stones on a level sea-shore.
In late summer it is often found landward in dried-up water-courses, and
then as f. minor.
Eutrema В. Br.
59. Eutrema Edwardsii В. Br., Chloris Melvill., 1823, р. 9,
tab. A; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 46.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 164.
Collected in two places, but only one specimen gathered in
each place.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn.
Flow. July 9th 07.
Cardamine L.
60. Cardamine pratensis L. Sp. pl., 1753, p. 656; Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 48.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 165.
List of Vascular Plants. 25
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn.
Note. Only found in two places. A single specimen was found in
flower in Aug. 1907, but no fruit-setting was observed when the frost began
on Aug. 25th.
61. Cardamine bellidifolia L. Sp. pl., 1753, p. 654; Lange,
Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, p. 47.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 164.
Duc d’Orleans, Саре St. Jacques (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 6).
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, rather common.
Flow. June 27th 08.
Lesquerella S. Wats.
62. Lesquerella arctica (Worm-
skj.) S. Watson, Proc. Am. Acad.
1888, vol. 23, р. 254; Alyssum arcti-
cum Wormskj., Fl. Dan., fasc. 26,
1818, о. 3, tab. 1520; Vesicaria arc-
Нса Richards.; Lange, Consp. Fl.
Groenl., 1880, p. 34.
Kruuse, East Greenland. p. 159.
Loc. Germania Land: valley
between Annexso and Sælsø, Hvalros-
odde, Dove Bugt, Snenæs, Stormkap.
Flow. June 22nd 08.
N ote. Members of this species were
not found around Danmarks Havn, ex-
cepting one specimen from Harefjeld.
Further landward from Stormkap to
Dove Bugt very common in dry, gravelly
soil, usually as isolated specimens.
But it was found here and there in
tufts of grasses and thrives well in
such conditions, at least the leaves
become larger. Only once found in an
association of Cassiope. It has the
same distribution as Potentilla pulchella,
and like this species it develops into
a peculiar “pillar-form” (fig. 3) when growing on the wind-side of gravelly
slopes, where it is snowless in winter. The “pillar” consists of freely pro-
jecting stems covered with old, wind-blown remains of leaves, and at the top
a small rosette of green leaves which protect the buds during winter.
Fig. 3. Lesquerella arctica (Wormskj.)
$. Wats., “pillar.” (14/2 nat. size).
Draba L.
63a. Draba hirta Г. Sp. pl. ed. 2, vol. II, 1763, p. 897; Lange,
Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 42.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 163.
The true D. hirta seems to be very rare in the area investigated,
24 С. H. OSTENFELD and ANDR. LUNDAGER.
only some few and young specimens have been referred to it. It is
replaced by the following variety.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, Snenæs.
Flow. June 29th 07.
Note. At Snenæs well developed specimens were found near the bur-
row of a lemming; the 25 cm. high, year-old stems had borne fruit abund-
antly, but now on June 25th 08 the flower-buds were not open.
63 b. Draba hirta L., var. arctica (J. Vahl), $. Watson, Proc.
Am. Acad. Sc., vol. 23,1 1888;''D. aretica”J. Vahl, Fl’ Dan. asc 99
1840, p. 5, tab. 2294; Lange, Сопзр. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 43.
Kruuse, East Greenland. p. 163.
Very common in the area and varies greatly, but is never as
high as the authentic specimens from West Greenland.
Loc. Ymers Nunatak; Germania Land: Hvalrosodde, Dove Bugt, Dan-
marks Havn.
Flow. June 16th 07; June 13th 08.
Note. It grows in gravelly and stony places, often in sheltered depres-
sions with rich grass.
64. Draba fladnizensis Wulf, in Jacq. Misc., I, 1778, р. 147;
Gelert, in Botan. Tidsskr., 21, 1898, р. 302; D. Wahlenbergii et (ex pte)
D. corymbosa, Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, рр. 40—41.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 162 (saltem ex pte).
Duc d’Orleans, Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld, 1908, p. 6).
Loc. Germania Land: Hvalrosodde, Snenæs, Danmarks Havn.
Flow. June 22nd 07.
65. Draba subcapitata Simmons, Sec. Arct. Exp. Fram 1898—
1902, No. 2, Kristiania, 1906, р. 87, tab. 1, figs. 3—8.
Kruuse, East Greenland (sub nom. diversis).
This species seems to be rather widely distributed in the area
investigated.
We owe to Dr. H. G. Simmons, (1. c.) a clear definition of this
badly-treated species, of which no certain record from Greenland
has hitherto existed.
Loc. Mallemukfjeldet (9); Ymers Nunatak; Cape Marie Valdemar (?);
Germania Land: Lille Snenæs, Danmarks Havn.
Flow. June 22nd 08.
66a. Draba alpina L. Sp. pl. 1753, р. 642; Lange, Consp. Fl.
Groenl., 1880, р. 37; Gelert in Bot. Tidsskr., Bd. 21, 1898, р. 299.
Kruuse, East Greenland, рр. 160—161 (incl. D. glacialis).
Рис d’Orleans, Cape St. Jacques (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 6).
This species is very common in the area investigated and varies
greatly. The more distinct forms are: а, genuina Lindbl. and р,
hebecarpa Lindbl., the latter with hairy pods.
The most divergent form is: —
List of Vascular Plants. 95
66 b. D. alpina L., var. glacialis (Adams) Dickie, Journ. Linn.
Soc., XI, 1871, р. 33; Simmons, Sec. Arct. Exp. Fram 1898—1902,
No. 2, Kristiania, 1906, p. 82.
Loc. Lambert Land (in flower June 14th 07); Ymers Nunatak; Germania
Land, common everywhere; St. Koldewey.
Flow. June 16th 07, June 14th 08.
Note. Among the specimens of Draba we have found two individuals
which, with some hesitation, we have identified as hybrids. They stand between
D.alpina and D. fladnizensis. (No. 1143, Danmarks Havn, 8, УП, 1908; and No.
166, Cape Bismarck, 22, VI, 1907).
Braya Sternb. & Hoppe.
67. Braya purpurascens (В. Br.) Bunge, in Ledeb., Fl. Ross.,
I, 1842, р. 195; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 46.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 163.
In the material collected occur specimens both with stellately
hairy, and with glabrous pods (f. siliculis glabris Hartz, Medd. Grönl.,
XVIII, 1895, р. 329 sub В. glabella).
Loc. Ymers Nunatak; Germania Land: Hvalrosodde, Dove Bugt, Dan-
marks Havn.
Flow. And with young fruit June 22nd 08.
Note. Rare around Danmarks Hayn, but common more landward
around Dove Bugt. It grows in gravelly, dry soil and also in clayey soil in
tarns, which have dried up in early summer.
Saxifragaceae.
Saxifraga L.
68. Saxifraga oppositifolia L. Sp. pl., 1753, p. 402; Lange,
Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 66.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 173.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape Bismarck and Cape St. Jacques (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 7).
Loc. Hyde Fjord (Peary Land); Mallemukfjeld; Lambert Land; Bjorne-
skær (flowering June 19th 07); Cape St. Jacques; Ymers Nunatak; Cape Marie
Valdemar; Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, common.
Flow. June 4th 07, June 7th 08.
Note. In some places around Danmarks Havn an unusually large-
flowered form was found, the flowers reaching a diameter of 18—23 mm.
(ее РТУ).
69. Saxifraga flagellaris Willd., in Sternberg, Revis. Saxifr.,
1810, р. 25; S. flag., var. seligera (Pursh) Engler; Lange, Consp. Fl.
Groenl., 1880, p. 65.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 172.
Loc. Ymers Nunatak: Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, common.
Flow. June 20th 07.
26 С. Н. OSTENFELD and ANDR. LUNDAGER.
Note. Around Danmarks Науп it was very common; in the interior
only one specimen was found, on the Ymers Nunatak. It grows in humid,
clayey soil on gentle slopes which are irrigated until late in summer by
melting snow-drifts. During the flowering period the stolons produce new
rosettes, and in the course of time a colony or association is formed con-
sisting of closely placed individuals.
70. Saxifraga cernua L. Sp. pl., 1753, p. 403; Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 61.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 170.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape Bismarck and Cape St. Jacques (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 7).
Loc. Lambert Land; Cape Marie Valdemar; Germania Land: common
around Danmarks Havn.
Flow. July 3rd 07.
71. Saxifraga rivularis L. Sp. pl., 1753, p. 404; Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., р. 61. 1880.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 170.
Duc d Orleans, Cape St. Jacques (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 7).
Loc. Germania Land: Dove Bugt, Danmarks Havn, common.
Flow. July 10th.
72. Saxifraga groenlandica L. Sp. pl., 1753, p. 404; Simmons,
Sec. Arct. Exp. Fram 1898—1902, No. 2, 1906, р. 70; 5. decipiens Ehrh.;
Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 62; 5. caespitosa L. Sp. pl., 1753,
р. 404 (saltem ex pte).
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 171.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape Bismarck, Maroussia Isl. and Cape St. Jacques (Ostenfeld,
1908, p. 7).
All the specimens collected must be referred to var. uniflora
(В: Вг.) Simm, lic. р. 71.
Гос. Germania Land, common; St. Koldewey.
Flow. Middle of June.
73. Saxifraga stellaris L., var. comosa Retz. Fl. Scand.
Prodrom., 1779, p.79; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 60.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 170.
Loc. Bjorneskerene; Germania Land: common around Danmarks Науп.
74. Saxifraga nivalis L. Sp. pl., 1753, p. 401; Lange, Consp.
Е]. Groenl., 1880, р. 59.
Kruuse, East Greenland, р. 169.
Duc d’Orleans, Саре St. Jacques (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 7).
Besides the type the var. tenuis Wahlenb. (Fl. Lapp., 1812,
р. 114) has been collected around Danmarks Havn.
Loc. Lambert Land; Germania Land: common everywhere around
Danmarks Havn.
Flow. June 21st 08.
List of Vascular Plants. 27
Rosaceae.
Potentilla L.
75. Potentilla pulchella R. Br. in Ross, Voy., ed. 2, 1819, p. 193;
Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 4; Th. Wolf, Monogr. Potentilla,
1908, р. 151.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 149.
Among the specimens collected there are some with very small
and densely hairy leaves; they represent the extreme limit of f. humilis
Lange (1. с.); others are more typical and some approach the f. elatior
Lange.
Loc. Hyde Fjord (Peary Land); Cape St. Jacques; Ymers Nunatak;
Germania Land: Dove Bugt, Snenæs, Stormkap, Harefjeld; Maroussia Isl.;
St. Koldewey.
Flow. June 28th 08.
Note. It was rather common on Maroussia Island which is a large,
manured nesting-place of sea-fowl. With this exception it does not occur
near the coast, and was not found more outward than Stormkap (a single
individual from Harefjeld excepted), whence it increases in frequency until,
on the gravelly banks at Dove Bugt, it becomes a character plant, just as
Lesquerella (see p. 23). — It is a hardy species which endures well both
sand-drifts and snow-storms, but it varies greatly in habit; the wind-affected
individuals from the gravelly banks do not bear much resemblance to large
sheltered tufts which have been snow-covered during winter; they form
compact “pillars” with а few living leaves in the dense top-rosette (see PI. V).
76. Potentilla nivea L. Sp. pl. 1753, p. 499; Lange, Consp. Fl.
Groenl., 1880, p. 8; P. Rydberg, Monogr. N. Am. Potent., 1898, p. 84;
Th. Wolf, Monogr. Potentilla, 1908, p. 233.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 150.
The specimens collected vary somewhat, as is usual with spe-
cimens of arctic P. nivea. But I think that they may all be named
var. pinnatifida Lehm. (Pugill. plant. IX, Hamburg, 1851, p.67; Th. Wolf
(1. c., p. 239) emendavit) under which variety I place f. subquinata
Lange (1. с., р. 9). I fully agree with Th. Wozr in not following
P. RyYDBERG (Bull. Torr. Bot. Club., 28, 1901, р. 181), who makes
a separate species of LANGE's form.
As to the var. prostrata (Rottböll) Lehm., Monogr. Potent., 1820,
р. 184 (P. prostrata Rottböll, Kiöbenhavn, Selsk. Skrifter, Deel 10, 1770,
р. 453) much has been written about it, and it has puzzled the au-
thors highly. We have in the Copenhagen Herbarium a specimen
collected by Ногвогл, at Umanak in West Greenland, and this be-
longs without doubt to the specimens upon which ROTTBOLL's has
based his description. This specimen is a very coarse and large-
leaved plant with ternate, deeply incised leaves. I think it is a
luxurious form of var. pinnatifida Lehm., which had been growing
98 С. H. OSTENFELD and ANDR. LUNDAGER.
in manured soil. It seems as if Th. Worr (1. с., р. 238) has supposed
something like this, but he gives it as related to var. macrophylla
Ser. (D. C., Prodrom. II, 571, 1825), which is nearer to the typical
Р. nivea, than is HOLBOLL’s plant.
Loc. Ymers Nunatak; Germania Land: valley between Annexsg and
Szelso, Dove Bugt, Danmarks Havn; St. Koldewey.
Flow. June 22nd 08.
Note. Rather common around Danmarks Havn, but still more frequent
landward; it grows on gravelly slopes, snow-covered during winter.
77. Potentilla emarginata Pursh, Fl. Am. Septentr., 1814,
р. 353; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р.8; Th. Wolf, Monogr. Ро-
tentilla, 1908, р. 533.
Kruuse. East Greenland, p. 150.
Duc d’Orleans, Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 5).
Both low and hairy, and higher and less hairy forms were col-
lected, thus corresponding to Г. typica and f. elatior Abromeit (Bibl.
Botan, 42, 1899, р. 8) respectively.
Loc. Cape St. Jacques; Cape Marie Valdemar; Germania Land: Dan-
marks Havn, common; Maroussia Isl.
Flow. June 27th 07; June 17th 08.
Dryas L.
78. Dryas octopetala L. Sp. pl., 1753, р. 717; Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., p.2, 1880; N. Hartz, Medd. Groenl., 18, 1895, p. 319.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 148.
Duc d’Orleans, Саре St. Jacques, Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 5).
Among the plants brought home by the Danmark Expedition
I did not find any belonging to the typical D. integrifolia M. Vahl.
The whole material from Germania Land is true D. octopetala L. in
its small-leaved high-arctic form: f. minor Hook. (Transact. Linn.
Soc., 14, 1825, р. 387); some specimens are hairy on the upper side of
the leaves and may be referred to subf. hirsuta N. Hartz (1. с.), and
in some localities the subf. argentea A. Blytt (Norges Flora, vol. 3, 1876,
p. 1176), with leaves silver-white lanate on the upper side was observed.
The fragmentary specimens collected by Captain Косн on Peary
Land (Hyde Fjord) stand between D. octopetala and D. integrifolia
and may be D. octopetala, var. intermedia Nathorst (Ofv. K. Vet. Akad.
Förh. 1884, No. 1, p.24), but the material is too scanty for definite
decision of the question.
Loc. Hyde Fjord (var. intermedia); Cape St. Jacques; Ymers Nunatak;
Cape Marie Valdemar; Germania Land: Dove Bugt, Danmarks Havn, common;
St. Koldewey.
Flow. June 27th 07, June 16th 08.
Note. It is one of the few species which flowers during the whole
summer, more or less early according to its different habitats. — The
List of Vascular Plants. 29
large-leaved specimens (leaves as much as 75 mm. broad) grow in places
that are snow-covered; they are the first to develop in spring, as they have
plenty of water and utilize the warmth of the sun even before the snow
has melted.
Empetraceae.
Empetrum Г.
79. Empetrum nigrum L. Sp. pl., 1753, p. 1022; Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., 1880, p. 18.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 153.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn, Stormkap.
Note. It was found on August 1st 1907 with small unripe fruits, which
did not mature during that summer; nor did the year-old fruits found in the
specimens appear to have ripened. Near Danmarks Науп it occurred on
heather-moor together with Cassiope and Salix herbacea. Further, some half-
withered and stunted fragments were seen on a gravelly bank near Storm-
kap, but only sterile (Sept. 1st 07).
Onagraceae.
Epilobium L.
80. Epilobium latifolium L. Sp. pl., 1753, p. 347; Chamaenerium
latifolium Sweet, Hort. Brit., ed. 2, 1830, р. 90; Lange, Consp. FI.
Groenl., 1880, p. 16.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 152.
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn and landward around Dove Bugt.
Flow. Beginning of July.
Note. Rather common in stony and gravelly soil near water-courses
and on slopes with running water; it is sometimes so conspicuous that it
catches the eye from a distance.
Halorrhagidaceae.
Hippuris L.
81. Hippuris vulgaris L. Sp. pl., 1755, p.4; Lange, Consp. FI.
Groenl., 1880, p. 13.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 151.
The specimens collected belong to the true H. vulgaris and can-
not be referred to the broad-leaved form: H. tetraphylla L. fil. (= H.
maritima Hell.), although they bear some resemblance to it (see Pl. VI).
Loc. Germania Land: Danmarks Havn.
Note. Occurs here and there in ponds in shallow water, and flowers.
Ericaceae.
Cassiope D. Don.
82. Cassiope tetragona (L.) D. Don, Edinb. New Philos. Journ.,
17, 1834, р. 157; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 87.
30 С. H. OSTENFELD and ÅNDR. LUNDAGER.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 179.
Due d’Orleans, Cape Bismarck (Ostenfeld, 1908, p. 8).
Loc. Cape Marie Valdemar; Germania Land: Dove Bugt, Danmarks
Havn, common.
Flow. June 29th 07, June 27th 08.
Note. Snow-covered during winter. Prefers rather humid slopes; in
flat ground only in depressions and in the furrows formed by the water
from melting snow and ice.
Rhododendron L.
83. Rhododendron lapponicum (L.) Wahlenb., Fl. Suec., 1824,
р. 249; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 88.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 180.
Loc. Germania Land, only in the interior: Rypefjeld, Fuglensbsfjeld,
Hvalrosodde, Moskusoksefjelde.
Flow. July 2nd 08.
Note. Grows on heather-moors with long-lasting snow-covering.
Vacciniaceae.
Vaccinium L.
84. Vaccinium uliginosum L. (Sp. pl., 1753, p. 350), var. micro-
phyllum Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, p. 91 (pro subspecie).
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 181.
Loc. Germania Land: rather common from Danmarks Havn landward
to Dove Виз.
Flow. July 3rd 07, June 27th 08.
Note. It grows by preference on slopes facing south that are sheltered
and snow-covered during winter and sufficiently humid during summer. Ц
often forms a belt between Dryas and Cassiope. It was found with ripe
berries, rather sparingly, on the last days of August 1906 and 1907.
Plumbaginaceae.
Statice L.
85. Statice armeria L. (Sp. pl., 1753, p. 274), var. sibirica
(Turez.) Rosenvinge, Medd. Grönland, Ш, 3, 1892, р. 683 (sub Armeria
vulgari Willd.); Armeria sibirica Turcz.; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl.,
1880, р. 70; Statice maritima Mill., var. sibirica Simmons, Sec. Arc.
Exp. Fram 1898 —1902, No.2, р. 34, 1906.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 174.
Loc. Germania Land: common around Danmarks Havn.
Flow. July !1th 07.
List of Vascular Plants. 31
Scrophulariaceae.
Pedicularis L.
86. Pedicularis flammea L. Sp. pl., 1753, р. 609; Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., 1880, p. 75.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 176.
Loc. Germania Land: in only one place, Rypefjeld.
Flow. July 8th 08.
87. Pedicularis hirsuta L.Sp. pl., 1753, p. 609; Lange, Consp.
Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 76.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 176.
Duc d’Orleans, Maroussia Isl. and Cape St. Jacques (Ostenfeld, 1908, р. 7).
Loc. Hyde Fjord (Peary Land); Bjornesker; Germania Land: com-
mon everywhere around Danmarks Havn.
Flow. June 22nd 07, June 26th 08.
Campanulaceae.
Campanula L.
88. Campanula uniflora L. Sp. pl., 1753, р. 163, Lange, Consp.
F]. Groenl., 1880, p. 92.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 181.
Гос. Germania Land, here and there.
Flow. July 10th 07, July Sth 08.
Note. Grows both in sheltered places and on rocky-flats between stones,
which retain the snow during winter.
Compositae.
Erigeron L.
89. Erigeron compositus Pursh, Fl. Am. Septentr., II, 1814,
р. 535; Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 101.
Kruuse, East Greenland, р. 183.
Loc. Cape Amelie; Germania Land, rather common.
Flow. July 10th 07, July 5th 08.
Note. Grows in gravelly places on the rocky-flats.
Arnica L.
90. Arnica alpina (L.) Olin, Disser. Arnica, Upsala, 1799;
Lange, Consp. Fl. Groenl., 1880, р. 103.
Kruuse, East Greenland, p. 184.
Loc. Germania Land: Fuglenæbsfjeld, “Bastionen,’ Danmarks Havn, rare.
Flow. July 38rd 08.
Note. Grows always in the higher parts of the country on rock-ledges
which are sheltered and densely snow-covered during, winter.
32 С. H. OSTENFELD and ANDR. LUNDAGER. List of Vascular Plants.
Taraxacum L.
91. Taraxacum arcticum (Trauty.) Dahlstedt, Ark. f. Botanik,
Stockholm, IV, No.8, 1905, р.8; Ostenfeld, in Duc d’Orleans, Croi-
sière Oceanogr. mer du Grönland 1905, Bruxelles, 1908, р. 8.
Kruuse, East Greenland, р. 182 (Т. phymatocarpum ex max. pte).
Duc d’Orleans, Cape St. Jacques and Maroussia Isl.
Both the principal form and the f. albiflora Kjellman (Vega Exp.
vet. iakt., Stockholm, I, 1882, p.505, sub T. phymatocarpo) were col-
lected.
Loc. Germania Land, rather common.
Flow. July 10th 07.
Note. It occurs on low slopes and similar sheltered places which have
been snow-covered during the winter.
92. Taraxacum phymatocarpum J. Vahl, Fl. dan., XIII,
fasc. 39, 1840, p.6, tab. 2298; Dahlstedt, Ark. f. Botanik, Stockholm,
ТУ, 9. 1905 р 22.
Kruuse, East Greenland, р. 182 (ex min. pte).
Loc. Germania Land: Rypefjeld, Snenæs and Stormkap (finished flow-
ering Aug. 19th 1906), not common around Danmarks Havn.
Flow. July 7th 07; June 30th 08.
10—12—1909.
Меор. ом GRØNL. XLIII Nr. 1. [OSTENFELD AND LUNDAGER PL. I
Aira caespitosa, var. arctica (Trin.) Simm. (?/4 nat. size.)
A high and coarse form,
"0013813511 S,SOINIUT, 03 Замэмзие оу OUI
(‘271$ ‘jeu 7/6) ‘Чэрэл ришта ‘лвл ‘nsoyidsono р.пу
“Ig ‘Y 270/1a91q ‘у 0} Зимэмзие лоу I
"yeu 7/5) ‘ии ("ULLL) 2911240 ‘лвл “Dsojidsana DY ‘ТЯ
Pr
<
я
и
>
=
—
A
я
<
A
=
[OSTEN
je
XLIII. Nr.
MEDD. OM GRONL.
MEDD. ом GRONL. XLIII. Nr. 1. [OSTENFELD AND LUNDAGER Pr. III
Aira caespitosa, var. pumila Ledeb. (°/4 nat. size.)
A form resembling À. setacea in habit,
MEDD. ом GRONL. XLIII. Nr. 1. [OSTENFELD AND LUNDAGER| PL. IV
Photo. of living specimens by A. LUNDAGER.
(Nat. size).
Large-flowered Saxifraga oppositifolia L.
I
‘
aa. |
2
‚
4
1
| à
р
a
й
*
1
ur
se
=,
D
De
> À
DENE
FÅ
MEDD. ом GRØNL. XLIII. Nr. 1. [OSTENFELD AND LUNDAGER
Pr.V
(Nat. size.)
Potentilla pulchella В. Br., “pillars.”
v
+
MEDD. ом GRØNL. XLIII. Nr. 1. [OSTENFELD AND LUNDAGER| PL. VI
Hippuris vulgaris L., flowering specimens. (!/» nat. size.)
FT:
THE TNSEGTS
OF THE “DANMARK” EXPEDITION
FRITZ JOHANSEN anp I. С. NIELSEN
(WITH PLATES” УШ-УШ
1910
XLIII. 3
Fig. 1. Lake at the Harbour. August.
BEGENERAE REMARKS ON THE LIFE OF INSECES
AND ARACHNIDS IN NORTH-EAST GREENLAND.
BY
FRITZ JOHANSEN.
he “Danmark” Expedition was stationed at “Danmark’s Havn”
(76° 46’ М. L., 18° 14" У. Г.) from August 17th 1906 to July 21st
1908. The investigations on the insect life thus extended over the
latter half of August 1906, the summer of 1907 and the early
summer of 1908.
Three parts mainly of the country were investigated, near the
outer coast (ship’s harbour), further up the fjord (“Stormkap”) and
right in at the head of the fjord (“Hvalrosodden”). The physical
features are naturally not quite the same at these three different
places, but the following general remarks may be made regarding
them. The ground consists mainly of raised sea-bottom, in the form
usually of extensive, flat, gravel or clay plains with practically no
vegetation, the latter being found almost exclusively in the damper,
small depressions or in larger or smaller valleys, and that especially
along the courses of running water and freshwater lakes. Further
inland these plains change over in places to large stretches of stony
3:
36 Fritz JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
ground, often more hillocky in appearance than the gravel and clay
plains; but so far as vegetation is concerned and the insect life
connected therewith, there is not much to choose between these
different kinds of ground. It is only in the shelter of large stones,
near water and in depressions, that any vegetation is found, and
this is often most abundant at the foot of the fells and larger
cliffs which mark the boundary towards the higher land behind.
The fertile parts of the gravel and clay plains, in addition to the
above-mentioned, are the slopes which receive large supplies of
water from the melting snows of early summer, and larger or
smaller stretches of mossy vegetation are often found there. These
disappear as the summer advances; but at special places, were the
drainage is more impeded, these mossy stretches are found throughout
the whole year, for example, at “Stormkap” (“Мозеп”) and “Basis-
sletten” at the harbour. Characteristic parts of the country are
further the now quite or almost dry beds of rivers, formed during
a period when the quantities of melling snow were much more
abundant than at present, when it is only in the early summer
that the largest water-courses are impassable, though an exception
to this is formed by the extensive “Laxeelv” at “Hvalrosodden”. The
ground consists here either of higher or lower clay slopes, furrowed
by dried-up beds of rivulets (“Hvalrosodden”), or of extensive gravel
slopes and mounds (“Stormkap”), or of picturesque clefts with
waterfalls from the steep sides of cliffs and scattered stone boulders
(“Rypefjeld” at “Hvalrosodden” and several other places). The two
first-named river-beds are just as desolate as the surrounding plains,
whilst the last kind with its rich vegetation can be noticed already
from a distance as green bands in the surrounding, bare fells.
Lastly, I may mention the fells lying further inland, which
generally only have vegetation in the clefts or on sheltered slopes
and terraces.
With regard to the detailed account of the vegetation,
reference may be made to the botanical portion of this work; at
present, only a summary need be given of the most characteristic
plants and their distribution. The dry gravel plains support a
scattered vegetation of Salix polaris, Saxifraga oppositifolia, Potentilla
and Papaver nudicaule; in the small, damp hollows and depressions
we find especially Dryas octopetala, Cassiope tetragona, Vaccinium
microphyllum, Silene. Moss-bogs and water-courses are characterized
by Pedicularis, Eriophorum, Ranunculus glacialis in grass and moss.
In the shelter of large stones or small cliffs, on the fells and such
like, we often find tufts of grass and the white-flowered Saxifraga,
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. ЭЙ
in addition to the common plants mentioned above under the dry
gravel plains. Naturally, however, there are also many places where
all the plants of the species mentioned are found growing together,
especially if the places are sheltered or damp.
It is difficult to give a general account of the temperature
conditions at the different seasons, which indeed are of vital im-
portance to insect life in North-East Greenland, as the three sum-
mers and two winters the Expedition spent there were so different
from one another (see the account of the meteorology). In general,
however, the following may be said.
The summer is considered to end a little after the beginning of
September (about the 7th), when the temperature sinks somewhat
abruptly, being even in the daytime under the freezing-point (mean
temperature са. — 5°', minimum —10° to — 15°), though the first,
persistent snow usually falls only at the end of the month. During
the most of August however the night temperature becomes regularly
more and more negative (sen below, under August).
The winter may be considered, as far as temperature is con-
cerned, to extend from September to April, both months inclusive.
The lowest winter temperature, which was taken at “Danmark’s
Harbour”, was са. —40°. The snow-fall in the winter varies from
year to year. Usually the snow comes with strong, north-westerly
storms, especially at the beginning of the dark period (November)
and towards the end of the winter (March).
The summer may be divided into 3 periods: an early summer
(May and first half of June), high summer (until the middle of
August) and late summer (until the first week in September).
The first half of May is in general different from the last half.
We then have usually clear, calm weather with a temperature at
noon of up to ca. —5° and at night of са. —15°; but as the month
advances, this great difference in temperature between day and night
becomes less distinct, heavy fogs or strong winds being the rule.
Frost at night is now less in general, and the temperature at noon
may on a few days reach +5°.
In June fogs and winds also prevail during a greater or fewer
number of days, but the mean temperature is positive, a few degrees
above 0°, even though frost at night (down to ca. —7°) is frequent
1 All the temperatures are Celsius.
38 Fritz JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
especially in the beginning of the month. The maximum tempera-
ture is ca. 4-11”.
In July the weather is as a rule fine: as abnormal may be
mentioned the rainy days about the 20th in 1907 and fog and snow
about the middle of the month in 1908. The mean temperature is
— 3° to +57; the minimum fluctuates about freezing-point; the
maximum —-10° to +15”. The highest temperature obtained during
the whole of the Expedition (+ 17°) fell in this month.
August. Fine, calm weather as in Jnly; but later in the month
the’ difference between the day and night temperature gradually
becomes greater (up to 7°), that is, the frost is increasing at nights.
The maximum temperature is са. +12°, the mean са. +2°, the
minimum са. — 5°.
Before passing to account of the insectan life in general, such
as is found at the different seasons, I wish to make the following
remarks.
As mentioned above, the climatic conditions during the period
we were at North-East Greenland were not a littte different from
year to year. The summer of 1906 (of which however we only had
the later part) must have been on the whole a good summer, that
is, the fjords and sounds were free of ice, the land very bare of
snow and the summer on the whole of long duration (i. e. the night
frost came later and was less, and the sea remained open later —
all by comparison with the summer of 1907). During the latter the
sea-ice in the inner part of the fjord never broke up, with the result
that many of the sea-birds did not breed that summer, and the frost
at night suddenly became heavy (— 6°) at the end of August. On
the other hand, the land was earlier bare of snow in 1907 than
in 1908, as the snowfall in the winter of the former was much
less than in the latter, and May and June of 1908 had somewhat
more foggy weather than the corresponding months of 1907. The
mean temperature however was lower in 1907 than in 1908. In
1908 the ice broke up to a much greater extent (and earlier)
than in 1907; so that taken altogether 1907 was a bad summer in
contrast to 1908, when the summer showed signs of becoming
normal (i. e. as in 1906).
It will be seen, therefore, how difficult it is to give a general
picture of the insect life at North-East Greenland, as 1907 was just
the only complete summer we had, and that was abnormal.
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. 39
As above mentioned, the winter at North-East Greenland may
be considered as beginning about the first week in September.
The small number of insects occurring about this time indicates
distinctly that winter is close at hand. Most of the migrating birds
are away, the freshwater lakes bear fairly thick ice and new ice
has begun to form in the quieter parts of the harbour. The mossy
bogs are almost dried up and the water remaining in the rivers
is scarcely flowing. Digging in the ground we find it frozen even
in the upper layers; and the withered leaves and dried fruits give
the stretches of vegetation a uniformly, brownish-yellow appearance.
Fig. 2. At the Harbour.. April.
The weather is in general fine and calm, but the sun which lends
the frozen ice-fields and the clouds the most beautiful colours of
red, yellow and blue-green, just confirms the impression of the sur-
rounding land as an empty waste. It is as if the land was dead
and stiff and only waited for the snow to come and spread itself
like a sheltering cover over the plants and stones. It is only with the
most careful search that we can find any trace of the hibernating
insects; many stones must be turned over before we come upon a
rolled-up little spider or mite, though these are much more fre-
quent than the large downy larvae of Dasychira groenlandica, which
seek a similar hiding place. And especially later on in the winter,
when the snow has fallen and by thawing become unevenly dis-
40 Fritz JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
tributed, so that it fills the clefts and lies in mounds round the
large stones whilst the more sheltered places are entirely or partially
bare, it is very difficult to find the hibernating lepidopterous larvae
(Anarta etc.) even in the grass tufts and Dryas beds, which are not
covered by snow. According to all the observations I have made
on the hibernating lepidopterous larvae, it is almost exclusively on
the parts of the low land which are driest, free of snow and lie
high (and in consequence with but little vegetation), that we find
the animals. Here in Denmark we are accustomed to find them on
plant-covered ground, and it takes some time to realize that the
conditions in Greenland seem to be precisely the opposite. I have
searched through large tracts with heather, moss etc., without finding
more than quite a few larvae, but if I disturbed a solitary grass
tuft standing on a gravelly, naked spot, I could be almost always
certain of finding what I sought for. The same was the case when
I turned over flat stones on naked ground or ground with vegetation
on it. As pointed out by DEICHMANN" this condition is due to the
larvae preferring places where there is most promise of escaping the
water from the melting snow. That the larvae never pay any atten-
tion to the protection a covering layer of snow can afford them
against the cold, is likewise a characteristic feature and indicates a
peculiar hardiness on the part of these animals. I may here quote
from my Journal regarding the discovery of such a hibernating
larva. “Found to day a naked Anarta larva (ca. 3 cm.) in a tuft of
Dryas octopetala. The plant was almost free of snow and the larva
was only half hidden in this, the head and front part of the body
sticking down among the small twigs whilst the abdomen was bent
and hung free in the air. The animal was frozen stiff and did not
move when touched; the ground under the tuft was stony and hard
frozen, there being a little ice between the leaves of the plant and
on the body of the larva. I placed it in a box and when I reached
the ship shortly after and took it from my pocket the larva was
almost thawed. I watched how it gradually came to life; first it
lay on its side and waved the body slowly backwards and forwards;
then Ц turned over on to its belly and took hold on the bottom of
the box with its hindmost grasping feet; slow and spasmodic con-
tractions or waves passed along the body; finally, it fixed the other
grasping feet and the thorasic legs and moved slowly away in the
normal manner. The temperature that evening was — 16!/2° (*/5 07).
I tried to hatch out the larva and a week later it began to spin a
cocoon, some threads being found under its belly. Two days later,
1 “Meddelelser om Grönland” XIX. Copenhagen 1895, p. 101.
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. 41
however, it gave up doing this and lay as if dead on the bottom of
the glass, and as it refused to take any food it only remained
alive two days longer”.
The above may be considered as typical of the hibernating
butterfly larvae, whether found in tufts of plants or under stones.
If one is fortunate, the black Hemipter Nysius may also be found
passing its winter sleep in the grass and such like, or а solitary
queen of Bombus hyperboreus, and by digging into the ground (a
difficult task at this time of year) the hibernating larvae of Tipula
arctica and other Dipters. Otherwise most of the entomological
collections obtained on the ground at this time of year consist of
year-old, empty egg-capsules of spiders (under flat, loose stones) and
ruptured pupa cases of flies (especially amongst the moss) and
butterflies (below stones, in tufts of plants).
If we come now to a freshwater lake, we find, if it is not frozen
to the bottom, a much richer animal life. Looking down through
the ice we can see masses of the quite small, reddish brown Cyclops
hopping about in the water right down to the bottom; the dark-
brown Daphniae are constantly moving about with great leaps or
springs, or some of them are dead but have left behind their edged
and flat winter-eggs to sink down to the bottom of the lake; Apus
glacialis in different sizes swims up under the ice, crawls over the
plants or hastily buries itself down in the mud. Taking some of
the latter up we find living in it numerous, red larvae of gnats
(Chironomus); other gnats also hibernate as larvae. As all the lakes
there, which are shallower than 1—2 meters, freeze to the bottom
in winter, all these (mainly littoral) animal forms must be able to
stand being frozen in the mud for a long time. If the frost surprises
them up in the water, however, they undoubtedly die a fact of
which I have seen many examples in North-East Greenland (where
the ice is often found full of dead Apus glacialis).
For the sake of completeness it may be added, that the parasitic
insects there (the louse Haematopinus trichechi on Trichechus rosmarus,
Pulex glacialis on Lepus variabilis and the various Mallophagae on
Corvus corax, Lagopus mutus etc.) are just as common in winter as
in summer.
There is no true spring in North-East Greenland. Gradually
as the sun remains longer and longer above the horizon and its
warming capacity increases from day to day, the snow slowly melts
and evaporates; larger and smaller spots of ground become free of
snow; a hole is first formed in the snow where a tuft of grass or
49 Fritz JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
plants stick up and the earlier half-hidden rocks and larger stones
stand out bare. The numerous water-courses still lie bound under
their ice-cover and the only water seen is in the holes formed by
the sun round about the seaweed frozen into the sea ice. At this
time the first insects of the year are seen; if the weather is calm
and sunny, one is surprised by the buzzing of a blow-fly (Calliphora
groenlandica) round about the tent and if we approach the side of
a fell where there is shelter, we find other Dipters, sometimes
flying about, at others resting for a moment. . Examining the
ground we become aware of a spider which quickly conceals itself
in the withered grass, and more are found in the crevices of the
rocks, under stones and such like, where they first simulate death,
but soon show themselves to be fully alive to the coming of summer.
If we happen to be near a bank of sand, we notice a number of
small holes with the small, red mites (Trombidium) crawling in
and out of them — but only when the sun is shining. No other
“insects” are to be seen at this time (first half of May), unless we
take the trouble of investigating the tufts of grass and turn over
the stones; then we find the larvae of the hibernating butter-
flies; for example, if it is a Dryas plant, we find the larvae lying
under the outermost branches and twigs, which are prostrate on the
ground; it is driest here and the action of the sun is strongest on
this part of the plant. That the larvae are awake from their winter
sleep can be seen by their movements on being touched, some of
them indeed were clinging fast to the under side of the branches.
The first of them come out in the latter half of May, chiefly the
Anarta and Dasychira larvae; and whilst the former mainly sit on
the Dryas tufts, the latter greedily gnaw the fresh willow buds and
the rosettes of leaves of Saxifraga oppositifolia. The temperature at
noon 1$ about freezing point, but in the warming rays of the sun
the snow-free parts of the ground are some degrees higher. The
larvae do not crawl very far, partly because they have enough to
do in feeding after the long winter sleep, partly because they need
not yet fear the water from the melting snow. — If we go now to
the freshwater lakes, we find here also that the animal life has
begun to wake up close to the banks where the ice has melted, and
even if a thin layer of ice is formed at nights, it does not interfere
with the movements of the animals here. If there is only a few
centimeters of water, we find the small, red larvae of the water-
mites (Hydrachna) seeking their prey, and numerous larvae of gnats
of various size and species move about over the soft muddy bottom,
sometimes making swift leaps from side to side and then running
a little (Culex), sometimes crawling (Tanypus?) like Geometra-larvae.
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. 43
But it depends naturally on both the situation and physical condi-
tions of the different places, when precisely the insects come out
at the one or the other spot (on the plant-covered rocks at the outer
coast and on sheltered grounds earlier than at other places), — just
as the appearance of summer is not always at the same time two
years running (thus in 1908 it was much later than in 1907).
But as soon as we come into June and have a positive mean
temperature, rapid advance is made by all things. The migratory
birds have now arrived from the south and seek their food in the
many pools of melting water, which are now formed, or at the
margin of the lakes. The flies ! are troublesome and collect in great
crowds on the refuse lying about the tent, and the first gnats
(Culex nigripes) make their presence felt in an emphatic manner.
Every lake and pool is filled with the larvae of gnats and on
the bottom lie dead earth-worms and larvae of flies, which
the water has washed up from the bottom-soil. The ground thaws
some inches down and the greater part of the low-lying land is
converted to bog. The water from the melting snow, which is daily
increased from the larger and smaller stretches of snow still lying,
streams down over the flat, evenly sloping plains, or it follows its
own-made small courses down towards the sea-ice. There is practi-
cally not a single one of the places bare of snow which is free of
water, and the caterpillars appearing are badly off. Occasionally
we find them drowned in the water, but they nevertheless often
manage to save themselves by moving on to the higher lying tufts
of grass, stones and the like, to wait there for better times.
Every day that now passes makes the summer more and more
evident. Green shoots appear everywhere on the plants and the first
flowers (Saxifraga oppositifolia, Salix polaris) have come out. Most
of the low-lying country apart from the permanent stretches of bog
and the water-courses becomes bare of snow and running water, even
though the snow higher up only melts towards the end of the month
when the large rivers also become free. The caterpillars are now
out generally in all sizes (especially Dasychira); they collect the
utmost possible of food before pupation takes place. Other insects
now out, in addition to the flies, are small forms of gnat (Chiro-
nomus) and butterfly (Penthina), common as imagines. Occasionally
we find Dasychira larvae which seem strangely dead, seated for
example on а Saxifraga tuft: taking one up we find that it is fixed
fast to the plant, and on tearing it loose we see that only the empty,
hard skin of the larva remains, whilst a large cocoon of an ichneu-
! Probably hibernating as imagines.
A4 Fritz JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
mon fly (Limneria Deichmanni) has its threads fixed to the sub-
stratum and is using the larval skin as a sheltering cover. If we
examine the fresh shoots of Potentilla and Papaver we find a number
of larvae of Trombidium or the common, small bugs (Clamydatus
pulicarius?) fixing themselves in the innermost parts of the plants,
and various larger and smaller spiders are common everywhere.
Lastly, if we look down into the water of the freshwater lakes, we
find a no less rich animal life there; it is filled with Chironomus,
Tanypus, Culex nigripes and other larvae of gnats, and of new forms
we find masses of Ostracod nauplii on the tangled moss of the banks,
and the young of Apus glacialis, like a pin’s head in size, are hopping
about in the water in the manner peculiar to these animals. Much
more common, however, are the almost microscopic Daphnia young
just hatched, but they are somewhat difficult to see in the water
owing to their transparency. '
We have now reached the middle of June. It is now almost
impossible to follow the appearance of all the insects, and the fol-
lowing therefore can not make any claim to being an exhaustive
account. Going up over the bog on a fine day we hear a hitherto
unknown sound and soon observe а large bumble-bee (Bombus
hypercoreus) come buzzing quickly past. If we follow to where it
settles, we find it busily dusting the flowering catkins of the willows,
picking out the one after the other, or crawling in under a moss-
grown stone, come out again and try another place and so on. The
meaning of the latter action can be ascertained if it remains under-
neath; removing the stone we can dig into the ground; it then
appears than this is a spot which is suitable for a new dwelling-
place for the bee, or perhaps it is the old dwelling-place and we
may be fortunate enough to find this. It consists of a clump of
cells, which lie free in a natural depression in the soil or in a
lemming’s burrow. The nest I found was hidden by a small mossy
carpet, through which the Bombus female had made an outlet. While
at work this bee is much taken up with its own business and is
therefore easily caught; not a few hibernating females can be seen
on such a summer’s day. The other Bombus species (B. balteatus)
is also met with now. They are typical insects of the mossy ground
and the localities with plenty of vegetation, and it is surprising to
find how little the weather, time of day or dampness of the ground
influence their activity. As an example of this I may mention, that
when wet days with steady downpour or very dense fog set in
towards the end of June 1907, Bombus was the only flying insect I
saw, even if it was not so abundant as on sunny days. Further
(according to the Journal, %/6), “I came at midnight to the bog
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. 45
on the slope down towards Storm Bay. Here there are several
brooks running down towards the sea and a plentiful vegetation of
grass, Salix, Ranunculus glacialis etc. I saw several Bombus flying
about, busily engaged in seeking the newly opened willow catkins.
They skimmed fearlessly just above the water of the brooks and
crawled about on the grass and mossy tufts projecting above the
water etc., and it even seemed that they like to stay long at the
places where the vegetation owing to the running water was most
abundant — without however wetting their wings, though their legs
and hairs of the trunk were continually wet. But the constantly
present and strong sun can now dry them quickly again. The
Fig. 3. Plain at the Harbour. July.
working hours of the bees are thus long at this period; they are
to be seen at work during the whole 24 hours, and it is only just
about midnight that fewer are out flying; probably most of them
then rest before the next, long day’s work.” On the bodies of the
bees occur parasitic mites (Trombidium) which attach themselves to
the hairs of the body, and to judge from their size and number
one would think that they would disturb the bees in their flight
more than they really seem to do.
But there are other larger, and for the Greenland insect life
much more important parasites now active. Now and then we
notice an elegant and large insect settling on the ground with a
rapid dart and actively moving its antennae and legs, and we then
46 FRITZ JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
see that it is one of the ichneumon flies (Limneria Deichmanni) which
has just come out. It is the same form, whose larvae (as already
described) break through the ventral skin of the Dasychira larva
and spin the threads attaching these to the under-lying plant. By
hatching out these pupae I have found, that the imago of the ich-
neumon bites a hole in the dorsal skin of the emptied larva and
crawls out through this; —- and from and with the middle of June
these empty, perforated larval skins are almost just as common as
the living Dasychira larvae. And if the larvae is not attacked by
this wasp, we can almost always be sure that the parasitic flies
(Peteina stylata etc.) have taken up the place; but whereas only one
wasp develops in each larva, several flies hatch out of the host. It
is not to be wondered at, therefore, that whilst the Dasychira larvae
are the commonest insect larvae at North-East Greenland, their
imagines are seen but seldom. |
The flies (Calliphora groenlandica, Scatophaga squalida ete.) are
just as common now as earlier, and we find their maggots and
pupae in carcases (е. g. of Myodes torquatus) and bones. The larvae
of the large Tipula arctica, as mentioned earlier, hibernate down in
the ground, and if we dig at places which are mouldy and not too
dry, e. g. under Cassiope tufts, we easily find their large maggots.
A little after the end of June they assume the pupa stage and begin
to work up towards the surface, and here and there under stones
etc. we may find circular holes leading down to a vertical passage,
in which sits the active pupa with the head end upwards. It is
thus well-protected against enemies, whilst at the same time having
plenty of air. At the end of the month appear the imagines; it is
the male especially, which is seen and only in flight; if it rests on
the ground, namely, its colour blends perfectly with that of the
surroundings it prefers (bare, sunny, stony spots with patches of
vegetation of Cassiope, grass etc.). Various “flower-flies” are also
common (Melanostoma, Helophilus grénlandicus, Syrpus; the first
chiefly on dry, clay and stony ground with little vegetation, the last
two on damp, overgrown soil). Naturally, however, the commonest
Diptera are the gnats. The now completely thawed lakes and
pools contain millions of their larvae, from the large, red Chironomus
which live in mud tubes open at both ends, to the small, free-living
Culex nigripes, which is found in every water hole however small.
Tanypus is the first to pupate (middle of June) of all the hibernating
larvae; but whilst the last as well as the completed pupae are lively
enough, the intermediate stages remain at rest on the bottom. A
week later appear the first imagines of Culex nigripes'; they are
! The new brood of the year.
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. 47
found chiefly on mossy stretches and both the males and females
are seen, thongh the former are the most numerous and swarm in
the air in small groups, whilst the females sit singly on the ground.
Other imagines are met with flying about over the surface of the
water, often drowned in this and the ruptured pupa-cases float about
on the surface in thick masses. The biting insects are however not
yet troublesome with their numbers.
The last insect order remaining to be mentioned is that of the
butterflies. One butterfly larva (for description see p. 65) forms
a roundish, compressed cocoon on the under side of flat, loose stones,
the one half being pressed into depressions in the stone, whilst the
other half is attached to the pieces of gravel lying below. Here it
pupates in the middle of June (unless attacked by a parasitic wasp),
and as the larva is only found on dry places bare of snow and poor
in vegetation, the pupa is insured agains the loosely woven and thin
cocoon being washed away by the water from the melting snow.
The Dasychira larvae pupate about the same time. In size and form
their cocoon resembles a pigeon’s egg and is very dense; the outer
surface is smooth and light-brown to yellowish white whilst short
threads pass out from the under side in all directions; these serve
to attach the cocoon to the grass stalks under and around in such
a way that the cocoon hangs a little above the ground. We find
these cocoons mainly on mossy ground and even if there is water
underneath between the blades of grass, it does not damage the
cocoon. I have also found cocoons, however, which were firmly
attached directly to the upper side of stones. The inner layers of
the cocoon have a looser and more flax-like texture than the outer,
smooth layers, and the cocoon is also less dense at the broad end
within which lies the head end of the pupa. The pupation of the
larvae of Anarta and Cidaria proceeds in a considerably easier
manner; they simply throw off the shell of the larva, which in the
Dasychira pupa lies inside the cocoon, and the smooth, brown
pupa fixes itself in between the dense leaves on the under side of
the Dryas or other plants. With regard to the imagines, the first
of these met with are small forms (Penthina and others), then follow
Argynuis (ca. 25th June) and Anarta (probably also Dasychira) at the
end of the month, whilst Colias hecla and Lycaena aquilo var. orbi-
lulus are first met with in the beginning of July.
That the spiders, mites and spring-tails (the last under flat
stones) are now common need perhaps only be mentioned; the
palps of the male of the first are very much swollen, a sign that
the pairing time is at hand. This applies also to Tipula arctica,
often taken in copulation.
48 Fritz JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
With July we are in the middle of summer and the insect
life is now at its height. But instead of describing, as above, the
successive development and appearance of the different insects, I
shall give the reader an accout of a day’s excursion over the grounds
were I made my entomological investigations.
We are now in the middle of July. The “Danmark” les on
the open water in the harbour and to reach the land we ferry over
in the forenoon. On the land the known flowers are in full blossom
over the wide plain round about the the now almost dry “Ваз1зКаег”,
but of insects we see very little. The species seen on a short excur-
sion are soon enumerated; in greatest numbers are the gnats which
“stand” in swarms over the lakes; sometimes we see a bee dusting
the flowers or we startle a pair of large crane-flies, an Argynnis,
Cidaria or other butterflies. But if we go further and examine more
closely we find much more, as will be seen.
We may begin by turning over a number of the flat stones
which are strewn over the plain. We can then be almost always
certain that various spiders are hidden under them, among others
small, black species with spherical abdomen; the females are almost
always found sitting on their flat, circular egg-cocoons, which are
fixed in crevices in the stones and contain new-laid, yellow eggs,
whilst the males to begin with place themselves in a warlike posi-
Поп and raise their chelae-like palps, but soon disappear into their
holes. Or we may find quite small, red or yellowish-white mites
crawling about on the under side of the stone, and the young
spiders rushing wildly away to the nearest hiding-place. We also
see some longish, violet, small animals, which on being disturbed
throw themselves up into the air and fall down again, to repeat the
same manœuvre; these are of course the spring-tails which thus
seek to escape being caught. We also find the pupæ of various
butterflies, both living and ruptured cases — mostly the latter.
On the ground about run various spiders, — some have spun
their fine threads over the ground, but most of them belong to the
species which catch their prey whilst on the move; in a hole at
one place, for example, we find a large form which has caught a
Tipula arctica and is now busy eating its hooty (later on in the
summer, we also find it bearing its egg cocoons and still later its
newly hatched young on its back). On the sun-dried parts we meet
with the earlier mentioned bugs (Nysius) often copulating, from
which we can see that the males are somewhat smaller than the
females. If we try to seize them, it never seems to occur to them
to use their wings; they get in amongst the leaves of the plants or
crawl down into the many chinks in the ground. As mostly ground-
The Insects of the ""Danmark” Expedition.
“INOGIv
H 947 Ye
oye]
4
XLII.
50 Fritz JOHANSEN and L С. NIELSEN.
seekers we must also regard the exceedingly common, large Tipula
arctica; as mentioned above they keep mainly to the waste places
with patches of vegetation; suddenly when we have no suspicion of
their presence the long-legged insects start up in front of us, leap
some distance on in front and settle again not far away; and the
same operation is repeated every time we come upon them unawares.
And this occurs often, for its colour blends so perfectly with the
stones on the ground, dried grass stalks etc., that if the animal were
not so clumsy in its flight, nor so often copulating, its capture would
be somewhat difficult. The gnats are now troublesome enough,
but when- we get beyond July month and avoid the watery localities,
we do not see much of them. As at home the females fly about
more singly, whilst the males swarm together over the banks of the
lakes and pools. A number of them still occur as larvae in the
water; and in the larger waters where Salmo alpinus lives, the young
of the fish help to keep the stock of gnats within due bounds; in
the evenings especially we can watch the “parr” swimming in small
shoals in the quite shallow water and continually “making rings”
on the surface, whilst snapping up the gnats which fly over the
water; also, if we cul up these fishes we find them crammed with
pupae and imagines. Of the flies the various “flower-flies” already
mentioned are commonest in the open, and along with Bombus and
the gnats it is they that “give the insect tone” on such a warm
summer's day. — The earlier so common Bombus queens are now
not so frequently seen; a brood of small forms (the workers) has
now appeared and these care for the necessary collection of honey
and pollen. Аз the Salix flowers are past, they now seek other
plants (Pedicularis, Dryas) and they keep to the dry, hillocky ground,
where they are often seen seeking in under the Cassiope plants and
the like, — probably they have their nest there. Most marked of
all the insects, however, are the butterflies, as it is only in the
height of summer, that all are out and can be said to be common.
It is remarkable that with but few exceptions the North-East
Greenland butterflies are not found on the most fertile places. On
mossy ground, for example, the only common butterfly is the yellow
Colias hecla, but this is also so much bound to such localities, that
if there is a fertile slope round a larger or smaller water-course, we
may be almost sure of seeing a Colias flitting about and be able to
follow with the eye how it keeps to the windings of the slope. On
large grassy plots (for example at the foot of the fells) we see several
of these beautifully coloured insects flitting about; when two come
nearer together they playfully cross and recross in the air before
separating; the one then perhaps settles on a Dryas blossom whilst
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. 51
the other seeks rest оп a blade of grass, the colour of which it
resembles so much. — The commonest day butterflies are however
the Argynnis, but like the following they are not met with on boggy
ground (nor in fact on the bare clay and stone plains). Yet we
may be surprised by these butterflies flying up from ground where
the dry grass, Cassiope and other plants are only growing in hollows
here and there, until we observe that it is just these places which
afford the butterfly the most shelter. When this settles for example
on a stone or a Cassiope tuft, the reddish brown lichen covering the
former, like the purple-black leaf of the latter blends so perfectly in
colour with the butterfly that this cannot be seen before it starts up.
It is very shy, flying often far away before it again settles, and as
it “doubles” a great deal in its flight, it is more difficult to catch
than Colias. These butterflies are sometimes seen together, however;
in which case if is Argynnis that has come on to the grounds of
Colias and they playfully cross one another before proceeding on
their way. — More rarely and more singly we meet with the day-
butterfly Lycaena orbilulus on localities similar to those of Argynnis.
It is quite impossible to see this butterfly when sitting on the ground;
the gray under-side of the folded wings blends so perfectly with
the surrounding small stones. It does not fly far each time, but
irregularly and fairly quickly. —
Among the night-butterflies the grayish Cidaria polata is by far
the most common; it is also one of the first to appear and is met
with almost everywhere on the plain; it keeps mostly to the stony
patches, however, where sitting on the ground or on a stone with
lichen-covering it is quite concealed by its colour-resemblance. —
More rare is the large Anarta Richardsonü, which keeps to similar
places and often sits on a large stone covered with gray lichens; if
we approach or if it notices one’s shadow, it flies high up in the
air and goes away in a long glide, carried by the wind, until it
settles on a new stone with a quick movement down to the ground.
Even if we have noticed where it has settled and steadily keep the
eye fixed on it, on creeping forward, we often fail to see it, so per-
fectly does it seem to become part of the stone. As mentioned, it
is partial to the sun-dried gravelly spots with large stones and vege-
tation here and there, in contrast to the smaller Anarta Zelterstedtit
which is mainly met with along the grass-covered water-courses,
but is much more rare. Very common, lastly, is the small Penthina
groenlandicana, which keeps mainly to the clumps of Cassiope found
in the hollows of the stony ground. If we approach these plants,
the small, white and black butterfly springs up and with characteristic
1°
52 Fritz JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
“slimmering” movements keeps almost above the same place until
it falls to earth again.
We do not forget either to study the freshwater lakes on such
an excursion; at the banks especially we find a comparatively
rich animal life. The almost microscopic, reddish spring-tails are
constantly hopping about on the surface of the water; it is almost
impossible to capture them and when we at last get them into our
glass, they clamber up its vertical sides with the greatest ease. The
brick-red Hydrachnidae crawl about between the blades of grass, and
if they catch hold of a gnat larva, we see how they hook themselves
on to it and in spite of their prey’s powerful writhings gradually
suck out its substance. The most characteristic animals are however
the Apus glacialis, of which we now meet with both the young
and the full-grown individuals; they are continually in movement,
sometimes burying themselves down into the soft mud, sometimes
“creeping” over the bottom, whilst their swimming-feet make ele-
gantly winding tracks in the brownish yellow sand. The Ostracoda
collect about the dead animals (e. g. Apus) and devour them; they
are the scavengers of the lakes and wander slowly over the bottom;
leaving the giddy Daphnidae to do the springing about up in the
water.
It is now late in the day. We have wandered far about over
the wide plains, following the water-courses from the base of the
high land down to the sea. We have passed over boggy patches
and gravelly tracts, taking occasional leaps on to the large boulders
on our way, and walked along the banks of the lakes. To end up
our excursion we may now go towards the fells and find out what
insects are met with, as we gradually mount higher up. On the
slopes of the fells which bear some vegetation we now and then
see a butterfly (Argynnis, Cidaria, Penthina), but these gradually dis-
appear (Cidaria goes up the highest), and as the vegetation grows
thinner (grass and a few tufts of Cassiope, Papaver and Saxifraga)
the otherwise so common Bombus likewise disappears. The ground
now consists mainly of bare rock, with here and there a small
terrace of gravel; but no lakes are seen, with the advantage that no
gnats are found here either. The only insects now seen are Tipula
arctica and various flies (especially the earlier mentioned Melanostoma),
and when we come to a snow drift we see the same and other
insects out over the white surface, sitting in the holes in the snow
the sun has melted round about them. It is probably the wind
that has brought them here, and the strong light from the white snow
has then completely blinded them, so that they have fallen down
and helplessly perished. That they are not there of their own free
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. 53
will, can be seen also by observing the insects when they come to
a large snow-covered patch; they will not fly over this but prefer
to make the detour round it. The same phenomen of the dead
insects is also common on the sea-ice, where we find them lying
scattered right from the beach to far out.
Late at night we return to the ship. The sun is now in the
north but yields little warmth, yet most of the insects are still active.
The Bombus workers continue unweariedly their search for honey
and pollen, but of the flies we now see but little; this applies also
to the gnats, especially the large forms; swarms of the small gnats
Fig. 5. Summit of a hill at the Harbour. August.
on the other hand still hang over the pools and brooks. Tipula
arctica tricks us just as in the day-time, and of the butterflies
the night-swarms are most in evidence. АП the insects are abroad,
however, even if some of the species are less active than during the
day. And now the sun begins to warm to a new day; the transition
period from the previous is very short, and gradually as the sun
comes further and further round to the east, the insect life becomes
more active. Our excursion is at an end.
Towards the middle of August the summer already begins to
wane. The large Tipula arctica imagines are no longer seen, the
swarms of gnats are now obviously decreasing and the other insects
are not nearly so numerous as before. At night the frost begins to
be felt towards the end of the month and the insect life is eee
АС»
®)
Lo
А
54 FRITZ JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN. The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition.
on the down grade; the Bombus females begin to seek their winter
quarters and here and there we find a dead butterfly, whilst the
living imagines have disappeared. The air becomes strangely still,
the migratory birds are ready to depart, and of the previously so
lively, buzzing flies and gnats we now meet with but isolated indi-
viduals, which will clearly soon die. Spiders and mites hold out
the longest and run about the whole day, whilst the still living
insects have gone to their winter shelters under stones and tufts of
plants. Thin ice lies on the freshwater lakes at nights and the time
soon comes when the sun’s warmth of the day is not sufficient to
melt it; the winter has begun.
We have now completed the entomological survey of North East
Greenland for one whole year. How far the various insects go in
towards the inland ice I have not sufficient observations to
determine, but from isolated finds it appears that at least the butter-
flies, flies, gnats and spiders are found right up on the “nuna land”
of the inland ice. Thus amongst others an Anarfa pupa was found
in a Dryas plant on a peak 10—12 miles from the margin of the
inland ice.
If we compare the summers of 1907 and 1908 with respect to
the insect life we find the interesting condition, that although the
country in 1908 was much later in becoming clear of snow than in
1907 (with the consequence that the plants began to blossom some-
what later in 1908) the insect life on land was earlier in 1908 than
in 1907. The mean temperature namely was highest in 1908,
and when it is likewise remembered, that the hibernating land
insects (larvae etc.) are found on dry places free of snow, it becomes
clear what is the most essential factor for the early or late begin-
ning of the insect life. The animal life of the freshwater lakes,
on the other hand, was much later in 1908 than in 1907, as the
lakes are often the places where most snow lies and they are hardly
free of ice before well into June.
II. A CATALOGUE OF THE INSECTS
OF NORTH-EAST GREENLAND WITH DESCRIPTIONS
OF SOME LARVE.
BY
J. C. NIELSEN.
he insects brought home by the “Danmark” Expedition
were collected by the zoologist of the expedition, Frirz JOHANSEN,
in the neighbourhood of the place where the ship was located, 76° 46’
N.L., 18° 14 W.L.
The insect fauna at this spot has in the main the same character
as in the more southerly parts of East Greenland which have been
investigated by earlier expeditions, but the number of species 15
somewhat smaller in consequence of the more northerly situation
of the regions investigated. Nervertheless, the insect fauna shows
a few striking characteristics, е. 5. the complete absence of represen-
tatives of the order of beetles. I have formerly! remarked upon the
sparse representation of this order also in other parts of East Green-
land in comparison with West Greenland; this condition reaches its
culmination in North-East Greenland where not a single beetle was
obtained, in spite of the fact that not a few collections obviously
were made at places which the beetle fauna frequents, under stones
and plants, and in the water.
No species of Pseudoneuroptera or Orthoptera have yet been
brought from East Greenland, though representatives of these orders
are found on the west coast (the representative of the latter order,
a blatta, was however possibly introduced).
Similarly, no Physopods occur in the collections; the zoological
journal, however, mentions a spring-tail not brought home, and of
this family several species are known further south on the east coast.
Haematopinus trichechi, not previously found on the walrus of
East Greenland, has now been met with here, so that the order of
Siphunculata is also represented in this part of Greenland.
1 I. C. NIELSEN: The Insects of East Greenland (Medd. om Grönland. ХХХ, 1907,
p. 366).
56 FRITZ JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
Hymenoptera.
From East Greenland 20 species of wasps were hitherto known,
of which only 4 (5) are present in the collections, which further
contain two species not previously taken in East Greenland (Praon
sp. and Nematus sp.), and of these the latter is new to the Green-
land fauna.
1. Nematus sp.
One specimen ($). Beginning of July 1908.
From Greenland we row know in all four species of Chalasto-
gastra, of which however only one specimen of each has been
brought home, namely, from the west coast Nematus obductus Htg.
and а species described by Marlatt! from Disco, N. borealis, of
which only the type-specimen is known, and from the east coast
two specifically distinct females, both of which probably belong to
undescribed species.
2. Ichneumon groenlandicus Lbck.
One specimen. 1. July 1908.
3. Limneria Deichmanni Nielsen.
This species seems to be very common and to cause no little
destruction among the larvae of Dasychira groenlandica.
The wasp lays its eggs on the one-year old Dasychira larvae,
and these do not increase appreciably in size afterwards; they over-
winter as usual, appear next spring and begin to eat, but are then
killed by the parasite. I have already mentioned? that the larva of
the parasitic wasp spins cocoons inside in the empty skin of the
host larva after boring a hole through the underside of this, and
through the hole it attaches the cocoon firmly to some understra-
tum, Dryas-plant or grass. Such fast-spun cocoons were collected
in the first days of June, and the wasp was hatched out on the
14th of the same month.
4. Microgaster sp.
Some empty cocoons.
5. Praon sp.
Ап Aphis was found attached to а stone by means of an empty
wasp cocoon, with the form characteristic of the genus Praon, a
short cone, on the truncated point of which the skin of the leaf-
louse was attached. No species of this genus has hitherto been
known from East Greenland; on the other hand, Praon objectus
! Proceedings of the Academy of Science of Philadelphia 1892, р. 133.
HINCSNIEZSEN ср. 387.
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. 57
Halid. occurs on the west coast!, and it is therefore probable that
the cocoons mentioned belong to this species.
6. Bombus hyperboreus Schönh.
7. B.balteatus Dhlb.
Both the two Greenland humble-bees are common; the hiber-
nating females appear in the middle of June and the workers appear
already at the end of this month. They fly on Salix, Potentilla,
Saxifraga, Pedicularis and Cassiope. Both species build their nests
under the ground in deserted marmot holes.
A nest of B. balteatus was found on July 15th 1908 ca. 17 cm.
under the surface. The entrance to the nest was ca. 35 cm. long.
The nest was padded with a thin layer of moss and indeterminable
bits of plants. Close to the entrance there was a small clump of
food on which were laid about a score of humble-bee eggs, and
behind this lay another clump containing a pair of tiny larvae. The
nest contained some bundles of cocoons, namely, a clump of worker-
cocoons which were all empty (in all 20 cocoons), further cocoons
containing mature male-pupae (in all 11) and lastly cocoons with
full-grown female larvae (in all 11). Some workers were found in
the nest but no males or females.
A female of B. hyperboreus was found at the end of June in the
act of crawling down into a marmot hole, presumably seeking for
a place to build its nest. On digging out the marmot hole a clump
of old, moulded, humble-bee cocoons was found in it.
The life-history of the Greenland humble-bees does not differ,
therefore, from that of the more southern species.
Diptera.
From East Greenland ca. 50 species of flies were hitherto known,
of which 15 occur in the collections, in addition also а pair of
indeterminable Muscidae, as also two species which are new (Rham-
phomyia sp., Catabomba groenlandica).
1. Tipula arctica Curt.
This species is common and was brought home in numbers.
The larvae are found in circular holes са. 2—8 cm. deep in the
ground, especially under Cassiope-tufts. The change to the pupa
stage also takes place here.
The pupae were found at the end of June and empty pupa-cases
were found already on the 25th of the same month. The period of
flight lasts till the beginning of August.
1 W. LUNDBECK: Hymenoptera groenlandica (Vidensk. Meddelelser fra den natur-
hist. Forening i København, 1906, р. 242).
58 FRITZ JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
The larvae take two years to become full-grown.
The larva when full-grown is 3—4 cm. long, the colour is light-
brown, darker anteriorly, with a fine silky pubescent sheen. The
form is linear, pointed anteriorly, the body round in section. The
segments in the middle, both on the dorsal and ventral surfaces,
with a transverse row of 4 short bristles; on the underside the two
innermost bristles are somewhat further forward than the two outer.
The head has the usual form in Tipula larvae and can be re-
tracted into the following segment.
The antennae (fig. 1a) are articulated to a soft area in the ante-
rior margin of the head-capsule, they are single-jointed, brownish,
thick and slightly pointed in front: the tip is soft, flatly arched and
bears two sense-processes, the one broad and flatly arched (fig. 1b)
and the other narrower and more pointed. On the inner side of the
antennae, almost at the middle, there is a round, scar-like area, presum-
ably some organ of sense, recalling an organ which SIMON BENGTSSON"
has found on the maxillary palp of the Phalacrocera larva (fig. 1 ¢).
A number of setae occur between the antennae.
The front part of the head is soft-skinned and covers the mouth-
parts like a plate.
On this plate, which most probably corresponds to the clypeus
and labrum in other eucephalic Nematocera larvae, there is on each
side a chitinous list (fig. 1d) which is bent at an angle; the posterior
branch, which is parallel with the anterior border of the head and
lies somewhat far from this, sends backwards a chitinous ridge
which goes down towards the underside of the plate; the front
branch, which is narrower than the posterior, is directed towards
the anterior margin of the head; here it is again bent at an angle
out towards the side of the head and from its point projects a ridge
pointing obliquely forwards. In front of this terminal part of the
list, on a somewhat projecting portion of the anterior margin of
the head, there is а single thick, somewhat bent bristle and also a
number of smaller setae.
The underside of the plate is densely beset with projecting
bristles, which in front are thick, large and placed in rows, but
further back become thinner and form a dense felt. On each side
of the head a dense clump of bristles projects out over the anterior
margin (fig. le).
The mandibles (fig. 2) are strong, flattened and incised at the
tip, so that they end in two teeth, of which the outer is the larger.
1 Simon BENGTSSON: Studier öfver Insektlarver, I. Phalacrocera replicata Lin.
(Kongl. Fysiogr. Sällskapets i Lund Handlingar. Ny Följ p. 84 1897).
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. 59
The inner margin -bears a large appendage, corresponding to the
prostheca, which Simon BENGTSSON found in the Phalacrocera larva.
The appendage is club-shaped and the point densely covered with
bristles (fig. 2a).
The maxillæ are flat and blade-like; the cardo is formed by an
elongated, triangular plate, which bears in front two very closely
placed long bristles; the stipes is densely covered with bristles, soft-
skinned, with a stronger chitinous border which surrounds the place
of insertion of the palp. The palp (fig. 3) is short and thick, cylin-
drical; at its tip which is soft there is a group of five or Six sense
processes (fig. 3a). As in the Phalacrocera larva there is a sense-
organ at the side, which consists of a soft-skinned area surrounded
by a rounded chitinous ring (fig. 3b).
The underside of the head-capsule bears the underlip (ectolabium
$. BENGTS.), which has the form of a plate supporting anteriorly 7
rounded teeth (fig. 4), of which the central one is the largest, the
others decreasing in size and the outermost quite weakly developed.
Posteriorly the plate is somewhat contracted. Under this and pres-
sed close up to it, on the underside of the mouth, there is another
plate (endolabium $. Вемет$.), which is somewhat smaller, broader
posteriorly and drawn out in front in 5 teeth (fig. 5).
The posterior end of the larva is slightly constricted in front
of the tip of the abdomen, which is flattened and shows the three
pairs of caudal appendages usual in Tipula larvae; each of the upper
pair has a small triangular, brownish plate at the base; the middle
pair are the longest and the lowest the shortest (fig. 6).
The length of the pupa is са. 2 cm. (fig. 7). On the dorsal
surface of the thorax there is a pair of spiracles, which diverge
somewhat and are slightly curved. The dorsal surface of the thorax
is transversely rugose and bears here a pair of flat tubercles.
The abdominal segments are divided by a constriction into an
anterior and a posterior part; on the dorsal surface behind the line
of division they bear a row of posteriorly directed spines which
increase in size towards the hind end of the larva. On the sides
there are two spines, one of which is placed on the anterior margin
of the joint, the other at the posterior margin. On the underside
of the second abdominal joint there is a pair of spines and each of
the succeeding bears a row of strong spines posteriorly.
The upper side of the anal joint has three pairs of spines stand-
ing behind one another; the last pair is found at the end of the
body. The underside of the joint bears a row of 6 large spines
which are situated under the front pair on the dorsal surface.
60 Fritz JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
2. Pachyrrhina Lundbeckii Nielsen.
3 specimens; the end of June 1908.
3. Chironomus hyperboreus Steg.
A number of specimens swarming over a moss on June 23
1907. All the specimens are somewhat darker than the other Green-
land specimens I have seen.
4. Chironomus sp. Tanypus sp.
Several specimens of a smaller Chironomus which could not be
determined with certainty, and several larve of Chironomus and
Tanypus species.
5. Culex nigripes Иен.
Some specimens; August 1907.
A pair of larvae almost or perhaps quite full-grown have been
brought home; they were all somewhat rubbed.
The length of the largest larva is ca. 12 mm. The body is
greenish; the head and air-tube brown. The upper side of the head
bears 6 simple bristles (fig. 8), of which 4 are placed on a flat curved
line between the bases of the antennae and the two others somewhat
further back between the central ones in the anterior row. On each
side of the labrum there is a short and thick, inwardly curved
bristle. The antennae are beset with fine serrations and have two
simple bristles at the middle.
The prothorax has on each side 8 bristles, which in the younger
larvae are divided into several, in the older into a large number of
rays. On the anterior margin there are three, close together and a
little in front of the middle three and posteriorly two single. The
two succeeding segments bear on each side at the middle a bristle
with several rays, the following segments on each side two bristles
with several rays and posteriorly on the upper side two bristles,
divided into rays.
The 8th segment has at the sides a row of pointed, posteriorly
directed, depressed and elongated spines (fig. 9). On the underside
there is a bristle with four rays. The air-tube is three times
as long as broad. The under side has two rows of backwardly
curved, fine chitinous spines (fig. 10), which bear a tooth at the base;
the spines increase in size outwards and reach out to the middle of
the air-tube; between the two outermost there is а bristle with
three rays.
The under surface of the 9th segment bears several bristles with
several rays and on the posterior margin of the under surface there are
some dense clumps of bristles. The caudal appendages are almost
twice the length of the ninth joint segment, narrow and pointed.
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. 61
6. Rhamphomyia sp.
Two specimens.
This species greatly resembles R. hirtula Zett. in general appearance
but differs in the construction of the male hypopygium and in the
female having darker wings. Like R. hirtula it seems to be somewhat
nearly related to В. Brusewitzii Holmgr. but according to the
description the hypopygium of this species is otherwise constructed.
7. Melanostoma ambigua Fall.
One male from the end of June 1908; two females, the one from
June 23 1907, the other from the beginning of June 1908.
8. Helophilus groenlandicus O. Fabr.
One specimen. °/s 07.
9. Syrphus tarsatus Zett.
A couple of specimens from July 1908.
10. S. arcuatus Fall.
A couple of specimens from July 1908 and July 1907.
11. Catabomba groenlandica n. sp.
Male. The head is somewhat low and the face extraordinarily
broad; the frons is distinctly inflated. The face is dark- or dirty
yellow and blackish yellow towards the sides, the frons is black,
but yellowish red just above the antennæ, it and the sides of the
face are very slightly dusted; the jowls and the lower margin of
the mouth aperture are black. The antennæ are black or blackish.
The frons has very long, black hairs which extend down the cheeks.
Occiput is black, somewhat greyish dusted; the bristles along the
upper eye margin are black. and they are long and overhanging.
The eyes are clothed with long, but not dense, white hairs; they
have the upper facets distinctly larger than the lower, the small
facets stretch up along the posterior margin. Thorax is dull æneous
black, pleuræ of the same colour; the disk is clothed with long,
black or brownish black hairs. Scutellum is blackish yellow, some-
what translucent, clothed with long, black hairs. Abdomen is
æneous black, somewhat shining, the first segment a little dullish;
there are three pairs of yellowish spots, those on the second segment
are small and indeterminate, and they may be quite wanting, the
segment then being quite black; the two other pairs are somewhat
lunulate, the front margin being slightly excised, but the hind margin
well rounded; the spots are situated at the front margin of the
segment but are not in connection with it, and they are also well
away from the side margin; the hind margin of the fourth segment
is distinctly, that of the fifth segment less distinctly reddish yellow.
The venter is black, sometimes with paler incisures. Abdomen is
62 FRITZ JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
clothed with long, black hairs; only on the second segment on and
around the spots, there are paler to yellow hairs. The legs are
chiefly black, the knees broadly reddish yellow, which colour extends
more or less on the tibiæ, and the tibiæ may be quite reddish with
a more or less distinct black ring about the middle; the hairs on
the legs are black. The wings are hyaline, very slightly yellowish,
with brown veins; the halters are yellowish. Length 8—10 mm.
There are four specimens of this species, all males; they are
quite alike, only varying a little with regard to the presence or
absence of the first pair of spots and lighter or darker legs. The
species is evidently allied to the known Catabomba species. it is
very characteristic by its extraordinarily low and broad face. %/7 07,
four specimens.
12. Peteina stylata В. & B.!
A full-grown larva of Dasychira groenlandica, which was caught
on June 22 1907, bore 6 eggs of this parasitic fly on the side and
underside of the thoracic joints. The parasitic larvae had not yet
penetrated into the host.
A full-grown larva, also collected in June, was put aside for
rearing, and as it was found dead in the beginning of July it was
subjected to closer examination, which showed that it contained 3
scarcely full-grown, dead larvae of the parasitic fly. On this host-
larva the eggs of the parasitic fly were found in a furrow on the
thorax; the parasites had bored their way in through the skin and
lay pressed close up against each other, in very distinct sacks of the
fatty body; and their hind parts were attached to the skin of the
host by means of a chitinous funnel. The digestive canal of the host
was still untouched and the fatty body still not wholly consumed.
Lastly, a single parasitic larva bored its way out of a Dasychira
larva on the 6th of July and pupated.
The eggs are almost 1 mm. long, white and without sculpture
on the shell.
The larva in the 38rd stage. The length of the specimens examined,
which were a little contracted, varied from 9—11 mm.
The spinous armature is found on the anterior margins of the
! The species was not reared so that the determination is not quite certain. I
believe, however, that only Peteina stylata can be in question, as in addition
to this species only two other parasitic flies occur in Greenland, namely, Tachina
larvarım L. and Echinomyia aenea Steg. The larvae of the first-named species
are known (1. С. Nielsen: Iagttagelser over entoparasitiske Muscidelarver hos
Arthropoder. Kbhvn. 1909, р. 60) and are different from the above described
larvæ: the Echinomyiae are viviparous and the pupae are too small to belong
to Е. aenea. Further, Peteina stylata was earlier reared from the larvæ of Dasy-
chira groenlandica (cf. I. C. Nielsen: The insects of East Greenland, p. 394).
The Insects of the ‘‘Danmark”’ Expedition. 63.
2nd to the 5th segment, on the front and hind margins of the 6th,
7th and 8th segment! and only on the hind margins of the 9th to
the 11th segments. All the spines on the front margins are directed
backwards and all those on the hind margins forwards. The spines
are largest on the front segments, decrease in size backwards and
again. become a little larger on the last segments; on the 2nd to the
4th segment they are in fairly regular straight rows, but on the 5th
and following segment in shorter and somewhat curved rows. On
the anal joint there is a broad girdle of spines which are directed
forwards and placed in regular little rows.
On the head there is a pair of sense-organs, each of which bears
two papillae, almost of the same size; the one has at the tip a clear,
refracting body and the other some sense processes.
The mouth-hooks (fig. 11а) are broad and strong, not much bent;
the inner side with an obtuse tooth at the middle, the base with a
broad and strong, spine-like prolongation anteriorly, and posteriorly
there is a somewhat more slender spine directed backwards. The
mouth-hooks are jointed on the front pharyngeal plates (fig. 11b):
these plates are broadest anteriorly and the upper margin straight.
They are connected by means of a joint with the posterior part of
the pharyngeal skeleton, which consists on each side of an upper
(fig. 11c) and a lower pharyngeal plate (fig. 11d); the upper is the
larger, the upper margin straight, drawn out anteriorly into an
abruptly truncated, short prolongation. The posterior margin of the
pharyngeal plate is evenly rounded. The lower pharyngeal plate is
shorter than the upper, broadest posteriorly and here sharply incised.
The anterior spiracles (fig. 12) occur in the articulation between
the second and third joint; the atrium is elongated and curved; the
base broad; at the tip there are five, short-stalked branches placed
in a line, those lying innermost being the largest.
The posterior spiracles (fig. 13) are situated in the flattened hind
end of the body, somewhat up towards the dorsal surface; they are
surrounded by a broad, black ring of chitin which sends bridges in
over the spiracle; the one bridge is cleft at the tip. The bridges
reach almost to the tracheal opening, which lies inside the chitinous
ring. The spiracle is divided by the bridges into 3 parts, each
bearing an elongated respiratory-area, the middle one of which is
the shortest.
The anus lies on the ventral side at a fair distance from the
hind end.
The puparium is са.9 mm. long and са. 3 mm. broad, oval with
! On the hind margin of the 5th segment there are a few spines.
64 Fritz JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN.
distinct but not deep divisions into joints, brownish, finely trans-
versely rugose. The anterior spiracles project like two small,
black buttons; the posterior spiracles not projecting. The outer
pupa-spiracles could not be detected.
13. Calliphora groenlandica Zett.
A number of specimens, some of which were haiched from pupae
found on a dog’s carcase on July 17th 1907.
14. Fucellia pictipennis Becker.
Of this species, which was founded on specimens brought home
from East Greenland by earlier expeditions, a single specimen was
found in the collections.
15. Scatophaga squalida Meig.
A number of specimens from June to July 1908.
Suctoria.
1. Pulex glacialis Taschb. !
Отно FABRICIUS in Fauna Groenlandica* noted that “Ршех
irritans” occurred on the Greenland hare. MEINERT? denoted FABRI-
clus’ species as P. glacialis, which TASCHENBERG* had founded on
specimens taken “auf Lepus glacialis am Nordpole”. Since FABRICIUS”
time no fleas have been found on hares in West Greenland; on the
other hand, P. glacialis was found by a Swedish Expedition on hares
in East Greenland’ (Dronning Augustas Dal 1/7, Ruths Island 1°/s
and Cape Weber °%s), and the “Danmark” Expedition has also
brought home a no small number of this species, with which
practically all the hares shot on the Expedition were infested.
The species is known, outside Greenland, only from Arizona,
where it is found on “rabbits”®. With regard to the distribution in
Greenland the following may be remarked. Fasricrus, who mentioned
the hare-flea from Greenland, only knew the fauna on the west
coast, but since his time no fleas have ever been found on hares.
One of the members of the Expedition, JORGEN BRONDLUND, who
had hunted in West Greenland, had it specially noted in the Zoolo-
' The Hon. CH. Вотнзснию has kindly named this species.
* Отно FABRICIUS: Fauna Groenlandica, р. 221.
” F. MEINERT: Neuroptera, Pseudoneuroptera, Thysanopoda, Mallophaga, Collem-
bola, Suctoria, Siphunculata Groenlandica (Vidensk. Medd. fra den Naturhist.
Forening i Kobenhavn 1896, p. 175).
* О. TASCHENBERG: Die Flöhe. 1880, р. 77.
> E. WAHLGREN: Aphanipterologische Notizen nebst Beschreibungen neuer Arten
(Arkiv för Zoologi Bd. 1, 1903, p. 186).
°С.Р. Baker: Preliminary studies in Siphonaptera (Canadian Entomologist
XXVI, 1895).
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. 65
gical Journal, that it struck him as surprising that the East Green-
land hares were infested with fleas, as he had never observed these
on hares in West Greenland.
Lepidoptera.
Of the 20 species of butterflies hitherto known from East Green-
land 9 occur in the collections, and these also contain a species new
to the East Greenland fauna, Sericoris Schultziana.
Of the larvae of the Greenland butterflies the larva of Dasychira
has long been known, and in 1900 AurıvırLıus! described the larvae
of the two Argynnis species. There is a number of lepidopterous
larvae in the collections, a few of which could be referred to their
species; these are described here under the separate species.
A single Heterocera larva, which cannot be referred to any of
the known Lepidoptera of Greenland, was found on June 15th along
with pupae in a cocoon under flat loose stones. The larva (fig. 14)
is about 8—9 mm. long, spindle-shaped; its greatest breadth falls
across the 2th—3th abdominal segment.
The head is only a little narrower than the 1st thoracic segment
and longer than this, almost square-shaped, brown with a few long
bristles; the upper lip somewhat darker; base of the feelers light,
the tip black. The first thoracic segment with a dorsal plate of the
same colour as the head; the anterior margin of the plate with a
row of 6 bristles, the posterior margin likewise with 6, the two
innermost of which stand further in on the plate than the outer
ones. The base of the bristles surrounded by faintly delimited,
sometimes continuous dark spots. The two following segments and
the abdominal segments light with brownish spots. The thoracic
segments have almost in the middle a transverse row of 6 dark
spots, of which the innermost is the largest and the outermost very
small, and the hind margin has two, lying behind the outermost in
the front row, with which they agree in size. The front margins
of the abdominal segments with four spots, the two inner being the
largest and broader than long, the outer rounded; the posterior
margins with two spots, which stand behind the two central ones
in the front row. The preanal and the anal segment bear a brown-
ish plate with some bristles. Along the sides of the abdominal
segments are two rows of spots and along the underside 4 rows.
All the spots bear a bristle in the middle.
" CHR. AURIVILLIUS: Lepidoptera och Coleoptera indsamlade under Professor
A. G. Nathorst’s arktiska expeditioner 1898 och 1899, under den svenska expe-
dition till Beeren Eiland och under Konservator G. Koltoffs expedition til Grön-
land (Ofversigt kgl. Vet. Akad. Férh. 1900, p. 1135).
XLIII. 5
66 Fritz JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN-
The prolegs are situated on the 3rd to 6th abdominal segments
and the last segment bears a pair of anal-prolegs. The forelegs are
brownish:
In the living larva the colour on the anterior third is light
yellow and backwards the colour evenly changes to light-red.
A pair of pupae, which were found together with the larvae,
are ca. 9 mm. long, brownish, slender and quite without spines or
appendages.
1. Colias hecla Lefbr.
A number of specimens from July and beginning of August.
2. Argynnis chariclea var. arctica Zett.
Many specimens from the end of June and into July.
3. A. polaris Bois.
This species seems to be just as common as the preceding; its
time of flight is from the end of June on into August.
4. Lycaena orbitulus var. aquilo Bois.
More rare than the three foregoing butterflies; flies in July.
5. Dasychira groenlandica Woche.
Many larvae have been brought home; they were taken on
willows and Dryas. The larvæ are seen in the end of May and the
cocoons, full-grown larvae and pupae were found at the end of
June and half-grown larvae were also found at the same time, so
that AURIVILLIUS is right in his view, that the generation of this
species takes more than one year. On a cocoon found on July 8th
a clump of Dasychira eggs was found deposited.
6. Anarta Richardsonii Curt.
A number of specimens from the end of June till on in August.
Some larvae were brought home; one, which was not full-grown,
was found hibernating under Dryas on May 3rd 1907 and full-grown
larvae were collected in June of the same year.
The larva reaches a length of 3 cm. The head is brown, the
clypeus and the antennae darker; the dorsal plate on the Ist
thoracic segment brown with dark marbling. The upper surface
of the body dark brownish with a broad, light dorsal line, which
is divided in the middle by one or two continuous, fine, dark lines.
The sides and the under surface light brownish.
7. Anarta lapponica Thunb.
Two specimens from the beginning of July. To this species
probably belongs another Noctuid larva which was found under
Dryas on May 19th 1907.
The length of the larva is ca. 15—20 mm. The head is black;
The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition. 67
the dorsal plate of the Ist thoracic segment brown with black marb-
ling. The upper side grayish brown with а broad, light dorsal
stripe, which is divided by a narrow, darker stripe, anteriorly cleft
into two. On the sides there is a broad, white stripe; the under
surface light brownish.
8. Anarta Zetterstedtii var. Kolthoffii Auriv.
One specimen; end of July 1907.
9. Cidaria polata Dup.
Several specimens from the middle of June to on in August.
A not yet full-grown larva was found on Dryas, June 15th 1907.
The length of the larva is ca. 8 mm. The head is dark brown
with outflowing darker small spots. The abdominal segments some-
what behind their front margin with two black oblique stripes which
are broadest anteriorly and form an acute angle with each other,
being continued back to the posterior margin of the segment. The
area within the stripes white with indistinct brownish longitudinal
striping. The last segment with a broad, black median line. The
two last thoracic segments posteriorly with faint markings like those
on the abdominal segments. Along the sides there is a narrow
white line. The under surface and the legs dark grayish brown.
10. Sericoris Schultziana Fabr.
Two specimens from July and August.
11. Penthina groenlandicana Bang Haas.
A number of specimens from June and July. The species flies
on dry, sunny places with Cassiope vegetation.
12. Botys torvalis Möschl.
Several specimens from the end of June and July.
Neuroptera.
Apatania arctica Boh.!
Five specimens, all females; July and beginning of August.
This species is the only representative hitherto known in East
Greenland of the Order Neuroptera; on the west coast we have five
species in addition to Apatania.
Hemiptera.
1. Nysius groenlandicus Zett.
A number of specimens, larvae and imagines, were taken together
on July 31 1907 and on July 15th 1908. The species had hitherto
1 The determination of this species is due to Mr. Esben Petersen, Silkeborg.
*
5
63 Fritz JOHANSEN and I. С. NIELSEN. The Insects of the “Danmark” Expedition.
not been found in East Greenland; on the other hand, it is common
in West Greenland.
2. Chlamydatus pulicarius Fall.
Some small Hemiptera larve, which probably belong to this
species were found on Potentilla June—July.
3. Aphis sp.
A single specimen of a small leaf-louse, which contained a para-
sitic wasp, was found, as mentioned already, attached to a stone.
Beside these some green apterous Aphidæ were found on an Epilo-
bium °/7 08.
Siphunculata.
Haematopinus trichechi Boh.
In August 1906 a walrus was shot and the flesh cut up to serve
as food for the dogs in winter; when the skin was brought out to
be used in the spring of 1907, a score of living specimens of
Н. trichechi were found in the inner part of the nipples.
EXPLANATION OF THE FIGURES.
Plate УП.
Fig. 1. Tipula arctica. Larva. The front part of the head from above. a antennae,
b sense-process, с sense-organ, d chitinous ridge,
e bristles.
— 2. — — — Mandible. a prostheca.
— 3. — — — Maxillary palp. a sense-process, b sense-organ.
— 4. — — — Ectolabium.
— 5. —- — -- Endolabium.
— 6. — -- — Hind end.
— 7. = — Рира.
— 8. Culex nigripes. Larva. The head.
Plate VIII.
— 9. Culex nigripes. Larva. The two last segments.
— 10. — — Spinous row from the under side of the air-tube.
— 11. Peteina stylata. Larva in 3rd stage. Mouth-hooks and pharyngeal skeleton.
a mouth-hooks, b the anterior pharyngeal plates, с the
upper pharyngeal plates, d the lower.
— 12. — — Anterior spiracle.
— 13. —- — Posterior spiracle.
—14. Undetermined lepidopterous larva.
17—1—1910.
Мер. ом GRØNL. XLIII. Nr. 2. [NIELSEN] Pr. УЦ
6.
Fig. 1—7. Tipula arctica. Fig. 8. Culex nigripes.
J.C. М. del.
=
-
.
SS ee a eee | В
MED». ом @вомт. XLIII. Nr. 2. [NIELSEN] Рт.. УШ
АХ АМА
>. /0.
Fig. 9—10. Culex nigripes. Fig. 11—13. Peteina stylata.
Fig. 14. Undetermined lipidopterous larva.
9—13 J.C. №. del. 14 Dansk Repr. Anst.
TIT.
FRESHWATER ALGÆ FROM THE "DANMARK-
EXPEDITION” TO NORTH-EAST GREENLAND
(N. OF 76°N. LAT.)
BY
Е. BØRGESEN
1910
XLIII. 6
INTRODUCTION.
ur knowledge of the Freshwater Algæ of East Greenland is based
O so far as I know upon the following papers:
ROBERT Вогот, Desmidieer från Grönland (1888).
— Nagra Söttvattensalger från Grönland (1893).
F. BØRGESEN, Ferskvandsalger fra Østgrønland (1894).
Е. LARSEN, The Freshwater Algæ of East Greenland (1904).
The first-mentioned paper deals, as is already shown in the
title, only with Desmids and these originate from the whole of
Greenland; from East Greenland 44 species are reported; they are
found in the collections of A.G.NATHORST and J. A. BERLIN from “Kung
Oskars hamn” near Angmagsalik, 65° 31’ N. Lat.
In the second paper, on the other hand, Вогот deals with several
freshwater algæ belonging to other groups which he had found on
studying the Desmids in the above-mentioned collections. He men-
tions 4 species from East Greenland, all from the same locality.
In my paper, based upon material collected by N. Harrz during
the expedition to East Greenland, 1891—92, are described a little
more than 150 Chlorophycee and Cyanophyceæ; they were mostly
gathered in the environs of “Hekla Havn” at “Danmarks ©” in
Scoresby Sound (са. 70° 30° N. Lat.); some of the material also origi-
nates from “Hold with Hope” in Hudson Land (ca. 73° 30° N. Lat).
Finally, in LARSEN's paper 125 Chlorophyceæ are mentioned. The
material collected by Kruuse and N. Hartz comes from localities
from Кар Dan (65° 31' М. Lat.) up to Sabine Island (74° 30' М. Lat.). In
his paper LARSEN brings together all the Chlorophyceæ hitherto known
from East Greenland and they amount to 189 species in all; of these
no less than 144 are Desmids.
The present list is based upon collections from the Danmark-
Expedition to the North-east coast of Greenland in 1906—1908. They
all originate from the district around Danmarks Havn, 76° 46' №. Lat.
and 18° 43’ W.Long., on Germania Land.
The material was collected by Mr. A. LUNDAGER with exception
of a single sample taken by Dr. LinpHarp.
WD F. BORGESEN.
It consists of 20 samples preserved in spirit and 10 dried spe-
cimens. The localities from which the collections come are arranged
from north to south in the following list.
Germania Land: —!
Rypefjeld.
Hvalrosodde,
Dove Bust,
Lille Snenæs,
Snens, Between + as 43' N. Lat.
Stormkap, and 21°—17° 30' W. Long.
Vester Elv, |
Basiskæret, J
Termometerfjeld,
Kap Bismarck,
Yderbugten,
Danmarks Havn,
In general the material collected may be regarded as rather
poor, both as to quantity and quality. Certainly a few samples
from “Vester Elv” (river) contained a great number of species but
on the other hand the number of individuals was for most species
very few; of several species I have only found one single specimen.
This has made the determination decidedly troublesome.
The reason why the material upon the whole is so comparatively
poor and the collections so small, often only consisting of a trifle
at the bottom of the glass, of which even a great part was earth
particles etc., is certainly that the manner of collecting was not the
best one: a plankton-net was placed in running water and left there
for several hours. In this way nearly all the Desmids named in
the following list were collected and also several of the other spe-
cies. Of course some bigger algæ e. g. Nostoc and clumps of algæ
are collected along the sides of some lakes. On the other hand
there are scarcely any collections made of small fixed alge.
Judging from the really rather rich collections from Vester Elv
gathered in this somewhat unpractical way I think it beyond doubt
that a skilled algologist would be able to find a considerably greater
number of species.
From this point of view I do not think it would be worth while
to try and make a detailed comparison of the Freshwater
alga flora from WestGreenland and the surrounding lands
with that of East Greenland. I shall restrict myself to pointing
' The localities here given are arranged from №. W. to S. E.
List of Freshwater Algz. 73
out the discovery of the genus Spirotenia, which up to the present
had not been recorded from East Greenland or Greenland on the
whole. The species found was Sp. condensata Bréb. which is well-
known in arctic countries, е. я. in Nova Zembla and Spitzbergen.
Of high-arctic species hitherto not found in Greenland may be
mentioned Euastrum tetralobum Nordst. which is known only from
Spitzbergen and Nova Zembla.
Further may be named Cosmarium spetsbergense Nordst. also a
true arctic species, which has earlier only once been found in East
Greenland (Hurry Inlet); elsewhere it is only known from Jan Mayen,
Spitzbergen and Nova Zembla.
Of the genera which I have mentioned in my above-mentioned
paper, namely: Mesotaenium (1 species), Penium (5 species), Cylindro-
cystis (1 species), Closterium (6 species), Pleurotenium (1 species),
Cosmarium (42 species), Arthrodesmus (2 species), Xanthidium (1 spe-
cies), Staurastrum (29 species), Euastrum (6 species), Gonatozygon
(1 species), Desmidium (1 species), Gymnozyga (1 species), Hyalotheca
(1 species), Sphaerozosma (1 species) the following genera have not
been discovered here: Mesotaenium, Arthrodesmus, Xanthidium, Gonato-
zygon, Gymnozyga and Sphaerozosma. Of Closterium only two species
were present and of Euastrum 4 species only: 3 of the 6 species
mentioned in my earlier paper have disappeared but in return the
quite arctic species Euastrum tetralobum has been added and this
confirms the fact first pointed out by Borpr, later by me, that the
large Euastrum-species are wanting in the true arctic regions; the
interesting find of Е. oblongum in Jameson Land by LARSEN makes
this species an exception.
With regard to the most of the above-named genera the com-
plete disappearance of some and the reduction in the number of
species of others is in good accordance with what we know about
the distribution of the plants in question, which all disappear or
are very seldom in the arctic regions!.
The remaining green alge are of little interest. Of bluish-green
alge Nostoc commune seems to be common. Even very large
specimens are found along the border of lakes or on places quite
laid dry in summer. Stones on the bottom of lakes when dry were
found covered by blackish crusts of different bluish-green alge e. g.
Glæocapsa-species and Calothrix etc.
No material of snow-alge was brought home.
! ROBERT Вогот, Grunddragen af Desmidieernas Utbredning i Norden (Bihang till
К. svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl. Bd. 18, Afd. Ш, No. 6, Stockholm 1887).
74 Е. BORGESEN.
List of papers most referred to.
Вотот, ROBERT, Desmidieer fran Grönland. — Bih. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bd. 13,
Afd. III, Nr. 5, Stockholm 1888.
— Nagra sötvattens-alger fran Grønland. — Bot. Notiser, 1893, Lund.
BORGESEN, F., Ferskvandsalger fra Østgrønland. — Medd. om Grønland, XVIII, Kjeben-
havn 1894.
— Algues d’eau douce (С. Ostenfeld-Hansen, Contribution à la flore de Vile Jan
Mayen). — Bot. Tidsskr. Bd. 21, Kjobenhavn 1897.
Larsen, E., The Freshwater Algæ of East Greenland. Medd. om Gronland, ХХХ.
København 1904.
— Ferskvandsalger fra Vest-Gronland. — Medd. om Grønland, XXXIII. København
1907.
NORDSTEDT, O., Desmidiaceæ ex insulis Spetsbergensibus et Beeren Eiland in expedi-
tionibus annorum 1868 et 1870 suecanis collectæ. — Öfvers. К. Vet. Akad. Förh. 1872.
No. 6. Stockholm.
— Desmidieæ arctoæ. Öfvers. К. Vet. Akad. Förh. 1875. No. 6. Stockholm.
— Desmidieer samlade af Sv. Berggren under Nordenskiöld’ska expeditionen till
Grönland 1870. — Öfvers. k. Vet. Akad. Förh. 1885. No. 3. Stockholm.
WILLE, N., Ferskvandsalger fra Novaja Semlja samlede af Dr. Е. Kjellman paa Norden-
skiölds Expedition 1875 (Öfversigt af kongl. Vet.-Akam. Förhandl. 1879, No. 5,
Stockholm).
Myxophycee.
Chroococcacee.
Chroococeus Nag.
1. С. turgidus (Kütz.) Näg., Gattung. einz. Algen, р. 46.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 6 (Неа Havn, Gaasefjord).
Found in two collections, one from a bog, the other from a
small lake.
Loc. Hvalrosodde: Lomsoen, Rypefjeld.
Gloeocapsa Nag.
1. а. ambigua Nag., Gattung. einz. Algen, р. 50.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 6.
Found together with other bluish-green algæ in blackish crusts
upon stones from the bottom of a dry mountain-lake.
Loc. Lille Snenæs.
2. С. ianthina Kütz. Nägeli, Gattung. einz. Algen, р. 51.
Borgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Ostgronland, p. 6.
List of Freshwater Alge. 119
Found together with the above-mentioned species under similar
conditions.
Loc. Lille Snenæs, Thermometer Fjeld.
3. а. Magma (Bréb.) Kütz., Tab. Phycol. I, tab. 22, fig. 1.
Borgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Ostgronland, р. 6.
Found among other Algæ (Nostoc etc.) and Musci near the foot
of a glacier and in blackish incrustations on stones.
Loc. Lille Snenæs, Thermometerfjeld.
Coelosphaerium Nag.
1. С. lacustre (Chodat) Ostenf., Beitr. z. Kenntnis 4. Algenflora
des Kossogol-Beckens (Hedwigia, Bd. 46. р. 396, tab. IX, fig. 6—7).
The pear-shaped cells in the colony were somewhat closer
together than in the figure of Ostenfeld. i
Vat. cell. = 2:5 м.
Dr. OSTENFELD has most kindly seen the plant in question and
told me that it seems to him identical with this species.
Found in a collection from Vester Elv.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
Merismopedium Meyen.
1. М. glaucum (Ehrb.) Näg., Gattung. einz. Algen, р. 55.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 7 (Неа Havn).
A few specimens were found in collections from Vester Elv.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
Oscillariaceæ.
Phormidium Kitz.
1. Ph. autumnale (Ag.) Gom., Monograph. Oscill. p. 207, tab. V,
fig. 28—24.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Ostgronl., р. 7 (Неа Науп..
Found as blackish crusts among other algæ and mosses on wet
earth near a glacier.
Loc. Thermometerfjeld.
Rivulariaceæ.
Jalothrix Ag.
С. parietina (Näg.) Thur., Bornet et Flahault, Revision des
Nostoc. héter. I, p. 366.
Found together with Gloeocapsa-species as blackish crusts on
stones from the bottom of a dry mountain lake.
76 Е. BORGESEN.
This species was not earlier found in East Greenland but in
West Greenland it is known from Karajak (RICHTER, Süsswasseralgen
aus dem Umanakdistrikt, p. 4).
Loc. Lille Snenæs.
Scytonemacee.
Scytonema Ag.
1. Sc. Myochrous (Dillw.) Ag., Bornet et Flah., Revision des
Nostoc. hétérocyst. p. 104.
Borgesen, Ferskvandsalger. Ostgronland, p. 8.
A few filaments most probably belonging to this species were
found in a small lake.
Loc. Hvairosodde: Lomsgen.
Tolypothrix Kitz.
1. T. lanata (Desv.) Wartm. Bornet et Flahault, Revision des
Nostoc. hétérocyst., p. 120.
Borgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Ostgronl., p. 8 (Hekla Havn).
The filaments were a little thicker than the measurements given
by Bornet et FLAHAULT, 1. с., namely 10—14 и. But after having
examined specimens referred by BorNET et FLAHAULT to this species,
е. 5. No. 184 in Wittrock & NORDSTEDT, Algæ Exsicc., I have also
here found filaments Teaching this thickness and I have therefore
no doubt as to the correctness of the determination.
Found in small lakes.
Loc. Hvalrosodde: Lomsoen.
Nostocaceæ.
Nostoc Vauch.
1. N.commune Vauch. Bornet et Flahault, Revision des Nostoc.
hétérocyst. р. 203.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønl. р. 8.
This species seems to be common. It is found partly in the
form of a large gelatinous membrane, partly also as more crumpled
masses.
It occured in bogs ahd also in places laid dry.
Loc. Basiskeret, Stormkap, Kap Bismarck, Rypefjeld.
Young small colonies of Nostoc were found in several collections.
They were e.g. common as blackish crusts, composed of fragments
of Alge and Musci etc. on ground near the foot of a glacier at
“Thermometerfjeld” and on damp ground at “Yderbugten”.
List of Freshwater Algæ.
—1
AI
Conjugata.
Desmidiaceæ.
Penium Bréb.; De Bar.
1. P. Libellula (Focke) Nordst., Desm. Bornh. р. 184. Penium
closteroides Ralfs, Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, p. 9, tab. 1,
he. 1.
Boldt, Desm. Grønland, р. 40 (sub. nom. Penium closteroides) (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 9 (Неа Havn).
Long. = 70—80 u; lat. = 17 p.
A single specimen seen in a collection from “Vester Elv”.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
2. P. margaritaceum (Ehrenb.) Bréb., Ralfs, Brit. Desm. p. 149,
tab, 25, fis. 1: tab.33, бе. 3.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 9 (Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 94 (Kordlortok, Amaka, Kap Dalton, Jameson
Land, Sabine 9).
Lat. = 25 м.
Found in two collections from ‘Vester Ех”.
Гос. Danmarks Havn.
3. P.curtum Bréb., in Kitz Spec. Alg. р. 167. Cosmarium curtum
Ralfs, Brit. Desm. р. 109, tab. 32, fig.9. Dysphinctium (Actinotaenium)
Ведейапит Näg., Gatt. einz. Alg. р. 110, tab. VIE.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland. р. 9, 10 (Hekla Havn, Hold with Hope).
Larsen, Freshw. А]. East Greenl., р. 94 (Kap Dalton, Jameson Land, Kap Borlase
Warren, Sabine 9).
The specimens found quite agreed in size with those I have
mentioned in my earlier paper (1. с.).
Long. = 43 2; lat. = 22%.
Loc. Danmarks Havn: Vester Elv.
Cylindrocystis Menegh.
1. С. Brebissonii (Menegh.) De Bary, Conjug. р. 35, tab. 7, fig. Е
1— 22.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 10 (Gaasefjorden).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 90 (Kingorsuak, Kap Dalton).
Some few specimens were seen in a collection from “Vester Elv”.
Lat. = 15 y.
Гос. Danmarks Havn.
Spirotænia Breb.
1. Sp. condensata Bréb. in Ralfs, Brit. Desm. р. 179, tab. 34, fig. 1.
Long. = 90 y; lat. = 17 y.
78 F. BORGESEN.
The size of the plant corresponds closely with that NORDSTEDT
gives for the plant found at Mosel Bay in Spitzbergen (Nordst.,
Desm. arct. р. 15) but it is much smaller than the size WEST gives for
the plant in his Monograph of the British Desmidiacez, vol. I, р. 38.
This species has not earlier been found in East Greenland and
it is also not mentioned from West Greenland (cfr. Larsen, II). Only
found in few specimens in Vester Elv.
Loc. Danmarks Науп.
Closterium Nitzsch.
1. Cl. acutum (Lyngb.) Bréb., in Ralfs Brit. Desm., р. 177,
tab. 30, fig. 5.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg., Østgrønland, р. 10 (Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 81 (Kordlortok, Liverpool Kyst in Hurry Inlet).
Loc. Danmarks Havn. Only a few specimens found in Vester Elv.
Lat. cell. = 11 Us
2. Cl. striolatum Ehrenb., Entw. 4. Inf. р. 68. Ralfs, Brit. Desm.,
р. 170, tab; 29, fie: 2:
Boldt, Desm. Grønl. р. 42 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 10 (Неа Havn, Rode Q).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., p. 82 (Amaka, Liverpool Kyst in Hurry Inlet).
Only a single specimen was found, the breadth of which was 50 м.
Loc. Danmarks Havn: Vester Elv.
Pleurotenium Nag.
1. P. truncatum (Bréb.) Nag., Gatt. einz. Alg., p. 104.
Only a single specimen found in a collection from Vester Elv.
Long. = 400 и; lat. = 54 y.
In size it agrees very well with the measurements given by
NORDSTEDT for plants found in Spitzbergen and Bear Island (Nord-
stedt, Desm. Spetsb. p. 26).
This species was not earlier recorded from East Greenland but
it is known from West Greenland (Larsen, Il, р. 346).
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
Tetmemorus Ralfs.
1. T. levis (Kütz.) Ralfs, Brit. Desm. р. 146, tab. 24, fig. 3.
В attenuatus Wille, Ferskvandsalg. Nov. Semlja, p. 58, tab. 14,
Во. 70.
Roldt, Desm. Gronl. р. 42 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 101 (Amaka Kap Dalton).
Only one half-cell was found; the cell-membrane was minutely
punctate.
Lat. cell. = 28 y.
Loc. Danmarks Havn: Vester Ely.
List of Freshwater Algæ. 79
Cosmarium (Corda) Ralfs.
1. С. bioculatum Breb., in Ralfs, Brit. Desm. р. 95, tab. 15, fig. 5.
Boldt, Desm. Grenl, р. 16 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferkvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 18 (Rode ©, Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenland, р. 88 (Kap Borlase Warren. Sabine 9).
А form agreeing well with that mentioned by Nordstedt, Desm.
arct., р. 20, tab. 6, fig. 8 was found in Vester Elv.
Long. — 29%; lat. = 27 м; lat. isthm. Эд.
Loc. Danmarks Land. |
2. C. Botrytis (Bory) Menegh., Synops. Desm. p. 220.
Boldt, Desm. Gronl., р. 28 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen. Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 13 (Hekla Havn, Danmarks 9).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenland, р. 83 in several localities from Kordlortok
(65° 40’)—Kap Borlase Warren (74° 1’).
Some few specimens were found in collections from Vester Elv.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
3. C. conspersum Ralfs, Brit. Desm., p. 101, tab. 16, fig. 4.
В rotundatum Wittr., Skandin. Desm., р. 13, tab. I, fig. 4.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 13 (Неа Havn, Rede ©).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenland, p. 84 (Jameson Land, Kap Borlase Warren).
A form rather near that mentioned by Вотот (Desm. Grønl. р. 26,
tab. 2, fig.27) was found in a collection from a small lake at Hvalrosodde.
Long. = 80 и; lat. = 65; lat. isthm. = 24 4; crass. = 39 м.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
4. С. crenatum Ralfs, Ann. Nat. Hist., vol. 14, р. 394, tab. 11,
fig.6; Brit. Desm., p. 96, tab. 15, fig. 7.
Boldt. Desm. Gronl., р. 18 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 14 (Неа Havn).
Forma “Сгепа laterales 3”, Nordstedt, Desm. Spetsberg. р. 30,
tab. 6, fig. 7.
One specimen was found in Vester Elv.
*costatum Nordstedt, Desm. Spetsberg, р. 30, tab. 6, fig. 9.
Long. = 41 p.
Found in the same locality.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
5. C.cyclicum Lund., Desm. Suec., p.35, tab. 3,
fig. 6.
*arcticum Nordst., Desm. Spetsb., р. 31, tab. 6,
fig. 13.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 15 (Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 84 (Amaka, Falkefjæld,
Kingorsuak, Kap Dalton, Liverpool Kyst in Hurry Inlet, Sabine ©).
Fig.1. C. cyclicum Lund.
*arcticum Nordst. (7*°/1).
This species was absolutely the most common in the collections
80 F. BORGESEN.
and the only one of which I have seen a great number of specimens.
It seems to be rather variable as to size and form of the cell. Most
of the individuals seen quite agreed with the above-cited figure of
NORDSTEDT, the cells being quite circular.
Long. = 62 u — lat.
Other specimens were more hexagonal, coming near to the form
which Вогот in Desm. Grenl., р. 23, tab. I, fig. 24 has called var.
subarcticum.
Long. = 67 м; lat. = 70 y.
This variety seems to come rather near to Cosm. Nordstedtianum
Reinsch, which NORDSTEDT in “Hedwigia”, 1876 has referred as a
form to Cosm. cyclicum (cfr. W. West and G. S. West, Monogr. of
the Brit. Desm., vol. II, р. 146, pl. LVIII, fig. 12).
Loc. Danmarks Havn: Vester Elv.
6. C. Debaryi Arch. in Pritch. Infus., p. 735. Л
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 21 (Hekla Havn).
3 Nove Semliæ Wille, Ferskvandsalg. Nov. Semlja, р. 48.
The form observed seems to agree quite well with forma minor
Wille, 1. с. tab. XII, fig. 47; but as I have only found a single spe-
cimen without chlorophyll I may mention that the determination
is not at all certain. Perhaps we have to do with a form of C. Cu-
cumis Ralfs (cfr. NoRDSTEDT, Desm. arct. р. 29, tab. VIII, fig. 28, 29)
or with a big form of C. quadratum Ralfs.
Long. = 90; lat. = 47; lat. isthm. 31 м.
The specimen was found in Vester Elv.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
7. C.granatum Bréb. in Ralfs, Brit. Desm. р. 96, tab. 32, fig. 6.
Boldt, Desm. Grønl. p. 12 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, p. 18 (Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 85 (Kordlortok, Amaka).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
8. C. hexalobum Nordst., Desm. Spetsb., p. 33, tab. VII, fig. 16.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, p. 15 (Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East. Greenl. р. 85 (Kap Dalton, Liverpool Kyst in Hurry Inlet).
This arctic and alpine species has been found in
several collections from Vester Elv. The form observed
(Fig. 2) agreed rather well with NORDSTEDT's description,
the only difference being that it was not quite so broad.
Bornt in Desm. Grønl. р. 24 has also mentioned such
a narrow form.
Fig.2. С. Веха-
lobum Nordst. Long. = 54 и; lat. = 37; lat. isthm. = 14.
GÆL) Loc. Danmarks Havn.
List of Freshwater Algæ. 81
9. С. Holmiense Lund., Dem. Suec., р. 49, tab. 2, fig. 20.
3 integrum Lund., Nordst. Desm. Spetsb., pag. 28, tab. 6, fig. 5.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 20 (Hekla Havn, Rede ©, Hold with Hope).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Grenl. р. 85 in diflerent localities from Kingorsuak
(60° 5’) to Sabine © (74° 30’).
A few specimens were found in Vester Elv.
Long. = 58 и; lat. = 30 u.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
10. C. Meneghinii Breb.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 16 (Неа Havn, Rode ©».
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., p. 86 (found in several localities from Kord-
lortok 65° 40’—Sabine Ø 74° 30’).
Forma De Bary, Conjugaten, р. 72, tab. 6, fig. 34.
Found once in a small lake.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
11. С. microsphinctum Nordst., Desm. Ital. р. 33, tab. 12, fig. 9.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 16, tab. 1, fig. 6.
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., р. 86 (Kap Dalton, Sabine 9).
The observed form quite agreed with that mentioned and figured
in my above-quoted paper. I propose to call it f. groenlandica.
Long. = 48 м; lat. = 32 4; lat. isthm. = 20 y.
Found once in Vester Elv.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
12. С. nasutum Nordst., Desm. Spetsb. р. 33, tab. VII, fig. 17.
Forma granulata Nordst., |. с. р. 34, Wille, Ferskv. Alg. Nov.
Semlja. p. 42, tab. XII, fig. 30.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 14 (Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 86 (Kordlortok, Kap Dalton, Liverpool Kyst
in Harry Inlet).
The form observed was in good accordance with the above-
mentioned figure by WILLE.
Long. = 40 4; lat. = 32 y.
It was found in two collections from Vester Elv.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
13. C. ochtodes Nordst., Desm. arctoæ, p. 17, tab. VI, fig. 3.
Boldt, Desm, Grønl. p. 29 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, p. 13 (Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. р. 87 (in several localities from Kordlortok
65° 40° to Sabine O 74° 30’).
Found in several collections from Vester Ely.
Long. = 88 м; lat. 59 и.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
82 Е. BORGESEN.
14. С. pseudoprotuberans Kirchner, Alg. Schles. р. 150.
Borgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Ostgronland, р. 18, tab. I, fig. 12 (Hekla Науп).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., р. 88 (Атака).
Forma isthmo latiore Borgs. 1. с.
A few specimens like this form were found in Vester Elv.
Long. = 38 и; lat. = 30.
Гос. Danmarks Havn.
15. C. pulcherrimum Nordst., Desm. Brasil., p. 213, tab. 3, fig. 24.
В boreale Nordst., Desm. Spetsb. р. 32, tab. 6, fig. 14.
A few specimens were found in collections from Vester Elv and
Lille Snenees.
Long. = 544; lat. = 39 y.
Loc. Danmarks Havn, Lille Snenees.
16. C. quadratum Ralfs in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. p. 395, tab. 11,
fig. 9; Brit. Desm., p. 92, tab. 15, fig. 1 a.
Boldt, Desm. Grønl., р. 10 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 20 (Hekla Havn, Rode Q).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 88 (in several localities from Kordlortok
65° 40’ to Sabine © 74° 30).
Forma Willei West, Monograph. Brit. Desm., vol. Ш,
a. р. 59, С. quadratum Ralfs forma “Semicellule lateribus
nonnumquam latissime rotundatis 1. rectis, nec retusis”
Wille, Ferskvandsalg. Nov. Semlja, p. 37, tab. XII,
fig. 20 et forma “major” ibidem fig. 21.
Dez
The form found had a somewhat thinner membrane
than Wiırre’s. (Fig. 3). Compare “Forma semicellula
Fig.3. C.quadra- In apice magis rotundata quam in forma typica”,
шт Ralfs, forma Borge, Sib. Chlorophyllophyce-Flora, р. 12, fig. 6.
Willei West Long. = 57—67 y; lat. = 35—38 и; lat. isthm. = 28 и.
850
2 Loc. Vester Elv, Hvalrosodde.
17. C. reniforme (Ralfs) Archer in Journ. of Bot. 1874, p. 92.
Cosm. margariliferum Menegh. var. reniformis Ralfs, Brit. Desm.
р. 100, tab. 16, fig. 2a.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 13 (Hekla Havn).
A few specimens of this species were found in Vester Elv.
Long. = 50 и; lat. = 47 м.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
18. С. speciosum Lund., Desm. Suec. р. 34, tab. Ш, fig. 5.
var. biforme Nordst., Desm. Spetsb. р. 30, tab. VI, fig. 11.
Boldt, Desm. Gronl., р. 20 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 15 (Rode ©).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., р. 88 (Sabine ©).
List of Freshwater Algæ. 83
Specimens agreeing very well with Norpstept’s description and
figure were found in two collections from Vester Elv.
Long. = 62—65 и; ‘lat. = 40—47 и.
Loc. Danmarks” Havn.
19. С. spetsbergense Nordst., Desm. Spetsb., р. 27, tab. 6, fig. 3.
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 89 (Liverpool Kyst in Hurry Inlet).
This arctic species hitherto only known from Jan Mayen, Spitz-
bergen, Nova? Zembla and the above mentioned locality in East
Greenland has been found in two collections from Vester Elv.
Long. = 61 м, lat. = 32 y.
Гос. Danmarks Hayn.
20. C.subcrenatum Hantzsch. in Rabenh. Alg. No. 1213; Nordstedt,
Desm. arct., р. 21. tab. 6, fig. 10—11.
Boldt, Desm. Gronl. p. 18 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 14 (Неа Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., р. 89 (in several localities from Kordlortok
65° 40° to Sabine © 74° 30’).
Long. = 32 м; lat. = 29 y.
Гос. Found in two collections from Vester Elv.
21. C.subspeciosum Nordst., Desm.arct.
pa22, tab.6, fig. 13.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 16.
A form agreeing very well with the de-
scription and figure of NORDSTEDT was found
in a collection from Lille Snenæs.
Long. = 42 и; lat. = 30 м.
А zygospore was found of this species
(Fig.4). This was globose, furnished with rather
long furcate-emarginate spines, each of which
arises from a broadly conical base provided
with teeth.
Lat. zygosp. cum. spin. = 54 м.
Lat. zygosp. sine spin. = 40 и.
Fig. 4. C. subspeciosum Nordst.
A Zygospore. (°°°/1.)
Loc. Lille Snenes.
22. C. Turpinii Bréb., Liste Desm., p. 127, tab. 1, fig. 11.
Boldt, Desm. Gronl., р. 24 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 13, tab. 1, fig. 7 (Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., p. 90 (in several localites from Kordlortok
65° 40’ to Sabine © 74° 30’).
The specimens found agreed very well with the form (forma
gallica Lund.) mentioned in my earlier paper.
Long. = 62 4; lat. = 54 y.
Loc. Danmarks Havn: Vester Ву.
84 Е. BORGESEN.
Kuastrum Ehrenb., Ralfs.
1. Е. binale (Turp.) Ehrenb., Berlin. Monatsber. 1840, р. 208.
Ralfs, Brit. Desm., p. 90, tab. 14, fig. 8 (partim).
Boldt, Desm. Grenl., р. 8 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland. p.31 (Danmarks ©, Gaasefjord, Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., р. 91 (in several localities from Kordlortok
65° 40 to Sabine Ø 74° 30’).
Forms like Ratr’s fig.8b and e were found in collections from
Vester Elv.
Long. — 2» 122
subspec. dissimile Nordst., Desm. arct. р. 31, tab. VIII, fig. 31.
Found in a gathering from the same locality.
Long. = 28 u; lat. = 20 м.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
2. E. cuneatum Jenner in Ralfs, Brit. Desm.,
p. 90, tab. 32, fig.3 a.
Boldt, Desm. Grenl., р. 7 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 31 (Hekla Havn).
AN
N
|
|
The form found (Fig. 5) was somewhat smaller
than the typical form and had somewhat narrower
apices. It seems to come rather near the form men-
tioned by RACcIBORSKI in Nowe Desmidyje, р. 30,
tab. VI, fig. 8. Cir. also Вотот, I. c. p. 7, tab. 1, fig. 7.
Long. = 86 u; lat. = 42 u.
EI аа Only a few specimens were found in two collec-
Jenner. Forma. tions from Vester Elv.
(Fo): Loc. Danmarks Havn.
3. Е. elegans (Breb.) Кам. Phycol. germ., р. 135; Ralfs, Brit.
Desm., p. 89, tab. 14, fig. 7 a—d.
Boldt, Desm. Grønl. p. 9 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, p. 31 (Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 91 (in several localities from Kordlortok
65° 40° to Sabine © 74° 31’).
Forms like Rarrs fig.7 a and b (1. с.) were found in Vester Elv
and a small lake at Hvalrosodde.
Loc. Danmarks Havn, Hvalrosodde.
4. Е. tetralobum Nordst., Desm. arct. р. 30, tab. VII, fig. 30.
This characteristic and, it seems, true arctic species was not
earlier known from East Greenland. Hitherto it was only known
from Spitzbergen and Nova Zembla.
The form observed quite agreed with the figure and description
of NORDSTEDT.
Long. = 89 м; lat. = 64 y.
It was found in several collections from Vester Elv.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
List of Freshwater Algæ. 85
Staurastrum Meyen.
1. S. aculeatum (Ehrenb.) Menegh., Desmidium aculeatum
Ehrenb., Infus. p. 142, tab. 10, fig. 12. Ralfs, Brit. Desm., p. 142,
tab. XXIII, fig. 2.
В ornatum Nordst., Desm. Spetsb. р. 40, tab. VII, fig. 27.
forma spinossisima Wille, Ferskvandsalg. Nov. Semlja, р. 54,
tab. XIII, fig. 67 —68.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 28 (Неа Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., р. 95 (Kap Dalton, Liverpool Kyst in Hurry Inlet).
Some few specimens of this variable species, coming near to the
above-mentioned form of WILLE, were found in several collections
from Vester Elv.
Long. = 37 м; lat. = 40 y.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
2. S. avicula Bréb. forma Boldt, Desm. Grønl. р. 37. Staur.
denticulatum (Någ.) Archer forma Elfv. Anteckn. finska desm. p. 9,
tab. 1, fig. 5.
Å single specimen was found in a collection from Vester Elv.
Long. 29 и; lat. sin. acul. = 35 y.
It was not earlier found in East Greenland but the species is
known from Godthaab (LARSEN, 1.c., p.347) and Friedrichsthal (BoLpT,
1. с., p. 37) in West Greenland.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
3. S. Brebissonii Archer in Pritch. Infus. p. 739.
forma minor Nordst., Desm. Grønl. p. 10.
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 96 (Kordlortok, Amaka, Kap Dalton, Liver-
pool Kyst in Hurry Inlet, Jameson Land).
Found in several collections from Vester Elv.
Long. = 40—50 и; lat. 35 —40 м.
Гос. Danmarks Havn.
4. 5. hexaceros (Ehrenb.) Wittr., Gotl. Ol. sötv. Alg., р. 151.
forma alternans Wille, Ferskvandsalg. Nov. Semlja, p. 52, tab.
XIII, fig. 63.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 27 (Неа Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., p. 97 (Jameson Land).
The form observed was a little larger than that mentioned by
Wrere (1. ¢:).
Long. = 31 и.
Found in a collection from Vester Elv.
Гос. Danmarks Havn.
XLIII.
—1
86 Е. BORGESEN.
5. S. lunatum Ralfs, Brit. Desm., р. 124, tab. 34, fig. 12.
Forma Groenlandica Borgs. Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 29,
tab. 2, fig. 27. |
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., р. 98 (Liverpool Kyst in Hurry Inlet).
Found in a collection from Vester Elv.
Lat. sin. Spin. = 30 ».
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
6. $. meganolotum Nordst., Desm. arctoæ, р. 35, tab. VIII, fig. 38.
Boldt, Desm. Grenl. р. 39 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 28 (Неа Havn).
Of this species I have found a form coming near to forma
Groenlandica mentioned by me (1. с. р. 28, tab. 2, fig. 29). It was
observed in a collection from Vester Elv.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
7. St. monticulosum Bréb. in Chev. Micr. р. 272. Ralfs, Brit.
Desm., p. 130, tab. 34, fig. 9.
в bifarium Nordst., Sydl. Norg. Desm. р. 31, fig. 14.
forma Groenlandica Borgs., Ferskvandsalg. Ostgronland, p. 29,
tab. 2, fig. 25.
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., p. 98 (Jameson Land).
Found in collections from Vester Elv.
Long. = 40 и; lat. = 38 y.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
8. S. muticum Bréb., Ralfs, Brit. Desm., р. 125, tab. 21, fig. 4;
tab. 34, fig. 13.
Børgesen, Ferkvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 24 (Hekla Havn).
Found in collections from Vester Elv.
Long. = 32—39 "ne lat. = 29—81 д.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
9. S.orbiculare (Ehrenb.) Menegh., Synops. Desm. р. 225. Ralfs,
Brit. Desm. р: 125, tab. 21, fig. 5.
Borgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Ostgronland, p. 24 (Hekla Havn).
A form like Razrs fig. 5 a was found once in a collection from
Wester Elv.
Long. = 30 и = lat.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
10. S. pachyrhynchum Nordst., Desm. arctoz, p. 30, tab. VIII,
fig. 34.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 24 (Неа Havn, Rode 9).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 99 (Amaka, Kap Dalton, Jameson Land,
Sabine ®).
List of Freshwater Algæ. 87
forma 3-gona Nordst. 1. с.
forma 5-gona Nordst. 1. с.
This very variable species occurred rather commonly in several
collections from Vester Elv.
Loc. Danmarks Hayn.
11. S. polymorphum Bréb. in Ralfs, Brit. Desm. p. 135, tab. 22,
fig. 9; tab.34, fig. 6.
Boldt, Desm. Gronl., p. 38 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Borgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Ostgronland, p. 27 (Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., р. 99 (Kordlortok).
Found in collections from Vester Elv.
Long. = 42 и = lat.
Loc. Danmarks Науп.
12. S.punctulatum Breb. in Ralfs Brit. Desm., р. 133, tab. 22, fig. 1.
В Kjellmani Wille in Dijmphna Togt. vidensk. Udb. р. 86, St.
Kjellmani Wille, Nov. Semlja, р. 50, tab. XIII, fig. 52.
Boldt, Desm. Grenl. р. 35 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Borgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Ostgronland, р. 26 (Неа Науп).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 99 (Kap Dalton, Liverpool Kyst in Hurry
Inlet, Sabine 9).
A single specimen was found in Vester Elv.
Long. = 48 м; lat. = 33 u.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
13. S.pygmæum Bréb. in Ralfs Brit. Desm., р. 213, tab. 35, fig. 26.
Boldt, Desm. Grenl., р. 34 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Ostgronl., р. 26 (Неа Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. р. 99 (Атака, Tunok, Kap Borlase Warren).
forma major Wille, Ferskvandsalg. Nov. Semlja, p. 51, tab. XIII.
fig. 54.
Long. = 44 м.
Found once in a collection from Vester Elv.
Гос. Danmarks Hayn.
14. S. Saxonicum Bulnh. in Rab. Krypt. Fl. Sachs. р. 190.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 27.
Found in a collection from Vester Му.
Long. = 75 м; lat. = 68 y.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
15. 5. teliferum Ralfs, Brit. Desm. р. 128, tab. 22, fig. 4; tab. 34,
fig. 14.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 27 (Неа Havn, Danmarks ©).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. р. 100 (Kordlortok, Атака, Falkefjæld, Jame-
son Land).
var. ordinata Borgs. l.c. p.27, tab. 2, fig. 23.
72
33 Е. BORGESEN.
Lat. cell. sire spin. = 33 м.
Found in cu.lections from Vester Ех.
Loc. Danmarks Havn:
Hyalotheea Ehrenb.
1. H. dissiliens (Dillw.) Bréb. in Ralfs Brit. Desm. p. 51, tab. 1,
fig. 1.
Boldt, Desm, Gronl. р. 43 (Kung Oskars hamn).
Borgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Ostgronland, p. 32 (Hekla Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 93 (Falkefjeld, Jameson Land, Liverpool
Kyst in Hurry Inlet, Sabine 9).
This species seems to be rather common; var. tridentula Nordst.
р
(Sydl. Norges Desm. р. 48, fig. 23) was found and most probably also
other forms occurred.
Found in several collections from Vester Elv.
Гос. Danmarks Havn.
Desmidium Ag.
1. О. Swartzii Ag., Syst. Alg. p. 9. Ralfs, Brit. Desm., р. 61,
tab. 4.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, р. 32 (Неа Havn).
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl., p. 90 (Kordlortok, Amaka).
Found in two collections from Vester Elv.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
Zygnemaceæ.
Zygnema (Ag.) De Bary.
Z. spec.
Filaments of a sterile Zygnema were found rather richly in a
collection from Vester Elv. A few of the filaments had rhizoids;
perhaps we have to do with Zygogenium ericetorum.
Also in a collection from “Lille Snenzs” a sterile Zygnema.
Chlorophycee.
Pleurococcaceæ.
Pleurococeus Menegh.
1. P. vulgaris Menegh., Näg. Gatt. einz. Alg. p. 64, tab. IV E, fig. 2.
Børgesen, Ferskvandsalg. Østgrønland, p.36 (Danmarks ©, Rode ©, Неа Havn).
Verv few cells were found on bones.
Loc. Stormbust.
List of Freshwater Algæ. 89
Oocystacee.
Oocystis Nägl.
O. рес: ?
А few colonies were found of ап Oocystis-like plant. The cells
were roundish-oblong and occurred two together in the mother-cell.
Long. cell. = 32 4; lat. == 24 y.
Found in a collection from a small lake.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Hydrodictyacee.
Pediastrum Meyen.
P. spec.
A quite yonng colony was once found in a collection from
Vester Elv.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
Coelastraceæ.
Coelastrum Nag.
i. C. microporum Nag. in A. Braun, Alg. unic. p. 70.
Found in two collections from Vester Elv.
Гос. Danmarks Havn.
Ulothricaceæ.
Stichococeus Nag.
1. S. bacillaris Näg., Gatt. einz. Alg. p. 76, tab. IV G, fig. 1.
f. confervoidea Hazen., The Ulothricaceæ and Chaetophoraceæ
Sterne US. р. 160; tab. 22, [5.2 3.
Was found in form of longer or shorter filaments between Zyg-
nema.
Breadth of the cell 2,7, the length 2—4 times as great.
Found in a collection from Vester Elv.
Loe. Danmarks Havn.
Microspora Thur.
1. M. stagnorum (Kiitz.) Lagerh., Entwickelungsg. einiger Con-
fervaceen (Ber. 4. 4. bot. Ges. 1887, p.417). Hazen., Ulothricaceæ, р. 176,
tab. 24, fig. 12, 13.
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 108 (Falkefjeld, Jameson Land, Sabine ©).
Иа Cell 851.
Loc. Lille Snenæs (422).
90 Е. BORGESEN.
Tribonema Петь. et Sol.
1. T. bombycinum (Ag.) Derb. et Sol., Мет. phys. Alg. р. 18,
tab. IV; fig. 16—21. Hazen, Ulothricaceæ, р. 184, tab. 25, fig. 1—3.
Larsen, Freshw. Alg. East Greenl. p. 108 (Found in several localities from Kap
Dan (65° 31’) to Sabine © (74° 30’).
Lat. cell. = 6—8 м.
Loc. Lille Snenæs.
Prasiolaceee.
Prasiola Ag.
1. Р. velutina (Lyngb.) Wille, Færøernes Ferskvandsalger (Bot.
Notiser, 1897, p. 32, tab. 1).
Only a few filaments were found, but these agreed quite well
with the original specimen of LYNGBYE. Only filaments with a single
row of cells were present.
Lat. of the filament — 14—18 y.
Loc. Lille Snenees.
Oedogoniacee.
Oedogonium Link.
O. sp. Sterile.
Lat. fil. = 5,5 м.
Loc. Found in a small lake at Hvalrosodde.
O. sp. Sterile.
Lat. fil. = 11 м.
Loc. Found in the same locality as the above-mentioned.
Bulbochaete Ag.
B. sp. Sterile.
A form with short cells.
Lat. cell. = 24 и; long. cell. = 27 p.
Loc. Found in a collection from a small lake at Hvalrosodde.
B. sp. Sterile.
A form with longer cells (Bulbochete setigera?).
Lat. cell. = 24 y.
Loc. Found in the same collection as the abovexmentioned.
6—4—1910,
ГУ.
ON THE MARINE ALGÆ FROM NORTH-EAST
GREENLAND
(N. OF 76° М. LAT.)
COLLECTED BY THE “DANMARK-EXPEDITION”
BY
L. KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE
1910
XLIII. 8
INTRODUCTION.
he Marine Algz procured during the Danmark Expedition have
been collected by the botanist of the Expedition, Mr. Anpr.
LUNDAGER. As will be seen from the list of stations, they were pro-
cured by dredgings partly at the wintering place of the Expedition,
partly at various distances from it, outwards and southwards to the
small Island Maroussia, inwards and northwards to Stormbugt.
Only some few samples of alge found frozen in the ice or lying
on or floating among the ice originate from more distant localities;
these however are of less interest, as it is uncertain whether they
have grown in the neighbourhood of the place where they were
found or far from it. Almost all the gatherings have been made
in August and September 1907 and in July 1908. Only the acci-
dental samples mentioned have been collected at other seasons. The
collected algæ are partly dried partly preserved in alcohol; some of
the larger Laminariaceæ were dried in the air and afterwards salted.
А list of the localities where the algæ were collected is given
here. They are disposed from South to North. With exception of
the first and the two last, they are all situated between ca. 76? 30'
and ca. 76° 47’ Lat. N. From notes kindly given me by Mr. Lunp-
AGER I have added some communications about the vegetation and
the natural conditions at some of the places.
List of collecting places.
Са. 75° 50' Lat. N., 11° 23' Long. W., Aug. 4® 1906. Floating in the ice.
Along the East side of Store Koldewey Island, and in the bay be-
tween the two islands, Aug. 26%. (Calcareous algæ).
— Sept. 5th 1907. In the bay near the low tongue between the
islands Fucus inflatus was found growing in shallow water. At
a depth of 6 to 9 meters were found Alaria and Laminaria (sac-
charina о. grandis), in 15 meters depth Florideæ. In 19 to 22
meters depth was found Delesseria (sinuosa) on soft bottom
without stones or shells.
At Cape Bismarck, Sept. 28" 1906.
94 L. KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
Along Cape Bismarck Peninsula, around Renskeret, and to Marous-
sia. July 20 1908. The two Laminarie and Alaria were seen
growing more or less gregariously in comparatively shallow
water between Cape Bismarck and Renskæret. Delesseria sinuosa,
Turnerella Pennyi, Polysiphonia arctica а. о. occurred at a some-
Storm bugt
Bugten udfor & DANMARKS
Vesterdalen Re LYN
о
Daads en
те и rer вех N
Lille Koldewey 0
Cap Bismarck
Röselöbet , © $5 Renskeret
[4
< -,
ES e Maroussia
Store Koldewey 0
Danmarks Havn and surroundings. By Captain J. P. Koch.
what greater depth, probably ca. 20 meters. At a depth of
more than 24 meters Lithothamnia were dredged, but they were
lost by an accident.
Østre Havnenæs. Aug. 15th 1907.
Danmarks Havn. Aug. 1906 (Laminariæ).
— Aug. 15! and 28%, Sept. 10th 1907. Fucus (inflatus) grows in
shallow, disturbed water on stony ground around Vestre Наупе-
On the Marine Algæ from North-East Greenland. 95
nes al a depth of 2 to 4 meters. — 8 to 11 meters, soft bottom
with Florideæ.
Entrance to the harbour (Danmarks Havn), Sept. 9—10. Calcareous
alge (Lithothamnia and other incrusting alge).
At Vestre Havnenes, Sept. 4 and 10' 1907. Оп both sides of the
reef projecting from the point of land, 28 meters. In 8 to 11
meters depth Alaria with large sporophylls; no calcareous algæ.
— One sample from Vestre Havnenæs, Sept. 4th 1907 must have
been collected in the littoral (tidal) region. (Nothing has been
noted about the place where it grew.) It contains decidedly
littoral alga, such as Calothrix scopulorum, Enteromorpha proli-
fera, Pseudendoclonium submarinum, Ectocarpus maritimus (Pili-
nia maritima (Kjellm.) Возепу.) further Rhodochorton and others.
Along Vestre Havnenæs and off Baadskeret, Aug. 26 1907. 38
meters and deeper, stony bottom with calcareous alge and shells
of bivalves and barnacles. — In lesser depth associations of
Delesseria (sinuosa) or Phyllophora (Brodiei ”interrupta).
— Aug. 28 1907, 19 to 47 meters, Florideæ.
Stormbugt. Laminarie and Alaria.
Bay off Vesterdalen, Aug. 28 1907, 4 to 11 meters.
Cap Amélie, 77°32’ Lat. N., April 22t 1907, clumps of alge frozen
in the ice.
Hyde Fjord, 83° 15’ Lat. N., Мау 15!" 1907. 4 stipes of a Laminaria
(probably L. saccharina v. grandis), found lying on the ice in a
dried state by Capt. Koch.
As will be seen from the above list, a well developed sublittoral
vegetation seems to exist at several places in the explored area.
Thus, Fucus inflatus forms a vegetation at a few meters depth under
low-water mark. The Laminariacez (Laminaria saccharina v. gran-
dis, L. solidungula and Alaria Pylaii у. grandifolia) also form true
associations at a somewhat greater depth, while the Florideæ are
predominant at other places, mostly in greater depths, in particular
Delesseria sinuosa, Turnerella Pennyi, Polysiphonia arctica and Phyl-
lophora Brodiei* interrupta. The brown algæ, except the Laminariaceæ,
seem to be less copious; one of the most abundant in the collection
is Desmarestia viridis. The incrusting alge seem to occur rather
often abundantly at places where other algæ do not occur, in
particular on stony bottom in great depths; the most common of
these alge is Lithothamnion leve; further may be named Lithoderma
fatiscens, Lithothamnion glaciale and fecundum, Cruoria arctica and
Rhododermis elegans.
Further, it results from the facts related in the list and from
96 L. KoLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
the examination of the collection that associations of loose-lying algæ
occur at several places on soft bottom. In this condition Turnerella
Pennyi occurs in particular very abundantly and further Phyllophora
Brodiæi *interrupta, Polysiphonia arctica, Delesseria sinuosa, Stictyosiphon
tortilis, Ectocarpus littoralis, Chetomorpha Melagonium. On the other
hand, Fucus inflatus, which was so abundant among the loose algæ
in Scoresby Sound (Comp. К. ROSENVINGE 1898, I р. 47, II р. 219)
seems to occur more rarely аз loose-lying on the bottom in the ex-
plored area. Most of the species named continue probably vegeta-
ting for a long time in a loose condition. As formerly stated by
me (1898 II р. 221), that Polysiphonia arctica is almost always sterile
is certainly in connection with the fact that it is not attached to
the bottom.
As to the littoral region, it will be seen from the list that one
sample only has been collected above low-water mark; but Mr.
LuNDAGER has noted that Fucus inflatus occurs in clefts in the rocks
in the lower part of the littoral region at Vestre Havnenæs and at
Cape Bismarck.
Our knowledge of the Marine alge of East Greenland is due
for a great part to collections made during two Danish expeditions
in the last decade of the nineteenth century, namely by N. Hartz
in 1891—92 (К. RoseENvINGE 1898, I) and by С. Kruuse in 1898—99
(H. Jonsson 1904). According to Jonsson 114 species were known
from East Greenland in 1904. One of these species, however, Litho-
thamnion varians Foslie, must be omitted, as according to Foslie it
must be regarded as a form of Lithothamnion glaciale Kjellm. The
total number of species therefore becomes 113. The best investigated
part of the coast is that situated between 65° 31’ and 70° 27' Lat. N.,
while only very few species are known from more northern localities.
In the systematic part of this paper 60 species are recorded
(besides two undetermined). 5 of these species are new to Green-
land, 3 of them new to science (Cruoriopsis hyperborea sp. n., Рипс-
[ата glacialis sp. n., Myrionema foecundum (Strömf.) Sauv., Arthro-
chete pheophila sp.n., Pseudendoclonium submarinum Wille). 11 are
new to East Greenland (besides the last-named, further Lithotham-
топ tophiforme, Chorda tomentosa, Pheostroma pustulosum, Ectocarpus
maritimus (= Pilinia maritima (Kjellm.) Rosenv.), Epicladia Flustre,
Ulothrix scutata). The total number of species known from East
Greenland is thus 124 (besides an undescribed species of Choreocolax (?)
and perhaps a species of Acrosiphonia)'.
' The total number of species known from Greenland was in 1904, according to
Jonsson, 176, of which 165 were recorded from the west coast. As Lithotham-
On the Marine Algze from North-East Greenland. 97
Of the 60 enumerated species not less than 9 (15 р. ct.) have
only been found on the East coast (besides the five species new to
Greenland, further Chantransia efflorescens, Petrocelis polygyna, La-
minaria saccharina var. grandis and Arthrochete penetrans). This
rather high number seems to suggest a considerable difference be-
tween this area and that of the West coast. Some of these species
are however very small and will probably be found also on the
West coast on further investigation, like e. gr. Pseudendoclonium sub-
marinum, but others are so large and conspicuous that they can
scarcely be supposed to have been overlooked, as Punctaria glacialis
and Laminaria saccharina var. grandis. It must however be remem-
bered that only the southern part of the West coast can be said to
be rather well investigated with regard to the marine algæ, while
the part North of 73° Lat. №., with which a comparison would be
particularly desirable, is very imperfectly known in that respect.
A comparison of the flora communicated below with a list of
the species found in Scoresby sound, са. 70° 27’ Lat. М. (comp. К.
ROSENVINGE 1898 I) shows nearly the same number of species. As
the last-named locality, in particular Hekla Havn and surroundings,
must be considered as comparatively well investigated through N.
Hartz’s careful collections, we may be permitted to conclude that
the material brought home by Mr. LUNDAGER also gives a rather ex-
haustive idea of the algal flora of that small part of the Arctic Sea
where it was gathered. The comparison of the two floræ shows
further that a great number of species are common, as was to be
expected. Some of the not-common species are so inconspicuous
that their absence from one of the areas ought not to be taken into
consideration; in other cases their absence cannot be regarded as
accidental. As species occurring in Scoresby Sound but wanting in
the area here in question might be named: Dilsea integra (also found
at Sabine Island, 74° 32’ Lat. N.), Pessonellia Rosenvingii, Scaphospora
arctica (= Haplospora globosa?) Chordaria flagelliformis, Dictyosiphon
foeniculaceus, Punctaria plantaginea, Chetomorpha tortuosa. Further
may be named Agarum Turneri, the presence of which in Scoresby
Sound, however, has not been proved with certainty, and Ptilota
pectinata, which has been found at Cape Wynn (74° 32’ Nat. N.),
though not in Scoresby Sound. Of the species only found North of
76° Lat. N. must especially be named the new species Punctaria
nion varians must be omitted (see above), the number must be diminished
with 1, but as Chantransia microscopica var. collopoda must be regarded as a
distinct species (comp. K. ROSENVINGE 1909 p. 81) the number remains the same.
Thus, after the new additions to the flora, the total number for Greenland is
181, for West Greenland 165.
98 L. KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
glacialis, which seems to be a strongly arctic species with an extre-
mely northern extension, at least on this coast. The occurrence of
Chorda tomentosa, though only in feebly developed specimens, ap-
pears rather surprising, as it has not hitherto been observed on the
East coast. Lithothamnion tophiforme may also be named, though
it was only represented by one specimen. Thus, a certain floristic
difference seems to exist between Scoresby Sound and the area
North of 76° Lat. N., depending principally on the absence in the
latter of a number of species with a comparatively southern exten-
sion but also on the presence of at least one species with hyper-
borean occurrence.
When considering the number of species within the main groups
of alge the following numbers are found for the area here in ques-
tion, when the two undetermined species are included:
Number
of pack
species
Rhodophyceæ ....... 23 371
Pheophycez 2 272 23 371
Chlorophyceæ ...... 15 24-2
Cyanmophyceæ ....... 1 16
It is rather surprising that the red and the brown algæ are
found to be equally numerous in this area, as it has proved else-
where that the Phæophyceæ are the most numerous group of alge
in the arctic regions. When comparing these numbers with those
found by me for the whole of Greenland (1898, II p.173'), we find
that the percentage of the Rhodophycez has greatly increased, that
of the other groups more or less diminished. On the other hand,
we find the same proportion between the red and brown alge in
Scoresby Sound, for in Неа Havn were found 21 red, 22 brown
and 9 green alge (l.c. р. 232), and including the species found in
the neigbourhood of Hekla Havn (1. с. р. 231) we find the following
numbers: 26 red, 26 brown and 10 green alge. The relative num-
ber of the Phæophyceæ seems thus to be increasing and becomes
predominant on going from the Atlantic northwards to the Arctic
Sea, but it diminishes on going further northwards in the strongly
arctic parts of the sea, dividing the dominion with the Florideæ
which greatly increase in number.
When the 60 species of North-East Greenland are divided into
three groups, arctic, subarctic and North Atlantic in a similar man-
1 | take here the numbers as I found them in 1898 without considering the later
additions and corrections to the flora.
On the Marine Algæ from North-East Greenland. 99
ner as that used in 1898 (II), a much smaller number of North
Atlantic species results than in the flora of the whole of Greenland,
as might be expected. When all the species are included the fol-
lowing numbers result: arctic 35 р. ct, subarctic 466 р. ct. and
North Atlantic 18:3 p.ct., while the numbers for the whole of
Greenland are: arctic 30 р. сё, subarctic 377 р. ct. and North
Atlantic 32:3 р. ct.! When the Rhodophycee and Phæophyceæ
are only taken in consideration, we obtain for North-East Green-
land: 356 p.ct. arctic, 53°3 р. сё. subarctic and 111 р. ct. North At-
lantic species, for the whole of Greenland: 33 р. ct. arctic, 46-1 р. ct.
subarctic and 20°9 p. ct. North Atlantic. The last named numbers
for North-East Greenland are almost identical with the corresponding
numbers for the whole of East Greenland found in 1898 (i. e. for
the East coast south of 74° 30' Lat. N. or more correctly south of
70° 30’ Lat. N.): 86°5 р. ct. arctic, 54 р. ct. subarctic and Ш р. ct.
North Atlantic species, (К. ROSENVINGE 1898 II р. 180). This striking
agreement in spite of the existing floristic differences between the
different parts of the East coast seems to be the expression of the
pronounced arctic character of the whole coast. Even if the num-
bers given might be somewhat altered by taking Jönsson’s paper
(1904) into consideration, and will probably be altered by further
investigations, I do not doubt that the agreement mentioned really
exists.
EIST OF THE SPECIES:
A. Rhodophycee.
Fam. Corallinacee.
Lithothamnion Phil.
1. L.tophiforme Unger.
Foslie (1895) p. 119, (1905) p. 51, K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 13.
The collection contains one specimen only which can be referred
to this species. It agrees with the specimens formerly found in
West Greenland and has bipartite sporangia (144 long, 45 и thick).
Locality. Entrance to the harbour.
2. L. glaciale Kjellm.
Kjellman (1883) р. 123; К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 773, (1898 I) р. 9.
f.typica Foslie (1905) р. 26.
1 See note page 98.
100 L. KoLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
f. botrytoides Foslie (1905) p. 26.
L. botrytoides Fosl. in K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 10.
L. delapsum f. conglutinata Fosl. (1895) p. 50 pl. 14 fig. 4.
Е. subsimplex Foslie (1905) р. 27.
L. varians Fosl. in K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 11.
There are some few specimens belonging to f. typica, some others
agreeing with f. subsimplex and a single specimen belonging to f. bo-
trytoides. The specimens referred to f. subsimplex are mostly large
flat crusts with low rounded processes, with very few and feebly
developed or even without such processes. In the latter case I
should perhaps not have dared to refer the plant to this species,
had not Foslie referred to L. glaciale a similar crust from East
Greenland which he had formerly referred to L.varians. The great
variability of the processes and the gradual transition from forms
with well-developed branches to those with even crusts make me
have no doubt as to the correctness of this determination. The
species has been dredged at a depth between 19 and 47 meters and
in another place at a depth of 38 meters or deeper.
Loc. Entrance to the harbour; along Vestre Havnenæs; off Baadskæret.
3. L. foecundum Kjellm.
Kjellman (1883) p. 131; K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 12, Foslie (1905) p. 21.
The collection contains a number of specimens which in my
opinion must be referred to this species. They agree in habit and
as to the size and form of conceptacles of sporangia with the de-
scriptions and the formerly collected Greenlandic specimens of this
species. The conceptacles, however, were most often empty, and in
a single case, when they still contained sporangia, these were two-
parted, while the species, according to Kjellman and Foslie, has
ordinarily four-parted sporangia. Foslie has also sometimes found
the sporangia two-parted, but he supposes that they were not fully
developed. The sporangia observed by me were at all events well
developed as to the size, for they measured 175—200 м in length
and 77—120 in breath. The conceptacles of sporangia were 400—
500 in diameter. A crust with antheridial conceptacles, са. 400
in diameter, was also met with. — The plants were found growing
partly and principally on barnacle-shells, partly on stones, most
often in company with Lilhothamnion leve. — Collected at a depth
of 38 meters.
Loc. Along Koldewey Island; entrance to the harbour; along Vestre
Havnenæs; off the Baadskeer.
4. L.læve (Strémf.) Foslie.
Foslie (1898) p. 7; K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 14; Jonsson (1904) p. 6; Foslie
(1905) р. 16.
On the Marine Algz from North-East Greenland. 101
Lithophyllum leve Strömfelt (1886) р. 21 pl. I fig. 11—12.
Lithothamnion tenue K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 778 ex parte.
This species has been collected in considerable quantities in
various localities; it is the species of Lithothamnion most represented
in the collection. It forms extended thin crusts over stones, and
further over shells of bivalves and of barnacles. Usually it has
conceptacles of sporangia the diameter of which most frequently
attains or even exceeds 1 mm. The sporangia contained in all
examined cases two spores only; they were 240—360 » long, 98—
167 x broad. According to Foslie, (1905), р. 18 and 53, the sporangia
are four-parted; he says however that he has “often seen two-parted
ones, sometimes even only two-parted ones, particularly in the nor-
thern part of the arctic zone. But having found in other specimens,
partly from the same places, both two-parted and four-parted ones,
A> aN A S
\ EN Va : ; NS
VÆ \ Им]
С! и
( zo De | \
EN... | |
Ge ТЕ
IN
] |
I} /
CZ
Е
— А В
Fig.1. Lithothamnion leve, sporangia. A—C from the same
conceptacle, D—F from another conceptacle. 95: 1.
sometimes even in one and the same conceptacle, I think it fair to
presume that the two-parted ones have not been fully, or normally
developed”. The fact that I have found only two-parted sporangia
in all, not few, examined cases, seems however to favour the belief
that this species has only two-parted sporangia in this arctic region.
The only argument which could be alleged against this is, that all
the specimens in question are collected in August and September
and that the sporangia possibly at a later period might be four-
parted. After what is known about the fructification of these Algæ,
that supposition is however little probable. As shown in fig. 1, the
breadth of the sporangia is rather variable, partly according to their
place in the conceptacle.
Specimens with sexual conceptacles were also found, though in
lesser quantity. These conceptacles are easily recognizable from
their conical form and smaller diameter; the conceptacles of cysto-
carps were 500— 8004 broad, those of antheridia 500—600 y.
Loc. Along Cape Bismarck Peninsula; in and off the entrance to the
harbour; at Vestre Havnenæs, 28 meters; off Baadskæret, 19—47 meters.
102 L. KoLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
Fam. Squamariacee.
Cruoria Fries.
5. Cruoria arctica Schmitz.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 784, (1898 I) p. 15.
It forms crusts up to 4 cm. in diameter on barnacle-shells and
on Lithothamnion leve; it seems to be always attached to a calca-
reous substratum. The specimens of the collection fully agree with
the original ones from West Greenland and are, like those, provided
with glandular cells. In a thick crust ripe sporangia (564 long,
23 4 broad) were found in the upper part while abortive sporangia
were visible at a lower level. This species is always infested by
Chlorochytrium Schmitzii. — Found in various depths e.g. са. 38
meters.
Loc. Along Koldewey Island; off Baadskæret and along Vestre Havnenæs.
Cruoria firma Kjeilman (1906) р. 14, is hardly specifically distinct from С. arctica.
According to Kjellman it differs from this species by having the basal layer consisting
of at least two layers. This statement, which is put forward however by the Swe-
dish author with some reservation, I suppose to be founded on imperfect prepara-
tion; sections of С. arctica which are not very thin or exactly vertical lead easily to
the belief that there is more than one basal layer of cells. The sporangia appear to
offer no difference; they were only comparatively narrow in Kjellman’s specimens.
And the erect filaments seem to have essentially the same structure as in Cr. arctica.
Petrocelis J. Ag.
6. P. polygyna (Kjellm.) Schmitz.
K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 16.
Hemescharia polygyna Kjellman (1883) p. 182.
Some few crusts of this species, partly sterile, partly with car-
pogonia have been found growing on stones.
Loc. Along Vestre Havnenæs, са. 38 meters, and another locality.
Cruoriopsis Dufour.
7. C.hyperborea sp. п.
Crusta intense sangvinea, 80—100y crassa. Stratum basale uni-
stratosum, e filis radiantibus compositum, cellulis 4+5—5'5 м crassis,
8—10°5y altis, crassitudine vulgo 2—3-plo longioribus. Fila erecta
5—8-cellularia, cylindrica vel sursum paulo incrassata, 7'5—10 п
crassa, cellulis diametro aequilongis vel ad duplo longioribus, chro-
matophorum unicum continentibus. Sporangia in filis erectis termi-
nalia vel in parte superiori eorum lateralia, sessilia vel rarius stipi-
tata, obovata vel breviter oblonga, 15—28 и longa, 11—13 и lata.
One crust only of this new species has been found growing on
a stone. It has a deep blood-red colour, by which it differs from
On the Marine Algz from North-East Greenland. 103
the other crustiform Florideæ of the collection. The cells of the
basal layer are about twice as high as they are broad. Fusions
sometimes occur between cells belonging to neighbouring cell-rows
of the basal layer. The erect filaments are not connected by any
soft gelatinous matter; they are of the same thickness in their
whole length or upwards somewhat thicker; their cells are usually
1'/2 to 2 times as long as broad, more rarely of the same length.
The cells contain a single chromatophore lying in the upper part
of the cell, apparently cup-shaped. The filaments are sometimes
a little branched at the upper end, bearing one or two (or perhaps
\
/
]
|
CON)
@)
Е
ana WA
|] |
Fig. 2. Cruoriopsis hyperborea. A, portion of the basal layer seen from above
and vertical filaments springing off from it, two of them ending in a sporan-
gium. B, vertical section of a crust, the filaments somewhat disunited. C,
vertical filament branched at the upper end. D, vertical filament bearing a
lateral sporangium. Е and Е, vertical filaments with terminal sporangia.
APR 10) 5558 ИВ (65 755 79 Bye ile
more than two) short one- ог two-celled branchlets. Possibly rami-
fication only takes place by the formation of sporangia.
The sporangia are placed on the ordinary filaments and are
usually terminal but never emerging over the surface of the frond.
They may also be lateral on one of the upper joints of a filament
and are then usually sessile (fig. 2 D); sometimes however two-celled
branchlets occur, the upper cell of which will develop into a spor-
angium (fig. 2C). The sporangia are obovate, more rarely shortly
oblong; their division is always cruciate, the first dividing wall
being horizontal. Sometimes the first division wall is oblique and
the arrangement of the spores somewhat irregular.
Our plant having no sex-organs, its systematic position cannot
be determined with certainty. I think however it could be referred
104 Г.. KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
to the genus Cruoriopsis, as a new species. At all events it cannot
belong to the genus Cruoriella, the sporangia not occurring in ne-
mathecia but scattered in the very crust. It reminds one somewhat
of Cruoriella armorica Hauck (1885, p. 31, non Crouan) which is
referred to the genus Cruoriopsis by Batters (1896, p. 387) under the
name of С. Hauckü. De-Toni (1905, р. 1690), has certainly protested
against its translation to this genus, as it has terminal sporangia;
this however does not appear convincing to me, the diagnosis of
the genus Cruoriopsis containing nothing very precise as to the posi-
tion of the sporangia (comp. De-Toni 1. с. and Schmitz und Haupt-
fleisch (1897, p. 535)). In Cruoriopsis cruciata Dufour the sporangia
are certainly lateral on the filaments (comp. Zanardini (1876), Tav.
86), but in our species lateral sporangia also occur though more
rarely than the terminal ones. I think it therefore most correct, at
least provisionally, to refer it to the same genus.
I have been able to compare our plant with a microscopical
preparation of Cruoriopsis Наиски Batt. from Plymouth, kindly sent
me by the late Mr. Batters, thus an original specimen. It differs by
having thinner erect filaments, ca. 44 thick or a little thicker, con-
sisting of more elongated and more thin-walled cells. The sporangia
are more lengthened, narrower, 21—25 u long, 7—8 4 broad, always
terminal on the ordinary erect filaments, scattered in the crust; the
divisions are cruciate but oblique. In the basal layer numerous
transversal fusions occur.
Through the kindness of Mrs. Weber—van Bosse I have also
been able to examine two microscopical preparations of Cruoriella
armorica Hauck, from the collection of Hauck, originating from
Naples. This plant is also different from the Greenland one. The
basal layer consists of broad cells arranged in regular radiating fila-
ments, the erect filaments are thinner, sometimes dichotomous above.
The sporangia are always terminal, they are larger, 46—56 long,
26—28 » broad, regularly cruciate.
Loc. Along the Koldewey Island, Aug. 26th 1907 (№ 556).
Rhododermis Crouan.
8. R.elegans Crouan.
K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 18.
Crusts of this species, recognizable by their dull rose-red or
light purple colour have been found growing on stones from various
localities. They are always polystromatical and may be up to 20
cells thick and even thicker. The vertical filaments are 7—9 y
thick; the height of the cells is variable, sometimes about the same
On the Marine Algz from North-East Greenland. 105
as the breadth or a little greater, in other cases smaller; in the
upper part of some crusts the cells were very low, several times
broader than high. Transversal fusions between the cells, especially
those of the basal layer, but also those of the vertical filaments
(fig. 3 4) occur here and there.
Some crusts bear sori of sporangia, with unripe or fully devel-
oped sporangia; in other cases the sori had fully developed para-
physes but no sporangia, these having probably decayed. Ripe
sporangia, found in August, were 30—32 и long, 19—20 и broad.
Some other crusts, collected in August and September, bear
antheridia, which organs were hitherto unknown in this genus.
They covered a great part of the surface of the frond as a continuous
layer of much greater
extent than the spor-
angial sori. The an-
theridia (spermatan-
gia) are obovate, 10
— 11, long, 44 broad.
In a vertical section
the vertical cell-rows
are seen bearing at
their upper end one
or usually two cells,
which are smaller and
richer in plasmatic
Fig. 3. Rhododermis elegans, sections of male plant.
contents than the ve- A, Vertical section of crust with antheridia. В, an-
getative cells and bear theridia-bearing cell with two antheridia. C, Vertical
cell-row with two antheridia-bearing cells. 830: 1.
the antheridia. These
cells (Svedelius’s sper-
matangial mother-cells) bear at the top two antheridia, a terminal
and a lateral one, or perhaps more. By the development of the
antheridia the thick cuticula is lifted and finally thrown off by the
developing antheridia. The spermatia are, like the antheridia, obo-
vate and contain a very distinct nucleus, lying in the upper part or
the middle of the cell.
Carpogonia were not observed.
Loc. Along Koldewey Island; entrance to the harbour (c and spor.);
off Baadskæret and along W. Havnenæs, са. 38 meters (9 and spor.)
Fam. Ceramiacee.
Antithamnion Neg.
9. A. Plumula (Ellis) Thur. 8, boreale Gobi
K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 21, Jonsson (1904) p. 8.
106 L. KoLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
This species has been found growing on Phyllophora Brodiei
‘interrupta, Delesseria sinuosa and Lithothamnion glaciale. The speci-
mens were 1 to 2 cm. long, all sterile.
Loc. Danmarks Науп and the entrance to it.
Rhodochorton Neg.
10. В. Rothii (Turt.) Neg.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 791, (1898 I) p. 23, Jonsson (1904) p. 8.
This species has been found in two different sublittoral localities
in up to ca. 40 meters depths; it was here mostly found in com-
pany with Cruoria arctica, forming scattered tufts on the surface of
the latter. A closer examination showed however that, at all events
in some cases, it had grown through the crust of Cruoria, the basal
layer being situated under the crust. This has probably been осса-
sioned by the Cruoria overwhelming the Rhodochorton growing pre-
viously on the stone. This supposition is supported by the fact that
the same Rhodochorton was found growing оп Lithothamnion læve
covering the stone beside the Cruoria. These specimens were all
sterile.
Fertile specimens with ripe and empty sporangia were found in
September in company with Calothrix scopulorum а. о. in a gathering
from the littoral region. |
Loc. Along Koldewey Island; Vestre Havnenæs, in the tidal region: off
Baadskæret and along Vestre Havnenæs, ca. 40 meters.
11. В. penicilliforme (Kjellm.) К. Rosenv.
K. Rosenvinge (1894) p. 66, (1898 I) p. 23, Jonsson (1904) p. 9.
R. mesocarpum (Carm.) Kjellm. var. penicilliforme Kjellm., K. Rosenvinge (1893)
р: 192.
One specimen of this easily recognizable species was found on
Polysiphonia arctica; the upright filaments were 10 и thick and bore
young sporangial branchlets but without sporangia.
Loc. Along Koldewey Island, ca. 8 fathoms.
Fam. Rhodomelacee.
Rhodomela C. Ag.
12. R.lycopodioides (L.) Ag. f. tenuissima (Rupr.) Kjellm.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 797, (1898 I) p. 24, Jonsson (1904), p. 9.
This species is only feebly represented in the collection. At
Koldewey Island, where it was collected by dredging in September,
it occurred in small quantity among Stictyosiphon tortilis; the speci-
mens had still hairs (trichoblasts), branched and unbranched, but
On the Marine Algæ from North-East Greenland.
107
were sterile. Specimens found frozen in the ice in April bore tetra-
sporangia in the shoots of the previous year.
Loc. Along Koldewey Island; in clumps frozen in the ice at Cap Amélie.
Polysiphonia Grev.
13. Р. arctica J. Ас.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 800, (1898 I)
р. 25; Jonsson (1904), р. 10.
Non Pterosiphonia arctica Setchell
and Gardner (1903) p. 329.
А considerable
specimens of this strongiy arctic
species has been collected in two
localities situated comparatively
near the open sea; fully
agree typical specimens,
reaching a length of over 20 cm.
and are as usual without basal
part. They seem not to have
been fixed to the bottom and are
all sterile.
Pterosiphonia arctica Setchell
and Gardner (1. с.) which these
authors have thought identical
with
they
with
Polysiphonia arctica, after
comparison with a specimen from
Greenland determined by me, is
fairly distinct from it, judging
from the remarks and the figures
of the authors. The Northwest
American species has a compla-
nated frond, is plainly distichous
near the tips and has constantly
6 or 7 pericentral cells, while
Polysiphonia arctica has а cylin-
drical frond with branches given
off on all sides and 4—7 pericen-
tral cells. As no figures of this
species have ever been published,
number of
Fig. 4. Polysiphonia arctica. A, Upper end
of a plant; at p formation of the secon-
dary pores. B—D, transverse sections of
fronds. 200: 1.
I give here some drawings, showing the ramification and transverse
sections of the frond (fig. 4).
The branches are spirally arranged
with an angle of divergence approaching to 180°, however somewhat
smaller.
SBI
As shown before (1893,
р. 800) по hairs (trichoblasts)
9
108 L. KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
occur. The specimen figured had 4—6 pericentral cells; the number
was greatest in the main axes.
Loc. Along the East side of Koldewey Island, ca. 15 meters; off Cape
Bismarck Peninsula.
Fam. Delesseriacee.
Delesseria Lamour.
14. D.sinuosa (Good. et Woodw.) Lamour.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 808, (1898 I) р. 27; Jonsson (1904) р. 11.
The collection contains a considerable number of well-developed
specimens of this species. They attain a length of 25—30 cm. or
even more and are also broad, and they belong to the f. {ypica.
Some of them bear at the base a considerable number of narrow
shoots which had attached themselves on gravel or fragments of
shells. One specimen was attached to a barnacle. A number of
the specimens seem however to have been loose-lying on the bottom.
Specimens collected in July and August showed ripe tetrasporangia,
in small marginal leaflets, or cystocarps.
Loc. Along the East side of Koldewey Island, 19—23 meters; along Cape
Bismarck Peninsula; off Cape Bismarck; Danmarks Havn; off Baadskæret; the
bay off Vesterdalen.
Fam. Rhodymeniacee.
Halosaccion Kiitz.
15. H.ramentaceum (L.) J. Ag.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 825, (1898 I) p. 43; Jonsson (1904) p. 12.
Only 3 specimens have been met with in the collection. They
have a single set of unbranched branches, are provided with hyaline
hairs but are sterile.
Loc. The bay off Vesterdalen, in at most 4 meters depth.
Fam. Rhodophyllidacee.
Kuthora J. Ag.
16 Е cristata (L.) J. Ag.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 813, (1898 I) р. 28; Jonsson (1904) р. 13.
А number of specimens, all epiphytic, mostly on Chætomorpha
Melagonium and Delesseria sinuosa, further on Phyllophora Brodiæi
”interrupta and Turnerella Pennyi, are contained in the collection.
They all belong to f. angustata. The largest specimens are 5 cm.
long. Ripe tetrasporangia and cystocarps occurred in specimens
collected in August and September.
Loc. At Koldewey Island; Danmarks Havn.
On the Marine Algz from North-East Greenland. 109
Turnerella Schmitz.
17. Т. Pennyi (Нагу.) Schmitz emend.
Е. Schmitz in К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 815; К. Rosenvinge (1898 I) р. 29; Jonsson
(1904) p. 13.
Inclus. Kallymenia rosacea J. Ag. (1876) р. 220, comp. Børgesen and Jønsson
(1905) p. XII.
A great number of specimens of this arctic species have been
collected at various localities, most abundantly in Danmarks Har-
bour. The form of the frond is somewhat variable, in some cases
of nearly orbicular outline, usually however more or less lobed and
often also undulated. Most of the specimens are devoid of basal
disc and have probably been so at the moment of dredging. Some
of the specimens, however, show well-developed basal discs mostly
attached to barnacles. Some of the specimens provided with basal
disc seem not to have been attached, when they were collected, as
is to be concluded from the form of the basal disc, its under face
not being plain but hollow, by strong development of the border,
probably after its detachment from the substratum. The reason
why almost all the specimens are without basal disc may be in
some cases, that the plant has been torn away from its substratum,
leaving its basal part; I imagine however that most of the specimens
have been really loose-lying on the bottom. This is suggested by
the form of the frond and by the fact that most of the numerous
specimens from Danmarks Harbour have been dredged at a locality
where the bottom is soft.
Some of the specimens agree fully with specimens referred by
J. Agardh to Kallymenia rosacea, which however is not specifically
distinct from Turnerella Pennyi, as stated by Borgesen and Jonsson
(].с.) and as suspected already by J. Agardh (1. с.)
The largest of the specimens contained in the collection mea-
sures 50 cm. in greatest diameter in a dried state. Some specimens
contain numerous cystocarps, partly ripe, partly empty.
Loc. Along the East side of Koldewey Island, ca. 15 meters; off Cape
Bismarck; along Cape Bismarck Peninsula; Danmarks Havn, 7—11 meters,
soft bottom; off Baadskæret, 28 meters; the bay off Vesterdalen, 4—11 meters.
Fam. Gigartinacee.
Phyllophora Grev.
18. Ph. Brodizi (Turn.) J. Ag. *interrupta (Grev.) К. Rosenv.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 821, (1898 I) р. 32; Jonsson (1904) р. 14.
All the specimens of the collection belong to the subsp. inter-
rupla; they are well-developed; partly very broad, and up to 18 cm.
high. Nearly all the specimens have no basal portion and have
JE
110 L. KoLDErUP ROSENVINGE.
certainly been lying loose on the bottom; in some of them the
undermost part is in a state of disintegration. For most of the
specimens from the harbour it has also been stated, that they have
been dredged on soft bottom. Some smaller specimens are however
provided with basal disc.
Loc. Along Koldewey Island, 15 meters and deeper; Danmarks Havn,
71—11 meters, soft bottom.
Actinococcus Kütz.
19. А. subcutaneus (Lyngb.) К. Rosenv.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 822, (1898 I) р. 33; Jonsson (1904) р. 14.
А large specimen of Phyllophora Brodiei *interrupta bears nu-
merous specimens of this much disputed alga attached to the upper
margin of some of the one-year old segments.
Loc. Along Koldewey Island, ca. 15 meters.
seratocolax К. Rosenv.
20. C.Hartzii К. Rosenv.
К. Rosenvinge (1898 I) р. 34.
Several specimens of Phyllophora Brodiæi *interrupta are infested
with this parasite which is situated partly on the border partly on
the flat side of the frond. The specimens of the parasite form small
bushes up to 3 mm. in diameter, fully agreeing with the previously
found Greenlandic specimens; several of them bore nemathecia, but
the sporangia were still undivided in August. The specimens of
Phyllophora on which they were parasitic were certainly all loose-
lying when dredged.
Loc. Danmarks Науп, 7—11 meters, August.
Choreocolax sp.?
In a specimen of Euthora cristata from Koldewey Island were
found some cushions of a small parasitic Floridea looking much
like a Choreocolax or Harveyella. As there is not sufficient material
for a detailed description, I shall not mention it closer but only
state that it grows in the same manner as Harveyella and Choreocolax,
sending out from the underside of the cushion-shaped or nearly
globular frond filaments penetrating between the cells of the host.
In a dried state the parasite has a pretty red colour.
Fam. Helminthocladiacee.
Chantransia (D. C.)
21. Ch. efflorescens (J. Ag.) Kjellm.
K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 40, (1909) p. 134.
On the Marine Algæ from North-East Greenland. 111
Found in small quantity on Delesseria sinuosa and Cruoria arc-
tica. The thickness of the filaments is 5—6y. Antheridia, carpo-
gonia and ripe cystocarpia occurred in August.
Loc. Along Koldewey Island; Danmarks Науп and the entrance to the
harbour.
Fam. Bangiacee.
Conchocelis Batt.
22. С. rosea Batters.
Batters (1892) p. 25; K. Kosenvinge (1898 I) p. 44.
Non Ostreobium Queketti Born. et Flah. var. rosea Nadson (1900) p. 36.
This perforating alga is frequently met with in old shells in
particular of Mya and Saxicava, which assume a rose-red colour
when the alga occurs alone or is predominant. It agrees very well
with Batters’ description and figures. According to Nadson (1. с.)
this alga should not be a Rhodophycea but a red variety of Ostreo-
bium Queketti; this however does not agree with my observations of
the material from North-East Greenland. Conchocelis and Ostreobium
grow frequently intermingled in these shells, but they are very easy
to distinguish and do not show any indication of mutual transition.
Conchocelis is always rose-coloured, while Ostreobium is constantly
green. Conchocelis consists always of articulated filaments, the cells
of which are more or less inflated in the middle but narrow at the
transverse walls, while the filaments of Ostreobium are continuous
and show here and there large irregular inflations. As far as I
know, Nadson has given no account of the manner in which the
transition takes place between these two widely different alge!, and
it seems therefore most probable, that the red alga which Nadson
examined is not the true Conchocelis rosea but rather a red variety
of Ostreobium Queketti.
As stated by Batters, the alga forms within the surface of the
shell a horizontal layer of interlaced filaments of very various shapes
and widths. The cells are often inflated in the middle and the fila-
ments may then be more or less moniliform. I have not been able
to detect any pore in the middle of the transverse walls. In the
deeper parts of the shell some filaments are thicker, consisting of
short cylindric cells separated by broader transverse walls and with
rich plasmatic contents (comp. Batters 1. с. pl. VIII figs. 2—6). In the
thinner cells I have found a parietal chromatophore which seems
to be much branched; in some cases I saw however several intensely
red-coloured bodies in each cell, probably chromatophores. In some
1 Mag. О. Paulsen has most kindly translated for me the part of Nadson’s Russian
text treating of Conchocelis.
112 L. KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
cases I have found in the thicker filaments one intensely red-coloured
body in some of the cells, similar to those taken for spores by
Batters. I have not submitted this interesting alga to a more de-
tailed study and therefore cannot express an opinion on the question
of its systematic position; I refer it with doubt to the Bangiaceæ!.
Loc. East side of Koldewey Island; entrance to the harbour; at Vestre
Havnenees; off Baadskeeret.
В. Phæophyceæ.
Fam. Fucacee.
Fucus (L.) Dene et Thur.
23. F.inflatus L.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 834, (1898 I) р. 45; Jonsson (1904) р. 19.
This species seems to be common in the upper sublittoral region,
in particular in the harbour where it grows gregariously at a depth
of 2 to 4 meters, on stony ground, but it occurs also in the littoral
region (comp. р. 96). It occurs in a form coming near to f. evanes-
cens. The frond is up to 12mm. broad, the midrib well developed,
the border sometimes feebly undulato-serrate. The receptacles are
short, seldom over 5mm. long. The largest specimen is 30 cm. long.
Inflations filled with air have not been observed. Some plants,
which have perhaps been loose, approach to f. membranacea. The
species for the rest only rarely occurs among other loose algæ.
Found with ripe sex-organs in August and September.
Loc. East side of Koldewey Island; Cape Bismarck; Danmarks Havn;
Baadskeeret.
Fam. Laminariacew.
Alaria Grev.
24. A. Pylaii (Bory) J. Ag. emend. var. grandifolia (J. Ag.)
Jonsson.
Jonsson (1904) p. 21.
The Alariæ contained in the collection belong undoubtedly all
to the same species. They have all a long stipital part, the greater
part of which belongs to the rachis. It agrees in this and in its
large dimensions with A. grandifolia J. Ag. The base of the lamina,
however, is often comparatively narrow, cuneate; it may also be
rounded ovate, but I have never found it „eximie subcordato-ovata”,
1 In (1909) I have not mentioned this alga under the Bangiacee, as a provisional
examination led me to believe, that Nadson’s above-mentioned supposition
was right.
On the Marine Algæ from North-East Greenland. 113
as J. Agardh describes it (1872 р. 26). The lamina is thin as in
А. membranacea J. Аз. (A. Рай В, membranacea К. Возепу.). Jønsson
Fig. 5. Мапа Pylaü var. grandifolia. The lower part of the stipe is wanting in В.
From dredging along Cape Bismarck Peninsula, July. А 1:11°5. В 1:13.
also found, in Kruuse’s collection from East Greenland, specimens
of A. grandifolia, but he thought that this species, at least provisio-
nally, might be regarded as a variety of A. Pylaii, and he pointed
114 L. KoLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
out in particular its close relation to the var. membranacea. Соп-
sidering the great variability of A. Руай which I have been acquain-
ted with on the Western coast of Greenland, I am inclined to
believe that this translation is legilimate, but it must be admitted,
that it is very difficult to decide, whether the differences existing
between the plants from North-East Greenland and those from
the southern part of the West coast are due to the differences in
the external conditions or are of specific value. When considering
the great number of species of Alaria described, I cannot help
thinking, that the variation of the species has often been taken too
little into consideration. The specimens from North-East Greenland
are distinguished from those from West Greenland — which I have
determined formerly as A. Руай a typica and 2 membranacea — in
my opinion only by their long and well-developed rachis.
The collection contains unfortunately only a few complete and
well-developed specimens. In order to give an idea of the dimen-
sions, I give here some measurements in centimeters:
Stipe, included Length of Length of rest Greatest breadth Greatest length
rachis new lamina of old lamina of lamina of sporophylls
26 + x 80 № 17 30
64 82 13 13 18
33 + X 160 20 33 46
71 151 22 ca. 40 42
70 32 over 100
72 + x
1
The costa was in all cases convex on both sides, the cryptosto-
mata were usually very distinct. As will be seen from the table,
the sporophylls attain a very considerable length; their sterile upper
part is sometimes bipartite.
According to Kjellman (1877, p.11) the lamina of Alaria grandi-
folia is shed in winter at Spitzbergen, and that seems to be the case
also at the shores of North-east Greenland. The lower part of the
old Jamina remains however and is to be found still in the following
summer. The limit between the lamine of the two years is marked
as a strong narrowing (fig. 5), much as in A. esculenta, as shown by
R. Rasmussen (1909).
Loc. Along Koldewey Island, ca. 5—15 meters; along Cape Bismarck
Peninsula; Stormbust.
Laminaria Lamx.
25. L.saccharina (L.) Lamx. var. grandis Kjellm.
Kjellman (1890) р. 25; Jonsson (1904) р. 27.
This species is common in the region explored. A considerable
number of specimens have been collected in various localities; only
On the Marine Algz from North-East Greenland. 115
a few large and well preserved plants have however been brought
home. They seem to be referable to f. grandis Kjellm. and agree
with the specimens from East Greenland determined to this form
by Jonsson. The stipe is, in larger plants, now rather short, e. gr.
30 cm., now long (over 106 cm.). The lamina bears always, in July
to September, a remnant of the lamina of the foregoing year at the
top, sharply marked against the new lamina by means of a strong
narrowing. The new lamina is up to 100 cm. long, up to 50 cm.
broad, with very undulated border and with broadly cuneate to
rounded base. In older plants the lamina may be provided with a
network of lists, in the median part as well as the marginal ones.
The lamina has always muciparous canals; in some cases they are
rather small, in others they are larger and visible with the naked
eye from the face, in particular after staining with methylene-blue.
The sorus is distinctly limited, elliptical or oblong. In most of the
fertile specimens only remains or traces of a sorus are visible in
the old lamina, most often only a hole indicating the outline of the
sorus, while a sorus is not yet visible on the new lamina, which
seems to show that the sorus is not developed before winter. The
hole reached in a larger plant to the very base of the old lamina.
The hapteræ are always feeble with long thin branches. Some
specimens were attached to stipes of the same species.
Some narrow specimens approach to f. glacialis К. Rosenv.
(1898 I).
Loc. Along Koldewey Island; along Cape Bismarck Peninsula; Dan-
marks Havn; Baadskæret; bay off Vesterdalen, 2—11 meters. From Hyde
Fjord were brought home by Capt. Koch 4 stipes with hapteræ, probably
belonging to this species, found on the ice on May 15th 1907.
26. L.solidungula J. Ag.
J. Agardh (1868) p. 3; K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 850, (1898 I) p. 57; Jonsson (1904) p. 28.
This strongly arctic species is common within the explored
area, where it seems to thrive well. The plants had only one con-
striction, at the limit between the new lamina and that of the
foregoing year, but in most of the plants the latter is not complete,
probably because it has been lost during collection or under the
preservation. In a few cases only the lamina of the foregoing year
was complete and bore further at the top a remnant of the two
years old lamina (comp. J. Agardh 1. с. plate Г fig. 2). The largest
specimen brought home has a total length of 133 cm.; thereof the
stipe 39 cm. long, the new lamina 69 cm. long, 40 cm. broad, the
lamina of the foregoing year (incomplete) 25cm. long. The broadest
specimen is 45 cm. broad. In some cases a well-developed sorus
occurred at the base of the one year old lamina. The named greatest
116 L. KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
specimen, collected Aug. 15, has a sorus at the base of the old
lamina, and a new sorus is developing in the lower part of the new
lamina, but in the other plants collected in July and August a new
sorus was yet not visible!.
The muciparous canals are particularly well-developed in this
species; they form a network which is easily visible with the naked
eye in dried specimens and in specimens preserved in alcohol; they
become particularly conspicuous after staining with methylen-blue?.
Loc. Renskæret, 2—4 meters; along Cape Bismarck Peninsula; east side
of Koldewey Island; Danmarks Havn; Baadskæret.
Fam. Chordacee.
Chorda (Stackh.)
27. Ch. tomentosa Lyngb.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 854.
In a gathering preserved in alcohol two small specimens of a
Chorda were found, intermingled among other alge. They were
certainly sterile and feebly developed, but the hairs containing
numerous chromatophores showed them to belong to Ch. tomentosa.
They were about 5 cm. long and had not yet begun to develop the
outer, fertile layer.
Loc. Bay off Vesterdalen in a depth of at most 4 meters, Aug. 28th,
Fam. Desmarestiacee.
Desmarestia Lamx.
28. D.aculeata (L.) Lamx.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 857, (1898 I) р. 59; Jonsson (1904) р. 32.
Found at several localities, but only abundant at one. One
specimen has the basal portion; in this the primary axis bears
below two pairs of opposite branches, while the branches otherwise
are always alternate. I have found the same in plants collected on
the shores of Denmark. Plants collected in the middle of July
=
Jonsson found many specimens in Kruuse’s collections from East Greenland,
the lamina of which was divided into four parts (in one plant into five) and
he takes it for granted that these sections or laminz have developed in four
(five) consecutive years. The fact that some of these plants bear a sorus or
mark after an emptied sorus on the uppermost section only, while the three
younger segments do not yet show any trace of a sorus, (1. с. р. 28, fig. 2), sug-
gests the question whether more than one section may not exceptionally be
formed in the same year.
While Areschoug (1883 p. 7) did not find muciparous canals in the lamina of
this species, Guignard (1892 p.37) found them in all examined specimens, though
in some cases they were small and not easily visible.
to
On the Marine Algæ from North-East Greenland. 117
were still in growth and had the new branches beset with long
brown hairs. One specimen dredged in August was still beset with
hairs while hairs were wanting in the other specimens gathered in
August and September.
Loc. At the East side of Koldewey Island; along Cape Bismarck Penin-
sula (abundantly); Danmarks Hayn; Baadskzeret; bay off Vesterdalen.
29. D. viridis (О.Е. Müll.) Lamx.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 859, (1898) p. 60; Jonsson (1904) p. 32.
The plants collected are on the whole well-developed and attain
a length of over 30 cm. The growth has ceased and the hairs are
thrown off in August. — Found in depths from 4 to 11 meters, and
perhaps deeper.
Loc. Along Koldewey Island; Danmarks Havn; bay off Vesterdalen.
Fam. Punclariacee.
Scytosiphon (Ag.)
30. S. Lomentaria (Lyngb.) J. Ag.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 863, (1898 I) p. 62; Jonsson (1904) p. 33.
A very badly preserved, ca. 4 cm. long fragment of a tubular
brown alga without base and upper part seems to belong to this
species. As it has neither sporangia nor paraphyses, the determi-
nation is however uncertain. It differs from Chorda through lesser
consistency and the structure of the frond.
Loc. East side of Koldewey Island, September.
Symphyocarpus К. Rosenv.
31. S. strangulans К. Rosenv.
К. Rosenvinge !1893) р. 896, (1898 I) р. 67.
Found in small quantities on older fronds of Turnerella Pennyi
and on crusts of Lithothamnion, in the latter case forming са. 2 mm.
broad crusts. In all cases brown paraphyses were observed; young
and empty plurilocular sporangia were also recorded. The plants
were collected in September.
Loc. Danmarks Havn; along Vestre Havnenæs and off Baadskæret.
Pheostroma Kuckuck.
32. Ph. pustulosum Kuckuck.
Kuckuck (1895) p. 182; K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 68, fig. 15.
This minute species was found on the upper end of a young
Alaria. The plants agreed with those found on young fronds of
Laminaria nigripes which I have formerly mentioned (1. с. р. 68
lowest). The plurilocular sporangia reach as a rule to the bottom
118 Г.. KoLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
of the plant, a sterile basal cell, as in Kuckuck’s plants (1. c.), being
not developed. Such a cell, however, is always met with under the
hairs which have the structure described by me (1. c.). The under-
most long cell of the hair is as a rule somewhat constricted at some
distance from the base. In some cases I found the cell situated
under the hair developed into a sporangium, the cell having pro-
truded on one side and upwards along the base of the hair and
formed an opening at the upper end of the prolongation. I am
uncertain whether unripe unicellular sporangia also occur.
Loc. Along Cape Bismarck Peninsula.
Stictyosiphon Kitz.
33. S.tortilis (Rupr.) Reinke.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 868, (1898 I) p. 70; Jonsson (1904) p. 34.
Occurs rather abundantly in gatherings from the harbour and
some other localities, but almost always loose, together with other
loose alge, as Pylaiella, and sterile. One filament only, taken in
the harbour in August, had well-developed, rather prominent pluri-
locular sporangia. In the old loose plants the articulation is often
very prominent, much as in some Sphacelaria. Hairs occur only
rarely. Found in 4 to 11 meters depth.
Loc. Danmarks Havn; Baadskeeret; bay off Vesterdalen. In clumps in
the ice at Cape Amélie, April.
Punctaria Grey.
34. P.glacialis п. sp. |
Frons eximie stipitata, stipite 5 — с. 14 mm. longo, superne
abrupte cuneatim dilatato. Lamina oblonga vel lingulata aut late
elliptica, basi late cuneata, long. 17 — с. 45 cm., latit. 4—14*5 cm., ple-
rumque 4—7:5 cm., crassit. ad 140», colore in sicco olivaceo-fusco,
substantia tenera, fragili, e stratis cellularibus 3—6 composita, cellulis
interioribus quam exterioribus aliquantum majoribus. Pili omnino
desunt. Sporangia unilocularia sparsa, ex exteriori visa eadem fere
forma ac cellule vegetative exteriores, parte interne sæpe latiore,
alt. 45—53 и, latitudine supra 21—25 и, infra 30—50 2.
This good-sized species most resembles Punctaria latifolia Grev.
as to the form and the consistency of the frond. It is distinguished
from it through the darker colour and the want of plurilocular
sporangia. In colour and structure it more resembles P. planlaginea
(Roth) Grev. The want of hairs distinguishes it from both the
named species as well as from all other species of the genus. Most
of the specimens are oblong or lingulate of nearly equal breadth in
the whole length of the frond, only at the base and usually also at
Fig.6. Punctaria glacialis. From the east side of Koldewey Island. 2: 3.
120 L. KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
the upper end narrower. Most of the specimens were dried, but
some fragments are preserved in alcohol; one of these, which was
fructifying, had a thickness of 130—140 и, another sterile was 77—
95 » thick.
The outer cells are as a rule somewhat smaller than the inner,
and the structure thus most resembles that of the genus Punctaria
Fig. 7. Punctaria glacialis. A, part of frond seen from the surface; the shaded
cells are sporangia. 200:1. B—E, transverse sections of fronds with unilocular
sporangia. 340: 1.
in the sense of J. Agardh (1896, p.4). The frond is usually 4 to 5
cells thick. The cells contain numerous small disc-shaped chroma-
tophores.
Some plants contain rather numerous sporangia which are all
unilocular. Seen from the face they have nearly the same form
and size as the vegetative cells, or they are a little more rounded.
In transverse sections of the frond they appear often enlarged in-
On the Marine Algz from North-East Greenland. 121
wardly, a result of the growth of the sporangium and the surroun-
ding cells after the formation of the former and often combined
with cell-divisions of the latter (fig. 7 B, D). Strange to say, the
zoospores had not developed normally but had formed a cell wall
without having been set free, and the older sporangia thus became
filled with closely packed polygonal cells, which gradually became
rather poor in contents and might sometimes suggest the structure
of plurilocular sporangia (fig. 6, C). Not seldom the older sporangia
are open and the cells derived from the abortive zoospores are
prominent above the surface of the frond (fig. 6, D, Е), but normally
developed and emptied sporangia have not been met with. Some-
times the zoospores do not fill the sporangium but leave an empty
place in the middle of it (fig.6, D). It may also happen that the
upper part of the cell has not participated in the formation of
zoospores.
Notwithstanding that this species differs from the other hitherto
described species of the genus Punclaria by the want of hairs, I
think it unnecessary to remove it from that genus. It is noteworthy
that two other arctic members of the same family are also entirely
devoid of hairs, namely Omphalophyllum ulvaceum and Pheosaccion
Collinsii. Gathered in the end of August and the beginning of September.
Loc. Along Koldewey Island; Danmarks Havn; Baadskæret; bay off
Vesterdalen, 4 to 11 meters depth.
Omphalophyllum К. Rosenv.
35. О. Шуасеит К. Rosenv.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 873, (1898 I) р. 73; Jonsson (1904) р. 34.
The collection contains а large specimen of this arctic species,
no doubt the largest hitherto found; it measures 28 cm. in greatest
diameter, 16 cm. in greatest radius. It was sterile in the beginning
of September. A small fragment without indication of locality was
also sterile.
Loc. Along Koldewey Island.
Fam. Elachistacee.
Elachista Dub.
36. E. fucicola (Vell.) Aresch.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 878, (1898 I) p. 74; Jonsson (1904) p. 35.
A few specimens occur attached to Halosaccion ramentaceum
and Punctaria glacialis. They belong to the f. typica and had unilo-
cular sporangia in August.
Loc. Bay off Vesterdalen.
192 L. KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
Leptonema Reinke.
37. Г. fasciculatum Reinke.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 879; Jonsson (1904) р. 35.
Elachista fasciculata (Reinke) Gran, K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 35.
Attached to Lithothamnion glaciale, mostly f. subcylindrica К.
Rosenv., some filaments Г. uncinata Reinke.
Loc. Entrance to the harbour.
Fam. Ectocarpacee.
Ectocarpus Lyngb.
38. E. (Pylaiella) littoralis (L.) Lyngb.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 881, (1898 I) р. 75; Jonsson (1904) р. 35.
Found in various localities, mostly loose and in company with
other loose alge, in particular Stictyosiphon tortilis. Also found
attached to stipes of Alaria. The latter specimens were very bran-
ched with secund branches, the others had often opposite branches.
Unilocular sporangia were met with in plants collected in July and
August.
Loc. East Side of Koldewey Island; along Cape Bismarck Peninsula;
Danmarks Науп; bay off Vesterdalen, at most 4 meters; Cape Amélie, in
clumps in the ice.
39. E.ovatus Kjellm. var. tenuis K. Rosenv.
K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 77; Jonsson (1904) p. 37.
Small са. 1mm. high plants were found epiphytic on Turnerella
Pennyi and Lithothamnion glaciale. They bear plurilocular sporangia
which are mostly alternate or secund; opposite sporangia however
also occur. The upright filaments are often unbranched (comp.
Jonsson |. c.).
Loc. Danmarks Havn, and the entrance to the harbour.
40. E.maritimus (Kjellm.) K. Rosenv. comb. nov.
Chætophora maritima Kjellman (1877) р. 51, pl. V fig. 15—16.
Pilinia maritima (Kjellm.) K. Rosenv. (1893) p. 932.
In company with Calothrix scopulorum and other littoral algæ
a small, branched filamentous alga was met with, occurring partly
in а rather elongated partly in а shorter and denser form. The
latter agrees pretty well with Chætophora maritima Kjellm., which
has been referred by me to the genus Pilinia. On the other hand
the more elongated plants remind one so much of Ectocarpus luci-
fugus Kuckuck, which has been so carefully described by its author
(Kuckuck 1897, р. 35, pl. XI—XII), that the question arises whether
it has been legitimate to refer this plant to the Chlorophyceæ. И
is in reality very imperfectly known in regard to the cell-contents
Оп the Marine Algz from North-East Greenland. 193
and to the reproduction. Thus, the zoospores seem never to have
been observed. The colour was yellow-green in the dried specimens
from West Greenland I have examined, and according to Kjellman
the colour of the cell-contents is brownish-green (fusco-viride) (1. с.
р. 51). An examination of specimens from West Greenland and
from Spitzbergen (communicated by Kjellman) showed really that
the cells contained no starch and that the cell-wall did not consist
of cellulose, the walls of the empty sporangia only staining violet
by chlor-iodide of zinc. There is thus reason to believe that the
alga in question is not a Chlorophycea but a Phæophycea, and аз
the more elongated plants in the material from East Greenland
much resemble Ectocarpus lucifugus Kuck. the plant must be in
that case a species of Ectocarpus related to Е. lucifugus. On account
of the good state of preservation (alcohol) of the material from
North-East Greenland it was easy to see that the cells contain a
parietal chromatophore like that described by Kuckuck. The plants
had unilocular sporangia agreeing with those described by me in
Pilinia maritima (1893 fig. 43) and with those of Ectocarpus lucifugus
(1. с.); they were only a little smaller than the latter, namely 20—
24 u long, 9—10 и broad, while the sporangia in Kuckuck’s plants
were 30—35y long and 11—15 и broad.
As the more elongated and the denser plants undoubtedly belong
to the same species, and as the denser form fully agrees with Che-
tophora maritima Kjellm., the species must retain Kjellman’s specific
name but it must be referred to the genus Ectocarpus. It is beyond
doubt that the species is nearly related to E. lucifugus Kuck., and
the resemblance is so great that there is reason to ask if these two
species might not be identical. There seems however to be at least
one distinctive character, some of the branches in E. maritimus ter-
minating in hairs or hair-like filaments consisting of narrower and
longer cells with scarcer and less coloured contents, as in several
species of Ectocarpus, while such hairs are wanting in E. lucifugus
according to the express statement of Kuckuck (1. с. р. 35) and to
what I found on examining original specimens sent by Prof. Kuckuck.
In the plants from North-East Greenland, however, the hairs were
only fully developed in the specimens with short and dense branches.
This species much resembles the fresh-water alga Pleurocladia
lacustris A. Br. (comp. Wille (1895) and Klebahn (1895)) and seems
to be related to it. In my opinion, the genus Pleurocladia cannot be
maintained as distinct from Ectocarpus; the species named must
therefore be called Ectocarpus lacustris (A. Br.) nob.
Loc. Vestre Havnenæs.
XLII. 10 ©
124 L. KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
Fam. Myrionemacee.
Myrionema Grev.
41. M.foecundum (Strömf.) Sauv.
Sauvageau (1898) p. 10; Borgesen (1902) p. 426.
Phycocelis foecunda Strömfelt (1888) р. 7.
A small Myrionema which seems referable to this species was
met with in the upper end of a young Alaria in close company
with Pheostroma pustulosum. The hairs were provided with a sheath
at the base, and were 4—5y thick. The sporangia which showed
here and there a few longitudinal divisions were 7—9 м broad.
Гос. Along Cape Bismarck Peninsula.
Sorapion Kuck.
42. 5. Kjellmani (Wille) К. Rosenv.
K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 95.
Some crusts of this species agreeing with the formerly collected
specimens from Greenland were met with growing on Lithothamnion-
crusts. They were up to 4 mm. in diameter and bore empty unilo-
cular sporangia which were scattered over the surface of the frond.
Sterile specimens undoubtedly of the same species were found on
Turnerella Pennyt.
Loc. Danmarks Науп; ой Baadskeeret.
Lithoderma Aresch.
43. L. fatiscens (Aresch.) emend. Kuckuck.
Kuckuck (1894) р. 238; К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 901, (1898 I) р. 97; Jonsson
(1904) p. 39.
This species is common, forming more or less extended crusts
on the stones, often confluent so that the stones are covered with a
continuous brown crust which easily loosens from the stone on
drying. The crust is often fairly thick, e. gr. 30 cells thick and
more. Some of the specimens collected in the end of August (or
perhaps also in the beginning of September) showed plurilocular
sporangia, as described by Kuckuck (1. с. р. 238 fig. 11 A), partly
young partly fairly well developed, however scarcely fully ripe.
This agrees with what I have found in specimens from Scoresby
Sound (1898 I р. 98).
Loc. Danmarks Havn; entrance to the Harbour; along Vestre Hav-
nenæs, ca. 38 meters.
On the Marine Algæ from North-East Greenland. 125
Fam. Sphacelariacee.
Chetopteris Kutz.
44. Ch. plumosa (Lyngb.) Kiitz.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 903, (1908 I) р. 99; Jönsson (1904) р. 40.
Only a few badly developed and sterile specimens were met with.
Loc. Danmarks Havn; bay off Vesterdalen; Cape Amélie, in clumps in
the ice, April.
Sphacelaria Lyngb.
45. S.racemosa Grev. var. arctica (Harv.) Reinke.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 904, (1898 I) р. 100; Jonsson (1904) р. 40.
A couple of well-developed but sterile specimens have been
found at Cape Bismarck Peninsula. Specimens found in the harbour
in August had young unilocular sporangia sitting solitary on short
1—3-celled stalks, which were as a rule monosiphonous, more rarely
two in one stalk.
Loc. East Side of Koldewey Island; along Cape Bismarck Peninsula;
Danmarks Havn, very scarce.
С. СШогорпусеге.
Fam. Phyllosiphonacee.
Ostreobium Born. et Flah.
46. O. Queketti Born. et Flah.
‚ К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 906, (1898 I) р. 101.
Occurs frequently in old shells of various bivalves (Mya, Saxi-
cava), but also met with in Lithothamnion foecundum. It is well-
developed and has often the characteristic swellings described by
Bornet and Flahault. These swellings often reach considerable
dimensions and are then filled with a granular green matter, but I
cannot state anything about their significance. The colour is always
green. Transverse walls do not occur.
Loc. East Side of Koldewey Island; entrance to the harbour; along
Vestre Havnenæs, 19—47 meters; off Baadskzeret 38 meters.
Fam. Cladophoracea.
Acrosiphonia (J. Ag.) Kjellm.
47. А. hystrix (Strömf.) Jonss.
Jonsson (1904) p. 46.
Spongomorpha hystrix Strömfelt (1886) р. 54.
Cladophora arcta у, hystrix К. Возепу. (1893) р. 907.
10°
126 L. KoLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
A fragment of an Acrosiphonia which seems to belong to this
species has been met with. The filaments are 154—175 „ thick and
are partly composed of rather short cells, only twice as long as
broad. They are much like A. hystrix f. debilis (K. Rosenv.), only a
little thinner (comp. Jonsson 1. с. р. 48).
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
A. sp.
Some of the samples contain fragments of another species of
Acrosiphonia in small quantities. They occur together with several
loose algæ and have undoubtedly also been loose. Owing to their
small quantity and their incomplete and sterile condition they are
scarcely determinable. The filaments are 50--90 4 thick; hooked
branches do not occur. A complete specimen, possibly belonging
to the same species, was met with on a stone dredged at Cape Bis-
marck Peninsula. Its filaments were up to 1214 thick. The cells
were in this specimen, as well as in the loose ones, several times
as long as broad, and rhizoidal branches were abundant. The last-
named specimen was also sterile.
Loc. East Side of Koldewey Island; along Cape Bismarck Peninsula;
bay off Vesterdalen.
Chetomorpha Kitz.
48. Ch. Melagonium (Web. et Mohr) Kitz.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 917, (1898 I) p. 104; Jonsson (1904) p. 51.
Most of the specimens in the collection seem to have been loose.
Some of these specimens are very vigorous, about 1 mm. in diameter
and consist of cells which are one
to two diameters long, while others
are much thinner, from 100 up to
ESTER se 300 » in diameter, and composed of
a cells which are 3 to 4 diameters
Fs ae long. As there is so great a break
| B ey Fe between these two forms, one might
Fig.8. Chetomorpha Melagonium f. tenttise be inclined to think that they re-
Upper end of a cell, showing nuclei, n, present two different species, but
pyrenoids, p, and stroma starch. 200:1. the specimens being on the whole
rather scarce in the collection, and
the species being very variable in breadth also in other arctic
regions (comp. K. Rosenvinge 1898 p. 104), I judge it preferable to
consider the thin filaments as an extremely thin form of the same
species. It might be named f. tenuis. The thinnest specimens ap-
proach in breadth to the thickest filaments of Chetomorpha tortuosa;
they differ however in having much more numerous nuclei, viz.
On the Marine Algæ from North-East Greenland. 127
one to several hundreds (fig. 8), while Ch. tortuosa has ca. 20 nuclei
in each cell (К. Rosenvinge 1893 р. 917).
The species seems to attain a greater thickness in high latitudes
than farther south. According to Kjellman (1877 p. 56) it also reaches
at Spitzbergen a diameter of ca. 1 mm., while its maximum diameter
is otherwise stated to be 800» on the West coast of Sweden (Аге-
schoug (1850) р. 202), 700» in the North Sea (Hauck 1885 р. 438)
and 500 on the New England coast (Farlow 1881 р. 46).
In one gathering only it was found attached to a stone. These
filaments had a diameter of at least 400 y.
Loc. East Side of Koldewey Island; Danmarks Havn.
Fam. Chelophorace«.
Arthrochæte К. Rosenv.
49. A.penetrans К. Возепу.
К. Rosenvinge (1898 I) р. 111.
This peculiar epi- and endophytic alga, which seems not to
have been found by others since it was described in 1898, is rather
frequently met with in older fronds of Turnerella Pennyi, in parti-
cular on discoloured spots. The plants fully agree with those from
Scoresby Sound. The epiphytic crusts are in great measure poly-
stromatic. Numerous sporangia, mostly empty, were found in plants
collected in September.
Loc. East Side of Koldewey Island; Danmarks Hayn.
50. A. phæophila sp. п.
Thallus endophyticus e filis irregulariter ramosis inter fila thalli
Symphyocarpi strangulantis repentibus compositus. Fila primaria
horizontalia ramosa, ramos breves verticales etiam emittentia; fila
nonnunquam in massam pseudoparenchymaticam confluentia. Cel-
lulæ subcylindrice aut magis rotundatæ ad subglobosæ, longitudine
diametro æquantes vel ad Чар longiores, lat. 9—15 и, chromato-
phorum pyrenoide uno vel duobus instructum continentes. Pili ar-
ticulati laterales vel terminales filis repentibus et erectis impositi,
inferne 55—65y crassi. Sporangia obovata ad subglobosa in filis
repentibus vel erectis lateralia aut terminalia, nonnunquam plura
dense aggregata, apice dehiscentia, long. 14—25 y, lat. 10—21 и.
This new species has only been met with in small quantity in
a few dried crusts of Symphyocarpus strangulans growing on a Litho-
thamnion-crust. The filaments creep irregularly between the cells of
the host, in particular horizontally, in accordance with the small
thickness of the host. They are often much branched, particularly
in a horizontal direction, but short erect filaments are also given
128 L. KoLperup ROSENVINGE.
off. Sometimes, when the filaments are much branched, they are
united to pseudoparenchymatous bodies. I am uncertain whether
the plant may also be partly epiphytic. Here and there vigorous
hairs, slowly tapering upwards, occur; they show one or two trans-
verse walls, and their cells, in particular the upper, have not much
contents. The vegetative cells almost certainly contain one parietal
chromatophore, which however could not be distinguished in the
dried plants; on the other hand one or two pyrenoids were often
distinctly visible (fig.
9, A, Г). Besides the
pyrenoid-starch, the
chromatophores con-
tained abundant stro-
ma-starch. The cell-
wall gave intense cel-
lulose-reaction with
chlor-iodide of zinc.
The position of the
sporangia is different;
they may be terminal
on the erect filaments
and lateral, sessile, on
the same and on the
creeping filaments. On-
ce I have seen a ter-
minal and a subter-
minal sporangium on
the end of a filament,
A
Fig. 9. Arthrochete pheophila. A, creeping filament with
lateral hair. B, terminal hair. C, branched filament
with hair. D, creeping filament with erect filament
bearing a sporangium. Е, creeping filament with two (fig. 9 С). The sporan-
sessile sporangia. F, erect filament, given off from a gia observed were all
creeping one, bearing four sporangia, seen from above. emptied througha split
G, filament with a terminal and a subterminal spor- :
angium. H, erect filament with a terminal sporangium. in the HORS part of
Le] ? te}
I, lateral sporangium. 350: 1. the cell-wall. They
have undoubtedly con-
tained swarm-cells, but whether asexual zoospores or gametes, it is
impossible to say.
I was at first inclined to refer this alga to the genus Pilinia
which it somewhat resembles in its mode of growth. It is distin-
suished however from this genus by the presence of pyrenoids which,
as far as known, are wanting in Pilinia. Moreover, it differs by
the pluricellular hairs. Such hairs were certainly pointed out in
Pilinia maritima, but as this plant has turned out to be a species
of Ectocarpus, as shown above (p. 123), hairs are now not to be found
On the Marine Algz from North-East Greenland. 129
in any species of Pilinia. By these hairs it resembles Arthrochæte
penetrans, and as the sporangia and the structure of the vegetative
cells are also similar, it might be referred to the same genus. It is
distinguished from the species named by the arrangement of the
filaments and the broader, often nearly globular sporangia. The
differences in the structure of the vegetative frond are probably
partly dependent on the differences in structure of the host plants.
In this respect the new species is too little known, owing to the
scarce material.
Loc. Off Baadskeeret.
Epicladia Reinke.
51. Е. Flustre Reinke.
K. Rosenvinge (1898 I) p. 115.
The determination of the plants referred to this species is not
quite sure, as they were not fructiferous. They agreed with Reinke’s
description and figures; the creeping filaments were partly confluent,
forming a membrane, and the cells showed here and there foldings
inward of the cell-wall. Found on Delesseria sinuosa and Desma-
restia aculeata.
Loc. East Side of Koldewey Island; Danmarks Науп.
Gomontia Born. et Flah.
52. G.polyrrhiza (Lagerh.) Born. et Flah.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 907, (1898 I) p. 101.
In old dead greenish crusts of Lithothamnion leve and in shells
of Mya and Saxicava, in the latter case together with other perfora-
ting algæ (Conchocelis, Ostreobium) and as a rule in lesser quantity
than these. Found in 19 meters depth, at least. With sporangia in
the beginning of September.
Гос. Entrance to the harbour; along Vestre Havnenæs.
Pseudendoclonium Wille.
53. P.submarinum Wille.
Wille (1901) p. 29.
In company with Calothrix scopulorum and other littoral algæ
a small alga was found which agreed well with Wille’s description
and figures, as to the mode of growth, dimensions and structure of
the cells. The elongated cells were 5—6 и broad; the cells contained
a parietal chromatophore.
Loc. Vestre Havnenæs.
130 L. KoLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
Fam. Ulothricacee.
Ulothrix Kitz.
54. Ч.Насса (Dillw.) Thur.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 935; Wille (1901) p. 18; Jonsson (1904) p. 54.
At the upper end of a young Alaria some filaments of a Ulothrix
were met with which must be referred to this species. The swarm-
cell producing parts of the filaments were curved in the manner
characteristic of the species and consisted of low cells undoubtedly
producing gametes'. The filaments were comparatively thin, the
fertile parts only reaching 334 in diameter. The cells often con-
tained only one pyrenoid, probably in connexion with the small
thickness of the filaments.
Loc. Along Cape Bismarck Peninsula.
55. U.scutata Jonsson.
Jonsson (1904) p. 57.
This species seems to be common within the region explored.
However, I am only sure of the determination of the specimens from
one locality, as I have seen only in these the basal part character-
istic of the species. Most of the specimens from the other localities
are dried. At the base the filaments were 5—7 и thick, and the
cells in the lower part of the filaments were frequently up to 4
times as long as broad.
Loc. East Side of Koldewey Island. Further, uncertain as to the deter-
mination from dredging along Cape Bismarck Peninsula, Danmarks Havn
and Baadskeeret.
56. U.consociata Wille.
Wille (1901) p. 25; Jonsson (1904) p. 60.
The North-East Greenland specimens agree with Wille’s descrip-
tion; only they were rather thin. Young sterile plants were only
7—75y thick near the base, older filaments 10:5 и, fertile filaments
12'5 thick. The filaments are often decumbent at the base and
form rhizoids there. Sometimes two filaments were found coalesced
near the base. The apical cell is rounded. — It was found growing
оп Enleromorpha prolifera in the tidal region.
Loc. Vestre Havnenæs, September.
1 In stating (1893 р. 935 —36) that I have found this species with zoospores in
West Greenland, I have not intended to say anything about the question whether
the swarm-cells were asexual zoospores or gametes. Probably they were gametes
(comp. Wille (1901) p. 21).
On the Marine Algz from North-East Greenland. 131
Fam. Ulvacee.
Enteromorpha (Link.)
57. E. prolifera (O. F. Mill.)
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 960; Jonsson (1904) p. 66.
It is with hesitation that I have referred to this species some
specimens collected in the littoral region. They are rather much
branched, thin, with still thinner branches. The arrangement of
the cells in longitudinal series is sometimes tolerably distinct, the
new cell-walls being mainly perpendicular to the axis of the frond,
sometimes indistinct or wanting. The cells are angular with some-
what rounded edges, much as in the typical form of E. intestinalis,
but only 7—9 in diameter. The membrane of the frond is 11—12 u
thick, the cell-wall is not thickened on the inner side. A great
number of very young plants were met with. Some of the large
plants looked as if they had wintered and later on produced new
branches. No “trabecule” were observed in the cavity of the frond.
In view of the great difficulty of determining species of Entero-
morpha much stress cannot be laid on the determination of the
above-mentioned specimens; nor shall I enter into the question
whether E. prolifera is specifically distinct from E. intestinalis.
Гос. Vestre Havnenæs, September.
Fam. Protococcacee.
Chlorochytrium Cohn.
58. Ch.inclusum Kjellm.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 963, (1898 I) p. 119; Jonsson (1904) p. 69.
Very common in Turnerella Pennyi.
Loc. East Side of Koldewey Island; Danmarks Havn; ой Baadskæret
a. 28 meters.
59. Ch. Schmitzii K. Rosenv.
K. Rosenvinge (1893) p. 964, (1898 I) p. 119; Jönsson (1903) p. 338.
Very common in Cruoria arctica and in Petrocelis polygyna.
Loc. Off Baadskæret and along Vestre Havneaæs, са. 28 meters.
D. Cyanophycee.
Fam. Rivulariacee.
Calothrix Ag.
60. C.scopulorum (Web. et Mohr) Ag.
К. Rosenvinge (1893) р. 966, (1898 I) р. 121; Jonsson (1904) р. 70.
Well developed filaments, in a great measure with hormogonia.
In the littoral zone.
Гос. Vestre Havnenæs, September.
132 Г. KOLDERUP ROSENVINGE.
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
AGARDH, J. G. (1868), Bidrag till kannedomen af Spetsbergens Alger. K. Svenska Vet.
Akad. Handl. Bd. 7, No. 8. Stockholm.
— (1872), Bidrag till kännedomen af Grønlands Laminarieer och Fucaceer. К. Sv.
Vet. Akad. Handl. Bd. 10, No. 8. Stockholm.
— (1876), Species genera et ordines Algarum. Vol. III. Lipsiæ.
— (1896), Analecta algologica. Continuatio Ш. Acta Rec. Soc. Physiogr. Т. VII.
Lunde.
ARESCHOUG, J. E. (1850), Phyceae Scandinavicae marinae. Upsaliae. Act. Upsal. Vol. XIV.
— (1883), Observationes phycologicae. Part. quarta. De Laminariaceis nonnullis.
Nova Acta Reg. Soc. Sc. Ups. Ser. III. Upsaliæ.
BATTERS, Е. А. Г. (1896), New or critical British marine Algæ. Journal of Botany.
Vol. 34. London.
— (1892), On Conchocelis, a New Genus of Perforating Alge. Phycological Memoirs
edited by G. Murray. Part I. London. Plate VIII. |
BORGESEN, Е. (1902), Marine Algæ (of the Егегоез). Botany of the Færges. Part II.
Copenhagen.
BORGESEN, Е. and HELGI Jonsson (1905), The distribution of the Marine Algæ of the
Arctic Sea and of the northernmost Part of the Atlantic. Botany of the
Feeroes. Appendix.
DE-Tonı, J. В. (1905), Sylloge Algarum. Vol. IV. Florideæ. Sectio IV. Patavii.
FarLow, W. G. (1881), Marine Algæ of New England and adjacent coast. Washington.
Козтле, М. (1895), The Norwegian Forms of Lithothamnion. Det kgl. norske Viden-
skabers Selsk. Skrifter 1894. Trondhjem 1895.
— (1905), Remarks on Northern Lithothamnia. Det kgl. norske Videnskabers Selsk.
Skrifter. 1905, No. 3. Trondhjem.
— (1898), List of species of the Lithothamnia. Det kgl. norske Videnskabers Selsk.
Skrifter. 1898, No. 3. Trondhjem.
GUIGNARD, L. (1892), Observations sur l’appareil mucifere des Laminariacées. Annales
des scienc. nat. 7е ser. tome 15. Paris.
Hauck, F. (1885), Die Meeresalgen Deutschlands und Oesterreichs. Leipzig.
JONSSON, Негст (1903), The Marine Algæ of Iceland (Ш. Chlorophyceæ. IV. Cyano-
phyceæ). Botanisk Tidsskrift. 25. Bind, 3. Hefte. København.
— (1904), The Marine Algæ of East Greenland. Meddelelser om Grønland XXX.
Copenhagen.
KJELLMAN, Е. В. (1877), Om Spetsbergens marina, klorofyliförande thallophyter. Il.
Bihang till К. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl. Band. 4, No. 6. Stockholm.
— (1883), Norra Ishafvets algflora. Vega-exped. vetensk. arbeten. Stockholm. — The
same paper translated in English: The Algæ of the Arctic Sea. К. Svenska
Vet.-Akad. Handlingar. Bd. 20, No. 5.
— (1906), Zur Kenntnis der marinen Algenflora von Jan Mayen. Arkiv for Botanik.
Bd. 5, N:o 14. Uppsala & Stockholm.
KLEBAHN, H. (1895), Beobachtungen uber Pleurocladia lacustris A. Br. Berichte 4.
Deut. Bot. Gesellsch. Ва. 13, р. 93.
Коскоск, Р. (1894), Bemerkungen zur marinen Algenflora von Helgoland. Wissensch.
Meeresuntersuch. Neue Folge. 1. Band. Kiel und Leipzig.
— (1895), Ueber einige neue Phæosporeen der westlichen Ostsee. Botanische Zei-
tung. 1895, Heft VIII. ’
— (1897), Uber zwei héhlenbewohnende Phaeosporeen. Beitrage zur Kenntnis der
Meeresalgen. 4. Wissensch. Meeresuntersuchungen. Neue Folge. II. Band,
Heft 1. Kiel und Leipzig.
Оп the Marine Algæ from North-East Greenland. 133
Napson, G. (1900), Die perforierenden (kalkbohrenden) Algen und ihre Bedeutung in
der Natur. Scripta Botanica Ноги Univers. Petropolitanae, fasc. XVIII.
(Russian with abstract in German).
RASMUSSEN, В. (1909), Bemærkninger om Væksten af Bladet hos Alaria esculenta paa
Færøerne. Botanisk Tidsskrift. Bd. 29, р. 333.
ROSENVINGE, Г. KOLDERUP (1893), Grønlands Havalger. Meddelelser om Grønland Ш.
Kjobenhavn 1893.
— (1894), Les Algues marines du Groenland. Annales des sciences naturelles. 7e
série, tome 19. |
— (1898 I), Deuxième Mémoire sur les Algues marines du Groenland. Meddelelser
om Grønland XX. Kjøbenhavn.
— (1898 II), Om Algevegetationen ved Grønlands Kyster. With résumé: Sur la vé-
gétation d’Algues marines sur les côtes du Grönland. Meddelelser om Gron-
land, XX. Kjobenhavn.
— (1909), The Marine Algæ of Denmark. Part I. К. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Skr.
7. Række, УП. 1. Kobenhavn.
SAUVAGEAU, С. (1898), Sur quelques Myrionémacées. (premier mémoire). Annales des
sc. nat. 8e série, tome 5. Paris.
Scumirz, Е. und P. HauPrFLEIscH (1897), Rhodophyceae. Engler und Prantl, Die
naturlichen Pflanzenfamilien. I. Teil. Abt. 2. Leipzig 1896—1897.
SETCHELL, W. A. and N. L. GARDNER (1893), Algæ of North-western America. Univer-
sity of California Publications. Botany. Vol. I. Berkeley.
STRÖMFELT, Н. Е. G. (1886), Om algvegetationen vid Islands kuster. Göteborg 1886.
— (1888), Algae novae quas ad litora Scandinaviae indagavit. Notarisia. Anno III,
fasc. 9. Venezia.
WILLE, М. (1895), Ueber Pleurocladia lacustris A. Br. und deren systematische Stellung.
Berichte 4. Deut. Bot. Ges. Ва. 13, р. 106.
— (1901), Studien über Chlorophyceen. I—VII. Videnskabsselskabets Skrifter. 1909.
No. 6. Christiania.
ZANARDINI, G. (1876), Iconographia phycologica mediterraneo-adriatica, ossia scelta di
Ficee nuove о piu rare dei mari mediterraneo ed adriatico, figurate, descritte
ed illustrate. Vol. 3. 1870— 76.
9—5—1910.
2
U
2
‘
wi
—
7
в
У.
FUNGI TERRESTRES
FROM NORTH-EAST GREENLAND
(N. OF 76° N. LAT.)
COLLECTED BY THE “DANMARK-EXPEDITION”
DETERMINED
BY
С. FERDINANDSEN
WITH PL. IX
1910
XLIII. 11
on
à
92
LL
TY
e
fa
=
‘
>
ey
INTRODUCTION.
he material of earth-fungi brought home by the “Danmark Ex-
pedition” was collected by A. LunpAGER between 76° and 77°
М. L., partly on the mainland, partly on the southern Koldewey
Island', and is very scanty, as was to be expected. In all 16
species are represented in the collection, of which however only
11 can be identified with any certainty. The greater number
of these, 7 species namely, have been earlier noted from Greenland,
and of the remainder Calvatia arctica n.sp. and Calvatia cyathiformis
(Возс.) Morg. have already, as will appear from the text, also been
found by previous collectors. The same holds good in all probabil-
ity for Cortinarius collinitus (Pers.) Fr. The fourth species hitherto
not noted from Greenland, Russula cfr. R. integram (L.) Fr., belongs
to the commonest North European fungi and is also known from
Arctic regions.
Russula cfr. R. nitidam Fr. is new for the east coast; on the
other hand, Scleroderma vulgare Fr. and Lycoperdon favosum (Rostk.)
Bonord. are dropped from its flora (cfr. text).
As was to be expected beforehand, the species found are such
as grow — or are able to grow — on barren and little sheltered
places in temperate latitudes; there is much agreement especially
between this small high-northern fungus-flora and that of our own
heaths.
As mentioned above, it has not been possible to determine all
the fungi with certainty to their species; many characters namely
are wiped out on preserving the material — chiefly the colours,
next also the whole appearance of the living fungus, which is an
essential, sometimes indeed necessary condition for a correct deter-
mination of species. This is helped out somewhat for the species
which have been drawn in colours by the artists of the Expedition;
but we can naturally not expect to find just the mycologically im-
portant characters illustrated in such sketches. A completely satis-
ТА single, indeterminable species was collected by Dr. LINDHARD on Maroussia.
ibs
138 С. FERDINANDSEN.
factory picture of the fungal flora of а region will on the whole
only be obtained, when a specialist visits the country and himself
collects his material.
For friendly assistance in the examination of the Gasteromy-
ceteae collected I am much indebted to Dr. Lapiraus Нотл.0$ of
Kecskemét in Hungary and my friend сапа. WINGE of Copenhagen.
Agaricineae.
Cortinarius Fr.
Cortinarius (Myxacium) collinitus (Pers.) Fr. — Epicr. р. 274.
№. 270a (coloured drawing): bog north of Thermometerfjæld, 4—6— 07; No. 355:
near the large lake, 9—8—07; No. 1911: Danmarks Havn, 16—7—08; No. 1916: Basis-
keeret, 16—7—08.
On the largest and best preserved specimens (No. 355) the belted
structure of the stalk is still to be seen; the other specimens are
less typical, but undoubtedly belong within the range of this species,
which is very variable. In microscopical regards they are quite
the same.
This species, which seems comparatively common, has probably
been brought home from Greenland on earlier occasions, without
its being possible to determine the specimens; cfr. Rostrup: Fungi
Groenlandiae orientalis ес., Medd. om Grønland XXX, p.15: “In
collectionibus .... Agaricaceae ....indeterminabiles e generibus Rus-
sulae .... et Cortinarii inventae sunt”.
Cortinarius sp.
No. 380: Cape Bismarck, 14—8— 07.
Galera Fr.
Galera Hypnorum (Batsch) Fr. — Syst. Мус. I, р. 267.
No. 33a (coloured drawing): near the large lake, 1—8—07; No. 1766: in damp
moss, 18 —7—08.
Cystidia bottle-shaped, usually with a small knob or bud on
the neck. In the material from Julianehaab I have found conical
cystides, which however showed a tendency to swell out above into
knobs; on the whole this species seems to contain several types in
regard to the form of the cystidia.
Fungi terrestres from North-East Greenland. 139.
“Seems to be one of the commonest Agaricaceae occurring in
Greenland” (Rostrup: Tillæg til Grønlands Svampe, Medd. om Grøn-
land Ш, р. 597).
Inocybe Fr.
Inocybe lacera Fr. — Syst. Myc. I, p. 257.
No. 48a: Koldewey Island, 13—8—06.
A covering of sand, containing protonema threads, small mosses,
a very small Juncus plant and withered stumps of older, still sur-
rounds the somewhat knob-shaped, swollen basal part of the stalk.
This fungus thrives well on sandy, naked ground; the author
has found it on such a locality on heaths in Jutland. — Noted by
Возтвор from Danmarks © (Ost-Gronlands Svampe, Medd. om Gron-
land XVIII, p. 7).
Lactarius Pers.
Lactarius rufus (Scop.) Fr. — Epicr. p. 247.
No. 48b: Koldewey Island, 13—8—06; №. 381b: Thermometerfjæld, 17—8—07.
The anatomical examination of the trama shows that the fungus
is a Lactarius or a Russula. There is nothing stated regarding the
milk contents; but most fortunately Lactarius rufus belongs to the
fungi, which resist excellently the influence of the preserving fluid,
so that it is easily recognised even in alcohol.
The fungus is noted by Rostrup from Danmarks © (Ost-
Grønlands Svampe, Medd. om Grønland XVIII, р. 8); it is of rather
common occurrence on Danish heaths.
Naucoria Fr.
Naucoria sp.sc. N.lapponica Fr. — Hym. Eur. р. 263.
No. 1935: Bog near Danmarks Havn, 16—7—08.
A small specimen (stalk ca. 2 cm. high, pileus 1'/2 cm. broad),
with quartz grains firmly attached to the surface of the pileus.
Spores ellipsoidal, 8—10 м x 5—6 4, light-yellow with oil-drops. —
Colour of the pileus is now dark-brown, but on drying yellow spots
come to view which have been very apparent in the fresh state;
this is indicated by a note in the journal: “honey-fungus”. The
pileus has thus been covered by bright yellow scales, and the pel-
licle has been viscous; add to this, that the lamellae are toothed at
the edge and with decurrent teeth, and it becomes very probable that
we have N. lapponica Fr. before us. — Unfortunately, no microscopic
characters have been included in the diagnosis of this species, which
makes the identification very difficult. — Возтвор notes N. lapponica
Fr. from Cape Stewart (Ost Gronland Svampe p. 7).
140 С. FERDINANDSEN.
Omphalia Fr.
Omphalia umbellifera (L.) Fr. — Elench. I, р. 22.
No. 381a (coloured drawing): Thermometerfjæld, 17—8—07; No. 1936: bog near
Danmarks Havn, 16—7—08 (Honey-fungus).
As the drawing and the term “honey-fungus” indicate, the fun-
gus has a beautiful yellow colour in the living condition (the form
Ag. chrysoleucus Pers., which is common in high mountains and in
the Arctic).
“Seems to be the most commonly occurring and most wide-
spread of the Agaricineae in Greenland” (Rostrup: Fungi Groen-
landiae, Medd. om Grønland Ш, р. 528). — Cf. also Rostrup: Ost-
Grønlands Svampe, Medd. om Grønland XVIII, p.7, Duc D’ORLEANS:
Croisiere océanographique etc. Botanique р. 12. — N. HARTZ's note,
that the fungus is common on damp spots in the heath in Scoresby
Sound (®st-Gronlands Svampe 1. с.) agrees well with the fact, that
on Danish heaths it is also chiefly bound to moist spots between
the Calluna-tufts, where the author has even found it submerged.
Omphalia umbellifera (L.) Fr. var. ad О. rusticam Fr. vergens.
No. 360: fungi on fairly dry ground on 5. Е. side of the Varde-Ridge, 11—8—07;
chocolate-brown, the small specimen with a light spot in the middle.
From the typical O. umbellifera this form differs by its dark
colour and by somewhat narrower, more crowded lamellae; in
these characters it approaches to O. rustica Fr., which species along
with O. umbellifera-forms is united by PERSOON to the species Agaricus
ericetorum. Both species (umbellifera and rustica) are found on Da-
nish heaths.
Omphalia sp.
No. 991: Basiskæret 20—6—08; in rough dried moss and as stiff as wood.
The badly preserved condition makes a certain determination
impossible.
Russula Fr.
This is one of the genera in which the separation of the species
is often very difficult, in fact almost impossible in alcohol material
when the plants have not been collected and labelled by a specialist.
A certain amount of knowledge of the shades of colour of the spores
and of the taste (smell) of the flesh is in fact an indispensable con-
dition for the determination of the species — and of these characters
the first can be only with difficulty, the last impossibly recognised
after treatment with alcohol. The determinations given must there-
fore merely be regarded as approximate.
Fungi terrestres from North-East Greenland. 141
Russula sp. cfr. R.integram (L.) Fr. — Epicr., р. 360.
No. 333b (coloured drawing): near the large lake, 1—8—07; No. 353 (coloured
drawing): no locality noted.
Of these specimens No. 353 (deep-red, strongly tuberculated at
the margin, stalk somewhat faintly yellowish) certainly comes nearest
to the true В. integra Fr.; No. 333b seems more distant, to judge
from the coloured drawing, especially in the yellow stalk — and is
in any case not К. integra sensu Friesii. — “Plures occurrunt am-
biguae formae, praecipue К. integra coloris varietatibus fallax”. (Засс.
Syll. V, 469).
Russula integra is “in Europa boreali ex vulgatissimis’” and is
further noted from Siberia and the Bellot Islands (81° 41’ N. L.)
(Засс. Syll. V, р. 475).
Russula sp. cfr. В. nitidam (Pers.) Fr. — Epicr. р. 361.
No. 400 (coloured drawing): Basiskæret, 20—-8—07.
The pileus has a characteristic, deep-blue colour with red-mauve
spots. If the lamellae are yellowish — and they certainly seem to
be so — the fungus belongs in the neighbourhood of the species
named.
Rostrup (Fungi Groenlandiae, Medd. om Grenland III, p. 529)
gives R. nitida from Upernivik.
Russula sp.
No. 270b (coloured drawing): In pool N. of Thermometerfjæld, 4—6--07.
The plant itself is not to be found in the collection, and the
coloured drawing does not give sufficient information to make a
determination of the species possible.
Tubaria Fr.
Tubaria furfuracea (Pers.) Fr. — Syst. Myc. I, р. 262.
No. 374: Near the shore Е. of Thermometerfjæld, 12—8—07. On the slope in a
dried-up water-course. Moorland.
Small, but typically developed specimens with several concentric
circles of clay-coloured scales along the margin of the pileus.
Rostrup does not mention this fungus from East Greenland
(only from Upernivik and Disco); but it has probably been found
later at Cape Bismarck; cf. Duc D ORLEANS: Croisiere océanographique
etc., Botanique, p. 12.
Agaricaceae indeterminatae.
The remainder of the Agaricaceae collected, in all three species,
must be taken together under this designation, as not even a deter-
142 С. FERDINANDSEN.
mination of the genus is possible in these cases; for this, so far as
the species A (Nos. 1293 and 1294) is concerned, the too little devel-
oped condition stands in the way, and the material of the second
species, B, (Nos. 70 and 454) was already damaged by larvae and
frost on collecting. Lastly, the third species, C, (Nos. 382 and 383)
belongs to such a difficult generic group, that a determination from
the available, very sparse material would be quite indefensible. —
For the sake of completeness the fungi in question are noted -—
with the collectors and a few other additions — as an appendix to
the above-given list.
A. No. 1293: Maroussia 20—7—08; Dr. LinpDHARD found these fungi in an eskimo
ruin, the kitchen-corner, deep under the surface. No. 1294: Like the foregoing, only
seen here.
The specimens found are quite small, the largest 1 cm. high
with pileus just formed. Brownish. Grows on a swampy soil, chiefly
of moss.
В. No. 70: Fungi in wet moss under Thermometerfjæld. No. 454: Basiskæret,
25 —8—07, taken in the frozen condition, later thawed and put in alcohol.
The spores are rough, hyaline; the flesh is almost entirely eaten
away by larvae. Russula? |
С. №. 382: Thermometerfjæld, 17—8—07, damp grass. No. 383: the same, lot
of rain on preceding days.
These specimens have characteristic, edged spores; but as no-
thing is noted regarding the colour of the spores, a certain deter-
mination of the genus cannot be made. If the spores were red, the
fungus has to be referred to Entoloma (or Leptonia); if they were
brown, on the other hand, the species will belong to Inocybe. —
There is absolutely no resemblance between the material of small,
dark fungi preserved in alcohol and the coloured drawing of No.
382, which shows a very large, fine, grey-lilac, silky fungus and
seems to have indications of brown spores. — Inocybe?
Gasteromyceteae.
Calvatia Fr.
Calvatia cyathiformis (Bosc) Morg. — North American Fungi,
Journ. Cincinati Soc. Nat. Hist. XII, p. 168.
Synonyms:
Lycoperdon cyathiforme Bosc, Berlin Mag. 1811 У p.87, t. VI
бо. INA:
Bovista lilacina Berk. & Mont., Hook. Lond. Journ. Vol. IV 1845.
Lycoperdon lilacinum (Berk.) Mass., Massee: Monographia Lycop.
nr. 10.
Fungi terrestres from North-East Greenland. 143
Lycoperdon lilacinum (Berk. & Mont.) Speg., Fungi Argent., p. 197,
nr. 321.
Lycoperdon fragile Vitt., Monogr. Lyc. р. (36) 80, 1842.
Calvatia fragilis (Vitt.) Morg., North American Fungi in Journ.
Cincinati Soc. Nat. Hist. XII, p. 168.
Lycoperdon Bovista Vitt., Fungi. Mang. р. 264, t. ХХХШ, fig. I
Grete:
Lycoperdon pseudolilacinum Speg., Fungi Guaran. p. 45, nr. 94.
No. 1906, Hvalrosodde Aug. 1906; No. 79, Hvalrosodde 16—6—07; No. 133, Hval-
rosodde 13—6— 07.
This fungus is very cosmopolitan in its distribution (Asia, Africa,
America, Europe) and also occurs in this country, mostly on heath
and downs. — Of the specimens brought home No. 1906 is about to
shed its spores and it is distinctly seen, that the brown, chequered
periderm is bursting irregularly, Calvatia-like; in the other specimens,
which probably have wintered, only the bowl-shaped basal part
remains; in No. 79 this has a diameter of ca. 7 cm. All the speci-
mens are almost sessile, stalky-contracted below and with wrinkled-
grooved basal part. The spore-mass is dark-brownish, with purple
shade; under the microscope the spores are distinctly warted, some-
times with a small pedicel, yellowish brown, 5—6 diam.; threads
of the capillitium have almost the same diameter as the spores and
a slightly darker colour. The loose tissue in the quite weakly
developed, sterile foot-part has a lilac sheen. There could scarcely
be any doubt from these characters, that these fungi belonged to
Calvatia cyathiformis, and the well-known specialist on the Gastero-
myceteae, Dr. Lapistaus Horrös of Hungary, to whom I sent No.
1906, has also confirmed my determination of that specimen.
On going through the East Greenland collections in the Botanical
Museum of Copenhagen I came across а specimen of the above-mentioned
species, collected at Cape Dalton by С. Kruuse and published in Ro-
sTRUP’s “Fungi Groenlandiae orientalis....” in Medd. om Grønland XXX,
р. 115, under the name of Lycoperdon favosum (Rostk.) Bonord?.
The specimen in question consists only of the persistent basal part
of the fungus, which in this case is but little typical, almost disc-
shaped and with Geaster-like, retroverted lobes on the margin. Fur-
ther, the colour is lighter than the type. A section through the
(short and but little distinct) stalk of the fruit-body shows, however,
the loose, lilac-coloured tissue which is so characteristic of C. cya-
1 Bot. Zeit. 1857, р. 595; Sacc. Syll. УП р. 121. In Bot. Centralbl. 1902, Вей. р. 4
(extra) OupEMANS has given the same specific name to a newly founded species;
according to a generally applied rule this last species should be called Lycoper-
don Oudemansii.
144 C. FERDINANDSEN.
thiformis. Also in regard to gleba and microscopic characters there
is full agreement with this species.
Calvatia arctica Ferdinandsen et Winge sp. п.
Peridio fere habitum Sclerodermatis aurantii aemulante, subreni-
formi-globoso, inferne stipitiformi-protracto indeque plicato, lat. ad
6 cm., alt. circ. 3 cm., + radicato. Exoperidio tenui, superne verrucis
eximie pyramidatis, lineolis horizontalibus parallelis ornatis, obsesso,
nonnumquam magis irregulariter areolato-caelato, inferne, secundum
limitem satis distinctum, granuloso — primo albo, ad maturitatem
fungi ochraceo. Endoperidio crasso, irregulariter dehiscente, fragili.
Сера peridium fere totum explente, initio alba, matura griseobrun-
neola, levissime olivaceo-tincta, basi sterili pallida, parvo-cellulari,
partem infimam stipitiformem peridii tantum occupante, instructa.
Basidiis obovato-clavatis, 14—16 x 7—8, sterigmatibus tenuibus,
usque 18 long., suffultis. Sporis globosis, 45 и — 5'5 и diam, minute
papillatis, uniguttulatis, tenuiter tunicatis, flavidulis, ad maturitatem
verrucis hyalinis, perexiguis, deciduis exasperatis. — Floccis diametro
fere sporarum (raro ad 7'/2y lat.), iisdem subconcoloribus, nonnum-
quam dichotome ramosis.
Hab. ad terram in tractu litoreo Groenlandiae orientalis, Lat.
hore
No. 241, in a bog, 19—7—07; No. 1803, Lille Snenæs, 9—7—08, common in
heath-bogs, damp Сагех- and Eriophorum-pools.
Аз the above diagnosis shows (see also Plate IX), this fungus
has a very characteristic external appearance, not unlike certain
forms of Scleroderma aurantium (Vaill.) Pers.! The specimens collected
were unripe, but on going through the collections of the Botanical Mu-
seum of Copenhagen in order if possible to find material for comparison,
I was successful in obtaining a ripe specimen of the fungus, collected
on the Liverpool Coast, Hurry Inlet (С. Kruuse). The latter is
noted in Rostrup’s Fungi Groenlandiae orientalis etc., Medd. om
Gronland XXX, p. 115, under the name of Lycoperdon favosum (Rostk.)
Bonord.. This last species seems from the description hardly distinct
from Calvatia caelata (Bull.) Morg., and in his work “Die Gastero-
myceten Ungarns” р. 163, Нотл.0$ also gives the two species as syno-
nyms. — It is not possible now, however, to bring the above-de-
scribed species in under the true Calvatia caelata; the gleba-mass,
1 In "Tillæg til Grønlands Svampe”, Medd. om Grønland Ш р. 601, Возтвор states,
that Scleroderma vulgare Fr. is “common in heaths”, citing a note of N. Harrz,
written on a label to a specimen from Vajgattet. The specimen in question,
however, is no Scleroderma, but belongs to the Lycoperdaceae and is mast
likely nothing but a young Calvatia arctica. After this Scleroderma vulgare
Fr. (= S. aurantium (Vaill.) Pers.) is not recorded from the East coast.
Fungi terrestres from North-East Greenland. 145
namely, is greyish chocolate-brown, and the spores are slightly
warted (4/5 —5'5 и diam., light-yellow); further, the threads of the
capillitium have nearly the same diameter as the spores. These
microscopic characters point towards C. cyathiformis, without how-
ever permitting identification with this species; for this also the sculp-
ture of the periderm and the light colour stand in the way.
I then sent the specimen from the Liverpool Coast (A), as also
a true C. cyathiformis, (No. 1906) to Dr. Нотл.0$, who very kindly
subjected these fungi to a closer investigation and returned them
with the following remarks: „Exemplar A ist entschieden kein Calva-
tia caelata (Bull.) Morg. .... Auch nicht Calvatia cyathiformis (Bosc)
Morg. — Ich kenne den Pilz nicht. In meiner reichen Sammlung
befindet sich kein solches Exemplar, mit dem ich Exempl. A ver-
gleichen könnte.”
On an accompanying, analytical drawing Dr. Horuös has written:
Calvatia зр.? — and in this genus the fungus should certainly be
placed. It seems, from the information given, to be rather widely
distributed in East Greenland.
EXPLANATION OF PLATE IX.
Calvatia arctica Ferd. & Wge sp.n.
Fig. 1. Habitus of a young fungus, nat. size (after a specimen in alcohol).
Fig. 2. Part of the peridium of a ripe fungus, from the outside, nat. size (after a
dried specimen).
Fig. 3. The same, from the inner side.
1000
Fig. 4. Spores, a
1000
Fig. 5. Basidia, Ste:
1000
Fig. 6. Threads of the capillitum, |.
Dansk, Repr
PL
CALVATIA ARCTICA sp.n. FERD. et WGE
MEDD. ом Gronu. XLIII. Nr. 6. [С. FERDINANDSEN]|
®.Winge ad not. del
= м мо
7
Fs
= x Er
| un
VE
SYSTEMATIC ELSE
OF FUNGI (MICROMYCETES) FROM
NORTH-EAST GREENLAND
(N. OF 76° N. LAT.)
COLLECTED BY THE “DANMARK-EXPEDITION” 1906—1908
DETERMINED
BY
J. LIND
Wi HP ANT Ex
1910
XLIII. 12
INTRODUCTION.
he following list of fungi is mainly the result of my examination
of the vascular plants, collected by Mr. LUNDAGER; only a few
of them belong to Captain J. P. Косн and Mr. FREUCHEN’s collections.
Only very few specimens have been collected expressly for the sake
of the fungi themselves, and accordingly the majority of the fungi
found belong to the less conspicuous species.
Most of the species are already known from Greenland and
have been mentioned in E. Rostrup’s publications in earlier volumes
of “Meddelelser fra Grønland”; 4 of the 65 species are new to
science, and 18 of them have not formerly been found in Greenland.
For the rest my report comes close to C. H. OSTENFELD and
ANDR. LUNDAGER’S “List of vascular plants”, so that I may refer to
their list for the names of authors of the host-plants ete.
List of the collecting places, arranged from north to south.
Hyde Fjord 93215 No Lat
Mallemukfjeld 80° 10° —
Lambert Land 79° 8 —
Ymers Nunatak 779247 —
Саре Marie-Valdemar с. 77° 20° —
Germania Land: Rypefjeld, Hvalrosodde, Dove Bugt, Lille Snenæs,
Snenes, Stormkap, Harefjeld, Danmarks Havn, Termometerfjeld,
Basisker, Cape Bismarck,
arranged from N. W. to S.E. 77° — 76° 43° N. Lat. and 21° — 17° 30° W. Long.
Maroussia Island 76° 39’ N. Lat. — 18° 43’ W. Long.
St. Koldewey Island ca. 76° 30° — 18° 50’ —
List of papers dealing with Fungi of northern East Greenland.
FERDINANDSEN et WINGE: Champignons, in Duc d'Orléans, Croisiere oceanographique
dans la mer du Grønland en 1905. Resultats scientifiques. Bruxelles. 1908.
FuckeL: Pilze, in Die 2te deutsche Nordpolarfahrt. Bremen 1872.
12°
150 J. LIND.
Rosrtrup: Fungi Groenlandiae. Meddelelser om Grønland Ш. Kjøbenhavn 1888.
— Tillæg til Grønlands Svampe. — — Ш. — 1891.
— Mstgronlands Svampe. “= — XVIII. — 1894.
— Fungi Groenlandiae orientalis. — — ХХХ. — 1904.
SACCARDO: Sylloge fungorum. vol. I—XVIII. Patavii 1882—1906.
Myxomycetes.
1. Licea brunnea Preuss. Sacc. Syllog. VII, p. 405.
Sporidiis cinnamomeis, globosis, 4—5 и diam.
—
Loc. On Owls disgorging, Lille Snenæs 2/9 07.
Phycomycetes.
2. Physoderma Hippuridis Rostrup. Sacc. Syllog. XI, p. 250.
Loc. On living stems of Hippuris vulgaris, Danmarks Havn "I; 08.
Note. Has hitherto only been noticed in Greenland and in the Isle of Funen.
(cf. Rostrup: Mykologiske Meddelelser VIII. Botanisk Tidsskrift Bd. 22, р. 254).
Ustilagineae.
3. Cintractia ‚Caricis (Pers.) Magn. Syn: Ustilago Caricis (Pers.)
Fuck. Sacc. Syll. VII, p. 464.
Loc. Оп Cobresia (Elyna) Bellardi, Termometerfjeld. 15/5 07.
Uredineae.
4. Melampsora arctica Rostrup. Sacc. Syll. УП, р. 594 & IX,
р. 926.
Loc. Both on the upper and lower sides of leaves of Salix artica.
Harefjeld "I; 07, Danmarks Havn 1; 08, Lille Snenæs !?] 08.
5. Puccinia Cardamines-bellidifoliae Dietel. Sacc. Syll. XVI,
р. 275. Sydow: Monographia Uredinearum. Vol. I, р. 510.
Sporidiis 33—36 4 x 172.
Loc. On living leaves of Cardamine bellidifolia, Lille Snenæs ?/s 07.
Gymnoasceae.
6. Gymnoascus Reessii Baranetzky. Sacc. Syll. VIII, p. 823.
Loc. On Lemming excrement, Termometerfjeld, Sept. 07.
Note. New for Greenland.
Systematic List of Fungi (Micromycetes) from North-East Greenland. 151
Pezizeae.
7. Mollisia advena Karst. басс. Syll. VIII, р. 352.
Loc. On Eriophorum polystachyum Г. elegans, Danmarks Havn "I; 08.
Note. New for Greenland.
8. Mollisia atrata (Pers.) Karst. Syn: Pyrenopeziza atrata (Pers.)
Fuck. Sacc. Syll. VIII, р. 354.
Loc. On stems of Potentilla emarginata, Renskæret 20|; 08.
9. Pyrenopeziza Karstenii Sacc. Syll. VIII, p. 367. Syn: Mol-
lisia graminis Karsten non Peziza graminis Desm.
Loc. On dead leaves of Aira caespitosa, Danmarks Havn 1; 08; and
of Poa(?), Lille Snenæs 22/5 08.
10. Geopyxis Ciborium (Vahl) басс. Syllog. VIII, р. 64.
Ascis clavatis 200 (p.sp. 1004) = 124; paraphysibus hyalinis,
ramosis, septatis ascos superantibus, apice sensim ad 5, incrassatis;
sporidiis hyalinis, continuis, eguttulatis, 15-17 x би.
Г have compared the specimens found with Flora danica tab.
1078 fig.1, they have not so long and slender a stalk as shown in
the picture, but they are similar as regards size and shape (see tab.
X fig. 5).
Loc. Termometerfjeld "/6 07 among mosses.
Sticteae.
11. Naevia diminuens (Karst.) Rehm. Syn: Phacidium dimi-
nuens Karst. Sacc. Syll. VIII, p. 721.
Loc. On dead leaves of Hierochloa alpina, Cape Marie-Valdemar. #/s 06.
12. Naevia pusilla (Lib.) Rehm. басс. Syll. VIII, р. 662. Syn:
Trochila juncicola Rostrup. Sacc. Syll. VIII, р. 732.
Loc. On dead leaves of Luzula arcuata var. confusa. Lamberts Land
4/6 07. (Koch.)
Phacidieae.
13. Rhytisma salicinum (Pers.) Fries. басс. Syll. VIII, p. 753.
Loc. Living leaves of Salix arctica, Danmarks Havn 25|; 08.
Hysterineae.
14. Lophodermium arundinaceum (Schrad.) Chev. Sacc. Syll.
U, р. 975.
Loc. On leaves of Festuca ovina, Termometerfjeld >; 07; Festuca ovina
var. brevifolia Danmarks Havn "Ir 08.
15. Lophodermium arundinaceum (Schrad.) Chev. var. alpi-
num Rehm. Sacc. Syll. II, p. 795.
152 J. LIND.
Ascis 80 и x 12 и; paraphysibus filiformibus; sporidiis 40—48 и
x Чи.
This var. differs distinctly and noticably from the principal
species by its shorter and more open perithecia and by its spores,
which are up to 4y broad.
Loc. On leaves of Poa glauca, Danmarks Havn, |: 08.
Erysiphaceae.
16. Erysiphe graminis deC. Sacc. Syllog. I, p. 19.
No perithecies, only conidies (Oidium monilioides Link. Sacc.
Syllog. IV, p. 46) are to be found.
Loc. On living leaves of Poa cenisia. Snenæs 1: 08.
17. Sphaerotheca Humuli (deC.) Burr. var. fuliginea (Schlecht.)
Salmon (A monograph of the Erysiphaceae. New York 1900).
This fungus is the same as described by JuEL under the name
of Sphaerotheca Drabae (Nagra mycologiska notiser. Botaniska No-
tiser 1890. Sacc. Syllog. IX, p. 365).
Возтвор (Ascomyceter fra Dovre. Kria. Vid. Selsk. Forh. 1891
№. 9, p.6) and SaLmon (A monograph of the Erysiphaceae р. 51 &
p.57) however agree in classifying it under Sphaerotheca Нитий in
spite of its different appearance.
Loc. Оп Braya purpurascens (hosp. nov.). Lille Snenæs 74/6 08 and Tre-
kroner ?‘/6 08.
Melanommaceae.
18. Melanomma Dryadis Johans. Sacc. Syllog. IX, p. 804.
Sporidiis fuscidulis, 3-septatis, 21—22 x 8—10 м.
Loc. On dead leaves of Dryas octopetala, Hyde Fjord, “/; 07 (Koch).
Note. New for Greenland.
Sphaerellaceae.
19. Ascospora graminis spec. nov.
Mycelio repente, effuso, subpersistente, hypophyllo, fusco e hyphis
torulosis, ramosis, septatis composito; Peritheciis superficialibus, ap-
planato convexis, sparsis 80—100 м diam., medio perforatis; ascis
fasciculatis, globoso-ovatis, sessilibus, apice crasse tunicatis, apara-
physatis, octosporis, 24—40 и x 13—17 4; sporidiis ellipticis, inaequi
lateralibus, granulosis, hyalinis, conglobatis, 15—16 им >< 44. (Look
tab. X fig.1 & 2).
Loc. On dead leaves of Poa glauca and Poa abbreviata, Lille Snenæs,
Sept. 08.
20. Carlia rhytismoides (Babingt.) Kuntze. Syn: Laestadia rhy-
tismoides (Berk.) Sacc. Syllog. I, p. 424.
Loc. On leaves of Dryas octopetala, Hydefjord "Is 07 (Koch) and Dan-
marks Havn fl; 08.
Systematic List of Fungi (Micromycetes) from North-East Greenland. 153
21. Mycosphaerella pachyasca (Rostrup) Ver. Syn: Sphaerella
pachyasca Rostr. Sacc. ЗУП. IX, р. 613.
Loc. On dead leaves and stems of Campanula uniflora, Danmarks Havn
° 08; Cardamine bellidifolia, Bugten */; and Danmarks Havn 1; 08: Cera-
slium alpinum, Hvalrosodde */s 06. Draba arctica, Hvalrosodde "|; 07; Epi-
lobium latifolium, Rypefjeld ”/6 08 (Freuchen) and Lille Snenæs "J; 08 ;
Oxyria digyna, Danmarks Havn ° 08; Papaver radicatum, Rypefjeld ©; 08,
Danmarks Havn "I: 08, Elven ° 07; Ranunculus pygmaeus, Danmarks Havn
8/7 08.
22. Mycosphaerella Tassiana (de Not.) Johans. Syn: Sphae-
rella Tassiana de Not. Sacc. Syllog. I, p. 530.
Loc. On dead leaves of Aira caespilosa and var. arclica, Danmarks Havn
7/7 07; Arctagrostis latifolia, Danmarks Havn “I; 08; Carex incurva, Rypefjeld
‘|: 08 (Freuchen); Carex misandra, Hvalrosodde August 06; Carex pulla,
Termometerfjeld */; 07; Carex rigida, Rypefjeld Juny 08; Eriophorum Scheuch-
zeri, Danmarks Havn "| 08 and Vester Elv "I; 07; Festuca ovina, Termo-
meterfjeld ”/7 07 and St. Koldewey "Is 06; Festuca ovina var. brevifolia, Dan-
marks Havn '/s 07; Glyceria angustata, Hyde Fjord "I; 07 (Koch) and Malle-
mukfjeld 115 07 (Koch), Danmarks Havn ”I 08 & 1% 07 and Maroussia 21/7
08; Glyceria maritima f. vilfoidea, Danmarks Havn *l 07; Luzula nivalis,
Stormkap "Is 06; Phippsia algida (hosp. nov.) Danmarks Havn */; 08: Poa
abbreviata, Hvalrosodde */s 06; Poa cenisia, Cape Marie-Valdemar 151: 06 and
Danmarks Havn "|; 08; Poa pratensis Hvalrosodde Aug. 1906.
23. Mycosphaerella Wichuriana (Schroet.) Johans. Syn: Sphae-
rella Wichuriana Schroet. Sacc. Syllog. I, р. 530.
Loc. On withering leaves of Festuca ovina, Termometerfjeld 3; 07:
Glyceria angustata, Danmarks Havn "Is 07; Poa cenisia, Cape Marie-Valdemar
15| 06; Carex nardina, Cape Marie-Valdemar #/s 06.
Pleosporeae.
24. Didymosphaeria Dryadis (Fuck.) Berl. & Vogl. асс. Syllog.
IX, p.733, non Didymosphaeria Dryadis (Speg.) Wt.
Ascis 1604 x 32 и; sporidiis 35-36 >< 16—17 y.
Loc. Dryas octopetala, Danmarks Havn °Iz 08.
25. Venturia chlorospora (Ces.) Karst. Sacc. Syllog. I, р. 586.
—
Loc. Salix arctica, Danmarks Havn 1/s 07.
26. Leptosphaeria Andromedae (Awd.) Sacc. Syllog. II, р. 49.
Syn: Leplosphaeria hyperborea (Fuck.) Berl. & Vogl.
Loc. On dead leaves of Cassiope letragona, Hvalrosodde */s 06.
27. Leptosphaeria caricinella Karst. Sacc. Syllog. II, р. 65.
Peritheciis 2604 diam.; ascis 110—152 и x 24—28 и; sporidiis
44—52 u x 12—13 м, 3-septatis, ad septa constrictis, strato mucoso
obvolutis; paraphysibus numerosis, hyalinis.
154 J. Linn.
Does not seem to have been found again since the Swedish
Polar Expedition first obtained it in Spitzbergen August 10' 1868
(KARSTEN: Fungi in insulis Spitsbergen et Beeren Eiland collecti.
Öfv. of Kgl. Vetensk. Akadem. Förh. 1872 No. 2, р. 91—108) on the
same host-plant. SACCARDO (1. с.) wants to classify it under Lepto-
sphaeria vagans Karsten, yet I cannot but consider it a good species.
My measurements are in complete accordance with those stated by
KARSTEN (Perith 150—200 4 diam.; asci 125—140 и x 28—34 u; spor.
38—52 м >< 10—15y), on the other hand BERLESE (Icon. fungorum
tab. LVI fig. 1) found them much smaller (asc. 70—90 м x 16—20 y;
spor. 35—38 м >< 6—7 u).
Loc. On dead leaves of Carex puila, Termometerfjeld °*I 07. (Look
tab. X fig. 3).
28. Leptosphaeria epicarecta (Cook) Sacc. Syllog. II, p. 65.
Loc. On Carex misandra, Danmarks Havn "I; 08.
29. Leptosphaeria gigaspora №31. Sacc. Syllog. II, р. 65.
Peritheciis c.400 и diam.; ascis 140 >< 24—28y; paraphysibus
hyalinis; sporidiis ellipsoideis, curvulis, flavis, 5-septatis, ad septa
non constrictis, 56—63 м x 16 yp.
Loc. On dead leaves of Carex nardina, Termometerfjeld ?? 07.
Note. New for Greenland.
30. Leptosphaeria Hierochloae Ouds. Sacc. Syllog. IX, р. 793.
Ascis 100—115y x 14—16; sporidiis 28—31u x 8—10 и, 3—
5-septatis.
Гос. On dead leaves of Hierochloa alpina, Danmarks Havn "I 08.
Note. New for Greenland.
31. Leptosphaeria microscopica Karst. Sacc. Syllog. II, p. 59.
Peritheciis с. 1204 diam.; ascis 72—88 и x 14—17 4; sporidiis
28—32 и x 6—8и, flavis, curvulis, 3-septatis.
Loc. Alopecurus alpinus, Danmarks Havn "I; 08; Poa abbreviata, Ter-
mometerfjeld **/; 07; Glyceria maritima, Danmarks Havn ls 07.
32. Leptosphaeria vagans Karsten. Sacc. Syllog. I, р. 59.
Peritheciis depressis, subastomis, с. 240 и diam.; ascis subcylin-
dricis, apice rotundatis, deorsum breve truncato-stipitatis 92—115 м
>< 25—32 и; paraphysibus filiformibus, hyalinis, guttulatis; sporidiis
oblongato-ellipticis, 3-septatis, loculo secundo et tertio leviter tumidis,
ad septa constrictis, curvulis, flavis, circulo gelatinoso, hyalino cir-
cumdatis, 34—36 u x 10—13 u.
Loc. On Glyceria angustata, Danmarks Havn !Is 07; Phippsia (Catabrosa)
algida (hosp. nov.)
Note. New for Greenland.
Systematic List of Fungi (Micromycetes) from North-East Greenland. 155.
33. Pleospora Arctagrostidis Ouds. Sacc. Syllog. IX, p. 879.
Ascis 1204 x 324; sporidiis 36—38 м x 12—13, 5—7-septatis.
Loc. On leaves of Arctagrostis latifolia, Danmarks Havn "7 08.
Note. New for Greenland.
34. Pleospora arctica Fuck. Sacc. Syllog. IX, p. 882. Non
Pleospora arctica Karsten = Pleospora КагЯепи Berl. & Vogl.
Peritheciis 350 м >< 240 и; ascis oblongis, curvatis, 100—128 u
x 23—28 и; paraphysibus numerosis, hyalinis, multiguttulatis; spo-
ridiis initio flavis, dein saturate brunneis, 34—36y x 14—16 u, 6-
septatis, medio constrictis, parte superna parum tumidiore, longitu-
dinaliter 1—2-septatis.
This is very probably the same fungus, as classified by Возтвор
(Fungi groenlandiae 1888) under Pleospora herbarum (Pers.) Rabenh.
with the remark, that there is no difference between Pl. arctica and
Pl. herbarum. In my opinion there are, however, several differences
between these two fungi: the sporidia of Pl. arctica are smaller and
with age they grow darker than those of Pl. herbarum.
Loc. On Epilobium latifolium, Termometerfjeld July 1907 and Lille
Snenæs !!lz 08.
35. Pleospora Cerastii OupEmAans (Contributions à la Flore
mycologique de Nowaja Semlja, Verslag. en Meded. 4. Kon. Akad.
у. Wetensch. Afd. Natuurk. 3. Del, II, Amsterdam 1885 р. 146). Ascis
100 > 204, crasse tunicatis; sporidiis flavis, 28—32 и x 12—14 u,
4—6-septatis, septisque 1—3 longitudinaliter divisis.
SACCARDO (Syllog. II, р. 285) considers it to be a variety of
Pyrenophora chrysospora, with which opinion I cannot agree as f.
inst. Pyr. chrysosp. is quite constant in having 7 dissepiments in
every spore, this fungus always having less.
Loc. On dead stems of Stellaria longipes, Cape Marie-Valdemar 16/3 06.
Note. New for Greenland.
36. Pleospora deflectens Karst. Sacc. Syllog. II, p. 266.
Sporidiis 26—29 и x 124, 7-septatis.
Loc. On Alopecurus alpinus, Stormkap le 06; Poa abbreviata, St. Kolde-
wey !3ls 06.
37. Pleospora discors (Mont.) Ces. & de Not. Sacc. Syllog. II,
p. 270.
Peritheciis sparsis, epiphyllis, globosis, vertice erumpentibus,
ostiolo papillaeformi; ascis 8-sporis, 1404 x 28—32 u, crasse tuni-
catis; sporidiis oblongatis, utrinque obtuse rotundatis, inaequilatera-
libus, transverse 5—6-septatis, in longitudine 1 divisis, initio flavis
dein atris opacis, 35—42 и >< 12—15y, interdum strato gelatinoso,
10—12 и crasso cinctis.
156 J. Linn:
Loc. Alopecurus alpinus, Lamberts Land #4 07 (Koch); Poa cenisia,
St. Koldewey 131; 06.
38. Pleospora Drabae Schroeter. Sacc. Syllog. II, р. 253.
Ascis 82—132u x 20—28; sporidiis flavo-olivaceis, dein fuli-
gineis, 25—88 u x 12—17 u, 5—7-septatis, ad septum medium con-
strictis, longitudinaliter 1-septatis.
Loc. On dead leaves and stems of Braya purpurascens, Lille Snenæs
#16 08; Draba alpina, Rypefjeid ?I: 08, Vestre Havnenees 7/; 07, Danmarks Havn
19/8 07; Draba hirta var. arctica, Harefjeld *I: 07, Termometerfjeld 77/s 07, Lille
Snenæs 2165 08; Draba fladnizensis, Trekroner “ics 08, Lille Snenæs 77/6 08;
Draba alpina var. glacialis, Danmarks Havn °Iz 08.
39. Pleospora papaveracea (de Not.) Sacc. Syllog. II, р. 248.
Ascis 110—124 м x 24 и; paraphysibus hyalinis filiformibus;
sporidiis 33—36 u x 12—17y, transversim 4-septatis, septisque 3
longitudinaliter divisis.
Loc. Оп Papaver radicatum, Lamberts Land "Is 09. (Koch).
40. Pleospora Karstenii Berl. & Vogl. Syn: Pleospora arctica
Karsten. басс. Syllog. II, p.271 non Pleospora arctica Fuck.
Peritheciis с. 240 и diam.; ascis 108% x 304; sporidiis 36и ><
16 и, 7-septatis.
Loc. On Poa abbreviata, Termometerfjeld **!; 07.
41. Clathrospora Elynae Rbh. Syn: Pleospora Elynae (Rbh.)
Ces. & de Not. Sacc. Syllog. II, p. 273.
Loc. On Luzula confusa, Cape Marie-Valdemar "Is 06.
42. Clathrospora pentamera (Karst.) Berlese. Syn: Pleospora
pentamera Karst. Sacc. Syllog. II, p. 266.
This fine species, which is easily recognized, and which seems
to be common in this neighbourhood, was first described by P. A.
KARSTEN (Fungi in insulis Spitsbergen et Beeren Eiland. Ofv. of Kgl.
sv. Vet. Ak. Forh. 1872 No. 2) as a Pleospora; the spores have, however,
as described and figured by BERLESE (Icones Fungorum vol. II,
p. 31 & tab. XLVI), all their cells in the same plane, and accordingly
it is a Clathrospora. When seen from the front, the sporidia are
oblong pear-shaped with four cross-walls and one longitudinal wall
in the three middle compartments without any narrowing, when
seen from the side the crosswalls only are visible, not the longitu-
dinal wall, and then they have distinct narrowings. Their colour is
most frequently yellow like honey, but may grow almost black with
age. I most frequently found the sporidia somewhat larger than
stated by KARSTEN, viz. 29—36 long, 15—17 и broad and 9—12 м
thick.
Systematic List of Fungi (Micromycetes) from North-East Greenland. 157
Loc. Alopecurus alpinus, Dove Bugt ?/s 07; Carex nardina, Termometer-
fjeld ”/7 07 and Hvalrosodde */s 06; Glyceria angustata, Hyde Fjord "ls 07
(Koch); Hierochloa alpina, Stormkap "Is 06; Poa abbreviata, Termometerfjeld
23|, 07, Ymers Nunatak 17; 08 (Freuchen); Poa cenisia, Danmarks Havn "I;
08; Poa glauca, Lille Snenæs July 08 and Danmarks Havn "|; 08.
43. Pyrenophora chrysospora (Nssl.) басс. Syllog. II, р. 285
& IX, p. 896.
Loc. Campanula uniflora, Snenæs 71; Cardamine bellidifolia, Danmarks
Havn "I; 08; Erigeron compositus, Danmarks Havn "I: 07 and 3 07; Lesque-
rella arctica, Lille Snenæs */6 08 and Snenæs Feltplads */s 08; Potentilla
pulchella, Hyde Fjord "|5 07 (Koch); Ranunculus sulphureus (hosp. nov.
Lille Snenæs 235 08.
44. Pyrenophora comata (Nssl.) Sacc. Syll. II, р. 286.
Loc. On dead leaves and stems of Armeria sibirica, Hvalrosodde °/; 08
and Danmarks Havn °/; 08; Oxyria digyna, Danmarks Havn */; 08; Papaver
radicatum, Cape Marie-Valdemar 3 06 and Stormkap ®/з 06; Pedicularis
hirsuta and Potentilla nivea, Danmarks Havn July 1908; Potentilla pulchella,
Maroussia ”/7 08 and Lille Snenæs *°/s 08; Stellaria longipes, Lamberts Land
14 07 (Koch) and Danmarks Havn July 1908.
45. Pyrenophora filicina nov. spec.
Peritheciis sparsis, erumpenti-superficialibus, globosis, majusculis,
300 diam., atris, coriaceis, superne setigeris, ostiolo breve conico;
ascis oblongo-clavatis, stipite brevi, apice rotundatis et crasse tuni-
catis, 8-sporis, 88—110 и >< 254; ascis paraphysibusque mox fluxili-
bus; sporidiis subdistichis oblongo-ovatis, rectis, transverse 5—6-sep-
tatis, medio constrictis, in longitudine 1—2-septatis, primo flavis
demum fuseis et totis opacis, 28—34 и x 15—17 и. (See tab. X fig. 4).
Loc. On dead petioles of Cystopteris fragilis, Danmarks Havn 3: 08.
46. Pyrenophora paucitricha (Fuck.) Berl. & Vogl. Sacc. Syllog.
IX, p. 898.
The sporidia, measured and described by Fucker (Die 2' deutsche
Nordpolfahrt. I. Botanik, p. 23. Bremen 1872. (Tab. I fig. 3) have
apparently not been quite ripe; besides olive-coloured sporidia of
26—30 и in length and 10—12y in breadth and in every way сог-
responding to Fucker’s description, I have found other sporidia of
significantly larger size, viz. 48—45 и x 224 and of a black-brown
colour. The capillaries of the perithecia are black-brown and septated.
Loc. On dead leaves of Salix arctica, Stormkap "Is 06 and Lille Sne-
næs */6 08.
Gnomonieae.
47. Gnomonia salicella (Fries) Schroet. Syn: Diaporthe salicella
(Fries) Sacc. Syllog. I, p. 622.
Loc. On dead twigs of Salix arctica, Danmarks Havn '/; 08.
158 J. LIND:
Sphaerioideae.
48. Mycogala parietinum (Schrad.) Sacc. Syll. HI, p. 185.
Loc. On wood in the berth of Jarner, Danmarks Havn October 1907.
Note. New for Greenland.
49. Ascochyta Dianthi (А. & S.) Libert. Sacc. Syllog. Ш,
р. 398 & kp. 301.
Sporidiis utrinque obtusis, curvulis, 1-septatis, hyalinis, guttulatis,
15—21 > Au.
Loc. On Cerastium alpinum, Harefjeld */; 07.
50. Rhabdospora Drabae (Fuck.) Berl. & Vogl. Sacc. Syllog.
X, р. 391. Syn: Phoma Drabae Fuck., Septoria Drabae Rostrup, Sep-
toria semilunaris Johans. Sacc. Syllog. X, р. 363.
It was first described by Еоскег as Phoma Drabae (Fuckel:
Die 2. deutsche Nordpolfahrt in den Jahren 1869 und 1870. II.
Abth. Botanik, p. 94. Bremen 1872) and figured in the same paper
tab. I fig. 9. Both description and figures are again found in OupE-
MAN'S work (contributions à la flore mycologique de Nowaja Semlja
р. 150, Amsterdam 1885). Rosrrup classifies it as belonging to Sep-
toria (Fungi groenlandiae, 1888 р. 572) and BERLESE & VOGLINO calls
it Rhabdospora Drabae.
JOHANSON’S Septoria semilunaris (Svampar fran Island. Ofv. of
Kgl. Vet. Akad. Férh. 1884 No.9 p.173) ought to be classified in the
same genus (formgenus) as it appears on dead stalks and leaves
only. It is, however, impossible to find a constant difference between
JOHANSON’S and FUCKEL’s two fungi. According to the description
the only difference should be, that the sporidia of Rhab. Drabae
measure 224 x 24 and the sporidia of Rhab. semilunaris 10—15 1
> 3—5y; but ALLESCHER (ALLESCHER und HENNINGs: Pilze aus dem
Umanakdistrict. Bibliotheca Botanica Heft 42, 1897 pag. 51), who
has found Rhab. semilunaris on the same substratum as JOHANSON,
viz. on dry stalks of the flowers of Dryas, gives the sizes of the
sporidia as being 14—20 » x 15—25y, and he has also found
traces of a dissepiment in them. And if we examine a sufficient
number of specimens, we find all possible transitions among them.
So I consider it right to unite the two species (form-species) into one.
Septoria Vanhoffenii P. Henn (Allescher und Hennings 1. с. р. 52),
Septoria nivalis Возтвор (Fungi groenlandiae 1888) and Septoria cera-
sticola Rostrup (Islands Svampe. Botanisk Tidsskrift 1903) also
seem to come very close to Rhabdospora Drabae.
In the size and shape of the sporidia (stylospores) they seem to
be very much like Rhabdospora groenlandica (conf. Tab. X fig. 8—
9—10) which will be mentioned later on, but Rhab. Drabae has
Systematic List of Fungi (Micromycetes) from North-East Greenland. 159
larger, collapsed perithecies and is only to be found on dicotyledo-
nous plants, f. inst.: Braya, Campanula, Cerastium, Draba, Dryas,
Erigeron, Geranium, Parnassia, Plantago, Potentilla, Rumex and Ve-
ronica.
Loc. Braya purpurascens, Lille Snenæs */1 08 and */5 08; Campanula
uniflora, Snenæs "I: 08; Cerastium alpinum, Hvalrosodde *“/s 06; Draba alpina,
Rypefjeld >; 08; Draba arctica, Lille Snenæs *l6 08; Draba hirta, Lille Sne- .
næs “4/6 08; Draba subcapitata, Lille Snenæs ”ls 08.
51. Rhabdospora groenlandica nom. nov. Syn: Septoria nebu-
losa Rostrup. Sacc. Syllog. X, p.385.
By Rosrrup it is called Septoria nebulosa (Rostrup: Fungi
groenlandiae 1888 р. 575); as it is, however, always found on dead
leaves and stalks and never forms spots on living leaves, it ought
to be called Rhabdospora according to the common method of no-
menclature. The name Rhabdospora nebulosa is, however, preoccupied
for another fungus, Rhabdospora nebulosa (Desm.) Sacc. Syllog. III,
p. 589, so that I am obliged to find a new name for the above men-
tioned fungus.
It is very common on dead leaves of the Monocotyledones. There
is no small difference in size between the separate sporidia, the
longest I measured were 28 и, the shortest 13 и; still the greater
number are 20—22 long and 2—3y broad; their shape is always
that of a small crescent, spindle-shaped with both ends evenly and
sharply pointed; its contents are most frequently slightly granulated
and there are sometimes slight traces of a dissepiment in the middle.
The perithecies are small, their diameter 80—120 и, they are nume-
rous and grouped in darkish oblong spots (see Pl. X fig. 9 & 10).
Loc. On Carex nardina, Termometerfjeld ?/; 07; Carex pulla, Basiskæret
13/8 07; Carex rupestris, Lille Snenæs 2216 08 and 7/7 08; Cobresia Bellardi, Lille
Snenæs */6 08 and Danmarks Havn "I; 08; Eutrema Edwardsii, Oster Ely ®ls
07; Juncus biglumis, Termometerfjeld "Is 07; Poa abbreviata, Stormkap “/; 08
and Danmarks Havn July 08; Poa cenisia, Danmarks Havn "I: 08; Poa glauca,
Lille Snenæs July 08 and Danmarks Havn >”; 08.
52. Kellermannia cercosperma (Rostrup) Syn: Septoria сегсо-
sperma Rostrup, Rhabdospora cercosperma (Rostrup) Sacc. Syllog. X,
р. 391, Septoria caudata, Karsten, Rhabdospora caudata (Karst.) Засс.
Syllog. Ш, р. 593.
ALLESCHER mentions Rhabdospora caudata and Rhabdospora cer-
cosperma as two different species, saying:
“SACCARDO sagt bei Rhabd. cercosperma: “Videtur vix differe a
Rhabd. caudata, sporulis 2—8 septatis”. Dem kann ich vor-
laufig nicht beistimmen, da die Perithecien der vielen unter-
suchten Exemplare nie “superficialia” sondern von der ge-
schwärzten Oberhaut bedeckt, die Sporen auch viel kürzer
160 JSLIND!
sind und stets des borstenformigen Anhanges entbehren; aller-
dings habe ich die 2—3 Scheidewånde, welche Возтвор angiebt,
auch nicht beobachten können”.
(ALLESCHER & HENNINGS: Pilze aus dem Umanakdistrikt, Biblio-
theca Botanica Heft 42, p. 52).
In reference to this I would say that KARSTEN has probably
only described his Septoria caudata in Hedwigia 1884 as a new species
because he did not know Rostrup’s description of Septoria cercosperma
in Sv. Vetensk. Akad. Förh. from the preceding year. SACCARDO,
Rostrup, JOHANSON and VESTERGREN also quite agree as to the
identity of these two species. I consider it much more likely, that
ALLESCHER, having noticed neither the septa in the sporidia nor the
cauda and having found them shorter than stated in the report and
with different perithecia, was dealing with quite another fungus,
which he wrongly called Rhabd. cercosperma, and I am most inclined
to believe this to be Rhabd. Drabae (Fuck) = Septoria semilunaris
Johans. of which he says:
“Mir scheint der Pilz mit Rhabd. cercosperma identisch zu sein”.
(1. ©: т. 52).
The spores (stylospores) of this species (form-species) are com-
pletly different from those of all other Rhabdospora and Septoria-
species. At the base they are rounded, outwardly pointed and finally
they end in a long capillary tail. When unripe they are furnished
with oil-drops, when older with up to three dissepiments. The
perithecia are of varying size yet larger than is common in the
Sphaerioideae and collapsed, with protruding ostiolum (see especially
VESTERGREN’S excellent description and figures in: Eine arktisch-
alpine Rhabdospora, Bih. till. Kgl. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bd. 26. Afd. Ш
No. 12, 1900).
It does not, however, differ essentially from the form-genus
Kellermannia Ell. & Ev. in Journ. of Mycology 1885 р. 153. Sacc.
Syllog. x р. 337, so that I must move it from Rhabdospora to Kel-
lermannia. In this connection Г may mention, that a fungus, which
I found in Jutland on dead stalks of Rumex acetosa and which
Е. Rostrup classified for me аз his Rhabdospora cercosperma (distri-
buted in Kaspar & BuBak Exsiccat: Fungi imperfecti exsiccati as No.
426), is identical with one found by Ove Rostrup, also on Rumex
acetosa, near Copenhagen and published by Е. Rosrrup in: Mykolo-
giske Meddelelser IX. Botanisk Tidsskrift vol. 26, р. 312 as Keller-
mannia Rumicis Fautr. & Lamb.
Still I do not venture to say — until I have had an opportunity
of seing more material of this fungus, the sporidia, and perithecia
of which according to VESTERGREN vary very much in size — if
Systematic List of Fungi (Micromycetes) from North-East Greenland. 161
the five species of Kellermannia (К. yuccogena Ell. & E., К. Polygoni
Ell. & Ev., К. Sisyrinchü Ell. & Ev., К. Rumicis Fautr. & Lamb. and
K. cercosperma (Rostr.) are identical, or if many different species can
be distinguished.
Loc. On dead stems of Polygonum viviparum, Danmarks Havn И; 08.
53. Stagonospora arenaria Sacc. Syllog. III, p. 453.
Peritheciis 160 » diam.; sporidiis 36—40 x x 44 3-septatis,
hyalinis.
Loc. On dead leaves of Poa abbreviata, Termometerfjeld I: 07.
Note. New for Greenland.
54. Coniothyrium Lesquerellae spec. nov.
Peritheciis sparsis, e globoso-lenticularibus, subcutaneis, vix
erumpentibus, tenuibus membranaceis, atris, majusculis с. 350 w
diam., ostiolo vix prominente pertusis; sporulis ut plurimum per-
fecte globosis, atro-fuscis, eguttulatis, 7—10 м diam.
Loc. On dead stems of Lesquerella (Vesicaria) arctica, Harefjeld /; 07.
55. Coniothyrium olivaceum Bon. Sacc. Syllog. III, p. 305.
Sporidiis olivaceis, oblongatis, 5м x 1:5 yp.
Loc. Campanula uniflora, Snenæs "|1 08.
56. Diplodia Simmonsii Rostrup (Report of the 2nd Norwegian
Arctic Expedition in the Fram 1898—1902, No.9, 1906).
Dead leaves may assume a black tinge from the attack of this
fungus (Look tab. X fig. 6).
Loc. Carex nardina, Hierochloa alpina and Luzula confusa, Cape Marie-
Valdemar "Is 06.
Note. New for Greenland.
57. Hendersonia arundinacea (Desm.) Засс. Syllog. Ш, р. 436.
Sporidiis flavo-olivaceis, guttulatis, 20—36 y x 3—5 u, 3-septatis.
Loc. Arctagrostis latifolia, and Poa abbreviata, Danmarks Havn #“/; 08;
on the leaves of an undetermined sp. of grass, Maroussia 7/7 08.
Note. New for Greenland.
58. Hendersonia Luzulae West. Sacc. Syllog. Ш, р. 451 & X,
р. 328.
Sporidiis olivaceis, 20—24 м x Зи, 3-septatis.
Loc. On Luzula arcuata Г. confusa, Danmarks Havn "|; 08.
59. Hendersonia gigantea nov. spec.
Peritheciis immersis, saepe seriatim digestis, tectis, subglobosis,
papillatis, brunneis, 225 diam., contextu parenchymatico; sporidiis
cylindrico-fusoideis, flexuosis, laete flavo-brunneis, utrinque rotundatis,
92—108(—188) м x 5—6y, 7-septatis, ad septa non constrictis, gut-
tulatis (Look tab. X fig. 7).
Loc. On dead leaves of Carex pulla, Termometerfjeld *% 07.
162 J. Linn. Systematic List of Fungi (Micromycetes) from North-East Greenland.
Hyphomycetes.
60. Trichothecium roseum (Регз.) Link. Sacc. Syll. ТУ, р. 178.
Loc. On material vomited by owls, Termometerfjeld **/s 07.
61. Mastigosporium album Riess. Sacc. Syll. IV, p. 220.
Loc. On living leaves of Alopecurus alpinus, Vester Elv "I: 07.
Note. New for Greenland.
62. Cladosporium graminum Cda. Sacc. Syllog. IV, p. 365.
Loc. Festuca ovina, Termometerfjeld **/; 07; Hierochloa alpina, Storm-
Кар "Is 06 and Hvalrosodde "Is 07; Glyceria angustata; Phippsia algida; Poa
abbreviata, Dove Bugt 7/5 07; Poa glauca, Danmarks Havn "I 08; Trisetum
spicatum, Termometerfjeld ”|s 07.
63. Cladosporium herbarum (Pers.) Link. Sacc. Syllog. IV,
p. 350.
Loc. On dead stems and fruits of Cardamine bellidifolia, Vester Ву
"|; 07; Draba fladnizensis, Termometerfjeld ”/6 07; Draba hirta, Danmarks
Havn “lo 07.
64. Torula Rhodedendri Kze. Sacc. Syllog. ТУ, р. 254.
Loc. On twigs of Rhododendron lapponicum, Hvalrosodde **!s 06.
Addendum.
65. Rhizophidium Olla Henn. Petersen Contrib. а la connaiss.
des Phycomycètes marins. Oversigt over 4. К. Danske Vidensk. Selsk.
Forh. 1905 p. 485.
Loc. Parasitic on Ectocarpus littoralis and Ulothrix scutata, East side
of Koldewey Island (determ. Henn. E. Petersen).
Note. New for Greenland.
EXPLANATION OF THE FIGURES.
Perithecia of Ascospora graminis spec. nov. on Poa glauca.
Ascus of = --
Ascus of Leptosphaeria caricinella Karst. оп Carex pulla.
|
Fem
— of Pyrenophora filicina spec. nov. on Cystopteris fragilis.
— of Geopyxis ciborium (Vahl) Sacc.
Sporidia of Diplodia Simmonsii Rostrup on Luzala confusa.
— of Hendersonia gigantea spec. nov. on Carex pulla.
— of Rhabdospora Drabae (Fuck.) Berl. & Vogl. оп Draba hirta var.
arctica.
— 9. — of Rhabdospora groenlandica nom. nov. on Eutrema Edwardsii.
— 10. — of — — on Poa abbreviata.
|
CRE
All the figures have been drawn by Мг. Ove Rosrrup. Fig. 1 is magnified 330 : 1,
all the other are magnified 400 : 1.
1— 6—1910.
PEUX
MEDD. ом GRØNL. XLIII. Nr. 6. [J. Linn]
О. Rostrup del.
e
С =
at u rn i
e i
№ -
a a
LE = a
— 9 . к
i 7 * д
« -
= hal * »
Ed En в
. _ ,
>,
“ —
å = - ® —
в x 2 u
s LE u. =)
=
УП.
HEPATICAE AND SPHAGNACEAE FROM
NORTH-EAST GREENLAND
(N. OF 76° М. LAT.)
COLLECTED BY THE “DANMARK-EXPEDITION” 1906—08
DETERMINED
BY
C. JENSEN
1910
XLII. 13
he mosses mentioned in this list have been collected by Mr.
ANDREAS LUNDAGER during the “Danmark Expedition” in the
years 1907—1908. The collection is small and most of the specimens
are only to be found sparsely mixed in tufts of other mosses. They
have nearly all been taken from the neighbourhood in which the
ship was ankered, on the north coast of Dove Bugt, about 76° 40' М. Lat.
Hepaticae.
1. Chomocarpon quadratus (Scop.) Lindb.
Coast of Dove Bugt, on damp ground near a stream, ster. in a
tuft of Bryum ventricosum.
2. Odontoschisma Macounii (Aust.) Underw.
“Stormkap” on the coast of Dove Bugt, ster. amongst Sphaeroce-
phalus turgidus, Dicranum congestum, Isopterygium nitidum, and Swartzia
montana.
3. Cephalozia bicuspidata (L.) Dum.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. amongst other mosses on damp ground
near a stream.
4. C.pleniceps (Aust.) Lindb.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. in tufts of Sphagnum fimbriatum and
Dicranum neglectum on damp ground near a stream.
5. Cephaloziella divaricata (Franc.) Schiffn.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. upon the ground or amongst and upon
other mosses, such as Dicranum neglectum, Conostomum boreale,
Pohlia nutans, Swartzia montana, Ditrichum flexicaule, Blindia acuta
and several bog-mosses. The coast at 79° 8’, ster. in tufts of Am-
phidium lapponicum.
6. C.striatula (С. Jens.)
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. on moist ground, amongst Sphaeroce-
phalus turgidus, S. palustris, and Calliergon sarmentosum.
13*
166 С. JENSEN.
7. Ptilidium сШаге (L.) Hamp.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. amongst other mosses on damp ground
near a stream.
8. Anthelia julacea (L.) Dum.)
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. amongst bog-mosses on wet ground
near a stream.
9. A.nivalis (Sw.) Lindb.
Coast of Dove Bugt, fr. on the ground near a stream.
10. Blepharostoma trichophyllum (L.) Dum.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. amongst other mosses on damp ground
near a stream.
11. Martinellia Bartlingii (Nees.)
The coast at 79° 8’, ster. and gemmipar. amongst Tortula ruralis,
Swartzia montana and a ster. Bryum.
12. M.hyperborea (Joerg.) Arn. et Jens.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. on wet ground near a stream.
13. Jungermania quinquedentata Huds.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. amongst Dicranum neglectum on moist
ground.
Var. turgida Lindb.
From the same place, ster. amongst bog-mosses.
14. J. alpestris Schleich.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. amongst Sphagnum fimbriatum on damp
ground near a stream.
15. J. ventricosa Dicks.
Coast of Dove Bust, ster. in tufts of Dicranum neglectum.
16. J. quadriloba Lindb.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. amongst Stereodon Bambergeri, Ditrichum
flexicaule, and Myurella julacea on damp ground.
17. J.minuta Cranz.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. in a tuft of Dicranum elongatum.
18. Marsupella groenlandica C. Jens.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. amongst other mosses such as Calliergon
sarmentosum, Sphaerocephalus turgidus, Oligotrichum glabratum Г.
gracilis, Ditrichum flexicaule, Swartzia montana, Cesia revoluta, and
Anthelia julacea.
19. Cesia revoluta (Nees.) Lindb.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. on damp ground near a stream,
together with Blindia acuta and the preceding species.
Hepaticae and Sphagnaceae from East Greenland. 167
20. Riccardia pinguis (L.) Gr.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. amongst bog-mosses near a stream.
Sphagnaceae.
21. Sphagnum teres Angstr.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. on moist ground near a stream.
22. S. fimbriatum Wils.
Coast of Dove Bugt, ster. from the same place as 5. (eres.
13—6—1910.
NH
ri »
u i i FA z
si >=
4
> [4
oe p 7
. 4 u
= w 7
j и 7 ~ 2
+
| |
.
u р =
“a
= > a
u U
pa _ i
Ce a
= - « —
= x 7 5
MM u =
EL u NH dl
i bad у
р ®
i> = a
- — ir 2 å О
vw
УШ.
MOSSES
FROM
NORTH-EAST GREENLAND
(N. OF 76° N. LAT.)
COLLECTED BY THE “DANMARK-EXPEDITION” 1906—1908
DETERMINED
BY
AUG. HESSELBO
1910
XLIII. 14
on
Ul
MS
ves
he Mosses brought home by the “Danmark Expedition” were
for the most part collected by the botanist of the Expedition,
Mr. ANDREAS LUNDAGER, in the neighbourhood of Danmarks Науп, on
the east coast of Greenland, about 76° 46’ N. lat. A smaller number
of collections has been made by Captain Косн оп his sledge-jour-
neys northwards.
The species found in the following localities were collected by
Captain Kocu; all the others have been collected by LUNDAGER.
Mallemukfjeld (June 11, 1907) 80° 10’ N. lat.
Lamberts Land (June 14, 1907) 79° 8 —
Dove Bugt (June 28, 1907) 77° 30! —
Bjorne Skerene (June 19, 1907) fake —
North side of Hyde Fjord (May 15, 1907) 83° 10! —
1. Polytrichum juniperinum Willd.
Vester Elv!, sterile; sparingly intermingled in a tuft of Dicra-
num elongatum.
2. Polytrichum strictum Banks.
Vester Elv, several collections, one fruiting, mixed with other
mosses (Gymnocybe, Sphagnum and Meesea triquetra).
3. Polytrichum pilosum Neck.
Vester Elv, a few plants in a tuft of Schistidium apocarpum,
sterile. Termometer Fjeld, in a tuft of Dicranoweissia compacta,
sterile.
4. Polytrichum hyperboreum.
Vester Elv, a few plants in a tuft of Sphagnum, Gymnocybe
palustris and Meesea triquetra.
5. Polytrichum fragile Bryhn.
Cape Bismarck, a small sterile tuft mixed with sterile Bryum.
1 The following is a translation of some of the suffixes used in the place-names
which occur in this paper: Ely = stream; Fjeld — rock; Odde — head (tongue
of land); Kær = pool; Skær = rock; Havn = harbour; Næs — ness (headland).
14*
172 AUG. HESSELBO.
6. Polytrichum alpinum L.
Common; usually sterile and mixed with other mosses. Storm-
kap, fruiting.
var. arcticum (Sw.) Brid.
Vester Elv, fruiting.
var. brevifolium (R. Br.) Brid.
Lille Snenæs, fruiting.
7. Polytrichum gracile Dicks.
var. anomalum (Milde) Hagen.
This peculiar form which, according to HAGEN (Musci Norvegiae
borealis, р. 265) and to verbal information from С. JENSEN, is com-
monly distributed in northern Scandinavia, was found by Vester
Elv intermingled in tufts of swamp-mosses such as Amblyslegium
revolvens, А. sarmentosum, Bryum neodamense, var. ovatum, ес.
The plants are as much as 8 cm. high, flaccid, with nearly
entire leaves (forma subintegrifolia), but otherwise exactly resembling
Norwegian specimens.
Polytrichum gracile has not previously been found in Greenland,
and its northern limit as hitherto known is at about 70° N. lat. in
Finmark.
8. Oligotrichum laevigatum Wahlb.
Vester Elv, sparingly intermingled in a tuft of Hepaticae, Ditri-
chum flexicaule, and other mosses (forma tenuis brevifolia).
9. Cinclidium arcticum (Br. eur.) C. M.
Vester Elv, sterile; a few plants in a tuft of Gymnocybe turgida,
Meesea triquetra and Sphagnum.
10. Cinclidium polare Bryhn.
North side of Hyde Fjord among other mosses; sterile (Косн).
11. Astrophyllum curvatulum Lindb.
Vester Elv, sparingly among Gymnocybe turgida, Meesea triquetra,
and other mosses. Maroussia Island, a few plants in a tuft of Bryum
pendulum; in both places forma integrifolia.
12. Astrophyllum orthorhynchum (Brid.) Lindb.
Vester Ely, a few sterile plants in a tuft of Stereodon Bambergeri
and Ditrichum flexicaule. Lamberts Land, sterile (Koch).
13. Timmia austriaca Hedw.
Lamberts Land, sterile (forma brevifolia).
var. рарШоза у. п.
The sheath-like part of the leaf papillose at the point of transi-
tion to the lamina. The leaf-margin coarsely denticulate at the
apex and indistinctly denticulate downwards.
Mosses from North-East Greenland. 173
Stormkap, mixed with Gymnocybe turgida, Pohlia cruda and
Stereodon revolutus.
14. Timmia bavarica Hessl.
Vester Elv, sterile, among Amblystegium revolvens, A. latifolium
and Meesea triquetra.
15. Timmia norvegica Zett.
var. crassiretis у. п.
The cells of the leaf incrassated especially upon the lower side
where the outer walls are also mamillosely convex. The cells of
the leaf-base papillose almost to the base.
North side of Hyde Fjord; sparingly among Hypna, Brya, Cin-
clidium polare, etc.
16. Gymnocybe palustris (L.) Friis.
Vester Elv, sterile. Hare Fjeld, sterile. Dove Bugt, sterile.
17. Gymnocybe turgidus (Wahlb.) Lindb.
One of the most common mosses; occurs as a component of
most of the tufts which were collected, rarely unmixed, always
sterile.
18. Meesea triquetra (L.) Aongst.
Found as a component of a large number of the tufts collected
from all the localities, generally mixed with Amblystegium sarmen-
tosum, А. revolvens, А. intermedium and A. latifolium. It occurs some-
times with entire, and sometimes with serrulate leaves.
19. Meesea longiseta Hedw.
Vester Elv, sterile, a few plants in a tuft of Meesea triquetra,
Timmia bavarica and Hypna.
20. Philonotis alpicola Jur.
Common as a component of mixed tufts, but always scanty and
sterile.
21. Philonotis fontana (L.) Brid.
var. adpressa (Fergusson).
Cape Bismarck, sterile. Vester Elv, sterile.
22. Bartramin ityphylla Brid.
Hare Fjeld, fruiting. Danmarks Havn, fruiting. Vester Elv, several
sterile specimens among other mosses.
23. Conostomum tetragonum (Will.) Sw.
Vester Elv, sterile, several collections, partly unmixed and
partly mixed with other mosses.
174 Аос. HESSELBO.
24. Bryum elegans Nees.
Basis Ker, intermingled in a tuft of Tetraplodon Wormskjoldü.
25. Bryum ventricosum Dicks.
Vester Elv $. Hvalros Odde 2. North side of Hyde Fjord, ste-
rile (forma tenuis brevifolia).
26. Bryum neodamense Itzigs.
var. ovatum Jur.
Vester Elv, sterile, many specimens, but usually sparingly
among other mosses.
27. Bryum teres Lindb.
Vester Elv, sterile. Havne Nees, sterile.
28. Bryum cirratum Hornsch.?
Stormkap, with ?, & and $ inflorescence, but without fruit.
29. Bryum obtusifolium Lindb.
Hare Fjeld, sterile. Termometer Fjeld, sterile. Sometimes
umixed, sometimes mixed with Amblystegium sarmentosum, Pohlia
commutata and other species.
30. Bryum cyclophyllum (Schwgr.). Br. eur. Termometer
Fjeld, sterile.
31. Bryum tomentosum Limpr.
Hare Fjeld, fruiting.
32. Bryum foveolatum Hagen.
Hvalros Odde; fruiting.
33. Bryum pendulum (Hornsch.) Schimp.
Vester Elv, fruiting. Maroussia Island, fruiting.
34. Bryum calophyllum R. Br.
At Danmarks Науп on damp sandy soil, sterile.
35. Bryum argenteum L.
Lille Snenes, sterile. Renskæret, sterile. Maroussia Island, ste-
rile. Danmarks Науп, sterile (forma compacta brevifolia).
36. Bryum Myliusii n. sp.
About three cm. high, loose tufts among other mosses. Stem
red, 0°30 mm. thick, slightly radiculose, with slender, papillose rhi-
zoids, and bearing one or two young shoots below the inflorescence.
Leaves firm, narrowly-decurrent, entire, hollow, bordered by 2—4
rows of narrow, brownish cells. Stem-leaves broadly-ovato, 1:2—
15 mm. long and about 1 mm. broad and bluntly, or shortly and
broadly pointed, revolute at the base; upper leaves broadly lanceolate,
Mosses from North-East Greenland. 175
2—2'2 mm. long and 1—1'2 mm. broad, shortly and broadly pointed,
revolute at the margins until towards the apex. Veins strong, brown,
0:10 mm. broad at the base and disappearing close under the apex.
Leaf-cells brownish, incrassate, porose, rectangular at the base,
0-020—0:028 mm. broad and 2—3 times as long, in the rest of the
leaf hexagonal and rhombic, 0:018—0:20 broad, and about twice
as long.
Synoicous. Perichaetial-leaves broadly-lanceolate, pointed, indi-
stinctly marginate. Antheridia and archegonia numerous.
Seta red, about 2 ст. high and 0:18 mm. thick. Capsule pendu-
lous, in dry condition leather-brown and slightly wrinkled, not con-
stricted below the mouth, about 1:5 mm. thick and 2°5—3 mm. long,
of which the neck constitutes one half. The cells of the capsule-
walls irregular, slightly incrassate; 2--4 rows of small, roundish or
polygonal cells around the mouth.
Peristome teeth, 0:36 mm. long, and 0:10 mm. broad at the base,
yellow, darker at the base, hyaline and indistinctly marginate at the
apex. Lamellæ 15 in number, occasionally connected by a trans-
verse trabecula. The median line slightly sinuous. Dorsal plates
narrowly rectangular at the base, 2—3 times as broad as high, ех-
tremely delicately striped with papillae, smooth towards the apex.
Inner peristome probably not attached, pale, finely papillose. Cilia
rudimentary. Spores 0:028—0:036 mm., brownish-yellow, finely pa-
pillose.
Vester Elv, associated with Amblystegium revolvens, A. latifolium,
A. sarmentosum and Meesea triqvetra.
37. Pohlia commutata (Schimp.) Lindb.
Vester Elv; Hare Fjeld; Stormkap. It usually occurs sparingly
intermingled with other mosses. Found sterile only.
var. filum (Schimp.) Husnot.
Termometer Fjeld; partly in large, unmixed tufts, and partly
mixed with Bryum obtusifolium.
38. Pohlia cruda (L.) Lindb.
Vester Elv, several specimens, one fruiting, in part var. minus
Sch. Havne Nes, sterile. Termometer Fjeld, sterile. Lamberts Land,
fruiting.
39. Pohlia nutans (Schreb.) Lindb.
Vester Elv, numerous specimens, of which several fruiting, often
mixed with other mosses. Hvalros Odde; sterile. Lille Snenæs,
sterile. Dove Bugt, sterile.
40. Leptobryum pyriforme (L.) Wills.
Lille Snenæs, fruiting. Maroussia Island, fruiting.
176 AUG. HESSELBO.
41. Tetraplodon Wormskjoldii (Hornem.) Lindb.
Hare Fjeld, fruiting, large cushions about 10cm. high upon
the skull of a musk-ox.
42. Tetraplodon pallidus Hagen.
Stormkap, mixed with Gymnocybe turgidus and other mosses,
fruiting.
43. Leersia rhabdocarpa (Schwagr.) Lindb.
Havne Næs, sterile, in a dry ravine. Vester Elv, fruiting, in
both places mixed with Tortula latifolia and Bryum argenteum.
Hvalros Odde, sterile.
44. Tortula ruralis (L.) Ehrt.
Vester Elv; Basis Ker; Termometer Fjeld; Lamberts Land;
sparingly in all the localities and sterile, among other mosses.
45. Tortula norvegica (Wlb. f.) Wahlenb.
Clayey field between Laxe Sø and Øster So, sterile.
46. Tortula mucronifolia Schwägr.
Havne Nees, in a dry ravine, fruiting.
47. Tortula systylia (Br. eur.) Lindb.
Havne Nes, in a dry ravine, fruiting.
48. Tortula latifolia (Hedw.) Lindb.
Vester Elv, fruiting. Havne Nes, in a dry ravine, fruiting.
49. Mollia fragilis (Drumm.) Lindb.
Bjørne Skeerene, sterile, in a compact tuft of Carex. (Koch).
50. Barbula rubella (Hoffm.) Mitten.
var. brevifolia Arnell et Lindb.
Vester Elv, sterile.
51. Barbula alpigenia (v. Venturi.)
Vester Elv, sterile, a few plants intermingled in a tuft of Di-
trichum flexicaule, Gymnocybe turgidus and other mosses.
52. Barbula curvirostris (Ehrh.) Lindb.
North side of Hyde Fjord, sterile, sparingly among Hypna,
Cinclidium polare and other mosses (forma brevifolia).
53. Dicranum congestum Brid.
Basis Ker, sterile, partly unmixed, partly mixed with other
mosses.
54. Dicranum neglectum Jur.
Vester Ely, sterile. Stormkap, sterile.
Mosses from North-East Greenland. 177
55. Dicranum elongatum Schleich.
Vester Elv, sterile.
56. Blindia acuta (Huds.) Br. eur.
Vester Elv, sterile, both unmixed and mixed with other mosses.
Basis Keer, sterile.
57. Dicranoweissia crispula (Hedw.) Lindb.
Termometer Fjeld, sterile.
58. Dicranoweissia compacta (Schleich.) Sch.
Termometer Fjeld, sterile.
59. Swartzia montana (Lam.) Lindb.
Vester Elv, sterile. Lille Snenæs, sterile. Stormkap, sterile.
Hvalros Odde, sterile. Termometer Fjeld, fruiting. Bjørne Skærene,
sterile. Everywhere forma brevifolia.
60. Ditrichum flexicaule (Schleich.) Hampe.
Common, but usually in small quantities in‘ the collections from
all the localities. Usually forma brevifolia.
61. Ceratodon purpureus (L.) Brid.
Cape Bismark, sterile. Vester Elv, sterile. Termometer Fjeld,
sterile. Mallemukfjeld, sterile.
62. Dorcadion Kiliassii (С. М.) Lindb.
On stones at Danmarks Havn, fruiting. Basis Keer, sterile.
63. Anoectongium lapponicum Hedw.
Lamberts Land.
64. Grimmia ericoides (Schrad.) Lindb.
Vester Elv, sterile (partly var. strictum Schliep.). Lamberts Land
(var. prolixum Br. eur.)
65. Grimmia hypnoides (L.) Lindb.
Termometer Fjeld, sterile, Lamberts Land, sterile.
66. Grimmia Donniana Smith.
Termometer Fjeld, sterile, associated with Dicranoweissia compacta.
67. Grimmia apocarpa (L.) Hedw.
One of the mosses of most common occurrence. Numerous
specimens have been collected from all the localities which have
been investigated: on stones, rocks and earth. Usually fruiting. It
varies considerably both in habit, colour, leaf-form and length of
hair-tip. The most peculiar forms are: —
var. filiformis Lind. Syn. Grimmia tenera Zett.; Termometer
Fjeld, fruiting. Vester Elv, sterile.
var. ovatum Bryhn.
Frequent. Usually fruiting.
178 AUG. HESSELBO.
68. Grimmia linearis (Chalubinsky).
Syn. Schistidium angustum Hagen.
Vester Ely, fruiting, mixed with Grimmia apocarpa var. ovatum.
69. Amblystegium radicale (P.B.) Mitten.
var. pulcherrimum n. v.
Tufts compact, 1—2cm. high, rusty brown below, green at the
top. Stem short and irregularly branching, 0°10 mm. thick, with a
few rhizoids. Leaves 0:5—0'8 mm. long, 0:14—0:18 mm. broad, finely
serrate along the whole margin; sterile.
Mallemukfjeld (Koch).
Amblystegium radicale has not previously been found in Greenland.
70. Amblystegium protensum (Brid.) Lindb.
Maroussia Island. Sparingly in a tuft of Bryum pendulum, sterile.
71. Amblystegium stellatum (Schreb.) Lindb.
Hare Fjeld, sterile, among other mosses.
72. Amblystegium latifolium Lindb.
Very common and collected partly as unmixed cushions and
partly among other mosses from all the localities which were in-
vestigated.
73. Amblystegium brevifolium Lindb.
Vester Elv, sterile. North side of Hyde Fjord, sterile. In both
places sparingly among other mosses.
74. Amblystegium intermedium Lindb.
Vester Elv, sterile. Stormkap, sterile. North side of Hyde Fjord,
sterile.
75. Amblystegium revolvens.
Vester Ely, sterile. Stormkap, sterile.
76. Amblystegium aduncun (L.) Lindb.
Vester Elv, sterile. Termometer Fjeld, sterile. In both places
sparingly among other mosses.
var. gracillimum Bergg.
Termometer Fjeld, sterile.
77. Amblystegium exannulatum (Gumb.) de Not.
Vester Elv, sterile.
78. Amblystegium fluitans (L.) de Not.
Edge of Laxe Sø, sterile.
79. Amblystegium purpurascens (Schimp.)
Vester Elv, sterile.
Mosses from North-East Greenland. 179
80. Amblystegium polare (Lindb.) Lindb.
Vester. Elv, 2, partly in unmixed cushions, partly mixed with
other Hypnaceae.
var. pseudostramineum Lindb.
Typical specimens of this peculiar form were collected at Ter-
mometer Fjeld in rather compact tufts about 6cm. high, with erect,
almost branchless, round stems, and shortly-pointed very concave
leaves which only towards the apex of the stem are indistinctly
secundly bent. At the same place, at the edge of the inland ice, a
form was found which, both in regard to habit and leaf-form, stands
between the type and the variety. The variety was previously known
only from Spitzbergen.
81. Amblystegium turgescens (Th. Jurs.) Lindb.
Vester Elv, sterile. Lille Snenæs, sterile. In both places spa-
ringly among other mosses.
82. Amblystegium sarmentosum (Wahlenb.)
Is the most commonly occurring species. Was collected abun-
dantly in unmixed tufts, and also occurred as a component of most
of the moss-collections which were made.
83. Amblystegium Richardsonii (Mitten) Lindb.
North side of Hyde Fjord, sterile, a few plants among other
swamp-mosses.
84. Hypnum plumosum Huds.
Dove Bugt, sterile. Maroussia Island, sterile. Bjorne Skerene, sterile.
85. Myurella tenerrima (Brid.) Lindb.
Vester Elv, in a tuft of Polytrichum pilosom. Stormkap, ste-
rile. Lamberts Land, sterile, among Swartzia, Ditrichum flexicaule
and Gymnocybe.
86. Myurella julacea (Vill.) Br. eur.
Stormkap, sterile. Lille Snenæs, sterile. Vester Elv, sterile.
Bjørne Skærene, sterile. Everywhere mixed with other mosses in tufts.
87. Hylocomium proliferum (L.) Lindb.
var. Alaskanum (Lesq. et James).
Vester Elv, a single plant in a tuft of Sphaerocephalus palustris
and Sphagnum.
88. Stereodon revolutus Mitten.
Vester Elv, sterile. Stormkap, sterile. Lille Snenæs, sterile.
Basis Keer, sterile. North side of Hyde Fjord, sterile. Everywhere
mixed with other mosses.
89. Stereodon Bambergeri (Sch.) Lindb.)
Vester Ely, sterile. North side of Hyde Fjord, sterile. In both
places among other mosses.
180 AuG. HESSELBO. Mosses from North-East Greenland.
90. Stereodon chryseus (Schwgr.) Mitten.
Vester Elv, sterile, several collections, in part among other
mosses. Hvalros Odde, sterile. North side of Hyde Fjord, sterile,
sparingly among other mosses.
91. Isopterygium nitidum (Wahlb.) Lindb.
Vester Elv, sterile. Maroussia Island, sterile. Stormkap, fruiting.
Bjørne Skærene, sterile. Everywhere sparingly among other mosses.
PLATE ХЕ
Fig. 1. Polytrichum gracile var. anomalum. Habit !/:.
— 2—3. — — — Leaves 17/1.
= & = = From the middle portion of a leaf 15|.
. Bryum Myliusii. 2 capsules 4/1.
. = = Habit 7/s.
—8. — — Leaves 51.
— 5
— 6
7
PLATE XIE
Fig. 9. Amblystegium polare var. pseudostramineum. Habit !|ı.
— 10. — — — Leaf 4/1.
— 11. — — — Leaf-base 19°].
— 12. Amblystegium radicale var. pulcherrimum. Habit 5/1.
— 13. — — — Пеав 28.
14—7—1910.
MEDD. ом GRONL. XLIII. Nr. 8. [HESSELBo
к)
Qi
AN) HAUT
A КАН) +
Ах
WA
Mon
Pr
XI
We + 5
= i .
i cer у
iy Gao
MEDD. ом GRONL. XLIII. Nr. 8. [HESSELBO] PL. XII
IX.
LICHENS
FROM
NORTH-EAST GREENLAND
(N. OF 76° N. LAT.)
COLLECTED BY THE “DANMARK-EXPEDITION” 1906—1908
DETERMINED
BY
OLAF GALLE
1910
XLII. 15
he work of the “Danmark-Expedition” has brought to а pre-
liminary close the purely floristic side of lichen collecting in
Greenland, as practically the whole coast of the land has now been
investigated. Later collections will assuredly be able to find one
thing or another new, but we already have a view over the floristic
character of the lichen vegetation, thanks to the persevering scientists
who in the course of time have added to the collections in the Bo-
tanical Museum of Copenhagen.
What has been known hitherto of the Greenland lichens is to
be found mainly in the papers by DEICHMANN BRANTH and GRON-
LUND in the “Meddelelser om Grønland”, Hefte Ш (1888) and the
Appendix (ibidem 1892), as also in later papers by BRANTH and by
Wainio (ibidem Hefte XVIII and XXX).
Our floristic knowledge now extends so far, that it will undoubt-
edly be of greatest interest to begin а biological and ecological
investigation of these plants, not only for the arctic species but also
for the species of the whole world. Far too little attention has
hitherto been paid to the part played by the lichens in the existing
plant-associations and to the mutual relations between the lichens
and the widely different natural conditions offered them at their
varied and different places of growth.
The species mentioned here have almost all been found in
Greenland before. A single species is however remarkable, as it
has hitherto not been found in that country, or at least is not pre-
sent in the collections of our Museum, namely Dufourea muricata,
which was found for the first time in arctic regions by TH. Fries
in Spitzbergen.
A discussion of the correctness of the more difficult species has
been omitted, as it would lead as too far here — even though the
subject might in itself be tempting for several Parmelia species and
a few others.
Under each species reference is made to a main work, where
further information on the literature can be obtained.
15%
184 OLAF GALLOE.
The following is the principal literature:
1. J.S. DEICHMANN BRANTH og CHR. GRONLUND: Grønlands Lichen-Flora. Meddelelser
om Grønland. Hefte Ш. Kjøbenhavn 1888.
2. J.S. DEICHMANN BRANTH: Tillæg til Grønlands Lichen-Flora (ibid. 1892).
3. J.S. DEICHMANN BRANTH: Lichener fra Scoresby Sund og Hold with Hope. (ibid.
XVIII. 1896).
4. Duc 4’ OrL£Ans: Croisière océanographique .... dans la mer du Groenland.
Botanique. Bruxelles 1908. (Here in: Lichens, déterminés par J. 5. Deich-
mann Branth).
5. Fries, Тн.: Lichenes Arctoi etc. Upsaliz 1860.
6. Fries, Тн.: Lichenes Scandinavici vol. I. Upsalie 1871—74.
7. Fries, Тн.: Lichenes Spitsbergenses (Kongl. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl. Bd. УП
Nr. 2. Stockholm 1867).
8. С.Н. OSTENFELD og ANDR. LUNDAGER: List of vascular plants from north-east
Greenland etc. (Meddelelser om Grønland XLIII. Kjøbenhavn 1910).
9. Epw. Warnio: Lichenes expeditionis G. Amprup (Medd. om Grenl. XXX. 1905).
The material for the present list was collected by Mr. ANDREAS
LUNDAGER.
With regard to the position of the places where the various
species were taken I may refer to the above-cited work of OSTEN-
FELD and LUNDAGER.. They le mainly about Danmarks Havn,
76° 46’ n. L.
SYSTEMATIG LIST OF THE EICHENS:
Usnea Dill.
1. Usnea melaxantha Ach. Th. Fries, Lich. arct. р. 24. — Branth
og Gronl.: Gronl.s Lichen-Flora, р. 464.
Гос.: Cape Bismarck, Danmarks Науп.
Common among stones, where it grows abundantly; found also on
hilly ground, on stones.
Bryopogon Link.
2. Bryopogon jubatus L. 7. nitidulum Th. Fr. Th. Fries: Lich.
arct. р. 25. — Branth og Grønlund: Grønlands Lichen-Flora р. 464.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (among moss, on the ground); Danmarks Havn
(on the ground).
Alectoria Ach.
3. »Alectoria Thulensis Th. Fr. Th. Fr. Lich. arct. p. 28. —
Branth og Grønlund: Grønlands Lichen-Flora p. 465.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on the ground, among moss); at the Dan-
marks Havn (on ground about the moss); common.
Cornicularia Ach.
4. Cornicularia aculeata (Ehrh.). Th. Fries: Lich. arct. р. 30.
— Branth og Grønlund р. 465.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on sandy ground).
Cetraria Ach.
5. Cetraria islandica L. Th. Fries: Lich. arct. p. 35. — Branth
og Grønlund р. 466. — All the specimens found belong to var.
Delisei Bory.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on the ground, among moss).
6. Cetraria odontella Ach. Th. Fries: Lich. arct. p. 36. —
Branth og Grønlund р. 466.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on the ground), Danmarks Havn (on the
ground), the Bay (on the ground, among moss), Snenæs (on the ground),
Storm Kap (among moss).
186 OLAF GALLOE.
7. Cetraria nivalis Г. Th. Fries: Lich. arct. р. 37. — Branth
og Gronlund p. 466.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (very common on sandy ground), Danmarks
Havn (among moss on the ground), the Bay (on the ground), Snenæs (on
the ground).
8. Cetraria Fahlunensis (L.) Scher. Th. Fries: «Lich. scandi-
navici р. 108. — Branth og Grønlund р. 471.
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (among moss).
Nephroma Ach.
9. Nephroma papyraceum Hoffm. Lich. arct. p. 42. — Branth
og Grønlund р. 467.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on mosscovered ground).
Peltigera Hoffm.
10. Peltigera rufescens Fr. Lich. arct. p. 45. — Branth og
Gronlund p. 468.
Loc.: Hvalrosodde (on a withered tuft), Basiskær (on mossy ground),
Danmarks Havn (damp soil above moss).
Peltidea (Ach.) Nyl.
11. Peltidea aphtosa L. Lich. arct. р. 43. — Branth og Grøn-
lund p. 468.
The locality is not exactly indicated in the material collected. — On a
dead Empetrum tuft.
Solorina Ach.
12. Solorina crocea L. Lich. arct. р. 48. — Branth og Gron-
lund p. 469.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on the ground), Danmarks Havn (on clay ground).
Parmelia Ach.
13. Parmelia saxatilis L. Lich. arct. p. 52. — Branth og Gron-
lund p. 469.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on stones); only the variety omphalodes L.
was found.
14. Parmelia encausta Sm. Lich. arct. р. 54. — Branth og
Grønlund р. 470.
Loc.: Occurs very frequently with the variety intestiniformis Vill., for
example at Termometerfjeld, at Danmarks Havn and at Basiskær, everywhere
on stones.
15. Parmelia stygia L. Lich. arct. p.57. — Branth og Gron-
lund p. 470.
Loc.: Varde Ridge (on stones).
16. Parmelia alpicola Th. Fr. Lich. arct. 57. — Branth og
Gronlund p. 470.
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (on stones).
Lichens from „The Danmark-Expedition”. 187
17. Parmelia lanata L. Lich. arct. р. 58. — Branth og Gron-
lund p. 470.
Loc.: North Koldewey Island (on stones), Termometerfjeld (on stones),
Danmarks Havn (on stones), Basiskær (common on stones).
Physeia Fr. _
18. Physcia pulverulenta Schreb. Lich. arct. p. 63. — Branth
og Grønlund р. 472.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld, Basisker, Danmarks Havn, the Bay, Snenæs,
at all places above moss on the ground. All the specimens belonged to the
variety muscigena Ach.
19. Physcia stellaris Г. Lich. arct. 63. — Branth og Gron-
lund p. 472.
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (on ground among moss), Termometerfjeld (on
stones), a single specimen on a decayed reindeer horn.
Xanthoria Fr.
20. Xanthoria elegans Link. Lich. arct. p. 69. — Branth og
Gronlund p. 473.
Loc.: very common, е. g. Hvalrosodde (on stones), Termometerfjeld
(on stones), Danmarks Havn (ground and small stones), the Bay (on ground),
Lille Snenæs (on bone).
21. Xanthoria lychnea (Ach.) Th. Fr. Th. Fries: Lich. scan-
dinav. p. 146.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on ground), the Bay (on ground), (some spe-
cimens on a decayed reindeer horn).
Placodium Hill.
22. Placodium fulgens (Sw.) Lich. arct. p. 81. — Branth og
Grønlund р. 475.
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (on ground), Lille Snenæs (on ground). АП the
specimens belong to the variety alpinum Th. Fr.
Acarospora Mass.
23. Acarospora smaragdula Wnbg. Lich. arct. p. 92. — Branth
og Grenlund р. 477.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on stones).
Lecanora Ach.
24. Lecanora tartarea L. Lich. arct. p. 99. — Branth og
Gronlund 478.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (moss-covered ground), Danmarks Havn (above
moss on the ground).
25. Lecanora Hageni Ach. Lich. arct. p. 106. — Branth og
Grønlund р. 479.
188 OLAF GALLOE.
Loc.: Basiskær (on dead moss on the ground), Danmarks Havn (on
dead Dryas), the Bay (on ground), Hvalrosodde (on decayed whale-bones),
Snenæs (on decayed whale-bones), further some specimens on an old
reindeer horn.
26. Lecanora polytropa Ehr. Lich. arct. p. 110. — Branth og
Grønlund р. 481.
Loc.: Danmarks Науп (on stones); all the specimens belonged to the
variety conglobata (Smrft).
27. Lecanora cenisea Ach. Lich. arct. p. 115. — Branth og
Grønlund р. 480.
Loc.: Lille Snenæs (on the hill, most abundant on the north side),
Danmarks Havn (on stones).
28. Lecanora bryontha Ach. Lich. arct. р. 117. — Branth og
Grønlund р. 481. .
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on the ground).
Caloplaca Th. Fr.
29. Caloplaca cerina (Ehrh.) Th. Fr. Th. Fr. Lich. scand.
р. 173. — Branth og Grønlund р. 482.
Some few specimens on a decayed reindeer horn.
30. Caloplaca pyracea (Ach.) Th. Fr. Lich. scand. p. 178. —
Branth og Grønlund р. 482.
Loc.: Lille Snenæs (on decayed bone), as also several places on reindeer
horn and on raw humus ground among moss.
31. Caloplaca Jungermanniz (Vahl) Th. Fr. Lich. scand.
р. 180. — Branth og Gronlund р. 482.
Loc.: Basisker (on ground over dead moss), Danmarks Науп (on
ground), the Bay (on dead moss), as also at one place on reindeer horn. —
All the specimens belonged to the variety subolivacea Th. Fr.
32. Caloplaca ferruginea (Huds.) Th. Fr. Lich. scand. p. 184.
— Branth og Gronlund p. 482.
Loc.: Several places not exactly indicated, on stones (and moss). АП
the specimens belonged to the variety nigricans Tuckerm.
33. Caloplaca vitellina (Ehrh.) Th. Fr. Lich. scand. p. 188.
On decayed reindeer horn (well-developed, with apothecia), also several
places as a rule sterile (and thus easily mistaken).
34. Caloplaca subsimilis Th. Fr. Lich. scand. p. 189.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (among moss on the ground), Lille Snenæs
(on whale bone), as also sterile at several places.
Rinodina Mass.
35. Rinodina turfacea Wnbg. Lich. arct. p. 126. — Branth og
Gronlund p. 483.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on moss).
36. Rinodina mniaroea Ach. Lich. arct. р. 127. — Branth og
Grønlund р. 483.
Lichens from “The Danmark-Expedition”. 189
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on ground), Danmarks Науп (clay soil) — All
the specimens belonged to the variety cinnamomea Th. Fr.
37. Rinodina exigua Ach. Lich. arct. p. 129. — Branth og
Grønlund р. 483.
At several places (on wood) not exactly indicated.
Aspicilia Mass.
38. Aspicilia calcarea L. Lich. arct. p. 130. — Branth og
Grønlund р. 484.
Loc.: not exactly given; on sand-stone. The specimen belongs to the
variety contorla Hoffm.
Stereocaulon Schreb.
39. Stereocaulon coralloides Fr. Lich. arci. p. 142. — Branth
og Grønlund р. 486.
Loc.: Varde Ridge (on ground), the Bay (on ground). All the specimens
belonged to the variety conglomeratum Fr.
40. Stereocaulon evolutum Græwe. Lich. зсапа. р. 45.
Loc.: Varde Ridge (on ground), Danmarks Havn (on ground).
41. Stereocaulon paschale L. Lich. arct. p. 143. — Branth
og Grønlund р. 485.
Loc.: Seems to be very common, e. g. Dove Bugt (on loose sand),
Danmarks Науп (among moss), Cape Bismarck (on ground among moss),
Varde Ridge (both on dry and damp ground, among moss), the Bay (among
moss), Basiskær (on damp ground).
Cladonia Hoffm.
42. Cladonia coccifera (L.) Willd. Wainio: Monographia Clad. I
р. 149. — Branth og Grønlund р. 488, Cl. carnucopioides.
Loc.: Renskæret (on mossy ground).
43. Cladonia decorticata (Floerke) Spreng. Wainio, Monogr.
Clad. II p. 67.
Loc. Renskæret (on ground).
44. Cladonia degenerans (Floerke) Spreng. Wainio, Monogr.
Clad. П р. 135. — Branth og Grønlund р. 487.
Loc.: Not exactly given; on ground.
45. Cladonia pyxidata (L) Fr. Wainio: Monogr. Clad. II p. 209.
— Branth og Grønlund р. 487.
Loc.: Basiskær (on dry ground), Termometerfjeld (on sandy ground),
Varde Ridge (on ground, in part over moss).
46. Cladonia fimbriata (L) Fr. Wainio: Monogr. Clad. II p. 246.
— Branth og Grønlund р. 487.
Loc.: Danmarks Науп (on dry ground).
47. Cladonia foliacea (Huds.) Schaer. у. alcicornis (Lightf.)
Scher. Wainio: Monogr. Clad. П р. 384. — Branth og Grønlund
p. 484, Clad. alcicornis. i Loa CAT
AV г OS 4 = ©
£ о’ р 7
i —
[<
190 OLAF GALLOE.
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (on dry ground, in part over moss; fairly common).
Note. In addition to the species mentioned here, there are also several
very little developed specimens mong the other lichen samples; they cannot
be determined in their present state.
Thamnolia Ach,
48. Thamnolia vermicularis Sw. Lich. arct. р. 161 — Branth
og Gronlund p. 465.
Loc.: Hvalrosodde (among moss on the ground), Termometerfjeld
(among moss on the ground), Danmarks Науп (on the ground).
Dufourea Ach.
49. Dufourea muricata Laur. Th. Fries: Lich. Spitsbergenses
р. 10, in Kongl. Svenska Vetenskaps-Akad. handl. Bd. 7, Nr. 2.
Stockholm 1867.
Loc.: Snenæs (on the ground).
Gyrophora Ach.
50. Gyrophora hyperborea Ach. Lich. arct. р. 164. — Branth
og Gronlund p. 490.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on stones).
51. Gyrophora erosa Web. Lich. arct. p. 164. — Branth og
Grønlund р. 490.
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (on stones), Renskæret (on stones).
52. Gyrophora proboscidea L. Lich. arct. р. 166. — Branth
og Grønlund р. 490.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on stones), Danmarks Havn (on stones), Varde
Ridge (on stones); seems to be common in North-East Greenland.
53. Gyrophora cylindrica L. Lich. arct. р. 166. — Branth og
Gronlund p. 491.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on stones), Pustervig (on stones), Basiskeer
(on stones), Danmarks Науп (оп stones), Varde Ridge (on stones, 200 т.
above the sea). к
Lopadium Koerb.
54. Lopadium pezizoideum Ach. Lich. arct. p. 201. — Branth
og Grønlund р. 497.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on the ground).
Arthrorhaphis Mass.
55. Arthrorhaphis flavo-virescens Dicks. Lich. arct. р. 203.
— Branth og Grønlund р. 493, Васа citrinella.
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (on the ground), Varde Ridge (on raw humus).
Leeidea Ach.
56. Lecidea fuscoatra L. Lich. arct. p. 210. — Branth og
Grønlund р. 502.
Loc.: Renskæret (on stones).
Lichens from “The Danmark-Expedition”. 191
57. Lecidea lapicida (Ach.) Fr. Lich. arct. р. 211. — Branth
og Gronlund p. 499. |
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (on stones).
i 58. Lecidea auriculata Th. Fr. Lich. arct. p. 213. — Branth
og Grønlund p. 499.
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (on stones), Orléans Island (on stones).
59. Lecidea sabuletorum (Schreb.) Ach. Lich. arct. p. 214. —
Branth og Grønlund p. 500.
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (on dry ground above dead moss). The material
belonged to the variety muscorum (Wulf.).
60. Lecidea enteroleuca Ach. Lich. arct. р. 216. — Branth og
Grønlund p. 500.
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (on stones).
61. Lecidea atrobrunnea Ram. Lich. arct. p. 218. — Branth
og Grønlund p. 502.
Loc.: Renskæret (on stones).
62. Lecidea limosa Ach. Lich. scandinav. р. 538. — Branth
og Gronlund p. 501.
Sporostatia Mass.
63. Sporostatia Morio Ram. Lich. arct. p. 224. — Branth og
Grønlund р. 503.
Loc.: North Koldewey Island (on stones), Danmarks Науп (on stones).
— All the specimens belonged to the variety coracina Smrft.
Buellia D. Not.
64. Buellia insignis Naeg. Lich. arct. р. 227. — Branth og
Gronlund p. 504.
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (on the ground). — The whole of the material
belonged to the variety papillata Smrft.
65. Buellia triphragmioides Anzi. Lich. scandinav. р. 594.
Loc.: Danmarks Havn (on moss).
Rhizocarpon Ram.
66. Rhizocarpon geminatum Flot. Lich. arct. р. 234. — Branth
og Grønlund р. 507.
Loc.: Termometerfjeld (on stones), Danmarks Hayn (on stones), Ren-
skæret (on a large piece of quartz).
67. Rhizocarpon geographicum L. Lich. arct. р. 236. — Branth
og Grønlund р. 507.
Loc.: Danmarks Науп (on stones).
Sphaerophorus Pers.
68. Sphaerophorus coralloides Pers. Lich. arct. р. 244. —
Branth og Grønlund р. 508.
Loc.: Renskæret (on ground among moss).
6—8—1910.
2 - i и i
= Nr u
| о В —
= ca HR ‚
i 2 у »
| | №.
- —
м se :
1% Pa. We Are a FA
р 1 HE № i?
SÅ MOSS ARE Soe i u 7 e р >= +. ©
TONNES Coe 315, à р es
5 År i En 1 i
= ae the 'e у
u =< u
We?
. El 4 =
< hb 75). кб viper 7 res LAB
EVA OLE Lo 4 Be, = 7
i $
3 р 5
i CR" pres
я À à
ue TELE i i - у i
31 \ = 1 é . >
$, CRE. ROUTE: Pe thea! aan og | u
> i i - : ,
| mn ER = (1 2
=. № a $ u т 7
| K у é 1 ON it f \.
м — CDs
i
4 À 5 i ’
L un }
ра r i
* - = и ir О -
DL и '
was ==
и Sih os
z =
w р fe | ‘ Furs nd Ce
i | i r2
р а р
EH 1 av | f Kl i
KN j p= : mar ue 7 ae
F | Eu
7 пет TA
= О = if sr _
В _ i +4
ae Ye
va и MEINT
= = a Ve
= _ €
= г ‘uae a
= i = TE E i
t D 7 | u
>
RUL:
DL: |
RY us . a
u \ : MILE EUER |
i ne = В 4 = ‘ + _ tg :
| AE AL
м.
Г м 1 ia i | = ne
}
“SCIP О
в Al
7 *
me å i if Fa i;
Fi
mi L > i а ур, Ve
i FÅ
= — 7
i i wile = в CE u rt
Der re [2 ti i Г
| . |
= un n UA
= и u Ty x i
N
- 4 i
ПХ KER! р 5. PU.
rer } "AUS. iit 7
4
-*
Le a | = -H - ©
Х.
DIATOMS FROM NORTH-EAST GREENLAND
(N. OF 76° N. LAT.)
COLLECTED BY THE “DANMARK-EXPEDITION”
DETERMINED
BY
ERNST @STRUP
1910
XLIII. 16
7 aa
i
Ш,
| wi
i
Е vs
Ра
> Er
Pen Br
lie material on which the present work is based was given
to me for investigation by the Commission for the “Danmark-
Expedition.”
The saltwater material consisted of (1) 13 samples of Alga,
as follows: —
Off Cape Amélie, 5 samples, preserved in glass vessels. The
locality given in the text as “Off Cape Amélie.”
Danmarks Hayn, 3 samples, of which two are herbarium-material,
and one in a glass vessel. The locality given in the text as “Dan-
marks Havn.” |
Along the peninsula, Cape Bismarck, 1 sample in a glass vessel.
The locality in the text given as “Off Cape Bismarck.”
Koldewey Ø, 4 samples, of which three are herbarium-material,
and one in a glass vessel. The locality given in the text as “Kolde-
wey Isl.”
and (2) A series of samples from ice, all preserved in glass vessels,
6 in all, as follows: —
76°20 N.lat., 18°20 W.long., land-ice off Germania Land, 1
sample. Given in the text as “Land-Ice.”
75714 №. lat., 4°34 W. long. The outer edge of the pack-ice, 4
samples. Given in the text as “Margin of the Pack-Ice.”
75°14 N. Lat., 11°15 W.long., pack-ice, 1 sample. Given in the
text as “Pack-Ice.”
The freshwater samples are the same as those given to Dr.
Е. BORGESEN for investigation of the freshwater alge. There are in
all 30 samples, partly preserved in glass vessels, and partly dried,
in paper bags, but several of them contained such small quantities
of material that it proved impossible to obtain serviceable prepara-
tions from the uncleansed material, let alone to submit it to a che-
mical cleansing! The freshwater samples are distributed among the
different localities (the names of which are given unaltered in the
text) as follows: —
16"
196 ERNST ØSTRUP.
Mallemukfjeld ...... 1 sample: some pebbles.
Hvalrosodde ........ 5 samples, of which 4 in glass vessels, 1 dried
material.
Dove buste. 1 sample, dried powder.
Lille Snenæs ....... 3 samples, of which 2 in glass vessels, 1: stone.
Пе о 1 sample in a glass vessel.
Stormbugt.......... 1 sample: two bones.
Stormkap cee .. 1 sample, dried material.
Danmarks Hayn .... 2 samples in glass vessels.
Vderbugten 4.2... 1 sample, dried material.
Wester vily... а 7 samples, all in glass vessels.
Basiskæret ......... 1 sample in a glass vessel.
Thermometerfjeld... 3 samples, of which 2 dried material, 1: stone.
Cape Bismarck ..... 1 sample in a glass vessel.
Мое ца. 1 sample, dried material.
Without locality .... 1 sample in a glass vessel.
As regards the distribution of the Diatoms collected by the
“Danmark Expedition,’ I have, in the present work, exclusively
considered the distribution within the Arctic region, and then I
have used the following method: —
In regard to the marine forms: —
W.Greenl. denotes a form found along the coasts of West Greenland.
E. Greenl. — a form found along the coasts of East Greenland.
Greenl. — a form found along the coasts of both East and
West Greenland.
E. of Greenl. — a form found by Ryder’s Expedition on the ice
or in plankton, and included in my Mar. D. f.
Ostg.
East Arct.S. — a form found in one of the other eastern Arctic
Seas as far as the Strait of Behring.
In regard to the freshwater forms: —
W.Greenl. denotes West Greenland.
E. Greenl. = East Greenland.
BÆJSTEd: — Franz-Josef Land.
Spb. — Spitzbergen.
В. El. -— Beeren Eiland.
J.M. — Jan Mayen.
MARINE DIATOMS.
РЕ МАТА
Diraphidee.
Amphiprora Ehr., 1843.
Amphiprora gigantea Grun. var. seplentrionalis Grun. Cl. Syn.,
I, 18; CI. & Grun. A.D., Tab. V, fig. 87 (A. decussata sept.).
Гос. Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Kjellmanii Cl. var. glacialis Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 16; Cl. Vega Exp.,
Tab. XXXV, fig. 12 (А glac.).
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. Е. Greenl., East Arct. 5.
Auricula Castr., 1875.
Auricula minuta Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 21, Tab. I, figs. 7—8.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Hitherto recorded only from “Sweden, Gullmarsfjord on Zostera and
among Amphipleura (Berkeleya) Dillwynii’ (Cl. 1. с.).
Tropidoneis Cl., 1891.
Tropidoneis longa CI. Cl.Syn., I, 25, Tab. Ш, fig. 8.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Pleurosigma W.Sm., 1852.
Pleurosigma elongatum W.Sm., Cl. Syn., I, 38; W. Sm. Syn.
Tab. XX, fig. 199.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. 5.
Caloneis Cl., 1894.
Caloneis amphisbzena (Bory) Cl. var. fuscata Schum., Cl. Syn.,
1 55. Clea Grun, А.В Tab. i, fie, 27.
200 ERNST OSTRUP.
Loc. Dove Bust.
Arct. Distr, East Arct. 5.
Caloneis brevis (Greg.) CL, Cl. Syn., I, 61; У. Н. Trt., Tab. IV,
fig. 180. (Nav. brev.).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 3 sampl)
Arct. Distr. У. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Caloneis kryophila Cl. var? gelida Cl., Cl. Syn., 1, 64; Cl. Vega
Exp., Tab. XXXVII, fig. 42. (Nav. kryoph.? gel.)
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice (2 sampl.)
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Diploneis Ehr., 1840.
Diploneis borealis (Grun.) Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 96; Grun. Fz. Js. L.,
Tab. I, fig. 40 (Nav. Smithii bor.).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 5 sampl.), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W.Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Diploneis coffæiformis (А. Sch.) Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 81; А. Sch.
М. 5:9. Таь. 1 212222:
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algee).
Not before recorded from Arct. S. Several other records.
Diploneis Entomon Ehr., Cl. Syn., I, 87; Cl. & Grun. A. D.,
Tab. Ш, fig. 54 (Nav. bomboides A. Sch. var. media Grun.).
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey Isl., (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Marg. of
the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. E.Greenl., East Arct. S.
Diploneis interrupta (Kütz.) Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 84; V.H. Trt.,
Tab. IH, fig. 145.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Alg&, 2 sampl.), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Diploneis littoralis (Donk.), Cl. var. arctica Cl., Cl. Baff. B., 18,
Tabi fis. 7.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice (3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Davis Strait, E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
In one of these samples a specimen of the present species has the
following dimensions: Long. 66 м, Lat. 25 y.
Diploneis littoralis (Donk.), Cl. var. hyperborea Cl., Cl. 1. c.,
Та. Г Вс. 1,
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. W.Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Diploneis muscæformis (Grun.) Cl. var. genuina Cl., CI. Syn.,
I, 83; A.S.Atl., Tab. XIII, fig. 47 (Navic. muscæf.).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Hitherto recorded only from Baku, Java and Camp. Bay.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 201
=
Diploneis Smithii, (Breb.) Cl... Cl. Syn., 1,196; Wi. Su.’'Syn.,
Tab. XVII, fig. 152 а (Nav elliptic); Grun. Fz. Js.L., Tab.I, fig. 41.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 3 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Diploneis splendida (Greg.) Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 87; A. Sch. N.S.D.,
Tab. I, fig. 3.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Diploneis subcincta (А. Sch.) Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 86; Grun. Fz. Js. Ld.,
Tab. I, figs. 38—39.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Aigze, 4 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey
Isl. (Algæ, 3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. E.Greenl., East Arct. S.
Diploneis vacillans A. Sch. forma 2, Cl. Syn., I, 95; A.S. Atl.,
Tab. VIII, fig. 34.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Not before recorded from Arct. S. Several other records.
Naviculæ fusiformes Cl., 1894.
Navicula fusiformis, Grun. var. ostrearia Gaillon, Cl. Syn., I, 106;
Veli: Trt, Tab. XX VIL, fig: 769:
Гос. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Not before recorded from Arct. S. Several other records.
Naviculæ orthostichæ CI, 1894.
Navicula kryokonites Cl. var. subprotracta, Cl. Syn., I, 109;
СТ. Vega Exp., Tab. XXXWIL fig: 46.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice (3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula rostelloides sp. nova. Tab. nost. XIII fig. 1. cf. Ost.
Mar. D. Ostg., 426, Tab. VI, fig. 73 (Nav. Rostellum W. Sm.).
Long. 22 и. Lat.10y. Str. minime 22 in 107%:
Valva lanceolata-elliptica, apicibus brevissime subrostratis. Raphe
area hyalina angustissima, distincla autem, cincta. Striis parallelis,
apices versus subradiantibus et, qvoad perspicere potui, altera in parte
media valve deficientibus ibiqve fasciam unilateralem male definitam
relinqventibus.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arect. Distr. E. of Greenl.
I had previously given this species as Nay. Rostellum W. Sm., which
Cleve (Syn., II, 4) refers to Nav. Placenta Ehr. If, however, Nav. Rostellum
should prove to be identical with Nay. Placenta then the present species
cannot be Nav, Rostell., because it has not got the characteristic decussate
striation of Мау. Placenta. As I have not been able to see any punctation
of the striz I place it, but with hesitation, under Naviculæ orthostiche and
as perhaps most nearly allied to Nav. kryokonites Cl.
202 ERNST OSTRUP.
Navicula Spicula (Hickie) Clo) Cl. Syn., I, 110; V. H. Trt.,
Tab. I, fig. 53 (Stauron. Spic.).
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct Distr. Е of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula Wankaremæ Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 109; Cl. Vega Exp., Tab.
XXXVII, fig. 47 (Nav. kryokonites? Wank.).
Loc. Pack-Ice, Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arch Разг. East Arct 5.
Navicula vitrea Cl, Cl. Syn., I, 111; Cl. & Grun., A.D. Tab. IV,
fig. 78 (Pleurosigma vitreum).
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. Davis Strait, Е. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Gyrosigma Hass., 1845.
Gyrosigma arcticum CI. Cl. Syn., I, 119; Perag. Pleuros., Tab. X,
figs. 16—17 (Rhoicosigma arct.).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Marg. of the Pack-Ice (2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W.Greenl., East Arct. S.
Amphipleura Kütz., 1844.
Amphipleura rutilans Trentepohl, Cl. Syn., I, 126; V.H. Trt.,
Tab. V, fig. 255 (Berkeleya Dillwynii).
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Aret. Distr. Greenl.
Amphipleura rutilans Trentepohl var. antarctica (Harvey) Grun.,
V.H.Syn., Tab. XVI, fig. 20 (Berkeleya antarct.).
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algz).
Not before recorded from Arct. S. Other records, North Sea, Falkland
Isls., Friendly Isls. (Cl. L c.).
Navicule decipientes Grun., 1880.
Navicula subinflata Grun., Cl. Syn., I, 141; (Cl. Vega Exp., Tab.
XXXVII, fig. 50). У. Н. Trt., Tab. XXVII, fig. 760.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl. Е. of Greenl., East Arct. 5.
Naviculæ microstigmaticæ CI, 1894.
Stauroneis perpusilla Grun., Cl. Syn., I, 146; Grun., Fz. Js. L.,
Tab. I, fig. 50.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice (3 sampl.).
Aret. Distr: +B. of Greenl., East Arct-.s.
Stauroneis pellucida, Cl. var. contracta Ost., Ost. Mar. D. Ostg.,
440, Tab. V, fig. 62.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack Ice.
Arct. Distr. E. of Greenl.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 903
Navicula Grevillei Ag., Cl. Syn., I, 152; V. H. Trt., Tab. У, fig. 243
(Schizonema Grev.).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula rhombica Greg., Cl. Syn., I, 152; Greg. T.M.S., IV,
Tab. V, fig. 1.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl.
Navicula scopulorum Breb., var arctica var. nova. Tab. nost XIII,
fig. 10.
Long. 57 и. Lat. 7. Str. minime 22 in 104, debilissimis et ægre
perpiciendis.
Valva lineari, inter apices rotundatos et mediam partem leniter
contracta. Raphe area distincta hyalina cincta. Striis parallelis, sub
apices, qvoad perspicere potui, convergentibus, media in parte valve
deficientibus fasciamqve latam relinqventibus. Nodulis terminalibus
ab apicibus remotis.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algee).
This form is probably most nearly allied to Nav. Scop. Bréb var. belgica
ENS (cio Регас. Mar. Diat. d. Ег. Tab. VII, 68.27).
Gomphonema Ag., 1824.
Gomphonema exiguum Kütz., var. arcticum Grun., Cl. Syn., I,
188; У.Н. Syn., Tab. XXV, fig. 30 (Gomph. arctic.).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Gomphonema groenlandicum Qst., Ost. Mar. D. Ostg., 414;
Tab. III, figs. 11—12.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ), Off Germ. L. (Land-Ice), Marg. of the Pack-
Ice (3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Davis Strait., Е. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Gomphonema kamtschaticum Grun., Cl. Syn., I, 188; V. H.
Syn., Tab. XXV, fig. 29.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algae, 3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Gomphonema septentrionale Ost., Ost. Mar. Diat. Ostg., 414,
Tab AIT 85.9.
Loc. Pack-Ice, Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. E. of Greenl.
Gomphonema septentrionale Ost., var. angustum Qst., Ost.
ies fice 10:
Loc. Pack-Ice, Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. E. of Greenl.
204 Ernst OSTRUP.
Trachyneis Cl., 1894.
Trachyneis aspera (Ehr.) Cl., var. genuina CI. Cl. Syn., I, 191;
V.H. Trt, Tab. ТУ, fis. 165 (Nay-asp.).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Not before recorded from Arct. S. Several other records.
Trachyneis aspera (Ehr.) Cl., var. vulgaris Cl., A. S. Atl., Tab.
XLVIII, figs. 2—6 (Nav. asp.).
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr.. W. Greenl.
Trachyneis aspera (Ehr.) Cl., var. intermedia Grun., A.S. Atl.,
Ihe (oe SELE
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 5 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algze), Off Cape
Bismarck (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Trachyneis aspera (Ehr.) Cl., var. intermedia Grun. forma ro-
busta. Tab. nost XII, fig. 3.
Long. 250 м. Lat. 384. Ser. alveol. 6 in 10 р, alveol. 4 in 10.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
I think this form may be a robust, sculptured Trach. asp. intem. Only
a fragment found.
Naviculæ minuscule Cl., 1895.
Navicula bahusiensis Grun., var. arctica Grun. Fz. Js. Ld., 52,
Tab. 1, fig. 43. Ost. Mar. D. Ostg., Tab. IV, figs. 30—31 (Nav.
bahus. Grun ?).
Loc. Dove Bust.
Arct. Distr. E. of Green., East Arct. S.
The present form is identical with the fig. 31, quoted above, in my Mar.
D. Ostg. As I have there pointed out, my specimens as well as the present
form, differ from Grunow’s figure of a specimen from Fz. Js. L., in that the
striæ at the apices are not radiate, but almost parallel. As the striæ,
however, are seen only with great difficulty I think my determination may
be correct.
Naviculæ lineolatæ Cl., 1895.
Navicula ammophila Grun., var. intermedia Grun., CI. Syn., I,
30; Grun. D. Ost. —Ung., Tab. XXX, figs. 71—73 (Nav. ammoph. f.
minuta).
Loc. Off Cape Amelie (Algæ), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey Isl.
(Als).
Arct Distr East Archos:
Navicula Bolleana Grun., Cl. Syn., II, 25; A.S. Atl, Tab. XLVII,
fig. 18.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula Bolleana Grun., var. intermedia Ost., Ost. Маг. D. Ostg.,
431, Tab. V, fig. 5.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 205
Loc. Margin of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. E. of Greenl.
Navicula cancellata Donk., Cl. Syn., II, 30; У. Н. Trt., Tab. Ш,
fig. 128.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice,
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula cancellata Donk., var. Gregorü Ralfs, A.S. Atl., Tab.
УТ Шо. 72.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula cancellata Donk., var. retusa Breb, V.H.Trt., Tab. II,
fig. 80 (Nav. retusa var. subret.).
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Off Germ. L. (Land-Ice).
ВЕСЕ Distr. East Arct. S.
Navicula cancellata Donk., var. subapiculata Grun., A. 5. Atl.,
Mab: XENVI, fig. 68.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula digito-radiata Greg., Cl. Syn., II, 20; У. Н. Trt., Tab. Ш,
fig. 130.
Loc. Off Cape Amelie (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East. Arct. S.
Navicula digito-radiata Greg., var. Cyprinus (Ehr.?) W. Sm.,
м ТЕ lc. fig 131.
Loc. Off. Cape Amélie (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
АСЕ Distr.” Green:
Navicula directa W. Sm., var. genuina Cl., Cl. Syn., П, 27;
A.S. Atl., Tab. XLVII, figs. 4—5.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 5 sampl.), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.),
Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula directa W.Sm., var lata Ost., Ost. Mar. D. Ostg., 427,
Tab. V, fig. 47.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Mect Distr ee of Green.
In my paper Mar. D. Ostg. (1. с.) the length of the valve is erroneously
stated to be 0.37 mm instead of 0.137 mm. The figure, however, is correct.
Navicula directa W. Sm., var. remota Grun. A. Sch. N.S. D.
Mab: Il, fig. 2.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula directa W.Sm., var. cuneata Ost., Ost. Mar. D. Ostg.,
428, Tab. IV, fig. 42.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. E. of Greenl.
206 ERNST OSTRUP.
Navicula distans W. Sm., Cl. Syn. II, 35; V.H. Trt., Tab. Ш,
fig. 133.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arcı. Distr W.Greenl.. Е. of Greens WastArct.Ss.
Navicula inflexa Greg. Cl. syne II, 31; У. H. Trt., Tab. XXV,
Во. 713.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arct: Distr East Arct. S:
Navicula jamalinensis Cl., var. subcircularis var. nova. Tab.
nost XIII, fig. 2.
Long. 35 и. Lat. 244. Str. 7—8 in 104, sub apices 10 in 10%,
distincte transverse lineatis.
Valva elliptica fere subcirculari. Raphe area hyalina, satis augusta,
cincta. Striis radiantibus. Nodulis terminalibus extremis in apicibus
situatis.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
This form may be a variety of Nav. Jamal. (cf. Cl. Syn., II, 38; Cl. Grun.
A.D., Tab. II, fig. 40). It differs from the main species by its almost circular
outline and by its apical area being much narrower and more linear than
in Nav. Jamal.
Navicula jejuna A. Sch., var. arctica var. nova. Tab. nost XIII,
fig. 5.
Long 68 и. Lat. 8.54. Str. 8 in 104, obscure punctatis.
Valva lineari, apices versus leniter attenuata. Striis radiantibus,
uno in latere valve raphen non attingentibus. Raphe sub apices
sinuosa.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
This form has some resemblance to Navicula jejunoides Н. О.Н. (Belgica
Exp., II, Tab. I, fig. 12) but its strie are radiate throughout, and are equally
distant upon both sides of the raphe.
The habitat of Nav. jejunoides, according to H. Van Heurch (1. с.), is
“Glace de banquise No. 141; assez frequent.”
Navicula kariana Grun., var. detersa Grun., Cl. Syn. II, 28;
Grun. Fz. Js. L., Tab. 1, figs. 23—24.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice (3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Е. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula kariana Grun., var. frigida Grun. Grun. ]. с. fig. 25.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice (2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula (Schizonema) mollis W. Sm., Cl. Syn., II, 26; У. H.
Syn., Tab. XV, figs. 22—23.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algz).
Arc Distr У. Greenl:
Navicula obtusa CI. Cl. Syn., II, 29; Cl. Vega Exp., Tab. XXXVI,
fig. 25.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 207
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice (2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Davis Strait, E. of Greenl., East Arct.
Navicula peregrina Ehr., Cl. Syn,, П, 18; У. Н. Trt., Tab. III,
fig. 101.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula peregrina Ehr., var. kefvingensis Ehr., А. 5. Atl., Tab.
XLVII, fig. 62.
Loc. Yderbugten.
Hitherto recorded only from Firth of Tay and Franzensbad (fossil)
(GE isc):
Navicula peregrina Ehr., var.? oblonga var. nova. Tak. nost XIII,
fig. 4.
Long. 43 и. Lat. 104. Str. 11 in 104 transverse lineatis.
Valva lineare-elliptica, apicibus rotundatis. Raphe area augusta
hyalina, media in parte valve in aream transapicalem curtam
dilatata, cincta. Striis radiantibus, sub apices fere parallelis.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
I am uncertain as to the systematic position of this form. I think it
may be related to the group belonging to Navicula peregrina, perhaps it is
nearest to Nav. peregr. Meniscus.
Navicula (Schizonema) ramosissima Ag., forma genuina, Cl.
Syn. lis 26; V. H. Trt., Tab. У, ng. 244.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Danmarks Havn (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Kolde-
wey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct Distr.-Greenl.
Navicula sibirica Grun., Cl. Syn., II, 29; Cl. Vega Exp., Tab.
XXXVII, fig. 88 (Rhoikoneis Bolleana var.? sib.).
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice (2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Davis Strait, Е. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula subcuneata sp. nova. Tab. nost XIII, fig. 6.
Long. 32 и. Lat. 104. Str. 10 in 102, distincte punctatis.
Valva sublineari, apicibus subcuneatis. Raphe area distincta
hyalina cincta. Striis parallelis sub apices leniter radiantibus. No-
dulis terminalibus extremis in apicibus situatis.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
This form may be akin to an undescribed Navicula in A.S. Atl., Tab.
XLVI, fig. 9 (from Quarnero), but it has parallel striæ; the Navicula, delineated
by A. Schmidt, has the striz slightly radiate.
Navicula superba CI. Cl. Syn., II, 29; Cl. Vega Exp., Tab. XXXVI,
fig. 23.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algz), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ), Marg. of the Pack-
Ice (3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Davis Strait, Е. Greenl., Е. of Greenl., East Arct. $.
208 ERNST ØSTRUP.
Navicula superba Cl., var. subacuta Gran. A. S. Atl., Tab. CCLIX,
figs. 27—28.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
ATreteDusitr hast Arch 5.
Navicula transitans Cl., Cl. Syn., II, 27; Cl. Vega Exp., Tab.
XXXVI, fig. 31.
Loc. Pack-Ice, Marg. of the Pack-Ice (3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula trigonocephala CI, Cl. Syn., II, 27; Cl. Vega Exp.,
Tab. XXXVI, fig. 29.
Гос. Pack-Ice, Marg. of the Pack-Ice (4 затру.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Е. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula valida Cl. & Grun., Cl. Syn., II, 25; Cl. & Grun. A. D;
Tab. Il, fig. 29.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. Е. Greenl., Е. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula valida Cl. & Grun., forma minor. Tab. nost XII, fig. 8.
Long. 46 и. Lat. 164. Str. 8 in 10y, transverse lineatis.
Valva elongate-elliptica. Raphe area distincta hyalina cincta.
Striis radiantibus, media in parte valve alternatim longis abbre-
viatisqve.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Undoubtedly a narrower and smaller form, intermediate between Nav.
valida and Nav. valida minuta (Cl. 1. с.).
Navicula Zostereti Grun., CI. Syn., IL 31; A.S. Atl., Tab. XLVI,
figs. 42—44.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algze), Koldewey Isl. (Algae), Marg. of the Pack-
Ice (3 sampl.).
Aret) Distr. of Green
Navicula? gomphonemoides sp. nova. Tab. nost XIII, fig. 7.
Long. 382 и. Lat. 5y. Str. 10 in 10y, delicatissime punctatis.
Valva anguste-lanceolata. Raphe leniter sinuosa. Striis radian-
tibus, Raphen attingentibus, media modo in parte valve paululum
abbreviatis. Nodulis terminalibus inconspicuis.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Alge).
This small form may perhaps bea Gomphonema. Only a single specimen
found.
Navicule punctate CI, 1895.
Navicula Baculus Cl., Cl. Vega Exp., 474, Tab. XXXVII, fig 51
(cf. Cl. Syn., 1, 124: Stenoneis inconspicua (Greg) Cl. var. Baculus
GI) &:5. АН. Tab) CCE NIM ie 15
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 209
I quite agree with Dr. H. Heiden when he says (in the explanation of
the Table in A.S. Atl. quoted above): “Zu Stenoneis darf diese Species, wie
Cleve es tut, nicht gestellt werden.”
Navicula glacialis Cl., Cl. Syn., II, 40; Tab. I, fig. 28.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Alsæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Е. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula glacialis, var. septentrionalis Cl., A. S. Atl., Tab. VI,
fig. 37.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algz).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Navicula punctulata W. Sm., var. finmarchica Grun., Cl. Syn.,
II, 47; Cl.& Grun. A.D., Tab. II, fig. 49 & Ost. Mar. D. Ostg., Tab. VI,
fig. 69.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algze, 4 sampl.), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Naviculæ lyratæ CI, 1895. ;
Navicula Lyra Ehr., var. arctica var. nova. Tab. nost XIII, fig. 9.
Long. 46 и. Lat. 214. Str. 9—10 in 10y, delicatissime transverse
lineatis.
Valva apices versus cuneata, media in parte marginibus fere
parallelis. Media parte sulcorum, Lyram effingentium, stria sicut
nebulosa instructa.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
I think that this variety comes nearest to Nav. Lyra var. atlantica A. $.
Navicula pygmea Kiitz, Cl. Syn., II, 65; У. Н. Trt., Tab. IV, 164.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Aret Distr. East. Aret-S:
Navicula spectabilis Greg., Cl. Syn., II, 60; A.S. Atl., Tab. III,
figs. 20—21. .
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Greenl.
Navicula spectabilis Grey., var. densestriata Ost., Ost. Mar. D.
Ostg., 436; Tab. VI, fig. 67.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ. 2 sampl.), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arce Distr, В. Greenl.
Pinnularia Ehr., 1843.
Marine CI, 1895.
Pinnularia bistriata Leud. Fortm., Cl. Syn., Il, 95; Perag. D.
mared. Ех. Lab. ne. 14.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Hitherto recorded only from the Mediterranean, Ceylon, Labuan, Siam.
Pinnularia qvadratarea А. Sch., Cl. Syn., II, 95; A. Sch. N.S. D.,
Tab. III, fig. 26.
XLIII. 17
210 ERNST OSTRUP.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Pinnularia qvadratarea A. Sch., var. constricta Ost., Ost. Mar.
Ю. Østg. 419, Tab. IV, fig. 23:
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice (2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Е. of Greenl., East Arct. $.
Pinnularia qvadratarea A. Sch., var. dubia Heiden, А. $. Atl.,
Tab. CCLX, fig. 13.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
AC Distr Bast Arch 5.
Pinnularia qvadratarea А. Sch., var. gibbosa Ost., Ost. Mar. D.
Ostg., 420, Tab. IV, fig. 28.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arce Distr В. ot Green East Arct S.
Pinnularia Stuxbergii Cl., Cl. Syn., II, 96 (Рапп. qvadrat. Stuxb.)
A.S. Atl., Tab. CCLX, figs. 37—38.
Loc. Off Germ. L. (Land-Ice), Marg. of the Pack-Ice (3 sampl.).
Arct Distr» Davis Strait ЕВ of Greens B st Aret. S.
Amphora Ehr., 1840.
Subg. Amphora Cl., 1895.
Amphora gigantea Grun., Cl. Syn., II, 105. Tab. nost. XII, fig. 11.
Long. 70y. Lat. 152. Str. 7 in 104.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Not before recorded from Arctic Seas. Several other records.
The present form is smaller than the typical species. I have given a
figure of it, as it seems to me not to agree exactly with Amph. gig. forma
minor. (Cl. 1.с. A.S. Atl., Tab. XL, figs. 28—29).
Amphora marina (W. Sm.), Н.У.Н. Cl. Syn., IL 103; V. H. Trt.,
Tab. I, fig. 14.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey Isl.
(Algæ, 4 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. В. Greenl., Е. of Greenl.
Amphora Proteus Greg., CI. Syn., II, 103; A.S. Atl., Tab. XX VII,
fig. 3.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 4 sampl.), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 4 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. 5.
Amphora Proteus Greg., var. contigua Cl., A. 5. Atl., Tab. XXVII,
figs. 7—9.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 4 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey
Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl.
Amphora virgata sp. nova. Tab. nost. XIII, fig. 12.
Long. 58 и. Lat. 124. Str. 10 in 104, ad marginem numeratis.
Valva lunata, apicibus obtusis. Striis in parte dorsali valve
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 211
linea mediana nuda interruptis. Raphe propior linea altera, minus
autem distincta, adest.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
This species may be a form intermediate between Amphora ovalis Kitz.
and Amph. Proteus Greg.
Subgen. Diplamphora Cl., 1895,
Amphora crassa Greg., Cl. Syn., II, 109; А. 5. Atl, Tab. XXVIII,
figs. 30—33 (A. crass. punctata).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algze, 3 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey
Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Amphora margaritifera Cl., Cl. Syn., II, 117; Tab. Ш, figs.
30—31, Ost. Kyst D. Е. Gronl., 325; Tab. II, fig. 6 (A. cruciata Ost.).
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl.
I am now quite sure that this form, which, in my paper quoted above,
I recorded as a new species (referring however to its affinity to A. margar.)
is identical with A. marg. Cl., a form from Galapagos Islands.
Subg. Halamphora CI., 1895.
Amphora acutiuscula Kiitz., Cl. Syn., П, 121; У.Н. Trt., Tab. I,
fig. 5.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Amphora costata W.Sm., Cl. Syn., II, 122; W. Sm. Syn., Tab.
XXX, fig. 253.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl.
Amphora Eunotia Cl., Cl. Syn., II, 122; А. $. Atl, Tab. XXV
fig. 35.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 3 sampl.), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Amphora granulata Greg., Cl. Syn., II, 123; Greg. D. Clyde,
Tab. XIV, fig. 96.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Not before recorded from Arctic Seas. Other records, Scotland, South-Asia.
Amphora macilenta Greg., Cl. Syn., II, 121; Perag. D. mar. de
Bre alabs №. Во. 26.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Not before recorded from Arctic Seas. According to Peragallo (1. с.
р. 231): “Repandu.”
Amphora Terroris Ehr., Cl. Syn., II, 122; А. $. Atl., Tab. XXV,
figs. 17—19.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 5 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ, 2 sampl.),
Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
2
9] 2 ERNST OSTRUP.
Amphora Terroris Ehr., var. inflata Ost., Ost. таг. D. Ostg.,
410, Tab. Ш, fig. 6 (Amphora inflata Grun.?).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 4 sampl.), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl.
Especially because of the slight inward curvation of the apices I think
this form may more correctly be referred to Amph. Terr.
Subg. Oxyamphora Cl., 1895.
Amphora levis Greg., var. levissima Greg., Cl. Syn., II, 130;
A.S. Atl., Tab. XXVI, figs. 3, 13, 14.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Е. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Amphora lineolata Ehr., Cl. Syn., II, 126; V. H. Syn., Tab. I,
fig. 13.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
NRC Distr, КАЗНА.
Subg. Amblyamphora Cl., 1895.
Amphora venusta sp. nova. Tab. nost. XIII, fig. 16.
Long. 68 м. Lat. 10.8y. Str. 16—17 in 104, punctatis.
Valva lunata, apicibus rotundatis paululum marginem ventralem
versus inclinatis. Margine ventrali leniter arcuata. Striis dorsalibus
Raphen attingentibus, striis ventralibus marginalibus.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algze), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
I am somewhat in doubt as to the systematic position of this species.
It may perhaps be considered a slender form of Amphora obtusa Greg,,
Trans: MSN. 72, bab: i, по: 3
Subg. Cymbamphora Cl., 1895.
Amphora angusta Greg., Cl. var. typica Cl., Cl. Syn., II, 135;
AUS AT Гар. kos, 118215:
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Monoraphidee.
Rhoicosphenia Grun., 1860.
Rhoicosphenia curvata Kitz., Cl. Syn., II, 165; V. H. Trt.,
Tab. VII, fig. 319.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 3 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ, 2 затри.),
Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Cocconeis (Ehr., 1835) Grun., 1868
subgen. Cocconeis Cl,, 1895 pro gen.
Cocconeis Scutellum Ehr., var. genuina Cl., Cl. Syn., II, 170;
VÆRE SEE ab VIM, n82338.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 213
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Cocconeis Scutellum Ehr., var. minutissima Grun., Grun. Fz.
JS ав: г ties i
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Franz-Josef Land.
Cocconeis Scutellum Ehr., var. californica Grun., A. $. Atl., Tab.
CXCI, figs. 40—43.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Off Cape Bismarck (Algæ), Koldewey Isl.
(Algæ).
Hitherto recorded only from California and Kamtschatka.
Subg. Eucocconeis Cl., 1895 pro. gen.
Cocconeis dirupta Greg. var. decipiens Cl., Cl. Syn., II, 175;
Cl. Arct. S., Tab. I, fig. 6 (Сосс. decip.) & Tab. II, fig. 11 a (Сосс. arctica).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey Isl.
(Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W.Greenl., East Arct. 5.
Cocconeis pseudomarginata Greg., Cl. Syn., II, 178; V.H. Trt.,
Tab. XXIX, fig. 824.
Loc. Danmarks Науп (Alge, 2 sampl.).
Aret. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Cocconeis septentrionalis Grun., Cl. Syn., II, 174; Grun. Fz.
Зы Та. Г fig.2.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 4 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algze, 2 sampl.),
Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Hitherto recorded only from Franz-Josef Land (Assistance Bay).
Subg. Disconeis Cl., 1895 pro. gen.
Cocconeis pinnata Greg., Cl. Syn., II, 181; У. H. Trt., Tab. ХХХ,
fig. 818.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arciy Distr, East Acct. S.
Cocconeis pinnata var. arctica var. nova. Tab. nost. XIII, fig. 13.
Long. 24 и. Lat. 114. Costis 5,5 in 104 utrisqve in valvis, du-
plice serie punctorum alternantium interpositis. Valva elliptica
apicibus paululum attenuatis. Epitheca: Area apicali satis angusta.
Hypotheca: Raphe area angusta hyalina cincta. Costis utrisqve in
valvis subradiantibus.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
This variety differs from the main species in its somewhat attenuated
apices and its narrow apical area.
Subg. Pleuroneis, Cl., 1895 pro. gen.
Cocconeis costata Greg., Cl. Syn., II, 182; V.H. Trt., Tab. XXIX,
fig. 816.
214 ERNST ØSTRUP.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algze), Danmarks Havn (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Koldewey
Isl. (Algæ, 4 sampl.).
Arets Distr Greenl+ East АгсЕ 5.
Cocconeis costata var. pacifica Grun., У. H. Syn., Tab. XXX,
figs. 13—14.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Greenl.
Cocconeis ornata Greg? cf. Greg. D. Clyde, 19, Tab. I, fig. 24.
Tab. nost. XIII, Fig. 14.
Long 32 и. Lat.16 4, costis 8 in 104, utrisqve in valvis.
Valva elliptica, area apicali distincta. Costis leniter radiantibus,
in Hypotheca vitta submarginali nuda interruptis.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
This species may be Gregory s Cocc. ornata, although Gregory (1. с.) des-
cribes the apical area as a “long lanceolate blank space” and figures the striæ
as strongly radiate towards the apices. Cleve (Syn. II, 171) mentions Сосс.
ornata as a form which possibly may be a variety of Cocc. Scutellum Ehr.,
but in this matter I cannot agree with him. Cocconeis ornata occurs in
“Lamlash Bay” and in “Loch Fine.”
Cocconeis sp. Tab. nost. XIII, fig. 17.
Long. 314. Lat. 204. Str. 11 in 104, ad marginem numeratis,
delicatissime punctatis.
Hypotheca: Valva elliptica. Raphe area angusta distincta, media
in parte valvæ in aream parvulam centralem acuminatam dilatata,
cincta. Striis ubiqve in marginem perpendicularibus. Nodulis ter-
minalibus paululum ab apicibus remotis. Hypothecam modo ob-
servavi.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
As I have only seen the hypotheca I have not given this form as a new
species.
Achnanthes Borg., 1822,
Subg. Heteroneis Cl., 1895, pro. gen.
Achnanthes hyperborea Grun., Cl. Syn., I, 183; Grun., Fz. Js. Ld.,
Tab. I, figs. 4—5. Tab поз XIII, fig. 15.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Franz-Josef Land.
Subg. Microneis Cl., 1895 pro. gen.
Achanthes debilissima sp. nova? Tab. nost. XIII, fig. 24, ef.
Grun., Fz. Js. Ld., 52, Tab. I, fig. 42 (Navicula debiliss. Grun.).
Long. 6,3—7 м. Lat. 2,7 и.
Valva elliptica. Striis perdifficiliter perspiciendis.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (2 sampl).
This hyaline and exceedingly small species may be identical with Na-
vicula debilissima Grun. Grunow’s figure shows both the terminal nodules
and а central nodule and the latter he describes in the text (1. с.) as “minu-
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 215
tissimo.” As to the present specimens the matter stands as follows: — On all
my specimens I have seen a median apical line (a “raphe” or an “apical
area”), on some specimens Г have observed the terminal nodules a little
remote from the apices. On a few specimens I think I have seen a trace
of a central nodule, but I am not quite sure of it and therefore I have not
put a central nodule in my figures. On the other hand I have been able in
some specimens to see a striation at right-angles to the apical axis. A speci-
men in zone-view, which I had the good fortune to observe showed the
frustule bent along the transapical axis after the manner of an Achnanthes,
but I have not been able to see the frustules united into a band, on the
contrary I think I observed them attached separately to the narrow branches
of other Algee after the manner of a Cocconeis.
Achnanthes rhombica sp.nova. Tab. nost. XIII, fig. 18.
Long. 34 м. Lat. 124. Str.11 in 104, utrisqve in valvis, trans-
verse lineatis.
Valva elongate-rhombica. Epitheca: Striis parallelis, area apicali
distincta.
Hypotheca: Striis valde radiantibus, mediis aliqvantum spatiatis.
Raphe area hyalina, media in parle. valve in aream conspicuam
rotundatam dilatata, cincta.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
The epitheca of this species resembles that of Ach. Lorenziana Grun.,
but is somewhat more closely striated. As I have seen both valves in situ
I am quite certain that the present species cannot be Achn. Lorenz. in which
the number of striæ on the hypotheca is stated to be 18—27 in 102 (cf. Ci.
Syn., II, 187).
Achnanthes septentrionalis sp.nov. Tab. nost. XIII, fig. 21.
Long. 19 м. Га. 9 м. Str. 11 in 10 и utrisqve in valvis, transverse
lineatis.
Valva lanceolata, apicibus subrostratis. Epitheca: Striis paral-
lellis, area apicali distincta. Hypotheca: Striis radiantibus, media
in parte valve aliqvantum spatiatis. Raphe area hyalina, media
in valva in aream rotundatam dilatata, cincta.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Als).
Achnanthes septentrionalis var. subcapitata var. nova. Tab.
nost. XIII, fig. 22
This variety agrees entirely with the main species in the dimensions
and the number of striæ, but differs in the subcapitate apices and in the
absence of a central area on the hypotheca.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Achn. sept. is probably most nearly allied to Achn. Hauckiana Grun.
(У.Н. Syn., Tab. XXVII, figs. 14—15).
Subg. Achnanthidium (Kütz., 1844) Heib., 1864, Cl., 1895 pro. gen.
Achnanthes brevipes Ag. var. typica, Cl. Syn., II, 193; У.Н. Trt.,
Tab. VIII, fig. 324.
216 ERNST OSTRUP.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 3 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Off Cape
Bismarck (Algze), Koldewey Isl. (Algae, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Achnanthes brevipes Ag. var. intermedia Kitz. У. H. Trt., 1. с.
fig. 325 (Achn. subsessilis Ehr.).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 3 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey
Isl. (Algæ).
Amel. Distr: В. Green; East Arct, S.
Achnanthes brevipes Ag. var. parvula Kütz., У. H. Trt. 1. с.
fig. 326 (Achn. parvula).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl.
Achnanthes brevipes Ag. var. forma elliptica, Ost. Kystd. f.
Gronl; Tab. II, fig. 13.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. E-Greenl.
Achnanthes groenlandica CI. CI. Syn., II, 195; Cl. A. D., Tab.IV,
fig. 23.
Loc. Off Cape Amelie (Algz), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
АСЕ DiS tranGreenl. В. АтсЕ 5:
KALYPTORAPHIDEÆ.
Eschatoraphideæ.
Surirella Turp., 1827.
Surirella insignis sp. nova. Tab. nost. XIII, fig. 19.
Long. 1374. Lat. 544. Canaliculis 1,5 in 104. Striis subtilissimis.
Valva ovata, area apicali angusta. Striis delicatissimis, vix per-
spiciendis.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
As I have not seen this species in zone-view I am uncertain of its
systematic position. Possibly it may be considered a robust form of an
unnamed Surirella from “Hayes Exp.” figured in A. $. Atl., Tab. XXI, fig. 15,
which I have recorded from Е. Greenl (cf. Ost. Маг. D. Ostg., р. 334).
Surirella Oestrupii Gran., Gran., Е. №. Ехр., 46; Ost. Маг. D.
Ostg., Tab. VI, fig. 68 (Sur. splendida var? minima).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. E.Greenl., Е. of Greenl., East Arct. 5.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. DA
Jampylodiseus Ehr., 1841.
Campylodiscus angularis Greg., У. Н. Trt., 378, Tab. XXXV,
fig. 909.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Tropidoraphidee.
Hantzschia Grun., 1877.
Hantzschia Weyprechtii Grun., Fz. Js. Ld., 55, Tab. I, fig. 60.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ), Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Nitzschia (Hass., 1845), Grun., 1880.
Tryblionella Grun., 1880.
Nitzschia Tryblionella Hantsch var. levidensis W.Sm., У. H. Trt.
385, Tab. XV, fig. 494.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. E.Greenl. (in freshwater), East Arct. S.
Apiculate Grun., 1880.
Nitzschia marginulata Grun. var. genuina Grun. forma minuta?
Cl. & Grun., A.D., 72. Tab. nost. XIII, fig. 20.
Long. 35y. Lat. 74 & бр. Punct. carinal. 16 in 10%, striis deli-
catis, minime 23 in 10 м.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (5 sampl.).
This form may be the forma minuta (from Esquimault harbour) of Nitz.
marg. gen., of which Grunow has not given a figure.
Bilobate Grun., 1880.
Nitzschia bilobata W.Sm., V.H. Trt. 389, Tab. XV, fig. 512.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W.Greenl.
Nitzschia hybrida Grun., CI. & Grun. А. D., 79, V.H. Syn., Tab.
LX, figs. 4—5.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Insignes Grun., 1880.
Nitzschia insignis W.Sm., var. arctica Grun., Cl. & Grun. A. D.,
84; Ost. Mar. D. Ostg., Tab. VII, fig. 81.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl., East Arct. S.
218 Ernst OSTRUP.
Bacillaria Grun., 1880.
Nitzschia paradoxa (Gnsel.) Сгип. У. H. Trt. 392, Tab. XVI,
fig. 518.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr East Arct. 5.
Nitzschia socialis Greg. var. kariana Grun., Cl. & Grun. A. D.
85, Tab. VI, fig. 108.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
АСЕ Distr Hast АтсЁ 5:
Spathulate Grun., 1880.
Nitzschia angularis W.Sm. V.H. Trt. 393, Tab. XVI, fig. 521.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Nitzschia angularis var. borealis Grun., Cl.& Grun. A. D. 89,
Tab. V, fig. 99.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algz), Koldewey Isl. (Als).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Nitzschia distans Greg. V.H. Trt. 394, Tab. XXXIII, fig. 878.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Sigmoideæ Grun., 1880.
Nitzschia Brébissonii W. Sm., var. borealis Grun., CI. Вай. B.
21, Tab. I, figs. 28—32; Ost. Mar. D. Ostg., Tab. УП, fig. 80 (Nitz.
socialis septentrionalis).
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Davis Strait, E. of Greenl. East Arct. S.
Nitzschia lævissima Grun., Grun. Fz. Js. Ld., 54, Tab. I, figs.
65— 66.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Marg. of the Pack-Ice (4 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Е. of Greenl., East Arct. S:
Sigmata Grun., 1880.
Nitzschia scabra Cl., Cl. Vega Exp. 480, Tab. XXXVIII, fig. 73.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Nitzschia Sigma W.Sm. V.H. Trt. 396, Tab. XVI, fig. 531.
Loc. Off Cape Amelie (Aloe).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Nitzschia Sigma W.Sm., var robusta var. nova. Tab. nost XIII,
fig. 26.
Long. 270 и. [.21.10 и. Punct. carinal. 2—3 in 104, Str. 16—17
in 104, distinte punctatis, carena admodum excentrica. Striis care-
nam versus obliterantibus.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 219
Гос. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
I think this large Nitzschia may be related to the group belonging to
Nitz. Sigma, perhaps it comes nearest to №. Sigma valida.
Nitzschia Sigma W. Sm. var. Sigmatella Grun., V, H. Trt. 397,
Tab. XVI, fig. 535.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Not before recorded from Arctic Seas. According to Perag. (Diat. mar.
d. Fr. 290) “Repandu.”
Nitzschia Sigma W. Sm., var. valida Cl. & Grun. forma longis-
та. V.H.Syn., Tab. LXV, fig. 4.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 3 sampl.).
Arc Distr, №. Green.
Lineares Grun., 1880.
Nitzschia polaris Grun. Grun. Fz. Js. Ld., 54, Tab. I, figs. 62—63.
Loc. Off Germ. L. (Land-Ice), Marg. of the Pack-Ice (4 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Е. of Greenl., East Arct. $.
Lanceolate Grun., 1880.
Nitzschia lanceolata W.Sm., V.H. Trt. 400, Tab. XVII, fig. 548.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct Distr; E. of Greenl:
Arraphidee.
Synedra Ehr., 1831.
Synedra affinis Kütz., genuina. V.H. Trt. 314, Tab. X, fig. 430.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 3 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
Synedra affinis Kütz., acuminata Grun., У. H. Syn., Tab. XLI,
fig. 14.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Synedra affinis Kütz., fasciculata Kütz., У. H. Trt., Tab. X, fig. 433.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Danmarks Havn (Algz), Koldewey Isl.
(Als).
Synedra affinis Kütz,, hybrida Grun. forma elongata, V.H.Syn.,
Tab. XLI, fig.9B.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Synedra affinis Kütz., lancettula Grun., У. H. Syn., Tab. ХЛ,
fig. 28.
Loc. Off Cape Amelie (Algæ).
Synedra afflnis Kütz., parva Kütz., У. H. Trt., Tab. X, fig. 432.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Synedra affinis Kütz.? rupicola Grun., У. H. Syn., Tab. XLI,
fig. 27.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
220 ERNST ØSTRUP.
Synedra affinis Kütz., var. subtilis Grun., V.H. Syn., Tab. XLI,
fig. 18.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algee).
Synedra affinis Kütz., var. tabulata Kütz., Perag. Mar. D. d. Fr.,
Tab. LXXX, figs. 13 —14.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Synedra affinis Kütz. var. tabulata forma curta acuminata. У.
НЫ, Фев) Dabo xX, fig. 431 (був. atftabul).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Among the numerous scarcely discernable varieties of Synedra аЁ 1$
only the following are recorded from the Arctic Seas, viz.
Synedra aff. lancettula: W. Greenl.
— - parva: W. Greenl., East Arct. S.
— - tabul. curta acumin.: Greenl., East Arct. $.
Synedra investiens W.Sm. V.H. Trt., 313, Tab. X, fig. 425.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 5 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algee), Kolde-
wey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Synedra kamtschatica Grun. Øst. Маг. D. Ostg., 450, Tab. УП,
fig. 85.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 3 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ, 3 sampl.),
Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 3 sampl.), Marg. of the Pack-Ice (2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. $.
I have found this species to vary in length from 160 м to 260 p.
Fragilaria Lyngb., 1819.
Fragilaria Cylindrus Grun. Grun. Fz. Js. Ld., 55, Tab. II, fig. 13.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice (2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Fragilaria islandica Grun., var. hyperborea Cl., Cl. Vega Exp.,
484. Tab. nost XIII, fig. 25.
Long. 66 и. Lat. 7. Str. 11 in 102.
Valva lineare-lanceolata. Striis media in parte valve deficien-
tibus, ceterum axin apicalem non attingentibus itaqve aream api-
calem magnam relinqventibus.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice (2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. According to Cleve: “Greenl., Bessel’s Bay.”
This species must undoubtedly be Cleve’s Frag. isl. hyp. about which
he says (1. с.): “Area longer, striæ 12 in 0,01 mm.”
Fragilaria striatula Lyngb. V.H. Trt., 324, Tab. XXX, fig. 841.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Plagiogramma Grev., 1859.
Plagiogramma Gregorianum. Grev., У. H. Trt., 338, Tab. X,
fig. 390.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 221
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Liemophora Ag., 1827.
Licmophora gracilis (Ehr.) Grun., У. Н. Trt. 343, Tab. XXXI,
fig. 851.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl.
Licmophora paradoxa (Lyngb.) Ag., V.H. Trt. 344, Tab. XXXI,
fig. 855.
Loc. Off Cape Amelie (Algæ), Off Cape Bismarck (Algæ), Koldewey Isl.
(Algæ, 3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl.
Grammatophora Ehr., 1839.
Grammatophora arctica CI, Cl. Diat. f. Spb. 664; V.H. Syn.,
Tab. LIII bis, fig. 3.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey Isl.
(Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., Е. of Greenl. East Arct. $.
Grammatophora islandica Grun., Osterr. Diat. I, 418., У. H.
Syn., Tab. LIII, fig. 7.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ), off Cape Bismarck (Algæ), Koldewey Isl.
(Algæ, 3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Rhabdonema Kiitz., 1844.
Rhabdonema arcuatum (Ag.) Kütz., У. H. Trt. 360, Tab. XII,
fig. 487 a.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 3 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey
Is]. (Algae, 2 sampl.)
Arct. Distr. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Rhabdonema minutum Kütz., У. H. Trt. 361, Tab. XII, fig. 488 a.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Off Cape Bismarck
(Algæ) Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 4 sampl.)
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Centrice.
Rhizosolenia (Ehr. Brigtw.), Peragallo, 1892.
Rhizosolenia hebetata Bait. forma semispina (Hensen) Gran,
Gran. Nord. Plankt., 55, fig. 67 b.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct Distr, Hast Arct S.
222 ERNST ØSTRUP.
Chætoceros Ehr., 1844.
Chætoceros Diadema (Ehr.) Gran, Gran. Nord. Plankt., 84, fig.
102 b.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 3 sampl.), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Dist. W.Greenl., East Arct. 5.
Only spores found.
Chætoceros septentrionale Ost., Ost. Маг. D. Ostg., 457, Tab.
VII, fig. 88.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algz), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. W.Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Chætoceros sociale Laud., Gran. Nord. Plankt., 96, fig. 123.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Sea W. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Only spores found.
Stephanopyxis Ehr., 1844.
Stephanopyxis Turris (Grev., Ralfs) Grun. var. Cylindrus Grun.
forma inermis. Grun., Fz. Js. Ld. 35, Tab. V, figs. 10—13.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. Franz-Josef Land.
Thalassiosira Cl., 1872.
Thalassiosira decipiens (Grun.) Gran, Gran. nord. Plankt. 17,
fig. 10.
Loc. Off Germ. L. (Land-Ice), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Not before recorded from Arctic Seas. Several other records.
Thalassiosira gravida Cl., Gran. Nord. Plankt., 18, fig. 12.
Loc: Off Germ. L. (Land-Ice), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. W.Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Thalassiosira Nordenskiôldii CI. Gran. Nord. Plankt., 16, fig. 9.
Loc. Off Germ. L. (Land-Ice), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Melosira Ag., 1824.
Melosira Jürgensii Ag., V.H. Trt. 442, Tab. XVIII, fig. 612.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Hitherto recorded only from the northern coasts of Europe.
Melosira (mediterranea Grun. var?) gelida Cl., Cl. Vega Exp.,
490, Tab. XXXVIII, fig. 83.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 4 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. According to Cleve (1. с.) “Mushroom Point.”
Melosira hyperborea (Grun.) Gran, Gran. Fr. №. Exp., 52, У.Н.
Syn., Tab. LXXXV, figs. 3—4.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ), Pack-Ice, Marg. of the Pack-Ice (3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., Е. of Greenl., East Arct. 5.
*
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 293
Podosira Ehr.
Podosira hormoides Mont., Grun. Kasp. S. 130; У. Н. Syn.,
Tab. LXXXIV, fig. 3.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 3 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Off Cape
Bismarck (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Alga, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., Е. of Greenl.
Podosira hormoides Mont., var.? minima Grun., У. Н. 1. с.
figs. 7—8.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Off Cape Bismarck (Algæ), Koldewey Isl.
(Algæ).
According to Grunow (in the explanation of the Tab., quoted above, of
V. H. Syn.) “accompagnement le Podos. hormoides.”
Podosira Montagnei Kütz., Grun. Казр., S. 129, У. H. Syn.,
Tab. LXXXIV, figs. 11—12.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 3 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Off
Cape Bismarck (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ. 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Not before recorded from Arctic Seas. Several other
records.
Hyalodiseus Ehr., 1854.
Hyalodiscus scoticus (Kütz.) Grun., Cl. & Grun. А. D. 116, V.H.
Syn., Tab. LXXXIV, figs. 15—17.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Alga), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Hyalodiscus subtilis Baill. Cl. & Grun. A. D. 116; Perag. D.
mar. d. Er. Tab. CXIX, fig. 7.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Danmarks Havn (Algæ, 2 sampl.),
Off Cape Bismarck (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 4 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Biddulphia Gray., 1831.
Biddulphia arctica (Brightw.) Boyer, Brightw. Micr. Journ. IV,
250, Tab. IV, fig. 11 (Triceratium arcticum).
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ, 2 sampl.), Off Cape Bismarck (Algæ), Kolde-
wey Isl. (Algæ, 4 sampl!.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Biddulphia arctica forma Balena Ehr., A.S. Atl., Tab. CXXI,
figs. 5—6.
Loc. Off Cape Bismarck (Algz), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 4 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., East Arct. S.
Biddulphia aurita (Lyngb.) Breb., У. Н. Trt. 471, Tab. XX,
fig. 631.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
294 ERNST ØSTRUP.
Biddulphia suborbicularis Grun. var. arctica Ost., Ost. Kyst. D.
Г. Grenl., 343, Tab. II, fig. 14 (Bidd. suborb. var.).
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algae, 4 sampl.).
АСЕ. Distr 2 Greenl.
Biddulphia sp., Tab. nostr. XIII, fig. 23.
Striis 11 in 104, punctatis.
Valva biddulphoidea, cornubus satis brevibus, obtusis. Facie
connectivali ad apicem leniter triundulata spinamqve singulam longam
ostendente.
As 1 have only seen the valve in zone-view I cannot give this form as
a new species.
Actinocyclus Ehr., 1840.
Actinocyclus alienus Grun. var. arcticus Grun., Cl. Baff. B. 18,
Tab. II, figs. 11—12.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Aret. Distr. Davis Strait, East Arct. S.
Coscinodiseus Ehr., 1838.
Coscinodiscus concinnus W Sm., V.H. Trt. 531 (Cose. radiatus
маг. сопс.), Регас. О. шаг. а. Ег., Tab. EXV, fig) 12.
Гос. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W.Greenl., Е. of Greenl., East Arct. $.
Coscinodiscus radiatus Ehr., V. H. Trt. 530.; Perag. D. mar.
а. Ег., Tab. CXVII, fig. 3.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Alsæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algae), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. Greenl., E. of Greenl., East Arct. S.
Coscinodiscus subtilis Ehr. var.? glacialis Grun., Grun. Fz. Js. Ld.
56, Tab. Ш, fig. 27.
Loc. Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. Mouth of Yennissey (According to Grunow l.c.).
Coscinodiscus (lacustris Grun. var.?) septentrionalis Grun.,
Grun. Fz. Js Ld., 33, Tab. IV, fig. 33.
Loc. Marg. of the Ice.
Arct. Distr. М. Greenl., Е. of Greenl., East Arct. $.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 995
Distribution of the Marine Diatoms.
| Are lela lel
Viole | < | | Cola | <
= lee | Nitsa lig er
CRE | | ele
| | | |
| Achnanthes | | |
1 == 10857053. с собовос x | x | x | 33 | (Caloneis) brevis ........ IE ве | х
2 = — intermedia I x | x | 34 — kryophila ....... oe el Nox
| |
3 = — elliptica.. ||..| x Jodi |
4 | — — рагоша .. | x | x | en | Campy een É | |
5 — groenlandica .... | RAA Ex в ана ISIS | x
6 — hyperborea PERF | = | x | Chætoceros
| Neti rT | т ее. х ex
= oh = fi 37 | — septentrionale....| x x | x
7 | ый | = ee SSH БОЕ особое | x x
Amphipleura | | Coeconeis |
8 + HET ee "kb | x 39 | Se stat Я les: jeg
9 — — antarctica |..| 40| — — pacifia...\x|x к
P Il | 41 | — dirupta decipiens. | x
_Amphiprora | | | 5 3 z | ‘
BE р I | | 42 | — pinnata......... | Seller | x
i BZ ee = т å 1 си . | * | 43 | — pseudomarginata . |x | x x
2 ee ig * | 44| — Scutellum....... I| x x
| Amphora | 45 | — — ИИ: los x
12 — acutiuscula...... ae late al Sa т В NVE 4
13 — angusta......... I 5 47 — septentrionalis... |...) x
14 = costata обо сое | АХ | | (oseinodiseus |
15 О EE IR EX ee | 48| — concinnus .....-- EX
10 — Eunotia......... | X | x 49) | та хх |х |] x
17 | — granulata.... |.. I | 55 50 | — septentrionalis ...| x x | x
18) — levis levissima.. |.. Kl 51 | — 39555... | x
19 — lineolata ........ | | x | |
20, —zZmaeilentaten sae |... | AJ | Diploneis |
91 — margaritifera.... | x | |. al | — borealis ......…. | x x | x
99 ee In | a lhe eas 55 | — coffæiformis ..... | = RE
93 a № IN) g Sd — BRON SR бовоб с | а [ча №
24 ый — contigua.. |..| x | 55 — ПАЯ RER, | SE хх
95 Terrors se lee ao — littoralis arctica . | x | хх
96 | =: — inflata... | lee I 57 — — hyperborea | || x хх
Hho? | | 58 | == musceformis .... ||... så
| Aurieula | 59 | == И 4. soe. | x x x
27 ии а, ne. 60 | — Splendida ....... | ey) x
| 61| — subcincta........ | х х
‚ Biddulphia 62| — vacillans ........ N |
28 — “arctica... 5.555. 6. | | os |
a | Fragilaria |
29 | — — SBalena.. | x | x о :
| 1 NEN | 63 | — Cylindrus ....... | x |5
30 = ава ео. Я | < || ; À |
à . | 64 — islandica hyperb., | x ate
31 — suborbicularis var. legac |. : : |
| be) | 65 = striatula tunes | x lex
_Caloneis | | | Gomphonema | |
32 | — amphisb. fuscata. |. | ae x | 66) — exiguum arctic...| x | x x
[17120 | 3 |19 |23|12| 9 | 29
XLIII.
226 Ernst ØSTRUP.
+ 4 а [Lee | Е С
ях | les |”
< & || & | = | ICE <
> | та 5 | | 2 fri
= | ca]
67 | (Gonophonema) groenland. | x x | x | 102 | (Navicula) inflexa ....... REX
68 — kamschaticum ... | x x | х | 1031 — Камапа detersa .. хх
69 — septentrionale ... x 104) — — frigida ... PAS
70 — — angustum x 105. — kryok. subprot... | |5
106 —mollisaz 22.0. a
Grammatophora | Е | | a
Е 107 | — zgobtusarre EX |5
71 == асы са oo san on x ln Ex EX р |
79 ‘slandi 108 — peregrina ...:... | | х
2 —= 1апаса..... 5 EX x | 109. » — are Be 4
Gyrosigma 110 — punctulata....... x
73 — РНИИ ooo cscue x x |111] — JOMAM MORES Coo o dons ER x
| ДИО | — ramosissima.....
Hantschia 113 — ThOMDICA 2 =
74 | — Weyprechtii ..... ee et — rostelloides...... x ee
3 115 а хх
i Hy ne 116 — speetabilis.......
Е — Е ee or хх |x) | 117. = 5 Gohwestrintanee nie
PT ara ao ee ae ean Palais) ae бе | x | x
Liemophora 119; — subinflata ....... | x
Ty =| eraciiss bs dee: | x 120 — superba......... SE
78 | =) para dome | x | x 121 an — subacuta .. EX
122 —stransitanseae x | x
Melosira | 123 — trigonocephala... Pe || OS
79 — hyperborea...... x | x | x | | 124 — validar. were | x |x
80 — Jürgensii........ [== 125 | — Wankareme..... alex
81 — mediterr. gelida.. | x 126 == VITE sake x | x
| 127 — Zostereti ... х
Navicula Er и
82 — ammophila...... 108 Nitschia ;
83 ее. & | |123 — angularis... gage x | x
84 — bahusiensis...... how x | x | 129 er a ALS So x
85 = 2 Bolleanar | x x [130 — № о IE Sul
86 Pe ea x 131 — Brébiss. borealis . хх
87| — cancellata....... x | x x | 132 = Ee РНЕ ies NR
88 = = Gregor x | x | 133. a hybridı | lee
89 ie on eee | | x | 134 — insignis arctica.. | X
90 = — subapicul. . | х ..|х | 135 = er ан ви
91 — digitoradiata..... Lx | x | x | x [136 aa Schar ic hes =
99 __ D Gene le |e 137 — paradoxa........ Бо [EX
93 — directa genuina..|| x | x x | 138 = En ae) Filz
94 A ОН — x 139 — Sigma. о x
Online: 6) =" lata. el: 1001 0: а
96 = лето: | Их 141 ak apy Dalida, 2. en
97 — distans Eee | x x | x [142 = ЕН ЕЙ | FAP
98 — fusif. ostrearia... . | 143 в Konz alle É
99 — slacialis...::..... lx |..| x | x [344 ge ty Devic en sites i 2
100 es | x Pinnularia |
101 — Стех Ле... EX x | 145 —epistnatagae age | --
|22 | 13 | 17 24 [23 20 31
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 227
|; | Wes | gs = n
| O | to 2 | < 19 | 5 S <
ыы и
ee | SI
| | Stepbanopyxis | | |
146 (Pinnularia) qvadratarea. | x | x | x | x [162 — urris' var... >>. | | x
or — — о ler X EX |Surirella | | |
— — dubia.... x ae
SER ||| oar asi: KEE 163 | — Oestrupii........ lhe x
149 — — gibbosa....|..|..| x |x | i | AVE
| | | | = |
150. — Stuxbergii....... Ix |..| x | x ‚Synedra |
| 164 — affinis genuina...||..|..
Plagiogramma | | 165 — — acuminata.|..|.. |
151 — Gregoriapum | x |..|...|.x [166 — = jascieulata|..t..|.. | --
| | 167 = — по“... |. |...
Pleurosigma | | 168| — — lancelettula| x |..|.. |
152 m0 elongatuın EPS ES _ — parva..... X Ne Х
р | | | — — rupicola...|.. |
Podosira | | A ee | |
3 р 171 | — — subtilis....
153 — hormoides....... EMEA Se eo ae
ER | | 172 = — tabulata ..
154 — О ва Eee oe =
à | | 173 — — curta acum| x |x |..| x
155 — Montagnei....... VER es ehe, : = | |
| | | 174 | — investiens ....... SCOR ESS REX
| | | | 2 | |
| Rhabdonæma 175 | — kamtschatica .... | x RE x
nil | | | . .
156; — areuatum ....... Ex Ex ER Ex Thalassiosira
157 | — minutum........ I x x 1176 — decipiens........ .
i | | | 77 | — gravida.......... Их
Rhizosolenia | we 178| — Nordenskiôldii ...| x | x | x | x
158; — hebet. semisp. ...|..|..|..|х | i
| | | Trachyneis (es |
'Rhoieosphenia oan 179 — asp. genuina..... | =|
159 —= (baie! op erg | x ee ao — vulgaris nee ee
| 181| — — intermedia..| x | x | x | x
Stauroneis | | re Hany
: i I an PE Tropidoneis
160 | — pellucida constr. . || _. ха | |
161 — perpusilla....... | x | x D DURE MURS ke LSA RL WEN
| nel en = | 10) 6) 4 10
а ие о 112 | |
652 Total... 1103| 66 | 62 123
In the above list Ihave given an account of the distribution of
the individual species within different districts of the Arctic Seas.
I have in all 182 marine forms, of which 24 have until now
been unrecorded from the Arctic Seas. Hence 158 (86.8 °/o), there-
fore by far the greater part, have previously been recorded from these
districts. If we now investigate the more detailed distribution, the
result will be as follows: —
(1) From: W. Greenl.. are known’... ......... 103 (56.6 °/o)
— E. Greenl. + Е. of Greenl. are known 120 (66.0 °/o)
= East Arct. 5. are known ......... 125 (68.7 °/o)
17%
228
ERNST OSTRUP.
(2) From W. Greenl. only, and from nowhere else
in the Arctic districts
Е. Greenl. + Е. of Greenl. only, and from
nowhere else in the Aretic districts. .
East Arct. S. only, and from nowhere
else in the Arctic districts
(Зо Ежо М. Green = EE Greenle tte 7.
W. Greenl. — Eastward
Eastward on the whole
15 (8.2 9/0)
19 (10.4 9/0)
53 (29.1 0/0)
90 (49.5 0/0)
149 (81.9 0/0)
These three percentage tables show, that there 1$ а rise in the
percentages as regards the eastern districts, and therefore the Diatoms
found in the material at hand indicate an easterly tendency as
regards their Arctic distribution.
As the material examined consists partly of Alga-samples, partly
of ice-samples, Г have in the following table given an account of
the occurrence of the genera in these samples.
53 5.8 Be: |
153 aol | 93| Е | & №Е
Predominant in 5 = Predominant in S г | In both Alga- and = = | Я Е |< 3
the Alga-samples | 5 a | the ice-samples | = 5 ice-samples ос- | & = | < В B=} 3
are the genera Е я are the genera Е я | саг the genera Е я = 2
n n n SNORE
1,3 o 55 89| Я |= As
25 |Z IZ “S|
1 rAchnanthes7 017.621 7. |) Actinocyclus.. 21 1) .1,Galoneise re. 3| 2 LATE
2 | Amphipleura...| 2 | 2 | Amphiprora ...| 2 | 2 |Chætoceros .... 3| 1 10.149189
3 Amphora ...... 15 | 3 | Rhizosolenia...| 1 | 8|Coscinodiscus..| 4] 2 | 2 |
4 |Auricula....... 1 | 4 | Stauroneis ..... | 2| 4 Diploneis...... 11| 9| 2|
5 Biddulphia ....| 4 | 5 | Stephanopyxis . 1 | 5 Fragilaria...... 3| 1 2
6 | Campylodiseus . 1 | 6 | Thalassiosira...| 3 | 6 Gomphonema .. Se a} |} al
7 | Соссопе 9 mal) бо are 1| | 1
8 | Grammatophora | 2 10 8 | Hantzschia..... RE ar pee
9 | Hyalodiscus.... 2 9 kMelosin ate er: a 2 1 | ne
10 Licmophora....| 2 10 | Navicula....... 46 | 25 | 18 | 3
11 Plagiogramma.. 1 11 Nitzschia ...... 17| 14 | 3 |
12 | Pleurosigna....| 1 12 | Pinnularia..... 6)|| | |
13| Роаозга,...... 3 AE
14 | Rhabdonema...| 2 103 | SOE OSS ©
15 | Rhoicospenia...| 1 |
16 | Surirella....... 1 |
17 | Synedra ....... 12 |
18 Trachyneis..... 3 | |
19 Tropidoneis.... et | |
| 69 |
| |
Diatoms from North-East Greenland.
229
The above table shows that the following is the distribution
in the samples of the 37 genera which occur — 19 (51.4 °/o) in Alga-
and ice-samples, 12 (32.4°/0) both in Alga- and ice-samples, and 6
(16.2 °/o) in ice-samples.
With regard to the species and varieties we find the proportions
to be as follows: —
In the Alga-samples are found ............. 129 (70.9 °/o)
Inzihestce samplessare found. FE 45 (24.7 °Io)
Both in the Alga- and ice-samples are found 8 (4.4 °/о)
All the figures were drawn magnified 1000 times by the author,
and then photographically reduced to a magnification of 660.
Biswl-sNayicula@rostelloideszsp.2novarer ses ee Page 201
— 2. — jamalinensis Cl., var. subcircularis var. nova............. 206
— 3. Trachyneis aspera (Ehr.), Cl., var. intermedia Grun. forma robusta.. 204
— 4. Navicula peregrina Ehr., var.? oblonga var. nova.................. 207
= & = тета А. Scho var arctica, VANOVA а see itr 206
— 6. — subcuneata,7sp.“NOVar ое ее 207
= 7 RE? SOM NO NaNO Cob NOV ee Tr 208
— 8. — Val da CHL ce Скан Полтаве 208
— 9. — Eyra®Ehr var warclicaSvatr NOV EE Ce 209
— 10. —- scopulorum) Вгер., уаг. агсйсауаг пома eee eae 203
LIS PAMphora giganten о. 210
— 12. — virgatas ASP: OVE, see Sen Beten ee Het 210
13 Cocconeisipinnata Gress yarzazckicar хат поуа и. 213
— 14. = OLNAta Се. 214
о Achnanthes hyper Dore Gr un EEE Eee 214
== 1G, Аир нота умер AIS D UONEL EE EC CL CCE 212
=. Сосо. 214
=] ACHNANtNES ноша ESP поа reir rye etna rains REESE 215
—= 165 Энен ПЗС Sop Нам с особовосо обо бообоо Ce 216
— 20. Nitzschia marginulata Grun., var. genuina Grun. forma minuta? ... 217
— 21 AChnanthes septentMmOnalis, SPNOVA EE EE EC M rer 215
— 22 — — var. subcapitata var. поуа nen 215
— 28} ОЕ Gon obo occanmbeced вооон Eee 224
— 21 AChnanthes saebilissiimas SPs, DOVE 214
— 25. Fragilaria islandica Grun., var. hyperborea Cl. .................... 220
— 26. Nitzschia Sigma, W. Sm., var. robusta var. nova .....:............ 218
je
Sty
=
la ¥
.
2
А,
Pr
x
KN:
FRESHWATER-DIATOMS.
РЕМ ВТ
Diraphidee.
Caloneis С1., 1894.
Caloneis Clevei (Lgst:) CI. Cl. Syn., I, 51; Lgst., Spb., Tab. I,
fig.10 (Nav. Clevei).
Loc. Vester Elv.
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl., Spb., J. M.
Caloneis fasciata (Lgst.) Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 50; V.H.Syn., Tab. XII,
fig. 34 (Nav. fasciata).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
АСЕ Distr Spb2 М:
In a sample from Thermometerfjeld I found a form agreeing with
Navicula fonticola Grun (У H.Syn., Tab. XII, fig. 32) which Cleve (1. с.) refers
to Caloneis fasciata.
Caloneis lepidula (Grun.) Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 50; У.Н. Trt., Tab. V,
fig. 236 (Nav. lepid.).
Гос. Vester Elv.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions.
Caloneis septentrionalis sp. nova. Tab. nost. XIV, fig. 1.
Long. 70 u. Lat. 84. Str. 14 in 104, delicatissime punctatis.
Valva lineari, apicibus rotundatis. Raphe area satis lata hyalina
cincta. Striis parallelis, sub apices convergentibus media in valva
deficientibus ibiqve fasciam transapicalem angustam relinqventibus.
Linea inframarginali difficulter perspicienda. Nodulis terminalibus
figuram sicut flammulæ præbentibus.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Vester Ву.
Possibly this species, in spite of its coarse striation, may be most nearly
allied to the group belonging to Caloneis fasciata.
Caloneis Silicula (Ehr.) Cl. var. alpina Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 51;
Lgst., Spb., Tab. I, fig. 6 (Nav. limosa).
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Vester Elv (2 sampl.).
Aret. Distr Е. Greenl., Spb., J. М.
234 ERNST OSTRUP.
Caloneis Silicula var. ventricosa (Ehr.) Donk., Cl. Syn., I, 52;
VÆR iri; Tab; У, fig: 209: (Nay, ventric?)
Loc. Vester Ву.
Avec te Dis tr Е. JS Ed:
Neidium Pfitz., 1871.
.Neidium affine Ehr. var. genuina Cl. forma minor, Cl. Syn., I,
68; Lgst., Spb., Tab. I, flg. 9 (Nav. bisulcata turgidula).
Рос Vester Ely;
Act рр.
Neidium affine Ehr. var longiceps Greg., Greg. М. J., IV, Tab. I,
fig. 27 (Nav. longic.).
Loc. Vester Elv.
Aret. Distr, М. Green];
Neidium bisulcatum Lgst., Cl. Syn., I, 68; Lgst., Spb., Tab. I,
fig. 18 (Nav. bisulc.).
Loc Vester Ely:
Arct. Distr. У. Greenl., Е. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld., Spb., J. М.
Neidium decoratum Brun, Brun, Jan M. & Est-Groenl., 18,
Tab. II, figs. 6—7.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Vester Elv (2 sampl.).
Act Distr Е. Green:
Neidium Iridis (Ehr.) Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 69; У. H. Trt., Tab. V,
fig. 212 (Nav. Ir.).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. Е. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld.
Diploneis Ehr., 1840.
Diploneis oculata (Bréb.) Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 92; У. Н. Syn., Tab IX,
fig. 10 (Nav. ocul.).
Loc. Off Cape Amelie (Algæ).
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Other record, France.
Diploneis Puella (Schum?) Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 92; У. H. Trt., Tab. IV,
fig. 158 (Nav. ellipt. minima).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Aret Distr. М. Greenk. Spb:
Frustulia Ag., 1824.
Frustulia rhomboides Ehr. var. leplocephala Ost., Ost. Ferskv.
Dat. Osts 257, Lab. Г fig: 1.
Loc. Vester ШУ (2 sampl.).
Aret. Distr. E. Green.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 935
Navicule merolejæ Cl., 1894.
Navicula bacilliformis Grun, Cl. Syn., I, 131; У. Н. Trt., Tab.
XXVII, fig. 774.
Koc Nostoc.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Navicula Heufleriana Grun., Cl. Syn., I, 130; У. Н. Syn., Tab. IV,
fig. la.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arce Distr Fz-Js. Ld:
Navicula mutica Кам. forma Cohnii Hilse, Cl. Syn., I, 129; У.
Е: Тре. Tab: 4. fig. 167 (Мах. па).
Loc. Lille Snenæs, Danmarks Havn, Vester Elv.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Е. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld., Spb., J. M.
Navicula mutica forma Geppertiana Bleisch, У. Н. Syn., Tab. X,
figs. 18—19.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Navicula mutica forma ventricosa Kütz., У. H. Trt., Tab. IV,
fig. 171 (Nav. ventric.).
Loc. Lille Snenæs (2 sampl.), Vester-Elv, Thermometerfjeld.
Асов В. Greenl 75 Ed ум
Navicula nivalis Ehr., Cl. Syn., Tab. I, 130; У. H. Syn., Tab. X,
fig. 21 (Nav. qvinqvenodis Grun.).
Loc. Thermometerfjeld.
СЕ г. MOY Ag 5: а:
Navicula Rotzana Rabh., Cl. Syn., I, 128; Lgst., Spb., Tab. I,
fig. 13 (Stauroneis minutissima).
Loc. Lille Snenæs.
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl., Spb., В. El; Г.М.
Navicula Seminulum Grun., Cl. Syn., I, 128; V.H.Trt., Tab.V,
fig. 228.
Loc. Thermometerfjeld.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Spb.
Naviculæ entolejæ CI, 1884.
Navicula contenta Grun., Cl. Syn., I, 132; У. H. Trt., Tab. У,
fig. 239.
Loc. Dove Bugt, Vester Elv.
Arct. Distr. Е. Greenl.
Naviculæ decipientes Grun., 1880.
Navicula gibbula Cl., Cl. Syn., I, 140; Lgst., Spb., Tab. I, fig. 7a
(Nav. gibberula).
236 Ernst Озтвор.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Lille Snenæs (2 sampl.), Vester Elv (2 sampl.), Thermo-
meterfjeld.
Aret Distr. E. Greenl. Fz. Js) Ld., Spb., J. M.
Navicula gibbula var. capitata Lgst., Lgst. 1. c., fig. 7a!, Tab.
nost. XIV, fig. 2.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Nostoc.
Arct. Distr: В. Greenl., Spb.
This form, of which I have given a figure, differs in the striation, which
in the main species is radiate, but here is radiate only in the middle and
parallel towards the apices. Lagerstedt has not shown the striation in his
fig. 7a‘, but with regard to the outline and general appearance his figure
agrees very well with the present form. Therefore I have no doubt that the
present form is identical with Nav. gibb. capitata Lgst.
Navicula Lagerstedtii CI. Cl. Syn., I, 141; Lgst., Spb., Tab. II,
fig. 12 (Navicula sp.).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr ЕВ. Greenl, Spb:
Naviculæ microstigmaticæ CI, 1894.
Stauroneis anceps Ehr., Cl. Syn., I, 147; У. H. Trt., Tab. I,
figs. 55—57 (including also St. anc. linearis and St. anc. amphicephala).
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Dove Bugt, Lille Snenæs, Vester Ех (3 samples).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl., Spb., J. M.
Stauroneis dilatata Ehr. forma minor Tab. nost XIV, fig. 3.
Long. 37 и. Lat. 84. Striis subtilissimis.
Valva elliptice-lanceolata, apicibus capitatis. Raphe area hyalina,
mediam valvam versus patescente, cincta. Stauro lato margines non
attingente. Striis radiantibus. Nodulis terminalibus inconspicuis.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. The main species: Europe, Siberia.
Stauroneis javanica Grun., var. oblonga Ost., Ost., Ferskv.
D. f. Oster 260, Tab. I, fig. 4.
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.), Lille Snenæs.
Arc Distr (Green:
Stauroneis javanica Grun., var. truncata Ost., Ost. 1.с. fig. 5.
Loc. Stormkap, Vester Elv.
Arct. Distr E. Greenl.
Stauroneis obtusa Lgst., Cl. Syn., I, 149; Lgst., Spb., Tab. I,
fig. 11.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. Fz. Js. Ld., Spb.
Stauroneis parvula Grun., Cl. Syn., I, 149; О. Müll., Riesengeb.,
Tab. III, fig. 33.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Lille Snenæs.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Other record, Europe.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 237
Stauroneis Phoenicenteron Ehr., var. amphilepta Ehr., Cl. Syn.,
I, 149; Herib., Diat. d’Auv;, Tab. Ш. fig. 18.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Vester Ely (2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld.
In a sample from Lille Snenæs I found a Stauroneis which corresponds
very well with the form in my “Danske Diatomeer,” Tab. II, fig. 36, which I
consider intermediate between Staur. anceps and Staur. Phyllodes Ehr.
Cymbella Ag., 1830.
Cymbella æqvalis W.Sm., Cl. Syn., I, 170; V.H.Syn., Tab. Ш,
fig. Та.
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 затру.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Е. Greenl.
Cymbella affinis Kütz., var. tumida Lgst., Cl. Syn., I, 171 (ad
Cymb. aff.?). Lgst., Spb., 43, Tab. II, fig. 19.
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.), Nostoc.
Ay cL Distr В Greenl, Spb:
Cymbella angustata W. Sm., Cl. Syn, I, 161; W.Sm., Syn., Tab.
XVII, fig. 156; Lgst., Spb., Tab. II, fig. 10 (Nav. inzeqvilatera).
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.), Vester Elv.
Art. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl., Spb.
Cymbella Botellus Lgst., Cl. Syn., I, 172; Lgst., Spb., Tab. II,
fig. 22 (Cymb. variabilis var. Bot.).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl., Spb.
Cymbella Cesatii Rabh., Cl. Syne 21602) Vane Tri Tabak
fig.143 (Nav. Ces.).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl.
Cymbella gracilis Rabh., Cl. Syn., I, 169; У. Н. Trt., Tab. XXVIII,
fig. 791 bis, с (Encyonema lunatum).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl., Spb.
Cymbella hebridica Grun., Cl. Syn., I, 169; CI, Diat. Finl.,
Tab. II, figs. 16—17 (Encyonema hebr.).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
_ Cymbella heteropleura Ehr. var. minor CI, Cl. Syn., I, 167;
Lgst., Spb., Tab. II, fig. 17 (Cymb. Ehrenb. var.).
Loc. Hvalrosodde (4 sampl.), Vester Ву.
Arct. Distr: Е. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ed. Spb.
Cymbella leptoceros Ehr., Cl. Syn., I, 162; У H. Syn., Tab. II,
fig. 18.
238 ERNST ØSTRUP.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Vester Elv.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Cymbella naviculiformis Auersw., Cl. Syn., I, 166; Lgst., Spb.,
Tab. II, fig. 18 (Cymb. anglica).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl., Spb., B. El.
Cymbella septentrionalis sp. nova. Tab. nost. XIV, fig. 4.
Long. 32—56 и. Lat. 7—8y. Str. 14 in 10 р, delicatissime trans-
verse lineatis.
Valva fere cymbiformi, apicibus marginem dorsalem versus
paululum recurvatis. Margine ventrali subundulata. Raphe leniter
arcuata, area hyalina distincta, media in valva in aream centralem
longinam dilatata, cincta. Nodulis terminalibus marginem dorsalem
versus recurvatis.
Гос. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.).
Very nearly linear specimens of this species sometimes occur.
Cymbella sinuata Greg., Cl. Syn., I, 170; У. H. Trt., Tab. XXV,
fig. 699 (Cymb. abnormis).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Cymbella stauroneiformis Lgst., Cl. Syn., I, 165; Lgst., Spb.,
Dab Г 65. 15.
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.), Vester Elv.
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld., Spb.
Cymbella ventricosa Kütz., Cl. Syn., I, 168; V. H. Syn., Tab. III,
fig. 15 (second fig. Encyon. ventr.).
Loc. Vester Elv.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld., Spb.
Cymbella ventricosa var. ovata Grun., У. Н. Trt., Tab. I, fig. 48
(Encyon. cæspit. lata).
Loc. Vester ВУ.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Cymbella ventricosa var. semicircularis Lgst., Lgst., Spb.,
Tab. II, fig. 20 (Cymb. affinis semicirc.).
Loc. Dove Bust.
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl., Spb.
This variety, which Cleve (Syn. I, 168) places under Cymb. ventricosa
seems to be so peculiar in appearance that it certainly may be considered
a distinct variety.
In a sample labelled “Nostoc” I found a Cymbella, which is figured in
У. H., Syn., Tab. III, fig. 18 as a “Forme moyenne entre ГЕпсуопета cespito-
sum et ГЕпсуопета Lunula.”
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 239
Gomphonema Ag., 1824.
Gomphonema boreale sp. nova. Tab. nost. II, fig. 5.
Long. 60 м. Lat. 5,54. Str. 8 in 104, punctatis; punct. 10—11
in 104.
Valva clavata, apicibus rotundatis. Raphe area hyalina satis
lata cincta. Striis subradiantibus, media in valva deficientibus
Плауе fasciam transapicalem latam relinqventibus. Nodulis termi-
nalibus inconspicuis. Punctum unilaterale non perspicere potui.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ). Only a single specimen met with.
Judging from its appearance as a whole this form may be a freshwater-
species, although it occurred in a sample of marine Alge.
Naviculæ minuscule Cl., 1895.
Navicula Atomus Neegeli var. circularis Ost., Ost., Kossog., 84,
Tab. I, fig. 10.
вос. Vester Ely,
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Other record, Kossogol.
Navicula lucidula Grun., Cl. Syn., II, 4; У. H. Syn., Tab. XIV,
fig. 40.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Other records, Denmark,
Kossogol.
Anomoeoneis Pfitz., 1871.
Anomoeoneis exilis (Kütz.), Grun., Cl. Syn., II, 8; У. H. Trt.,
Tab. IV, fig. 198 (Nav. exil.).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl.
Anomoeoneis Zellensis Grun., Cl. Syn., II, 7; У. Н. Syn., Tab.
ХИ, fig. 14 (Nav. Zell.).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl.
Anomoeoneis Zellensis var. linearis Ost., var. nova. Tab. XIV,
fig. 6.
Long. 22 и. Lat. 4 и. Striis inconspicuis.
Valva lineari, apicibus leniter attenuatis. Raphe area hyalina
angusta media in valva in aream transapicalem parvam rotundatam
dilatata, cincta. Structura valvæ sicut scabrosa, an elevationes
apicales laterales ostendente? Nodulis terminalibus inconspicuis.
Гос. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.).
This small form recalls in its structure that of Anomoeon. Zell., but in
outline it recalls Navicula difficilis Grun. (У. Н. Syn., Tab. XII, fig. 17) a species
which perhaps may belong to the genus Anomoeoneis.
240 ERNST ØSTRUP.
Naviculæ heterostichæ Cl., 1895.
Navicula cocconeiformis Greg., Cl. Syn., II, 9; V. H. Trt., Tab.
XXVII, fig. 779.
Loc. Vester Elv (5 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. У. Greenl., Е. Greenl., Spb., B. EL, J. М.
Naviculæ lineolatæ CI, 1895.
Navicula anglica Ralfs., Cl. Syn., II, 22; V. H. Trt., Tab. III,
fig. 136.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Navicula anglica Ralfs forma elongata. Tab. nost. XIV, fig. 7.
Long. 28 м. Lat. 8y. Str. 11 in 104, transverse lineatis.
Valva elliptica, apicibus rostratis. Raphe area hyalina, mediam
valvam versus gradatim patescente, cincta. Striis radiantibus, media
in valva alternatim longis abbreviatisqve. Nodulis terminalibus
inconspicuis.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
This form may be considered a somewhat narrow Nav. anglica.
Navicula capitata CI: Cl. Diat. f. Fz. Js. Ld., 5, fig. 2.
Loc. Vester Elv,
АСЕ Distr 82. 35. cd:
Navicula cincta Ehr., Cl. Syn., II, 16; У. Н. Trt., Tab. Ш, fig. 105.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Ас DST 14, ds. а:
Navicula dicephala (Ehr.?) W. Sm., Cl. Syn., II, 21; У. Н. Trt.,
Tab. III, fig. 138.
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.), Vester Elv.
AGC aD sities > №
Navicula falaisensis Grun., Cl. Syn., II, 21; V. H. Trt, Tab. V,
fig. 232.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Vester Elv.
АссЕ Distr, We Green:
Navicula Gastrum Ehr., Cl. Syn.; 11,.22; У. Н. Tri, Tab. III,
fig. 134.
Loc. Off Germ. L. (Land-Ice), Marg. of the Pack-Ice.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. of Greenl.
Navicula gracilis Ehr. var. obesa var. nova. Tab. nost XIV, fig. 8.
Long. 33 и. Lat. 94. Str. 11 in 104 transverse lineatis.
Valva elongate-elliptica apicibus rotundatis. Raphe area angusta
hyalina, media in valva in aream transapicalem dilatata, cincta.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 941
Striis radiantibus, sub apices leniter convergentibus, media in valva
spatiatis.
Loc. Dove Bust.
I think this form may be a variety of Nav. gracilis, perhaps most nearly
allied to Nav. grac. var. schizonemoides figured in У. H. Syn., Tab. XV, fig. 37
(the second figure).
Navicula lanceolata (Ag.?) Kitz, Cl. Syn., II, 21; У. Н. Trt.,
Tab. III, fig. 139.
Loc. Off Cape Amelie (Algæ), Hvalrosodde, Vester Му.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Navicula lanceolata var. tenella A. S., A. S. Atl., Tab. XLVII,
figs. 45—46.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Other records, Sweden, Loka
(GH 1. ce):
Navicula Placentula Ehr., Cl. Syn., IL 23; У. Н. Trt., Tab. Ш,
fig. 135 (Nav. Gastrum Placentul.).
Loc. Off Cape Amelie (Algæ), Marg. of the Pack-Ice (2 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Yenissey.
Navicula radiosa Kütz., Cl. Syn., II, 17; У. Н. Trt., Tab. Ш,
fig. 112.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl. Е. Greenk, Spb., В. El.
Navicula rhyncocephala Kitz. Cl. Syn. II, 15; У. Н. Trt.,
Tab. III, fig. 119.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ, 2 sampl.).
Aree Distr: В. El
Navicula viridula Kütz. var. slesvicensis Grun., Cl. Syn., II, 15;
VoH.-Prt., Tab: fil, fig: 118.
Loc. Dove Bugt.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl.
Navicula sp. Tab. nost XIV, fig. 9.
Long. 21 м. Lat. 5,4. Striis inconspicuis.
Valva lanceolata apicibus capitatis. Raphe distincta.
Loc. Dove Bust.
This small form shows only very few, if any, distinct characters. I
think I have seen indications of a striation which, at least in the middle of
the valve, seemed to me to be radiate, but Iam not quite certain; therefore I
do not feel justified in recording it as a new species.
Navicule punctate С1., 1895.
Navicula pusilla W.Sm. var. capitata var. nova. Tab. nost. XIV,
fig. 10.
XLIII. 19
249 ERNST OSTRUP.
Long. 45 и. Lat. 22 и. Str. 10—11 in 104, sub apices densioribus,
distincte punctatis.
Valva sub-orbiculari, apices plane-capitatos versus valde atte-
nuata. Raphe area hyalina distincta, media in parte valve in aream
centralem rotundatam dilatata, cincta. Striis radiantibus, media in
valva alternatim longis abbreviatisqve. Nodulis terminalibus sum-
mis in apicibus situatis.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Pinnularia (Ehr.), 1843.
Gracillime Cl., 1895.
Pinnularia leptosoma Grun., Cl. Syn., II, 74; У. Н. Syn., Tab.
IT 229:
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Vester Elv.
Aret Distr gb. Greenle hz. Js: Ed, J. М.
Capitate Cl., 1895.
Pinnularia appendiculata Ag., Cl. Syn., II, 75; V.H.Trt., Tab. II,
fig. 93 (Nav. append.).
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Lille Snenæs.
Arct. Distr. W. Ggeenl.
Pinnularia interrupta W. Sm., forma stauroneiformis, Cl. Syn.,
Ш, 76; V. H. Trt.) Tab2 II, fig-97 (Nav. mesolepta Termes):
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Act Distros, Green.
Pinnularia mesolepta Ehr. var. angusta Cl., Cl. Syn., II, 76;
А. 5. Atl., Tab. XLV, fig. 62 (Nav. gracillima).
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Nostoc.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Pinnularia microstauron Ehr., Cl..Syn., II, 77; V.H.Syn., Tab.
VI, fig. 9 (Nav. bicapitata hybrida).
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Е. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld., J. М.
Pinnularia subcapitata Greg., Cl. Syn., П, 75; А. 5. Atl., Tab.
XLV, fig. 65 (Nav. Hilseana).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. У. Greenl., Е. of Greenl., Spb.
Divergentes Cl., 1895.
Pinnularia Brébissonii Kitz. var. diminuta H. У. H., Cl. Syn.,
II, 78; У. Н. Trt., Tab. II, fig. 84 (Nav. Breb. dimin.)
Loc. Lille Snenæs, Vester Elv.
COU, ID Or de WE
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 943
Pinnularia Brébissonii var. linearis О. Müll. forma curta, O.
Mull BRiesengeb., 25. Lab: Ш) fig. 3:
Loc. Vester Elv.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Other record, Riesengebirge.
Pinnularia divergens W. Sm. var. linearis var. nova. Tab. nost.
XIV, fig. 11.
Long. 52 и. Lat. 114. Str. 8 in 10x.
Valva lineari apicibus rotundatis. Raphe area hyalina satis lata,
media in valva in fasciam transapicalem dilatata, cincta. Incrassa-
tionibus marginalibus fasciæ evidentibus. Striis radiantibus sub
apices convergentibus. Fissuris terminalibus figuram ‘commatis”
præbentibus.
Loc. Vester Ну, Thermometerfjeld.
Г have placed this form under Pinn. divergens because of the marginal
incrassations of the fascia.
Pinnularia divergentissima Grun., Cl. Syn., II. 77; У. H. Syn.,
Tab. VI, fig. 32.
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.), Vester Ву, Thermometerfjeld.
Aret Distr. №7. Green SES Green Е^.75. Ld. Spk, B. ЕТ М.
Pinnularia Legumen Ehr., Cl. Syn., II, 78; У. H. Trt., Tab. II,
fig. 98 (Nav. Legum.).
Loc. Vester Elv.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
The present form is a forma parva; long. 54 д.
Distantes Cl., 1895.
Pinnularia borealis, Ehr., Cl. Syn), II, 80; У. Hy Trt... Tab. II,
По. 77 (Мах. Бог.).
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.), Dove Bugt, Stormbugt, Stormkap, Vester
Ely (2 sampl.), Thermometerfjeld.
Aret. Distr. W. Greenl. E. Greenl., Fz: Js. Ed, Spb В. El, ТМ.
Pinnularia lata Bréb., Cl. Syn., II, 81; V.H.Trt., Tab.II, fig. 76
(Nav. lata).
Loc. Stormkap, Thermometerfjeld.
дес. Distr Е. Greenl.. Fz. SS Ed. Ji М.
Tabellarieæ Cl., 1895.
Pinnularia mesogongyla Ehr., Cl. Syn., II, 84; Cl., Diat. Finl.,
Нар. №, tig. 11.
Гос. Hvalrosodde, Vester Elv (3 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. Е. Greenl.
Pinnularia stauroptera Grun. var. interrupta Cl. forma parva,
Cl. Syn., II, 83; V.H.Trt., Tab. IL, fig. 86 (Nav. staur. parva).
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.), Lille Snenæs.
Aret Distr, E-Greenl., Ez. Js. Ed:
1195
244 ERNST OSTRUP.
Brevistriate Cl., 1895.
Pinnularia parva (Ehr.) Greg. var. Lagerstedtii Cl., Cl. Syn., II,
87, Lgst.; Spb., Tab. II, fig. 4 (Nav. parvula)
Loc. Dove Bugt, Lille Snenæs.
Arct Distr’ Spb: В. El.
Amphora Ehr., 1840.
Subgen. Amphora Cl., 1895.
Amphora ovalis Kütz var. libyca Ehr., Cl. Syn., II, 104; У. H.
Trt., Tab. I, fig. 17 (Amph. oval. affinis).
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algze), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Е. of Greenl., Spb.
Monoraphidee.
Cocconeis (Ehr., 1835) Grun., 1868.
Subg. Cocconeis Cl., 1895 pro gen.
Cocconeis Pediculus Ehr., CI. Syn., II, 169; A.S. Atl., Tab. CXCII,
fig. 61.
Loc. Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Cocconeis Placentula Ehr. var. euglypta, Cl. Syn., II, 170; V. H.
Syn., Tab. XXX, figs. 33—34.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
ATC Le Disitre Ws 95. id:
Subg. Eucocconeis Cl., 1895 pro gen.
Cocconeis flexella Кам. Cl. Syn., II, 179; V.H.Trt., Tab. VIII,
fig. 322 (Achnantidium flexell.).
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Lille Snenæs.
Arcu Distr. В Greent., Sph, В. EL
Cocconeis flexella Kiitz. var. intermedia var. nova. Tab. nost XIV,
fig. 12. ;
Long. 38 и. Lat. 144. Str. media in valva 22 in 104, apices
versus densioribus. |
Epitheca: Area centrali subqvadrata, satis magna.
Hypotheca: Raphe sigmoidea, area angusta hyalina, media in
parte valve in aream centralem acuminatam dilatata, cincta.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Especially on account of the subquadrate area of the epitheca I think .
this form may be intermediate between Coccon. flex. and Coccon. maxima
forma minor. As I have not seen the epitheca and the hypotheca separated,
but only in situ I have indicated in my figure of the hypotheca the ex-
tent of the central area of the epitheca.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 945
Cocconeis maxima (A. Cl.) Ost. forma minor, cf. A. CI, Lul.
Lappm., 24, Tab. I, figs. 22—23 (Achnanthid. maxim. A. Cl.).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
A. Cleve states that the length of Achnanthidium maximum is 0.065 mm
(an epitheca) and 0.075 mm (a hypotheca) and she says (1. с.) “Though not
seen together, the two valves described above, found in the same sample,
certainly belong to the same species.”
On an average my specimens are somewhat smaller (Length 48—56 м,
only one specimen measures 60), but otherwise they agree well with A.
Cleve’s figures.
As I have seen both valves in situ I can affirm that they are corres-
ponding valves.
Cocconeis maxima var. lanceolata var. nova. Tab. nost XIV,
fig. 14.
Long. 74 и. Lat. 22. Str., media in valva, 16—17 in 10 р, apices
versus densioribus.
Valva rhombice-lanceolata, apicibus rotundatis. Epitheca: Area
centrali qvadrata magna. Hypotheca: Raphe sigmoidea, area hyalina
angustissima, media in parte valve in aream parvam subcircularem
dilatata, cincta. Striis radiantibus. Nodulis terminalibus, paululum
a margine remotis, in spatio laterali nudo situatis.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
As in the figure of Сосс. flex. interm., so also here, I have indicated
the extent of the central area of the epitheca as I have only seen both
valves in situ.
Cocconeis minuta Cl., Cl. Syn., II, 179; Lgst., Spb., Tab. XIV.
fig. 16 (Cocc. Thwaitesii var. В arctica).
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Nostoc.
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl.; Spb.
Achnanthes Bory, 1822.
Subg. Microneis Cl. 1995 pro gen.
Achnanthes linearis W. Sm., Cl. Syn., II, 188; V.H.Trt., Tab.
УТ, Во. 335.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Achnanthes microcephala Kütz., Cl. Syn., II, 188; У. H. Trt.,
Tab. VIII, fig. 332.
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.).
ArctaDwstr i, Green:
Subg. Achnanthidium Cl., 1895 pro gen.
Achnanthes coarctata Bréb., Cl. Syn., II, 192; Lgst., Spb.
Tab. I, fig. 16 (Achnanthid. coarct. elineata).
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.), Dove Bust.
Arct. Distr .Е. Greenl., Spb., J. М
246 ERNST Озтвор.
Brachyraphidee.
Eunotia Ehr., 1837.
Eunotia Arcus Ehr.; V.H,Trt., 299, Tab. IX, fig. 362.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Vester Elv.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl., Spb.
Eunotia Arcus var. bidens Grun.; У. H. Trt., 1.с., fig. 365.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl.
Eunotia Arcus var. hybrida; У.Н. Syn., Tab. XXXIV, fig. 4.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
АСЕ. Distr ME Greenl.
Eunotia Arcus var. minor Grun.; У. Н. Trt., 1. с., fig. 363.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. “Cum specie hine inde” (De
Mont УП, р. 79):
Eunotia Arcus var. uncinata Grun.; V. H. Trt., 299, Tab. IX,
fig. 364.
Loc. Vester Elv, Basisk&ret, Nostoc.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl.
Eunotia Diodon Ehr.; У. H. Trt., 303, Tab. XXX, figs. 829—830.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl.,E. Greenl., Spb.
Eunotia divisa Hérib. var. arctica var. nova. Tab. nost. XIV,
fig. 13, cf. Hérib., Diat. foss. d'Auv., III, 1905, 35, Tab. XIV, fig. 4.
Long. 444. Lat. Тм. Str. 15—17 in 10% sub apices, ceterum
irregulariter distributis.
Valva margine dorsali curvata margine ventrali recta, apicibus
rotundatis, marginem ventralem versus leniter incurvatis.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ). Only a single specimen found.
The present variety differs from the main species especially by its
irregularly arranged striæ. Otherwise it agrees well with the figure by Héri-
baud referred to above, but is somewhat smaller. It may perhaps be con-
sidered as only an abnormal specimen of the main species, which is a fos-
sil recorded from "Dépot de Fraisse-Bas” (France).
Eunotia Faba (Ehr.) Grun.? var..densestriata Ost., Øst., Danske
Diat., Tab. У, fig. 107.
Loc. Vester Elv.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Other record, Denmark.
The present form is somewhat larger (18) than the Danish specimens
(14 м) and — as far as I can see — is also somewhat more coarsely striated
(16 striz in 104, as compared with 20 in 107); but as the striæ can be seen
only with great difficulty, they may after all be identical.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 247
Eunotia gracilis (Ehr.) Rabh.; У. Н. Trt., 300, Tab. IX, fig. 368.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. У. Greenl., Е. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld., Spb., В. El, J. M.
Eunotia lunaris (Ehr.) Grun.; У. H. Trt., 303, Tab. IX, fig. 384.
Loc. Lille Snenes.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Е. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld., J. М.
Eunotia lunaris (Ehr.) var. subarcuata (Næg.) Grun.; V.H. Trt.,
304, Tab. IX, fig. 385.
Loc. Vester Elv.
Arct. Distr +. М.
Eunotia major (W.Sm.) Rabh.; У. H. Trt., 300, Tab. IX, fig. 366.
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.), Vester Elv (3 sampl.).
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Eunotia paludosa Grun., Grun., Osterr. Diat. (1862), 336; V.H.
Syn., Tab. XXXIV, fig. 9.
ioe Vester Ely:
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Spb.
Eunotia parallela Ehr., А. CI, Lul. Lappm., 28; У. H Syn.,
Tab. XXXIV, fig. 16 (Eun. par. forma angustior).
Loc. Vester Elv.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld.. Spb.
Eunotia parallela Ehr. var. arcuata var. nova. Tab. nost. XIV,
fig. 15.
Long. (sc: chord arcus) 40 м. Lat. 44. Long. sagittæ arcus
102. Str. 14 in 10%, transverse lineatis.
Valva arcuata, margine dorsali sub apices paululum declinante.
Loc. Lille Snenes.
Eunotia pectinalis (Kitz) Rabh. forma elongata; V.H. Trt., 301,
aba fig. See
Loc. Lille Snenæs.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Other record, Lule Lapp-
mark.
Eunotia pectinalis (Kütz.) var. minor (Kütz.) Rabh., A. Cl., Lul.
Lappm. 31; V.H.Syn., Tab. ХАХШ, 855. 20—21.
Loc. Vester Elv.
ое IDSs, 189: UGE UGE
Eunotia prærupta Ehr. V.H.Trt., 302, Tab. IX, fig. 376.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl.
Eunotia prerupta var. bidens Grun.; У. H. Trt. |. с. fig. 379.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Е. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld., J. М.
248 Ernst ØSTRUP.
Eunotia prerupta var. bigibba Kitz. V.H.Trt. 1.с., fig. 380.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Lille Snenzes, Vester Elv.
АСЕ Distr 3. Greenl., Fz, Js. ld:
Eunotia prærupta var. curta Grun. У. Н. Trt. 1.с., fig. 377.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Danmarks Havn, Vester Elv.
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., Е. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld.
Eunotia prærupta var. inflata Grun. У. H. Trt. 1. с., fig. 378.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Other records unknown to me.
Eunotia prærupta var. laticeps Grun., А. Cl., Lul. Lappm., 34;
VAE 5уп., Tab. XXXIV, fig. 25 (forma саба)
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl).
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld., J. M.
Eunotia prærupta var. Monodon Ost., Ost., Ferskv. D. f. Ostg.,
219, habe ls tise 11.
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.).
Аве Distr SE Green
Eunotia robusta Ralfs var. Papilio Grun. У. Н. Syn., Tab.
XXXIII, fig. 8.
Loc. Hvalrosodde (3 sampl.), Stormkap, Vester Elv (3 sampl.), Thermo-
meterfjeld.
MTC Ds tr WAGreenl ES Green Тб. lds Spb:
Eunotia septentrionalis Øst., Øst., Ferskv. D. f. Østg., 274,
Tab. I, fig. 10.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Dove Bugt, Lille Snenæs, Vester Elv.
АТС Юл В Green Ея. Js: Ed:
Eunotia Triodon Ehr. У. Н. Trt, 303, Tab. IX, fig. 387.
Loc. Stormkap.
Are Distr AW Greenl Es Green Spb:
Eschatoraphidee.
Surirella Turp., 1827.
Surirella ovalis Bréb. var. minuta Breb. У. H. Trt., 373,
Tab. XIII, fig. 588.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Are Distr. В Greenl В. El:
Surirella ovalis var. ovata Kitz. У. Н. Trt. 1. с., fig. 587.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ).
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl.
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 249
Tropidoraphidee.
Hantzschia Grun., 1877.
Hantzschia amphioxys (Ehr.) Grun., V. H. Trt., 381, Tab. XV,
fig. 483 b.
Loc. Lille Snenæs (2 sampl.), Thermometerfjeld.
Aree, Distr NWeGreenl$rEGreenlFz:)s Ed Spb. В. В J.M.
Hantzschia amphioxys (Ehr.) var. leptocephala Øst., Ost.,
Ferskv. d. f. Ostg., 276, Tab. I, fig. 8.
Loc. Hvalrosodde (3 sampl.), Lille Snenæs, Vester Elv, Thermometerfjeld.
Arct. Distr. E. Greenl.
Hantzschia amphioxys (Ehr.) var. robusta var. nova. Tab.
nost. XIV, fig. 17.
Long. 176 и. Lat. 15x. Punct. carinal. 4—5 in Wy. Str. 15 in
10 м, punctatis.
Valva hantzschoidea, apicibus rostratis. Punctis carinalibus
paululum in valvam prolongatis. Nodulo centrali eximie conspicuo.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Nitzschia (Hass., 1845, W.Sm.), Grun., 1880.
Dubie.
Nitzschia Nathorstii Brun, Brun, J. М. & Е. Greenl., 9, Tab. II,
fig. 5.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Lille Snenæs.
NRC DIS TE INA dS bol, de МС
Nitzschia thermalis (Kütz.) Grun. var. intermedia Grun. У. H.
Trt; 389, Tab. XV, fig. 510.
Loc. Off Cape Amelie (Algæ).
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Other record, Ага. Liég.
У ЕЕ ©.)
Grunowia.
Nitzschia Denticula Grun., V. H. Trt., 390, Tab. 15, fig. 514.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Av cts Distr. W. Green]. Е. Green Spb:
Obtuse.
Nitzschia subcapitata sp. nova. Tab. nost. XIV, fig. 18.
Long. 94 м. Lat. 4 и. Punct. carinal. 8 in 10y. Str. delicatissimis.
Valva fere lineari, apices subcapitatos versus unilateraliter atte-
nuata. Nodulo centrali obscuro, an prasente ?
рос. Vester EIN:
i)
Or
>
ERNST OSTRUP.
Lanceolate Grun.
Nitzschia fonticola Grun. var.? Tab. nost. XIV, fig. 16.
Long. 13y. Lat. 4». Punctis carinalibus 11—12 in 10y. Striis
inconspicuis. Valva lanceolata, carena valde excentrica.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
This small form may be allied to Nitz. fontic., V. H. Syn., Tab. LXIX,
figs. 16—17.
Nitzschia Hantzschiana Rabh. Cl. & Grun. A. D., 99; V.H.Syn.,
Tab. LXIX, figs. 1—2.
Гос. Vester Ех:
NE Cts Stir Е JS Ба. Spb:
Nitzschia Palea (Kütz) W.Sm. var. minuta Bleisch., Cl. & Grun.
AD 96. \. В Syn, Dab, ВАХ fis. 23.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
ATCt. Distr. Green Ей. JS Га 9 Me
Nitzschia Palea var. ienuirostris Grun.; V. H. Trt., 402, Tab. XVII,
fig. 556 (the second figure).
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Are. Юл. В ВЕ JM
Arraphidee.
Ceratoneis Ehr., 1840.
Ceratoneis Arcus Kiitz.; V. H. Trt., 306, Tab. X, fig. 401.
Loc. Lille Snenæs.
Arch Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl., Fz. Js. Ld., Spb., B. El.
Synedra Ehr, 1831.
Synedra radians (Kütz.) Grun.; У. Н. Trt., 312, Tab. X, fig. 423.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Synedra Ulna (Nitsch.) Ehr.?
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
I have only seen a few fragments, so that an exact determination is
impossible,
Synedra Vaucheriz Kütz. var. septentrionalis var. nova. Tab.
nost. XIV, fig. 19.
Long. 23—30y. Lat. 3,6 м. Str. 16 in 104, an punctatis?
Valva lineari apicibus capitatis subcapitatisve. Striis parallelis,
altera in parte media valva deficientibus ibiqve areolam unilateralem
relinqventibus.
Loc. Vester Elv (4 sampl.), Lille Snenæs.
As this small species occurs in the samples both free and also attached
to the narrow branches of alge, but never in the form of long bands, I
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 251
think it may be a Synedra, not а Fragilaria. A. Cleve (Beitr. z. Fl. 4. Bar.
Ins., 17, fig. 10) describes and figures а Synedra Vaucheria Kitz. var. per-
minula Grun., which may be a smaller and non-capitate form of the present
species.
Fragilaria Lyngb.
Fragilaria construens (Ehr.) Grun.; V.H. Trt., 325, Tab. XI,
fig. 450.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Aret, Distr, WeGreenl:, В. El.
Fragilaria (mutabilis (W. Sm.) Grun. var.?) elliptica Schumann
de Toni Syll., 687 (Frag. ellipt.); V. H. Syn., Tab. XLV, fig. 15.
Loc. Hvalrosodde.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions.
Diatoma De Cand., 1805.
Diatoma hiemale (Lyngb.) Kütz. var. mesodon Kitz. У. H.
Trt, 350, Tab. XI, fig. 471.
Loc. Off Cape Amélie (Algæ), Danmarks Havn (Algæ), Koldewey Isl. (Algæ).
Aree Distr.» W.:Greenl.
Tabellaria Ehr., 1839.
Tabellaria Носсиюза (Roth.) Kitz. У. H. Trt., 357, Tab. XI,
fig. 478.
Loc. Hvalrosodde, Dove Bugt, Vester Elv (7 sampl.).
Arct. Distr. W. Greenl., E. Greenl., Spb., B. El., J. M.
Centricæ:
Melosira Ag.
Melosira varians Ag. У. Н. Trt., Tab. XVIII, fig. 611.
Loc. Danmarks Havn.
Not before recorded from Arctic regions. Several other records.
Cyclotella Kütz., 1833.
Cyclotella antiqva W.Sm. У. H. Trt., 446, Tab. XXII, fig. 652.
Loc. Hvalrosodde (2 sampl.).
Aret-Distr. W. Greenl. Е. Greenl:, Spb:
Stephanodiseus (Ehr., 1845) Grun., 1880.
Stephanodiscus Astrea (Ehr.) Grun. var. spinulosus Grun.,
Gun Ez. Js. ГА. 49, Tabs У.) fig. 2.
Loc. Danmarks Havn (Algæ).
АСЕ Distr, Е. Greenl В 75а.
952 ERNST OSTRUP.
Distribution of the Freshwater Diatoms.
I UE) CU
RAGE SE SE
ERE | | | | |
Achnanthes | | Diatoma |
1 Е coarctata ee |х|..|х х| 33 — hiemale mesodon. | |
Е В | | alk Е 8 |
3} — microcephala .... |. | x|..|..|--]--| | Diploneis |
| ТЫ Зе оса atten elle |
Amphora | ASS РЕ | Ех |
4 RR ovalistliby care а ee | |
N | | Eunotia | |
| Anomoeoneis | 36 RAT CUS RS denses | |x
5 | = 2.9 EN ee er x | x |. | 37 = ее Il |
6 — zellensis......... x | x Kalle 38 ый — hybrida ... | ls (ee
- g æn 39 — — HE alles DR
>| Calonels ; |_| A = — uneinata .. И
7 — VASE ss koen хх x A ann We
ее UE Er RENE re и
9 = Пера 2: ISS BEES |= Pr FE a о |
10 == КИНА door ele EN | Fe
я | | 44,5 — — subarcuata. OS
11 — — ventricosa. | x | | 45 | er | |
|
Ceratoneis | 46 — paludosa........ I. |. | %
1 АЕ ее жх ххх 47] — parallela ........ ER
| | | 48 | — pectinalis elong... ‚| |: É
| Cocconeis | | | 149 — — minor. [ee [ix
13 Нее acute: I ee IR |. .|50 —— |Preruptaa. Jee | х |. р
14 | — WEN on ooo ne хх 5 = -— bidens..... | x | x | х х
15 — Pediculus........ rales .| 52 — — bigibba.... x | x
16 —- Placentul. euglypt. | ..|..| x | 53 | = — CLT ere 63%
| 54 — — inflata..... elle fs
Cyelotella | 55 — — latic. curta. | x | x =
17 =e) antique" xx |..|x|. 56 = — monodon.. х |.. |
i И | 157 — septentrionalis... Ba RX |. alls
| Cymbella Е | | | | 58 —Triodon 2. Ix|..|x
т О. | 59 — robusta Papilio .. Ix |x| x]...
19 ааа x|x|..|x| | | |
20 — affinis tumida ... | x | Fragilaria |
2 | — Sr a à | 4 | : | 60| — construens....... | |x
| ААС | I 61 — mutabilis elliptica ||..|..|..|..|..|--
23 | — gracilis lunata... | x |x Jo % |. .|-- | |
24| — hebridica........ I ee are а lida |
7 — heteropleur. minor | . .| x | x | x | «|: "| 62 — rhomboid. leptoc.. |. . xa
26 — leptoceros ....... = ol Pestle PIE |
27 | — naviculiformis ... | хх | XS |153 | Hantzschia | |
28 + SIUMAtA HE. PAPA EE JE '..| 63 — арм | [x|x|x|x|x
29| — stauroneiformis .. |..|x|x|x| |. 64 = — leptocephala Reales.
30 | — ventricosa....... Зе |: | | | |
Je ovata...... |....| | Melosir: | |
32 — — semicircular. | (1х | 65. — MVATIANS.--.- menn вы ва [6 о hs
11/22 6 18 3 | 15)19/11) 9 | 3) 6
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 953
р UC MEME
I rm |, == я ==
ре еее
мая lod | ag [A [od |
| el || Е |
| | |
‚ Navicula | mn 101 | (Nitzschia) Palea minula. |... xx... x
GG) —: an glid KEE SES: los ee — fenuir..... | | x |
67 — Atomus circul....|..|..|..|--|..|--1103 — thermal. intens...|..|..|..|..|..|..
68 РО И обв | crete eles pee 8 | |
69 — çapitata mate FEE | x | Pinnularia i al | |
70 — ее... JE Lx De LE ns = PRO REMAN ENE a 3 |< ав |=
71! — cocconeiformis... | x | x ххх US a Dr BG Seale | в
75 о ee ote eae: | = 106 | — Bon dimin. | нех
73 — dicephala........ I | leg 107 | = NINEGATIS| CATÉE lies EE I IR
74 — gibbula. .- ØS: Belle a 108 EDIT SS alia
75) Hi. — capitata...||..|x|..| x 109 — interrupta slaur.. | x |. IE
76 — Lagerstedtii......|.. ||. |х IND m Ele ana yet ЕВ Ks
77 В а. I 111 == LesUMmeNns IS RE de
78, Сана 2 Il 112 | — leptosoma....... | x |X x
79 — Janceolata ©". | | 113 — mesogongyla..... | x |
80 = — tenella....| | 114 — mesoleptaangusta)..|. foe] ns
81 НН к ays 115 — microstauron .... || x|x|x|..|..|x
82. — шанса Е Cohnii.. | x|x\x\|x\_.\x 116 | — parva Lagersledtü\..|.. хх |
83 — — Goeppertiana||..|..|..|..|..|. 181874; — staur. interr.parva)..|x|x|..|..|
84 а | т subcapitata .... Xe CIE
85 — MANS saccccosnc de | x | | Stauroneis |
86| — Heufleriana......|..|..|x|..ı 119 асе Ию
87 = Placentula er. I--|--|--| -|-.|-.1120 | — javanica oblonga. | Beal aes
88) — radiosa.......... | x|x х|х|..| 121 = — truncata ..||..|x|..|..
89 — rhyncocephala ... |..|..|..|..|х|..|122 — obtusa cea: er l..\..Ix|x!
Ее: ХЗ ратуша о. I а
91 — Seminulumis ee | xl. |x | I..1124 | — Phoenic. amphil.. | x eal
92 — viridula slesvicens. x | x | | | En
| Stephanodiseus | |
Neidium 125 Sy Astreea арии. 22x or Hae.
ВАН gen. minor. || «<i. be 04 Surirella |
EVA — longiceps..| x|..|..|. |..|.-|126 | ovalis minuta....||..| x | Via
95| — bisulcatum ...... | хх хх х | 157 | u — ovata ..... | | | | |
96 — decoratum.......| Е | |
SME leidis 2.2...) ..\x|x!..\..|[..| |[Synedra | |
| | | 128 "== yadians +5. La |
| Nitzschia latte ana | | |
98 == Denticulay.2-4. .- Е Tabellaria |
99 — Hantzschiana.... [хх | : 12° — flocculosa........ | x ххх
100) — Nathorstii.......|..|..|x|..|..|x | 81810] 7 610
| | 10/15)11)12) 4) 8] | Total... | 4474 38 46 16 28
The above list shows, that the total number of freshwater forms
is 128, and of these there were previously known
from W. Green
E. Greenl
land
and
44 (34.1 lo)
74 (57.4 °lo)
38 (29.5 %)
ERNST OSTRUP.
fromsSpitzbereen wre... 4
= Beerenaknland т. 1
ey DAM Mayen zer 2
hot stecordede Arne ae. 2
hence previously known from the
Arctic regions
From W. Greenl. only, and from no
other Arctic locality
From the localities east of E. Greenl.,
taken as a whole
11 (8.5 %o).
76 (58.9 %).
This proves that the freshwater-Diatom-flora from East Green-
land which we are here considering obviously originates from the
east, and as regards the eastern localities, more particularly from
Spitzbergen.
To this may be added that five of the forms which have been
found, viz.
Cymbella affinis tumida
Botellus
Navicula gibbula capitata and
Lagerstedtii,
ventricosa semicircularis
have hitherto — outside Greenland — been found only in Spitz-
bergen; and a similar origin is indicated for some of the Desmi-
diaceæ found by Dr. Е. BORGESEN (cf. Е. Börgesen: Freshw. Algæ, р. 73).
Fig.
Ц.
2
3.
4
5
6.
Caloneis septentrionalis sp. nova........
Navicula gibbula Cl., var. capitata Lgst...........
Stauroneis dilatata Ehr. forma minor.............
Cymbella septentrionalis sp. nova
Gomphonema boreale sp. nova
Anomoeoneis zellensis Grun. var. linearis var. nova
Navicula anglica Ralfs forma elongata............
gracilis Ehr. var. obesa var. nova
pusilla W. Sm. var. capitata var. nova
Pinnularia divergens var. linearis var. nova
Cocconeis flexella Kitz var. intermedia var. nova
Eunotia divisa Herib. var. arctica var. nova.......
Cocconeis maxima А. Cl. var. lanceolata var. nova
Eunotia parellela Ehr. var. arcuata var nova ...
Nitzschiatfonticola Grune ware ee sae es oe eee
Hantzschia amphioxys (Ehr.) Grun. var. robusta var. nova
Nitzschia subcapitata sp. nova
Synedra Vaucheriz Kitz. var. septentrionalis var. nova
D D nw we
oO
>
> D
oe
> ©
Diatoms from North-East Greenland. 255
List of the Literature which has been consulted.
BRIGHTWELL, Т., On the genus Triceratium. Q. J. М. $., I, London, 1853.
Brun, J., Diat. d'eau douce de Vile Jan Mayen & 4. 1. cöte Est du Groenl. — Bih. t.
К. Sv. Vet.-Ak. Handl., В 21, III, Nr. 2, Stockholm 1901.
CLEVE, ÅSTRID, On recent Freshwater Diatoms from Lule-Lappmark in Sweden —
Bih. t. K. Sv. Vet.-Akad. Handl., B 21, III. Nr. 2, Stockholm, 1890.
CLEVE, ÅSTRID, Beitråge zur Flora der Båren Insel, I, Diatoméen. — Bih. t. K. Sv. Vet.-
Akad. Handl., B 26, III, Nr. 10, Stockholm, 1900.
CLEVE, P. T., Diatomaceer från Spetsbergen. — Öfvers. af K. Sv. Vet.-Akad. Förhandl.,
1867, Nr. 10, Stockholm, 1868.
CLEVE, P. T., On Diatoms from the Arctic Sea. — Bih. +. К. Sv. Vet.-Akad. Handl.,
B 1, Nr. 13, Stockholm, 1873.
CLEVE, P. T., Diatoms, collected during the Expedition of the Vega, Vega Exp. Vet.
Arb., В Ш, Stockholm, 1883.
CLEVE, P. T., The Diatoms of Finland, Acta Soc. р. Flora et Fauna Fennica, VIII,
Nr. 2, Helsingfors, 1891.
CLEVE, P. T., Synopsis of the Naviculoid Diatoms, I—II. — К. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl.,
B 26, Nr. 2 and B 27, Nr. 3, Stockholm, 1894—95. |
CLEVE, P. T., Diatoms from Baffin Bay and Davis Strait. — В. t. К. Sv. Vet.-Akad.
Handl., B 22, III, Nr. 4, Stockholm, 1896.
CLEVE, P. T., & Grunov, A., Beiträge zur Kenntniss der Arctischen Diatomeen. — К.
бу. Vet.-Akad. Handl., В 17, Nr. 2, Stockholm, 1880.
DE Toni, J., Bapt. Sylloge Bacillariearum omnium husque cognitarum, I—III, Patavii
MDCCCXLI— MDCCCXCIV.
Gran, H. H., Diatomacez from the Ice-floes and Plankton of the Arctic Ocean.
Gran, H. H., Nordisches Plankton. Diatomeen. Kiel und Leipzig, 1905.
GREGORY, W., On the Post-Testiary lacustrine Sand .... from Glenshira. — Trans.
Micr. Soc., III-- IV, London, 1855, 1857.
GREGORY, W., New forms of marine Diatomacez found in the Firth of Clyde and in
Loch Fine. — Trans. Roy. Soc. of Edinb., XXI, IV, Edinburgh, MDCCCLVII.
GruNow, A., Die österreichischen Diatomaceen. — Verh. Zool.-Bot. Ges. Wien, В XII,
Wien, 1862.
GRUNOW, A., Algen und Diatomeen aus dem Kaspischen Meere. SCHNEIDER, O., Natur-
wissensch. Beitr. z. Kenntn. d. Kaukasuslander, Dresden, 1878.
Grunow, A., Beiträge zur Kenntniss der fossilen Diatomeen Oesterreich-Ungarns.
Beitr. 2. Palæont. Oest.-Ung. u. 4. Orient, В II, Wien, 1882.
Grunow, A., Die Diatomeen von Franz Josephs Land. Denksch. Akad. Wissen. Wien,
В ХГУШ, Wien, 1884.
HERIBAUD, JOSEPH, Les Diatomées d’Auvergne. Clermont-Ferrand & Paris, 1893.
HERIBAUD, JOSEPH, Les Diatomées fossiles d'Auvergne, I—III, Paris, 1902, 1903, 1908.
LAGERSTEDT, N. G. W., Sötvattens-Diatomaceer fran Spetsbergen och Beeren-Eiland. —
Bih. +. К. Sv. Vet.-Akad. Handl., Ш, Nr. 15, Stockholm, 1873.
MÜLLER, Отто, Baccillariales aus den Hochseen des Riesengebirges. Forsch. ber. а. 4.
Biol. Stat. z. Plön, Teil 6.
PERAGALLO, H., Monographie du genre Pleurosigma et des genres alliés, Le Diatomiste,
I, 1890—93.
PERAGALLO, H. & M., Diatomées marines de France et des districts voisins. Grez-zur-
Loing, 1897— 1908.
SCHMIDT, ADOLPH, Atlas der Diatomaceenkunde. Aschersleben, 1874, later Leipzig,
continued as yet.
256 Ernst OstrRup. Diatoms from North-East Greenland.
0
SCHMIDT, ADOLPH, Die in den Grundproben der Nordseefahrt enthaltenen Diatomaceen,
II, Jahresber. 4. Komm. 2. Unters. 4. deut. Meere in Kiel, Berlin, 1874.
Van Неовск, HENRI, Synopsis des Diatomées de Belgique, I—IV, Anvers, 1880—85.
Van HEURCK, HENRI, Traité des Diatomées, Anvers, 1899.
Юзтвор, E., Marine Diatoméer fra Østgrønland. — Medd. om Gronl., XVIII, Koben-
havn, 1895.
Озтвор, E., Ferskvands Diatoméer fra Østgrønland. — Ibid.. XV, København, 1897.
Озтвоь, E., Kyst-Diatomeer fra Grønland. — Ibid.. XV, København, 1897.
Юзтвор, E., Danske Diatoméjord Aflejringer af N. Hartz og Е. Østrup, В, Diatoméerne
af Е. Østrup, Danm. geol. Unders., II, В. 9, København, 1899.
Юзтвор, E., Beiträge zur Kenntniss der Diatomeenflora des Kossogolbeckens in der
nordwestlichen Mongolei, Hedvigia, В XLVIII, 1908.
26—9— 1910.
Tas. XIII
SLIIL Nr. 10. [Ostrup]
MEDD. OM GRONL.
am, agli
А =
«Tim, =
us
ADELE) Ч
«a in In
nau
Sa И,
SUSIE RII ever ers
S Fi
many TSHR NTT OTST TTT rey
A7
TLE WN
ON YW
77777) И Wy My RU
WALL) ML м RAS
7 Ti ene =
a
tO,
4e
É
wean opie 2000 774,
veuve In
=
РАЕН 272)
PA Mm Yu | >
WW ton et
> Bil on dn
| rm
D
[©
~
В AZ
C7 SNS ss’
17
S
AU WU UG kaa N
в А ЗИ Отит,
ТОНА И А
NR
eS <=>
>
==. eS
< 177 a
ZN
in, À
“een
Aut. del.
fy
XI.
MARINE PLANKTON
FROM
THE EAST-GREENLAND SEA
(W. OF 6° W. LONG. AND N. OF 73° 30’ N. LAT.)
COLLECTED DURING THE “DANMARK EXPEDITION” 1906—1908
I. LIST OF DIATOMS AND FLAGELLATES
BY
©. Н. ОБВЕМЕЕЕВ
LOO
XLIII. 20
a
Ÿ
Fo <
IN TRO DU CLOWN
uring the outward and homeward voyages of the Danmark-
Expedition in 1906 and 1908 to and from N. E. Greenland the
botanical collector Mr. A. LUNDAGER has procured a large series of
samples af surface plankton by means of using tow-nets with
fine-meshed silk-gauze (Millergauze No. 20). Also during the stay in
Danmarks Havn (Denmark Harbour), Germania Land, 76°46’ N. Lat.,
18°43' W. Long., some collections were made.
Of late years several expeditions have crossed the Greenland
Sea and brought home collections of plankton. Therefore it was
not likely that the plankton samples of the Danmark Expedition
should give much new, especially not with regard to the sam-
ples taken in the open Greenland Sea east and south of the pack-
ice (drift-ice). The main interest must lie in the samples from the
pack-ice itself and from the coastal water inside it, and further
in the samples from Danmarks Havn. I have consequently limited
my examination to the samples taken in these regions and have not
wasted my time by examining the other samples which would have
given only a feeble and chance knowledge of the plankton of the
open Greenland Sea, «based, as it must have been, upon material
from two crossings alone and both in July—August.
It would have been of the highest value if the Expedition had taken
samples at regular intervals, e. g. fortnightly, during the whole time
of the stay in Danmarks Havn from August 1906 to July 1908, as
we know very little of the seasonal changes in arctic coast-plankton.
The only source is VANHOFFEN’S investigations from Karajak Fjord
in West Greenland, ca, 70° N. Lat., (Drygalski Expedition 1892—93),
and it is easily understood that a comparison with those would
have been much appropriate. Unfortunately the collection from
Danmarks Науп is very incomplete; it consists of some samples from
the time between June 15!" and September 10!" 1907 and a couple
from July 21“ 1908 when the steamer left the harbour. There is
here lost a chance which, perhaps, will not come again for years.
20°
260 С. Н. OSTENFELD.
As to the samples collected before and after the stay in Dan-
marks Havn, we have (1°) a fair collection from August 1906 and
July 1908 taken in the more or less ice-filled water along the coast
from off Koldewey Island (ca. 76°30' N. Lat.) to ca. 78° М. Lat., and
further (2°) an interesting collection from the traversing of the pack-
ice in both years (July—August). During the homeward voyage in
July i908 the samples from the coastal water and the pack-ice were
taken with intervals of only one or a few hours, and a preliminary
examination soon showed that it was not necessary to work out
more than a selected number. In the following list I have enume-
rated the species of Diatoms and Flagellates, in another paper
Mr. Ove PAULSEN will treat of the Peridinians. With regard to
the Zooplankton the collecting method with small open conical nets
of fine-meshed silk-gauze is not well adapted to the capture of the
larger organisms, metazoa; other samples taken by the Expedition
with larger coarse-meshed nets and at different depths give better
results; they will form the subject of papers by zoologists; it will,
therefore, not be necessary to undertake a closer examination of the
surface samples in this respect. On the other hand, the Protozoa,
at least the Tintinnodea, require fine-meshed nets for catching,
and in a little separate paper I shall enumerate the species of pro-
tozoa found in the samples.
Finally Mr. PAULSEN and I in common will write on the surface
plankton samples as a whole describing the general character of the
plankton, the supposed origin of the organisms, etc. under compari-
son with the hydrographical conditions and using the papers publi-
shed by other planktologists on the plankton of the East Green-
land Sea. я
The list here given contains the names of all the plankton
Diatoms and Flagellates determined from the samples, with quota-
tions of the first description, of the more important synonyms and
figures, as well as of the general works (e. g. Gran’s Diatoms in
Nordisches Plankton). Critical remarks elucidated by figures are
annexed to several species. The list further gives the occurrence in
the region, divided into the three above mentioned areas: Dan-
marks Havn, the coastal water and the pack-ice, and the
time for the presence in the plankton, as far as the scanty data allow
it. At last the area of distribution is given summarily. The exa-
mination did comprise 64 samples.
The littoral diatoms and the diatoms of the ice-floes are deter-
mined by Mr. Е. Юзтвор who publishes his results together with a
treatment of the freshwater diatoms.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 261
The following papers deal with the phytoplankton from the
East Greenland Sea:
Ввосн, Hy., (1909): Plankton-tables, in D. Damas et Е. Koefoed, Le Plankton de la
Mer du Grønland. — Duc d Orleans: Croisière Océanographique accomplie à
bord de La Belgica dans la Mer du Grønland 1905. Bruxelles.
CLEVE, P. T., (1900): Report on the Plankton collected by the Swedish Expedition
to Greenland in 1899. — К. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 34, Nr. 3. Stockholm.
OstruP, E., (1895): Marine Diatomeer fra Ost-Grenland. — Medd. om Grønland, XVIII.
København.
Hereto the two general works may be added:
Gran, Н. H., (1904): Die Diatomeen der arktischen Meere. I. Teil: Die Diatomeen des
Planktons — Fauna Arctica, herausgegeben von Е. Römer u. Е. Schaudinn,
Bd. Ш, Heft 3. Jena.
— (1905): Diatomeen. — Nordisches Plankton, herausgegeben von K. Brandt. XIX.
Kiel u. Leipzig.
I. Bacillariales (Diatoms).
А. Centricæ.
Melosira Ag., 18241.
1. Melosira hyperborea (Grun.) Schütt, in Engler & Prantl, Nat.
Pflanzenfam., I. 1 b, 1896, р. 59; Gran, Norweg. North Polar Exp,
Scientif. Results, vol. 4, No. 11, 1900, р. 52. pl. 3, figs. 11—15. М.
nummuloides, var.? hyperborea Grunow in V. Heurck, Synopsis, pl. 85,
figs. 3—4.
The species is one of the most characterizing diatoms from the
ice-floes. It often occurs in practically pure mass cultures in holes
in the ice-floes and in spaces between them. Both in 1906 and in
1908 several samples from the pack-ice had this species as their
main organism. In most samples from July and August it had
resting spores, answering well to the excellent figures in GRAN’s pa-
per quoted above. In October 1906 the samples from Danmarks
Havn contained a few empty frustules, and in September 1907 the
case was nearly the same, i.e. at that time the vegetation period
was over. In June (15!) 1907 a sample collected in a crack of the
land-ice shows us the species in full growth, the chains consisting
of frustules in rapid division and with no trace of resting spores.
In the later half of July 1908 most of the samples from the coastal
water and some from the inner part of the pack-ice contained it,
in several of them even as common, and in nearly all samples re-
sting spores were present. Thus we get an idea of its life-cycle,
as we must suppose that it winters as resting spores, probably frozen
in the ice.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species known from the arctic coast regions
and from the inner Baltic.
Thalassiosira Cleve, 1873.
2. Thalassiosira Nordenskiöldii Cleve, Bih. K. Svenska Vet.
Akad. Handl., Bd. I, No. 13, 1873, p. 6, pl. II, fig. 1; Gran, Norske Nord-
! I have followed the consecutive order of genera and species given in GRAN,
Nord. Plankton XIX.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 263
havs-Exp., Protophyta, 1897, р. 28, pl. IV, fig. 59; Nord. Plankton XIX,
1905, p. 16, fig. 9.
This species is rather rare in the collection; it has been found
in a single sample from the pack-ice in 1906, in some samples from
Danmarks Havn in 1907 and 1908, and in several ones from the
coastal water and the pack-ice in 1908, but never commonly. The
time where it “flowers” must be very short in these high latitudes
as it has not been present in the June and July (first half) samples
from Danmarks Havn. No resting spores were seen. July—Sep-
tember.
Distrib. Northern neritic species widely distributed along the coast
regions of the northern countries.
3. Thalassiosira decipiens (Grun.) Jorgensen, Bergens Museums
Skrifter, 1905, p. 96, pl. 6, fig. 3; Gran, Nord. Plankton, 1905 XIX,
р. 17, fig. 10; Ostenfeld, Wiss. Ergeb. Aral See Exp., VIII, 1908, р. 144,
pl. 6, figs. 6—8; Т. gelatinosa Hensen, 5. Ber. Komm. Deutsch. Meere,
1887, p. 87; Coscinodiscus excentricus, var.? decipiens Grunow, Sitz-
ungsber. naturw. Ges. Isis, Dresden, 1878, p. 28, pl.6, fig. 18; C. deci-
piens Grunow in Van Heurck, Synopsis, 1883, pl. 91, fig. 10.
Found sparingly in four samples from the outer margin of the
pack-ice in 1906, not elsewhere. July—August.
Distrib. Northern temperate species known from the coast regions
of North and West-Europe, further from the Caspian and Aral Seas; not for-
merlv found in arctic water, where it has not its home.
4. Thalassiosira hyalina (Grun.) Gran, Bibliotheca bot. Heft 42,
1897, р.4, pl.1, figs. 17—18; Nord. Plankton XIX, р. 17; Е. Jorgensen,
Bergens Museums Skrifter, 1905, p. 96, pl. VI, fig.5; Th. Clevei Gran,
Norske Nordhavs Ехр., Protophyta, 1897, р. 29, pl. 4, figs. 60—62;
Coscinodiscus hyalinus Grun. in Cleve & Grunow, K. Svenska Vet-
Akad. Handl., Bd. 17, No.2, 1880, р. 113, pl. 7, fig. 128; Grunow, Diat.
у. Franz Josefs Land, 1884, р. 30, pl. С, fig. 28.
Ц is rather curious that I have found this species, so charac-
teristic for the ice-floes, only very rarely and in a few samples from
the pack-ice in August 1906.
Distrib. Arctic-neritic species known from the ice-floes and the coasts
of the arctic Sea (reaching as far south as Stadt in Norway).
5. Thalassiosira gravida Cleve, Bih. K. Svenska Vet. Akad.
Handl., Bd. 22, afd: 3, No.4, 1896, p. 12, pl. 2, figs. 14—16; Gran, Norske
Nordhavs-Exp., Protophyta, 1897, р. 28, pl. 4, figs. 57—58; Nord. Plank-
ton XIX, p. 18, fig. 12; Coscinodiscus subglobosus Cleve & Grun. in
Grunow, Diat. у. Franz Josefs Land, 1884, р. 32, pl.D, figs. 19—20.
264 С. Н. OSTENFELD.
In the samples from 1906 this species was only found twice and
in very few specimens; also in 1907, in the samples from Danmarks
Havn it was rare. In 1908, on the other hand, it was common in
many of the samples on the whole way from Danmarks Науп through
the pack-ice. In several samples the cells were very small, so-called
hunger-specimens. The resting spores (Coscinod. subglobosus) were
present in two samples (Septm. 1907, July 1908). July —August—
September.
Distrib. Northern neritic species widely distributed along the coast
bordering the Arctic and North Atlantic Oceans and their tributaries.
6. Thalassiosira bioculata (Grun.) Ostenfeld, Bot. of the Færåes,
vol. 2, 1903, Copenhagen, p. 564, figs. 120—121; Gran, Nord. Plankton
XIX, p. 19, fig. 14; Coscinodiscus b. Grunow, Diat. v. Franz Josefs Land,
1884, p. 30 et 56, pl. С, fig. 30, pl. D, figs. 1—2.
Single individuals were found in several of the samples from
Danmarks Науп, the coast water and also in the pack-ice. Chains
are not seen and the species was not found in stage of strong growth.
July—August—September.
Distrib. Northern neritic species known from the coast regions of the
northern countries bordering the Davis Strait, northern Atlantic and Arctic
Oceans.
Bacterosira Gran, 1900.
7. Bacterosira fragilis Gran, Nyt Mag. Naturvid., Christiania,
38, 1900, p. 114; Nord. Plankton, 1905, XIX, p. 21; Lauderia f. Gran,
Bibliotheca botanica, Heft 42, 1897, р. 18, pl. 1, figs. 12—14.
Found very sparingly in samples from Danmarks Науп and the
coast-water, not in the pack-ice. July—August.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species known from the coasts of the arctic
Sea (West- and East-Greenland, Spitsbergen, Nova Zembla) and from the
northern coast of Norway.
Lauderia Cleve, 1873.
8. Lauderia glacialis (Grun.) Gran, Nyt Magaz. Naturvid., Chri-
stiania, Bd. 38, 1900, p.111, pl. 9, figs. 10—14; Nord. Plankton, XIX,
p. 23; Podosira hormoides, var. glacialis Grunow, Diat. Franz Josefs
Land, 1884, p. 56, pl. C, fig. 32; P. glacialis Cleve, Bih. K. Svenska
Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 22, afd. 3, No.4, 1896, р. 12, pl. 2, figs. 17—20;
Porosira g. Jorgensen, Bergens Museums Skrifter, 1905, p. 97, pl. 6,
fig. 7.
Rare in the samples, found in Danmarks Науп and in the coast
water, not in the pack-ice. July—August.
Distrib. Northern (subarctic) species known from the coastal regions
of the arctic Sea and along the coasts of North-Europe (in winter).
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 265
Hyalodiseus Ehrbg., 1845.
9. Hyalodiscus laevis Ehrbg., Monatsber. Berlin. Akad. Wis-
sensch. 1845, p. 78; Cleve u. Grunow, K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl.,
Bd. 17, No. 2, 1880, р. 116; Peragallo, Diatom marin. de France, pl. 119,
fig. 20; Н. subtilis Bailey, Smithson. Contrib. to knowledge, vol.7, 1854,
p- 10, fig. 12; W. Hendry, Quart. Journ. Microsc. sc., 1861, p. 179;
Cleve u. Grunow, 1. c.; Gran, Bibliotheca botanica, Heft 42, p.5, pl.1,
fig. 19; Peragallo, 1. c., pl. 119, fig. 7. Cfr. Stockmayer, Annal. К. К.
naturh. Hofmuseum, Wien, XXIII, 1909, p. 69.
In some samples from Danmarks Havn I found sparingly a large
species (150170 » in diameter of the valve) of Hyalodiscus which,
I think, is identical with Gran’s H. subtilis from Karajak Fjord. On
the other hand I cannot find any difference of valve between H.
levis Ehrbg. and H. subtilis Bail. Already Henny (1. с.) has suggested
that the distinctive marks in the proportion between the entire valve
and the central part (umbilicus) as well as in the structure of the
“umbilicus” are value-less, and my here given figures (Fig. 1) which
Fig 1. Hyalodiscus laevis Ehrbg. 250 t. m.
are chosen as extremes will, taken together with the figures by
PERAGALLO, show that these characters are subject to great variabi-
lity. Therefore, I find it necessary to unite the two species in one
to which H. scoticus (Kutz.) Grun. must be referred as a dwarfy
variety. — July—September.
Distrib. Coast-species, not true plankton form, found scattered over
the earth, especially in colder regions; often found in fossil depots.
Coseinodiseus Ehrbg., 1838.
10. Coscinodiscus centralis Ehrbg., Abhandl. Berl. Akad., 1838,
р. 129; Mikrogeologie, pl. 18, fig. 39. pl. 22, fig. 1; Jorgensen, Bergens
Museums Skrifter, 1905, р. 93, pl. 6, fig. 1; Gran, Nord. Plankton XIX,
266 Н. С. OSTENFELD.
1905, р. 33, fig. 83; Ostenfeld, Wiss. Ergebn. Aral-See Exped., VII,
St. Petersburg, 1908, р. 149, pl. 7, figs. 4—5.
In a sample from the outer part of the pack-ice a single dead
frustuce of this species was found. August 1906.
Distrib. Widely distributed oceanic species, according to GRAN com-
mon, especially during winter, in the Gulf-Stream area of the Norwegian
Sea and in the North Atlantic; not at home in arctic water.
11. Coscinodiscus subbuliens Jorgensen, Bergens Museums
Skrifter 1905, р. 94, pl. VI, fig. 2; Gran, Nord. Plankton XIX, 1905, р. 32,
fig. 32; C. oculus iridis Gran, Fauna Arctica, Ш, Lief.3, 1904, р. 519,
pl. XVII, figs. 17—19.
The species which I refer to JoRGENSEN’s С. subbuliens is very
common in some of the samples from the autumn, indeed forming
the main part of the phytoplankton.
Owing to the abundance of material I have been able to add
some points to the descriptions given by JØRGENSEN and Gran. As
to the size of the species JORGENSEN gives a diameter of “usually
50—100 м”, and GRAN says 65—150 и, while my measurements extend
it to 240 4 (185 м as mean of 20 measurements) for the normal vege-
tative cells. The valves are coarsely areolated in a radiate manner,
and in contradistinction to the descriptions of the two quoted au-
thors I have found that, at a certain adjustment, a single row of
very small points or apiculi are discernible a little inside the margin
and further, asymmetrically among them, two larger apiculi or knots,
at a distance from one another of between 120° and 150°. The
apiculi which are difficult to see, best upon ignified material moun-
ted in styrax-balsam, stand rather closely, as between two usually
3—4 radii of areoles originate. The existence of the two larger
apiculi shows that C. subbuliens must be referred to the Group Bia-
piculati created by me in 1908 (Wiss. Ergebn. d. Aralsee-Exp., Lief.
VIII, St. Petersburg, 1908, р. 147). Further investigations must decide,
if all species of the sectio Radiati Rattr. possess these two apiculi;
hitherto they have been found in C. biconicus Van Breem., C. aralensis
Ostf., С. Granii Gough, С. centralis Ehrbg. and С. concinuus W.
Gran (1904, fig. 19) has figured the construction of the girdle of a
specimen which just has divided into two daughter-cells and where
the matter is more complicated than in the ordinary cells. Therefore
I have given a figure (Fig. 2) showing the girdle of a normal cell’.
This figure represents only a part of the girdle, but it is seen di-
stinctly, that in the connecting part of each valve two structure-lines
1 The fig. 32 с in Gran’s paper of 1905 is not quite clear in this respect.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 267
run parallel to its margins, one thin line near the margin and one
much coarser line situated more or less half way between the mar-
gin and the margin of the
valve. The first named
line makes а deviation |
from the parallel in one |
|
|
pret ne rt т’
ss ты RE TEE - — -—
place, where it bends
rather abruptly towards
the coarse line and merges
into it on a very short
way, thus forming a V-
shaped figure with the
tip eut off; in this place
the line is coarser than
Fig. 2. Coscinodiscus subbuliens Jorg. An empty
elsewhere and coarsest and partly broken frustule. Height 85. 500 t. m.
where it disappears in the
other line. The V-shaped places of the two connecting parts of a
cell never face each other, oftenest they are on the opposite Ба Ш
of the girdle, but sometimes rather near each other, as e. g. shown
in fig. 3, to the right. The narrow part of the V is always directed
towards the corresponding valve.
In two samples from August— September 1907 where Cosc. sub-
buliens was dominant, I happened to find among the numerous nor-
mal cells some few auxospores or more correctly cells developed
from auxospores.. Figs. 3—4 represent such cases: A large cell (dia-
meter in a few measured spe-
А cimens 280—320 и) carries on
the one valvar side the folded
and crumpled rest of the pe-
rizonium; the cell itself is very
young which is seen from the
Fig. 3. Coscinodiscus subbuliens Jorg. The absence of а distinct girdle-
two figures to the left represent the same : .
Ae Al Re part; the nucleus is situated
close to the innerside of that
valve, which turns away from the perizonium. I did not succeed
in finding other stages, but the knowledge at hand is sufficient to
show that the auxospore formation probably goes on in the same
manner as in Thalassiosira gravida (GRAN, Norske Nordhavs-Exp.,
Protophyta 1897) or in Melosira (see f. i. G. Karsten, Wissensch.
Meeresunters., 1899, р. 183), with the difference that follows from the
fact that the cells of Cosc. subbuliens occur solitary, not in chains.
Hence it results that the auxospores immediately become separated
from their mother-cells, which makes it difficult to observe them.
268 С. H. OSTENFELD.
G. KARSTEN (1. с., р. 185) reports that be has found auxospores in
Cosc. radiatus and KLEBAHN in Cosc. excentricus, but closer informa-
tions are not, as far as I know, given concerning the occurrence of
this phenomenon in the genus Coscinodiscus.
Fig. 4. Coscinodiscus subbuliens Jorg. 250 t. т.
Cosc. subbuliens was dominant in samples from Danmarks Havn
and from the coast water in 1906, 1907 and 1908 in July—September.
Few living specimens were present in two samples from October 1906
taken in cracks in the ice of Danmarks Havn. In the pack-ice it
was very rare, only few specimens seen in a couple of samples.
Distrib. According to GRAN a boreal species occurring especially in
the regions where polar and atlantic currents meet, often in large quantities.
12. Coscinodiscus marginatus Ehrbg., Abhandl. Berlin. Akad.
Wissensch., 1841, p. 142; A. Schmidt, Atlas Diatom.-Kunde, pl. 62,
figs. 1—5, 9—11; pl.59, fig. 11; С. fimbriato-limbatus A. Schmidt, 1. с.,
pl. 65, figs. 3—6; pl. 113, fig. 2; C. limbatus A. Schmidt, 1. c., pl. 63,
fig. 7; Ostenfeld & Paulsen, Medd. Grønland, XXVI, 1904, р. 160.
Som few empty frustules of this coarsely areolated species were
found in a sample from the outer part of the pack-ice in August
1906.
Distrib. Oceanic temperate species known from the plankton af the
North Atlantic west of 26° W. Long. not at home in arctic water.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 269
13. Coscinodiscus curvatulus Grun. var. Karianus Cleve et Gru-
now, К. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 17, No. 2, 1880, р. 113, pl. 7, fig.
129; C. curvatulus, var. genuina Grun., Diat. v. Franz Josefs Land,
1884, р. 31, ex parte, pl. О, fig. 13 (non fig. 14); С. curvatulus Gran,
Nord. Plankton XIX, p.35, ex parte, fig. 37a.
In two samples from the pack-ice, taken in July 1908, I found
rather sparingly a Coscinodiscus which agrees well with the form
quoted above, var. karianus of С. curvatulus, and to this form I also
refer the fig. 13 by Grunow’s diatoms from Franz Josefs Land. It
has a single row of distinct apiculi.
Gran has pointed out that probably several species are included
in Grunow’s C. curvatulus. He gives figures of a form
from the Norwegian Sea which has no apiculi and in
which the low girdle consists of the two connecting
parts and a plain intercalary hoop. Our form has a
somewhat higher girdle in which each connecting Fig. 5. Coscino-
part has an intercalary hoop and the line between Be
the connecting part and the intercalary part is eleva- karianus Cl. &
ted and with a V-shaped curvature, see fig.5. I think Grup:
that it is a distinct arctic species, but my material is too scanty to
decide the question.
Distrib. (of var. karianus): Arctic Sea, in pack-ice; (of the main spe-
cies): widely distributed both in colder and warmer seas.
14. Coscinodiscus Joergensenii nom. поу.; С. polyacanthus, var.
intermedius Grunow, Diat. v. Franz Josefs Land, p. 29, pl. C, fig. 25;
Jorgensen, Bergens Museums Skrifter, 1905, р. 92; non С. intermedius
Ehrbg.
In some samples from the pack-ice (July—August 1906 and 1908)
and from Danmarks Науп (October 1906, August 1907) I have found
rather scattered, specimens of a fasciculate Coscinodiscus of the sub-
lilis-group, which agrees well with Grunow’s quoted description and
figure. As JORGENSEN (1. с.) has suggested, it is distinct from the true
C. polyacanthus Grun. by having one row of small interfasciculate
apiculi and is closely related to C. curvatulus (at least to var. karianus)
from which it differs е. g. by a finer structure and straight fasciculi.
On the other hand it is allied to Thalassiosira bioculata from which it
is easily recognised by having only one (not two) central areole and
by a less fine structure. I have not succeeded in finding out the
construction of the girdle exactly, but it has not the many inter-
calary connecting parts of Th. bioculata and the cells are not high.
My figures Fig. 6 will show the structure of the valves and the
number of apiculi which is considerably lower than in С. polyacanthus.
270) — С. Н. OSTENFELD.
GRUNOW (1. с.) gives the size to 60 y, I have found И ranging from
50 til 80 y.
In the samples from Danmarks Havn in October 1906 I found
Fig. 6. Coscinodiscus Joergensenii n. nom. 500 t. m.
two specimens just coming from the auxospores and having one valve
developed while the other half of the cell had the perizonium wall
kept; and in the same samples I also found some globular bodies
of just the same size and with the same con-
tents of chromatophores, etc.; these globules 1
consider as the auxospores of this species.” In
the figures 7 I have given such a globule and
the auxospore-cell at the same magnification.
Fig. 7. Auxospore of
Coscinodiscus Joergen- As the cells seem to live solitary, the mature
senii п. nom. R :
auxospore — as in C. subbuliens — does not
occur adherent to its mother-cell.
Distrib. Probably arctic neritic species, known from Cape Wankarema
(Grunow) and Arctic Norway (Jorgensen).
Note. It has been said many times before, but I cannot help repeating that
the genus Coscinodiscus is in a great confusion and that the limits of the species
are very indistinct. It is to be hoped that a monographer will be found who may
have a happy hand to clear up this difficult matter.
Asteromphalus Ehrbg., 1844.
15. Asteromphalus Hookeri Ehrbg., Monatsber. Berlin. Akad.
Wissensch., 1844, р. 200, fig. 3; Gran, Nord. Plankton, 1905, XIX, р. 45,
fig. 50; А. Brookei Bail., var., Cleve Bih. К. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl.,
Ва 1. 1873. р. 10, рЕ 4; 65 19. A Fatlantıcus“Cleve, Bih. KSyenskz
Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 22, afd. 3, No. 4, 1896, р.5; К. Svenska Vet.
Akad. Handl. Bd. 34, No.1, 1900, р. 19, pl. 8, figs. 7—9.
A single specimen was met with in a sample from the outer
part of the pack-ice; August 1906.
Distrib. Northern-temperate, oceanic species, known from the North-
Atlantic and the Antarctic.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. DT
Rhizosolenia (Ehrbg.) Brightw. 1858.
16. Rhizosolenia styliformis Brightw., Quart. Journ. Microsc.
Science, VI, 1858, pl. У, fig. 5; Peragallo, in Le Diatomiste, vol. I, 1892, р.
111, pl. 4, figs. 1—5; Gran, Rep. Norweg. Marine- and Fishery-Investig.,
vol. 2, No.5, 1902, pl. 1, figs. 1—9; Nord. Plankton, 1905, XIX, р. 54.
Found in Danmarks Havn (September— October 1906, August
1907) and in the coastal water (1906 and 1908), but nearly absent
from the pack-ice. It occurs in most samples very rarely, but in
a single one not uncommon.
Distrib. Widely distributed oceanic speeies. often character organism
over large areas of water, mostly a temperate species, but here and in some
other exceptional cases behaving as an arctic organism.
17. Rhizosolenia hebetata Bailey, American Journ. of Sc. and
Arts, Ser. 2, vol. 22, 1856, pl.1, figs. 18, 19; Cleve, Vega-Exp. vetensk.
iakttag., Bd. 3, 1883, pl. 6, fig. 69; Gran, Fauna Arctica, Bd. 3, Lief. 3,
1904, p.524; Nord. Plankton 1905, XIX, p. 55, fig. 67.
Г. semispina (Hensen) Gran, 1. с., р. 55; Rh. semispina Hensen,
У. Ber. Komm. Unters. Deutschen Meere, 1887, р. 84, pl. 5, fig. 39.
Only found in the pack-ice and here — especially in August
1906 — the dominant species in some samples. In July—August
1908 not so common.
Only the f. зелизрта was seen.
Distrib. Northern oceanic species of wide distribution.
18. Rhizosolenia obtusa Hensen, V. Ber. Komm. Unters. Deut-
schen Meere, 1887, р. 86, pl. 5, fig. 41; Gran, Nord. Plankton XIX, р. 56;
В. alata, var. truncata Gran, Norske Nordhavs Exp., Protophyta,
1897, p. 6, pl. 4, fig. 67.
Only found in the pack-ice and in the same samples where
R. hebetata, f. semispina was present. Dominant in some samples from
August 1906, not common in 1908.
Distrib. Northern oceanic species known from the colder parts of
the North Atlantic and the Norwegian Sea, etc.
Eucampia Ehrbg., 1839.
19. Eucampia groenlandica Cleve, Bih. K. Svenska Vet. Akad.
Handl., Bd. 12, afd. 3, No. 4, 1896, р. 10, pl.2, fig. 10; Jorgensen, Вег-
gens Museum Skrifter, 1905, p.99, pl.6, fig. 8; Gran, Nord. Plankton,
XIX; 1905, р. 99, fig. 127.
Single chains were found in four samples of July 1908 from
Danmarks Havn and the coastal water, not in the pack-ice.
In some cases the chains were like Gran’s f. atlantica (fig. 127 d),
212 C. H. OSTENFELD.
in others they stand intermediate and in others again they were
typical (fig. 127 с); thus the f. аНапйса has probably a very restricted
value.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species; known from the coasts of arctic coun-
tries; also (rarely) found at Bohuslen, Scotland and in the Norwegian Sea.
Chætoceras Ehrbg., 1844.
20. Chætoceras atlanticum Cleve, Bih. К. Svenska Vet. Akad.
Handl., Bd. I, No. 13, 1873, р. 11, pl. 2, fig. 8; Gran, Nord. Plankton, XIX,
1905, p. 64, fig. 74.
This species is found in several samples from Danmarks Науп,
the coast water and the pack-ice, but always in single specimens.
July—September 1906—1908.
Distrib. Widely distributed in the Atlantic Ocean and its tributaries,
also in the Antarctic Ocean; oceanic species.
21. Chætoceras convolutum Castracane, Report of the Challenger
Exp., Botany, II, 1886, p. 78; Gran, Fauna Arctica, HI, Heft 3, 1904,
p. 530, fig. 1; Nord. Plankton XIX, 1905, р. 69.
In the pack-ice this species was dominant in some samples from
August 1906; in 1908 it was also present, but not in greater quan-
tities. It was further found in samples from the coastal water and
from Danmarks Havn, but only sporadically and in single specimens.
Distrib. Northern oceanic species, known from the North Atlantic
and the Antarctic Oceans.
22. Chætoceras criophilum Castracane, Report of the Challenger
Exp., Botany, II, 1886, p.78; Gran, Fauna Arctica, III. Heft 3, 1904,
р. 532, fig. 3; Nord. Plankton XIX, 1905, р. 71.
If we follow Gran (1. с.) in the distinctive marks between this
and the foregoing species, i. e. С. criophilum has none or a very
rudimentary connecting zone and C. convolutum a well developed
one, it results that this species is very rare in the area, only some
solitary specimens were found in two samples from the pack-ice, one
in 1906 and one in 1908. It is rather unexpected that it is so rare,
as it is one of the characteristic and dominant species of the sea
between Iceland and Jan Mayen.
Distrib. Northern oceanic species, widely distributed in the northern
parts of the Atlantic and its tributaries, further known from the Antarctic.
23. Chætoceras boreale Bailey, Smitsonian Contrib. to know-
ledge, vol. 7, 1854, р. 8, figs. 22—23; Gran, Fauna Arctic. III, Heft 3,
1904, p. 533, fig.5, Nord. Plankton XIX, p. 73.
One of the most common species in the area. Both in 1906
and 1908 it was the dominant species in many samples from the
TAB. XIV
MEDD. ом Gront. XLIII. Nr. 10. [Ostrur]
4
um i In m
NAMEN UL U NET NNNg
ИИ EL PPT LEM СТИ
hl Hi]
И) ИД 7 ba A i
— ae
СС Еовелоалае лье соед npn ars SU ПААА Арати ле ал ne rinses
18
17
Aut. del.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 973
coastal water and present also both in Danmarks Havn and in the
inner border of the pack-ice. In August 1906 it was not uncommon
at ca. 13° W. Long., and dominant in the samples taken along the
coast from Koldewey Island to Cape Amélie; in October 1906 some
specimens were found in Danmarks Havn, but mostly empty fru-
stules. In August—September 1907 sjngle specimens occurred in the
samples from Danmarks Havn. In July 1908 it was dominant in
Danmarks Науп and from that place northwards along the coast
until са. 78° N. Lat., and it was further found in some samples a
little more eastwards, until ca. 11° W. Lat.
In some of the samples from August 1906 | |
and July 1908 taken in the coastal water (the
temperature of the water being between - 0,5 :
and 4,2°) I often found chains in which the — =
awns of many of the cell-walls had aborted. in)
As the fig. 8 shows, such a chain gets a rather |
curious aspect: The two latest divisions of the as —
chain figured have produced new cells which bear 25")
no awns from the valves while the oldest divi- |
sion has given normally developed awns of which
only the bases have been drawn. At the places <>
of the awns we find only small protuberances —
on the valves, and the protuberances of two |
cohering valves correspond to each other. It Ce
looks as if the cell-division has stopped too
early, when only the division of the contents
has been fulfilled and the development of the
foramen has begun. In some cells I found very
short and curved awns in stead of the protu- IR
berances, thus showing the reduction in a some- ==
what less degree. Fig. 8. Chaetoceras
I have no real explanation of the pheno- boreale Bail. with
с 00 aborted awns.
menon. Perhaps it shows that the cell-division TN
takes place very rapidly, or perhaps it designates
a state of hunger, or perhaps it has something to do with micro-
spore formation, as it occurred in the some samples in which mi-
crospore formation in Ch. decipiens was observed (but no microspores
were found in Ch. boreale!). К. Okamura (Bot. Magaz., Tokyo, XXI,
1907, pl. Ш, fig. 36) has figured the same phenomenon in a chain of
Ch. criophilum, but has no remarks on it in the text, while in the
explanation of the figures the says (p. 105): “One of the cells of
another chain many times divided”.
Also G. KARSTEN (Valdivia-Exp., Phytoplankton des antarkt. Mee-
XLII 21
274 С. H. OSTENFELD.
res, 1905, р. 118, Pl. 15, figs. 8d, e) has found Ch. criophilum in the
antarctic ocean with aborted awns. He tells that the chains of this
abnormal aspect occur in depths of 100—80 m. and supposes that
the phenomenon is connected hereto: „Darin ist eine Minderung
des Formwiderstandes gegeben . . . Diese Zellen resp. Zellreihen
schweben dementsprechend in tieferen Wasserschichten; . . . .“ But
this explanation does not hold good in our case where the abnormal
chains occur in the surface layers of the water.
Distrib. Widely distributed species of northen Oceanic character,
known from all Oceans.
24 Cheetoceras decipiens Cleve, Bih. К. Svenska Vet. Akad.
Handl., Bd. I, No. 13, 1873, p. 11, pl.1, fig.5; Gran, Norske Nordhavs-
Exp., Protophyta. 1897, p. 13, pl. 1, figs. 2—3, pl. 3. fig. 34; Fauna
Arctica, III, Heft 3, 1904, р. 535, pl. 17, figs. 1—6; Nord. Plankton XIX,
p. 74, fig. 88.
As С. boreale one of the most common species in the area. It
was rather rare in the pack-ice both in 1906 and in 1908, but domi-
nant in both years in the whole series of samples from the coastal
water (July—August) and in 1908 in Danmarks Havn. At the last
named place it was also observed in October 1906, some of the fru-
stules being empty, and in July--September 1907, but not in larger
quantities. It seems thus as if the species has its real place of thriving
in our area in the coastal water between the coast and the pack-ice.
In a number of samples, especially in the samples from July 1908
the terminal awns had the peculiar structure which is characteristic
for C. Lorenzianum Grun.; and also in the coarser awns from the
other cells of the chains the structure was discernible, but more
difficult to see. In other respects the specimens were quite typical,
e. g. the awns being coherent at a part of their length, the terminal
awns making the curvature at their proximal ends and then slightly
divergent or nearly parallel. It is then not possible to refer our
specimens to C. Lorenzianum Grun., nor to the arctic species C. mitra
(Ehrbg.) Cleve. More probably a closer examination of the coarser
specimens of C. decipiens from other regions will result in finding
the same structure of the awns.
Besides this observation, another matter of some interest was
found:
In two samples from August 1906 and in two from July 1908
I have found microspore formation in the cells. All these samples
have been taken in the ice-filled coastal water north of 77° N. Lat.
the temperature of the water being between — 0,5° and 1,4°. The
examination of this microspore development does not give much
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 275
new, аз we have the excellent description and drawings of this
processus in Chet. decipiens by Gran (1904). I have only to refer
the reader to this paper and to GRAN's paper of 1902 (Rep. Norweg.
Mar. Fish. Investig., vol. 2, No.5) in which the microspore formation
in Rhizosolenia styliformis was described and where considerations
on the microspore problem in general were put down. Similar con-
siderations embrazing all the known cases of microspore formation,
are given by G. Karsten (Valdivia-Exp., Phytoplankton d. Atlant.
Meeres, 1908).
The annexed figures (Fig. 9) show the different stages in the
development of the micro-
spores; they correspond rather
closely to GRAN’s figures (1904).
In the left drawing we find a
chain the end cell of which
is a normal cell in rest and
contains but one nucleus,
while the two other cells
have fulfilled the division of
the nucleus into two daughter
nuclei. It might be supposed
that this stage could illustrate
the beginning of an ordinary
cell-division as well as the
beginning of the microspore
formation, but this is not right as there is a great difference which
will be clear if we compare this drawing with the fig. 1 by Gran
(1904); this author gives here the corresponding stage of an ordinary
cell-division, and his drawing shows that contemporaneously with
the division of the nucleus a fissure in the plasma appears as the
first beginning of the future foramen between two cells. This fissure
does not exist in my case, whereby it is proved that we have here
the first stage of microspore formation.
The other figures show stages with 2, 4, 8 and 16 daughter
nuclei corresponding rather well to the figures by Gran, but his
material has been better stained than mine. Perhaps we have herein
the explanation of the following difference, viz.: that the division
of the nuclei in my material goes on a good time before the divi-
sion of the plasma, thus e. g. in the figure to the right we have 16
nuclei, but only (7—)8 plasma-lumps each containing 2 nuclei.
With regard to the further fate of the microspores preserved ma-
terial does not allow observations, and to the theoretical con-
siderations set forth by Gran, BERGON and KARSTEN I have nothing
21
Fig. 9. Chaetoceras decipiens Cl. Cells in
microspore-formation. 250 t. m.
276 С. Н. OSTENFELD.
to add. Only one new case of microspore formation has been dis-
covered since KARSTEN’s paper, viz. the microspore formation in
Chet. Lorenzianum Grun. found by J. ScHILLER (Ber. Deutsch. Bot. Ges.,
XXVH, 1909, р. 352) in the Gulf of Triest. The formation described
corresponds rather well to the manner of sporulation found by Gran
in Chet. decipiens and by GEORGE Murray (Proc. Roy. Soc. Edin-
burgh, XXI, 1896, p. 207) in Chet. boreale; as to the hypothesis ad-
vanced by the author on the cause of the rarity of microspores —
viz.: that the microspore formation in most species should take
place by the germination of the resting cysts —, I have only to say
that it is a purely theoretical supposition, for which we have no
basis as long as we do not know a single case of germination of a
resting spore. It is a very remarkable fact that in spite of the nu-
merous studies on the plankton diatoms during the last two decen-
nia, nothing has been discovered with regard to this important mat-
ter. It is to be hoped that we may soon get this mystery solved.
Distrib. Oceanic species of a northern character, a dominant species
over wide areas of the North Atlantic and its tributaries.
25. Chætoceras diadema (Ehrbg.) Gran, Norske Nordhavs Exp.
Protophyta, 1897, p.20, pl. 2, figs. 16—18; Nord. Plankton XIX, р. 84;
C. groenlandicum Cleve, Bih. K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 22,
afd. 2, No.4, 1896, p.7, pl. 2, figs. 3—5; Syndendrium diadema Ehrbg.
Mikrogeologie, pl. 35, A, XVII, 13.
Found sparingly in one sample (Aug. 1906) in the pack-ice,
rather sparingly in some samples from the coastal water (July 1908)
and not uncommon in samples from Danmarks Havn in August—
September 1907 and here with resting spores.
Distrib. Northern neritic species of wide distribution.
26. Chætoceras Wighami Brightw., Quart. Journ. Microsc.
Science, IV, 1856, р. 108, pl. 7, figs. 19—36; Gran, Nord. Plankton, XIX,
1905, p. 88; Ostenfeld, Wiss. Ergebn. Aralsee-Exp., Lief. VIII, St. Peters-
burg, 1908, р. 153, pl. 5, figs. 9—12; С. bottnicum Cleve in Aurivillius,
Bih. K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 21, afd. 4, No. 8, 1896, p. 14, pl. 1.
Found rather sparingly in Aug.—Septm. 1907 in Danmarks Havn;
rather often occurring in the coastal water in July 1908 and here
common in a few samples; further single chains found in a sample
from the pack-ice (July 1908).
Distrib. Euryhaline neritic species, known from the coasts of Europe
and Arctic countries, further from the Caspian and Aral Seas.
27. Chætoceras debile Cleve, Bih. К. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl.,
Bd. 20, afd. 3, No. 2, 1894, р. 13, pl.1, fig. 2; Østrup, Medd. om Gron-
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 277
land, XVIII, 1895, р. 456, pl. 7, fig. 89; Gran, Norske Nordhavs Exp., Pro-
tophyta, 1897, p. 23, pl. 2, figs. 14—15; Nord. Plankton XIX, 1905, p. 92.
Rare in the collection, only found in three samples from Dan-
marks Havn in Aug.—Septm. 1907, and, in a dwarfy state, in two
samples from the pack-ice in July 1908.
Distrib. Northern neritic species, known from the coasts of Europe
and Arctic countries, further from Japan.
28. Chætoceras furcellatum Bail., American Journ. of sc. & arts,
ser. 2, vol. 22, 1856, pl. 1, fig. 4; Cleve u. Grunow, K. Svenska Vet.
Akad. Handl., Bd. 17, No. 2, 1880, р. 120, pl. 7, figs. 136--137; Gran,
Bibliotheca Botanica, Heft 42, 1897, p. 7, pl. 1, figs. 15—16; Nord.
Plankton, XIX, 1905, p. 95.
Occurs as one of the characterizing species in a group of sam-
ples from the inner part of the pack-ice, in July 1908. Further some
Chetoceras-chains in samples from Danmarks Havn in 1907 and in
the coastal water in 1908 may perhaps be referred to this species,
but the determination is not sure.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species, known from the Arctic Seas, reaching
along the Norwegian coast as far southwards as Cape Stadt.
29. Chætoceras sociale Lauder, Transact. Microsc. Soc., vol. 12,
N.S., 1864, р. 77, pl. 8, fig. 1; Cleve, Bih. K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl.,
Bd. 22, afd. 3, No.4, 1896, р. 9, pl. 2, fig.9; Gran, Nord. Plankton XIX,
1905, p. 96, fig. 123.
Occurs in great quantities in samples from Danmarks Havn in
Aug.— Septm. 1907, and with resting spores. Further common in
some samples from the coastal water in July 1908 and rare in
others; also here mostly with resting spores.
Distrib. Northern neritic species known from the coasts of Europe,
Iceland, Arctic countries and Hongkong.
30. Chætoceras gracile Schütt, Ber. Deutsch. bot. Ges., 1895, р. 42,
pl. 5, fig. 13; vix Paulsen, Medd. Котт. Havundersog., Plankton I,
3, 1905. København, р. 5, figs. 6—7; non Apstein, Wiss. Meeresun-
ters., Abt. Kiel, N. F., Bd. 11, 1909, р. 135, fig. 1; С. septentrionale Cleve,
Bih. K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 22, afd. 3, No. 4, 1896, p. 9,
pl. 2, fig. 8; vix Østrup, Medd. Grønland, XVIII, 1895, р. 457, pl. 7,
fig. 88.
In two samples from Danmarks Havn, August 1907, and in one
sample from the coast water, July 1908, I found a small solitary
Chetoceras with resting spores. As my figures (Fig. 10) show, it
must be identified with CLEve’s С. septentrionale from Baffin Bay,
but hardly with Ostrup’s original species of that name. On the
278 С. Н. OSTENFELD.
other hand it is probable that С gracile Schütt is the same species,
because if we compare Schürr’s figures of cells with chromato-
phores with my fig. 10, we will find a close resemblance; on the
contrary his figures of resting spores differ from mine, but he has
not drawn these spores in situ within cells, and it is perhaps per-
mitted to doubt, if they belong to ihe species in question.
PAULSEN (1. с.) has given figures from Озтвор’$ original material
and considers his form as identical with Schürr’s С gracile, but I
Fig. 10. Cheetoceras gracile Schütt. 500 t. m.
doubt if he is right in doing so. The question is a much intri-
cate one.
The latest note by APsTEIN about these small solitary species
contains drawings of a species from the Baltic — the locality of
ScHÜTT’s species — which the author names C. gracile but, I think,
hardly correct; I myself know APSTEIN’s form from the Belt Sea
(Baltic) and have found it with resting spores which differ consider-
ably from those of С. gracile; they have two rather large spines on
the primary spore-valve (in the same manner as the spores of C.
debile) and often also small spines, while the secondary valve is
smooth. The species has only one chromatophore, as also drawn
correctly by APSTEIN, and the corners of the cell in side view are
not contracted; all these distinctive marks separate it from the true
C. gracile, and I propose to name it C. ceratosporum nov. sp.; it is
only known from the Baltic, where it occurs in the spring and
seems to have its true home in the inner part, as I have seen it in
samples kindly sent ше by Dr. К. М. LEVANDER of Helsingfors.
Anyhow the small solitary Chetoceras species require a revision,
Marine Plankton from the East Greenland Sea. 279
as the treatement given by LEMMERMANN (Arkiv f. Botanik, Stock-
holm, Bd. 2, No. 2, 1904) is not a good one.
Distrib. (of Ch. gracile. sens. lat): Euryhaline neritic species known
from coasts of Greenland and Europe.
Biddulphia Gray, 1831.
31. Biddulphia arctica (Brigtw.) Boyer, Proc. Acad. of Nat. Sc.,
Philadelphia, 1900, p. 714; Gran, Nord. Plankton, XIX, 1905, p. 109,
fig. 143; B. balæna Brightw., Quart. Journ. Microsc. Sc., vol. 8, 1859,
р. 181, pl. 9, fig. 15; Triceratium arcticum Brightw.. ibid, vol. 1, 1853,
р. 250, pl. 4, fig. 11.
Found sparingly in three samples from Danmarks Hayn, Aug.—
Septm. 1907.
Distrib. Littoral form (not true plankton form) from the Arctic coasts.
B. Pennate.
Fragilaria Lyngb., 1819.
32. Fragilaria islandica Grun. in V. Heurck, Synopsis, 1883,
pl. 45, fig. 37; Jorgensen, Bergens Museums Skrifter 1905, р. 102, pl. 6
fig. 10; Gran. Nord. Plankton. XIX, 1905, р. 114, fig. 153.
Only found in Danmarks Havn, where it was present in the
plankton, although only scattered, in all three years. July—October.
2)
Distrib. Arctic neritic species, known from the coasts of the European
Arctic sea; probably not a real plankton form.
33. Fragilaria oceanica Cleve, Bih. К. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl.,
Bd. 1, №. 13, 1873, р. 22, pl. 4, fig. 25; Grunow, Diat. у. Franz Josefs
Land. 1884, p. 55, pl. 2, fig. 14; Gran, Bibliotheca Botanica, Heft 42,
1897, р. 20, pl. 1, figs. 6—9; Nord. Plankton XIX, 1905, р. 114, figs.
154—155.
In 1906 only very few samples contained this species, and only
in few specimens, while in 1907 and 1908 it was a dominant feature
in July and August samples from Danmarks Науп and the coastal
water. In the pack-ice it was not at home, recorded in few speci-
mens from three samples (two in 1906 and one in 1907). July—
October.
Several of the forms distinguished by Gran (1905) according to
the curvature and twisting of the chains, were seen. In all samples
from 1907 and 1908 resting spores were present, often in large
quantities.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species known from Davis Strait and the
Euopean Arctic Sea and a little more southwards.
280 C. H. OSTENFELD.
34. Fragilaria cylindrus Grunow, Diat. у. Franz Josefs Land,
1884, p. 55, pl. 2, fig. 13; Gran, Bibliotheca Botanica, Heft 42, 1897,
р. 20, pl. 1, figs. 4—5; Nord. Plankton, XIX, 1905, р. 115; Jorgensen,
Bergens Museums Skrifter, 1905, p. 102, pl. 6, fig. 9.
This species resembles the foregoing one very much, and it is
only possible to distinguish them when the ignified frustules are seen in
valvar view. Hence it may be that some of the records of F. oceanica
include this species of which I have seen sure specimens only in
one sample from Danmarks Havn, July 1908.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species of about the same distribution as the
foregoing, but often overseen.
Thalassiothrix Cleve et Grun., 1880.
35. Thalassiothrix longissima Cleve et Grun., K. Svenska Vet.
Akad. Handl., Bd. 17, No. 2, 1880, р. 108; G. Karsten, Wiss. Meeres-
unters., Abt. Kiel, N. F., Bd. 4, 1899, р. 28, fig. 11; Gran, Nord. Plank-
ton, XIX, 1905, р. 116; Synedra thalassiothrix Cleve, Bih. К. Svenska
Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 1, №. 13, 1873, p. 22, pl. 4, fig. 24.
Only a single specimen found in a sample from the pack-ice in
Aug. 1906.
Distrib. Northern oceanic species, often occurring in great quantities,
e.g. in Denmark Strait and Irminger Sea.
Achnanthes Bory, 1822.
36. Achnanthes tæniata Grun. in Cleve et Grunow, К. Svenska
Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd: 17, №. 2, 1880, р. 22, pli 1, fig. 5; Gran; Bi
bliotheca Botanica, Heft 42, 1897, p.9, pl.1. fig. 10; Nord. Plankton,
XIX, 1905, p. 122, fig. 165; Jorgensen, Bergens Museums Skrifter, 1905,
р. 105, pl. 8, fig. 27.
As GRAN (1905, I. c., in nota) has pointed out, GruNow’s and
JORGENSEN’S figures represent chains with resting spores, while in
GRAN’s two quoted papers we find the normal vegetative chains.
Found in three samples from Danmarks Науп (Aug. 1907 and
July 1908) and, with resting spores, in one sample from the pack-
ice (July 1908). Perhaps overseen in other samples, as it resembles
Fragilaria oceanica and Navicula septentrionalis very much.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species known from the Arctic Sea and the
inner Baltic (in spring).
Navicula Bory, 1826.
37. Navicula septentrionalis (Grun.) Gran, Bibliotheca Botanica,
1897, Ней 42, p.9; Nord. Plankton, XIX, 1905, р. 124, fig. 167; Stau-
roneis septentrionalis Grunow, Diat. у. Franz Josefs Land, 1884, р. 105,
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 281
pl. 1, fig. 48; Jorgensen, Bergens Museums Skrifter, 1905, р. 106, pl. 7,
fig. 24; Libellus (?/ septentrionalis Østrup, Medd. om Grønland, 1895,
р. 439, pl. 8, fig. 97.
Found in some samples from Danmarks Науп and the coastal
water, in 1906—1908, but scattered, and perhaps, as said under
Achnanthes, sometimes not distinguished from the other band-like
species.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species, known from the coasts of Greenland,
from Barent and from Murman Sea.
38. Navicula Vanhöffenii Gran, Bibliotheca Botanica, Heft 42,
1897, p. 9, pl. 1, figs. 1—3; Nord. Plankton, XIX, 1905, p. 124; Jorgensen,
Bergens Museums Skrifter, 1905, р. 105, pl. 7, fig. 22; N. septentrionalis
Cleve, Bih. К. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 22, afd. 3, No. 4, 1896,
р. 11, non Østrup, nec Grunow.
Recorded from four samples from Danmarks Havn (Aug.—Septm.
1907, July 1908), but rare, and perhaps overseen.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species, known from the coast of Greenland
and arctic Norway, from Barent and Murman Seas, further from the inner
Baltic (in spring).
Amphiprora Ehrbg., 1843.
39. Amphiprora hyperborea (Grun.) Gran, Bibl. Botanica, Heft 42,
1897, p.10; Fauna Arctica, III, 3, 1904, p. 543, pl. 17, fig. 14; Nord.
Plankton, XIX, 1905, p. 127; A. paludosa, var.? hyperborea Grun. in
Cleve et Grunow, K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 17, No. 2, 1880,
p. 62, pl.5, fig. 86.
In 1906 only found in one sample from the pack-ice and in 1907
in two samples from Danmarks Havn, in 1908 found scattered over
the whole area from Danmarks Havn to the outer part of the pack-
ice; always in few specimens. June— September.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species known from Greenland, arctic Norway,
Barent and Murman Seas.
Nitzschia Hassall, 1845.
40. Nitzschia frigida Grun., in Cleve et Grunow, K. Svenska Vet.
Akad. Handl., Bd. 17, No. 2, 1880, р. 94, pl. 5, fig. 101; Gran Bibl.
botanica, Heft 42, 1897, p. 10, pl. 1, fig. 11; Nord. Plankton, XIX 1905,
р. 129:
Found scattered in three samples from Danmarks Hayn (Aug.
1907) and in three samples from the coastal water (Aug. 1906, July
1908).
Distrib. Arctic coast species, not true plankton form, known from the
Arctic coast and the inner Baltic.
282 С. Н. OSTENFELD.
41. Nitzschia seriata Cleve, Vega Exp. vetensk. iaktt., Ва. 3, 1883,
pl. 38, fig. 75; Gran, Nord. Plankton, XIX, 1905, p. 129, fig. 174; N.
fraudulenta Cleve, 15. Ann. Rep. Fishery Board for Scotland, part III,
1897, р. 300, fig. 11; Synedra Holsalie Hensen, 5. Ber. Komm. Unters.
Deutschen Meere, 1887, р. 91, plea, fig. 50.
Only found in Danmarks Науп (Aug. 1907, July 1908) in four
samples, but mostly rare.
Distrib. Widely distributed in open seas and along the coasts, pro-
bably a neritic species of northern, but not arctic character.
42. Nitzschia delicatissima Cleve, A Treatise of Phytoplankton,
1897, р. 24, pl. 2, fig. 22; Gran, Nord. Plankton, XIX, 1905, р. 130.
Found together with the preceding species in two samples from
Danmarks Havn, Aug. 1907.
Distrib. Much like the preceding, but more restricted.
Nitzschiella Rabenh., 1864.
43. Nitzschiella closterium (Ehrbg.) Rabenh., Fl. Europ. Algar., I,
1864, р. 163; Ceratoneis closterium Ehrbg., Kreidethierchen, 1840, р. 64,
pl. 4, fig. 7; Nitzschia closterium W. Smith, Syn. British Diatoms I,
р. 42, pl. 15, fig. 120; Gran, Nord. Plankton, XIX, 1905, р. 129, fig. 172.
Found together with the preceding in two samples from Dan-
marks Havn (Aug. 1907) and further in one sample from the coastal
water (July 1908); a littoral species which sometimes occurs in
plankton as it often inhabits mucilage of other organisms.
Distrib. Ubiquitous along the coasts.
II. Flagellatee.
A. Chrysomonadinee.
Dinobryon Ehrbg., 1838.
1. Dinobryon pellucidum Levander, Acta Soc. Fauna & Flora
Fenn., 12, No. 2, 1894, р. 31, pl. 2, fig. 1; Dinodendron balticum Schütt;
Dinobryon b. Lemmermann, Ber. Deutsch. bot. Ges., 1900, p. 514,
pl. 18, figs. 9—10; Nord. Plankton, XXI, p. 4, figs. 13—14.
Single specimens occurred in a sample from Danmarks Havn in
1906, but besides that the species was distributed in the outer parts
of the pack-ice, east of ca. 12° W. Long., in some samples it was
common, especially in 1908 (in 1906 found only in two samples).
When the temperature rose above 7° and the salinity over 34 oo it
disappeared. July—August.
Distrib. A boreal neritic species, known from the coastal waters of
Greenland, Iceland, Spitsbergen, Norway, Еагбез and the Baltic.
Phæocystis Lagerheim, 1893.
2. Phæocystis Pouchetii (Hariot) Lagerh., Botan. Notiser, 1893,
p. 32; Ofv. К. Sv. Vet. Akad. Férhandl., 1896, р. 277, figs. 1—5; Osten-
feld, Arch. f. Protistenkunde, Ш, 1904, р. 295, fig. 1.
Found scattered over the area, in two samples of 1908 rather
common, but not in great quantities, probably because the season
has been too late. Not seen in the samples taken in Danmarks
Havn, but only recorded from the coastal water and the pack-ice.
July —August.
Distrib. A boreal-arctic neritic species which often plays a conspicu-
ous part in the plankton, f. i. in Davis and Denmark Straits, around Iceland,
off northern Norway, etc.
В. Coccolithophoride.
Coccolithophora Lohmann, 1902.
3. Coccolithophora pelagica (Wallich) Lohmann, Arch. f. Proti-
stenkunde, I, 1902, р. 138; Coccosphera р. Wallich, Ann. Mag. Nat.
284 С. H. OSTENFELD.
Hist., 1877, p. 348, pl. 17; Murray and Blackman, Trans. Roy. Soc.
London, Ser. В, 1898, vol. 190, р. 439, pl. 16, figs. 6—10; С. atlantica
Ostenfeld, Zool. Anzeiger, 22, 1899, p. 436, fig. 1.
Is was rather surprising to find a Coccolithophora in the plank-
ton from such high latitudes and in such arctic water. It was seen
in 1905 in three samples from outside the pack-ice and in 1908 in
three samples also outside the pack-ice, but a little more southwards;
in two of the latter ones it was rather common, especially in lumps
of mucilage. It did not occur in any of the samples west of 11°
W.Long. On closer examination it appeared that all the specimens
examined were dead, as no nucleus nor chromatophores, etc., were
present. July —-August.
Disrib. A temperate oceanic organism, very distributed and common
in the Atlantic Ocean.
Pontosphæra Lohmann, 1902.
4. Pontosphæra borealis nov. sp. Cellule solitariæ globose, 17—
22 и; coccolithi elliptici, 8—4 и longi, рат vel leviter concavi, omnes
similes; flagella et chromatophori in spec. preservatis non distincti;
nucleus adest. Fig. 11.
In seven samples (three from 1908 and four from 1906) from
the outer part of the pack-ice and outside it (i. e. not W. of 11° W.
Long.) I found an interesting organism, viz.: a
species of the genus Pontosphera. As mentioned
above the occurrence of Coccolithophoride in
arctic water was a new thing, but the Cocco-
lithophora present was dead. It is another mat-
Fig. 11. Pontosphæra ter with the Pontosphera, as its plasma showed
borealis n. sp. 800 t. m. atk
that the cells most probably were living when
caught. It is then the first record of a species of Coccolithophoride
living in arctic water. The species found must be referred to the
genus Pontophera, as it is understood by H. LOHMANN, but I can
not identify it with the species hitherto described (LOHMANN, 1. c.,
р. 129—332). The cells are mostly globose, rarely of a more oblong
form, the coccoliths are plane or slightly concave, all of the same
shape, elliptic and lying closely together, covering the whole surface
of the cell. As only preserved material was examined no flagella
were found, and it was not possible to discover chromatophores,
whereas a nucleus was seen. By using acids the coccoliths disap-
peared immediately.
The new species resembles P. inermis Lohm., but has not the
distinct naked pole (“Geisselpol”) for the flagella. July—August.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 285
In most of the samples it occurred together with Cocc. pelagica,
but it did not occur in greater quantities, perhaps because it is so
small that it is only in a small part caught by the nets.
С. Silicoflagellatæ.
Distephanus Stöhr, 1880.
5. Distephanus speculum (Ehrbg.) Haeckel, Challenger Rep.,
Radiolaria, 1889, p. 1560; Lemmermann, Ber. Deutsch. bot. Ges., 1901,
p. 263, pl. XI, figs.; Nord. Plankton, XXI, p. 31, figs. 103—104.
Most of the specimens found in the samples must be referred
to var. septenarius (Ehbg.) Jorg., Г. regularis Lemm., 1. с., fig. 104.
Found scattered over the area; in 1907 in three samples from
Danmarks Науп, in 1908 also in the coastal water, and in 1906 in
three samples in the outer part of the pack-ice. As the specimens
examined had plasma, they must have been living when caught.
Distrib. (of the form) Karajakfjord in West-Greenland, Baltic; (of the
species) oceanic species of worldwide occurrence, but hardly arctic.
Appendix: Pterospermatacee.
Pterosperma Pouchet, 1894.
Pterosperma Vanhöffenii (Jorg.) Ostenfeld, Vidensk. Medd.
Naturh. For., København 1901, р. 151; Pterosphera У. Jorgensen;
Pterocystis У. Lohmann, Eier u. sogen. Cysten der Plankton-Expedition,
1904, p.44, pl. 7, fig. 10.
Single specimens found in several samples (10) in 1908, both
near the coast (in Danmarks Havn) and in the outer part of the
pack-ice. At least some of the specimens were empty. July—August.
Distrib. A temperate oceanic organism, known especially from the
North Atlantic.
28 —9—1910.
XD
MARINE PLANKTON
FROM
THE EAST-GREENLAND SEA
(W. OF 6° W. LONG. AND N. OF 73° 30’ N. LAT.)
COLLECTED DURING THE “DANMARK EXPEDITION” 1906—1908
12200 ZON
BY
C#H-OSTENFELD
1910
INTRODUCTION
he present paper is based upon the examination of a number
of plankton samples collected during the “Danmark Expedi-
tion” to N. E.-Greenland 1906—1908. The samples have been col-
lected by means of fine-meshed tow-nets and are all surface samples.
In the introduction to another paper on the Diatoms and Fla-
gellates of the same samples I have rendered, more in details, an
account of the data concerning the collection, etc. It will therefore,
I think, be sufficient to repeat here the more important data.
The samples examined originate all from more or less ice-filled
water which may be divided into three areas:
1°. Samples taken in the pack-ice (drift-ice) in August 1906 and
July 1908. The geographical area is about 73° 30'—76° N. Lat. and
6°—13° W. Long.
2°. Samples taken in the coastal water west of the pack-ice
and east of the coast of Greenland, between 76°—78° N. Lat.; August
1906 and July 1908.
3°. Samples taken in Danmarks Havn, Germania Land, 76° 46° N.
Lat., 18°43’ W. Long., during the stay of the Expedition from the
autumn of 1906 to July 21°! 1908.
As already pointed out in my above mentioned paper, the sam-
ples from the last area are of greatest interest, but unfortunately it
has not been possible for the Expedition to take samples during
the whole time of the stay, at regular short intervals. There are
only a few samples from October 1906, circa 10 from June —Sep-
tember 1907 and a couple from July 1908 when the steamer left
the harbour.
From the opposite coast of Greenland, the west coast, we have
VANHOFFEN’S valuable regular collection of the plankton of Kara-
jak Fjord, са. 70° М. Lat., upon which К. BRANDT (1896) has based
his interesting paper on arctic Tintinnodea. It is but natural that
the samples from these two points on the coasts of Greenland are
to be compared; and the following list will show a close resem-
XLII. 22
290 С. H. OSTENFELD.
blance between them. Almost the same species of Tintinnodea occur
in both places, but it is remarkable that three species of Tintin-
nopsis (viz.: T. nitida Bdt., T. sinuata Bdt. and T. sacculus Bdt.) des-
cribed by BRANDT from the Karajak Fjord, have not been seen in
our samples; perhaps the more northern latitude of Danmarks Havn
(6--7° higher) and the thereof resulting more strictly arctic condi-
tions of life may have some relation to the absence.
Besides the Tintinnodea which are best taken by means of sur-
face hauls with fine-meshed nets, the samples contain but few Pro-
tozoa, viz.: two Radiolaria, one Foraminifera and the resting stage
of an unknown organism.
The Radiolaria have, taken in general, not their home in the
surface water, and, no doubt, vertical hauls would have given many
more species. Globigerina bulloides, one of the few pelagic Foramini-
fera, is an atlantic organism. Lastly we have the peculiar resting
stage, HENSEN’s “Sternhaarstatoblast” which has hitherto been known
only from the Baltic and the occurrence of which consequently is
of some zoogeographical interest. Nothing is known on its place in
the system, and it may perhaps be a stage of some Metazoon.
In the following papers remarks on the species mentioned in
the list and on their occurrence in the East-Greenland Sea are to
be found:
BRANDT, K.: Die Tintinnen, in Zoologische Ergebn. d. von 4. Ges. für Erdkunde zu
Berlin unter Leitung Dr. von Drygalski’s ausges. Grönlandexp. nach Vanhöffen’s
Sammlungen bearbeitet. — Bibl. Zoologica, Heft 20, 1896.
—: Die Tintinnodeen der Plankton-Expedition. Atlas u. Tafelerklarungen 1906; Sy-
stematischer Teil 1907,
CLEVE, P. T.: Plankton coll. by the Swedish Exp. to Spitsbergen in 1898. — К. Sven-
ska Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 32, No. 3, 1899.
—: Report on the Plankton coll. by the Swedish Exp. to Greenland in 1899. — Ibi-
dem, Bd. 34, No. 3, 1900.
Damas, D. et KoEroEp, E.: Le Plankton de la Mer du Grönland, in: Due d’Orléans:
Croisiere Océanographique accomplie А bord de La Belgica dans la Mer du Grén-
land 1905. Bruxelles 1909.
JORGENSEN, E.: Ueber die Tintinnodeen der norwegischen Westküste. — Bergens Mu-
seums Aarbog 1899, No. II, 1899.
—: Protophyten und Protozoén im Plankton aus der norwegischen Westküste. —
Ibid.. No. VI, 1900.
—: Protistenplankton aus dem Nordmeere in den Jahren 1897—1900. — Ibid., 1900,
No. VI, 1901.
—: Protistplankton, in: O. Nordgaard: Hydrographical and biological Investigations
in Norwegian Fiords. — Bergens Museums Skrifter, 1905.
HENSEN, V.: Uber die Bestimmung des Planktons. — 5. Bericht der Kommission zur
wissenschaftlichen Untersuchung der deutschen Meere in Kiel fir die Jahre
1882—86. Kiel 1887.
Poporsky, A.: Die nordischen Acantharien. — In: K. Brandt u. C. Apstein: Nordisches
Plankton, Kiel u. Leipzig. 3. Lief. 1905.
I. Tintinnodea.
In the list of species given beneath I follow Branprt’s large
work of 1907 where we find nearly all our knowledge concerning
the systematical matters of this group of Infusorians put down.
Tintinnopsis Stein, 1867.
1. Tintinnopsis karajacensis Brandt, 1896, p. 57, pl. 3, fig. 5;
1906-07, р. 162, pl. 19, figs. 5, 7, 10—12, pl. 26, fig. 3, (varr.) pl. 19,
figs. 1—2, 9, 19, 20, pl. 26, fig. 9; H. Laackmann, Wiss. Meeresunters.,
Ва. 10, Abt. Kiel, 1906, p. 21, pl. 1, figs. 12—14.
Nov. var. lagenoides (Fig. 1).
Differs from the main species in the inflated lower end of the
house and in the scarceness of foreign bodies upon its wall.
In three samples (August—Septm. 1907) from Danmarks Havn I
found rather sparsely a Tintinnopsis form which has caused me
much trouble. It stands in many respects
between Т. karajacensis Bdt. and T. sacculus
Bdt., but as I had not been able to find the
peculiar structure of the “Primarwaben”
characterizing T. sacculus (see BRANDT 1907,
p. 164), I prefer to keep my form under
T. karajacensis. From this it differs in the Fig. 1. Tintinnopsis kara-
inflated lower end of the house and the di- Jacensis Brandt var. lage-
noides п. var. 250 +. m.
stinct neck. The foreign bodies are small
and rather few. I have not seen more than one nucleus.
The dimensions are as follows:
ег. 80—88 м,
Breadthyor the шеек. 32 м,
— of the lower part.. 40 м.
It seems related to the var. b from Tocantin figured by BRANDT
1906, and perhaps to Laackmann’s T. Lohmanni (1. с., р. 20, pl. 1,
figs. 10—11). °
Distrib.: (main species) Karajak Fjord, Davis Strait; Kiel Fjord; Nor-
wegian Fjords; off Helder; (varr.) off Borneo; Tocantin; off Bombay; Iceland.
i 22*
С. Н. OSTENFELD.
iw)
Ne)
iw)
2. Tintinnopsis? pellucida (Cleve) Brandt, 1906, p. 18, 1907,
р. 172, pl. 93, figs. 8, 14, 15; Пан
nus (7) pellucidus Cleve, 1899, р. 24,
pl. 1, fig. 4; Т. bottnicus Brandt, 1896,
р. 53, pl. 3, fig. 11; Leprotintinnus bott-
nicus Jorgensen, 1899, p. 10; 1900,
pl. 2, fig. 3; L. pellucidus Jorgensen,
1901%p 18. (5.2).
In one sample from September
1907 from Danmarks Науп and in
two July-samples from the pack-ice
T. pellucida was present, but rather
rare. The annexed figures show the
variability of the houses: rings are
present or not, the lower part is
straight or faintly curved, the foreign
bodies are more os less abundant,
ete:
The contracted animal figured in
the left figure had two distint nuclei.
Fig. 2. Tintinnopsis pellucida (Cleve) Ee a anus, SA 8e Г
z Brandt 950m! (Brandt 0,2—0,27 mm.) Breadth 32 and
48 » (narrowest and largest part).
=
Distrib.: Karajak Fjord; Davis Strait; №. and W. of Spitsbergen; Nor-
wegian Coast off Bergen.
‚yttarocylis Fol, 1881.
3. Cyttarccylis pseudannulata Jorgensen, 1901, р. 15, pl. 2,
fig. 28; Brandt 1906—07, р. 269, pl. 28, fig. 8, pl. 29, fig. 1; С. annulata
Jorgensen, 1899, р. 36.
Only found in few specimens in a single sample from the pack-
ice in August 1006.
Distrib.: Irminger Sea; №. Е. of Jan Mayen; Norwegian West-coast.
4. Cyttarocylis denticulata Ehrbg., Jorg. emend.; Jorgensen
1899, р. 31, pl. 2, figs. 13, 15; 1901, р. 12, pl. 3, figs. 25—26; 1905, р. 144;
Brandt 1906-07, р. 232, pl. 37, figs. 9—10, 15—17; non С. denticulata
Brandt 1896, р. 62, пес Ostenfeld, in М. Knudsen & С. Ostenfeld,
Iagttagelser over Overfladevandets Temperatur, Saltholdighed og Plank-
ton paa islandske og gronlandske Skibsrouter i 1898, Kobenhavn
1899, p. 62.
The forms belonging to the group C. denticulata are of great
importance for the plankton of the area here treated of. When we
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 293
—
follow JORGENSEN (1. с.) and Branpt’s latest paper (1906 —07), we
have the following three “varieties” in the samples, all neritic
varieties.
a. var. typica Jorg., 1899, p. 31, etc. (Fig. 3). This variety shows
250 Е. m.
Fig. 3. Cyttarocylis denticulata Ehrbg. var. typica Jorg.
a great variability; all the specimens given in the fig. 3 are from
one sample (Danmarks Havn, Aug. 15 1907) with exception of the
294 С. Н. OSTENFELD.
largest one (placed most at right). It we compare the specimens
with the figures quoted above from JORGENSEN’s and BRANDT’s papers,
we shall find a close resemblance. The smaller specimens answer
to JORGENSEN’S f. acuta (1901, p. 12), the larger ones to his f. caudata
(1901. p. 12), but I have not succeeded in finding any definite limit
between them.
All the specimens which I reckon to the var. typica have in
common: long and well-developed teeth in the mouth of the house,
the lower end not sharply set off from the main part, but of vari-
able length and often forming a distinct “Fortsatz”; the structure of
the house-wall is not coarse.
Var. typica was dominant in the samples from the pack-ice in
August 1906, but not present in the coastal water. It was found
sparingly in the samples from Danmarks Havn in October 1906
(under the ice), but mostly only empty houses. In 1907 it was
dominant in Danmarks Науп in Aug.—September. In July—Au-
gust 1908 it occurred sparingly in the samples from the coastal
water, while dominant in those from the pack-ice and again rare
outside this, when the temp. rose from 0°—2° C. to 6°—7°. In the
last region where I found it with resting spores (cfr. LAACKMANN,
Wiss. Meeresunters., Abt. Kiel, 1906), the specimens were small and
approached the oceanic species С. edentata Bdt. (Г. parumdentata Bdt.).
The dimensions of the houses of some of the measured speci-
mens follow here:
Length Breadth Length Breadth
265 u 85 u 320 u 75 u
300 - 80 - 384 - 84 -
305 - 80 - 416 - 84 -
312 - 80 - 440 - 75 -
b. var. gigantea (Bdt.) Jorgensen, 1899, р. 35, pl. 3, figs. 26—28;
1901, р. 14; Brandt, 1906—07, р. 233, pl. 38, figs. 2,3,8,9; C. gigantea
Brandt, 1896, р. 63, pl. 3, figs. 21—24; Ostenfeld, I. c., 1899, р. 62.
(Fig. 4).
In the samples from Danmarks Havn, Sept. 1907, I found together
with the preceding form a still larger one, which agrees well with
var. gigantea. It differed from var. {ypica in its greater length and
the short teeth in the mouth of the house; the structure of the
house-wall was the same.
Besides in the two mentioned samples, it was found very spar-
ingly in July 1908 in and off Danmarks Havn (two samples) and in
the pack-ice (two samples). It was not always easy to distinguish
it from var. typica.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 995
Dimensions (in /): Length and Breadth 615 x 78 and 650 x 80.
с. var. robusta Jørgensen, 1901, p. 13, pl. 3, fig. 22; 1905, р. 144;
Brandt, 1906 —07, р. 234, pl. 38, figs.4, 10. (Fig. 5).
In many samples where var. {ypica was present, another prob-
ably well-distinguished form also was found. It had about the same
size as that, but differed in the rather
sharply set-of “Fortsatz”, the small
and broad teeth of the mouth and
in the much coarser wall of the
house-wall. The latter character was
very easily seen under low power
of magnification as the transparence
of the wall was quite another. No
doubt it is the var. robusta of Jor-
Fig. 4. Cyttarocylis denticulata Ehrbg. Fig. 5. Cyttarocylis denticulata
var. gigantea (Bdt.) Jorg. 250 t. m. Ehrbg. var. robusta Jorg. 250 t. m.
GENSEN (1. с.), as my fig. 5 will prove. Sometimes specimens were
found which had not the well-developed “Fortsatz”, but elsewhere
agreed with the var. robusta; these may be named f. subrotundata
Jorg. (1899, p. 34, pl. 2, figs. 20—21, pl. 3, figs. 22, 25, 29; Brandt,
1906—07, р. 235, pl. 37, figs. 12—14), which I subordinate under var.
robusta.
The variety was dominant, together with var. fypica, in the
296 С. Н. OSTENFELD.
samples from the pack-ice in August 1906 and disappeared together
with it when reaching the coastal water, but more slowly (the
empty houses are perhaps more persistent than those of var. {ypica).
It was present together with var. typica in Aug.— Sept. 1907 in Dan-
marks Науп, but not common. In 1908 (July—August) it was not
present in the coastal water, but appeared in the pack-ice (probably
only empty houses) and became common in the samples from the
outer margin of and outside the ice.
Dimensions (in 4): 325 x 80, 420 x 80.
Distrib. (of C. denticulata): Neritic northern species of wide distribu-
tion, known along the coasts from New Foundland north- and eastwards to
the Baltic Sea.
Ptychocylis Brandt, 1886.
5. Ptychocylis obtusa Brandt, 1896, p. 59, pl. 3, figs. 18, 15;
1906—07, р. 310, pl. 57, fig. 8; Р. urnula, var. obtusa Jorgensen, 1901,
р. 18, pl. 3, fig. 32; Р. Drygalskyi Brandt, 1896, р. 59, pl. 3, fig. 14;
Р. obtusa, var. Drygalskyi Bdt., 1906 — 07, р. 312, pl. 55, figs. 1—3; pl.
56, figs. 3, 4; pl. 57, fig. 10; P. urnula var. digitalis, Jorgensen 1901,
р. 17, pl. 2, Нез 29. 30, pl. 3, fig. 31; 1905, р. 143. (Fig. 6).
In samples from Danmarks Havn, Aug.—Septm. 1907, P. obtusa
was found in some numbers, but not common; further it was pre-
sent in Juiy 1908 in some
samples from the coastal
water and here not so un-
common. It was with some
hesitation that I named all
the specimens examined
P. obtusa, as at least the
smaller ones also may be
named var. Drygalskyi, but
it has been impossible to
me to find any distinct boundary between the main species and the
so-called variety. To me it seems, as if var. Drygalskyi is only the
smaller individuals of P. obtusa; and the annexed sketchs will show
my meaning. Therefore I name them all P. obtusa.
AAnanans an ar AAS
Fig. 6. Ptychocylis obtusa Brandt. 250 t. m.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species known from Davis Strait, Labrador
Stream, Norwegian Sea, Norway, Spitsbergen.
6. Ptychocylis urnula (Clap. & Lachm.) Bdt., var. acuta Brandt,
1906, р. 28, pl. 56, figs. 1, 2, 6; pl. 5/7, fig. 7; Р. асша Brandt 1896;
о. 59. pl. 3, fig. 16.
In two samples from the outer part of the pack-ice in August
1906 a few specimens of а Ptychocylis were observed which I refer
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 297
to the arctic variety of Р. urnula characterized (in spite of its name)
by a less acute lower end of the house and smaller size. It forms
a transition to the above mentioned species.
Distrib. (of var. acuta) Davis Strait; (main species) northern oceanic
species.
Tintinnus Schrank, 1803.
7. Tintinnus acuminatus Clap. & Lachm., var. secatus Brandt,
1906, р. 32, pl. 66, fig.5; 1907, р. 389; Т. secatus Brandt, 1896, р. 51,
pl. 3, fig. 12.
Only found once in a sample from the outer part of the pack-
ice (Aug. 1906).
Distrib. (of var. secatus) Karajak Fjord, Davis Strait, Labrador Stream;
(main species) northern oceanic species of wide distribution.
8. Tintinnus norvegicus (Daday) Brandt, var. gracilis Brandt,
1906, p. 30, pl. 62, figs. 2, 7; 1907, p. 407; T. gracilis Brandt, 1896,
р. 54, pl. 3, fig. 7.
The form of the group T. norvegicus present in the area has the
cylindrical shape of the house and the well-developed teeth of the
mouth, characterizing Branpt’s T. gracilis.
It was found in the samples from the pack-ice in August 1906
and in July 1908 and further outside the ice in August 1908; it was
always rather rare, but because of its small size it is only to a
small degree kept by the nets.
Distrib. (of the var. gracilis): Karajak Fjord, Davis Strait;%of the main
species) Davis Strait, Labrador Stream, North Atlantic, off Bergen.
9. Tintinnus vitreus Brandt, 1896, р. 54, pl.3, figs. 8—9; 1906
—07, р. 438, pl. 66, fig. 7. (Fig. 7). |
Fig. 7. Tintinnus vitreus Brandt. 250 t. m.
In his paper on the Tintinnodea from VANHÔFFEN’S material
from Karajak Fjord BRANDT has described a rare Tintinnus which
298 С. Н. OSTENFELD.
has not been seen since then. This species I have found not rarely
in a single sample from Danmarks Havn, Aug. 15 1907, and I have
been able to study it a little more in details. A single specimen was
further found in a sample from the coastal water off Cape Amelie
in Aug. 1906.
My specimens differ in some points from Branpt’s description,
but I think it correct to retain them under his species. The houses
are 210—240 » long (BRANDT gives 0,14—0,15 mm.) and 120—140 u
broad. The lower end has mostly a small tip, more rarely it is
rounded as in BRANDT's figure; and near the mouth a varying number
of rings are seen, but they are very fine and often difficult to ob-
serve. The wall of the cylindrical house is hyaline and with high
power of magnification the fine “Primärwaben” are discernible;
sometimes very small foreign bodies are sparingly fixed upon the
wall. The animal itself has two nuclei and a large vacuole; it is
adherent to the innerside of the tip of the house by means of a
stalk, — as far as preserved material (in alcohol) allows to judge.
The species seems to have a very short time of plankton life;
it was present in Danmarks Hayn in one sample from Aug. 15, but
not in samples from Aug. 4 or 24th of 1907, and further in one
sample from Aug. 15! 1906; temperature of the water was —+ 0,4?
and -- 0,4° C. respectively.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species, hitherto only known from Karajak Fjord
(March) and in our area (August).
IL Radiolaria.
As said above (p. 290), surface samples are not suitable for Ra-
diolarians, and besides arctic waters have few species; it is then but
natural that very few forms were seen in the collection.
A. Acanthometrida.
In three samples from the autumn 1907 from Danmarks Hayn
and in five samples from the coast water in July 1908 undetermined
forms of Acanthometrida were seen. As far as I could find, the
transverse section of the spines was quadrangular and по basal
wing-cross was developed; it may then have been a species of
Acanthonia, most probably A. ligurina Heckel (cfr. Popofsky 1905).
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 999
B. Nassellaria, Dicyrtida.
Amphimelissa Jorg., 1905.
Amphimelissa setosa (Cleve) Jorgensen, 1905, p. 137, pl. 18,
fig. 109; Botryopyle selosa Cleve, 1899, p.27, pl. 1, fig. 10.
Two specimens of the group Dicyrtida were seen in a sample
from Danmarks Havn, Aug. 15!" 1907, and they agreed well with the
species here quoted.
Distrib. West of Norway; fjords of northern Norway; north and west
of Spitsbergen; East Greenland Sea at 71°—72° N. Lat.; Atlantic 45° N. Lat.
49° W. Long.
Ш. Foraminifera.
In a single sample from the inner part of the pack-ice, July 1908,
I found a few specimens of Globigerina, most probably G. bulloides
d’Orb., a well known, widely distributed oceanic plankton organism.
IV. Incertae sedis.
In his famous work on plankton HENSEN (1887) has mentioned
and figured an obscure organism which he named “Sternhaar-
statoblast”, as occurring in the Baltic; this organism was found in
a sample from September 10 1907 from Danmarks Havn, but very
rare.
3—10—1910.
1” Um we .
CDN SUR
Le ve
SU 1547099 9
| | | ЮР RE i ‘au
DR LT б ях pia DE TE i | NEJ VERNE
5 PUG Lee ay = nah | ЗО
Tyr (lig
$
NH ' i
$. s i | у L р a у
7
à
_ | A så » at ey 4
Kj dl i р
u a 1
u у
}
=
7 i В or
>
О
в
à .
à
u р} i | #
4
. a 5
| b | i
_ :
5 | rh i 7 x i i
Ce å
i i D LUE, 0 Car >
i
2 7
"A0 i р 5 в
FU arty sf. hy :
i В 2 er и, = i
=, i
i . | м
dura ve } Le! | ii i bd
TAL) i ” i | i i У ae
i
4 i К i Lip р ’
$ .
I :
U 3 L 1 U i
ТИ и i), | р 1
|
en je g L | ЦИТ
"4 ras ie 19; ? | | i i Lai (9
a in
| =
.
\
5 ne
=
|
Cs
‘
i
N
i
i
-
à
an]
= 8
— i
i
i р
{
= 4
i ©
5
| у =
4
| i
é
.
»
=
~ r =
XI.
MARINE PLANKTON
FROM
THE EAST-GREENLAND SEA
(W. OF 6° W. LONG. AND №. OF 73° 30° N. LAT.)
COLLECTED DURING THE “DANMARK EXPEDITION” (1906—1908)
i” BERIDINIALES
BY
OVE PAULSEN
Вэ во
XLIII.
he plankton samples collected during the Danmark-Expedi-
tion by Mr. А. LUNDAGER may be grouped in the following
categories:
1. Samples collected in the open ocean east of the Greenland
ice on the way out in 1906 and homeward in 1908. Like Dr. OsTEN-
FELD, Who has worked out the Diatoms and Flagellates, I think
these samples are of no special interest. All of them have been
taken in July—-August, and оп the way home they were collected
with so small intervals that it has been quite sufficient to examine
only a selected number of them.
2. Samples collected in the drifting ice (pack-ice) off East Green-
land in August 1906 as the “Danmark” went in to the Greenland
coast, and in July 1908 when it was homeward bound. On the way
out a great many samples were collected, until 12 in a day and a
night, and as the speed was moderate and the course very curved
they are very close together and many of them quite like each other.
Therefore, only a certain number of them has been thoroughly
investigated.
3. Samples collected in August 1906 and July 1908 near the
coast of East-Greenland, from off Koldewey Island (са. 76° 30' N. Lat.)
to ca. 78° N. Lat., thus in the coastal water.
4. Samples collected in Danmarks Havn (Denmark harbour),
at 76° 46’ N. Lat., 18° 43’ W. Long., where the expedition stayed
about two years, from August 1906 till July 1908. Unfortunately
these samples were not taken with regular intervals but rather
occasionally: there is about a dozen of samples from the summer
1907, and in 1908 samples were collected on July 21% when “Dan-
mark” left the harbour.
In the following pages a list is given of all the Peridiniales
found in these samples, and some of the species are accompanied
by figures and remarks. A general description of the plankton will
be giwen in a concluding paper by Dr. OSTENFELD and the present
author.
93"
304 OVE PAULSEN.
The following papers deal with the Peridiniales of the East-
Greenland sea:
CLEVE, P. T.: Report on the Plankton collected by the Swedish expedition to Spitz-
bergen in 1898. (К. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl. 32, 1899).
PAULSEN, Ove: Plankton investigations in the waters round Iceland in 1903 (Meddel.
fra Kommis. for Havundersog. Ser. Plankton. Bd. I. No. 1. 1904). (Cited as:
Plankton invest Iceland 1903).
Ввосн, Hs.: Plankton tables. In Damas et Koefoed: Le plankton de la mer du Grön-
land. (Duc d'Orléans: Croisière océanographique accomplie 2 bord de la Belgica
dans la mer du Grönland 1905). Bruxelles 1909.
PAULSEN, Ove: Plankton investigations in the waters round Iceland and in the North
Atlantic in 1904. (Meddel. fra Kommis. for Havundersog. Ser. Pankton. Bd. I.
No. 8), 1909.
BrocH, HyaLmar: Das Plankton (Zoologische Ergebnisse der Schwedischen Expedition
nach Spitzbergen 1908. Teill, 2). (К. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl. 45, No.9. 1910)1.
(Cited as: Broch, Spitzbergen Plankton).
Yet, for easy reference, by each species the following paper is cited:
PAULSEN, Ove: Peridiniales (Nordisches Plankton, herausgeg. у. Brandt u. Apstein
XVIII). Kiel 1908.
Dinophysis Ehrenberg.
1. Dinophysis norvegica Claparède & Lachmann, Mém. inst.
nat. Genev. 1859, p. 407, tab. XX, fig. 19. Paulsen Nord. Plankton,
р. 14, fig. 11—12. Broch Spitzbergen plankton 1910, р. 31, fig. 1, I.
D. acuta auct. plur., non Сар. Lachm.
Single specimens, agreeing with var. crassior, PAULSEN 1. с. and
also with Ввосн$ drawing, were found in the outer part of the pack-
ice and in the open sea.
Distrib. Seems to be a neritie and boreal but hardly arctic species.
2. Dinophysis arctica Mereschkowsky, Archiv f. mikroskop.
Anatomie 1879, p. 177, tab. XI, fig. 19. Paulsen Nord. Plankton
p. 15, fig. 14 (a bad figure), Broch Spitzbergen plankton p. 31, fig. 1,
II. D. granulata Cleve & auct. plur.
Ввосн (1. с.) says that this species bears fine and distant poroids
on the surface while D. norvegica is coarsely areolated. My annexed
fig. 1 shows that this is not always the case, this specimen (and
many others) being very coarsely areolated. Besides, I have often
found cells of this species provided with small protuberances at the
! In this paper which appeared as I had finished the examination of the plankton
samples, Bürschrı’s theory on the intercalary striae as growth-marks is shown to
hold good, the growth of the different species is studied in detail, and the
arrangement of their plates is expressed in formulae. It will really be an ad-
vantage if the plate-arrangement proves to be so constant as supposed by Ввосн.
— A lack in Ввосн’$ paper is that he gives no measures of the organisms, he
confines himself to criticise those given by me. His paper will be often men-
tioned in the following.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 305
lower end (see the drawing), like those of D. acuminata. Newer-
theless I think it would be premature to unite these two species
D. arctica having а much shorter and broader form. J6r-
GENSEN (Bergens Museums Aarbog 1900, No. Ш, р. 19)
names the species D. acuminata var. granulala. Length
36—42 и. — D. arctica was found in several samples from
the pack-ice and the open sea outside it, mostly few
specimens, and as single ones in the coast water and in ae 1. RAR
physis arcti-
Danmarks Havn. ca. 375 t. m.
Distrib. Arctic species.
3. Dinophysis rotundata Claparéde & Lachmann Mém. inst.
nat. Génévois 1859, p. 409, tab. XX, fig. 16; Paulsen Nord. Plankton
В. 17, tie. 18:
Fig. 2 represents а cell with a very coarsely areolated wall and
broad intercalary band. The epitheca is relatively large, and obli-
que. This cell, whose length was 60 м, is supposed
to be an old one. Other cells with finer areolated
surfaces were 40—52 long. From this it may be
seen that the arctic specimens are somewhat bigger
than those from southern waters, whose length was
given by Bergh and in Nordisches Plankton by me
as 48 y.
Fig. 2. Dinophysis i ет г: > à eee
Е re eae DCO SIS rotundata was found very sparimgly
both in the coastal water, the pack-ice and outside it.
Distrib. Boreal oceanic species, widely distributed in the northern At-
lantic and its tributaries.
Gonyaulax Diesing.
4. Gonyaulax triacantha Jørgensen, Bergens Museums Ааг-
bog 1899, No. VI, p. 35. Paulsen Nord. Plankton p. 28.
А single specimen was found in а sample from the pack-ice
(1906) but a great many in a sample from Danmarks Havn in Sep-
tember 1907 (Water 0°).
Distrib. Arctic neritic species, known from Alaska, Iceland, West coast
of Norway. In the North Sea very rare.
5. Gonyaulax sp. / KÆR ie N
In some samples from the pack- SE = \/ Was,
A 7 В —-
ice (1906) the little organism represen-
ted т fig. 3 was found. Length 20— 24 д.
I have not succeeded in finding out its plates. In some cases the
surface was covered by a great-meshed reticulation of a similar kind
as that figured by Kress in Botanische Zeitung 1884 fig. 2—5 for
Glenodinium trochoideum (now. Peridinium trochoideum (Stein) Lem-
mermann).
Fig. 3. Gonyaulax sp. 375 Е. т.
306 OVE PAULSEN.
Goniodoma Stein.
6. Goniodoma Ostenfeldii Paulsen, Plankton invest. Iceland
1903, р. 20, fig. 2; Nord. Plankton р. 34, fig. 43; Broch Spitzbergen
Plankton p. 32, fig. 3.
Found in single specimens in Danmarks Havn, the coastal water,
and the open sea.
Distrib. Arctic, neritic species, known from North-Iceland and Spitz-
bergen.
Peridinium Ehrenberg.
Of late years different methods of shortly designating the plates
composing the skeleton of Peridinium have been proposed. The first
was that of FAURE-FREMIET, whose paper “Etude descriptive des péri-
diniens et des infusoires ciliés du plankton de la baie de la Hougue”
was published in 1908 in Annales des sc. naturelles, zoologie. FAURE-
FREMIET designates the plates by letters with annexed numbers, so
e. g. the precingulars are named d,—d,, d, being to the right, d,
to the left, d, to the right and so on. This method seems to me
not to be practical.
Next to FAURE-FREMIET comes Koroip, the well-known investiga-
tor of the Dinoflagellates. His paper “On Peridinium Steini Jorgen-
sen, with a note on the nomenclature of the skeleton of the Peridi-
nidae” was published in 1909 in Archiv für Protistenkunde 16. Koroïp
employs only numerals, the different series of plates being distingu-
ished by different numbers of apostrophes or other signs annexed
to the numerals. So, the apicals are 1'—4', intercalaries 1°—3°,
precingulars 1”—7", posteingulars 1"’—5”, antapicals 1"’—2"". Each
series begins on the left side of the body and goes round it to the
right side. This system is a clear one, but not very practical be-
cause of the apostrophes as to whose numbers mistakes are likely
to arise!.
Ввосн in his paper on Spitzbergen plankton (1910) gives a new
method of designating the plates. He uses both numerals and let-
ters. In the same year the method was modified in “Die Peridi-
nium-Arten des Nordhatens (Val di Bora) bei Rovigno im Jahre 1909”
(Arch. Г. Protistenk. 20). Here, the apicals are named 1—4 and the
precingulars a—g, 1 being the rhomb-plate and a the precingular
neighbouring it to the left, and both series go round the body to
1 From the table where Koroıp has arranged previous nomenclatures it appears
that he has not realized the difference between „tafeln“ and „platten“ as these
termini were used by SCHÜTT and after him also by the present author who in
Nord. Plankton did use SCHÜTTS nomenclature. It might have been mentioned
that Scutrr’s „вает“ represent transverse series of „plates“. Only the inter-
calaries were not recognised as a series by SCHÜTT.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea, 307
the left (descending screw). The intercalaries neighbouring c, d and
e are named у, 0 and =, which is more appropriate than in Koroıp’s
system where 3”, 4” and 5” are neighbours to respectivety 1°, 2° and
3°. The antapicals are named by BrocH A and В and the post-
cingulars I—V. It seems to me that
if we here change letters to Roman
numbers and vice versa we get a
more practical mode of designation.
Then, the apicals will be 1—4 and
the antapicals I—II, the precingulars
a—g and the posteingulars A—E. Fig. 4. Diagram of plates of Peri-
Thus, we have letters along both using
margins of the girdie and numerals at the top and at the bottom.
Fig. 4 illustrates this method of denominating.
7. Peridinium Cerasus Paulsen, Meddel. Kommis. for Hav-
undersggelser, Ser. Plankton, Bd. I, No. 5. 1907, р. 12, fig. 12;
Paulsen, Nord. Plankton р. 43, fig. 52. vix P. quarnerense (Br.
Schröder) Broch, Arch. f. Protistenk. 22. 1910, p. 183.
Fig. 5 represents a specimen (36 long) of P. Cerasus which species
was found rather rarely in a single sample from Danmarks Havn (Sept.
5's 1907). I think Ввосн is not right
in uniting this species with P. quar-
nerense, he does it because of the
resemblance in the arrangement of
the plates of the two species, taking
Fig. 5. Peridinium Cerasus. 375 t.m. a reservation on account of the in-
A B
completeness of my figures of P. Cerasus. In any case, my figures
are clearly showing that P. Cerasus has a long and well marked
apical horn, while P. quarnerense has a short one, and just this
horn is the characteristic of P. Cerasus. The dimensions of P. quar-
nerense are unknown, so in this respect it cannot be compared with
P. Cerasus.
Distrib. Known from the North Sea and Iceland.
8. Peridinium roseum Paulsen, Plankton invest. Iceland 1903,
р. 23, fig. 9; Nord. Plankton р. 44, fig. 53.—? P. ovatum Fauré-
Fremiet, Ann. sc. nat. zool. 9.ser. 1908, р. 218, fig. 5, tab. XV, fig. 6,
non Pouchet.
Found in several samples from the pack-ice and Danmarks
Havn, mostly in rather few specimens.
Distrib. Boreal-neritic and arctic species, known from Norway and
Iceland.
308 OVE PAULSEN.
9. Peridinium ovatum (Pouchet) Schütt, Die Perid. а. Plankton
Exp. 1895 tab. XVI, fig. 49, 1896 fig. 19. Paulsen Nord. Plankton
p. 44, fig. 54. Broch, Spitzbergen Plankton p. 40, fig. 9—10, non
Fauré-Fremiet 1908 р. 219, tab. XV, fig. 6. — Protoperidinium ovatum
Pouchet Journ. Anat. Physiol. 1883 р. 35, tab. 18—19, fig. 13. Peri-
dinium lenticulatum Fauré-Fremiet, Ann. sc. nat. zool. 9. ser. 1908,
р 2. Но ВБ. ХУ tiga.
Occurred in single specimens in Danmarks Науп and in the
coastal water. Rather common in the outer part of the pack-ice
but common in the open sea outside it.
Distrib. Boreal oceanic species, widely distributed in the Atlantic
and its tributaries.
10. Peridinium curvipes Ostenfeld, in Botany of the Faeroés
1906 р. 15, fig. 128. Paulsen Nord. Plankton р. 45, fig. 55.—? Broch,
Spitzbergen Plankton p. 42, fig. 11—13.
The cells represented in the annexed fig. 6 are such as have
been considered by me as Р. curvipes although its form is broader
IK S ASK Ne
LEN A, © р =
И \
Fig. 6. Peridinium curvipes. 250 t. m.
and shorter than the original figure published by OSTENFELD. But
those figured by Ввосн 1. с. are different. Unfortunately Ввосн
gives no figure of his species in ventral view (nor measures), but
from his figures of epitheca and hypotheca it appears that the
plates of his “P. curvipes” are arranged otherwise than in mine.
Thus Ввосн has the rhombplate (1) oblique, 9 small, and the plates
1, b, 2 and a touch each other in a point, 1 and f do not touch
each other. My fig. 6 shows that the rhomb-plate is not oblique
and that 1 and b, 1 and f meet along vertical lines. The inter-
calary 0 is long as in P. pellucidum and P. islandicum. From this
difference it follows that Ввосн and the present author have had
different species before us. Which is the true P. curvipes? From
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 309
OSTENFELD’s original figure (1. с.) we learn that the rhomb-plate is
not oblique and that it apparently does touch nor b nor f. As to
д, OSTENFELD’s figure gives no evidence. An attempt to find the
original specimens was without result. But as the form of the
rhomb-plate is the most conspicuous difference between Broch’s and
my specimens I venture to maintain that Ввосн has not had P. сиг-
vipes before him. He says his species is in habit very like P. ovatum,
and this statement as well as his fig. 13 representing “P. curvipes (?)
... Ein Individuum ... mit ausserordentlich stark entwickelten Inter-
calarstreifen” call to mind P. decipiens Jorgensen, which, however,
has no spines.
P. curvipes was found in many samples from the pack-ice, the
coastal water, and Danmarks Havn, as a rule in few specimens
only, but in larger quantities in samples collected in the pack-ice
in August 1906.
Distrib. Arctic(?) neritic species, known from W.-Greenland, Iceland,
the Faeroés, and the North Sea.
11. Peridinium breve Paulsen, Meddel. fra Kommis. for Hav-
undersog. Ser. Plankton, Bd. 1, No. 5. 1907, р. 13; Nord. Plankton
р. 46, fig. 56; Broch, Spitzbergen Plankton р. 47, fig. 21. P. Steinit
Jørgensen f. brevis, Paulsen, Meddel. Kom. Havund., Ser. Plankton
Bd. 1, No. 3, 1905, р. 4, fig. 3 a—c, f.
Fig. 7. Peridinium breve. 375 Е тм.
IN
Ye
VÆ
===
=——
\ [| 7
eA
SS 1 ae
D v} |
Fig. 7 shows four cells of this species, which is indeed difficult
to discern from its relatives P. Steinii Jorg., and P. pyriforme Pauls.
A—C has grown very old, thick and thick-walled, and the inter
calary bands are very broad. Length 56», surface finely reticulated.
D is a small form, 40 long.
310 ОуЕ PAULSEN.
This species was found sparingly in few samples from the
pack-ice and the coastal water.
Distrib. Arctic species, known from Spitzbergen and Iceland.
12. Peridinium pyriforme Paulsen, Meddel. fra Kommis. for
Havundersog. Ser. Plankton, Bd. 1, No. 5, 1907, р. 13, fig. 15;
Nord. Plankton р. 46, fig. 57. Р. Steinii Jorgensen f. pyriformis
Paulsen, Meddel. Кот. Havund. Ser. Plankton Bd. 1, No. 3. 1905,
р. 4, fig. 3d—e.
Fig. 8 shows a species which was fairly common in some
of the samples taken in August 1908 in the open water out-
side the pack-ice, and which I
cannot refer to any other spe-
cies than P. pyriforme. Length
42—52 4. It differs from P. breve
by the taller form, the irregular
position of the intercalary д,
which in P. breve is regular
(Broch 1. с.) and ш the very
narrow rhomb-plate, but, as sta-
ted above, these two species are
closely allied to each other.
On the other hand, our spe-
cies is nearly related to P. Steinii
Jorgensen. As to the arrange-
ment of the plates (see fig. 8 D, E)
they are nearly identical, so the precingular a is small, the rhomb-
plate] narrow, and the intercalary д has an oblique position (Koroip in
Arch. f. Protistenk. 1909, Taf. 2; Ввосн, Spitzbergen Plankton р. 49,
Brocu in Arch. f. Protistenk. 1910, fig. 4). Our species differs from
P. Steinii in its much thicker and shorter form and in the thecal
wall being reticulate and not porulate as in P. Sleinit. Ввосн says
(Spitzb. PI. р. 49): “ein näheres Studium von Peridinium pyri-
forme wird möglicherweise zeigen, dass die Individuen dieser Art
nur kräftig entwickelte Exemplare von Peridinium Steini sind.” On
the other hand, Kororp (l. с. р. 39) declares P. pyriforme not to be
identical with P. Steinü.
Fig. 8. Peridinium pyriforme. 375 t.m.
Anyhow, it seems to me to be the best to keep the two species
distinct at any rate provisionally until further evidences may come
to hand.
Distrib. Boreal oceanic species, known from the northern Atlantic
and its tributaries.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 311
13. Peridinium pallidum Ostenfeld, in Knudsen & Ostenfeld:
lagttag. over Overfladevandets Temperatur, Saltholdighed og Plankton
paa islandske og gronlandske Skibsrouter i 1898 (1899), р. 60.
Paulsen, Nord. Plankton р. 48, fig. 60. Broch, Spitzbergen Plankton
p. 45, fig. 17.
Fig. 9 shows an exceptionally low cell (length 56 и without
spines) with broad intercalary bands. The relation between 1 and
Fig. 9. Peridinium pallidum. 375 t. m.
f is not as shown in Broch’s figure. Found in few specimens but
in many samples from the pack-ice, the coastal water, and Dan-
marks Havn. Common in the open sea outside the ice.
Distrib. Oceanic, boreal species, widely distributed in the northern
Atlantic and its tributaries.
14. Peridinium pellucidum (Bergh) Schütt, Die Perid. der
Plankton-Exp., tab. XIV, fig. 45; Paulsen, Nord. Plankton p. 49,
fig. 61; Broch, Spitzbergen Plankton, p. 44, fig. 15, 16. — Proto-
peridinium pellucidum Bergh, Morphol. Jahrb. 1881, р. 227, fig. 46—48.
All the cells seen belong to the forma spinosa Broch (l.c) the
antapical spines being without fins. Only a single cell with fins
was seen (from Danmarks
Havn). In fig. 10 two speci-
mens are drawn. A and B re-
present a very young cell
(length 36 ») having thin walls,
and the sutures are not con-
spicuous without chemical
treatment. D—E are showing
another cell (length 40) thick-
walled and with broad inter-
calary bands. The cell repre-
sented in fig. 11 has a length
3 Fig. 10. Peridinium pellucidum. 375 t. m.
of 60 и, and the intercalary +” 2
striae are very broad. Such big and thick specimens were common
in some of the samples, and I refer them to P. pellucidum because
of the girdle being not oblique as in P. pallidum. — Other length-
312 OvE PAULSEN.
measures of this species: 38, 45, 48, 52, 56, 66. P. pellucidum was
the commonest Dinoflagellate in the samples, it occurred in Dan-
Fig. 11. Peridinium pellucidam. 375 t. m.
marks Havn, the coastal water, the pack-ice and in the open sea,
and often frequently.
Distrib. Widely distributed neritic species, occurring from the Medi-
terranean to Spitzbergen and Greenland.
15. Peridinium islandicum Paulsen, Meddel. fra Kommis. f.
Havundersog., Ser. Plankton, Bd. I, No.1, 1904, p. 23, fig. 7; Paulsen
Nord. Plankton, p. 49—50, fig. 62; Broch, Spitzbergen Plankton,
p. 46, fig. 18—20.
The cells were rather flat, es they have been figured by Broch.
A single specimen measured was 44 м long. Icelandic specimens
are 53—62 и (Nord. Plankton.) The species was fairly common in
Danmarks Havn, the coastal water, and the pack-ice, but in the
open sea it was found once only.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species, known from North Iceland, Spitz-
bergen and Greenland.
16. Peridinium varicans п. sp. (fig. 12).
ae ры ee Cellula globoso - rhomboidea,
N Va Se 4 IN. epttheca acuta, hypotheca spinas
/ un | JES \
m nn = Wa duas divergentes /varicantes) a
/ {
Lune fissura longitudinali remotas gerente
\ à Ge \ À % \
NRA Whe \ eee
№ ona GR et inter spinas linea paulum et
regulariter curvata terminante, cin-
ısverso dextrorsum circum-
BAS Е gulo trai e
> (a Q yy СУ marginem sinistram ala augusia
Ge SSS SY praedita. Epitheca tabulis 14, in-
lercalari д parvo, hypotheca ta-
bulis 7 constructa. Long. cell.
36. Hab. rarissime in mare gelido prope oram orientatem Groen-
landiae.
This species which was found in two samples from the coastal
gr SR CA) iente, fossa longitudinali lata ad
Peridinium varicans. 375 t. m
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 313
water and the interior part of the pack-ice (July 31 and Aug. 15"
1906) is characterized by the following features: The cell is in
ventral wiew rhombic, the epitheca is pointed (acutus) but not tape-
ring (acuminatus), the hypotheca ends in two diverging fin-less
spines which are distant from the longitudinal furrow. The girdle
forms a descending screw to the right. Of the plates of the epi-
theca, д is small and almost quadratic whereas у and = are bigger
and many-sided.
17. Peridinium brevipes Paulsen, Nord. Plankton, р. 108,
fig. 151 (without description); Broch, Spitzbergen Plankton р. 48,
fig, 22:
In 1908 I published the name and an outline-figure of this spe-
слез which I had seen at Iceland. Ввосн in his paper on Spitz-
bergen Plankton gives detailed figures of the species, and these
agree well with the annexed fig. 13. Length 36 » (different cells
measured). The form of the body
and the arrangement of the plates
are seen in the drawings. As to
the plates, д is small and qua-
dratic, the rhomb-plate being
broad and oblique does not touch
f but touches b along a vertical
line. The two small spines at the
lower end of the cell may be
wanting. I have seen only spe-
cimens with broad intercalary
bands, but Ввосн has them
broader yet. After his theory we
have then old cells before us,
but if this is the case it seems
Fig. 13. Peridinium brevipes. 375 Е. m.
to me that they cannot be “Ju-
gendstadium” of P. breve, what Ввосн presumes. The adult cells
are much smaller than P. breve, and also in form they seem to
differ from P. breve.
P. brevipes was not common in the samples, but it is very likely
that this small organism passes through the net-meshes. It was
found in several samples from Danmarks Науп but in few from the
coastal water, the pack-ice and the open sea.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species, known from Iceland and Spitzbergen.
18. Peridinium depressum Bailey, in Smithsonian contrib. to
knowledge VII, 1855, р. 12, fig. 33—34; Paulsen, Nord. Plankton
p. 53, fig. 67; Broch, Spitzbergen Plankton p. 51, fig. 26.
314 OvE PAULSEN.
In all the specimens seen by me the antapical horns were long
and hollow, so that, strange to tell, the arctic species P. parallelum
Broch was not found in the present material.
P. depressum was found in single specimens only in the neigh-
bourhood of the coast, repeatedly but rarely in the pack-ice and in
the open sea.
Distrib. Boreal oceanic species, widely distributed.
19. Peridinium oceanicum Vanhöffen, in Grönl.-Exp. 4. Ge-
sellsch. fir Erdk. zu Berlin II, 1897, tab. V, fig. 2; Paulsen, Nord.
Plankton, p. 54, fig. 69.
var. typicum Broch, Nyt Magaz. f. Naturvid. Christiania, 44,
1906. fig. 3.
Found as a single cell in the open sea outside the ice.
Distrib. Oceanic boreal species.
20. Peridinium conicoides Paulsen, Meddel. fra Kommis. f.
Havunderseg. Ser. Plankton, Bd. I, Nr. 3, 1905, р. 3, fig. 2; Nord.
Plankton, p. 58, fig. 75; Broch, Spitzbergen Plankton, p. 53.
Not rare in several samples from the coastal water and the
pack-ice in 1908.
Distrib. Arctic neritic species, known from Iceland, Spitzbergen and
Greenland.
21. Peridinium sp.
A small species (length 20 и) represented in fig. 14 was found
in three samples from Danmarks Havn in 1907. I suppose it is a
EQ young stage of the precee-
\ i LS ding species. In favour of
) И ) ——/ this conception speeks: the
/ whole form of the body,
B ee with convex outlines, the
small hollow protuberances
distant from each other,
the orbicular girdle and the
1 characteristic curvature of
м SS с : :
\ Le the longitudinal furrow’s
ae left margin. On the other
Fig. 14. Peridinium sp. 750 t. т. hand, the number and ar-
rangement of the plates do
not permit to unite the two species at once. There is only one
intercalary plate, as illustrated in fig. E, at least I have not been
able to find any sutures to separate between 7, d and с.
22. Peridinium subinerme Paulsen, Plankton invest. Iceland
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 315
1903, p. 24, fig. 10; Nord. Plankton, p. 60, fig. 78; Broch, Spitz-
bergen Plankton, p. 54, fig. 28.
One of the commonest [species in the samples from the pack-
ice in 1906. More rarely it occurred in Danmarks Havn, the coastal
water (in 1909) and in the open sea.
Distrib. Oceanic(?) arctic or boreal species, known from Iceland
Greenland, Spitzbergen and (in spring) from the North Sea.
23. Peridinium catenatum Levander, Acta soc. pro /X 2
fauna et flora fennica, IX, 1894; Paulsen, Nord. Plankton, Se
p. 63, fig. 84. rs SL
This species, represented in fig. 15, was found rarely
but in several samples from Danmarks Havn, the coastal 7
water, and the pack-ice. N
Distrib. Neritic species, known from the inner part of the
Baltic, Limfjorden (Denmark), and West-Greenland. od
ee . | Fig. 15. Peridi-
24. Peridinium minusculum Pavillard, Flore péla- nium catena-
gique de l’&tang de Thau, Montpellier 1905, р. 57, tab. Ш, {7% 375t.m.
fig. 7—9 (I have seen Pavillards specimens); Lemmermann, Arch. f.
Hydrobiol. u. Planktonkunde, У, 1910, р. 336; Glenodinium bipes
Paulsen, Plankton invest. Iceland 1903 (1904), р. 21, fig. 3—4; Nord.
Plankton, p. 25, fig. 31.
LEMMERMANN (I. с.) in pointing out that Glenodinium trochoideum
is a Peridinium says in a footnote that also G. bipes is a Peridinium
and that it is to be named P. minusculum (P. bipes it cannot be
named because another species, of Stein, bears that name.) It is
very likely that the species is a Peridinium. I have seen that it
has two antapicals. |
P. minusculum was found, always in single specimens, in several
samples from Danmarks Havn, the coast water, and the pack-ice.
Without doubt most of the cells pass through the net-meshes.
Distrib. Neritic species, known from the Mediterranean, the North
Sea, the Baltic, Iceland, and Greenland.
Ceratium Schrank.
25. Ceratium arcticum (Ehrenberg) Cleve, The seasonal distrib.
of atl. Plankton-org., Goteborg 1900, p. 207. Paulsen, Nord. Plankton,
p. 86, fig. 118; E. Jorgensen, Die Ceratien, Leipzig 1911, p. 85, fig. 181.
Peridinium агсНсит Ehrenberg, Bericht üb. Verhandl. d. Berliner
Akad. d. Wiss. 1853, p. 528.
316 OvE PAULSEN.
| This species of which fig.
| 16 gives some outline-figures,
was very Common in Aug. 1908
in the sea outside the ice. In
the pack-ice and the coastal
water in 1908 it was scarce
though found in several samples.
In Danmarks Havn and in the
pack-ice and the coastal water
in 1906—07 it was rare and
occurred always as dead spe-
cimens.
=
Distrib. Arctic oceanic spe-
eies:
Fig. 16. Ceratium arcticum, different cells. 94 +. m.
Apodinium Chatton.
26. Apodinium(?) Chaetoceratis п. sp.
Cellulae globosae nucleiferae membrana cellulosoidea tectae, ad
setas Chaetoceratis borealis appendicula adharentes et membranam ejus
perforantes: parasitus igitur plasma hospitis exhauriens. Divisionibus
cellulae binae et quaternae nascuntur. Long. cell. ca. 18—95 и. Hab.
in mare gelido ad oram orientalem Groenlandiae.
Dr. OSTENFELD who has worked out the Diatoms and Flagel-
lates of the present samples before I got them for investigation,
called my attention to this organism which he had examined be-
lieving it was a Diatom. But as the wall gave cellulose-reaction
with chloriodide of zinc and as it was without silicium he saw it
would be nearer a Dinoflagellate than a Diatom, and he gave me
his drawings and notes.
Once only I have found a cell of Apodinium Chaetoceratis upon
an awn of Chaetoceras decipiens, all other specimens seen were
fixed on the awns of Ch. boreale. Whether this is because the
awns of Ch. boreale are set with fine hairs I cannot tell with cer-
tainty, I have never seen the cells spit upon the hairs or otherwise
fixed to them. But it seems likely that awns set with setae afford
better chance for fastening than smooth ones. How the cell is fixed
to the awn is difficult to discern. Fig. 17, C and D show a little
process by aid of which the cell is fixed. In other cases it seems
that there are two processes. Fig. Е shows a cell made pellucid
by aid of Eau de Javelle, and on both sides of the awn is seen a
thickening not belonging to the awn but to the Apodinium. Fig. 1
(drawed by OSTENFELD) shows two cells in a mucilage which is
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 317
fixed to the awn, such a thing I have not seen, and perhaps it does
not belong to Apodinium.
The wall of the awn is perforated. In fig. G the perforation is
distinetly seen. Through this hole the contents of the Chaetoceras-
Fig. 17. Apodinium(?)_Chaetoceratis. (See the text) A, С, D 375 Е м. В 125 Ем.
Е, F,G 750 +. т. Н, I 500 t.m. (Fig. В, С, H, I were drawn by Dr. Ostenfeld.)
cell must be sucked out, — and all the Chaetoceras-cells seen bearing
an Apodinium were empty, see fig. A, B, C.
The contents of the Apodinium-cell consists of a granular plasma
and a rather big nucleus which often is seen to have been divided
(fig. C, E). The divisions must follow speedily after each other, as
XLIII. 24
318 OvE PAULSEN.
two or four cells are often seen to be together and again dividing.
The cell-wall is rather thick, in some cases I have been able to see
a three-fold outline (fig. E); the outmost layer is very thin and in-
conspicuous, by treatment with chloriodide of zine it disappears
but not with Eau de Janelle (a mucilage?) The wall itself is co-
loured brownish violet by chloriodide of zine. In spite of eager
research it has not been possible to find other stages of this orga-
nism than those here mentioned and figured.
The systematic position of this species, imperfectly known as it
is, must of course be uncertain. I refer it with some doubt to the
genus Apodinium Chatton (Comptes rendus Ac. sc. Paris 144. 1907,
p. 283, with figures. Se also: ibid. 143, Chatton: Les Blastodinides,
ordre nouveau des Dinoflagellés parasites.) The other Blastodinidae
described and figured by CHATTON are far from being like our spe-
cies, but Apodinium mycetoides, a parasite upon Appendicularia,
shows some features which call to mind А. Chaetoceratis. A. myce-
toides is fixed upon the host by a long stalk. Growing up and
dividing it has at first some resemblance to our species, being two-
celled and of about the same form, but it is only partly filled by
plasma, a great “lacune aqueuse” taking most of the room in the
two cells. Later on the distal cell (“blastocyte”) divides again for-
ming many spores which again divide, and so a lot of small Gym-
nodinium-like spores are formed. The proximal blastocyte after a
rest divides, and the new distal cell forms a new generation of
spores, as described above.
Of all this I have found no trace by Apodinium/?/ Chaetoceratis.
As a whole this species may be called rather dubious.
14— 3— 1911.
SE
MARINE PLANKTON
FROM
THE EAST-GREENLAND SEA
(W. OF 6° W. LONG. AND N. OF 73° 30° N. LAT.)
COLLECTED DURING THE “DANMARK EXPEDITION” 1906—1908
IV. GENERAL REMARKS ON THE MICROPLANKTON
BY
©. Ы. OSTENEELD AND OVE PAULSEN
1911
ew
! 7
UNE u
ET 0 | у в.
oe u a u u
id i u EE LA .
PR ai a = = . ” u
x : NET
i MES ве
— 7 m al i — à + | и
eu | - 7 hj
_ NH 7 ae La
= i Der
= = “ u
р 7
а =
* u 5
i 7
4
u = р
US
1 nl
Introduction.
s remarked in the introduction to the foregoing lists of the organ-
aN isms of the microplankton (see list of literature p. 336), only
the plankton from the region west of 6° W.L. and north of 73° 30/
N.L. has been worked up by us. The series of samples from this
region, the principal contents of which are shown in the accom-
panying Tables (I—III), can be most conveniently considered under
three divisions, namely:
I. Samples from Danmarks Havn (76°46: М. L., 18° 43' W.L.).
Па. Samples collected during the passage of the ship through
the ice on the outward journey.
IIb. Samples collected during the passage of the ship through
the ice on the return journey.
In the following the samples from Danmarks Havn will be dealt
with separately and the remaining samples together. With regard
to the grouping of the latter into two divisions, reference may be
made to our previous papers. Here all the species found are also
named as well as details about the places where they were found.
The first information regarding the plankton of these waters
came from the Danish Expedition to Scoresby Sound (1891-92).
In a large paper on the marine diatoms published in 1895, Е. Østrup
also dealt with a number of plankton samples from the ice-filled
sea, but did not deal with the plankton associations as such. The
Swedish Expedition to East Greenland in 1899 collected a quantity
of plankton which was investigated by P. T. Cleve (1900). His
report contains tables and short remarks on the commoner species.
Of special interest to us here are the samples collected in the drift-
ice in July between 70° 30'N.L. and 74° 29'N.L., and the samples
from the fjords of North-East Greenland, 71°—73° М. Г... collected in
August.
322 С. Н. OSTENFELD and OvE PAULSEN.
The drift-ice samples are specially characterized by such organ-
isms as Chaetoceras decipiens, С. furcellatum and С. sociale, Cosci-
nodiscus oculus iridis (= subbuliens), Fragilaria oceanica, Thalassiosira
gravida — all of which are regarded by Cleve as arctic forms — and
thus show a good agreement with the samples dealt with here.
The fjord samples are all very poor; the most prominent species
are Chaetoceras decipiens, Dinobryon pellucidum (only in some samp-
les), Calanus finmarchicus, whilst Ceratium arcticum, Cyttarocylis gigan-
tea and Oithona similis occurred in quantity in a few samples.
Lastly, from the Duke of Orleans’ Expedition of 1905 we have
an interesting work by О. Damas and Е. Koefoed, which in the
introduction speaks of the rich phytoplankton found in July —August
in the drift-ice and in the coastal waters of East Greenland, in con-
trast to the small quantities found in the open Greenland Sea, but
otherwise does not deal with the microplankton. The phytoplankton
was determined by H. Broch, who has arranged it in tabular form
without text.
According to Broch’s tables the most prominent species in the
phytoplankton are Ampiprora hyperborea, Bacterosira fragilis, Chae-
toceras atlanticum, C. boreale, C. criophilum, C. decipiens, C. furcella-
tum, С. Wighami, Fragilaria oceanica, Navicula Vanhöffent, Nitz-
schia delicatissima, Thalassiosira gravida, T. hyalina, T. Nordenskiöldiı,
Phaeocystis Pouchetii. Specially prominent are Fragilaria oceanica
and Thalassiosira gravida. Chaetoceras criophilum was predominant
in a single sample from the open sea, whilst Ceratium arcticum, just
as in the other samples, was rare. These samples show good agree-
ment on the whole with ours, except that Thalassiosira gravida and
Chaet. criophilum play a much smaller role in our samples.'
I. Plankton from Danmarks Havn. (Table 1).
It has several times been emphasized in our previous papers,
that the collecting of plankton in Danmarks Havn, where the Ex-
pedilion was stationed for ca. 22 months (1906 --1908), has unfortu-
nately been very incomplete. A series of samples collected at regu-
lar intervals could have given an excellent picture of the develop-
ment of the plankton throughout the year, but from the few sam-
ples collected occasionally which we have, we obtain only an imper-
! Unfortunately there is not always agreement between Brocu’s tables and the
published „Journal des stations“ of the Expedition. Thus for Station 44 the
table has а haul of 390—300m. with a rich diatom plankton, which seems ре-
culiar at this great depth. In the Journal this haul is not mentioned, but a
corresponding one of 300—0 m. with almost the same organisms. Other differ-
ences also occur.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 323
fect impression of the annual cycle of plankton. The following
samples were collected: 4 in October 1905, 2 in June, + in August
and 2 in September 1907, and one sample on July 21st 1908, when
the Expedition left the station.
Table I gives the principal species and their occurrence in the
samples; the rarer species have been omitted (with regard to them,
see the systematic lists in our previous papers).
The samples from the beginning of October 1905, which were
all taken in holes in the ice from water with a temperature of са.
— 1:7° C.,! contain very few organisms. They are the last remnants
of the summer plankton, mostly dead shells of diatoms, Ceratium
arcticum and Cyttarocylis denticulata, as also a few living Chaetoceras
boreale, Ch. decipiens, Rhizosolenia styliformis and Peridinians, with
some Oithona and Nauplii. Lastly, it was interesting to find that
Coscinodiscus Joergensenii was in process of forming auxospores at
this time of year, though in very few individuals.
The two spring samples from June 1907 were also from holes
in the ice (water temperature са. — 1-7? C.) and contained even fewer
organisms. It was only in the last of the two samples that any
fair quantity of Melosira hyperborea was taken, its chains in process
of active division, as also some Oithona and Nauplii.
The August samples (the first was taken on July 30th) contain
a rich diatom plankton. The principal species are Chaetoceras sociale
and Fragilaria oceanica, in the later also Chaetoceras diadema, Ch.
Wighami and Coscinodiscus subbuliens, as well as Cyttarocylis denti-
culata and in smaller numbers Nitzschia seriata, Thalassiosira gravida,
Peridinium pellucidum and P. islandicum, further Ptychocylis obtusa
and Tintinnus ойгеиз.
The September samples show almost the same plankton, yet
are somewhat poorer for most species; only Peridinium pellucidum,
P. islandicum, Synchaeta sp., Oithona, as also Cyttarocylis denticulata
typica and gigantea are more frequent, and Gonyaulax triacantha is
added.
Among the diatoms in September resting-spore formation is
found in Chaet. sociale, Ch. diadema, Thalassiosira gravida, and also
in Fragilaria oceanica, the resting-spores of which, however, already
occurred in August, though less frequently. The rare Ch. gracile had
resting. spores in August. In Coscinodiscus subbuliens auxospores
were present, but in small quantity, in August and September.
The salinity of the water was highest in June (32:3°/0) and de-
! The hydrographical data (surface temperature and salinity) have been kindly
placed at our disposal by the Captain of the “Danmark”, First-Lieutenant
H. TROLLE, to whom we wish here to express our thanks.
TE Fr |-> Е ”
TI me TI TI $ | z 2
cay mm At | |
|
TI 3 Tl TI | | |
(ла ‘ds 9) | | |
I IT Im ji TT т |
er ae ie | eng Lae HER: | | |
TI TI IT dai | а | a
| | | |
I | => | T | |
le RTE т |
ae AS rl | (TI = L) pad ee Saat
(ds) (ds) (ds) | (2 ds ‘9) |(лл'а$ ‘9)| (dads ‘9)| | |
TI I о 99.1 + | RER II II
8) 9 9 в) TC PTT а en: II 35
II BB T + сос | до В ие | i
us (u'ds'o)) (ds) |(+'4$`э) |
+ I 99 |» 99 199 | | |
A ... cus he 00 M) | ‘ . | оо ... | | | |
= | | | | |
= (ads 9) (лл'А$ 9) | | |
a НГ НЕ ar Sr
ma т | x Va di | ax at || MI mm | + ll
5 TS a TT | 7 ый euer,
| |
= I au и ge | | rl Re I |
= I Woo u | | | | |
г | et | ane | | SE er
a |
må | | |
= | | |
я | |
a ae ee aaa eel ER A. il) 1 JR ARS te EA
HØR PERS Е | ЕЯ
5 60? 307 (07 SOP) FOF 807 | GOp |(SST) PET| (22) 97 16 06 | 68 88
A | | eS m | FEE и m
x 0-86 p.CI 1-16 1.25 8-1 9:0 | 3-66 8:08
о |
0.0 $8.02 | 7.0-—- | 9.8 Gp | LI + № PRE)
> PS | | ee | reed METTRE =
Stone les bea |e я | ee © Onan © | See |=
Siar Se SER HESS Paes LE = oF о ers 8$ | © 5
=o ма Bowe | SH oe i a 5 =o Bee ЕО SEN 5
erie! Е | еее | ВВ Bop a= 25 58/488 бе | ze
© ISO ry à DT с 3 = ЕР = am к = E & | pe
Е © ANSE Weeks SER KS ь? 5? @ =. = 5 ale РБ Dem | =
CR р | | Sas EB Е = me @ 9 аа AAC NE RES
5 455 |5% (ele ates Af но © = =. ay? yen || ISL РЕ ©, » Е.
вы anid TÈ Е Ben = BE BERN ET 5
г == Ù dg | 1 = ae | a0 г | or ®
XI OT | XI G | ША FG] ША GT) ША? | ПА 06 | IA ST | IA ‘€ NS ERESE | NET EX EG
324
‘L061 9061
"uaeg SswWewuueqg
wunpnoaods snuvyda3si(
шертопэ@ uo£iqour(
| a | edd Oe |
HPIOPISUOPION
| ва ee ще vel ete ets are ei BPIABIS
"1777 в] [12014 VIISOISSEIUU I,
STULTOFITÄFS
er esn}qo —
euldstwos "J ejejaqay erIusfosoziyyy
8] 2119$ PIU9SZJIN
SI[PUOIIJU9IA9S в[потаеМ
вэлоЧлэЧАЧ VIISONPN
вотивоэо змея EI]
| ых suomnqqns $102$1роит9$0’)
ПГО О s ee TMUBY SIA
9[2120$
| ME aa es cera wnJeJ[9aln]
| вщэретр —
` suatdioap
°°: :WNJN[OAUOI
LS SE 289104
wnoyueje $819903эеЧ”)
voioqiod{y vioidiqduy
эвэаовлеова
о Оооо Wo Uno 4 Ome Got "ardwæs Jo "ОМ
Tem JO APLULPES
``” oem JO ameradwoar
QLUTR
| ss... ‘+: gg
"I qe
le
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea.
99
LI
о |
OD |
|
|
|
II
I II
I I
| I TI
| Sels
RES
И cau ©
| Oo oO |
| |
| р | .
|
|
I |
ОО |
|
|
|
|
|
а
IL
IT
“ea
Sir
HOT
FIT
1
"suawmads prap ASO |
I ДС HIdneN 3э $Иии!$ euoypg
оао a AE CRE snarpaewun snuefen)
| BOZBJ9W
О ourourqns =
PA SSR ERE "Seek ER eee ae Е >
MP EE ren эшлойаа =
АС ele wie (a peter ele, se ete tunpronyjed ро
IT ofa pe а (6 vee a вт .. . wınpıpped à
| Se FE A En cer SSD wnyBAo =
о ee wnynurw Pt
Gras | aber aay Ab. TNT RE CR wmnotpuejsi
he GaP Е: uinssa.idap —
OST COOLE O0: FORD ОО sadıa.ımd pe
EEE SORTE AN EA вортоэтиоо =
a CER OIA ем NEC =.
че a je ele sat w)iäLler.n les ala а sadrA91q Lx
И элэл4 шпиириза
OSTE MIT ера ее о ‘ds LS,
SRS ROIS Ce AR EE еЧ3 4898113 XE[NELUOr)
EEE ее 11pfopuaIsO вшороиою
ое eyepungoa =
sous = ||| о ра о Кена ела sarin con Catheter oon oO воле sisXydourg
о osseuse wnonore wnıeaa)
BE DT NE MST RE sıre1990Peyn (4) umıumpody
S9UIUIPII9 4
ENTE $16.18 ‘SNOIS9AIOU SNUULJULL
AAN RE OT ЕО ORT 251340 $ПАЭОЧЭАЗА
sn vysnqoa a ma
PL ORONO NT A te OU voquefis = en
2 A a voidA} ‘езвпоциэр $1Аэ0л834 А)
| BaPpPOUUNULL
|
|
alas | on ir Mt ce СКОРОЕ Ce БС SI[89104 vioeydsoquoq
GE MÉLANIE L'URSS vorsejod vioydo}1[09007)
| OOo eo oOo A новая moayonog $115 АэоэеЧа
С. Н. OSTENFELD and OVE PAULSEN.
326
KS
in a nie ose obéit ri LI u а on Ui аи re ee -wnpnoads snueydasiq
toe OIE QE © QC RB a SR SEG + | I IND: ERDE Eh wunpronppod uo£iqour(
| velo SA
| |
| |
ne me sr ом. PE Pr: ik | … ... Se SH TN à TIP[OTHSUOPION —
5 | оо | OH no tte | DIR, | Oo LI II | hive ve ne Mo der on 00.0.0 BPIABIS —=
at À г 4 oe an m Fe ae en | Re EO oe вуза визотезетеч,
u | I ab I I | u | ene | ... ere | ОА ... Побооноосо ось . STULIOJITÄIS er
ER | ee ES apes | LI 9 | 8) + | 9 I А С 251140 —
Se фр об ec rt 99 99 + + ви KS, Se wurdstwos ‘F veyeyaqay е119[0$07 1
ven næ se: 7. NET Е ane So u As Done | с а ouster CE ER вез BIUOZJIN
ge | à Е "1 SIjeuortquojdes в|потАем
| (ds) | (+:dsa))| (ds) | | |
der | TI м | 9 В We N pS | we en ВО вэлоЧлэЧАЧ в.1150[9 N
| ah are | | ST | ui | | EEN wOLUB990 BIIL[LSRL
a | ab alle 9 el PIE EN RTS ee tes fb | era cae ec a suaıpnqqns SN2SIPOUIISO)
amen Ho Se | GG 0 Had Ho va | обо Son | Siren о A | SEE Иоан, Ооо Urabe плеч тм Pa
о | cae} | ows | ... .. 000 | So Aap à | ово ... | а Wlleatus bos 5 000008 boos э[е120$ ZEN
| | IE a I [ne ee a wınyepfod.«ng —
| | ST ER ee rer вшорер er
99 a 29 | в) 9 GS I + I ant | at tee Cate utr oS ‘°°°: suatdisap =
IT ae TR KURERE a да о в) +- = | Dr BE ae FREE wn4Nn[oAU0OD —
9 | 9 | 9 | 9 + sae 09.5 ... ... еее | DC OMS OS GEO EN on eo On ooo OOo 2[89104 ce
II pot т 2% I jh Ce RS 5 I ea || Reese ats ek eat ea wnomuene $819903эец”)
... ame PACE 9.00 ae ое Dez Ale lh MÆRKET И | ны voioqiod{y eaoadıyduy
| | 3
| | | | | | | Ves9enIejjpeg
| | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
в и SI LT 91 ст МЕТ OR an en afdures Jo ‘ох
= — 1908 | — aE 8-18 6-18 Gare TE ee ee лэзем JO APUITLS
6.0 FO | C0 —+ 6.0 1.0 + GI + “d= || aan bee | Wai PI ay es J9JEM Jo atnqzesodway
| | | | |
60-81 GG-8ST | 0881 06-81 04-61 IGIT | SI-OL CO-TT | 98-01 GC OS SOI OS SR REE RE эрпз чо M
| | | |
OUI | SGGLLE | OLE 0G-9L 8P: GL 89.94 | 89.94 85.62 61-42 Besen POTAGE aa N opnyyey 'N
| | | | |
ОО CAT SE 2 VS ee: ера Ost da een Ed 08:60 done 9 9 ee ии,
| | | | |
ША "9T | ША "ST | ША “ST | ША "GT | IMA'Z | ША ША | INA | QUA TNO TER | AIT AT ES ee ET
"906T "IT SIL
327
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea.
++
IL
AL
It
qt
ral
II
rl
IT
тах
LI
IT
IT
>)
LI
AT
AT
т
TI
29
‘SUALUIPOUS рвор Apso ı
| BOZBI9W
PE FAR SOE suntsurqus =
lee... TER es
И SEER DRESDENS AUOT LA 24
| DOS fe Groin One re wupiyyed er
| ОА ОИ Ср ei ОИ wınyeAo zer
us sa ao Se wnynu =
И umorpuryst er
Haar a nen wunssa1d2p —
ПО ЗОО ОАО с sodtaano = a
NER re SNE S9P1091U09 =
REE SE PLLA rive цицецэзво =
lé sta ls nee а Geese ee sadrA91q я
RE а 24914 штиирыеа
пабы о бро ор оф ами ds En
ST EEE eyjuedent} Xejnefuon
[ieee se deh Be I[pjajua}sQ BWoporuor)
| ori 0 ne eyepungou as
uti ei DOOR OO to wii Ach воцоле sis{qdour(
NES ar Te ores Mee ng итоцоле ии ета)
Reh a $1}81990}эв)) (5) шиататро4у
5этенирмэ4
|
N SIJIOUIS 'SNOISIAIOU SNUUNULT,
| Se ee Gro: b ео stfooyoA а
од To в]5п4ол — —
| вэзие818 i ER
| SAs sors voiddy ‘взвпоциэр $ПА20ле}АЭ
| вэроцпиг ит 1,
HORS RER `` :SIP210q влэвчазозчоа
MES “tess voisepod vaoqdo}1[09907
| « D ая ONE ti O0 GH Our INeyonod 511$ Аэоэеца
328 С. Н. OSTENFELD and OVE PAULSEN.
creased greatly in the course of the summer owing to the inflow
of fresh water from the melting snow of the land, so that on the sur-
face it was brought down to 0-6——1'/8%/oo at the end of July, at the
same time that the temperature rose to 3'6°—4'5°C., the effect of
which was that the marine organisms were for a great part killed,
and only the resting-spores of diatoms were living. The samples from
this period really contained in the main freshwater organisms, which
had been carried out by the freshwater from land, for example,
Coelastrum microporum, Gomphosphaeria lacustris, Anabaena sp.
Spirotaenia sp., Staurastrum sp., Hyalotheca sp., and many freshwater
diatoms. In August—September the salinity again rose and the
temperature sank (ca. 27—28°/oo and ca. 0°), and at the same time
the freshwater forms disappeared and marine species ruled again.
The samples from October 1906 permit us to conclude, that the sali-
nity continues to rise, most probably owing to the formation of ice,
and the temperature to fall, just as they presumably show the de-
mise of the plankton (see above).
The planton of Danmarks Havn is thus an arctic
coast-plankton with a flowering period of short dura-
tion in late summer. It is somewhat poor in species and con-
sists mainly of neritic diatoms, which have a wide distribution in
northern seas, also outside the arctic region. Truly arctic are pro-
babiy only the following species, none of which were very abundant
in the samples: Bacterosira fragilis, Eucampia groenlandica, Chaeto-
ceras gracile, Biddulphia arctica, Navicula septentrionalis, N. Vanhéffenit,
Peridinium islandicum, P. brevipes, P. catenatum, Gonyaulax triacantha,
Tintinnopsis karajacensis, T. pellucida and Tintinnus vitreus.
II. Plankton of the drift-ice and coastal waters.
a. August 1906. (Table IN.
The samples (11) belonging here were collected during the period
from July 31st to August 16th in the ice-filled waters; they fall natur-
ally into two groups:
The outermost group (5 samples) are from water with a temper-
ature of —0°7° to —1:9° С. and a salinity of-31'2—32:8°/oo and they
were taken between ca. 6°—11° W.L. (ca. 120—180 miles from the
coast). The plankton is very uniform in all the samples; it consists
mainly of diatoms and tintinnids; the most frequent species are
Chaetoceras convolutum, Rhizosolenia hebetata f. semispina, Rh. obtusa,
Cyttarocylis denticulata typica and robusta, Peridinium subinerme,
P. curvipes and P. pellucidum. Characteristic, though occurring in
smaller quantities, were Coccolithophora pelagica (dead), Pontosphaera
borealis, Dinophysis arctica, Peridinium roseum, Dinobryon pellucidum
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 329:
and Distephanus speculum. From the transition to the inner group
we have а single sample (№. 17 in the Table), which mainly con-
sists of Melosira hyperborea (with resting spores) and Calanus finmar-
chicus; the very low temperature (— 1:2°) implies special conditions
in the water, e.g. that the sample might have come from the immed-
late vicinity of ап ice-floe.
The inner group (5 samples) come from water with a temperature
of са. 0° and a salinity of 30°6—31-2 °/oo and the samples were taken
from са. 13° W. Г. (ca. 90 miles from land) in towards the coast (Ger-
mania Land and Koldewey Island). The principal species are Chaet.
boreale, Ch. decipiens, which in small quantities were also found in
the samples from the outer group, and Oithona similis; Rhizosolenia
styliformis replaces the other two Rhizosolenia species. Coscinodiscus
subbuliens and Apodinium Chaetoceratis only occur in the samples from
near the coast. In a couple of the samples Calanus finmarchicus was
present in large numbers. With regard to the Peridinians, Ceratium
arcticum was found in small quantity and usually only as empty
shells in all the samples (also of the outer group), whilst the other
species had practically disappeared.
b. July—August 1908. (Table III).
We have examined 28 samples taken on the return voyage du-
ring the period from July 21st to August 3rd in almost the same
region as the samples from 1906.
The samples can be divided naturally into three groups:
The inner group (15 samples) goes from the coast to ca. 14° W. L.
The salinity delerminations are few; they vary between 28-1 and
31:7 °/oo and the temperature on the surface lies between 0° and —4° С.
The samples are somewhat rich in species, the most prominent being
the following diatoms: Chaetoceras decipiens, Ch. boreale and Coscino-
discus subbuliens, and common to all is the small quantity of Peri-
dinians: Per. conicoides, P. curvipes and Ceratium arcticum being the
near most characteristic, Three samples taken west of Germania Land
(Nos. 1276, 1279, 1289) in water with 3—4° temperature (and presu-
mably low salinity) are wanting in, among others, Chaet. Wighami
and Fragilaria oceanica, which are found otherwise in larger or
smaller number in most samples. Chaet. sociale appears first further
away from land (from No. 1290), but is then constantly present and
usually in quantity. Calanus finmarchicus and Thalassiosira gravida
(to a smaller extent) chiefly keep on the other hand to the samples
from nearer land. The two northernmost (са. 78° N.L.) samples
(Nos. 1301, 1803) are remarkable for a large quantity of Melosira
330 С. Н. OSTENFELD and OVE PAULSEN.
Table Ш.
Date eee 7 | 21. УП | 21. VII | 21. У 225 VII (22. УП 99, УП 22. VII 23. УП 23. VII 23. VII 24. VII 124. VIT |
INC ee A ener 2 | (ep: 8p. | Эр. Ва: |6. р: 10 le we ба. al 10а. | 2р. |
| | | | | |
Waratituder "1 [Mouth pC. Biss ron | Naot ob ads 77.0 | 77:15 |ca.78-0|ca.78.0 M
| of the
| harbour MarOuss |
mn nn nn DO
sıa
№ wcongitude seer
Temperature of water | са. 0:0
| Cr ==
Salinity of water....|| 317 ЭЙ 33157)
||
| |
No. of sample....... | 1242 | 1243 | 1244
marck— Marous- Marous-
; | |
along the coast |
| 17.15
| Sla
|
са, 130) са. :0са. 3:0 | ca. 3.0 | 3.15
| |
са. 30:0 | | 28.06
1270 | 1276 | 1279
| |
| 1289 | 1290
Bacillariaceae
Amphiprora hyperborea.} т TT т
Chaetoceras atlanticum .. rr
= boreale се (Nac те
— convolutum .
— decipiens ... Cr (© c
— diadema....
— furcellatum.. |
— sociale 2... |
— Wighami.... | т ir +
Coscinodiscus subbuliens. | + С Cc
Fragilaria oceanica...... CG ce ce
| (c. sp. +) | (c. sp. +) | (© sp. +)
Melosira hyperborea.... тт IT à
(sp-) (sp-) (sp.)
Navicula septentrionalis. . ee т +
Nitzschia seriata........ | Ir
Rhizosolenia hebetata f.
sens pin ee. |
— obtusa. ....
— styliformis . | rr rr
Thalassiosira bioculata .. | rr rr
— gravida...... I Wer SEV 4
| (с. sp. rr.)
— Nordenskiöldii тт
Flagellata
Dinobryon pellucidum...
Distephanus speculum...) rr т г
Phaeocystis Pouchetii....
Coccolithophora pelagica. |
Pontosphaera borealis ...
1 Mostly dead specimens.
16 | IHR
| |
|
ce Ge Ge | eo G
|
Cl Or. SC ‹ с
| г
|
|
[0
т ce
c Cc CCS Cc
ce | ee |
(e.sp.r.) | |
| rr | тЫ ТГ
| (sp) | (sp.) (sp.)
| |
7 | |
|
sedis | |
|
| |
| | | | |
rr Е ey, iat
+ ON о ARR ees
1H à
|
|
|
| | |
|
rr | |
|
| | ie
16:0 с.15:30 с.15-30
| 2-10
29°30) |
rr
сс
IT
1:4 0:7 0:3
28:7 —
1291 | 1299 | 1301 | 1308
rr 1
rr IAE
Cc HE T
II IT
С с я
it Sr cc
( . sp.rr.)|(c. sp. г.)
| TE T
се ae à =
т т | + |
(sp.) | (sp.) le: sp. r.)|
ml ame Re |
\(e sp. +) (e. sp. +)
| те |
IT | STE
ide |
|
Tr Ir | т
rr ide) Wie hse
rr
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 331
1908.
25. VII 25. VII 28.VII 28.VII 29.VII 30. VII 30.VII 31.УП | 31. VII 31.УП | 31.VII 1. УШ|1.УШ]1.УШ| 2.УШ | 3.VIII
| |
Та. 8p. |215a.| 2p. 1:45 p.| 8'30а. 12-15p. 11:30а. 1:45р. 3p. |5.30p. 2-15а.| 8a. 4 р. | 1273022] 1p.
| | ии
Se 55 — | |5 76:08 | | ca. 75:0 | — | 7420 | 73:58 | 73:30 | 734
а NE
То | 20 | 17 | 153 | 09 |-+06! 05 | 15 | 24 О 6-200 72 | zo
soc |. | — | 31-00: 36.9 | = он 27 0529 | ACTE
| —
I 5 SE ] | | = Ty
| |
|
| |
1304 | 1312
1319 | 1332.| 1335 | 1340 | 1344 | 1350 | 1353 | 1355 | 1358 | 1381 | 1383 | 1386 | 1388 1398
| Tr Er TI
|
|
re ‚zr | rr +. rr rr |
с и || rr
| Der т т rr тт rr rr rl rl
ce | с С r rr rr Е sus, | обе ser | toe ret Tr: mm
Е eb: en IE + | 1
| | | |
| | | |
| Me сс сс с е | + u er. a hice ВЕ Jar Be
| | |
EE PRE ce |
| IT | a rr
ee | т тт IT
r | р. | соо om | |
(с sp. rr.)) (sp.) | | | |
Tears je on iF rr Bars rr |
(e.sp. гг.) | | |
|
|
| == т rr rr |
| TI T1 ine Tr |
| 6 NERO me | MSG me | |
| |
rr Br | + т т | + tb tr
| |
| | |
3 | rr 1 — rr ee |
| | |
a и | Bist: Е a | Se aie | es etre с @ rr}
| | | |
|
rr We) 26 2
rr | a + | +
| I ete CE Em Coke cree, eerie: Че ee if rr
332 С.Н. OSTENFELD and OVE PAULSEN.
Table Ш.
Ga Е 21.УП | 21. VII | 22.УП |2Э.УП | 22.УП |22.УП | 23.УП |23.УП | 23.VII
Times Dre р 8 p. 9! Та: | бр. | 1012. #58: | 8a. 11:30p.) 10а. | 2m
Wee Watittide sae | Mouth | OT REGS „orthwards | | 77-0 | 77-15 a =
N. Longitude........ Se jo ee 11715 160 (c.15-30'c.15-30| —
Temperature of water ea; 00 | ca. 1:0 | са. 4-0 са.3:0| ca.3°0) 3-15 | 2:10 1:4 | 0-7 0-3
Salinity of water.... | 317 | 37 317 ca.300| — = — | 28:06 | 29°36 — 287 —
No. of sample ...... | 1242 | 1243 | 1244 | 1270 | 1276 | 1279 | 1289 | 1290 | 1291 | 1299 | 1301 | 1308
EU en San a ee r | - с
Tintinnodea |
Cyttarocylis denticulata, | | | | | |
О ое с Wi foe ae Le ır rr ASE) é |
— — gigantea...... ARS: Hol TT ae do и |
— — robusta...... | | | |
Ptychocylis obtusa ...... SER rr er UNS LE KASTE Ru (rr rr LU LE |
Tintinnus norvegicus, gra-
EISEN En IM re er INS races м
Peridiniales | | |
Apodinium(?)Chaetoceratis | Te | 0 rr as rr
Ceratium arcticum...... DE rr mp TT 1r | TG eae | Ir м | IT
Dinophysis arctica....... SEE ae. al |
— rotundata....| ... me Ih at mr ee ah A er Res: er
Goniodoma Ostenfeldii. .. | od em aa 24 KAR st EE | Tr DES |
Gonyaulax triacantha.... cm Be NER | err oe Sag Woe SEE LR see |
SD te te Nr eee Ен ee ee... |
Peridinium breve ....... | PAU Bea ie SA | ЖЕ se | Ir |
— brevipes: | т ee ee 3% NE er SER rr |
= catenatum ... PARTIS | COTE EE IT | ve |... И
| | | | ] | | | |
- conjcoidess Eee kasser ane soe Dee | ee oe soe Е | ae |
= euryipese |. 4, ee eee в Ta | т тт med r че |
— depressume 2 2... Dom | rr LR RAT rr |
— islandicum | r SE | | iil oe | Res sis | rr |
— Ininutum le CO en | SU SE ER Е |
— ovatum ..... |i. EB gpl т Tred) ae | Eve TED RO ee a ha ae Hes т
— pallidum .... r | | |
= pellucidum . + | ip r | TE ee Ih = en ir т rr
= Ppyxriforme =.) |... | LOC FR | see ale Bete ree eee, «eae ae |
-- roseum sees ee SET Tp i) er: eth, allen oe Soe BOD RCE
— subinerme... er rr seu "NÆ SOL eN HERE ae or |
Metazoa | | | | | |
Calanus finmarchicus .... м | + {© т Ar С ce ae о me | ©
Oithona similis et Nauplii | И ee | оо ео | | т | RACE
1 Mostly dead specimens.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 333
1908 (continued).
`25.УП | 25.VII 28. VII | 28.УП | 29. VII | 30. VII | 30.VII | 31. VII | 31. VIL | 31. VIT | 31. VII | 1. VII 1. VIII 1. VIII! 2. VIII | 3.VIII
7a. 8р.. 2'15а.| 2p. |1'45р. 8-30a. 12-15р.11-30а. 1-45р. 3p. |5.30р.| 2:15а. Sa. 4p. |12-30а. | 1 p.
e | |
— — — 75:45 — — 75:15 | 75:08 | — Е о — 74-20 | 73:58 | 73:30 73.4
— — — 12°15 — — 8:45 8-0 — са. 7:30 — 70 7.0 6-0 —
1:0 2-0 17 1:53 09 +06 05 15 2-1 06 4:5 6-2 2 70 7/1
— — — 31:06 —= — 31:00 | 3:09 — 29:56 — 32-9 33.2 34:0 —
1304 | 1312 — 1332 | 1335 1340 1344 1350 | 1353 "1355 | 1358 | 1381 | 1383 | 1386 | 1388 1398
TI rr 1 a — rl 1 — — с с + Y rr
rr rr
тт + 1
rr Е one so: rr Tree r r == ==
IT rr ey rr 5 Re at LEE Syg: SEE rr тт rr == (© с
' rr TI rr Ir rr IT —
1 т rr rl
т
rr rl
I rr rr N
rr тт MR Stel #2. San аа ate rr
rr 1 т т rr Ir
т 1 тт rr rr rr
rr VÆ rr oe те ip rr rr Te IT wae LE à т
т rr rr rr rr
rr TI eg
1 ir rl ты i 1 7 ar = т т ar + с +
rr т 1 1 т r I TI IT rl rr I + 1
rr a. r + + т т 1 т т т rr ть + aa
> rr ja
1 rr 1
rr ER SR rr rr Br Le | LE. SE Er т
Ir SAN
TI c 1 I + + rr Cc c С a G -= с c
хи. 95
334 C. H. OSTENFELD and OVE PAULSEN.
hyperborea, small quantity of Coscinodiscus subbuliens, Chaet. boreale
and Ch. Wighami.
The intermediate group (5 samples) extends from ca. 12° to 8”
W.L.; here we have a salinity of са. 31°/oo and a surface temper-
ature of —0:6° to —1:5°C. It is characterized by the following species,
which are hardly at all found inside: Chaetoceras furcellatum, Rhi-
zosolenia obtusa, Rh. hebetata f. semispina, Dinobryon pellucidum, Cytta-
rocylis denticulata typica. A few species, which very seldom occur
in the inner group, appear here more regularly, namely, Chaet. dia-
Чета, Peridinium pallidum, P. pellucidum and P.ovatum. Thalassi-
osira gravida, which was much reduced, again becomes more fre-
quent in this region. Most of the species prominent in the inner
group disappear here or are only present in small quantity.
A couple of samples form the transition to the outer group, to
which we ascribe the region from ca. 7° to 6° W.L. and from 75°
to 73° М. Г.. The salinity is here higher (38—34 °100) and also the
temperature on the surface (6°—7°) than in the other regions; we
are here outside the pack-ice. The quantity of the plankton is but
small; the diatoms have almost entirely disappeared; characteristic
however is the regular occurrence of Chaetoceras convolutum in small
quantities; further, a number of diatoms of more temperate origin
appear irregularly and in few individuals and likewise some Pro-
tozoa (see our preceding papers). The most abundant organisms are:
Peridinium ovatum, Dinobryon pellucidum, Cyttarocylis denticulata ty-
pica and robusta, Oithona and Nauplii, and in most samples Cera-
tium arcticum, Tintinnus norvegicus gracilis and Peridinium pyriforme.
In a few samples occurred Phaeocystis Pouchetit, Pontosphaera bore-
alis and Coccolithophora pelagica.
The plankton in the outermost samples corresponds nearest to
the “Ceratium arcticum plankton”, which Paulsen (1909) has
described from North Iceland (the southern boundary of which is pla-
ced at са. 64N.L. in his fig. 2), but differs from this in the absence
of Ceralium longipes (the С. arcticum most resembling longipes is
figured in the foregoing paper fig. 16 A).
A general review of the plankton of the pack-ice and
coastal waters, according to the samples examined, would appear
somewhat as follows. In the accompanying sketch map the plankton
regions and the places of the samples (the figures refer to the Tables)
have been marked out. There are three regions.
1. Innermost the plankton region of the coastal waters
(inner group in 1906 and 1908), characterized by diatoms, namely
Chaetoceras species, Coscinodiscus subbuliens, Fragilaria oceanica and
by Calanus finmarchicus.
Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea. 335
2. The plankton region of the pack-ice (outer group in
1906, intermediate group in 1908), characterized by Cyttarocylis den-
ticulata, Rhizosolenia hebetata semispina and R. obtusa, Chaet. furcella-
tum, Peridinium subinerme, P. pellucidum and P. curvipes, and Dino-
bryon.
3. The plankton region of the open water (outermost
group in 1908) with small quantities of characteristic species: Cera-
\Koldewey I
Sketch-map of the area investigated. The full line signifies the path of the Expedition
into the coast, the broken line the way out. The figures refer to nos. of samples
in the plankton tables.
tum arcticum, Peridinium ovatum, (Pontosphaera borealis and Cocco-
lithophora?).
There is the probability that the plankton region of the
pack-ice corresponds to the East Icelandic Polar Current,
whilst the plankton region of the coastal water corre-
sponds to the coastal waters mixed with water from the
melting snow of the land. Lastly, the plankton region of
the open sea may probably be referred to the circulating
central area of the Greenland Sea. This agrees with what
Damas and Koefoed say (l.c. р. 328): “les diatomées qui seules
jouent un role important dans le phytoplankton, prennent un deve-
9
5*
336 OSTENFELD and PAULSEN. Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea.
loppement beaucoup plus considérable dans le courant polaire que
dans la région centrale de la Mer du Groenland”.
We must remember here, however, that our knowledge of the
plankton of these waters is restricted to the summer season.
We may remark, finally, that oceanic plankton forms, е. 5.
Rhizosolenia styliformis, Certium arcticum, are carried right in to the
coast, where they may be considered to. perish sooner or later.
List of Literature.
CLEVE, P.T. (1900): Report on the Plankton collected by the Swedish Expedition to
Greenland in 1899. — К. Svenska Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 34, Nr. 3. Stockholm.
Damas, D. et KoEFoOED, Е. (1909): Le Plankton de la Mer du Grönland. — Duc
d'Orléans, Croisière océanographique accomplie à bord de la Belgica dans la Mer
du Grönland 1905. Bruxelles 1907—1910.
“Liste des Stations”. — Ibidem.
Юзтвоь, Е. (1895): Marine Diatomeer fra Ost-Grenland. — Medd. om Grønland, XVIII,
København.
OSTENFELD, С. H. (1910): Marine Plankton from the East Greenland Sea collected du-
ring the "Danmark Expedition” 1906—1908. I. List of Diatoms and Flagellates.
II. Protozoa. — Medd. om Grønland, XLIII. København.
PAULSEN, Ove (1909): Plankton Investigations in the Waters round Iceland and in the
North Atlantic in 1904. — Medd. Komm. Г. Havundersogelser, Serie Plankton,
Ва. I, Nr. 8, København.
PAULSEN, OVE (1911): Marine Plankton from the East-Greenland Sea collected during
the “Danmark Expedition” 1906—1908. III. Peridiniales. — Medd. om Grønland,
XLII. København.
14.—3.—1911.
XI.
CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE CARBONIFEROUS
FLORA OF NORTH-EASTERN GREENLAND
BY
A. G. NATHORST.
ROME
XLII. 96
Occurrence of the plant-fossils.
he discovery of a carboniferous flora in the area between 80
and 81 degrees of northern latitude on the east coast of Green-
land is of special interest from a palaeobotanical point of view.
This flora represents the most northern carboniferous flora hitherto
known, the corresponding plant-bearing deposits of Spitsbergen
being all situated south of the 80th degree. In consequence of the
circumstances — long sledge-journeys — during which the materials
were collected the collection is naturally not comprehensive: never-
theless it contains specimens of interest. It certainly also promises
rich harvests in the future if the deposits in question are examined
with the chief object of gathering fossil plants.
<
EN Ingolts Ford
ay Lskimonesset
Depot jeldet
50 `09.)
Carboniferous
Fig. 1. Sketch-map of the east coast of №. Е. Greenland
between 80° and 81° N.L. showing the position and
extension of the carboniferous rocks.
As to the geological position of the plant-bearing strata Mr.
H. JARNER, the geologist of the expedition, has sent me the following
communication, regarding which, however, it ought to be mentioned
that Mr. JARNER has not seen any of the carboniferous localities
himself -but owes his information to Messrs Косн and WEGENER,
the former of whom has travelled along the outer coast, while Mr.
WEGENER Visited Hecla Sound and Ingolf Fjord.
The carboniferous deposits occur on the coast outside the Ar-
chaean rocks. They here form a plateau, the height of which at
the outer coast measures about 500 meters, while it is somewhat
26*
340 А. G. NATHORST.
lower inwards in consequence of the gentle slope of its surface to
the westward. The Archaean rocks west of the carboniferous deposits
rise to their usual height of about 1000 meters.
There is a gentle dip of the carboniferous strata towards the
east and north, and the oldest deposits are consequently found at
the western boundary of the formation. On the northern side of
Hecla Sound (at x on the little sketch-map text-fig. 1) there were
collected some impressions! in loose slabs of a micaceous slate at
the base of the mountain, probably originating from a similar rock
which forms the lowest accessible part of the mountain-side and
which is intercalated with and covered by a fine shale without
fossils. The slate also includes some strata, mostly thin, of a reddish
sandstone.
As the dark, almost black, colour of the shale prevails up to
the summits of the mountains it is supposed that these wholly
consist of this same rock, the
thickness of which consequently
must be about the same as the
height of the mountains or 300 —
400 meters (as minimum).
About 7 kilometers east of this
locality, namely at “the Depot 80° 9”,
the following section was measured
(text-fig. 2). From the foot of the
mountain up to 100 meters above
| sea-level the rock is hidden by loose
Fig. 2. Section of the carboniferous rocks debris, but at the height mentioned
at the Depot 80° 9’. (a), fine and soft black the shale again presents itself as
shale; (b), grey shale, (©), conglomerate; ап almost black stratum 30’ meters
(4), sandstone without fossils; (d”), fossili-
ferous sandstone; (e), limestone rich À i
in corals. of alternating beds of a grey some-
what coarser shale (b) and a black
fine and soft one (a) which is especially prevalent in the lower
part (about 5 meters). The shale is covered by a conglomerate of
dark red colour (c), which now prevails up to 200 meters above sea-
level. The pebbles of this conglomerate are well rounded and very
thick. This stratum is composed
small, their size being about that of a hazel-nut, but even this
gradually diminishes upwards so that the conglomerate gradually
passes into a red sandstone, which forms the rock until a height
of 275 meters above sea-level is reached. The grain of this sand-
stone varies, coarser or finer, as also does the colour: red, white
' Knorria-form of Lepidodendron. A.G.N.
Contributions to the carboniferous Flora of North-eastern Greenland. 341
or, sometimes, almost black. The lowermost part of the sandstone
(4) contains no fossils, but from 240 to 275 meters (4”) there is an
abundance of them, especially brachiopods. From 275 meters up
Fig. 3. Coast between “the Depot 80° 9” and “the Mallemukfjeld”.
to its summit (probably 500 meters) the mountain is composed of
a dense limestone (e) rich in corals.
According to the dip of the strata (fig. 3) the uppermost layers
at the Depot 80°9' form the base of the Mallemukfjeld. That
mountain (about 500 meters high, fig. 4) also being built up of
limestone, the total thickness of this rock is estimated as at least
700 meters.
No faults have been observed within the carboniferous formation.
Fig. 4. The Mallemukfjeld.
From this communication of Мг. JARNER’s il is evident that the
plant-bearing beds occupy the base of the carboniferous deposits of
N. Е. Greenland, the whole formation being probably a downthrown
block outside the boundary-fault of the Archaean “Horst”. Their
342 А. G. NATHORST.
stratigraphical position is consequently analogous to that of the
plant-bearing carboniferous beds of Spitsbergen, the age of which,
as shown by me long ago’, is lower carboniferous. As will be seen
below, this is also the case with the plant-bearing carboniferous
beds of North-eastern Greenland.
Description of Species’.
Filicales.
Rachises of ferns (or pteridosperms).
Pl. XV, Figs. 1—4.
Although naturally these rachises cannot be specifically deter-
mined, yet I have thought it convenient to have some of them
figured. The specimen fig. 1 is striated longitudinally, as is also
the case with many specimens from Spitsbergen, while the specimen
fig. 2 is characterised by small spines or tubercles, as is pretty
common with palaeozoic ferns or pteridosperms.
Calymmatotheca bifida Lindley & Hutton sp.
РЕ. ХУ. Е155. 56.
Only the two specimens figured (and also the counterpart of
fig. 5) have been found; but they are too characteristic to leave
any doubt as to the correctness of the determination, for they agree
in every point with specimens from Spitsbergen”,
Sphenopteris sp. indet.
Besides the species just mentioned, there occurs also another
relic of the Sphenopteris-type, the small pinnules of which seem
to have had a somewhat triangular shape. The outlines however
are too obsolete to allow of any determination whatever.
ГА. G. NATHORST, Zur paläozoischen Flora der arktischen Zone, Stockholm,
Vet. Ak. Handl., Bd. 26, No. 4. 1894. Beiträge zur Geologie der Bären Insel,
Spitzbergens und des König-Karl-Landes. Upsala, Bull. Geol. Inst., Vol. X. 1910.
” In this short notice I have not found it necessary to give any lists of syno-
nymy but have only cited such works which are of special interest for the
comparison with the species here mentioned.
* NATHORST, Zur paläozoischen Flora der arktischen Zone. l.c. р. 19, Taf. Ш,
Figs. 1—3.
Contributions to the carboniferous Flora of North-eastern Greenland. 343
Sphenophyllales.
Sphenophyllum tenerrimum Ettingshausen var.
elongatum D. White.
PI ХУ, Figs. 11-92.
The collection contains several stem-fragments and some leaves
of a small Sphenophyllum, which belongs to the {enerrimum-type.
It differs, however, from this species by the somewhat larger size
of the verticils and by the leaves being more divided and often
petiolated; the internodal parts of the stems are generally longer
than those of the typical Sphenophyllum tenerrimum. Dr. В. K1ipston
has kindly calied my attention to the variety elongatum described
by Dr. D. WHITE", and as far as concerns the verticils there seems
indeed to be a complete accordance with the Greenlandic plant”,
As Dr. WHITE says nothing about the length of the internodes, I
have not been able to ascertain if there is coincidence ш this
respect also, but this is of little importance since a difference in
this point may be due to the outer conditions under which the
plants have grown.
Calamariales.
Asterocalamites scrobiculatus Schlotheim sp.
Pl. XV, Figs. 7—10.
Only two fragments — the specimens fig. 7 and fig. 9 — both
on the same slab, have been found; and it is probable that these
have originally belonged to the same individuum. The specimen
fig. 7 represents a compressed stem about 18 millimeters in diameter
with pretty distinct longitudinal ribs, in the middle of which there
is a furrow (figs. 8, 10). No nodal lines are to be seen, but the
nodes are indicated by the ribs being somewhat “swollen” at regular
intervals (at a, b and с fig. 7). At c the node is also very clearly
indicated by the arrangement of the fine striae between the ribs
as distinctly seen under the microscope (fig. 8). The small fragment
fig. 9 (magnified fig. 10) represents a part of the surface at the node
with the “swollen”? ribs.
According to a kind communication by Dr. Kipston, the nodes
of Asterocalamites scrobiculatus “are sometimes not distinguishable,
from the absence of a definite line, but they are often indicated by
swollen or gently uprising protuberances’.
тр. Уните, The stratigraphic succession of the fossil floras of the Pottsville for-
mation in the southern anthracite coal-field, Pennsylvania. In the 20th Ann.
Rep. U.S. Geol. Survey. Washington 1900.
* When only leaves and no stem-fragments are present it may be difficult to
decide if the jeaves belong to this type of Sphenophyllum or to Asterocalamites.
344 А. С. NATHORST.
The occurrence of this species in №. Е. Greenland is of parti-
cular interest, since no Calamarialian remains have been hitherto
found in Spitsbergen.
Lycopodiales.
Lepidodendron spetsbergense Nathorst.
Pl. XVI, Fig. 24.
Part of a branch in pretty good preservation which perfectly
agrees with corresponding branches of the same fossil from Spits-
bergen (NATHORST, Ie, р. 37. Tat. Vil, 17 1X63 xX, 14.215)
Lepidodendron sp.
Pe OV etic.
This is a Knorria-form of some Lepidodendron which, although
not determinable, is thus far of importance as it proves the occur-
rence of another species besides L. spetsbergense in the carboniferous
flora of N. E. Greenland.
Lepidodendron sp.
Pl ХУ! 5 26:
An inner surface of the cortex of some Lepidodendron, possibly
belonging to one of the species mentioned above, the chief interest
of which is that it indicates the presence of big individuals of the
genus also in this northern latitude.
Lepidodendron? sp.
PISE ER IS 27e
А very small twig with short leaves, which is naturally not
determinable. Ц has a close resemblance to similar twigs from Spits-
bergen which were named by HEER Lycopodites filiformis!, but
which may just as well belong to some Lepidodendron. The leaves
of the Spitsbergen-plant, however, seem to be somewhat more
acutely pointed.
Lepidophyllum cfr. lanceolatum Lindley & Hutton.
Pl. XVI, Figs. 28—33, 36.
These sporophylls form the most common specimens of the
fossils collected and were obtained from different localities. They
1 О. HEER, Beiträge zur fossilen Flora Spitzbergens, р. 11, Taf. Ш, Fig. 23—25.
Stockholm, Vet. АК. Handl. Bd. 14, No. 5. 1876. Also in Flora fossilis
arcbiCa Vol IVe
Contributions to the carboniferous Flora of North-eastern Greenland. 345
all belong to the lanceolatum-type of LinpLEY & Hutton! and the
sporangium is often found still adhering to the sporophyll. On
some of the sporangia the impressions of the spores from the inside
can be seen.
Dr. Kipston informs me that he gets similar Lepidophylla both
in the lower and upper carboniferous and that they are of no use
for zonal purposes. No corresponding form, however, has yet been
obtained from Spitsbergen.
Several of these Lepidophylla show curious markings on their
surface (figs. 28, 29, 31), which seem to indicate that there has been
some adhering organism when they were floating in the water.
The markings are more intricate than the Spirorbis adhering to
carboniferous plants. As to the organism to which they are due
I have no opinion whatever.
Whether the two specimens figs. 34 and 35, which are seen
in profile and the sporangia of which are relatively great, belong
to the same species as the others, is difficult to ascertain; but I
suppose that such may be the case.
The specimen fig. 37 represents rather a leaf from a branch
than a true sporophyll.
Stigmaria ficoides Sternberg sp.
Plate ХУ, Fig: 23.
Only the small fragment figured represents the Stigmaria in the
collection.
Summary.
As to the distribution of the different species within the strata,
the material is too poor to allow of any conclusions. The following
list, however, gives some information about the localities or strata
where the fossils here described have been found. 1 indicates the
lowermost stratum (a) of the shale in the section fig. 2, while 3 is
one of the intercalating strata of the somewhat coarser shale (b)
of the same section. 4—6 are specimens collected about 100 meters
eastward from the locality just mentioned: 4 from a loose slab found
about 115 meters above sea-level, 5 from the shale in situ 90 meters,
and 6 from loose materials 90—115 meters above sea-level. 10 and
1 LINDLEY & Ноттом, The fossil Flora of Great Britain. Vol. I, pl. 7, figs. 3—4.
London 1831—33.
346 А. G. NATHORST: Contributions to the carboniferous Flora.
11 were found as loose slabs below the outcrop of the older strata
in the western part of Hecla Sound.
Occurrence of the species in different localities 123 | О © | 11
CalummatothecanbifidanE&aHespr 22.0 2.2... N ЕЕ ts |.
Sphenophyllum tenerrimum Ett. var. elongatum D.W. | se | ar |
Asterocalamites scrobiculatus Schloth. sp........ + |
Lepidodendron spetsbergense Nath.... И Е о
— топа ор ee ee О Sa
— о о
—- SP sa 62 1) PES toc | ai
Lepidophyllum cfr. lanceolatum L. & H. ......... | +
Stigmaniaficoiaes) веки: Sp... rn, SE | ==
As to the age of the plant-bearing deposits as а whole, there
can be no doubt that this must be lower carboniferous. For such
an opinion the occurrence of Calymmatotheca bifida and Lepido-
dendron spetsbergense as well as that of Asterocalamites scrobiculatus
may be cited; and none of the other plants speak in an opposite
direction. This is all that can be said at present, the materials
being too scanty to allow of any more detailed conclusions. Owing
to the great thickness of the plant-bearing beds it is probable that
a more minute examination, from a stratigraphical point of view,
will prove that several plant-bearing horizons may be distinguished.
22.—3.—1911.
PEATE, XY:
Fig. 1— 4.
— 5.46:
— 7—10.
— 11—22.
- 23.
PLATE ХУ.
Rachises of ferns (or pteridosperms).
Calymmatotheca bifida L. & H. sp.
Asterocalamites scrobiculatus Schloth. sp. 7, fragment
of the stem with 3 nodes (at а, b and с); 8, part of
the node at c, magnified; 9 part of the surface of an-
other fragment with the “swollen” ribs at the node;
10, the same as fig. 9 magnified.
Sphenophyllum tenerrimum Ett. sp. var. elongatum D.
White. 11—16, fragments of stems; 17, 18, stem-frag-
ments with remains of leaves at the nodes; 19, the
same as fig. 18, magnified; 20, part of a verticil; 21,
two verticils still adhering to the stem; 22, one of the
leaves of fig. 21 magnified.
Sligmaria ficoides Sternb. sp. Fragment.
PL. XV.
MEDD. OM GRONL. XLIII. NR. 12. [A. G. NATHORsT].
R à AA à au es
€
Cederquists Graf. A.-B., Sthim.
Th. Ekblom del.
PLATE ХУЕ
D Ww D
Qt
ke
SA
PLATE XVI.
Lepidodendron spetsbergense Nath. Part of a branch.
Lepidodendron sp. (Knorria-form).
Lepidodendron sp. Inner cortical surface.
Lepidodendron? sp. Small twig. |
Lepidophyllum cfr. lanceolatum Т.. & Н. Note the mark-
ings on the specimens figs. 28, 29 (magnified) and 31.
It is not quite certain whether the specimens figs. 34
and 35 seen in profile belong to the same species as
the other ones.
Leaf of Lepidodendron.
PL. XVI.
MEDD. OM GRONL. XLIII. NR. 12. [A. G. NATHORST].
“D
=
—.-.-
— ji.
ee ee ee ee ees
Cederquists Graf. A.-B., Sthlm.
Th. Ekblom del.
i =
FT
we à
. +
u
5
Bi 7
Pa u
skur
i
*
i .
7 в =
- 5
| a 7
i
27 :
№
U af
| | 5 |
a
|
и KS
(
. | u
rn
р
п м
i
i >
= №
Le -
=
i }
4 |
f —
i >)
a > m JæD
å и ко 2
%
KJ |
å
=.
XII.
SOME NOTES CONCERNING
THE VEGETATION OF GERMANIA LAND,
NORTH-EAST GREENLAND
BY
ANDR. LUNDAGER
WITH A MAP (PL. XVII)
ior
XLIII. 27
I. Climatic conditions at Danmarks Havn.
1906—1908.
emperature. The mean temperature in the first year was
T — 13.1”, in the second year — 12.0”, for both years -— 12.6".
(According to Moun’s chart of the isotherms of the year it should
be about — 12.0°; the Germania Expedition gives — 11.7° for the
Island of Sabine).
The mean temperature and the extremes for the months were: —
1906 1907
| Aug. Sept. | Oct. | Nov. Dec. | Jan. | Feb. March! April May | June | July
Mean....
| |
Mean... |+ 21 3.7 | 14.5 |—21.0 —24.6 | 23.0 |-26.0 | 23.7 |—19.4 — 8.2/+ 1.1/4 33
Maximum | — |+102/+ 0.2 | 8.5 —122|- 3.4 16.4 1221 950 т 23
Minimum | 13.0 —23.8 |—34.0 —34.4 | 36.4 —35.9 40.9 30.1 —22.0 — 7.5
1907 1908
| | | | | Fr —
— 2.3, 4.4 | AO 19501 eZ 20:8 289) 21.1 | 196 6.4 + ls 5.4
Maximum |+12.2 + 28 — 2.5 — 94 — 06|- 66 —20.4 — 14 — 35+ 3.0/+11.6
Minimum |— 6.0 —14.5 SE) 32.1 | 30.8 33.5 | 38.3 | 36.2 | 33.7! -22.3| 9.3 —
The seasons of the year: —
Autumn (Sept.—Nov.).... — 13.0
Winter (Dec.—Feb.) ..... — 23.4
Spring (March—May).... — 16.4
Summer (June—Aug.) ... + 2.6
Number of days on which the mean temperature was above 0°: —
Aug. 06— July 07... 89 days
Aug. 07—July 08... 76 —
Days without frost: —
Aug 06—July 07... 31 days
Aug. 07—July 08... 38 —
Days with frost (temp. usually above 0°, but minimum below
О Aug. 06—July 07... 73 days
Aug. 07—July 08... 69 —
17.1
350 ANDR. LUNDAGER
Ice-days (temp. constantly below 0°): —
Aug. 06—July 07.. 261 days
Aug. 07—July 08.. 259 —
N.B. Reasonable values have been calculated and added to compen-
sate for the first half of Aug. 1906 and for the latter half of
July 1905, both of which were wanting, so that the figures,
throughout, apply to complete years.
Precipitation in mm. of water (based partly upon measure-
ments and partly upon a rough estimate).
The totals for the months and the years: —
Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. March April May June July| Year
1906—07 | 0.0 60 107 136 20.3 271 235 231 44 28 102 1.9 | 1436
1907—08 | 16.1 89 22 383 МА 33.9 1.5 127 08 50 06 00 |147.4
(The figures must not be regarded as strictly accurate.)
Mean. ‹ (80 14 6:4 260 18.8" 30.5 11.5. 179 26 391521110
Summer (April—Sept.) .... 28.4
Winter (Oct.—March)..... 117.2
Consequently, */5 of the total amount of precipitation must be
reckoned to the winter half-year. Not even 1/10 of the precipitation
of the year falls as rain.
1907 on June 25
1908 - — 17
1906 on Sept. 25. (Very exceptional;
and the last rain fell in the temp. of the air being — 10°.)
| 1907 - Aug. 22
Number of days with downpour.
The first rain of the year fell in |
fees Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Jan. Feb. March April May June July Year
0 9 11 9 al 14 12 15 7 A 8 6 | 107
12 2 515 16 21 8 8) 5 10 4 0: 107
1906—07...
1907—08...
According to the seasons of the year: —
1906—07 1907—08
June AU see 14 16
Sept: Мо 29 22
Фес Нео 37 45
March—May2 eee 27 24
Summer (April--Sept.)... 37 33
Winter (Oct.—March).... 70 74
Consequently, the winter half of the year has twice as many
days with downpour as has the summer half of the year.
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 351
ll. Vegetation-conditions.
When the Danmark Expedition arrived at Cape Bismarck in
the middle of August 1906, it was already autumn from a floristic
point of view. During the excursions to Stormkap and Hvalrosodde
at the end of the month, it was only late-flowering species which
were found just in the act of expanding, or else those, whose flowering-
period extends over the whole of the summer according to the different
localities in which they occur. Among these may be mentioned
especially Ranunculus glacialis on damp gravelly flats beneath the
melting snow-drifts (Dryas octopetala also, in part), as also Pedicularis
hirsuta, Ranunculus sulphureus and Papaver radicatum. In damp river
beds Oxyria digyna is usually conspicuous, with its red leaves and
purple-coloured nuts.
The Dryas-tufts are standing quite brown upon the primitive
rocks and are so dry that the leaves crumble between the fingers;
at the same time — on August 24 — still luxurious mats of Dryas
are to be found upon a slope with a southern aspect where the
melted snow of drifts from higher altitudes provides sufficient moisture
for the nourishment and necessities of life of these stragglers. Cassiope
tetragona, also, has now finished flowering and is quite brown and
dry. Along the large Lakseelv, on the northern side, near high-water
mark, Saxifraga oppositifolia stood in full bloom, as also a few indivi-
duals of Taraxacum phymatocarpum and Lesquerella arctica. The Cype-
racee also have finished flowering and are withering except near
the water-courses. In a few damp places a flowering specimen of
Silene acaulis may yet be seen and near the shore, Stalice armeria;
but a little higher up that also is decaying.
Upon Fuglenæbsfjæld, at an altitude of about 300 metres, Arnica
alpina, Potentilla nivea and Melandrium affine were found in flower,
while Stellaria longipes had not yet reached that stage. The locality
was a rock-ledge with a humus-like substratum, south-east exposition
and sheltered towards the north and west. Upon a level gravel-field
percolated by melting snow, Захйгада oppositifolia was found flower-
ing; not until then, when it was released from its snow-covering,
did it have its spring.
352 ANDR. LUNDAGER
As seen from the table (p. 350), the amount of precipitation is
on the whole inconsiderable, but least during spring and autumn.
On September 18, 1906, the percentage of moisture in the
air was recorded to be 44’. The result of a dry autumn is thorough
desiccation of the soil before the snow-covering comes, and this
circumstance is of vital importance to the vegetation. Not until
September 24 does snow come, and the temperature is constantly
relatively high. The minimum, — 13.0° — is not reached until
the end of the month; no regular snowstorm occurred until
October 22nd.
At New Year there is only a thin covering of snow in the district
around Danmarks Havn.
All the level areas of the rocky flat proper are nearly free from
snow, and consequently the vegetation there has no protection against
the wind and weather. It is of common occurrence that the winter
snow is carried away by the wind and forms drifts on the leeward
ofrocks. From the level ground on the rocky flat the snow disappears
almost entirely after the first storm of wind which closely follows the
snowfall when it does not accompany it; at any rate in such places the
snow does not remain long enough to confer humidity upon the
soil during spring. In bogs and meadows, in so far they may be
called meadows, the circumstances are somewhat different; here the
snow finds shelter and is able to form a rather considerable layer,
the thickness of which varies according to the character of the
vegetation. In places where the latter is dense and covers the
ground entirely, the uppermost dead apices of grasses and Cyperacex
protrude above it and lie prostrate upon its surface in the direction
of the prevailing wind, NW.—SE. Where the ground is uneven by
erosion and has isolated boulders, the surface appears dark seen
from the NW. while the snow is lying on the leeward towards
the south. Everywhere along the hill-sides large snow-drifts occur,
and they condition the life of the vegetation upon the more level
areas lower down, Eriophorum-bogs (Fig. 1) being usually formed if
the gradient is favourable, so that the water may find outlets. Above
such bogs, areas are often found which are not laid bare by the
melting of the snow until late in summer, and there a barren slush
of clayey mud only is formed.
Inwards in the bay, on Hvalrosodde which I visited on January
4, 1907, the extensive area along the river is also free from snow.
It consists of moraine formations with an almost level surface, of
which the entirely flat areas are quite snowless; here Statice armeria
stands quite unprotected. Only the small channels formed by melted
snow afforded a shelter for the snow beneath which Cassiope lies
*punolisyoeq oy} и! Uses SI ‘193[94$ ur
зулрмоч$ JO surmewor YIM ‘чэ88Алорлед ‘чаеН зулециие JO JS9M-UJIOU 9} 01 advospuey] ‘TJ ‘SL
353
the Vegetation of Germania Land
ning
Some Notes concer
354 ANDR. LUNDAGER
in its winter-sleep. At Hvalrosodde the gravel and the sand is so
dry and loose that the frost is not able to bind it.
On January 7, 1907, Ше ground is for the first time covered by
loose snow — everywhere.
On April 5 the Snow Bunting arrived; but not until the 23rd
can the weather be said to have grown milder. On that day I saw
two Buffon’s Skua in the bay betwen Cape Amelie and Cape Marie
Valdemar. Off Isle de France there was open water.
Even now evaporation is in full activity and consequently the
mountain darkens from day to day.
On May 24 we have for the first time a positive temperature;
six days afterwards the thermometer records above 0° at all three
readings.
At the end of May, with the commencement of the higher
temperature, we have also other common spring phenomena; small
gatherings of water begin to appear in Basisker and on the 20th,
Saxifraga groenlandica flowers on Termometerfjeld — beneath a
“pane” of ice.
From Hvalrosodde open water is recorded along the shore of a
lake near Lakseelv. At Danmarks Havn, before June, only a few
boulders had become visible by the melting of the snow along the
margin of Drikkevandsso.
On June 4 Saxifraga oppositifolia is in flower, but only here
and there and not quite expanded. The next day it is found
flowering commonly at Stormkap, and on the same day flowering
individuals are also met with at Termometerfjeld.
There are now in a great many places small, open tarns, where
wading birds rest in their journey.
In the night previous to the 38rd of June the large flight of
birds occurred just at the point of time when the door of the
cupboard was thrown wide open. As we know, these pools contain
swarms of living creatures such as larvæ and other creeping things
which condition the existence here of small wading birds. It is
quite a peculiar experience to be out on a night when the flight
of these birds takes place. The air is full of the music of their
notes and of the whirr of wings. I was on my way to Stormkap
in the night in question with a hand-sledge, so for several hours I
had a good opportunity of hearing the winged crowds as they made
towards land to their breeding places, where the flocks separate.
Out on the ice a bear was lying with its two cubs and was
devouring a seal which it had caught at a breathing-hole. This
meal was watched over with apparent interest by foxes and ravens,
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 355
and spying gulls who, seated upon the neighbouring icebergs, waited
for the moment when the lawful owner of the prey should retire.
On the 4th the minimum thermometer recorded for the first
time a positive temperature; soon afterwards we had east winds
which again for some days brought the thermometer down below
freezing point.
On June 10 we have snow and wind with a high, almost positive,
temperature the whole day.
Under such circumstances the snow which has fallen benefits
the whole surface of the ground, as it is now allowed to melt where
it lies. Seen from Termometerfjeld the ground down towards
Skibshavn was white at noon; but before long the soil, already
somewhat thawed and sun-heated absorbs the melting snow. In
contradistinction to a considerable part of the winter-snow, which
disappears by evaporation early in spring and leaves behind it only
a dry bottom, this summer-downfall penetrates easily to the roots
of the plants, which are just now in want of it.
On moss-tufts and other plant-carpets there is not the slightest
indication of dampness from evaporating snow. But, on the other
hand, the fresh verdure of both the moss and the lichen now show
that they have benefited by the moisture from above. The boggy
stretches are also now so far thawed that the plant-life there can
begin to awaken; already some days ago drinking-water had been
fetched from a small streamlet near Basiskeeret.
The weather was also quite summer-like on June 13 when 1
made an excursion to Hvalrosodde. The surface was in a bad state
a great part of the way and especially the last part where the
melting snow had already formed large ponds upon the ice. In the
bay off the mouth of Lakseelv the wind had covered the ice with a
rather considerable layer of dust and sand from the lowland above
and this furthers, in a high degree, the melting of the snow, so
that both the number and the depth of the pools were greater here
than farther from land. And the conditions grew perceptibly worse
day by day. At 3 p.m. the temperature (measured by a swinging
thermometer) was + 12.4°. From the fore-shore (Fjæren) we had
driven our sledges so far into the land, that they just touched the
snowless ground; then we stopped to pitch our tents. But now the
snow retired so quickly down towards the fore-shore that it was
almost noticeable from hour to hour how the distance increased,
and although, in the following days, we had fog and a lower tempe-
rature, yet several metres of the way to the ice was bare of snow
when we left the place on the 17th.
In the lower part of the bed of the Lakseelv, which is at this
356 ANDR. LUNDAGER
point from 40 to 45 metres broad, the snow was yet lying deep,
but there were a few pools here and there; higher up it appeared
as if a single spot was free from ice and in this opening in the ice
several swimmers (loons) lived.
In a pond formed from melted snow, the temperature of which
measured + 16.4°, Oxyria digyna was seen with large, fresh, leafy
shoots and a Statice with an almost fully developed flower-bud. On
dry ground, on the other hand, Oxyria develops flower at the expense
of its leaves — the reverse is found to be the case in Statice. In
spite of the falling temperature, + 7.5° was measured at 8.30 p.m.
in a larger lake. Around the tenting-place stood crowds of Saxifraga
oppositifolia in bloom. At night the temperature went down to
below 0°. The whole of the next day there was a dense fog, so
dense that tent-ropes were covered with rime, and the swinging
thermometer also became covered with ice during use; the following
night the temperature went down to — 2.0°. Not until late in the
day, on the 15th, did the fog disperse by a fresh breeze from
the NW.
As it might be of great interest to see spring advance toward
the head of the fjord I tried to reach Fuglenæbsfjæld, near a
spot which I had visited at the end of August the previous year;
but already off Rypefjeld, about 10 km. from Hvalrosodde, the
sledge was stopped by a crack in the ice; and as it was not possible
to proceed further by the sledge, I went ashore there. Upon sloping
ground, copiously watered by melting snow, one of the usual Erio-
phorum-bogs was formed (Figs. 1, 2). Here masses of lumps of Nostoc
were lying, and here Eriophorum polystachyum was found already
in flower. Around Danmarks Havn the species was not seen flowering
until the end of the month. Next day when I visited “Trekroner”
I found Draba arctica (J. Vahl) in flower while it was not seen
flowering at Danmarks Науп till the 22nd. As might be expected,
these few features indicate an earlier spring in the interior of the
fjords than down by the coast.
Unfortunately the conditions on the ice were such that they
compelled me to retreat early so I had to limit my excursions to a
single visit to “Trekroner” on June the 16th.
This rather formidable mass of rocks forms the eastern boundary
of 52150; it consists of three elevations, separated by valleys, with
surfaces consisting of boulders and large stones with intervening,
flattened areas covered by the products of weathering. Strangely
enough, I found up here Trisetum, which in the coastal region is
only found on sheltered rock-ledges with a snow-covering of long
duration. But a similar snow-covering may probably also be found
cunfiyonysiijod yy pue iazyonoaysg штаоцаота; jo
SUOIJEIDOSSE PUNOISIIO OY} UP “WoT oY} 0) ‘OMC, yz ur sıupbjna зыпа@иИ чим oayey Jews в JO МЭА ‘СЯ
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land
358 ANDR. LUNDAGER
here on the small patches of gravel in the shelter of larger and
smaller loose stones. Upon the south-west side of the mountain,
facing the lake, the most favourable conditions for the vegetation exist
which can on the whole be found in the district traversed. Seen
from a distance there is here in reality a vegetation which reminds
one of heather-moors (cf. Warming, “Lynghede” in Meddelelser om
Grønland, XII, 1887). Cassiope is the most dominant plant (Fig. 4);
it imparts a dark tone to the rocks. At nearer approach the nume-
rous, small rippling half-hidden streamlets from the more elevated
snow-drifts are distinctly heard. Upon the rather steep rocky slope,
where these tiny murmuring brooklets cut their way into the layer
of moorland soil, one also meets with strips of continuous greensward,
apparently consisting principally of species of Carex which, however,
cannot be determined at this time of the year. If anywhere anything
could be reminescent of “grassy slopes” (“Urteli”) it would be here
where certain spots open a possibility for the formation of humus.
A slight depression between the stones easily becomes filled with
withered plant-remains and the dung of the hare and the ptar-
migan — a fitting nursery for saprophytic fungi. When these loose
materials are removed many tender young shoots, as might be
expected, are found in a soil penetrated by plant-roots; but it is
not the tender or the frail species which have here been permitted
to occupy the best localities. So far as the contents of the spirit-
jars from this locality could be determined, it was, as from the
corresponding localities nearer the coast, Campanula and Polygonum
which principally cover such relatively favourable small patches of
the otherwise hard and poor rocky flat.
Besides the above-mentioned species, Draba glacialis flowered here
on June 16; but already two days earlier it had been found flowering
in Lambert Land (79° 8). Hierochloé also stands here, broad and strong,
with open anthers. In these dreary, poor surroundings its effect is very
arrogant, like that of a giant of old descent who struggles for survival.
While I am busy with my collections a humble-bee buzzes noisily
round me and a spider darts away frightened, being disturbed in its
chase by my intrusion.
About the 20th several lakelets (Figs. 2,3) are free from ice and
spring has come to Danmarks Науп also. The small wading-birds
are now nesting and in the lakes one encounters Long-taileds Ducks,
Eiderfowl, Red-throated Divers and Brent Geese.
Although it may be said that Saxifraga oppositifolia is now in
flower nearly everywhere, it is evident that it is a little behindhand
in places where it is exposed to the north. Saxifraga flagellaris is
"ЧАН sy.ewuel] AVOU 399 в Jo ии OU} UO 2911240
aıps pue pnua9 vbyafixng ‘snuidjp зпатоэ4о]у ‘sodıbuo] 140]121$ Члэ2этэцэ$ штаоцаом; ‘wunipdiaia wnuobhjog ‘е "314
Land
ania
f Germ
ion о
the Vegetat
s concerning
Some Note
360 ÅNDR. LUNDAGER
also in flower оп the 20th, and Cerastium alpinum. Pedicularis hirsuta
peeps forth with its shoot-tops, woolly with white hairs, and appears
to be somewhat behindhand here around Danmarks Havn, for already
on the 22nd a flowering individual was gathered on Lille Koldewey,
although it was not yet in flower on the main land. It was one
of the few species, whose first flowering-period occurred later in the
year 1908 than in the year before.
It appears as if spring comes earlier in the Island of Maroussia
than around Danmarks Havn, at any rate, there are many circum-
stances which seem to show this; for instance, the Melandrium triflorum
brought home, was gathered there in flower earlier than I saw the
plant in flower at Danmarks Науп, although it may have been an
accident that a single species should be found in flower there before
it flowered in other places.
Not until the 20th did Vester Elven force its way through its
upper course; before this there had only been a local draining of
the melting snow of Basiskeret. To the north of the bog large masses
of snow are lying on the southern slopes of the mountains; it is
from here that the clayey, gravelly flat towards the stream is irrigated,
and already some days ago Ranunculus sulphureus was found flowering
here in the more elevated parts of the gravelly flat, while the more
low-lying parts of it are almost exclusively covered with Alopecurus
alpinus; but as yet the latter shows no sign of life here, while Erio-
phorum polystachyum has reached its flowering stage.
We have now advanced as far as “midsummer,” which in these
parts is in reality the beginning of the summer. The transition in
1907 was indicated by the first rain of the year. On June 24
5.0 mm. of rainfall were measured; even if this was not a very
large quantity it was sufficient to make traffic out of doors irksome.
The rain began at noon and lasted all the afternoon.
In the course of the following eight days the floral display had
reached its maximum. Probably about half of the flowering species
are out now, thus all the Drabas, several Saxifragas and the most
prominent of the. Ranunculi; these species are the character-plants of
the country which give the stamp to the landscape by the great
abundance of their individuals. In the bog, for instance, Ranunculus
sulphureus is now in full bloom and reminds one not a little of the
marsh-marigold on a spring day at home when, with its yellow patches,
it livens up surroundings which have hardly yet become green.
It is natural that moisture should be of the greatest importance
to this, the culminating period of the vegetation. Referring to the
measured amount of precipitation we see that June is relatively
'puv] vrivwljon ит 901 8120$$8 0и060.1]9] 2401550")
У
a
=
=
gg
—
5
=
5
[=
=
Ф
ae
=
a)
=
©
>
SS
S
v
on
©
к
=
d
ei
‚а
Fa)
=
=
[=
=
=
=
=
d
©
Cc
=
©
о
an
d
—
©
a
7
d
a
ca
Я
©
nm
362 ANDR. LUNDAGER
conspicuous with 9.1 mm. spread over eight days. Until the 10th it
appeared as snow, and not till the 24th as rain; but besides this
measured moisture another factor is utilised-in addition to the most
important ofall whichis, of course, moisture due tothe melting process —
viz. the fog; the causal connection of this is less conspicuous but
certainly of no less importance both directly and indirectly. At the
end of the month we often had south-easterly winds and a dense fog
from the sea crept over the land, where it soaked everything, and this
sometimes happened several days running. For lichens and mosses
this form of moisture is undoubtedly of the greatest importance, but
the whole vegetation profits by direct absorption; to this should
be added its indirect significance to evaporation which is modified
to a high degree when the fog lies densely upon the surface of
the earth.
Under such circumstances the temperature of the ground and the
water, provided currents do not supervene, is the same at night as by
day and coincides very nearly with that of the air. This is proved
by the following interesting measurements.
After an almost constant temperature, on the 24th of June 1907
(+ 3.4°, + 3.7", + 3.2” at 8a.m., 1 p.m. and 9 p.m. respectively) I
measured the temperature at night at 1 a.m. in a wet moss-tuft, again
in a small stream and still again in a damp Silene-tuft and obtained
everywhere + 3.4°; the air was then — 2.9°.
In the main channel of Vester Elven, where the current is rather
strong, the temperature, on the other hand, was only + 1.8°. The water
on its way from the place of melting is not under the influence of the
rays of the midnight sun when there is a dense cloud-covering as was
the case here. In the evening of the 24th, at 9 o’clock, the wind was
N. fast С. and the cloud-covering was 101”? ni.!
As the temperature, also, is of the greatest importance to the
plant-life, not only must the supply of heat be able to be relied
upon, but also it is necassary to economise that which has already
been obtained; the point is to have as slight a loss of heat as possible.
And here the cloud-covering also plays a great part in the condition
of the plant-life.
We have above an example of the influence of the nimbus-clouds
directly to impart moisture, and indirectly to retain the heat by
moderating the evaporation. A dense covering of stratus-clouds also
serves the latter purpose; but they are far more favourable to the
vegetation when the conveyance of heat is concerned. While the
fog was always coincident with low temperature, there might very
well be conveyed to the ground a considerable amount of heat in
1 Here and everywhere the flgures indicate the amount of the cloud-covering, and
ni., str. and fr.-str. stand for nimbus, stratus and fratus-stratus respectively.
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 363
spite of а dense layer of stratus, and under conditions when the
temperature of the air was low.
Some of the measurements prove this. On June 28 we had: —
8 a.m. Temp. + 0.7° Force of wind 2.3 Cloud-covering 101 str fr-str.
2p.m. — -+1.1° — 2.2 — 102 ni.
Эр.ш. — +3.5° — 2.1 — 1012225stn:
and on the 29th Sa.m. — + 2.6? — С — 9071 str.
Although the sun had not been out during the night yet in the
morning of the 29th at 9.45 the temperature in the main channel
of Vester Elven was + 7.2° and in the soil under irrigation + 13.0°,
and in the air + 2.8°.
This phenomenon I can only explain by the fact that the cloud-
covering had not absorbed all the rays of the sun so that in spite
of the dense layer of clouds there had been no slight supply of heat
simultaneously with considerable modification of evaporation.
Fogs also continued during the month of July, in which the
precipitation is so very inconsiderable. But during this month
southerly-easterly winds are not always coincident with fogs.
The precipitation was measured in four days, all told. The
heaviest rainfall occurred on the 9th and was measured as 1.1 mm.
Moreover it rained a little on the 12th, 13th and 14th. The maxi-
mum of the last 24 hours was + 8.8°, up to that time the highest
temperature of the year; the following day the fog hung again over
sea and land, and the temperature was low.
Not till the 22nd does the fog rise and for the remainder
of the month the weather is clear, the wind principally in the
north-west.
On July 4 the summer is so far advanced that the Snow
Bunting has young ones; the gnats begin to appear and around
Danmarks Havn Saxifraga opposilifolia is fast approaching the end
of its flowering-period. But at Cape Bismarck a lake is found
where the ice is still lying; a narrow strip of water along the shore
is the only visible sign of the spring not having passed over it
without leaving its traces.
On July 5 the ice round the ship was so crumbly that the
passage was unsafe even for the dogs; and on the day following
the ship became free. Some little time, however, elapsed before we
really got some heat, and the maximum of the year, + 12.3°, is not
reached till the 17th; but then, on the other hand, the minimum is
as high as — 2.0° and of the 30 days with a positive mean tempera-
ture 15 are even quite frost-free.
The hottest day of the year fell on July 31 with the highest
recorded temperature; the sum of the three readings of this day
XLII. 28
364 ANDR. LUNDAGER
(+ 5.6, + 11.1 and + 3.0, at 8, 2 and 9 o’clock respectively) is 19.7°.
At 1 p.m. the black-bulb thermometer recorded —- 42.0°.
The gnats occur to a degree that is most tiresome, though they
are not nearly as numerous as in the corresponding swampy districts
on the west coast.
In spite of the heat the summer must be said to have finished
by the end of this month; all plant-life had been long before on
the descent and even the late-flowering species have reached their
last stage of development—fruit-setting. The high temperature during
the day does not suffice to call forth and continue the development
of those species and individuals which perhaps appear first at this
time from beneath the melting snowdrifts. From the beginning
of August we have to reckon with a fairly distinct day-period;
already in the night between August the 4th and the 6th the
thermometer went down to — 2.0°. Not till the 23rd did we get a
negative day-temperature, but three days later we had the first 24
hours of continuous frost.
There is plenty of precipitation during the month; 16.1 mm.
of which half fell on the 12th.
The melting of the snow reached its maximum, with the largest
bulk of water in Vester Elven, on August 3rd.
With the setting-in of frost the cycle of the vegetation is virtually
at an end for this year. Only here and there we find — in shelter
and under the influence of the sun’s heat in the middle of the day —
a few Ranunculi, Saxifrage and other hardy plants in bloom; but
I am under the firm impression that the period of growth was
considerably longer in 1906. On the other hand in 1907 more snow
seems to have melted than the year before. Аз far as can be
judged more snow was lying on the mountains then than there is
now lying at the same time of the year.
The appearance of the old snowdrifts also indicates this. The
more the snow melts away the darker become the surface-layers
which mark the pauses between the different snowfalls of unequal
thickness which, in the course of the winter, build up the snowdrift
(Fig. 5). And that layer will be darkest which is the last to be melted
during a summer period, especially if it lies deeper than the melting-
level of one or more previous years. For every time the storms, in
the course of the winter, have brought the snow to rest in a drift,
loose material is brought thither from the fields above. This material
continues to cover the snow in layers and helps, very much, to
hasten the melting because of its dark colour.
Such a stratification can be seen in profile at lakes and other
places where the drifts are undercut by water so that the outer
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 365
edge appears with a vertical fracture after parts of the drift have
tumbled down. At such places the latter, in its consistency, reminds
one of a glacier, and the perennial snowdrifts fully justify the name
of glacier, formed as they are like the land-ice by the snowfall of
many years.
With September, autumn had entered upon a more austere
stage than at the same time in the previous year. This applies in
particular to the first third of the month; in 1906 we had then a
rather high positive temperature while in 1907 we had a negative
mean temperature already in the first week of the month, which
was of great and fatal import to the vegetation, as it meant an
abrupt termination to the life of those individuals that were belated.
On September 11 the maximum temperature was the same in 1906
and 1907, namely + 2.8°. Then followed the lower temperature
which in 1907 brought the summer period to an end about a fort-
night earlier than in 1906.
If the mean temperature of the whole month is considered
exclusively, the difference between 1906 and 1907 is but small, as
we have in 1906 — 3.3” against — 4.0° in’ 1907. This slight difference,
which is owing to the higher temperature at the end of the month
in 1907 might lead to the supposition that September 1907 must in
the main have presented itself nearly as did the same month the
year before; but facts show, all the same, considerable discrepancy
which is clearly indicated by a comparison of the means for
each week.
Ist week 2nd week 3rd week 4th week
1906 — 2.57? — 7 — 5.81° — 71072
and 1907 — 0.42° BER — 6.72? BET
What is decisive here is naturally.the earlier appearance of the
frost rather than its severity.
In 1906 passage across the ice between the ship and the shore
was established on September 20; while in 1907 the sheet of ice
had already formed a bridge on September the 1st. However,
some days later the traffic was broken off by storm and springtide,
but yet lasting communication was established some ten days earlier
than in the previous year.
Vester Elven also suspended its activity somewhat earlier than
in 1906 when it supplied drinking water to the dwellers on land as
late as September 18, while in 1907 the river-bed was dried up
already on the 9th.
On September 27 we had our first snowstorm; at two in the
afternoon the storm was in full swing although the wind greatly
28*
366 ANDR. LUNDAGER
increased in violence later on in the day with a more copious fall
of snow. This, the first snowstorm, occurred exactly a month earlier
than in 1906, but otherwise under similar conditions, starting from
the north, whence the wind veered to NNW., attaining a velocity
of about 20 metres per second. As sudden a rise of temperature
as in 1906 did not take place, but yet the temperature rose to + 0.2
in the course of the night.
The percentage of the moisture in the air was low on an average,
often below 50; the lowest percentage of moisture recorded is 36
on October 3, 1907. Both in 1906 and 1907, autumn — or the time
when the frost arrives — was accompanied by north-westerly winds
which dried up the ground and thus created better conditions for
the plants which, after having finished their development, were ready
to meet the advance of winter. As regards the majority of the species
seeds had been set abundantly. No doubt it also holds good for
the buds which have been formed, that they are much more protected
in a relatively dry condition than if they had been covered with
ice before the snow-covering came. Evaporation and the desiccation
resulting from it are further prevented by a protective sheath of
old leaves (cf. List, рр. 28 and 27: Lesquerella and Potentilla pulchella).
As will be seen from the table, the mean temperature for October
appears about equal for both years. The first part of the month
was much colder in 1907 than in 1906; on the other hand the conditions
were reversed as regards the latter part. Otherwise there is a distinct
similarity between the two months in many cases; this applies, among
other things, to the direction of the wind, which is principally westerly.
Between the two points of the compass W. and N., both inclusive,
1906 shows 52 readings
and 1907 — 57 — ,
next comes calm with
1906 — 30 —
and 1907 =", il —
Е. is represented by two readings both in 1906 and 1907.
The different directions of the wind cause some differences in
the humidity of the air; the air is usually dry with westerly wind;
this applies, at any rate, to the summer-period. When the sea is
open the percentage of moisture is somewhat increased during easterly
wind or calm. In autumn, however, a low percentage of moisture
often coincides with calm, while a higher percentage may occur
with wind from the north-west.
An unusual mildness prevailed in December 1907 during the
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 367
days from the 17th to the 21%, when the temperature oscillated
between — 0.6° and — 8.9°. The ground was covered with snow
which lay slushy and heavy; without being acted upon, to any parti-
cular degree, by the wind, the snow was allowed to fill the low-
lying places and depressions so that it made one uniform surface.
The last day of the year 1907 was until that time also the coldest
day of the winter with a temperature of — 32.0°.
January 1908 was somewhat milder than in 1907. A violent
snowstorm, in the middle of the month, blew the hills free from
snow, and considerable quantities of gravel and pebbles were carried
in the drift so that the snowdrifts were coloured dark thereby. Some
snow fell again some days later during calm weather, so that an
opportunity offered itself to measure the thickness of the layer of
fresh snow which had fallen. It is very difficult to get a reliable
computation of the precipitation which falls in the form of snow
by the ordinary apparatus, especially when it is blowing. For that
reason it may be of interest to give some figures which show the
unreliability of the results, even under conditions of calm. On
January 18, 7 cm. of fresh snow fell, which according to the rain-gauge
measured 3.4mm. On the day following 11 cm. fell, which according
to the rain-gauge amounted to 2.6 mm. only. It is often quite
impossible to decide, during drifting, whether any fresh snow is
falling or not.
As I stayed at the station at Pustervig from January 29 to
March 6, 1908, I had an opportunity of comparing the atmospheric
conditions which prevail there during a winter-month with the
conditions at Danmarks Науп. As was to be expected they agreed
fairly well as regards temperature, pressure and amount of moisture.
At Pustervig also, the snow-covering was inconsiderable оп the
more level ground. The distance from Danmarks Havn is about
75 km., the indentation of coast-line is the deepest in Germania
Land. Unfortunately I had no opportunity of visiting the place at
summer-time as the station there was vacated on June Ist.
I have calculated the mean temperature for a month of 29
days, from February 7th to March 6th. The result is — 28.07° at
Danmarks Науп as against — 28.0 at Pustervig, where, however, there
were many days far colder than any in the former place, where
only one day, February 21 (— 37.7°), had a temperature below — 35.0°
as against five such, and even colder, days at Pustervig.
The month of March had less precipitation than in 1907.
On the 28th we had the last snowstorm of that winter; during
the storm snow, to a depth of 25—30 cm., was blown away from
368 ÅNDR. LUNDAGER
the level ground round the pathway from the house on the land
to the thermometer-stand (“Die englische Hütte”), and after that the
eastern side of Harefjeld stood out fairly bare. Immediately before
the snowstorm we had peculiarly mild weather with easterly winds,
which was probably due to a great deal of open water at sea.
A raven was seen at the end of the month, and seals also were
seen on the ice as early as during this month.
On April 5 the Snow Bunting arrived. Otherwise the month
was cold and dry as in 1907. The minimum temperature, — 33.7°
fell on the 3rd, and the maximum, — 3.5°, on the 28th. Towards
the end of the month it was milder than in 1907, and as was
afterwards seen this mildness proved to be the beginning of a
summer both earlier and warmer than that of the year before.
The mean temperature of the month was — 19.2°, somewhat lower
than in 1907, which was due to the severe cold in the beginning
of the month. A comparison between the mean temperature of
this and the following month showed also what was, on the whole,
the greatest temperature-gap which occurred between any two succes-
sive months. A similar gap occurred between the mean temperatures
for September and October. Here these numbers are compared
for September and October
1906 — 3.3 — 14.0 Dif. 10.7
1907 — 4.0 — 14.3 Dif. 10.3
and for the months
April May
1907 —19.0 — 77.9 Dif. 1
1908 — 19.2 OLD NI
The weather during the first days of May formed an immediate
continuation of that of April, but already on the 6th the temperature
rose fairly considerably and after this intimation the temperature
of the 7th ultimately reached the positive side: at 5 o’clock in the
afternoon the thermometer stood at + 3.0”. So high a temperature
was not reached in 1907 until June 1; also a positive temperature
on the whole was not reäched until 17 days later in 1907 than
in 1908.
This early occurrence of a higher temperature was visibly indicated
by the small pools due to melting snow, which formed about three
weeks earlier than the year before, when such pools were not found
until towards the end of the month. Already for a long time ago
the mountain-sides facing east and south have been darkening con-
siderably, and only the higher parts — seen from a distance — are
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 369
still white. The air is, on the whole, dry — also with easterly
wind: а somewhat higher percentage of moisture is common with calm.
With these possibilities for the reawakening of plant-life, spring
must be said to have commenced, and a fortnight later I also found
decidedly new leaf-shoots upon a Cerastium-tuft which on May 21
stood under the snow with flowers from the preceding autumn
which looked so fresh, that at first sight they could very well be
supposed to have expanded recently.
On the 9th and 10th we had dense frosty fogs with falling
temperature, down to — 15.4”. The following days were also rather
cold with frequent fogs. But the snow was seen to disappear day
by day as soon as the sun came out and exerted some power.
On the 20th snow fell and formed a thin layer; the following
day was also densely cloudy, and there was a fine sprinkling of
snow which melted immediately in places previously bare. Then
it cleared up for a few days with westerly winds and a temperature
of about — 5.0°, until on the 24th we again had fog and snow-squalls.
On the 25th a positive temperature was again reached which continued
for a longer time. It was cloudy from early morning and in the
course of the forenoon snow began to fall so heavily that gradually
a layer of it covered everything. But although the sun did not
come out this snow melted rather quickly during the afternoon;
small pools were formed only upon the bare primitive rocks; other-
wise the soil quickly absorbed the moisture thus conveyed to it.
At last on the 28th the sun shone in all its splendour from early
morning, and as early аз 9 a.m. we had a temperature of + 3.0°.
The wind was then westerly; but soon afterwards it turned to the
east and the temperature again went down to below zero. Later in
the day the fog rolled over the land, and the sun’s rays penetrated
only slightly through it late in the afternoon. At this time of the
year the gravel-fields are thawed to a depth of about 10cm. Evidently
only the warmth of the sun was wanting to call the plants forth.
The appearance of a fly announced the reawakening of insect-life.
At night a large flight of birds occurred and in the evening I
saw in Basiskæret Dunlin, Turnstone and Ringed Plover. Further
towards the south Sea Gulls had been seen; Buffon’s Skua, also,
was seen the same night; last year the first one was shot on June 5,
but, as mentioned above, I had then already seen two at Cape
Marie Valdemar on April 23rd.
When Г ascended the mountains on the 29th and surveyed the
sea-ice it displayed several cracks, and it was said that a movement
in the ice-fields had also been observed. In spite of an almost
positive temperature during the last days of May practically no
370 ANDR. LUNDAGER
progress could be traced as regards the vegetation. Only the lichens
stood fresh, especially upon stones. But under the fresh snow
which frequently covered everything, much was being prepared,
hidden from sight.
The upper layer of the soil was thawed at that time wherever
it had no snow-covering, and the clay in Basiskeret had already
become so muddy that it was quite laborious to walk about on it.
Larger pools were also met with at this time where the numerous
wading-birds lived.
When, in the night of the 30th, I drove to Pustervig snow began,
and as the wind grew stronger later in the night there was con-
siderable snow-drift. The boggy tracts around Stormkap were
mostly covered with snow and had a very winterly aspect in spite
of the year being well advanced. In several places Snow Buntings
were found which had evidently died of hunger, as the ground had
been frozen where they should find their food. The snow was
damp when it fell and in many places it froze and occurred as an
icy covering upon the ground and upon the projecting parts of
plants; this is not to be wondered at as the temperature was still
low by night, and even went down to —9.3 during the last 24
hours of May.
The vegetation at this time was not further developed in Puster-
vig than at Danmarks Havn.
At the end of May everything was at a standstill, so to speak,
and was far from having reached the development which the warm
days on the 6th and 7th had at that time indicated; but a con-
siderable amount of moisture had been conveyed to the ground, far
more than was registered by the 5.0mm. downfall; and owing to
the fact of the ground being thawed earlier and containing more
moisture, preparations were being made for a quick development
of the spring flora, even if it began later than there had at first
been reason to expect — as regards Saxifraga oppositifolia and a
very few other species even later than in 1907.
The month of June 1908 began with clear weather and
relatively cold nights. Not until the 8th did we have а positive
temperature at all three readings. This was reached last year as
early as May 30; and occurred again on five additional days in
June before the 8th; which was probably the reason why Saxifraga
was then in flower as early as the 4th, while this year that
stage of development was not reached until the 7th.
Then came again some days with fogs from the east and south
and a low temperature so that the melting of the snow progressed
slowly. Not until the 12th was there enough running water in
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 371
Basiskeeret for us to be able to obtain drinking water there — several
days later than last year. A small lake near the station was almost
free from ice and was visited by Long-tailed Ducks and _ loons.
The next day the wind was again north-west and the sun was
allowed to shed its rich warmth without hindrance over all the
country and call forth the humble-bee simultaneously with the
first flowering Salix. And now the awakening process proceeded
without intermission, so that every day new species appeared:
Draba hirta, Draba alpina, Eriophorum polystachyum, Ranunculus
sulphureus, etc. The 18th was the first real summer day, on which
the maximum reached + 8.2°. Vester Elven “forced,” i.e. made its
way through its upper course, and as this phenomenon occurred
two days earlier than was the case last year, so also everything
appeared at this time to be further developed than the year before;
this also applies to the first-flowering of the above-mentioned species
which occurred from one to four days earlier than in 1907. On
the same day Ranunculus glacialis and Oxyria digyna were seen in
flower. The mean temperature of June was 0.2° lower than that
of last year. The mean for five days was as follows: — — 2.3°,
— 0.03, — 0.82, + 2.38, + 3.35 and + 5.37. Consequently, the warmth
did not set in until the middle of the month. We had a positive
mean on the 8th, 9th, and 15th. After that the mean temperatures
were exclusively positive, although the minimum did not become
positive until the 18th. The latter half of the month was decidedly
more favourable for the vegetation than was the case last year,
and many species were well in progress as regards fruit-setting
before the end of the month.
The absolutely highest temperature was + 11.6° in the afternoon
of the 28th. Last year the maximum, + 7.3, was reached on the
20th. There is thus a considerable difference as regards the warmth
of the same two months in 1907 and 1908 respectively, and the
difference is in the latter half of the month, which this year had
been freer from fogs than was the case last year.
The ice between the ship and the land was traversed for the
last time on June 30th; in 1907 it could be traversed until July 6th.
The month of July began by being warm. The wind con-
tinued from the west and the air was clear and dry. From June 24
to July 12 there was no frost, consequently, there were in June 9
days, as against 6 last year, and in July 12 days without frost. In
1907, there were 18 days in the whole of July without frost. From
the 13th the wind often veered to the south and east, which caused
fogs and low temperature, and thus the days continued till our
departure from Danmarks Науп on the 21st.
ANDR. LUNDAGER
372
In continuation of the foregoing remarks regarding the climate
and the phenology I shall now give some observations concerning
the insolation. These measurements were effected with a black-
bulb thermometer in vacuum and an ordinary swinging thermometer,
which were placed at a height of 2'/2 metres on the southern gable
of the villa against a background of black roofing paper. The tem-
perature of the air is given according to the thermometer in the
thermometer-case.
March 3, 1907. Sun’s altitude at midday 6°17’
ие ные 1 p.m. 1.15 р. т.
А — 29.6 — 29.4
Black bulb — 4.6 — 9.0
Blank bulb — 21.0 — 20.0
March 10, 1907. Sun’s altitude 9°
met" 11.30 а. т. 12.30 p.m.
АЕ — 29.5 — 28.8
Black bulb 0.0 + 0.8
Blank bulb — 23.0 — 20.2
March 11, 1907.
име Bas gra 11.30 а. т. 12 midday 12.35 p.m. 1 p.m. 1.30 p.m.
> — 26.0 — 25.8 — 25.6 — 26.5 — 25.1
Black bulb + 0.9 — 0.2 + 0.5 + 0.5. — 1.0
Blank bulb — 16.7 — 18.8 — 16.9 — 14.9 —17.8
March 12, 1908.
ulmer 11 а. m. 12 midday 12.50 p.m.
А — 29.0 — 27.0 — 26.2
Black bulb + 1.0 + 3.8 + 4.5
Difference. 30.0 30.8 30.7
March 13, 1907.
ime merer 10 a.m. 10.30 am. 11 a.m. 11.30 a.m. 12 midday
АЕ — 19.6 — 18.6 — 18.5 — 17.7 — 19.5
Black bulb + 5.4 + 8.0 + 10.0 + 10.8 — 5.2
Blank bulb — 12.0 — 7.0 — 6.2 — 2.2 — 10.2
During the last observation the sun was somewhat clouded.
March 15, 1907. Sun’s altitude 11°
fame syg 10 a. т. 10.30 а. т. 11. a.m. 11.30 а. m. 12 midday
Aar. lær — 21.0 — 20.9 — 20.4 —149.0 — 21.0
Black bulb + 26 +14 + 45 + 95 + 9.2
Blank bulb — 11.8 —156 —10.0 — 4.9 0.0
12.30 p.m. 1p.m.
DS 2
1, 8.6, 2289
В
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 373
March 15, 1908.
mere 12.5 p.m. 12.50 p.m.
Alter an: — 22.6 — 23.2
Black bulb + 5.7 + 45
Difference 28.3 27.1
March 21, 1908. Sun’s altitude 13°19’
ame... 11a.m. 11.30a.m. 12mid. 12.35p.m. 1.10p.m. 1.30p.m.
Aber ver. — 27.2 — 25.6 — 265 — 28.5 —265 — 27.0
Black bulb + 5.0 + 7.0 + 52 + 6.1 + 66 4+ 33
Difference 32.2 32.6 31.7 34.6 39-1 30.3
March 26, 1908.
Time 1 p.m. Air — 11.3 Black bulb +- 15.6
March 31, 1907. Sun’s altitude 17°14’
Times 11 аш. 11.30 a.m. 12.30 pm
А — 19.2 — 19.5 — 19.4
Black bulb + 15.0 + 18.0 14.4
Blank bulb — 5.0 — ao N
March 31, 1908.
Timer... Вала. р. м
Alt as: — 21.5 — 18.8
Black bulb + 7.6 + 12.0
Difference. 29.1 30.8
April 2, 1908.
име 3. 12 midday 1250 p.m; 2 р. №.
АЕ. — 27.2 — 26.4 — 23.2
Black bulb + 9.3 + 6.6 + 11.0
Difference. 36.5 33.0 34.0
These observations, which were distributed over 11 days during
the years 1907 and 1908, show what is especially characteristic of
the radiation, viz. its quick rise in the spring. On March 10, 1907,
the black-bulb thermometer, for the first time, reached a positive
temperature, and differed from the temperature of the air by 29.6°.
Three days afterwards the insolation was + 10.8”; the difference
being then 28.5°, the temperature of the air having simultaneously
risen 11.1°. The reading on the 15th at 11.30 a.m. gave the same
difference. But on the 31st the black-bulb thermometer registered
+ 18.0° with about the same temperature of the air as on the 15th,
and the difference then reached 37.5°; this was the maximum for
the year 1907.
374 ÅNDR. LUNDAGER
In 1908 observations were made for the first time on March 12, .
and even then the black-bulb thermometer stood 30° higher than
the station-thermometer; 3 days earlier, therefore, than in the
previous year, when this result was not attained till March 15. But
the greatest difference is a little lower than in 1907, and occurs a
little later —- April 2nd.
For some of my measurements of temperature in the field, I
also employed the black-bulb thermometer and, at the same time,
thermometers with a blank bulb and with a coloured, brown bulb.
For the measurement of the temperature of the air the swinging
thermometer was then employed.
May 17, 1907, at 3 p.m.
Air — 7.0°
Black bulb + 13.0° |. й
В ea lying on a level gravel-field.
May 20. Air — 2.0°
At 1.35 p.m. Black bulb upon the mountain, in
AE OL GEN ZIG о + 29.6°
At 1.45 p.m. Black bulb in wet clayey soil..... + 26.6°
At 1.55 p.m. Black bulb upon the snow........ + 34.0°
On July 3, at 5 p.m. Air + 8.6°, the black-bulb
thermometer registered on an irrigated gravel-
пет та ела ste: SOUDE ar were + 24.7°
(with running water upon the ground ......... + 14.8°)
onFartule ol Ргаба ace ste и RINDE — 29.7°
onvlighi-coloured=clayey зо 2... ee + 31.2°
July 4, at 11 a.m. Air + 8.3
Black bulb in a tuft of Potentilla on the mountain + 35.8
(The earth at a depth of 4 cm. showed........ + 13.8°
and the water in a small tarn with a snowdrift
On 1tsebamkashOWwedsr eaten se и + 13.0)
July 21, at 7.45 p.m. Air + 1.5°
Black bulb + 17-0) all three thermometers lying
Brown bulb + 10.6 insolated on flowering
Blank bulb + 10.0 | Cassiope.
The day had begun with fog, but this lifted about 2 o’clock,
when the sun shone slightly.
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 375
July 31, at 1 p.m. Аш + 10.3
Black bulb — 42.0
Brown bulb + 34.0
During the observations the wind changed and became easterly,
whereupon all the thermometers commenced to fall. Both with
this observation and with the following observations made with the
black-bulb thermometer in 1907, the thermometers were placed on
the gable of a house, in the same way as during the observations
made in the month of March.
On August 7, 1907, at 2 p. m.; temp. + 1.7; amount of cloud 10°
Timer. 2.30 2.45 3 4 5
AUF We +45 +43 +41 +48 + 3.3
Black bulb. 12.0 11:5 11.5 24.8 10.7
Brown bulb 9.0 9.6 8.8 13.8 7.5
Blank bulb. 8.3 8.4 8.0 10.8 5.9
At four o’clock the sun was out, but not in great strength.
At five o’clock there was only very slight insolation.
After a night with a positive temperature the following were
the measurements on August 8th. é
име... 11.30 а m. 11.45 а м.
< + 84
Black bulb + 30.5 38.5
Brown bulb - 24.0 28.0
Blank bulb + 18.0 23.5
Even as late as October 1, when the air was — 12.0°, the
black bulb showed + 12.0° at midday. The sun’s altitude was
almost the same as on March 15th.
October 7, at 12.45 р. т. Аш — 4.4
Black bulb thermometer + 13,0
But on October 15 the importance of the insolation was nearly at
an end, as is shown by the following figures: —
October 15, at 2 p.m. Аш — 19.5 Black bulb shows — 9.7
— 16, -10 a.m. - —146 — — 9.6
РЕ 52 р а № 16] — — 10.5
— 18, -12 a.m. - —153 — — 3.0
LUS EP 2p m=" = 15.3 — SSS
— 19, -12 a.m. - —144 — — 1.4
=) Пре meet) = 15.8 — — 10.5
376 ANDR. LUNDAGER
The difference between insolation and non-insolation was practi-
cally nil. Just at midday, the effect was somewhat noticeable if
the thermometer, as in this case, was placed high up, where it could
catch the rays of the low-lying sun—surreptiously as it were. On
level ground the effect was almost unnoticeable.
When no mention is made of the amount of cloud, the observations
have been made beneath a cloudless sky. The amount of cloud 10
with the exponent 0 signifies that the sky was entirely covered with
a thin layer of cloud.
The observations of the insolation which especially concern the
midday radiation differ most astonishingly from the temperature of
the air, so long as this is still low — therefore, early in the year,
although the sun’s altitude is then also low. A comparison of two
measurements shows that the difference was less on July 31 than
on March 31 1907, and that the rise in the temperature of the
insolation does not keep pace with the rise in the temperature of
the air, in spite of the sum-total of the radiation lying naturally
nearer its maximum in July than in March.
Air Black-bulb Difference
thermometer
March 31, at 11.30 a.m. — 19.5 + 18.0 37.5
July 31, at 1.0 p.m. + 10.3 + 42.0 31.7
Difference 29.8 Difference 24.0
The sun’s altitude, respectively: 17°14’ and 31°36. The sun’s
culmination at Danmarks Havn 36°41’.
Notwithstanding the problematic value of these figures to indicate
the warmth which is conveyed to the vegetation by the radiation,
I have employed them, well knowing that they do not afford absolute
data for arriving at a decision. We have no means of establishing
such data, as we do not possess any registration-apparatus which
can indicate the course of the radiation through any complete period
— twenty-four hours a week, or longer — which would perhaps
illustrate the conditions rather more reliably, and especially might
be able to give us a better idea of the sum-total of the radiation.
We know from experience that there is a supply of warmth,
but its magnitude depends on many factors; the conditions of the
country and the nature of the ground play their part, as the height
of the sun in the sky at different times also plays its part.
In addition to the measurements which have already been given
of the temperature at the surface of the ground, amongst plants,
and in pools, lakes and rivers, with special reference to its relation
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 377
to the cloud-covering and its more or less complete independence
of direct sunlight, I have made, at different times during the twenty
four hours, and at shorter or longer intervals, many other measure-
ments which elucidiate the warmth-conditions which usually prevail.
tuant.
REC ЕО ое day.
At 12 midnight. Air + 2.8; Vester Elven + 4,2.
July 5, at 2 p.m. Air + 5.4, clear.
The water ш Oster Elyen”. „..?.2....z. + 11.2
Irrigated moss and Salix at a depth of 5 cm. + 11.2
Damp tuft of Dryas - — - 6 — +104
— — - — - — -12 — 4+ 88
Staenantzwateren. mr SEERE MIT ee — 12.5
Dry, rather compact iclay ее + 18.4
Юму pulverizedsclayse. 2 u.a na SENERE! + 20.2
| he morning amount of
July 7 Sam. 2 p.m. 9p.m. |” f 8
У P P , cloud 101, at midday the
N te + 5.1 + 4.8 an 4.5 | sun shone.
9.45 a.m. 6 p.m.
Main channel of Vester Elven (strong current)... + 85 —+ 11.2
Staguant: water wa вое. + 5.0
Runnings water at the side of the hole... ..... +105 + 13.2
Moist soil cata depthiof 3 cm». 1.2. anna — 11.0
ЗОШ Е moist Eb user ovn over ее. + 12.8
ева a7depression? 0... еее. + 11.5
ТСО FRE er entice STED NES ee TES ee eee + 14.0 + 21.5
A dry tuft of Dryas between the withered leaves . - 13.5 - 22.0
Å dry tuft of Dryas at a depth of 6 cm. ...... + 10.2
Notwithstanding the sunshine in the afternoon the maximum
of the day was only + 7.4, on account of a south-easterly wind.
July 10 в a мт. 2 p.m. Эр. м. | South-easterly wind of inferior
Air .. +34 + 3.5 + 0.7 | strength.
12 midday 3 p.m. 6 p.m.
Blank bulb on#the/sround: . ... ....... .» — 22.0
On a declivity with Taraxacum, Draba hirta,
Saxifraga rivularis, Ranunculus pygmeus,
and others at asdepih 085 cm. - +. - -. «=. + 12.6
Loose gravel) ati the ‘surface #11 00. + 16.2
The water in a small lake with a barren,
Зов ПО: и... + 12.2
378 ANDR. LUNDAGER
| | р 12 midday 3 p.m. 6 p.m.
Moist ground with Cassiope, Dryas and moss
at A depDih ol cms Sean. Е 95
Dry ground with lichens and Pedicularis, at
ТЫ Face nn Gets, rate + 10.0
The main channel of Vester Elven..... + 9.0
Water ана о. + 9.2
р |
July LS A ee 2 р. т. 9 р. m. | foggy all day.
Air .. — 0.1 + 0.9 — 0.7
: р: me
Moist ground with Salix and Cassiope . . —+ 8.0
уе оао. ее — 9.1
Vester ем 0.0: 2a: ers ео + 8.6
А snow-bridge across the river ..... . +0.2
Notwithstanding rain and fog and a dense covering of cloud
during the four previous days, the ground as well as the water was
considerably warmer than the air.
July 21 вам. 2 p.m. Эр. m.) Fee Ша
Air .. 407 +55 — 12 |
10.15a.m. 7.45 p.m.
Mester Elven..... 2% wc с +69 — 8.7
\Mel sr un en ee: + 75
А В RER бое — 10.0
Г а Fea a rays a Jags aged + 13.6
укор ее te. rer + 11.0
MuttvotiGassiope. 6.1. teen 2: + 7.6
Damp, luxuriant tuft of Dryas ... — 11.6
Submerged gravel-field ........ + 9.2
Theswater onthe пе... + 88
Luxuriant submerged bog-vegetation + 11.6
iheswatersthereonege а + 9.2
July 94 8am. 2 p.m 9 p.m | Clear the whole day with a
RN on a south-easterly wind and
Aue + 1.8 + 3.5 + 0.5 | a little foggy in theevening.
4 p.m. 8.45 p.m. 10.30 p.m.
Insolated, brown bulb in the plant-covering — 21.8
The water in a small lake, to windward + 14.0 + 7.0
— — — ‚to leeward . -Р 15.5
Juncus and Eriophorum at the height of
О О О, wrt tics ee + 9.0
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land
Damp moss with Salix, at the surface ...
= — — — , ata depth of 6 cm.
— — — — , аа depth of 12 -
Dry soil in a crevice in the rock ..........
The water in a small lake with a barren,
О У О RE RE ERR
Damp: тоску. Паб о о-в ое.
Rocky flat, drier, with Carex nardina and
Salze ine thershade’s .2 2s. 2 2... ac fers ee
Huttiof Carec in the sun. 22. enr
Jwiy 25 Эа: №. 12 т. m» Эр. м. |
Aire... 6.10, 4770 51
OL N A Rohe о
4 р.п. 8.45 p.m.
+ 10.5
83
+ 6.0
HE 910
379
10.30 p.m
Clear. Westerly wind,
almost calm.
Juncus and Eriophorum at the height of water level.....
Damp moss with Salix, at the surface....
= — — + —.,, at-avdepth 01.6 Cm
elle (6) Yee) ее ie, elelr ‘al ‘si el ©
= Se Se Oe IP ening ace
Dry soil in the stone-crevice.............
Паро Ce LR EN a, PR ee
Although these measurements were taken 3 hours later than on
the previous day I did not expect the temperature to be lower, as
the temperature of the air was considerable higher.
there was a fall throughout.
July 31 ‘За: т. 2ршм. 9 p.m. Clear weather.
Air... +56 +111 —+3.0 |
Blank bulb on dry gravel.
Brown — - - —
Wet moss and Sale"
Damp tuft of Dryas.......
Stagnant water in a pool..
Running water on field ...
1 p.m.
eis
— 18.2
18.0
+ 8.7
FRE AN)
eat)
Main channel of Vester Elven - 10.6
August 13 1:30 р. m. | Dense covering of cloud during
Air 212495 |
XLIII.
the whole day and consider-
able precipitation.
29
Nev
ertheless
The warmest
day of the year.
380 Амов. LUNDAGER
In wet ground with moss, Salix and Polygonum, at a depth
ВЫ Sti OMR See alee yg te cas о EEG REE Sane + 5.2
In wet ground with moss, Salix and Polygonum, at a depth
OF We CMV ea 6e ee Ale ое + 5.5
In wet ground with moss, Salix and Polygonum, at a depth
OL SÆSON Е о + 5.6
Gravel-fieldeatathe sumlace se... ose ns cok a oa oe See + 4.7
а ара чер 0 бе + 5.3
The gravel cools more quickly on the surface, and responds
more quickly to the temperature of the air than does ground of
more solid consistency.
June 9, 1908 4.30 p.m.
Inga ipool at the бое + 10.0
= Ad Ge tl On ro CR er + 9.0
In moss down towards the frozen ground at a depth of
CCE 1 RE SEE SE SEE SS SHE + 4.5
Inkdrymosstandseras se dpi ote een RE OR ee + 7.5
Blank ош уп ро ar er 2 re — 14.9
Brown — — Set В een ee + 18.4
И le tet canes ee + 2.0
June 14 8a.m. 2p.m. 9 p.m. | See
Ne eo, ts 00 03 |
10.50 a.m.
Wet ground with Draba alpina, c. fl., at a depth of 4cm. - 10.0
Under а tuitof flowers) Sarıpnagar a... ze en ee + 8.0
The ground at the side of this, at the surface........... — 10.5
Я И оо ee Co сое лее + 9.3
June 20 8a.m. 2 p.m. 9 p.m.
Air... —01, +36. -+ 1.0
3.35 p.m
he water in (Oster Ее. + 3.0
Light-coloured, dry clay, at the surface ....... + 17.5
— — — „аа depth of 7 cm... + 14.0
Light-coloured, dry clay at a depth of 14 cm.. + 11.0
Blank bulb on light-coloured ground.......... + 17.5
Brown bulb - — и. — 20.6
Immediately afterwards the two thermometers showed respectively,
on a darker background — 23.2° and + 27.0”.
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 381
The first cover of snow in the autumn of 1907 was formed
during the snowstorm on September 27, after a mean temperature
of 4.0° for the five previous days. The lowest temperature to which
the vegetation until then had been exposed at Danmarks Науп was
—11.6. Some days later I made measurements of the temperature
in the snow.
Date Air The surface of at aydepth ata depth at a depth
the snow of 25 cm. of 50 cm. of 1 metre
Sept.30 — 10.5 —12.3° — 5.8°
Oct. 1 —12.1 —148 — 9.6 — 8.0
— 15 — 195 — 24.2 — 13.0 — 12.0 — 11.0
— 16 — 14.6 — 20.8 — 18.5
As is shown by the above, the temperature in the snow ranges
downwards. The low temperature on October 15 was noticeable,
even the day after, at a depth of 25 cm., while the temperature of
the surface rose again with the rise of the temperature of the air,
without, however, following the latter entirely; in fact, it actually
presents the greatest difference from the air-temperature which I
have ever measured, namely 6.2°; and here there was no question
of a Foehn, but of a steady rise during the night until the moment
of observation at 10 a.m. on October 16.
North of the station there was a large stretch of bog which, on
account of its superficial conditions, had been employed as a trian-
gulation-base from which it got the name of “Basiskæret” (the Basis-
bog). Towards the north it was bounded by some low “roches
moutonnées” at the foot of which, in the autumn, considerable
snowdrifts were deposited. One of these was utilized for the
following measurements: —
ı © Ce Ce Ce Ge | Gey Ge
va © © © © © © © on
a TE © = и. аз Oo, аа ae
© Cu [$) rar) Я ~ £ + £ FS vs ро я D >
os ри oo x > >. us 27% Ae eye) à 2
= …— > о 5 = oY © © © © © or ov Oo Я Remarks
А = ира =| DS RTS NT = UT ENT NN TRE US
SEE mv a Mm aD sr Sr a © CEE яв
2% + + + + + ri N “a
= | 8 5 | | © ©
1907 Measured by
Feb. 23 — 27.8 — 25.9 — 28.5 3 = — 22.0 — 20.0 R — 16.5 > digging and
April 7 — 22.8 — 19.0 — 24.0 5 — 21.5 5 — 20.8 — 18.4 x — 17.5 by boringthe
May 7 14.5 7.9 15785 г Е Å 15.0 16.2 15,5 15.0 thermometer
1908 into the
March 23 — 21.5 — 20.9 — 22,6 — 27.0 я — 23.5 — 20.5 3 z 5 snow-wall.
As the table shows, the first of these measurements took place
on February 23, 1907.
295
382 ANDR. LUNDAGER
First of all, it was of importance to find a drift which had
been lying somewhat undisturbed since the autumn, and which had
merely been increased, without, at other times, with changes of the
wind, having yielded any of the snow at one time deposited; as in
such a case, a lower temperature would have availed itself of the
opportunity to penetrate to a greater depth than, later in the winter,
and in accordance with the thickness of the layer of snow, it might
be expected to be found. Therefore the winter of 1906—1907 was
more suitable for these measurements than the following winter
when less snow fell, and no great snowdrifts lay unaffected by
such erratic snowstorms, which might at times sweep away layers
one metre in thickness, which layers would be replaced only when
a storm from the direction of the prevalent wind (NW.) brought
new layers upon the ordinary deposits to leeward. For the measure-
ments, this lack of a constant layer of snow causes the results to
be arbitrary, and makes it impossible to establish absolute values
for the range of the temperature in the snow.
Even at a depth of 2 metres, I did not reach the rock beneath
the snow; but this was as hard as ice, and of a consistency that
only allowed of a very lengthened process of melting. As a rule,
a vegetation which is covered by such an enormous layer will see
daylight only so late in the year that it will never, in any case, be
able to reach the flowering stage, and will not even be able, every
year, to awake to life.
The figures show that the temperature is considerably higher
downwards in the snow. Still, the mean temperature for the month
stands rather high in the layer of snow, at a depth of about 30 cm.,
I think.
Twenty-four hours later, in the same hole, the snow-walls
of which had been exposed to the temperature of the air, the
following measurement was taken at a depth of 2 metres: — 22.5.
The surface, like the air, being — 32.0.
Again, on April 7, I took measurements in the same place. But
the layer of snow had increased by about 45 cm. in thickness. At
this depth a hard crust was then lying, which indicated the surface
of the snow on February 23; as this was now well hidden beneath
the new cover of snow, it also showed a rise in temperature (from
— 28.5 to — 21.5) owing to the fact that now the radiation of heat
from below was prevented.
The same circumstance was noticed at a depth of 1.60 metre,
which almost corresponds with the depth of 1 metre on February 23
(— 18.4 against —20.0). Here also a hard crust was found, which,
earlier in the winter, had been the surface of the snow.
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 883
The latter depth corresponds with the former depth of 2 metres;
here the temperature is shown to have fallen, viz. from — 16.5 to
—-17.5. Here the new deposit has been unable to prevent the low
temperature already existing from continuing its range downwards.
The mean temperature for this month, — 19.0, therefore lay at
a depth of from 1 metre to 1.60 metre, perhaps at about 1.30 metre,
or almost 1 metre lower than the temperature of February, and
there is no probability of the low temperature descending lower at
this juncture. The sun already stands high in the heavens, and the
temperature is rising on account of the advanced time of the year.
The observations on May7 cannot be considered as comparable
with the earlier ones, as the old hole in the snow was now only
half filled, and had perhaps stood open for a long time, so that the
walls of the hole had been exposed to the direct influence of the
air. In addition, the loose snow in the hole was far more porous
than the old snow, which was now very hard everywhere, and
had to be hacked up like ice.
The mean temperature for the month of March 1908, taken on
the 23rd, lay at a depth of 1 metre, which corresponds well with
expectations from the measurements in February and April 1907.
It is, of course, generally admitted that the snow-covering is ап
external factor of great importance as regards plant-life in the Arctic
regions, and then, certainly, the snow is most frequently thought of
as the sheltering cover which protects the vegetation against the
severe cold of winter, and thereby renders possible the existence of
more sensitive species. And, consequently, when a considerable
layer of snow, even in the autumn, covers the ground!and is allowed
to remain, then the plants which pass the winter under this are not
exposed fully and entirely to the same temperature that the snowless
vegetation has to endure during winter. But in those parts of Ger-
mania Land with which I became acquainted, I have noticed that
the snow is a very capricious protector, which may fail without
warning, and at any time leave its protégés in the lurch. Layers
of snow, so very great as to be able to preserve for the ground and
its vegetation the relatively high temperature from the autumn, do
not occur in the neighbourhood of Dove Bay. Inwards in the bay,
at Pustervig, I found on March 1, 1908, on a gravel-ground south of
the creek, a branch of Salix with full-blown male flowers, lying
freely exposed. Probably, after a summer which had terminated
abruptly the year before, this branch had been hidden beneath the
snow for the eventual, further development of the flowers in the
succeeding year. But the snow shifts its position many times in the
course of the winter, which may result in the plant, as in this case,
384 ANDR. LUNDAGER
being exposed at the very coldest period. I had no opportunity to
observe the fate with which these flowers met.
When the snow lies longer on large flat stretches of land than
on a more rugged ground, it is due both to the fact that on the
plain there is a thicker layer of snow and to the fact that the sun
dissolves this more easily on a rise in the ground.
The thickest covering of snow which I have seen disappear so
early in the year that the underlying vegetation could come forth
was the 2-metre thick layer of snow between the thermometer-stand
and the villa, which, in 1908, melted before the middle of July. But
here, this deposit of the layer of snow was owing to the presence
of the villa, so that the condition of the vegetation previously existing
was changed by chance. The appearance of the vegetation does not
enlighten us, therefore, with regard to what the aspect would have
been if the place had been hidden every year under such a covering.
As already mentioned the snow lay somewhat more continuously
in 1907 than in 1908. But there are always places where, in accor-
dance with the nature of the ground, the snow must be heaped up
in drifts, for instance in narrow fissures, and rock-crevices. Here
it might be expected, then, that the snow would cover those species
which, on account of their delicate nature, had not dared to venture
forth in more exposed places; where, moreover, they would not
find such a good substratum as such fissures, with their great possi-
bility of humus-formation, might be able to offer.
When, now and again in the winter, I found such a fissure
which, in consequence of ils favourable exposure, might be supposed,
during summer, to contain species which usually did not occur near
that place on the rocky flat, I always visited it in the summer,
provided it was possible to do so, and if it was early in the summer
I regularly suffered the disappointment of finding it filled with ice,
and otherwise, if the ice had managed to melt away, I found it, in
most cases, quite barren; as it naturally must be, seeing that the
ice, as a rule, does not have time to melt.
Many such well-protected localities lose their importance as
regards the vegetation just by this, that, early in the summer, melted
snow from higher lying places oozes into them during the day and
saturates a part of the snow, which then, during the cold of the
night, is transformed into a solid mass of ice, which thaws very
slowly.
From a biological point of view the essential importance of the
snow is that it prevents evaporation in winter and produces mois-
ture in summer. When, as is the case, the conditions are such that
the country receives almost all its precipitation in the winter, the
(LOGL ‘< ‘Suy) Uses [IS SI MOUS SJOJUIM
‘
SNOIADId oy} JO затешол ay} Чо uodn Jjrapmous [епуиоло@ в Aq рэлэуем 'uasøsajnH JO 4589 au} 03 ‘ЗоЧ-шичоцаом; °C ‘SIA
385
ears
el
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land
a
ein
386 ANDR. LUNDAGER
snow is a very convenient form for this, because it affords а possi-
bility of regulating the moisture during the summer.
Compared with this, the importance of the snow as a protecting
cover is very subordinate, because this cover is not constant, nor
are there many species which rely on it, and with regard to which
it may reasonably be supposed that they require a snow-covering
for their existence in these regions.
The main result of my measurements really shows me only
what was to be expected, that in the summer there may be a con-
Fig. 6. Hippuris-association in a lakelet near Danmarks Havn.
siderably higher temperature in the earth and the water, which is
independent of a far lower temperature in the air. And a short
period with a temperature below zero need by no means prove fatal
to the parts of the plant above ground; but I do not know the
temperature which causes the death of the protoplasm, nor whether
the same low temperature always has the same effect; presumably
the conditions during the thaw also play a role in this connection.
Further it would be of interest to obtain measurements of the
temperature of the living parts of plants during assimilation.
Even long before the snow-covering disappears, radiant heat is
conveyed to the soil below it, as has been proved by measurements
taken with a black bulb thermometer.
On April 27, 1908, between 1 and 2 p.m., the meteorologist of
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 387
the expedition, Dr. A. WEGENER made an experiment, regarding which
he writes as follows in “Meddelelser om Grønland,” XLII, р. 300: —
“С Strahluneiduneh Wehneeschichtens hindurch, Um
die in botanischer Beziehung wichtige Frage zu untersuchen, wie
weit sich die Sonnenstrahlung durch Schneeschichten hindurch be-
merkbar macht, wurde des Schwarzkugelthermometer und ein unge-
schütztes Thermometer in Höhlungen in einer Schneewehe derart
Fig. 7. Anbringung der Strahlungsthermometer unter dem Schnee.
angebracht, dass sie sich dort unabhängig von der aussen herrschenden
Lufttemperatur einstellten. Die Länge des Weges, den die Sonnen-
strahlen bei ihrem schrägen Einfallswinkel durch den Schnee hin-
durch zurückzulegen hatten, wurde dann unter Benutzung des
Schattens ausgemessen. Die Anordnung des Versuchs ist in Fig. 7
dargestellt. Es ergab sich:
5 Weglänge der Strahlen Unbeschütztes Schwarzkugel- с
Zeit Ce 3 Differenz
im Schnee Thermometer Thermometer
1P00 12 cm — 9.2 —5.7 3.5
its 85) 1) = —10.4 — 58.3 2
1 40 31 - — 9.3 — 9.4 —0.1
215 31 - — 9.9 —9.9 0.0
Die hier benutzte Schneewehe war von derselben Festigkeit wie
Nr. 1 in der Versuchreihe vom 24.—25. April, der Wassergehalt war
also ungefahr: 1 ст Schnee = 4mm Wasser. Die Ablesungen zeigen,
dass bei ca. 12 cm Weglänge das Schwarzkugelthermometer noch
merklich höher steht als das unbeschutzte Thermometer aber nicht
mehr bei 31cm. Eine Wirkung der Sonnenstrahlung dürfte demnach
durch mehr als 20 cm Schnee (im schrägen Schnitt) nicht mehr vor-
handen sein.”
This heat causes considerable melting from below. This may
be observed, e.g. on undulating ground, in places where the snow-
covering is thin, viz. on the top of hills, and at the outer edge of
the gently sloping snowdrifts where low, hollow spaces, several
metres in extent, may be found beneath the snow-covering; and as
a result the parts of the snowdrift thus hollowed are easily broken
388 ANDR. LUNDAGER
when trodden upon. This is often found to be the case in localities
with a continuous covering of plants, e.g. Cassiope. On the other
hand, at the foot of steeper snowdrifts, these hollows are not often
known to occur, the reason being that only at its outermost edge
is the snow-covering thin enough to permit the radiation to penetrate;
besides, at its foot, a steep snowdrift easily becomes ice, owing to
the melting snow, and then forms a compact mass on the ground.
At the foot of such a perennial snowdrift I found, late in the year,
only a few moss-fragments and a crust of Nostoc with Gloeocapsa
magna and Phormidium autumnale. The presence of the moss-
fragments proved that the snow had not always been lying there;
but in this place it was not possible to demonstrate which species
approach nearest to such an ice-edge, and are the first to take pos-
session of the ground. When such an enormous snowdrift melts,
the result often is that the ground below it remains a barren slush
of clayey mud, until it again becomes frost-bound.
Ш. The Vegetation. The Biology of the Flowers.
As the list by OSTENFELD & LUNDAGER shows, the country is
very poor in species. Out of the small number 92, 14 species have
been found at only one or at most two places, and a few were
found as single individuals only.
In the above I have tried to show how inhospitable are the
conditions offered by so important a factor as the climate, and in
this I found a probable reason for the poverty of species. And yet
I was sometimes disappointed because localities, which must be
termed relatively good, nevertheless showed a still more decided
poverty of species than did the exposed rocky flat.
The most important point is not that, on the whole, a favour-
able season of the year for the vegetation is wanting, but that the
time when moisture and warmth are to hand is too short.
The climate determines the condition of the substratum. As the
summer is so short — only two months, reckoning from midsummer
towards the end of August — sufficient organic matter cannot be
formed from plant tissues during that time. There is scarcely a single
spot where real humus-formation can be demonstrated. Even in
places where the conditions appear most favourable, as upon shel-
tered hill-slopes where fallen and decaying parts of plants are really
deposited and are here and there allowed to remain in peace, the
material in question is of such a nature that (as for instance the
Cassiope-leaves) it decays very slowly, and certainly with a greater
tendency to peat-formation than to the formation of mild humus.
Even manured spots are not capable of producing a richer life, al-
though these appear to be able to offer an equivalent to the presumed
advantage of greater distance from the coast, as the conditions on
Maroussia indicate.
Around skulls and other parts of skeletons, beautifully green
oases in the surrounding desert are often to be seen, even from a
distance; and in this relative luxuriance may grow vigorous tufts
of Melandrium triflorum and Hierochloé, as also Cerastiums and
Stellaria longipes with elongated internodes, the thick-leaved Saxifraga
cernua, and the inevitable Polygonum viviparum. A similar though
less decided luxuriance is sometimes due to the manure around
lemming-holes.
390 ANDR. LUNDAGER
As regards the development of Formations, at the outset, water
is the most important factor: how much or how little and under
what circumstances it is conveyed to the ground is the momentous
point here, far more than the nature of the soil. From an orogra-
phical point of view, great uniformity prevails. As regards the solid
elements, the maritime country consists of “moutonnees” primitive
rocks of a height of as much as about 400 metres; further into the
country, around Mörkefjord and Pustervig, a table-land occurs; its
greatest height, 812 metres, is reached in Stjernefjeldene. Fuglenæbs-
fjeld, which I visited in August 1906 is of about the same height.
The surface which slopes gently towards the north consists of loose
boulders with intervening large, flat patches of gravel, the vegetation
of which is sparingly-occurring tufts of Saxifraga oppositifolia.
Loose material, consisting of clay and gravel, is present to a
great extent as moraine-formations around Stormelven and the inner
part of Dove Bay. The depth of these layers is of no consequence,
as the frost binds the ground into a frozen mass at a short distance
from the surface. The extent of this distance is of course dependent
upon the degree of moisture which is conveyed to the soil. It is
true that, in the case of gravel-mounds which occurred scattered
like those near Stormelven and the Bastions near Lakseelv, the mass
of earth thaws rather far down, but then the surface is so dry that
there is nothing to foster the growth of plants; consequently, it is
barren there. As a rule the soil is not utilized to a greater depth
than about 6 cm.
Plants are offered somewhat better conditions in places where
the more recent layer is found deposited in depressions either
entirely or partly surrounded by the primitive rocks, but with such
possibilities of outlet that the water is not higher than some parts
of it and the ground may protrude and allow the formation of
tufts. In such places I always found Carex pulla, Arctagrostis lati-
folia and occasionally Juncus triglumus.
If the loose deposits are absent from the bottom of such a
depression it is converted into a water-filled basin with а stony
bottom devoid of vegetation. Where this kind of small pond be-
comes dry, the bottom is found to be black with Gloeocapsa and
Phormidium autumnale.
Where the gravel and clay layers are found deposited in de-
pressions between higher masses of rocks, so that there is enough
moisture throughout the summer, Carex-bogs are developed as, е. 5.
in Vesterdalen between Harefjeldet and Varderyggen and in the
valley east of the latter.
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 391
Slightly sloping or horizontal gravel-deposits, which in the first
part of summer (June) are continually irrigated by melting snow,
soon form a flourishing bog of Eriophorum polystachyum from which
Arctagrostis latifolia is rarely wanting.
The rocky flat proper is formed by the gravel and clay layers
to which must suffice the moisture which either the snow which
covers the spot or the adjacent drifts of snow can provide from the
time when the snow begins to melt in spring. These constitute by
far the largest part of the area (with loose material), and it is the
only formation which exhibits some alternation in the composition
Fig. 8. Slope with Dryas near Snenæs. In the foreground luxuriant mats of Dryas
(30. 6. 1908).
of its vegetation. As a formation it also includes the scattered
sparing vegetation of the primitive rocks.
Nature in its entirety has a stingy hand in these regions; poverty
peeps through everywhere, and any extent of sociability cannot be
afforded. Not even the most robust proletarian dares to associate
in large quantities for fear of mutual deprivation of sustenance. If
ultimately some associations are formed, е. g. the Carex-bogs along
the small streams, the societies are always very exclusive, though
not in the sense that the members exact too much of life: a drink
of water during summer and a covering of snow during winter is
all that they demand. :
392 ANDR. LUNDAGER
I will take the permission to quote from my diary the impres-
sions I received during a visit in the summer of 1908 to Kloftfjeldet
between Snenæs and Lille Snenæs: the slope there in my opinion
is one of the most beautiful in north-east Greenland.
“There is an apparently enormous luxuriancy upon the irrigated
terraced hill-side facing south-west. Here is a valley below in a
direction about west to east. The south wind alone blows directly
against it. And then there is water here, and water will continue
to flow for a long time yet. Today it is July 7, and it has been
very warm considering the time of year. Consequently, we must
expect to find at any rate indications of everything which subse-
quently will make its appearance, because in 7 or 8 weeks we may
have frost again, as we had it last year on Sept. 1.
But wherein does this luxuriancy consist? Well, there is a
continuous carpet of vigorous specimens of Salix, richly flowering
Cassiope, and luxuriant broad-leaved Dryas. Vaccinium has fresh,
green shoots everywhere and flowers here and there. Then — of-
course — there is never-ending abundance of Polygonum viviparum —
this intruder which does not leave any society in peace. Dryas has
almost finished flowering in the drier places. Thus, the terraced
slope, seen from below, looks very well; but as soon as one has
ascended, nothing of this is seen, as the most luxuriant vegetation
occurs upon the slopes of the terraces (especially upon the more
abrupt ones) and is hidden by their edges (Fig. 8).
And then what is my reward when I come upon the top of the
hill: flowering Campanula! That is the culmination here! Under
similar conditions in West Greenland, e.g. on Prestefjeldet, I found
Alchemilla, Thalictrum, Veronica and Bartsia on June 2, 1905, and
tall willow-copses along the banks of the small water-courses. Here
it is only a question of the willow flinging itself along the rock and
adhering to it, just barely venturing its catkins as far out as possible.
The greensward hereabouts is formed by Luzula, Hierochlée (of
course), a few Poa cenisia and Cobresia Bellardü together with Carices
such as C. misandra and Carex rigida.”
These few species supplemented by Rhododendron, which I
found in the same society in Pustervig, on Fuglenæbsfjeldet and on
Muskusoksefjeldene, are the only attempt towards the formation of
a heath I ever found, with the exception of a small society of
Empetrum intermixed with Salix herbacea near Hulesöen.
Of the peculiar formations which I have met with I shall here
mention only a remarkable patch near the shore at the head of
Yderbugt which I found on July 28, 1907. The ground is level and
is only a few metres above sea-level at high tide. The surface is
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 393
dark and has white patches as of salt. The patches are due to a
lichen, doubtless a Lecidea which has occurred in many places, but
never bearing fruit. Not far from here the primitive rock outcrops
at an inconsiderable height.
Scattered over a belt of about 20 metres in length and 30
metres in breadth there occurred here a peculiar community of
flowering Papaver which was conspicuous even from some distance.
With intervening spaces, ranging from a few cm. to above one
metre, the plant stood here and flowered richly. The ground was
also covered with a rich vegetation of Cochlearia officinalis L. var.
groenlandica, f. minor (Lge.) Gelert, which however in the flowering-
stage greatly resembles the white lichen-spots. Also Draba arctica,
a single specimen of Luzula confusa and Phippsia algida were
present. Saxifraga rivularis, which is certain to occur in small
depressions where melted snow has flowed, does not count for
much, but is nevertheless found in the community. Here and
there is found a small Sagina intermedia and Alsine verna f. rubella,
c. fl. A single tuft of Saxifraga groenlandica was also noted. In the
inner part of the belt, i.e. towards the primitive rocks, were found
Draba fladnizensis, Saxifraga nivalis, 5. cernua and 5. oppositifolia
together with indications of Salix and Cerastium. The transition to
true rocky flat is indicated not only by the Salix, but also by tufts
of Poa abbreviata and by a more frequent occurrence of Зах гада
nivalis and S. oppositifolia. These two species are not found in the
lower part of the community, while Cochlearia and Papaver occur
commonly everywhere. As soon as one leaves this community in a
very true sense of the word, Papaver becomes rare and Potentilla
emarginata takes its place. Here Salix, with a few Stellaria long-
pipes, becomes dominant. In this community, Papaver and Cochlearia
dominate. I was surprised not to find Pedicularis where Salix and
Potentilla emarginata occurred.
I found a very conspicuous community on July 5, 1908, upon
Kloftfjeldet where Epilobium was spreading out with great splendour
upon flat gravelly tracts through which tiny water-courses were
flowing. But there the plant was far from reaching the size attained
in West Greenland.
On the same day, upon the rocky flat between Snenæs and
Lille Snenæs, I came across a small patch which from a distance
attracted my attention by its yellow colour, and which, а priori,
I thought resulted from Papaver, but on closer inspection it proved
to originate from a richly flowering clump of Potentilla nivea upon
a gravelly slope facing south which apparently afforded a convenient
dwelling for a family of foxes whose continual use of the passages
394 ANDR. LUNDAGER
was revealed by the loose hairs found in them. This association
of P. nivea was pure; only at the outer edge a single P. emarginata
was found. Some exceedingly vigorous tufts of Poa abbreviata proved
that the latter also throve in the neighbourhood of the fox-hole.
Between Stormkap and Snenæs the ground is fairly level and
only slightly elevated. There are many small lakes and small bogs
of Eriophorum polystachym of the usual monotonous composition,
i.e. with Carex pulla and Arctagrostis latifolia. Where the ground
is drier, Salex, Cassiope and Hierochloé dominate. Also the following
occur scattered — Papaver, Polygonum, a small-leaved Dryas, Luzula
confusa, Cobresia Bellardii, Carex nardina, С. rupestris, Poa abbreviata,
P. glauca, Melandrium affine, Silene, Stellaria lougipes, Saxifraga
oppositifolia, 5. cernua and Potentilla emarginata.
During an excursion from Lille Snenæs to Trekroner on June
27, 1908, I found the first and only plant belonging to N. O. Liliacee
in these regions, viz. Tofieldia coccinea, whose northern limit was
thereby removed above 4 degrees of latitude further north. It was
not exactly what I had expected to find. It formed very compact
and dense tufts, sometimes alone, and sometimes together with
Cassiope or Dryas. The roots twined so closely together that they
could scarcely be separated without being torn. Neither Cassiope
nor Dryas was flowering as yet, so the snow must have been lying
a long time. Tofieldia’s nearest neighbours were Vaccinium, Poly-
gonum, Silene, Juncus biglumis, Pedicularis hirsuta, Salix and а spe-
cimen of Carex (rupestris ?); also a small poor-looking Papaver which
did not appear to thrive in these surroundings. These are without
doubt the plant-growth of a heather-moor, but they occur here
under such modified conditions that they do not constitute a for-
mation which can be included in the definition of a heather-moor,
with the significance that the word has when used in connection
with West Greenland. The whole of this small locality consisted
of a depression about 70 metres above sea-level.
In the dry sandy deserts north of Lumskebugten the vegetation
consisted of only Saxifraga oppositifolia, Carex nardina and a few
specimens of Salix. Further north there was quite a flat area covered
almost exclusively with Dryas which had here very narrow leaves
with revolute margins so that it closely resembled Dryas integrifolia.
Below the snowdrifts at the foot of the small hills occurred the
largest and flattest bogs of Carex and Eriophorum that I ever saw.
The ground being so flat, these bogs looked exceedingly pleasant
when seen from a distance, but, viewed nearer they did not appear
to such advantage. To a certain extent they were reminiscent of
the tufted bogs in Denmark, only the tufts here were very low and
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 395
without the usual packing of moss with which we are acquainted
in our bogs. There is running water almost everywhere.
There were also tracts which reminded one of the sandy Calluna
heaths (“Hedesande”) of Jutland where the fire has burnt off the
surface layer. Here were tufts of Dryas which were not yet in
flower (June 27), and flowering Saxifraga oppositifolia; Oxyria en-
livens the scene wonderfully with its splendid inflorescences, but
Carex nardina of course was not absent from the group, nor failed
to give the whole a gloomy, withering and dying appearance.
Fine, loose sand occurred between the tufts.
If moisture supervenes then we get in addition Salix, Statice and
Hierochloé. Then Dryas comes into flower and then there is also a
chance for Carex misandra. Moss occurs very sparingly even if
there is water. But the water which stood there then would soon
evaporate, and then the whole area would be dry. When seen
from a distance such wet spots stand out like magnificient oases in
the gravel and stone desert.
In towards the south-east side of Trekroner I saw the mountain
in its most forbidding aspect. For a distance of several hundred
metres the primitive rock was found torn up by the disruptive
power of frost, so block was found by block in wild chaos without
the least particle of loose material between them; consequently, all
higher plant-life was absent.
In a single place at Lumskebugten there was found an attempt
towards the formation of downs. At the foot of a bank of quick-
sand between two river-mouths some small individuals of Alopecurus
and Festuca ovina occurred — the latter was viviparous there; also
Poa abbreviata, Poa cenisia and Luzula confusa were found. Some-
what higher up were Carex nardina, sand-covered Papavers and tufts
of Alsine rubella. I wondered at the occurrence of Trisetum in this
society which, in addition, contained sand-covered Salix, Lesquerella,
Dryas, Saxifraga oppositifolia and Silene, all bearing the stamp of
the particular conditions in which they occurred.
As examples of typical localities I may mention my tent-ground
at Lille Snenæs and the parts around the station at Danmarks
Havn. The illustration from Lille Snenæs was taken on June 30, 1908
(Fig. 9). The tent was pitched on June 1 upon a small, flat patch of
gravel which at that time was lying like an island in the snow,
about 4—5 metres above sea-level (Fig. 10). Further out, the shore
was formed by the primitive rock and a quantity of loose blocks and
large stones which protruded through the ice-foot — and lay somewhat
inwards upon the land. This outermost part was almost free from
snow when Г arrived there on the morning of June 22. Even at
XLIII. 30
396 ANDR. LUNDAGER
Fig. 9. The tenting-place seen from the south. (Lille Snenzs; 6. 30. 1908).
Fig. 10. The tent seen from the north. “Orienteringssoerne” in the background.
(Lille Snenzs; June 1).
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 397
that time Cochlearia was flowering between the stones upon the
shore; a week into July Stellaria humifusa came into flower there;
somewhat higher up a single Braya occurred. Cochlearia and Stel-
laria were alone within their dominion where the snow had been
lying for a relatively long time. The rest of the large snowdrift
above the tent did not disappear until July 9. The direction of the
place is about S.—N. and it is protected towards the east by an
edge, a few metres high, of the primitive rock which further in-
wards was covered by loose masses of gravel and clay — an old
sea-bed and an old shore-formation. The snowdrift in towards this
rock-edge, as also the snow on the whole, presumably had disappeared
earlier than in 1907. And yet it was barren where it had been
lying, which indicated that often it did not succeed in melting
during the course of one summer. In the uppermost northern part
of the place which had been occupied by the snowdrift, Cochlearia
f. minor stood in flower on July 9. Though Salix ventured near to
the places where the snow lay longest, yet it was not found where
the snow had last disappeared. In the somewhat lower ground,
between the snow and the more stony and somewhat higher part
around the tent, distinctly marked belts of Alopecurus occur, about one
metre in breadth; also Luzula confusa. Between the tent and these
belts occur in a scattered manner — Papaver, Oxyria and Salix, as
also Cardamine bellidifolia; Glyceria angustata, Alopecurus, Cerastium,
Stellaria longipes, Saxifraga oppositifolia, Potentilla emarginata and
Juncus biglumis extend inwards towards the lower, southern part of
the snowdrift which at the extreme outside merged into the ice-foot.
Where the ground sloped upwards against the rock-edge and the
surface was damp and had cracked into polygonal cakes (a kind of
“Rudemark”) there nothing had appeared as yet (July 9), and there
it was quite barren next the snow below the highest edge of the
rock. Where the snow had just disappeared from the lowest part,
not even moss was found.
In the most northerly part of the area from which the snow
first disappeared, the above-mentioned belt of Alopecurus had wedged
itself in between the foot of the edge of rock and a lower belt of
Luzula which grew in tufts upon the polygonal cakes and imparted
a greenish-brown tone of colour to the ground. Into this community
there had ventured also a few specimens of Poa, Oxyria, Salix and
Potentilla emarginata. There Oxyria had begun to flower, and there
a single, fresh shoot of СегазНит alpinum was also found. Just at
the edge of the belt towards the north, where it becomes more dry,
a solitary Saxifraga cernua occurred. Here, and further in beneath
30*
398 ANDR. LUNDAGER
the snowdrift, the lemming had left three holes, and a dead lemming
was lying upon the ground.
Outside this belt of Luzula, somewhat lower, and sloping slightly
towards the gravel patch on which the tent stood, came the Salix-
belt which on July 9 was intermixed with crowds of flowering Pedi-
cularis, and next to the gravel patch with numerous Polygonums, a
few Papavers, Potentilla emarginata and Silene. On the western edge,
in the outermost part of the belt which is about 10 metres broad,
Salix had finished flowering, while in the inner part it had just
begun. At the border there were a few tufts of Cobresia Bellardii,
Biel szörhesisland ae QenS):
while Hierochloé, Carex misandra and Luzula occurred here and there.
Around the tent occurred Melandrium, Lesquerella and Potentilla pul-
chella, as also Arenaria ciliata, Dryas, Taraxacum phymatocarpum
and Alsine rubella.
Point I upon the map of the station which was the “Danmark’s”
winter quarter, I have called “The Island” (Øen). As may be seen from
the map and the illustration (Fig. 11), the ground west of the mouth
of Oster Elven slopes gently from the 6-metre curve down to the
shore which is here quite flat. During the melting of the snow,
Point I at first emerged as a small island which daily increased in
size, and there already on June 14, 1908, a Draba alpina was in
flower. In the saturated soil around the plant a temperature of
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 399
— 10° was measured оп the above-mentioned day, at 10.50 a. m., at
a depth of 4cm.; beside it in slowly running water, the thermometer
showed —+ 9.3°, in dry sand + 10.5°; and in the air + 0.5°.
The conditions at this spot are favourable: sloping ground with
a southern aspect and plenty of moisture, which features serve to
- minimize the difference between the day and night temperatures.
The illustration was taken on June 15, 1908. At that time was
found Saxifraga oppositifolia which predominates in the assemblage
and as a great part of it was already flowering it gave a colour-
tone among the black surroundings, where also the yellowish-grey
tufts of Carex misandra were seen. Soon came the species next in
conspicuousness, Pedicularis hirsuta, which was already peeping out
with its fresh shoots in the drier spots. Salix also was flowering.
Saxifraga nivalis and Papaver occurred with fresh rosettes, and Ra-
nunculus glacialis was almost out. Moreover fresh shoots were seen
on Silene, Alsine verna, Cerastium alpinum and Polentilla emarginata.
In one place Melandrium affine stood alone, still with its stems of
the previous year. Sfellaria longipes was lying with apparent in-
difference still in its winter-clothes; but a closer inspection showed
that in it also there was life in the nooks and corners of the tufts.
Draba hirta had fresh rosettes; also Luzula confusa, a Poa and a
few tufts of Festuca ovina showed the first signs of reawakening life.
Add to this green alge in the small pools, and the Nostoc-lumps
in the running water, these all taken together formed a picture of
a small, isolated, favourably-situated spot in spring-attire.
When I returned home from Lille Snenzs on July 2 “The Is-
land” was covered with flowering poppies. There was still some-
thing left of the snowdrift along the 6-metre curve, where the
cross-hatched part indicates a pronounced Cassiope-locality. In that
part of “The Island” which was the first to become free from snow
Saxifraga oppositifolia had already almost finished flowering. But
S. flagellaris was in flower and some unusually luxuriant Cerastium-
tufts, the flowers of which measured 20 mm. (cf. List, p. 20, the note to
Cerastium; the illustration (Fig. 12) shows a tuft with stems stretched
out and lying prostrate upon the ground). Towards the Cassiope-slope,
at about the 5-metre curve, Cerastium alpinum f. pulvinata Simm.
occurred here and there. It lay for a long time hidden under the
snowdrift and in 1907 did not appear until the month of August;
the next year it was at that stage of development even before our
departure оп July 21. At the same level, between the Cassiope-belt
and the small masses of primitive rocks nearer to the water, Alsine
biflora was found (cf. List, p. 18). Later in the summer the ground
becomes dry and the surface cracks into polygonal cakes (a kind
400 ANDR. LUNDAGER
of “Rudemark”); but the cracks did not become so deep here as I
saw them in several other places under similar circumstances. True
“Rudemarks” probably do not occur at all in Germania Land; they
were indicated most decidedly where the snow had been lying so
far into August that the ground did not succeed in producing any
vegetation at all.
On July 17, 1908, were found in addition upon “The Island”
Draba subcapitata, D. fladnizensis, Sagina intermedia, Ranunculus pyg-
mœus, Taraxacum arcticum f. albiflora (Fig. 14), Oxyria digyna and
Glyceria maritima f. reptans.
Fig. 12. Тай of Cerastium alpinum with espalier-like growth (2. 7. 1908).
The following table shows 48 species which have been found
upon “The Island”, the tenting ground near Lille Snenæs and in
the Papaver-association near Yderbugten (July 28, 1907). Conse-
quently, in these three diminutive localities occurs one-half of all
the species which have been found, which, it appears to me, is a
proof of the monotony of the vegetation in these regions. These
three habitats are designated A. B. C. respectively, and the species
found are indicated by a x.
In regard to 8 species it is known for certain that they occurred
in all three habitats. Poa, as a 9th species, is uncertain, as in the
stage of development in which it was found in all three instances
it was impossible to determine it as species. Characteristic of the
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 401
— - - — — : ———
| А | ВС
О nn me arme | | x
Ааа п ee ae а, Insel St
BES BCobresiaeBellandiisn ne ee es eek x
ПАСЕ а fantasy eek ee eher ME
See Liierochloezalpinamse ade oslo Rio MER es | VÆRE
CR AODeCURISAQIPDINUS 22... nn. Ses Manes ae | > |
О Me 3... Senn. ee: | RS
ВСЕ ЧОН hen ое: | SE)
9. TU о eae NR — |
MOSSER OCA GQUAUCO? бое. ne nee aw eek Чань, easel teal >
RES LCA GUIDING OR | x
PIE Salz ar ere RG ean ре и
IS О О DES 0 ie Aetna de | =< |
TE ОЗНА р ee
Meier #Melandzıumraffime....... Mars ея NE SRE 21)
ПО ОТ о A able cree NES
о И О OP. SERRE sent een. | x
VO О ee LI a: =
19. U EDITOR ae и ae | ><
PAS AGU Intermedia: ое. nee mews ete | x x
Al И О ne ee | <
22. РО ое я Wesel Se ASE
О alpinum SE A... ua a ee ee ae [esse | X
24. — ра SER ARE ase een aor. | x
PS Папины QUACIAUIS «5 aco Gs oe oes EN: | X |
26. — О ooh he |x
И О er een Le he ee > ne ES
28. 1GOCRICOPACOPfICINGlS аа: ESS de | >= US
об urdaminetbellidifolias 2 a | ><
30 es нете а area SN NL ire de | x
Se MONT Mines ah te ee RE ee | x x
SERENE fladnizens van men er ee sland een | >< >
33. RES UD CANON ee led ae а | ><
А Вар ее. | x
95. Втада PUNPULGSCENSTs 3.0 eee ot de ec ee ee | >
30.2, OAMI RAG A OPNOStnONG 5. 2454-50202 55 sea yess | Sa S< || ES
37. — GITE CR PRE TERRE ee Ser
38. — ОЕ В еее. | EIRE
39. — ÉD LOTS ne OU nt cle ee à | | =
40. — а EE Ee ee due | x
41. — О о ee x |
402 ANDR. LUNDAGER
ABs eG
|
42. "Potentilla, pichet | x
43. — CMARJIRA AE Se du Aare A eee ee и =
AA ORY As ОС | Sek)
Ay AC assiopesieltagonar Mant] ee ee eee x
AG Pedienlanısanirsutan sh) ae ee oie ee < я
>
ав осасти AT El
48. — Phuymatocarpum 2a. eee ea eee | x
Total... | 29 | 30 | 18
coastal regions there is only Saxifraga flagellaris which was absent
from the area around Dove Bugt and occurred again on Ymers Nu-
natak. In this intermediate space, as also on Ymers Nunatak, Poten-
tilla pulchella was found which in the coastal regions (around Dan-
Fig. 13. Ranunculus glacialis.
marks Havn) had been found only as a single individual on Hare-
fjeld—and again on Maroussia. Without however instituting any
connection between the two circumstances of simultaneous occurrence
I shall only remark that I found the plant for the first time when,
on September 1, 1907, I was with the geologist of the Expedition at
a place near Dove Bugt where he, at the same time, found Yoldia-clay.
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 403
Point II upon the map of the station indicates a small pond
which dried up some time in the course of the summer and was
again refilled by the ground-water from the bog above. In the near
surroundings of the pond, towards the west, occurred in early summer
a rich growth of Ranunculus glacialis (Fig. 13) which gradually be-
came intermixed with Statice armeria which appears to thrive in the
conditions which occur there late in the year.
Point Ш, upon the flat gravelly field, was the only locality in
immediate proximity to the station where Arenaria, which was
common further into the country, was found. In similar localities
Fig. 14. Taraxacum arcticum (Trautv.) Dahlst. Е. albiflora.
but higher up and on a solid stony bottom, deeply covered with
snow during the winter, Erigeron compositus was found; it keeps to
the southern side and extends upwards, as far as the ground reaches
which has previously been a sea-bottom.
The speciality of the small clay-island (Lerö), which is desig-
nated Point IV, was Equisetum arvense together with a luxuriant
growth of Salix, Dryas and Draba. The depression around Point V
is filled with snow during winter, and decaying parts of plants also
gather there; upon the whole the locality appeared to offer possi-
bilities for the formation of humus; nevertheless its only inhabitants
after the melting of the snow were a small association of white-
flowering Taraxacum arcticum (Fig. 14). Similar localities, especially if
404 ANDR. LUNDAGER
watered with running water for some time, were agreeable to Ranun-
culus pygmeus and Saxifraga rivularis.
Just above the Cassiope-belt north of “The Island” (Point I)
the edge of the 9-metre curve was formed by a continuous growth
of Dryas which kept to the level, dry margin, and did not extend
over it in places where it ended abruptly. But Cassiope does not
care to climb over any edge which does not retain its snow-covering
very long; and thus Vaccinium is afforded an opportunity for growth
Fig. 15. Empetrum-locality to the east of Hulesden. In the foreground, under the
snow, Empetrum and Salix herbacea. On the margin above, the Vaccinium-belt,
between Dryas upon the level flat and the Cassiope-vegetation which begins at the
edge of the snow (9. 6. 1908).
between Dryas and Cassiope, and there it is often found in a sharply
defined belt of 20—30cm.; it occurs almost exclusively on such
somewhat rounded surfaces transitional between more level areas
and depressions in the ground. Vaccinium was found in a specially
well-marked area and under such conditions east of Hulesö, where
a large, level tract consisted of an Eriophorum-bog of copious mois-
ture derived from an enormous snowdrift towards the north-east.
A rather broad dyke formed a boundary to the bog and was broken
through by small outlets from it. Upon this dyke Dryas and Vac-
cinium were distributed as described above. А depression of about
one metre in depth contained some luxuriant tufts of Empetrum
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 405
intermixed with Salix herbacea which latter did not occur outside
this locality (Fig. 15; see also Fig. 5).
North of this Cassiope-belt and Dryas-border the vegetation became
sparse, consisting only of some tufts of, e.g. Carex nardina and Poa
abbreviata. The most northerly part of Basiskær seen upon the map
has become drained. There are dark masses of barren clay, and
the surrounding parts consist of tufted Carex-bog of which the
principal contents are mosses, Carex pulla, Arctagrostis and Salix.
Towards the north-west, in the dampest part between pools and
water-courses, vigorous individuals of Ranunculus sulphureus occurred
Fig. 16. Wind-affected forms of Dryas.
and, hidden in mosses, Juncus biglumis together with Cardamine
bellidifolia. At a short distance from that place Pleuropogon was
floating, late in the summer, in that part of the river which was
the first to dry up when frost set in.
Though the area included in the map is limited, yet this patch
of ground and its immediate surroundings are relatively rich in the
representatives of the vegetation of Germania Land; and I venture
to hope that the area may be of interest as a useful illustration
en detail, on account of the notes I have added upon it.
As peculiar wind-affected forms occur the worn-off tufts
especially of Cobresia Bellardii and Carex nardina, as also of Silene
and Dryas. The illustration of the Dryas-tuft (Fig. 16) is of one from
406 ANDR. LUNDAGER
the district near Lakseelv, found on June 16, 1907; it measures 2.32
metres in length and 1.45 metre in breadth and is almost withered
to windward (NW.) and in the middle, but has a vigorous, though
wind-affected border, to leeward. But these tufts keep to the ground
and thereby stand in contrast with the curious “column”-forms in
which Potentilla pulchella occurs both on Ymers Nunatak and in
those places upon the gravel-banks near Lille Snenæs which are most
exposed to the wind. The individuals from Ymers Nunatak appeared
to have struggled against the sand-drift and thereby to have attained
the compact, high tuft-form in order that they may be able to
keep “above water.’ But the individuals of this form which I
myself collected, stood quite isolated over the field and showed a
much wind-affected and leafless base. The conditions there did not
in any way permit the sand to gather around these “columns.”
Lesquerella and a Draba sp. from the same exposed posts have the
same form (cf. List, р. 23 and Pl. У). It appears to me, judging
from my observations in the field, that the form humilis (Lange) of
Р. pulchella prefers the weather-side to the lee-side though it is found
also in that situation in company with P. nivea. But on the lee-
side the tufts appear far fresher and have always a broad base.
P. pulchella f. elatior (Lange) is often found upon high sloping
river-banks consisting of loose sand mixed with clay; but in con-
tradistinction to the xerophilous f. humilis with its densely hairy,
silvery white leaves f. elatior has slightly hairy leaves which are
green upon the upper surface. In such places it must often stretch
far and wide for food; I have found it with roots which measured
1.15 metre and to a great extent were lying so high that a portion
of them lay bare.
It seems to me that Salix also must allow its form to be deter-
mined by such external factors as the wind. The illustration (Fig. 17)
shows the largest “сорзе” I have seen; it occurred upon a stony slope
above the station in Pustervig. Salix often adopts a curious form
according to the adverse circumstances it meets with, but it always
keeps close to the ground, The most beautiful branches I have
seen I found upon Harefjeld on June 24, 1907. They were two
13-years-old branches, g and 9, measuring respectively 48 and 57 cm.
in length. The male branch was somewhat thicker than the female
which had a year’s-shoot measuring 9 cm. and bore a leaf the blade
of which measured 51 x 30 mm. The leaves were slightly hairy and
the branches smooth. The exposition was as favourable as possible
as regards shelter, snow-covering and sun. The male catkins expand
first, and upon level ground always earliest in that part of the
catkin which faces south.
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 407
Saxifraga cernua is a remarkably variable species, though not
in response to the conditions of the wind. Its form differs according
to the different localities, but it makes its way everywhere: on dry
rocky flats where it grows up and becomes large and beautiful in
the shelter of a boulder, as well as upon a manured spot around an
animal skeleton where it utilises the sources of nourishment to
excess and develops thick, swollen and brittle leaves; or along small
water-courses down the rocky slopes with a gravelly bottom, but in
such a case it rarely flowers until very late; and lastly in bogs and
near lakes in the wettest moss, where it scatters its bulbils very
Fig. 17. Willow-copse at Pustervig.
abundantly. Flowers are of secondary importance to it. Here it
stands long and straggling — both large and small individuals —
and so dense that it characterizes the locality yet without adorning
the landscape. The bulbils germinate also upon the parent plant,
in the axils of the withered leaves.
Saxifraga groenlandica was found to be almost fully expanded on
May 20, 1907, in a valley which lies N.W.—S.E. near Termometer-
fjeld. It was still snow-covered, but received moisture from snow
which, in the form of an ice-collar, hung beyond the small tuft,
whose one-year-old stems with withered flowers were protruding.
The exposition was southern and shelter was obtained from some
stones towards the west and the mountains towards the north and
408 ANDR. LUNDAGER
east. The two almost expanded flowers had their development
stopped when the snow-layer melted round the tuft and on May 28
they were found to have closed, and no other buds had opened.
Not until June 8 were some other buds on longer stems fairly
widely open.
Epilobium latifolium is protandrous according to the material
first collected by me. Afterwards I investigated some flowers on
Moskusoksefjeldene on July 9, 1908, and in them frequently found
the style to be further developed relatively to the anthers; I regard
protandry to be the most common condition in north-east Greenland.
(See also Warming, 1886, in K. Danske Videnskab. Selsk. Oversigt,
p. 141, fig. 11).
In 1908 I found the plant in flower on July 7. In the material
collected there were also fruits from the previous year, though the
summer of 1907 might be regarded as unfavourable, as a relatively
low temperature had prevailed during the whole time; therefore it
is beyond doubt that the species in the summer of 1908 had set
fruit in the majority of the localities in which it reached the flower-
ing-stage as early as the beginning of July. The power of the
species to spread below the soil is indisputable; but it is not of
necessity of value to the preservation of the plant. Whether the
seeds are dispersed by the agency of birds or by the wind or by
both I am not prepared to say; but one of these two factors must
have been at the disposal of the plant in one case, in which I found
the plant in a crack in the rock at some distance from its original
locality. It can scarcely have found its way there otherwise than
through seeds. (The possibility is not excluded that the seed had
been transported by the agency of running water; but this did not
occur to me when I saw the plant on the spot and now, after some
time has elapsed, nothing can be stated with certainly either for or
against such а possibility).
Stellaria humifusa Rottboll. On August 12, 1907, I observed the
plant on the shore at Yderbugt where it was visited by a small,
grey butterfly which returned to the same tuft over and over again.
The flower is decidedly protandrous; the anthers were empty when
the stigmas were ripe. The head of the insect-visitor was dusted
with pollen from a young flower, but it appeared to be very fond
of older flowers also; the insect licked the petals and the ovary of
the latter, but also stood head downwards in order to be able to
reach the lower part of the flowers; it also tried to thrust itself in
between the sepals from the outside. (See also Warming, 1890,
in Festskrift udgivet af Den botaniske Forening, p. 212, fig. 8).
Stellaria longipes Goldie. On August 11, 1907, I observed small
Diptera visit the plant. (See also Warming 1890 l.c., р. 207, fig. 6).
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 409
This species varies highly and appears to understand fully the
art of adaption and its signification. Near places where food is
plentiful — as in the manured spots around parts of skeletons of
the musk-oxen — and also where it is protected by surrounding grass-
tufts its internodes always become greatly elongated. On June 16,
1907, I found near Hvalrosodde stems apparently quite dead, with
fresh, green buds and green leaves in their upper part. And on
May 23, 1908, I came across several places on dry ground where,
also upon withered old plants there occurred fresh buds, although
the whole was so frozen and dry that it crumbled between my
fingers.
Arenaria ciliata (L) var. humifusa (Wahlenb.). This plant has
decidedly protandrous, insect-pollinated flowers. Honey is secreted
abundantly in five glands at the base of the stamens in front of
the sepals, and it sometimes occurs in clear beads at the base and
gives to the plant a strong, sweetish perfume recalling that of buck-
wheat (Polygonum fagopyrum) or heather (Calluna vulgaris). Where
the plant occurs in large quantities in a locality it colours the
ground as if with balls of snow of purest white; but these white
cushions are not very conspicuous when the sun stands high in the
sky because in that case they harmonize too closely with the light,
clayey soil mixed with sand which this species especially prefers
and which, only when otherwise illuminated, presents enough
contrast to show up the plant. The perfume is evidently sufficient
to attract insects.
This species occurs most frequently with five styles. When
only three styles are present these appear to be shorter than in the
flowers which are 5-merous, and in contradistinction to such they
stand erect and with their reddish-purple stigmas placed closely
together. (See Warming, 1890, l.c. p. 221, fig. 14).
On September 4, 1907, this species was flowering on the west
side of Varderyggen where it occurs as a spring plant which, in
spite of frost, bears fresh shoots; however, the stamp of autumn
was imparted by the reddish-brown colour of the young leaves.
Cerastium alpinum L. On May 21, 1908, a tuft was found with
flowers that had survived the winter. New, fresh shoots were easily
recognizable in the tuft. On the 23rd of the month I found several
specimens with flowers from the previous year, as fresh to look at
as if newly expanded, had not the protruding seed-capsule betrayed
their age. The plant stood under the snow in the shelter of some
stones — the protection being lowest towards east — in a depression
where the plant must have been covered with snow from the first
snowy day in September. Already for a long time the sun’s heat
410 ANDR. LUNDAGER
had been penetrating the snow-covering, therefore the under part of
the snow-crust and the upper layer of the soil, especially that which
stood highest (to the north), was frozen ice. Here also a Melandrium
was found. The soil around the Cerastium and at its root was quite
dry, as dry as dust. The plant had fresh shoots besides green
leaves that had remained through the winter. (For the biology of
the flower see Warming, 1890, Festskrift, p. 197, figs. 1, 2).
Ranunculus glacialis L. Homogamy the rule. The nectar-pit is
without a scale. (For the biology of the flower see Knud Jessen
in Meddel. о. Grénland XXXVI, р. 338, fig. 3).
Within the Crucifere there is a considerable contrast between
Lesquerella arctica, which
is decidedly xerophilous
(as also Braya in part)
and the majority of the
Drabas, most of which
may be found both in dry
and in damp soil. Draba
glacialis associates itself
with any other plant (as
also does Cardamine belli-
difolia) both in the driest
gravel and in the wettest
moss; and no change can
be observed in its appear-
ance as it occurs in the
one or the other place.
+ The Pollination of Cam-
Fig. 18. Campanula uniflora. panula uniflora. When in
the young bud the anthers
and the stigma are at the same level, the anthers begin to open,
but the lobes of the stigma keep close together and their apices are
bent inward toward each other Fig.18 А, В). At this time no polli-
nation can take place by the help of outward agencies, the corolla
being closed. And as long as the anthers are at a higher level than
the stigma, the former are quite closed and then the pistil with its
sweeping hairs is also without pollen. But the style elongates
rapidly in the yet closed flower and with its hairs sweeps off all the
pollen from the open anthers (Fig. 18 C) so that its upper thicker
part is everywhere coloured by the pollen. All the pollen is now
to be found there, with the exception of a small portion which is
left on the inner surface of the anthers. The flower opens simul-
taneously with the elongation of the style; but not until the pistil
/
jg us
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 411
has reached its full height do the anthers leave their hold of it and
withdraw, doing so gradually as the corolla opens. And not until
the latter is fully open (Fig.18D) are the anthers found reclining
against its inner side. Now all the pollen is freely exposed and
may be carried away by insect-visitors. Once only, on Kloftfjeldet,
did I have abundant material of the plant in different stages of
development, and there appeared to be only one means of polli-
nation, viz. by the agency of insects; but I saw no such visitors.
(Regarding the biology of the flowers see also Warming, 1886, in
K. Danske Vidensk. Selsk. Oversigt, p. 152, fig. 13).
In November 1906 I planted three crocus-bulbs in a box in soil
in which cress had been sown the autumn before; the cress, however,
had withered when daylight disappeared and I had not paid proper
attention to the plants. The soil had been obtained by crumbling
various lumps of sod of presumably the best quality, judging from
the plant-growth which had previously found nourishment in it.
When two of these bulbs began to shoot in the beginning of
December it interested me to observe the development and growth
of the plant as it necessarily was obliged to assume its form in a
room without daylight, and with lamp-light for about 18 hours out
of the 24.
On December 9 I had made a small mark with ink upon the
scales of the bulbs just at the surface of the soil, and above this
the two plants measured 39 and 28 mm. respectively. The third
bulb had also germinated, but had not yet grown above the surface
of the soil.
On December 11, at 10.20 p.m. the plants were measured again;
their length had then reached 45 and 33 mm. respectively, the in-
crease during 48 hours being 6 and 5 mm. respectively. In the
course of 4—5 days the green leaves grew up outside the scales or
basal leaves which were pale and membranous, but they were consi-
derably elongated in length, asif etiolated. The plants were copiously
watered with lukewarm water (22°). The respective heights were: —
On the 13th, in the morning 49—35 mm.
— — —,at10.20 p.m. 51—37.5 —
— — 16th, - 1.15 a.m. 545—40 —
The third bulb then had four shoots, about 1 cm. above the
surface of the soil. Several cress-seeds germinated owing to the
copious supply of water, which benefited the whole.
The respective heights were: —
XLII. 31
412 ANDR. LUNDAGER
On the 16th, at 9 a.m. 56.5—41.5 mm.
— :— .—,°- 1145 p.m. 61 —45 —
— Dec. 17, - 10 aim: 63 —48.5 —
— — 18 - lam. 64 —495 —
— — —, - 830 p.m. 65 —49.5 —
— — 19, - 11.20 p.m. 70.5—545 —
Next the largest of the plants had one more shoot below. The
third bulb elongated its four shoots very slowly, and the largest
was then about 20mm. above the surface of the soil, the others
half as large.
The respective heights were: —
On Dec. 21, at 12.30 a.m. 74—57 mm.
— — - 10 a.m. 75—59 mm.
Both were then marked afresh with Indian ink for further
measurements. The box was turned round to find out whether the
lamp-light attracted them: then there was a distinct bending in-
wards into the room and the light which came from it (the box
stood upon the table before the window in the “Villa” on the land).
The respective heights were: —
On Dec. 22, at 12.30 a.m. 77—60 mm.
О о) nm a ot) Od. И
— — 23, - 12.10 a.m. 81 —63 —
The cress since the noon of Dec. 22 had turned inwards into the
room; perhaps the light there had attracted it, or else it avoided the
lower temperature at the window and sought the warmth. Then the
box was placed away from the window and upon the inner edge
of the table, that towards the room, where it remained standing all
through the night and the forenoon of the next day during which
time it received light trom the opposite side, from the lamps hanging
over the table.
The respective heights were: —
On Dec. 23, at 1.45 p.m. 82—63.5 mm.
The cress was then standing upright, bending most towards
the side which had been illuminated during the forenoon. Then
the box was again placed before the window.
The respective heights were: —
On Dec. 24, at 3 a.m. 84.5— 64.5 mm.
— — 25, - 130 a.m. 87 — 67 — :
Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land 413
Оп Dee: 26; at 12:5 ‘р. m. '91.5-—= 715mm.
— — 27, - 12.40 a.m. 98 — 73 —
— — —, - 11.35 p.m 96 — 75 —
28, — ЗЫ ам. 197.5 176.3 >
— = 29, -, 1.15 a.m. 103 — 80.5 —
— — —, - 2 p.m. 106.5— 325 —
1907 On Jan. 1, at 12.45 p.m. 112.5— 87.5 mm.
— — , - 12 midnight 114 — 885 —
— — 2, - 1.20 p.m. 115 — 90 —
— — 3, - 12.30 a.m. 116.5— 91 —
=i Sy Ee p.m. 120 — 94 —
— — 4, - 140 аш. 1225— 95 —
— — , - 10.30 a.m. 123.5— 9.5 —
— — 5, - 11.25 p.m. 1275— 97 —
— — 6, - 12.5 p.m. 130 —100.5 —
— — 7, - 130 a.m. 133.5—101.5 —
— — , - 12.10 p.m. 136 —102 —
— — 8 - 940 a.m. 140.5—105 —
— — 9% - 2 am. 144.5—1075 —
— — or | a.m. 146 —108 —
— — , - 10 p.m. 1495—110 —
— — 10, - 10.30 a.m. 153 —1115 —
— — —, - 11.30 p.m. 1565—115 —
— — 11, - 10.45 a.m. 160 —117 —
— — 12, - 12.15 p.m. 167.5—120 —
— — 13, - 12.45 a.m. 172 —124 —
— — —, - 12.10 p.m. 174 —124 —
— — 14, - 11.10 a.m. 180 —1265 —
— — 15, - 140 a.m. 183 —129 —
— — 16, - 140 a.m. 190 —135 —
Then the measurements were stopped. On February 12, when
the higher of the plants had already for several days been showing
a tendency to wither, it was dug up. It measured than 227 mm.
and had a new corm just above the old one, of about the same
size as the latter. This new corm was kept for some time in a dry
place and was afterwards planted, but did not sprout.
On February 24 the second of the plants which had been
measured had also withered; it had reached a height of 157 mm.
The third crocus with its four shoots was fairly well-developed at
the end of January; but all the shoots were very slender; the highest
had attained 152 mm.
Sie
414 ANDR. LUNDAGER: Some Notes concerning the Vegetation of Germania Land
There was no evident difference between the colour of the
leaves in December and in January and February although they
were exposed to daylight at that time; the sun however was not as
yet above the horizon. But it was difficult to decide whether any
change of colour had taken place, as in February we had not the
December growth for comparison; if there was any change it had
come on imperceptibly from day to day.
5.—7.—1912.
UDKIGSTONDEN
(31M.)
ИОВАСЕКАЗ ЕВ ae > So ioe
GRAGESPIL 77 - SS о
SS >
о
LM OR
NR Lasoraroniun
|
Vo BRANDVAAGE
SKIBET.
(1907-08)
AYN
(1906-07)
„РАММАВК?
VINTERKYARTER
1906-08.
200 Meter:
Danmark -Ekspeditionen 1906/08.
Höjdetal i Meter. Axel EAamodt, Kobhon.
be
[=
=
XIV.
АСАВГ.
ВУ
IVAR TRAGARDH.
Во»:
=
=
i Fe
i
u
ыы à
es
*
'
a
—
>»
=
on —
Introductory ‘remarks.
f the arctic countries Greenland is doubtless the one which
has been most thoroughly explored with regard to its acarid
fauna; the merit of this is chiefly due to the Danes who have
brought together a very rich collection of Acari. Through the
courtesy of Dr. MEINERT, the late director of the entomological
department of the Museum of Natural History in Copenhagen, this
collection was submitted to me and examined during my work on
the monograph of the arctic mites.
Most of the localities on Greenland where mites were collected
are, however, situated on the westcoast, from the southern point of
the country as far north as to Tasiusak; on the eastcoast, on the
contrary, only a few localities have been explored at Scoresby
Sound, where Вурек’$ expedition made investigations in 1891 and
a Swedish expedition under А. G. NATHORST in 1899.
As a consequence our information regarding the fauna of the
eastcoast is much more meagre than of that of the westcoast and
every addition to our knowledge of it is most welcome.
The following data illustrate our present knowledge of the
acarid fauna of Greenland.
In my paper on the arctic Acari (12) 70 species of Oribatide,
Trombidiide , Parasitide, Hydrachnide and Tyroglyphine were recorded
from the arctic region, not taking the parasitic /xodide and the
Analgesine into consideration, nor the salt-water Halacaride.
Of these not less than 40 or 59 °/o were recorded from Greenland;
but of these only 14 have been found on the eastcoast, whereas the
westcoast has not less than 32 species. 9 species are common to
both coasts, while 5 species from the eastcoast have not yet been
recorded from the westcoast and 23 species known to occur on the
westcoast have not yet been met with on the eastcoast.
Taking these circumstances into consideration it was with eager-
ness that I accepted the generous offer from Mr. F. JOHANSEN, the
zoologist of the expedition, to examine and report on the collection
of Acari made by him.
The collection consisted of 14 glass-tubes containing Acari from
the following localities:
418 Ivar TRAGARD.
Koldewey-Islands 13th August 1906; 2nd camping-place 30. August
1906; Hvalrosodden 25th May 1907; Stormkap 18th, 22th and 25th
June 1907; Thermometerfjældet near the harbour 24th August 1907;
Seal-lake (no date); S. E. of Stormkap 19th June 1908; Maroussia
19th June 1908; a swamp between Rypefjældet and Hvalrosodden
Ath and 5th July 1908.
SYSTEMATIC PART.
Fam. Parasitidæ.
Subfam. Parasitinæ.
Parasitus Latr.
P. fucorum (D. G.).
Of this species numerous nymphæ where found on Bombus sp.
as well as in moss.
Localities: Stormkap, 18th, 21th and 22th June 1907; on Bombus
sp. (two species) on the Thermometerfjæld near the harbour, 21th
June 1907.
Distribution: East-Greenland (Вурев’$ expedition 1891); West-
Greenland, Tigsaluk, on Bombus sp., 8th September 1889; Holstenburg,
on Bombus sp. 18th June 1890 (W. LUNDBECK).
The nymphæ have also been recorded from Italy, France,
Netherlands and Sweden, from the southernmost part to the regio
alpina superior of the Lappland mountains.
The adults were unknown until 1907, when they were discovered
by the author in the nest of Bombus kirbyellus in the Sarek
Mountains (13. p. 385).
The species has undoubtly a wide distribution and will probably,
on further investigation, be found everywhere in the arctic and
palæarctic region where there are humble-bees.
Subfam. Lelaptine.
Eulælaps Berl.
E. ambulans (Thor).
Locality: Numerous tritonymphæ femininæ generantes where
found under loose stones lying on moist ground, Maroussia, 19th
June 1908.
Acari. 419
Distribution; This species is also widely distributed. It was
discovered at Qanersoit, West-Greenland by the Swedish expedition
and described by THORELL; subsequently it was found in Siberia
by the Vegaexpedition and described by L. Косн under the name
Gamasus ovalis; later it was captured at Tasersuak 1890 (W. Lunp-
BECK), Rode © (Ryper’s expedition) and on Iceland in 1892 (DeıcH-
MANN) and in the Sarek Mountains by the author 1907, in the nest
of a lemming.
The adults have not yet been discovered, only nymphe gener-
antes feminine; but we may safely presume, in my opinion, that
they will be found on the lemmings.
In 1910 I suggested that Eulelaps stabularis var. proximus Berl.
found by Sic. THoR on a lemming in Norway was the female of
E.ambulans. I have not had an opportunity of testing the truth of
this suggestion, which the finding of nymphe of the latter species in
the nest of a lemming in the Sarek Moutains and the great similarity
between E.ambulans and E. stabularis rendered very probable.
The measurements given by BERLESE (length 800) do not, how-
ever, agree with those of the specimens I have seen (length of
nymphe 900 and 1080 resp.), but the size of the species may vary
in different localities.
Fam. Trombidiidæ.
Subfam. Bdellinæ.
Bdella Latr.
B. littoralis (L).
Localities: М.Е. coast of Koldewey-Island 76/20” N.L. 13th
August 1907, in the crevices of a desintegrated limestone-boulder, on
the shore; on a sandy slope near the second camp 30th August 1907.
Distribution: Of all the Arctic acari B. littoralis is the one which
is most widely distributed.
It occurs at the coast of France, England, Norway and Sweden;
in the arctic region it is recorded from both West- and East-Green-
land, Iceland, Jan Mayen, Bear Island, Nova Zembla, Siberia and
Franz Joseph’s Archipelago.
In the palæarctic regions it seems to be exclusively an in-
habitant of the sea-shore, never to be found even at a short distance
from it.
The field-notes of Mr. JoHANSEN seem to show, however, that
in the arctic regions it is met with also at some distance from the
shore. This is a very interesting observation which, combined with
the fact that, contrary to the case in the palæarctic regions, there
420 Ivar TRAGARDH.
are по other, large species of the genus in the same locality, seems
to indicate that B. littoralis in places where there are no fellow-com-
petitors may extend its hunting-ground inland.
Subfam. Trombidiine.
Podothrombium Berl.
P. bicolor (Herm.) var. curtipalpe Sic. Toor.
Locality: Stormkap, 22th June 1907, under a “knogel”? in a
dry sandy place.
Distribution: West-Greenland, “between Sukkertoppen and Kan-
germiut”, 5th June 1885 ($. HANSEN); Holstenburg, 13.—16. June and
8th July 1895 (\М. Гомовеск); Karsiliak near Navertalik, 22th May
1885 (Т. EBERLEIN); Ritenbenk, 27th August (W. LUNDBECK); Iceland,
Hekla-Harbour, April 1892 (DEIcHMANN); Siberia, Arctic Lappland,
Norway.
Notes on the colour: The colour of this var. was not known,
all descriptions having been made on specimens preserved in spirit.
The following statement regarding it was made by Mr. JOHANSEN:
“Earth-mite, body blackish-red, with bright red legs and head”
(the expression “head” obviously signifies the cephalothorax).
Fam. Hydrachnide.
Subfam. Lebertiinæ.
On Hygrobates fabricii Thorell.
THORELL (11. p. 150) identified with some doubt the specimen
captured by J. LINDAHL at Qanersoit with the species recorded by
FABRICIUS (Acarus aquaticus) from Greenland. He also gave a short
description of a Hydrachnid larva found in the same locality on
Chironomus frigidus ZETT and which he wrongly referred to Trombidium.
In my paper on the arctic Acari (13. p. 62—63). I suggested
that this larva was the larva of H. fabricii which I considered as
synonymous with Lebertia vigintimaculata $. T. recorded by Sic.
Тнов from Hammerfest and Senjen in Norway.
In a subsequent paper (7. р. 272—273) Тнов expresses his
doubts as to the synonymy of these two species, pointing out that
THORELL expressly says that his species has no swimming-hairs
on the legs. He furthermore repudiates my referring the larva
figured by me to Г. fabricii THor. and even denies that it is a
Lebertia at all, as it does not agree with the drawing of a larva of
Acari. 421
that genus which PiersiG has given in his great work “Deutschlands
Hydrachniden”.
He also points out that there is every reason to believe that
Greenland harbours several species of Hydrachnidz and that the
negative evidence furnished by the researches made hitherto is not
conclusive, no investigations having been made by experts on the
group.
The discovery of a Hydrachnid by Mr. F. JOHANSEN rendered it
imperative to reexamine THORELL’s type specimen in order to settle
definitely the questions mentioned above.
Owing to the extreme courtesy of Professor У. SJÖSTEDT, the
curator of the entomological department of the Government Museum
in Stockholm, I was able to examine the type specimen of L. fabricii
and to make a miscroscopical slide ot the legs and the gnath-
osoma.
Of THoRELL’s Trombidium-larva there is, on the other hand,
no specimeu in the collections, so that we will never be able to
learn what species it was.
The reexamination of Г. fabricii with the aid of Sıc. THor’s
excellently illustrated and very detailed descriptions of all the well-
known species of the genus Lebertia (7—10) has proved beyond
doubt, that that is not the species found by the Danmark-Expedi-
tion on the №. Е. coast of Greenland, but that there are two different
species in Greenland, even belonging to different subgenera.
L. fabricti is a Pseudoleberta and according to Sic. THOR, who
has been kind enough to examine the figures of the species which
I sent to him, it is a distinct species, whether more closely related
to the glabra-group or to the maculosa-group, however, he could
not tell.
As to the larva figured by me in “Fauna arctica” and which I
believed to be the larva of THORELL’s species, Sic. THOR who has
also examined this form is inclined to place it in the genus
Arrhenurus or some closely allied genus.
If this supposition is true, there are, consequently, still more
hydrachnids in Greenland which the researches, hitherto made,
have failed to discover.
Lebertia.
Subgen. Pilolebertia S. T.
P. porosa S. T.
Localities: Under the ice near the shore of a small freshwater-
lake, near the “Bastion”, Hvalrosodden, 25th May 1907; in a swamp
between “Rypfjeldet and “Hvalrosodden”, 4th and 5th July 1908.
422 Ivar TRAGARDH.
Lebertia (P.) porosa У. T.
Fig. 1. Maxillary palps, inner side view. >< 295.
Fig: 2. Leg I. >< 50. Fig. 3. Leg II. >< 50. Fig. 4.
Leg ТУ. x 50. Fig. 5. Ambulacre of Leg IV. >< 270.
Fam. Oribatide.
Subfam. Oribatinæ.
Oribata Latr.
О. notata Thorell.
Distribution: Accord-
ing to Тнов (6. р. 779)
this species in Norway
is one of the most
common forms in the
lakes as well as the
rivers. He also records
it from the northern and
southern Siberia and
from Germany, Swit-
zerland, Italy, France,
England and Scotland.
This species JOHANSEN
(5. p. 829) identified
with Г. fabricii, prob-
ably under the appre-
hension that only one
Hydrachnid occurred
in Greenland.
My determination of
it has been verified by
THOR. Ås he has given
a detailed description
of it with numerous
drawings, it is not nec-
essary to repeat this
here. I therefore give
only a few drawings of
the organs, the charac-
teristics of which are of
the greatest value for
identifying purpopes.
Locality: Under loose stones on moist ground, Maroussia
19. June 1908; several specimens.
Distribution: East-Greenland, Cape Stewart (RYDER’s and NATH-
ORST’s expedition); FRANZ JosEPH’s Archipelago, Cape Flora, North-
Acari. 493
brook-Island; Nova Sembla; Siberia; Spitzbergen; Jan Mayen;
Bear Island; Arctic Lappland.
In 1910 BERLESE (3. р. 264) established a new speeies for an
Oribata found by STRAND in Greenland (or perhaps found by some-
body else, but belonging to STRAND’s collection).
This species, named Sperozetes strandi, seems to be nothing
else than O.notata Thor.!). Its diagnosis is as follows: “Badius,
pyriformis, setis crassiusculis, longiusculus hirtus. Tecti lamellæ
tantum usque in medio antico producte, lata translamella intersese
coniunctæ, apice acute, cæterumut in 5. setoso conformate, Organa
pseudostigmatica clavata. Genu et tibia primi et secundi paris seta
robusta, spiniformi aucta. Ad. 700 long.; 400 lat.”
Remarkably enough BERLESE does not compare it with О. notata;
from the comparison with О. setosa, which the diagnosis contains, it
is, however, evident that S.strandi differs from that species in ex-
actly the same respects as does О. notata, viz. through the shorter
cusps of the lamellæ and the presence of a stout bristle on genu
and tibia of the 1st and 2nd pair of legs.
Fam. Sarcoptide.
Subfam. Tyroglyphine.
Tyroglyphus Hering.
T. fucorum Oudms.
Locality: Stormkap, 18th, 21st and 22nd June 1906, together
with nymphne of P. fucorum.
Distribution: West-Greenland, Holstenburg, on Bombus sp.;
Arctic Lappland, on Bombus alpinus ; Netherlands.
1) It ought to be mentioned here that BERLESE during recent years has split
up some of the old genera into a considerable number of new ones. Аз, however,
only preliminary diagnosis of these have been published which in several instances
are insufficient because not enough detailed, I consider it most appropriate to await
the publishing of the definitive system before making any attempt to refer any of
the species with which I am acquainted to BERLESE’s new genera. His new genus
Spherozetes comprizes amongst others Oribata setosa and 0. notata.
424 Ivar TRAGARDH.
Remarks
on the composition of the acarid fauna of the region
explored by the Danmark Expedition.
In all 7 species were discovered by Mr. JOHANSEN, which are
distributed amongst the different families as follows: Parasitide 2,
Trombidiidæ 2, Hydrachnide 1, Oribatidæ 1, Sarcoptidæ 1.
It is obvious that this collection is not exhaustive, and that
further investigations will reveal several more species. Especially
the Oribatide are undoubtedly far better represented than the present
collection seems to indicate. As is well known the main part of
the species belonging to this group are fungivorous or lichenivorous;
as a consequence, they are able to find shelter and means of sub-
sistence wherever lichens and fungi are to be found, whereas the
carnivorous Parasitide and Trombidiin® are dependent on the occur-
rence of other small arthropods, partly Collembola and Thysanura,
partly other mites as well as larve of insects.
The fundamental difference as regards the food of the groups
greatly influences their geographical distribution.
In a paper on the Acari of Sarek-tjakko (1911) the author in-
vestigated amongst other things this problem and proved that, while
of the Oribatidæ 42.1°/o ascended to the regio alpina superior, only
17 °/o of the Parasitide went as high.
If we compare the actual number of both groups the difference
between them becomes still more evident, only 4 Parasitide being
recorded from the regio alpina superior against 16 species of Ori-
batide.
There is no reason why the numerical proportion of these two
groups should not be about the same in East-Greenland as in the
above mentioned part of Sarek-tjakko, and consequently we are, in
my opinion, justified in assuming its fauna to be considerably richer
in Oribatidæ ; the same also probably applies in some degree to the
Trombidiide.
All the terrestial mites now recorded are widely distributed
forms which occur in many parts of the arctic region, and some of
which are also to be found in the palæarctic region.
Three of them, Eulelaps ambulans, Parasitus fucorum and Tyro-
glyphus fucorum doubtless owe their wide distribution to their bio-
logical relations to other animals, the lemming and the humble-bees
and it is of great interest to notice that the two former are the only
Parasitide yet found on the East-coast of Greenland.
Acari. | 495
As to Bdella littoralis И is а strictly littoral form which or the
eggs of which are apt to be dispersed by means of driftwood etc.
Podothrombium bicolor var. curtipalpe, on the other hand, is more
particular; contrary to Bdella, the larvæ of which are free-living like
the adults, its larva is ectoparasitic and dependent on other arth-
ropods (spiders or insects); its geographical distribution consequently
becomes restricted to the places where suitable hosts occur. This
is, as pointed out by the author (13. p.573), the most probable ex-
planation of the fact that no Trombidiide or Erythreine, the larvæ
of which are all ectoparasitic, have been found on small, isolated
islands, as for instance Bear Island and Jan Mayen or in the regio
alpina superior of the mountains of arctic Lappland.
Comparison with the fauna of the neighbourhood
of Scoresby Sound.
As above mentioned the only other place on the East-coast of
Greenland at which the acarid fauna has been explored is Scoresby
Sound. From this place the following 14 species have been recorded:
Oribatide: Oribata notata Thor., Tectocepheus velatus Mich.,
Nothrus horridus Herm. var. borealis (Thor), Notaspis exilis Nic. var.
crassipes (L. Koch). Hermannia reticulata Thor.
Trombidtide: Penthaleus insulanus Thor., Р. hematopus Can.,
ВаеПа littoralis (L.), Bryobia pretiosa K., Podothrombium bicolor
(Herm.) var. curtipalpe Sig Thor, Erythreus phalangioides (D.G.) var.
gracilipes (Kram.), Rhyncholophus miniatus (Herm.).
Parasitide: Eulælaps ambulans Thor, Parasitus fucorum (D. G.).
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
1. BERLESE, A. Acari nuovi, Manipulus secundus. — Redia, vol. 1 fasc.2. — Flo-
renz 1903.
2: — - Acari nuovi, Manipulus 5—6. — Ibidem. Vol. 6, fase. 2. 1910.
3 — - Lista di nuove specie e di nuovi generi di acari. — Ibidem. Vol. 6,
fasc. 2. 1910.
4. — - Brevi diagnosi di generi e specie nuovi di acari. — Ibidem. Vol.
fasc. 2. 1910.
5. JOHANSEN, F. Freshwater life in north-east Greenland. — Danmark-expeditionen
til Gronlands nordöstkyst 1906—1908. — Bind 5. Nr. 6. (Særtryk
af "Meddelelser om Grønland” 45) — Köbenhavn 1911.
496 Ivar TRAGARDH. Acari.
a
6. THOR, Sic. Lebertia-Studien 6—8. — Zool. Anzeiger Bd. 29. Nr. 25/26. — Leip-
zig. 1906.
7 — Lebertia-Studien 10. — Ibidem. Ва. 30. Nr. 819. 1906.
8. == Lebertia-Studien 15. — Ibidem. Bd. 31. Nr.4. 1907.
9: — Lebertia-Studien 18. — Ibidem. Vol. 31. Nr. 15/16. 1907.
0. — Lebertia-Studien 19—23. — Ibidem. Vol. 32. Nr. 6. 1907.
1. THORELL, T. Om några arachnider fran Grönland. — Ofversikt af Kongl. Veten-
skaps-akademiens Förhandl. Nr. 2 Stockholm 1872.
12. TRAGARDH,I. Monographie der arctischen Acariden. — Fauna Arctica. Ва. 4,
Lief. 1 — Jena 1904.
13. —= - Acariden aus dem Sarekgebirge. — Naturwissenschaftlige Untersuch-
ungen des Sarekgebirges in Swedisch-Lappland. Bd. 4, Zoologie.
Lief. 4. — Stockholm 1910.
9.—8.—1912.
ХУ.
А MARINE DORYLAIMUS FROM GREENLAND
WATERS, DORYLAIMUS MARITIMUS, N. SP.
BY
HJALMAR DITLEVSEN
LOS
XLIII 32
п some bottom material from the “Stormbugt” Dr. BREHm who dealt
with the Entomostraca brought home by the “Danmark-Expedi-
tion” found several Nematodes which he was kind enough to take
out and forward to our Museum. The examination gave the result
that all the Nematodes belonged to the same species and that it
was a Dorylaimus.
Of this genus, exceedingly frequent among the land- and fresh-
water forms, only one marine species has been described so far as I
know, namely а Dorylaimus found by Duwsarpın at Lorient and
described in his “Histoire naturelle des Helminthes ou vers intestinaux,
Paris 1845”, under the name of Dorylaimus marinus. That the genus
however has been taken later in the sea is evident from the Annual
report of the Liverpool Marine biology committee by W. A. HERDMANN
for the year 1912, where among several other marine genera gathered
by himself GILBERT Е. JOHNSON also names the Genus Dorylaimus.
As this is only a list of the genera the question of species is not at
all mentioned.
As the material from Greenland proved to be in a rather bad
state of preservation I picked out some specimens which appeared
to be tolerably open to examination, four in all, females. No males
were found in the material.
It soon proved that the species present could not be identical
with the Dorylaimus marinus of Dusarpin who describes the tail of
the named species as: “longue, effilée”, while the tail of the species
from Greenland is rather short and hook-shaped. The spear of the
species from Lorient does not seem to have the usual quill-shape
(Dus. I. с. Pl. 3 fig. D 1.) while the spear of the specimen from the
Danmark Expedition just has this form. Only one thing more 1
shall mention: the relation between the length and the breadth is
for the species of Dusarpin 24, for the Greenland specimen 37/2.
What first was striking in the Greenland specimens was their
lack of transparency and their dark olive-green colour. The body
is slender and tapers rather quickly towards the front end and
322
430 HJALMAR DITLEVSEN. A marine Dorylaimus from Greenland waters.
the tail. The greatest thickness is measured near the vulva, a little
before the middle of the animal. The front end is marked by a
rather sharp constriction. The mouth is surrounded by 6 prominent,
nearly globular lips devoid of papillae. The tail is tolerably short,
conical with hook-shaped tip. This hook-shaped tip is present in
all the specimens even when the whole body for the rest is stretched
out. The spear of the mouth is strong, measures с. 174 in length
and is of the well-known, usual quill-shape with its apex obliquely
cut off.
The oesophagus, the length of which measures between '/5 and
1/6 of the length of the whole animal, has its greatest thickness in its
proximal end and tapers evenly towards the front end of the animal.
The nerve-ring is seen on the limit between the first and second
third of the oesophagus.
The intestine has its hindmost part differentiated in the same
way as usually occurs in this genus and is seen under high magni-
fying powers to contain dark refractive granules.
The reproductive organs stretch only slightly forward and back-
ward in the animal. The down-bent terminations of the ovaries pass
each other with their tips respectively from behind and from before
exactly over the vulva (see fig. 1). Only one of the individuals had
ripe eggs; they are found to the number of two, one before and one
behind the vulva and are rather thick-shelled. They measure 82 1
in length and 32 in breadth.
Finally I shall only point out, that while the Dorylaimus
marinus Dujardin must be arranged in the group = of DE MAN to
which belong Dorylaimus stagnalis, brigdammensis and others, the
species here dealt with must be arranged under the group 7 for which
D. Carteri is the main type’.
Measurement of adult female with shell-eggs:
Pensthee 220 0: 2:46 mm.
Вена 2.0 0:007 —
о и 118 —
Oesophagus ..... 0:04 —
а tac eee (NII PS
1 ПЕ Man: Die frei in der reinen Erde und im stissen Wasser lebenden Nematoden
d. Niederl. Fauna. Leiden 1884.
PLATE XVIII.
no
PLATE XVIII.
Zeiss’ microscope was used.
Dorylaimus maritimus n. sp.
Young female. Reproductive organs. Apochr. 8 mm. Comp. 4.
The limit between the Oesophagus and the Intestine. Obj. E.
Ос. 2.
The front end of the animal, showing the lips and the spear.
Apochr. 2 mm. Comp. 4.
Vulva and shell-eggs of a full-grown female. Apochr. 3 mm.
Comp. 4.
Hind part of a specimen, showing the differentiated part of
the intestine and the hook-shaped tail. Obj. DD. Oc. 2.
Ре. ХУ
Мерь. om GRONL. XLIII. Nr. 15. [Hy. DITLEVSEN]
>
vs
2
&
=
Un tre
5225
vo
GR
Autor del. Pacht & Сгопе pholotyp.
XVI.
BRYOZOA
BY
G. M. R. LEVINSEN
XLIII.
33
PRÉFACE
MONG the unpublished works left by my late predecessor, G. M.
В. LEVINSEN was found а manuscript on the bryozoa collected
by the Danmark Expédition at the north-east coast of Greenland.
Of this manuscript there is a fair copy of only the smaller portion,
while of the latter and greater part only a rough copy exists.
Moreover 6 plates for this paper, engraved in copper and already
printed, were found.
As the committee for the publication of the scientific results of
the Danmark Expedition, after having defrayed the expense of prin-
ting the 6 mentioned plates, greatly wished to get LEVINSEN’s paper
printed, I agreed to offer my co-operation. From the rough copies
I gathered, as far as possible, a complete manuscript, and I took
great pains to interpret LEvINSEN’s handwriting correctly, which,
during the latter years of his life, had become somewhat illegible.
Extremely valuable assistance was rendered ‚те by the well-
known Norwegian Zoologist Dr. О. NORDGAARD of Trondhjem, who,
at my request, kindly undertook to read the 2nd proof of the
paper, whereby he solved various questions as to which I was in
doubt. But where Dr. NorpGaarp’s assistance has been of the
greatest importance is in his preparation of an explanation of the
plates which was entirely lacking from Levınsen’s hand, only the
name of the species being given on the original drawings, while
nothing was said as to what the drawings were meant to illustrate.
In this way the explanation of the 6 plates is entirely due to Dr.
NORDGAARD, and thanks to his competent assistance access to an
understanding of LEVINSEN’s excellent drawings is also possible. —
For all good help in this matter I hereby offer Dr. NORDGAARD
my sincere thanks.
It is easy to see that the paper now before us is unfinished;
thus, in the text, mention of the species illustrated on Pl. XXIV
is entirely wanting. But its usefulness and value is guaranteed
33"
by Dr. NorpGAARD’s appreciation when, after having looked through
the work, he wrote to me: “I can say with safety that it would
have been a great pity if LEVINSEN’S posthumous manuscript had
not been printed.” And with this remark of the distinguished spe-
cialist in the bryozoa I deliver LEVINSEN’S work to the public,
feeling convinced that the late author will not be held responsible
for its deficiencies, as he had no opportunity either to complete it
or to subject it to a last revision.
Copenhagen, May 20. 1916.
Ар. S. JENSEN,
Director of the 2nd Division of the Zoological Museum
of the University.
Ordo Cheilostomata.
Subordo Anasca.
Fam. Bicellariellidae.
Dendrobeania Murrayana Johnston.
Flustra Murrayana Johnston, British Zoophytes, sec. ed., p. 347, pl. 63,
figs. 5, 6.
Bugula Миггауапа Smitt, Krit. Förteckn. öfver Skand. Hafs-Bryozoer
(Ofvers. K. Vet.-Akad. Férh. 1867, N. 5, pp. 291—
92, pp. 348—53, Tab. XVIII, figs. 19—27).
Menipea fruticosa Packard, Invertebrate Fauna of Labrador and Maine
(Boston Soc. of Nat. Hist. vol. 1, 1866—69, p. 273).
Bugula Murrayana Levinsen, Bryozoer fra Kara-Havet (Dijmphna-
Togtets zoolog.-botan. Udbytte, 1886, рр. 310--12,
Tab. XXVI, figs. 3—6).
— — Bidenkap, Bryozoen von Ost-Spitzbergen (700105.
Jahrbticher, Abth. f. Systematik, 1897, p. 615).
-- — Waters, Bryozoa from Franz-Josef Land (Journ.
Linn. Soc., Zool., vol. 28, pp. 52—54).
Brettia frigida Waters, eodem loco р. 51, pl. 7, figs. 1—3.
Brettia minima Waters eod. loco, р. 52, pl. 7, figs. 5—7.
Bugula elongata Nordgaard, Die Bryozoen d. westlichen Norwegens
(Meeresfauna von Bergen), Bergen 1906, p. 80, Taf.
I, figs. 1—6.
Bugula quadridentata Andersson, Zool. Jahrbiicher, Abth. f. Systema-
tik, 1902, pp. 537—838.
Bugulopsis Peachii Norman, Notes on the nat. hist. of East Finmark
(Annals Nat. Hist. ser. 7, vol. 11, 1903, page 577).
Bugula elongata Norman, Notes on .... Corrigenda (Annals Nat.
Hist., ser. 7, vol. 15, 1905, pages 358—59).
Dendrobeania murrayana Levinsen, Morph. and system. studies on the
Cheilostomatous Bryozoa, 1909, pages 99, 113.
—- — Nordgaard, Revision av Norske Bryozoer (K.
Norske Vid: Selsk. Skrifter, 1911, МВ 3, р.
17).
436 Ц. М. В. LEVINSEN.
I have only seen а number of small colonies fixed to algae.
The zooecia are arranged in 2—9 longitudinal series and are provided
with 1—5 spines on each side. They belong to the varieties fruticosa
and quvadridentata.
Station 63, Stormbugt, 10—20 m.
Station 72, Stormbugt, 19—15 т.
Gemellaria loricata L.
Fistulana ramosa Fabricius, Fauna Groenl., р. 441.
Cellularia loriculata Fabricius, Nye Zool. Bidrag, K. Danske Vid. Selsk.
nat. og math. Afh. 1. Del, 1824, p. 31.
Gemellaria loricata Smitt, op. cit. 1867, pp. 286 og 324, pl. 17, fig. 54.
— — Hincks, Br. М. Polyzoa, р. 18, pl. 3, figs. 1—4.
— — Levinsen, Mosdyr, р. 41, Tab. 1, figs. 1—3.
Of this species I have only seen the remnants of 5 small colonies
each consisting of 1—5 pairs of zooecia fixed to cirri of Antedon
prolixa.
Station 99, 77° N. 18!/2° W., 304 m.
Fam. Scrupocellariidae.
Scrupocellaria scabra v. Ben.
Sertularia halecina Fabricius, Fauna Groenl. р. 443.
Flustra scruposa … Fabricius, Nye Zool. Bidrag, К. Danske Vid. Selsk.
Nat. og Math. Afh. 1821, 1 D., p. 33.
Cellularia scabra Smitt, op. cit. 1867, pp. 283 og 314, Tab. XVII,
figs. 27—36.
Scrupocellaria scabra Hincks, op. cit. p. 48, Pl. VI, figs. 7—11.
— — Levinsen, Mosdyr, р. 44, Tab. I, figs. 19—25.
— — Waters, Journ. Linn. ‘Soc., Zool., Vol. XXVIII,
p. 54, pl. 7, figs. 14—16.
(POX. SED
In the colonies examined the distal wall is (besides the large
somewhat semilunaire or angularly bent collection of uniporous
rosette-plates found in almost all the members of this family) pro-
vided with one, two or rarely three rounded, but otherwise differ-
ently shaped pore-chambers of rather different size. Each of them
is provided with a single uniporous rosette-plate, rarely with a few.
As a rule they are present in all the zooecia. I have not seen such
pore-ehambers in colonies from Denmark or from West-Greenland,
but I have found similar structures in Menipea roborata Hincks and
Men. ligulata M’Gill.!
1 LEVINSEN, Morph. and Syst. Studies on the Cheil. Bryozoa, рр. 138—141, pl. 2.
Bryozoa. 437
A number of small colonies fixed to algae.
Station 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
Station 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 т.
Scrupocellaria ternata Ellis & Sol. var. gracilis Smitt.
Cellarina gracilis Van Ben., Bull. Acad. Roy. Belgique ХУ, р. 70, Pl.
x, fies, Г 2:
Cellularia ternata, forma gracilis Smitt, op. cit. 1867, pp. 283 and 308,
Tab. XVI, figs. 14—24.
Menipea arctica Ridley, Annals Nat. Hist, $. V., Vol. УП р. 444.
— gracilis Busk, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., Vol. XV, р. 232.
Scrupocellaria ternata, var. gracilis Waters, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool.,
р. 55, BL. VIE tig: 12:
(PI ХЕ figss 253):
As I have pointed out in my work on the Cheilostomatous
Bryozoa (pag. 132, foot-note) this species possesses a vibraculum!
which differs from the other vibracula found in this family in the
lack of a flabellum, whereas the distal end is provided with a round
aperture covered by a membrane. Like the other vibracula in this
family it is divided into two compartments by a wall provided with
a rosette-plate (fig. 2), and a radical fibre may take its origin from an
aperture in the proximal compartment. By means of reagents it
may be isolated from the zooecium, being provided with an inner
wall of its own.
A few small fragments from Station 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
Bugulopsis Peachii (Busk).
Cellularia Peachii Smitt, op. €it- 1867, рр, 285, 322 Tab. XVIE
figs. 51—53.
— — Hincks, op. cit. p. 34, Pl. У, figs. 2—5.
Scrupocellaria Peachii Waters, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., Vol. XXVIII,
p. 58.
Bugulopsis Peachii Verrill, Amer. Journ. Science and Arts, Vol.
XVIII, pp. 52—54.
Cellularia Peachii Osburn, Bull. Bur. Fish, Vol. XXX, p. 223,
PI. XXI, fig. 20 bis.
Bugulopsis Peachii Nordgaard, Bryozoaires, р. 7. Duc d’Orleans,
Campagne arctique de 1907.
1 This rudimentary vibraculum has been figured by $митт, who in the explana-
tion of pl. 16 mentions it in the following way: “The upper part of this swell-
ing corresponds to the vibraculum which in the following species is found in
this place”.
438 G. М. В. LEVINSEN.
In most zooecia of the small fragment the distal wall is provided
with a small rounded pore-chamber of the same structure as those
found in Scrup. scabra. I have not seen such a pore-chamber in
specimens from other localities.
Station 95a. The Sound between Renskæret og Maatten, 50—
100 m.
Fam. Membraniporidae.
Membranipora (Electra) catenularia Jameson.
Flustra membranacea О. Е. Miller, Prodromus Zool. Danicae, р. 253.
— — Abildgaard, О. Е. Muller, Zool. Danica, vol. 3,
р. 63, tab. 117, 155.1, 2.
Tubipora catenularia Jameson, Wernerian Mem. р. 561.
Membranipora pilosa, forma catenularia (M. catenularia) Smitt, op. cit.
1867, pp. 370, 417, pl. 20, figs. 45—-38.
Membranipora catenularia Hincks, British Marine Polyzoa, р. 134, pl.
es 12)
— monostachys var. а (fossaria) Hincks, eod. loco, р. 132,
pl. 18, figs. 3, 4.
— tenella Hincks, A General Hist. of the Marine Po-
lyzoa (Annals Nat. Hist. 5. ser., vol. 6,
1880, p. 376, pl. 16, fig. 7).
= catenularia Levinsen, Mosdyr, Zool. Danica, 4. В. 1.
Afd., 1894, p. 56, Tab. III, figs. 37, 41.
— monostachys Waters, op. cit. 1900, p. 59, pl. 8, fig. 3.
— Mülleri Bidenkap, Die Bryozoen, Fauna arctica, 1 Cheil.
19005929325 Tab IN us
— — Norman, Notes on the Nat. Hist. of East Fin-
mark (Annals Nat. Hist. ser. 7, vol. 11, 1903,
р. 586, note.
This species is one of the only three species of cheilostomatous
Bryozoa in which a calcareous operculum has hitherto been found.
It is interesting, moreover, in being the only Bryozoon found in the’
innermost part of the Baltic, while at the same time it is widely
spread in the arctic seas. While at Spitzbergen it lives in a depth
of 9—20 fath., it has been found in the boreal sea outside of Nor-
way in a depth of 200—300 fath.; and at Copenhagen I have found
it in the “Stadsgraven and the Kalvebodstrand” in water of a very
small degree of salinity and in a depth of less than one foot. SMITT
has already pointed out that the baltic form of this species must
doubtless be regarded as a relict.
We may discern two varieties, namely the var. fossaria in which
Bryozoa. 439
the frontal area is wholly membranous, ‘and the var. catenularia
in which the membranous area is greatly reduced. The latter, which
is widely spread in the arctic seas, often forms a more or less irre-
gular dendritic pattern.
A single colony of the var. catenularia on a stone.
Station 63. Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
Membranipora (Callopora) craticula Alder
Membranipora lineata 1, forma craticula Smitt, op. cit. 1867, pp. 363
—64, рр. 390—93.
— craticula Hincks, Brit. Marine Polyzoa, р. 147, pl. 19,
fig. 7.
— — Levinsen, Mosdyr, ор. cit. р. 60, Tab. У, figs.
4—6.
Callopora Norman, op. cit. 1903, p. 589, pl. 13, fig. 3.
Membranipora craticula Osburn, Bryozoa of Woods Hole Region (Bull.
Bureau Fisheries, vol. 30, 1910, p. 229, pl. 23,
figs. 32, 32 a, 32 b).
(PISXIX ros BÆRES ORE
In my paper on the Danish Bryozoa (Mosdyr) I have pointed
out that in this species an independent avicularium appears which
has been figured, but not mentioned, by Hincks. These avicularia
are most conspicuous in the free margin of the colony; especially
when we regard a young disciform colony, we find them in the
whole circumference of the latter, placed in a number of 1—7 along-
side each other, each such series being separated from the next
one by a various number of zooecia. We may discern two different
sizes, large ones, in which the avicularian beak is surrounded by a
broad, somewhat convex area (fig. 4) and small ones from which the
ooecium belonging to а subjacent zooecium is formed (fig. 6). Such
a small avicularium is easily discerned from a superficial or inde-
pendent one seated on an ooecium, in that that it does not rise
from the top of the ooecium, but is only placed distally to the latter,
and when a colony is regarded from the basal surface it is easily
recognised by means of its small independent chamber provided with
a vertical distal wall and with pore-chambers.
In the colonies examined the length of the zooecia varies. The
membranous area is surrounded by 14—19 somewhat flattened acu-
minate spines. Besides the well-known avicularium placed proxim-
ally to the membranous area (in zooecia with ooecia seated on the
top of the latter) there is mostly, in a various number of zooecia,
found one or two small lateral avicularia with the mandible directed
440 Ц. М. В. LEVINSEN.
outwards and placed, аз а rule, on a level with the first third of
the membranous area. |
In a colony from St. 63 а fairly large number of zooecia have
the frontal area more or less filled by a somewhat convex calcareous
film, perforated by an oval opening of different size, while in other
zooecia the central portion of the film is occupied by an avicularian
beak. We have, therefore, no doubt to do with a regeneration, by
which an avicularium has been formed within an old zooecium. A
number of regenerated zooecia has also been found.
A number of colonies from Stat. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
Stat. 68, off Cape Bismarck, 40—60 m.
Stat. 71, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Stat. 72, Stormbugt, 30 m.
Membranipora (Callopora) lineata L.
Flustra lineata Fabricius, Fauna Groenl., р. 137.
Eschara — Fabricius, Manusk. Hefte 3, Nr. 384.
Membranipora lineata 2, forma lineata Smitt, op. cit. 1867, pp. 364
and 390, Tab. XX, fig. 23.
— — Hincks, British Marine Polyzoa, р. 143, pl. 19,
figs. 3—6.
— — Levinsen, Mosdyr, Zoologia Danica, 4 В, 1. Afd.,
р. 60, tab. 5, figs. 4—6.
— — Osburn, ор. cit. p. 228, pl. 23, figs. 31—31 с.
I have not been able to find independent avicularia in any of
the colonies of this species which I have hitherto examined. -
A rather small number of colonies mostly on hydroids, on the
stems and branches of which they form narrow cylindrical incru-
stations. ,
Stat. 62, Stormbugt, 10—20 т.
Stat. 66, Stormbugt, 30—40 m.
Stat. 67, Danmarks Havn, 20—30 т.
Stat. 68, off Cape Bismarck, 40—60 m.
Membranipora (Callopora) arctica d’Orb.
Reptoflustrina arctica d’Orbigny, Paléontologie Francaise Terr. Cret.,
T. 5, Bryozoaires, p. 582.
Membranipora Sophiae Busk, Zoophytologie, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc.,
vol-3,p. 255, pl. 1.15: 7
— lineata, forma Sophiae Smitt, ор. cit. 1867, рр. 365
and 394, pl. 20, figs. 24, 25.
Bryozoa. 441
Membranipora arctica у. Lorenz, Bryozoen von Jan Mayen (Die in-
ternationale Polarforschung 1882—83, 3 B.), p.
ovate feel
— — Waters, Journ. Linn. Soc. Zoology, р. 60.
— — Osburn, Bulletin Bureau of Fisheries, vol. 30,
р. 229, pl. 23, figs. 33—34, pl. 30, fig. 86.
Callopora Sophie Norman, Annals Nat. Hist., Ser. 7, Vol. XI, p. 590.
A number of small colonies from algae and stones.
Stat. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
Stat. 66, Stormbugt, 30—40 m.
Stat. 71, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Stat. 72, Stormbugt, 30 m.
Membranipora (Callopora) trifolium S. Wood.
Membranipora Flemingii, forma trifolium Smitt, op. cit. 1867, pp. 367
and 405, Tab. ХХ, figg. 37—42.
—- топит -Hincks, ор. cit: р. 167, Pl ХЖМЕ fias.25, 6.
Amphiblestrum — Norman, Annals Nat. Hist., Ser. 7, Vol. XI,
р. 597, РЁ Xi, 65 6.
Two colonies of the variety quadrata. In one of them, of which
there are only a few zooecia left, is seen an ancestrula with a highly
convex frontal surface, in the distal half of which is seen a circle
of 10 spine-marks, surrounding not only a very small opening pro-
vided with a concave proximal margin, but also a descending crypto-
cyst of a similar size.
St. 71a, Stormbugt, 30—40 m.
St. 15, Bat: 76 357 N. Long 1182.26” W., 150m:
Membranipora (Callopora) spathulifera Smitt.
Lepralia spathulifera Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 20 & 124, pl.
XXVI, figs. 94—98.
Microporella — Waters, ор. «Е р. 87. pl 12. fis. ; 6:
Doryporella — Norman, Annals Nat. Hist. 7. S., Vol. XII, 1903,
р. 106.
Callopora — Levinsen, Cheilost. Bryozoa 1909, p. 151.
Lepralia — Osburn, Proc. U. S. Nat. Museum, vol. 43, 1913,
р. 282, Pl. XXXIV, figs. 2, За and 2b.
(PE XIX, wigs: 8, 9, 10).
By the earlier authors this interesting species has been referred
to three different genera of the division for which I have proposed
the name Ascophora; but in my work on the cheilostomatous Bryozoa
442 G. М. В. LEVINSEN.
I have pointed out that it really belongs to the family Membraniporide
and especially to the subgenus Callopora. SMITT, the author of the
species, refers it to Lepralia because the aperture in the colonies
examined by him has a certain likeness to that of Lepralia Pallasiana
being provided with a short proximal enlargement, and this fact
distinctly shows how little the form of the aperture is to be relied
upon as a systematic character. The form and the size of the aper-
ture in this species is really subject to a very great variation, and
while in some colonies, f. inst. in those examined by Smirt, the
length of the aperture is contained thrice in that of the whole zooecium,
in others (pl. XIX, fig. 9) it is half as long as the latter and has an
ovate-pyriform shape. It is evident that we have here to do with
a membranous frontal area, provided with an opercular valve. We
may further point out two other characters which distinguish the
members of the division Anaska, namely that the avicularia lack a
cross-bar, and that the frontal calcareous surface has no pores.
None designates the zooecia as punctate, but in all the colonies
examined by me the whole surface of the zooecia and of the ooecia
is provided with an elevated reticulate meshwork. The distal portion
of the aperture is surrounded by 4—6 spines, the two distal ones
being separated by a large interspace; the two proximal ones are
often absent. In most colonies examined by me the spines are re-
presented by a cylindrical open joint, but sometimes there are two
or three, and in some colonies the base joint of the second pair has
a more or less broad, flattened form, reminding one of the singular
spatulate spine seated proximally to the aperture. In a single colony
the two distal pairs of spines are very long, bifurcate.
The median avicularium, which has been seen already by SMITT
but not recognised by WATERS and Norman, corresponds to that found
in the same place in other species of the subgenus Callopora, and
the lateral avicularia correspond to those which I have found in M.
craticula. For the rest they are all very inconstant. When the
median avicularium is found together with an ooecium it is partially
or wholly placed on the top of the latter but I have seen a whole
colony with many ooecia and not a few avicularia in which not a
single avicularium is in connection with an ooecium. The ecto-
ooecium is undoubtedly membranous. The distal half of each
zooecium is provided with 6 large, few-pored pore-chambers, two
distal ones and two on each side.
8 small colonies, 6 of which are found on stones.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Bryozoa. 443
Membranipora (Callopora) Whiteavesi Norman.
Callopora Whiteavesii Norman, Nat. Hist. of East Finmark, Polyzoa
(Annals Nat. Hist. 7.S., Vol. XI, 1903), p. 589—
90. РЕ XII fig: 9.
Membranipora lineata, forma lineata part. Smitt, Ор. cit. 1867, Pl. XX,
fig. 26.
(PIE ХЕХ. fies, 11, 12, 13,714).
The specimens examined differ somewhat from those described
by Norman, and may perhaps be regarded as belonging to a distinct
variety.
The zooecia are irregularly arranged and the large frontal
area is ovate or pearshaped-ovate. It is provided with а well-
developed granular cryptocyst and surrounded by 14—20 very long
spines curved sligthly inwards at their proximal part; the spines are
as a rule fixed in small sinuations of the cryptocyst and slope slightly
inwards. They are of very different size, and as a rule the
thicker ones are seated in the distal curve of the zooecium, but while
in some cases their thickness declines distinctly towards the proximal
end, in other zooecia the difference is not so very large. Sometimes,
also, one or more very thin ones may appear among much thicker ones.
Besides those immediately surrounding the cryptocyst there appear
as a rule in the distal half of the zooecium 5—10 spines placed
outside the others at a different height, and sometimes a number
of them are seated halfway down the wall. These outer spines are
very often very slender. As the cryptocyst has a very variable
breadth in different places this circumstance together with the pre-
sence of the above mentioned extraordinary spines produces the
impression that the spines are more or less irregularly arranged.
In a number of colonies from Egedesminde the spines are very much
shorter and more are found outside the others.
Г have only seen a single ooecium with an undamaged frontal
wall; the latter is densely granular but without other impressions
or projections. In the colonies from Egedesminde the ooecium is
much larger (its length being contained 1'/2—2 times in the length
of the membranous area) and more elongate, and its proximal por-
tion is provided with a low but broad triangular area. Distally to
this area is seen a strong, narrow vertical projection, the surface
of which is uneven or irregularly nodulous. It seems to have been
formed originally by two lateral halves, representing the thickened
margins of the two halves of the calcified ectocyst, which grow
together in the median line. It corresponds therefore to the transverse
444 Ц. М. В. LEVINSEN.
ог angularly bent rib found in a number of the Callopora-species,
but it has nothing to do’ with the first pair of ribs as suggested
by Norman. Between the two calcareous layers of the ooecium is
seen a reticulate net-work of wavy channels, and a similar net-work
is also seen f. inst. in Membr. aurita. In the meshes between the
channels the two calcareous layers are coalesced with each other.
Each zooecium is provided with 5 widely separated pore-cham-
bers, one distal and two lateral on each side.
In a number of zooecia I have found the aperture partially
filled by a calcareous plate, which is perforated in the middle by
an ovate opening. In this plate we may discern between an outer
smooth portion and an inner broad belt surrounding the opening
and provided with a net-work of fine undulated lines. In a number
of cases the boundary between this belt and the outer smooth por-
tion is marked by 5—6 pores, undoubtedly representing as many
spines. In one case only a proximal pore is present and in a few cases
there are no pores. There can be no doubt that this inner belt is
the cryptocyst of a regenerated zooecium, and it is evidently sucha
case which NorMAN mentions when he says that the membranous
frontal wall “is not destroyed by liquor potassæ, and thus it would
appear that the strengthening material is calcareous.” In one of the
zooecia which have been regenerated a portion of the wall of the old
zooecium has been removed to the very basal surface and the corres-
ponding portion of the wall of the new zooecium is distinctly seen.
An inspection from the basal surface shows, further, that the basal
outlines of the two zooecia are a little different.
A few colonies on stones.
St. 15, Lat. 76°35’ N. Long. 18°26' W. 150 m.
St. 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 m.
Membranipora (Callopora) unicornis Fleming, var. armifera
Hincks.
Membranipora lineata, forma americana Smitt, op. cit. 1867, pp. 366
and 400, Pl. ХХ, fig. 31.
— armifera Hincks, Annals Nat. Hist., ser. 5, Vol. VI, р.
82 РЁ ei Но. 5.
— -- Hincks, Annals Nat. Hist., ser. 6, Vol. IX, р.
155. Tell, MAINES Но. 4.
Membranipora Sophie, var. armifera Waters, Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool.,
Vol. XXVI, р. 680, Pl. XLVIII, fig. 18.
Callopora unicornis Fleming, var. armifera Norman, Annals Nat. Hist.,
set. 7, Vole р. 596 Ply ХПГ 653110. ie
Numerous colonies on alge, tunicata, balanus and stones.
Bryozoa. 445
St. 20b, Danmarks Havn, 5—10 m.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 66, Stormbugt, 30—40 т.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
St. 72, Stormbugt, 20—40 т.
Membranipora cymbæformis Hincks.
Membranipora spinifera Smitt, op. cit. 1867, pp. 366 and 411, Tab. XX,
fig. 32.
— cymbeformis Hincks, Annals Nat. Hist., ser. 4, Vol.
Cauloramphus —
EX peo:
Norman, Annals Nat. Hist., ser. 7, Vol.
XI, p. 588.
About 10 colonies on hydroids.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 68 a, Øresund, 40—60 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Fam. Cribrilinidae.
Cribrilina annulata Fabricius.
Cellepora annulata
Escharipora annulata
Cibrilina —
Fabricius, Fauna Groenl., p. 436.
Smitt, opus cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 4 and 53, Pl.
XXIV, figs. 8—10.
Hineks, op: crt. р. 198. PERXV 655 1 12.
Waters, ор. си. р. 64, pl. 8, fig. 21.
Norman, East Finmark, Polyozoa, р. 94, PI.
VIII, fig. 11. .
var. spitsbergensis, nov. nom. Norman, Annais
Nat. Hist., ser 7, Vol. XII, p. 103—104, Pl. УШ,
Ink LITE
Levinsen, Mosdyr, p. 62, Tab. V, figs. 23—25.
Osburn, ор. cit. р. 232, Pl. XXIV, figs. 42, 42а,
42 b.
The two colonies examined belong to the variety spitsbergensis
set up by Norman.
While the zooecia in all the colonies I have
seen from Denmark, Norway, Iceland, Kara Sea and West-Greenland
are provided with three (rarely 4) cylindrical oral spines, the oral
spines in the two colonies are very broad and flattened, and WATERS
who has found three quite similar spines in a colony from Franz
Josef Land designates them as “calcareous processes in place of the
446 С. М. В. LEVINSEN.
spines.” The ooecium in the main-form is very small and cap-shaped
or very low, and presents, a little distally to the proximal margin,
an arch-like rib formed by the union of the two outer oral spines,
the ooecium in the var. spitsbergensis, on the other hand, is much
larger, rather high, provided with a feeble longitudinal keel, and the
corresponding spines are placed on each side between the ooecium
and the aperture. In the only zooecium which I have seen
provided with an ooecium, each of the two spines, the proximal
half of which is very high and flat, is provided with an obliquely
ascending and in breadth gradually diminishing distal half, which
meets that from the other side with its pointed end, and together
with it forms the anterior of the aperture. The geatest difference,
however, between the two ooecia is that the ooecium of the main-
form is represented by an independent chamber (a Kenozooecium)
in connection with the distal pore-chamber of the corresponding zooe-
cium, while that of the var. spitsbergensis is formed by the proximal
zooecium. In Crib. punctata, however, both forms of ooecia may
appear in the same colony.
St. 15, Lat. 76-35’ N. ons: 18267W., 150 т.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Subordo Ascophora.
Fam. Hippothoide.
Hippothoa hyalina L.
Cellepora hyalina Fabricius, Fauna Groenl. p. 435.
— nitida Fabricius, Fauna Groenl. p. 435.
Mollia hyalina Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, рр. 16 and 109, Tab.
XXV, figs. 84—87.
Schizoporella hyalina Hincks, ор. cit. р. 271, Pl. XVIII, figs. 8—10.
Diazeuxia (Cellepora) hyalina Jullien, Mission scientifique du Cap Horn,
VI, Zoologie, 1888, Bryozoaires, р. 29--
33, pl. 4, figs. 1—4.
Schizoporella hyalina Levinsen, “Hauch”s Togter, 1891, Polyzoa, р.
246—306, Tab. III, figs. 10—15.
— Levinsen, Mosdyr, Zoologia Danica, 1894, Hefte
9, p. 66—68, Tab. V, figs. 42—43.
Hippathoa hyalina Waters, ор. cit. p. 70, pl. 8, figs. 16—18.
— — Norman, East-Finmark, Polyzoa, p. 108.
Numerous small colonies on alge.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 т.
St. 66, Stormbugt, 30—40 т.
Bryozoa. 447
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
St. 72 с, Stormbugt, 15—20 m.
St. 95a, The Sound between Renskæret and Maatten, 50—100 m.
Hippothoa expansa Dawson.
Hippothoa expansa Hincks, op. cit. p. 291, pl. 1, fig, 1.
— Waters kop елр. 69; pl..8, fig, 19:
A single colony on a stone.
St. 71 a, off Cape Bismarck, 30 —40 m.
Genus Harmeria Norman.
The zooecia lack a covering membrane, the calcareous matter
is very thin and brittle and there are no spines. They present а
larger or smaller distinctly defined frontal area, provided with
numerous pores. А compound operculum feebly chitinized. Rosette
plates with few pores. No ooecia and no avicularia. The disciform
colony presents two different sizes of zooecia, larger inner and
smaller outer.
When provisionally I refer the characteristical genus Harmeria
to the Hippothoide it is because it agrees with the members of this
family in significant characters, and at the same time does not show
the faintest relationship to any other family, as far as I can see.
In the first place the calcareous matter is, like that found in the
Hippothoide, very thin, glassy and brittle, and presents the same
five both longitudinal and transverse striation. There are no spines
but the hollow rostriform suboral projection, often developed in H.
scutulata, may be compared with similar projections in Hippothoa.
As in the Hippothoide the calcification takes place simultaneously
with the growth, while in other Bryozoa the zooecium as a rule attains
its complete size before the calcification begins. Though the colonies
have been preserved in spirit for five years I cannot doubt that the
lack of a covering membrane over the frontal surface is not due to
the state of conservation, as I have found a distinct covering mem-
brane in the ancestrula as well as in the undeveloped zooecia and,
besides, the pores also present a distinct membrane.
On the other hand Harmeria differs from the other Hippothoidz
in the lack of pore-chambers and of ooecia.
Harmeria scutulata Busk.
Lepralia scutulata Busk, Quarterly Journ. Micr. Sc., Vol. II, р. 255,
Zoophytol., Tab. III, figs. 1—2.
XLIII. 34
448 С. М. В. LEVINSEN.
Discopora scutulata Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, рр. 25 and 165, Tab.
XXVII, figs. 160—161.
Cibrilina — Nordgaard, System. Fortegn., Cheilostomata (Ber-
gens Museums Aarbog, 1894—95) No. 11, p. 20.
Harmeria — Norman, East Finmark, Polyzoa, Annals Nat. Hist.,
7 Seeviole ХМ. 1903, р. 107—108.
(РТ ХХ. figs, 15. 16, 17):
As the species seems to be subject to great variation in different
localities and, besides, needs a more thorough examination, I shall
here give a description of the form taken on the Denmark expedition.
I have seen a large number of young colonies in different stages
of growth, but only in four of them is the ancestrula perfectly sur-
rounded by zooecia, and in a similar number only a small proximal
portion of its circumference is still free. The named colonies have
a largest diameter of c. 3—3,5 mm.
The ovate ancestrula is membraniporidan, and the membranous
frontal area, in the distal portion of which is seen an opercular
valve, takes up the whole frontal area, being only surrounded by a
low calcareous frame without spines. In the closed colonies the an-
cestrula is in connection with five larger and three smaller zooecia,
the latter of which join the proximal end, and in the above men-
tioned, not wholly closed colonies the five larger zooecia are also
present, while one or more of the smaller proximal ones are absent.
The five larger zooecia are still in connection with 3—8 others of
the same kind, and therefore the whole number of the larger zooecia
found in the above 8 colonies are 8—10, but before the three proximal
zooecia have been developed, the larger zooecia are surrounded by
numerous smaller ones.
The very convex zooecia possess a completely calcified basal
wall, which distally to the basal margin of the distal wall presents
an angularly bent mark. It is undoubtedly due to the difference
in thickness between the proximal (elder) and the distal (younger)
zooecium, and therefore it is most distinct in the younger portion
of the colonies. The lateral walls, which are independent, are in
their distal half provided with a rosette-plate with 3—6 pores, and
the curved or feebly angular distall wall, which is more or less
ascending frontally, presents on each side a similar rosette-plate. In
a single case I have seen a single median many-pored rosette-plate.
The aperture is provided with a concave proximal margin and
at each side is seen an indistinct projection which indicates the
boundary between the valvular and the accessorial portion of the
feebly chitinized compound operculum. The aperture of the larger
zooecia is as high as broad, semielliptical-quadrangular and provided
Bryozoa. 449
with a more or less developed suboral peristome, while that of the
smaller ones is half as broad as high, nearly semicircular, and
provided with a more developed peristome, which as a rule also
extends along the lateral margins. In very few zooecia the peristome
is provided with a short oral rostrum. The semi-elliptical, semi-
circular or quadrangularly rounded poriferous area, which in the
larger zooecia at the utmost attain the half length of the whole sub-
oral area, sometimes only a third part of its length, is more devel-
oped in the smaller zooecia, but I have never seen it occupy the
whole frontal area.
The difference in size between the two forms of zooecia is greatest
where they are in connection with each other, and thence as a rule
the smaller zooecia gradually increase in size and especially in breadth
outwards. At the same time the aperture gradually increases in
size and especially in height, and we may find in the margin of the
colony a larger or smaller number of zooecia the aperture of which
is more or less alike to that of the larger ones. As a rule these
zooecia are much shorter, but not rarely broader than the latter, but
sometimes we may find in a colony 1—3 singly placed zooecia of
quite ihe same form and structure as those surrounding the distal
part of the ancestrula, and in some cases I have seen that such a
zooecium plays the part as ancestrula to a marginal sub-colony.
NORDGAARD mentions that in the colonies examined by him the
zooecia in the central portion were glistening and transparent, but
the peripheral ones gray and intransparent. I have seen the same
in a single colony, and the cause hereof is that the central zooecia
have lost the polypides.
St. 66, Stormbugt, 30—40 m.
St. 72 с, Stormbugt, 15-—20 m.
Fam. Escharellide.
Escharella ventricosa Hassall.
Discopora coccinea, forma ventricosa Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp.
26 and 172.
Mucronella ventricosa Hincks, ор. cit. р. 363, Pl. L, figs. 6—8.
— — Osburn, op. cit. p.243, Pl. XXVI, figs. 59, 59a.
The aperture which is surrounded by 4, rarely by 5 or 6 oral
spines is provided with a fairly broad, but very low median tooth,
the margin of which is straight or a little concave. The suboral
peristome is provided with a well-developed, triangular, acuminate
somewhat flattened mucro and the whole of the calcareous surface
34*
450 Ц. М. В. LEVINSEN.
is covered with small, narrow linear projections, which in the frontal
surface are directed towards the mucro and in the ooecium towards
the middle of the proximal margin. In various places of the circum-
ference the frontal surface is provided with 1—3 series of marginal
pores. The ancestrula which together with a number of surrounding
zooecia possesses 6(—5) oral spines has a similar structure like the
other zooecia.
This species has been found on algæ and stones, and especially
on stones it appears as large extensions.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 т.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 т.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Escharella indivisa n. sp.
(BX Xx в 102)
The zooecia which have a more or less regular, hexagonally
rhombic form are very convex, finely granular, and surrounded by
a single, distally sometimes double row of small marginal pores.
The aperture, which is almost twice as broad as high and provided
with a rather low, but distinct oral arch, may be surrounded by
6 spines, but in most zooecia the two median ones are absent, and
this is always the case in the ooeciferous zooecia. The suboral
peristome is provided with a very broad, flattened, triangularly roun-
ded or trapeziform not pointed rostrum, and within this is seen a
large, vertically projecting very broad, but rather low median tooth
with a straight or even a little convex margin, and on each side,
as a rule, with a very small tooth-shaped projection. The large,
semi-globularly convex balloon-shaped ooecia, which from the
proximal margin increase in breadth towards the middle, and here
not rarely are about twice as broad as high, are provided with a
depressed, somewhat everted marginal portion, which is a little pro-
tracted in the form of a small shade. In the other species of this
genus examined by me, each of the three original elongate pore-
chambers is divided by transverse septa into a number of small
uniporous chambers. In this species, on the contrary, only the
distal wall is divided in this way (as a rule only into a small median
and two larger lateral chambers) while the lateral ones are undivided.
The ancestrula is provided with 9 spines, four of which surround
the aperture, while the 5 others surround a somewhat depressed
cryptocyst. The aperture is provided with a concave proximal margin.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
St. 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 m.
Bryozoa. 451
Escharella labiata Boeck !.
(RIX esis, 45.6789).
The zooecia are large, ovate, densely granular, very much convex
and surrounded by (1—3) rows of small marginal pores. The sur-
face is strongly ascending towards the aperture, the proximal por-
tion of which is very much projecting, spout-shaped; a short way
within its free margin is seen a very broad, low median tooth. The
distal margin is armed with 2—3 spines, and there is found a strongly
developed, proximally and basally directed vestibular arch, the free
margin of which is triangularly rounded and on each side provided
with a more or less distinct incurvation. Its length is contained
4—5 times in that of the whole zooecium. The very convex cap-
shaped granular ooecia, which, when the colony is regarded from
the frontal surface, present an almost semi-circular outline, are set
far aback, their longitudinal axis being directed obliquely towards
the basal wall. Each of them is developed from a distal zooecium,
and not as in E. abyssicola from a Kenozooecium. Between the
ooecium and the aperture is found a short obliquely inwards directed
spine on each side. The three original pore-chambers are as in
most species divided into a large number of small chambers.
Two small pieces on the rudiments of a shell.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
Escharella abyssicola Norman.
Mucronella abyssicola Hincks, Op. cit. р. 369, Pl. ХХХУШ, figs: 1, 2.
Mucronella laqueata Hincks, Op. cit. р. 368, Pl. LI, fig. 8.
Escharella abyssicola Norman, East Finmark, Polyzoa, Annals Nat.
HS IS 7 Vol Хр. 1.
— _- Levinsen, Cheilost. Bryozoa p. 315.
(РП ХХ! es 102 11 1213. 1
The zooecia are ovate ог rhombical, more ог less convex, densely
granular, and surrounded by a single row of fairly large punctures.
The aperture is nearly semi-circular and surrounded by a more or
less well developed almost tubular peristome open only between
the two distally placed and nearly approximate spines, with the
outer sides of which it is connate. The peristome, the proximal
portion of which is often provided with a short screen-shaped pro-
jection, is more or less distinctly separated from the adjoining part
of the frontal wall, and may sometimes be almost vertically pro-
1 In LEVINSEN’S manuscript this species was designated as Escharella п. sp., but
О. NORDGAARD identified it with Е. labiata Boeck. (See О. NORDGAARD, Hydr. and
Biol. Invest. Norw. Fiords, p. 170, Pl. IV, figs. 25, 26, 31. Bergen, 1905).
452 G. М. В. LEVINSEN.
jecting. There is a broad low median tooth, the corners of which
are sometimes a little pointed. The well-developed oral arch, the
height of which is contained 10—12 times in that of the whole
zooecium, is more or less sharply divided into a larger median por-
tion, provided with a more or less convex margin, and two much
lower lateral portions. The small fragments described above have
no ooecia, but I have examined colonies from several other localities,
the ooecia of which are developed from kenozooecia. The punctures
in the margin of the ooecia of Е. laqueata mentioned by NoRMAN and
Hıncks belong really to the surrounding kenozooecia. In the de-
scription of Е. abyssicola they are not mentioned.
Two small fragments of old injured colonies on a stone.
St. 15, Lat. 16:35. N. Long. 1826 W., 150 m.
St. 20, Danmarks Havn, 5—20 m.
This species is subject to great variation, and colonies from
different localities show diversities in the form of the ooecia, the
median tooth and the vestibular arch.
Escharoides Jacksonii Waters.
Discopora appensa Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 26 and 175,
Tabs XXViIl iis 177. 18759. р. 23.
Mucronella coccinea Bidenkap, (non Hincks), Zool. Jahrb. Syst. 10
В., 1897, р. 624, Taf. XXV, figs. 5—6.
Smittia Jacksonü Waters, ор. 1 Тр. 87, plata. ists.
Peristomella coccinea Nordgaard, Meeresfauna von Bergen, Bryozoen,
р. 94.
Escharoides Jacksonii Nordgaard, Bryozoa from the 2nd. Fram Ex-
pedition 1898—1902, 1906, p. 27.
A single colony on balanus sp.
St. 70, Danmarks Havn, 20—30 cm.
Schizoporella unicornis Johnston.
Schizoporella unicornis Hincks, op. cit. р. 238, Pl. ХХХУ, figs. 1—5.
(Pl. XXIII, figs. 12, 13). |
А number of small colonies on stones and on algæ. The ro-
strum and an unpaired avicularum are rarely developed, and in
some of the colonies the zooecia are provided with two widely se-
parated oral spines.
St. 68, Stormbugt, 20—40 т.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
St. 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 т.
St. 72 с, Stormbugt, 15—20 m.
Bryozoa. 453
Schizoporella sinuosa Busk.
Escharella linearis, forma secundaria Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp.
14 and 99, Tab. XXV, figs. 74—77.
Schizoporella sinuosa Hincks, ор. cit. р. 266, PI, XLII, figs. 1—-6.
— — Osburn, op: cit. р. 238, Pl. XXV. figs. 51, 51а.
A small colony on Saxicava rugosa and another on a stone.
St. 71a, off Cap Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Schizoporella (Emballotheca) stylifera Levinsen.
Escharella stylifera Levinsen, Bryozoer fra Kara-Havet (Dimphna-
Togtets zool.-bot. Udbytte), p. 321, Tab. XXVII,
figs. 9—111.
и condylata Nordgaard, Bryozoa from the 2nd Fram-Exped.
р. 18, Pl. П, figs. 16—18.
(PI. XXII figs. 3, 45,6, 7).
The zooecia which are rather convex are separated by extremely
fine raised lines; the very tuberculous surface presents a number
of ramified lines converging towards the aperture, the presence of
which must undoubtedly be explained from the mode of calcification.
There are rather few small pores, a number of which are marginal.
The aperture, which is placed at the distal end, is provided with
a fairly broad and deep sinus, the breadth of which is contained twice
in that of the aperture, and with a distinct but low vestibular arch.
The sinus is bordered by two large rounded hinge-teeth. Gradually
there is developed a proximal (suboral) low peristome, provided with
a low, indistinctly defined sinus, which conceals a larger or smaller
portion of the primary sinus. The distinctly chitinized operculum
is provided with a marginal thickening and with two muscular dots.
The distal wall is provided with two, the distal half of each lateral
wall with three rosette-plates with 1—3 pores.
The ooecia, the endoooecium of which is distinctly translucent,
are a little broader than high, nodulous, not very convex and their
cryptocyst is formed by three different pieces (one distal and two
proximal) rising from the three surrounding zooecia and meeting
each other in three sutures. At their point of union there is often
seen a small pore.
The two small colonies from the Kara Sea, on which in my first
paper on Bryozoa I founded E. stylifera, agree in all essentials with
NORDGAARD’S 5. condylata, but as I have overlooked the sutural lines
and regarded the opercular muscles of some zooecia as styliform
processes from the margins of the aperture, it has not been possible
1 Not as indicated p. 17, 8—10.
454 С. М. В. LEVINSEN:
Гог this author to recognize the identity of this species. The sutural
lines of the ooecia are much finer than in the colony from the Dan-
mark Expedition and they are absent in some of the ooecia, which
are surrounded only by a single zooecium. Only a number of
marginal pores are found.
Porinula п. g.!
The zooecia which seem to lack a covering membrane are pro-
vided with a well-developed tubular peristome, in the proximal portion
of which there is found a tubular pore. A distinctly defined oper-
culum. No vestibular arch. A calcified ectoooecium with or without
pores. The ancestrula has a similar structure as the other zooecia.
A few small colonies have been found on stones and balanus.
St. 63, 70, 71a.
The ooecia are without pores and the pores without marginal
processes.
Microporella ciliata Pallas.
Porina ciliata Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 6 and 58, Tab.
XXIV, figs. 13—16.
Microporella ciliata Hincks, op. cit. p. 206, Pl. XXVIII, figs. 1—8.
— — Levinsen, Mosdyr, р. 64, Tab. У, figs. 33—35.
— arctica Norman, Ann. Nat. Hist. Ser. 7, Vol. XII, р. 105.
— — Osburn, ор. cit. р. 233, Pl. XXIV, figs. 44—44 с,
Pl. XXX, fig. 90.
A very small colony on a stone.
Locality uncertain, probably Stormbugt.
Escharina vulgaris (Moll.).
Mollia vulgaris, forma ansata Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 14 and
104, Tab. XXV, figs. 78—80, 82.
Schizoporella vulgaris Hincks, op. cit. р. 244, Pl. XXXVI, fig. 7, Pl.
ХУ. figs. 5,26:
— stormi Nordgaard, Hydr. Biol. Inv. Norw. Fj., р. 166,
PIN igs. 1 2:
= — Nordgaard, Bryozoa sec. Fram Exp., р. 17, Pl.
Petigs 10 & 11.
— bispinosa Nordgaard, ibidem, р. 17, Pl. II, fig. 15.
' (BEERXTIIE nes. 8, 9. 10111)
St. 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 m.
! A species pertaining to this genus has not been found neither in the MS., nor
among the figures, nor in the collection.
Bryozoa. 455
Fam. Smittinidae.
Smittina arctica Norman.
Escharella porifera, forma majuscula Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Appendix
р. 9 & 10, pl. 24, figs. 36—38.
Smittia arctica Norman, Trondhjem Fiord, Polyzoa, Annals Nat. Hist.
6 5. Vol: ХИ 1594 р. 128.
Smittia Lansborovii, forma porifera Hincks, Annals Nat. Hist. 6 5.
Vol. 1. 1888, p: 225, РЕ. XIV. fig. 2:
Smittia majuscula Nordgaard, Hydrograph. and Biological Invest. in
Norwegian Fiords, 1905, р. 170, Pl. IV, figs. 36—38.
Smittia porifera Osburn, op. cit. p. 245, Pl. XXVI, fig. 64.
Smittia arctica Nordgaard, Bryozoa from the 2nd Fram Exp.
1898—1902 1906, p. 29.
(Pl. XXII, figs: 12; 9).
The zooecia have their whole frontal surface provided with nu-
merous pores, among which is found a large number of small, sharply
defined tubercles. The aperture is nearly circular, but provided
with a broad proximal sinus divided into two smaller ones by a
median tooth, more or less developed, mostly slender as a rule de-
creasing in breadth towards the truncated end. In rare cases it
attains a larger breadth and may sometimes be bicuspidate. The
sinus is bordered by two distinctly projecting lateral teeth, the tips
of which are as a rule obtusely rounded. The peristome is faintly
developed, and besides a more or less projecting very tuberculous
distal lip there may be found a small lateral projection which is
most developed in the ooeciferous ooecia. The operculum, which
is faintly chitinized, is provided on each side with a chitinous ridge,
the distal end of which serves as a point of attachment for the oper-
cular muscie, while the proximal end is in connection with the cor-
responding lateral tooth. The convex, mostly saddle-shaped distal
wall is provided on each side near to the lateral wall with 3—4
single-pored rosette-plates, and the distal half of each lateral wall
with 2—3 ovate or elongate rosette-plates with 2—6 pores. A small
number of these may sometimes be replaced by pore-chambers.
The very projecting sub-oral avicularium, which never conceals
the median tooth has a rounded mandible which is a little longer
than broad (fig. 2), and the mandibular area is at least twice as high
as the sub-mandibular one.
The ooecia, which are sometimes as high as broad, very seldom
take up the whole breadth of the distal zooecium. They are very
convex, tuberculous, and provided with a mor eor less well-developed
shade-formed projection, but only in very few zooecia have I seen
456 С. М. В. LEVINSEN.
on both sides ог on one side only a rudimentary triangular ooecial
cover rising from the corresponding neighbouring zooecium. Accord-
ing to Smitt’s fig. 36, there may sometimes be found in this species
an ooecial cover similar to that found in 5. агсйса. A few small colo-
nies on alge.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 m.
St. 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 m.
Smittina minuscula (Smitt) Nordgaard.
Escharella porifera, forma minuscula Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Appendix,
р. 9 & 70, pl. 24, figs. 98—55.
Smittia arctica Norman pp., Trondhjem Fiord, Annals Nat. Hist.
S..6, volo 13. р. 128.
— — Nordgaard p. p., Norges marine Polyzoa, Bergens
Mus. Aarbog 1894—95, n. 2, p. 27, pl. 1, fig. 2.
Smittia Landsborovii, var. Waters Bryozoa Frantz Josef Land (Journ.
Linnæan Soc., Zoologia, Vol. XXVIII, p. 90, pl.
121027:
Smittia arctica Nordgaard, Die Bryozoa 4. westl. Norwegen,
Meeresfauna von Bergen, р. 90, pl. 1, figs. 16—18.
Smittina minuscula Nordgaard, Bryozoa from the 2nd Fram Expedi-
tion 1898—1902, 1906, р. 28, Pl. Ш, figs. 46 and 47.
(Pl. XXI, figs. 15, 16).
The zooecia have the whole surface provided with numerous
fairly large pores, separated from each other by a prominent in-
distinctly nodulous mesh-work. The secondary aperture is nearly
semi-elliptical, and the primary aperture, which has no distinct sinus,
is provided with a low but fairly broad trapeziform median tooth
and two lateral teeth, the rounded ends of which are not much pro-
jecting and sometimes concealed by the peristome. The faintly
chitinized operculum has no longitudinal ridges. The well-devel-
oped peristome is formed in the ooeciferons zooecia by two different
portions, a lower portion which rises from the avicularian chamber
on eaeh side of the transverse bar, and a higher portion rising
from the adjacent margins of the two neighbouring zooecia. The
latter consists of two irregular triangular plates which decrease in
breadth distally and coalesce in the middle line, thus forming a
transverse belt across the proximal portion of the ooecium. The
convex or saddle-shaped distal wall is on each side provided with
a single-pored rosette-plate, and in the distal half of each lateral wall
with 2—3 single-pored pore-chambers.
Bryozoa. 457
The projecting avicularium, which sometimes takes up the whole
breadth of the distal zooecium and as a rule conceals the median
tooth, is provided with a broadly rounded mandible which is a little
broader than long. The mandibular area is not twice as high as
the membranous one.
The ooecia, most of which take up the whole breadth of the
distal zooecium, are tuberculous, and as a rule half as broad again
as high. In most of them there is found a fairly large pore a
little distally to the free margin, but it is often more or less covered
by the above ooecial arch.
A few (5) small colonies from algz and from a balanus.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 67, Danmarks Havn, 20—30 m.
St. 70, Danmarks Havn, 20—30 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Smittina reticulata-punctata (Hincks).
Escharella porifera, forma edentata Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp.
9 and 74, Tab. XXIV, fig. 39.
Lepralia reticulato-punctata Hincks, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, Vol. XIX,
р. 103, PIX figs: 3.74:
Escharella — Levinsen, Dijmphna-Togtets zool.-bot. Ud-
byte, р. 318; (Ply SX Ville fie. 4
Schizoporella — Nordgaard, Hydr. and Biol. Invest., р. 166,
РУ: 695. GE
— harmsworthi Waters, ор. си. р. 65, pl. 9, figs. 10—12.
Numerous small colonies on hydroids and aigæ.
St. 62, Stormbugt, 10—20 m.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 68а, Огезап, 40—60 m.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
St. 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 m.
St. 94, The Sound between Cape Bismarck and Maatten, 20—40 m.
Smittina porifera Smitt.
Escharella porifera, forma typica Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 9
and 70, Tab. XXIV, figs. 30—32.
Lepralia — Hincks, Annals Nat. Hist. ser. 4, Vol. ХХ, р. 102,
Рае
Smittia — Nordgaard, Berg. Mus. Aarbog, 1894, р. 26, PI.
Ihe
458 G. М. В. LEVINSEN.
Lepralia porifera, Waters, op. си. р. 75, pl. 8, figs. 14, 15.
Schizoporella -- Nordgaard, Hydr. and Biol. Invest. р. 167, Pl. У,
fig. 32.
A single small colony on a stone.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30 —40 m.
Smittina Smitti Kirchenpauer.
Escharella Legentilii, forma prototypa Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp.
10 and 81, Tab. XXIV, figs. 47—49.
Lepralia Smitti Kirchenpauer, Die 2te deuts. Nordpol. Vol. II,
p. 420.
Escharella reticulata Levinsen, Dijmphna-Togtets zool.-bot. Udbytte,
р. 319. Fab XXVI, 653 5776.
Schizoporella cincta, var., Hincks, Annals Nat. Hist. ser. 6, Vol. IX,
р. 154. Р1. VIN; 85. 2.
Smittia reticulata Bidenkap, Zool. Jahrb., Syst. Vol. X, p. 622, Taf.
Dh AIS 0%
Schizoporella Harmsworthi Waters, op. cit. р. 65, PL IX, figs. 10—12.
Smittia reticulata, var., Andersson, Zool. Jahrb. Syst. В. 16, р. 544.
A single small colony on a balanus.
St. 66, Stormbugt, 30—40 m.
Smittina Jeffreysii Norman.
Smittina Jeffreysii Norman, East Finmark, р. 120.
— — Bidenkap, Fortegnelse over de arktiske Bryozoer,
р. 25.
A single small colony оп a stone.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Smittina propinqua Smitt.
Eschara verrucosa, f. propinqua Smitt (partim), op. cit. 1867, Bihang,
рр. 22, 146, Tab. XXVI, figs. 126—129.
Lepralia propinqua Hincks, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, Vol. XIX, р. 103,
Pl. X, figs. 5—7.
Smittia — Bidenkap, Zool. Jahrb., Syst., 10 B., р. 624.
Porella — Nordgaard, Hydr. and Biol. Inv., р. 168, Pl. IV,
figs. 18—20 b.
— — Osburn, ор. cit. р. 248, Pl. XXVII, figs. 70, 70а.
A number of small colonies on hydroids.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 т.
St. 68, Огезипа, 40—60 т.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 m.
Bryozoa. 459
Cylindroporella tubulosa Norman.
Anarthropora monodon, f. minuscula Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp.
7, 64, Tab. XXIV, figs. 20—22.
Cylindroporella tubulosa Hincks, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. XX, p. 528.
Porina tubulosa Hincks, Br. Mar. Pol. p. 230, Pl. XXXII, figs. 6—9.
— — Osburn, op. cit. p. 233, Pl. XXIV, figs. 42—43 с.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Discopora scabra (Fabr.)
Millepora reticulata Fabricius, Fauna Groenl., p. 433.
Eschara scabra Fabricius, Nye zool. Bidrag, K. Danske Vid. Selsk.
nat. math. АВ. № D., 1824, р. 29.
Cellepora scabra Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 30 and 181, Tab.
XXVIII, figs. 183--188.
Rhamphostomella scabra Lorenz, op. cit. p. 94.
— costata Borenz, ор. ар. 12, Tat VW Pie. 12.
— — Hincks, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 6, Vol. Ш, р.
426, Pl. XXI, figs. 6—8.
— = Waters) op) cit, р 91 РЕ 155265.
PL 42. ties: i 2:
— — Osburn, op. cit. р. 244, Pl. XXVI, figs. 62—
62 b, Pl: XXXI, fig. 100.
(PL OXXIVE Des. 1,2):
In this species there is found a more or less well-developed
granular ooecial cover, which from the surrounding zooecia (or avi-
cularia) extends in irregular lobes over a portion of the ooecial mar-
gin. In two colonies (from St. 63 and 71a) a number of the zooecia
are provided, besides the oral one, with another and much larger
avicularium, which takes up the rest of the frontal surface of the
zooecium. It is provided with a powerful beak, has a more or less
oblique position, and is distinctly visible from the frontal surface.
Numerous colonies on ascidians, alge, hydroids etc.
St. 62, Stormbugt, 10—20 m.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 68a, Oresund, 40—60 m.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
St. 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 m.
Discopora plicata Smitt.
Cellepora scabra, forma plicata Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, рр. 30
and 184, Tab. XXVIII, figs. 189—96.
460 С. М. В. LEVINSEN.
Rhamphostomella plicata Lorenz, ор. cit. р. 94.
Cellepora — Hincks, Ann. Nat. Hist., 4. ser., Vol. XIX,
P-7106, Pl. XI, figs, 3; 4.
Rhamphostomella plicata Waters op. cit. p. 92, Pl. 11, figs. 28, 29.
— spinigera Lorenz, ор. си. р. 94.
— plicata Nordgaard, Bryozoa 2nd Fram-Exp. p. 30, Pl.
IV, figs. 49—50.
In one of the colonies (St. 71) a median tooth is not developed.
Numerous colonies on algæ, hydroids, ascidians.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 10—20 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
St. 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 т.
St. 95a, The Sound between Renskæret and Maatten, 50—100 m.
Discopora plicata var. spinigera v. Lorenz.
(RES Ox TD
To judge from the colonies examined by me, this form must be
regarded as a variety of D. plicata, from which it differs chiefly in
being provided with 2—4 oral spines and thereby that only a small
number of the zooecia are provided with avicularia, which in the
specimens examined do not differ from those found in D. plicata.
The frontal surface of the zooecia presents a similar fine reticulate
mesh-work as in D. plicata, and the median tooth has a similar
form as in the latter species. у. LORENZ mentions that D. spinigera
is provided with two small lateral teeth, but such are also found
in the zooecia of D. plicata and later they get covered by the peri-
stome as in D. spinigera. The peristome attains a similar development
as in D. plicata. The basal wall is in the spinigera as that of D. plicata.
Two small colonies.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 10—20 m.
Discopora ovata Smitt.
Cellepora ovata Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 31 and 187, Tab.
XXVIII, fig. 197.
Rhamphostomella ovata Osburn, op. cit. р. 245, Pl. XXVI, figs. 63, 63 а.
In opposition to all the other species of this genus, in which
there is only found a number of marginal pores, a larger or smaller
portion of the remaining frontal surface is provided with rather
numerous large pores, which in old zooecia are seated in deep pits
separated from each other by a mesh-work of strong beams. Ап-
other difference is that the ooecia have no pores, but present a more
or less densely nodulous surface, which is not, however, the surface
of the ectoooecium but that of the ooecial cover, which here con-
Bryozoa. 461
ceals the whole frontal surface of the real ooecium. Sometimes it
seems as if three different zooecia take part in the formation of it,
and in such cases its surface consists of three different parts sepa-
rated by sutural lines. In the small colony examined all the zooecia
are provided with ooecia, and in most of them the ooecial cover
together with the lateral margins of the aperture and laminar exten-
sion from the neighbouring zooecia takes a larger or smaller part in
the formation of a peristome by extending more or less far beyond
the proximal margin of the real ooecium. Such a more or less
projecting shade-like extension may be provided with an entire
margin, curved from side to side, or the latter is provided with one
or more larger or smaller sinuations.
A small colony on alge.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 10—20 т.
Discopora radiatula Hincks.
Cellepora plicata Smitt, (partim), op. cit. 1867, Bihang, Tab. XXVIII,
fig. 193.
Lepralia radiatula Hincks, Ann. Nat. Hist. 4. ser. Vol. XIX, p. 104,
Pl. X, figs. 9—14.
Rhamphostomella radiatula Lorenz, op. cit. p. 95, Taf. УП, fig. 9.
— — Nordgaard, Hydr. and Biol. Invest. р. 172,
Pls У, figs 16, 17.
The tooth is high, narrow, and decreases in breadth towards the
lip, which is either roundedly pointed or provided with a short
straight edge. The ooecia have a semi-circular outline, and in a
number of them the marginal portion is concealed by an ooecial cover.
A few small colonies on alge.
St. 66, Stormbugt, 30—40 т.
St. 68a, Øresund, 40—60 m.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 26—30 m.
Discopora bilaminata Hincks.
Cellepora bilaminata Hincks, Ann. Nat. Hist. 4. ser. Vol. XIX, p. 111,
РЕ Г В55. 6, 1.
Rhamphostomella bilaminata Lorenz, ор. cit. р. 95, Taf. УП, fig. 11.
— — Nordgaard, Bryozoa, 2nd. Fram-Exp. р.
Joel Г. tig: 57.
— — Osburn, op. cit. р. 244, Pl. XXVI, figs.
62—61 a.
In the colonies examined there is found a very deep and some-
times extremely narrow sinus between the generally large oral avi-
cularium and the opposite rounded almost ligulate peristomial lobe.
The median tooth, which, is very often completely hidden by the
462 Ц. М. В. LEVINSEN.
avicularium, is of very variable form and breadth. In most cases
it is bicuspidate, but sometimes it is provided with a straight edge, and
in rare cases is very narrow and acuminate. The zooecia, which do
not seem to possess any pores, not even marginal ones, are provided
with greatly projecting marginal ridges from which rises a number
of transverse ribs, some of which are very high; in old zooecia,
therefore, the frontal surface is as a rule divided into a number of
very deep spaces. While some of the ooecia have no pores at all,
the large plurality of them are provided with 1—7 pores, and in a
number of them a larger or smaller marginal portion is hidden by an
ooecial cover, rising from the surrounding zooecia.
A number of small colonies are found on hydroids.
St. 68а, Oresund, 40—60 т.
Discopora Sarsii Smitt.
Escharoides Sarsii Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 24 and 158, Tab.
XXVI, figs. 147—154.
— — MHincks; Ann. Nat. Hist. 6: ser, Уо1. 1, р. 218. PI
XIV ehe,
— — Waters, ор. cit. p. 85, Pl. 11, figs. 21—23.
Posterula — Jullien & Calvet, Bryoz. .... l’Hirondelle, р. 89,
Pl. XI, fig. 4.
Escharopsis lobata Norman, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, Vol. XII, p. 123.
In this species the ectoooecium is provided with 1—4 pores of
various form and size, but it is gradually concealed by an ooecial
cover consisting of three different portions, one of which takes its
origin from the distal zooecium while the two others, which are con-
tinuous with the peristome, arise from the proximal one. The tooth
which is sometimes repeated once or twice is as a rule conical, with
an obtusely pointed end, rarely somewhat compressed with a straight
edge. The distal wall is provided with a rib-like thickening within
its basal edge.
Some fragments are taken.
St. 66, Stormbugt, 30—40 m.
St. 95, The Sound between Renskæret and Maatten, 50—100 m.
Discopora pavonella (Alder).
Discopora pavonella Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 28 and 178, Tab.
XXVIL Во. 191.
Mucronella — Hincks, Br. Маг. Pol. р, 376, Ply ХХХ DSE
8—10.
— — Osburn, ор. cit. р. 243, Pl. XXVI, fig. 60.
Numerous colonies on hydroids and оп balanus sp.
Bryozoa. 463
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 т.
St. 68 a, Øresund, 40—60 т.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
St. 95a, The Sound between Renskæret and Maatten, 50— 100 m.
Porella concinna .Busk.
Porella levis, forma Lepraliæ Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 21 and
136, Tab. XXVI, figs. 109—111, 115—119.
— concinna Hincks, op. cit. р. 223, Pl. XLVI.
— — Lorenz, op: cit. р. 8% Tab- Vi; fig. 7.
— — Озбата ор: ара 247, Pl. OO VIL figs, 067) 67 a,
67 b, 68.
As already pointed out by Hıncks, this species is subject to
great variation, and such a variation is also presented by the nu-
merous colonies incrusting stones, which have been brought home
by the Denmark expedition. I have no doubt but that a close exa-
mination of the various varieties and of their mutual relation would
be of the greatest interest, but as it ought to be based on so large
a material as possible, it will be most convenient to publish the re-
sult of such an examination in the report on the bryozoan material
of the Ingolf-expedition, which shall contain a revision of the Bryozoa
material from Greenland, Iceland and the Faroes contained in our
Zoological Museum.
St. 15, Lat. 76°35' М. Long. 18°26’ W., 150 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
St. 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 m.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 m.
Porella acutirostris Smitt.
Porella acutirostris Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 21 and 132, Tab.
XXVI, figs. 106—108.
— — Hincks, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, Vol. Ш, р. 429, Pl.
ХА Но. 5.
=: — Waters, op cit. р. 83, Pl. X, figs. 1—5.
— — Osburn, op. cit. р. 248, Pl. XXVII, figs. 69, 69.a.
Two small colonies on Algæ.
St. 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 m.
Porella plana Hincks.
Porella Skenei Ell. & Sol., forma plana Hincks, Annals Nat. Hist., ser.
Ge vol ip 2 PL XIV, fig. 8.
XLIII. 30
464 Ц. М. В. LEVINSEN.
Porella concinna, granular var., Hincks, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, Vol.
IX р. 156 pl УШ, figs 6.
Porella plana Waters, ор. cit. р. 79, Pl. XI, figs. 11—13.
I have seen a small fragment of an old two-layered colony.
St. 95a, The Sound between Renskæret and Maatten, 50—100 m.
Porella fragilis n. sp.
Porella elegantula, var. rostrata Hincks, Annals Nat. Hist. ser. 6, Vol.
| 1888. р. 223, (Pl ХУ, 655.5, Ба, 5.6.
(ХЕ Ваз 45,6, ГО, 9).
The zooecia have no pores and no spines, and the calcareous
substance is very thin, brittle, and hyaline; they are very long (about
thrice as long as broad) rhombical, somewhat compressed and pro-
vided with a very convex frontal surface, the two lateral halves of
which form an obtuse angle with each other. The aperture, which
is perfectly concealed by the distal end of the avicularium, when
the colony is regarded from the frontal surface, is placed in the
very distal end of the zooecium, and forms an angle with the longi-
tudinal axis of the zooecium, not much larger than a right angle.
It is about half-elleptical, provided with a rather short, faintly pro-
jecting margin and with an oral keel, the proximal end of which
is developed as a small hinge-tooth. The operculum is membranous
or very faintly chitinized and provided on each side with a fairly
long and very muscular ridge obliquely distally directed. The
vestibulum is fixed to the very margin of the operculum. Each of
the lateral walls is provided with an ovate rosette-plate with 3—5
pores placed in the angle between its distal and proximal portion,
and corresponding to a hole placed in the proximal end of a neigh-
bouring zooecium. In most cases a larger or smaller portion of this
rosette-plate reaches the basal wall, and in that case it may also be
regarded as a pore-chamber. The obliquely ascending distal wall, the
proximal margin of which is not rarely angularly bent, is provided
near to the latter with c. 6—8 pores, divided into various numbers
of uniporous or polyporous rosette-plates. In a number of zooecia
the basal wall is also provided with 1—3 rosette-plates with 1—4
pores or with as many holes. The ooecia which are provided with
a flat shaft-like proximal portion of somewhat different length
speedily increasing in breadth, are very convex, longer than broad
(when the shaft-like portion is included about half as long again
as broad); the distal half of their basal wall may easily be separated
from the adjoining frontal wall of the distal zooecium. The ecto-
ooecium is calcified in its whole extent.
Bryozoa. 465
As a rule a median avicularium is found in every zooecium, and
takes up more than two thirds, not rarely three fourths, of its whole
length. It consists of two portions of different breadth, which are,
howeyer, not sharply separated from each other, namely a broader
distal portion, which, when regarded from the frontal surface, is
elongate ovate, and a more narrow proximal part which has about
the same breadth through the whole of its length. The former, the
terminal face of which represents the avicularian area is obliquely
ascending, and its greatly projecting distal half which almost com-
pletely conceals the aperture, when regarded from the frontal sur-
face, is on each side connected with the zooecium by means of a
triangular calcareous plate, the free margin of which on each side
reaches from a point a little distally to and outside of the hinge-
tooth to a point not far from the avicularian area. The prox-
imal portion, which is of very different breadth, is provided with a
pore placed a little distally to its rounded end, but not rarely it is
in a larger or shorter portion of its length divided into two, each of
which is provided with its own pore.
The colonies are two-layered with compressed branches, some-
times bifurcate.
Of this species some very young colonies and some fragments
of older ones have been found.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 95 а, The Sound between Renskeret and Maatten, 50—100 m.
Porella princeps Norman.
Monoporella spinulifera, var. preclara, Hincks, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 6,
Vol т 152 21 УПЕ tie. 3
Porella princeps Norman, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 7, Vol. XII, p. 114, Pl.
IX, figs. 8—11.
Of this species I have only seen a small young colony with a
diameter of c. 9mm. I have not seen a single avicularium. A
number of the zooecia are provided with a broad but very low rect-
angular median tooth. The ooecia which are not yet covered are
very convex, a little longer than broad and provided with a more
or less distinct median ridge.
On a stone.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Porella proboscidea Hincks.
The small colony examined differs from those described by
Hıncks in the lack of the costæ. The surface is granular and the
ooecium, the ectoooecium of which is perforated by a small fissure,
35*
466 G. М. В. LEVINSEN.
is provided with a granular ooecial cover, formed either by the
distal zooecium only, or also by one or two neighbouring zooecia.
I have only seen a peristome in the ooeciferous zooecia, where it
consists of a triangular-ligulate extension on each side. Only in one
single zooecium have I found a lateral avicularium on each side of
the median one.
On a hydroid.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Fam. Reteporidae.
Retepora Wallichiana Hincks.
Retepora cellulosa, forma notopachys, v. elongata Smitt, op. cit. 1867,
Bihang, рр. 36 and 204, Tab. XXVIII, figs. 226—232.
— elongata Levinsen, Dijmphna Togtets zool.-bot. Udbytte, р.
323, Tab. XXVII, fig. 11.
—- Wallichiana Hincks, Ann. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, Vol. XIX, р. 107,
Pl. XI, figs. 9—13.
A number of fragments.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
Lepraliella поу. gen.
The zooecia are provided with a distinct, not beaded or faintly
so, vestibular arch, and with two well-developed hinge-teeth. A well-
chitinized operculum. Avicularia of different size and position. The
ooecia, the proximal portion of which is not pedicel-shaped or shaft-
like, have no pores and are not provided with an inwards directed
tongue.
In my work on the cheilostomatous bryozoa I have pointed out
that the zooecia in a number of incrusting species in all essential
respects agree with those of the freely-branched Reteporidae, and that,
therefore, these species must be referred to the latter, and the same
holds good also for the two species described by SMITT respectively
as Lepralia hippopus and Cellepora ramulosa, forma contigua. Pro-
visionally I refer both of them to the above genus Lepraliella, but
it is possible that a thorough systematic investigation of the family
Reteporidæ will make it necessary to refer each of them to a distinct
genus.
Lepraliella hippopus Smitt.
Lepralia hippopus Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 20 and 127, Tab.
XXVI, figs. 99—105.
Bryozoa. 467
Lepralia hippopus Hincks, ор. cit. р. 309, Pl. ХХХШ, figs. 8, 9.
(РЕЖ Но. 10, 11, 19, 13. М)
The zooecia which consist of a hard, thick, glistening calcareous
substance and rarely present 1—4 fairly long oral spines are more
or less regularly hexagonally rhombic and separated from each other
by distinct sutures. The moderately convex wavy nodulous surface
is provided with 6—8 marginal pores, and the elongate aperture
which is contained thrice in the length of the zooecium is placed
a little proximally to the distal end. It is twice as long as broad,
and the lateral margins are faintly converging towards the some-
what concave proximal margin. A distinct, but fairly low, rarely
indistinctly beaded vestibular arch and two roundedly triangular
hinge-teeth are found. Also а well-chitinized yellow operculum
provided on each side with a longitudinal ridge is found, which
serves both for the attachment of the opercular muscles and for
connection with the hinge-teeth. Very often a small round projection
is found proximally to the aperture. The pore-chambers, of which
two are found in the distall wall and one in the distal half of each
lateral wall, are small, narrow and provided with a few pores.
In a larger or smaller number of zooecia there is found an ovate
avicularium varying in size, but rarely attaining the size of the aper-
ture. It is in connection with one of the marginal pores and placed
on one side of the aperture near to the margin either in the distal
or the proximal portion of the zooecium.
The ooecia, which are two-layered in their whole extension and
the basal halves of which are immersed in a niche-like cavity, are
about as long as broad, very convex, and surrounded by an ooecial
cover rising partly from the lateral portions of the proximal zooecium
itself, partly from the surrounding zooecia, and the wavy-nodulous
surface of this ooecial cover therefore presents 3—5 sutural lines. In
such zooecia, which are destined to get ooecia, there is seen distally
to the aperture a very small, nearly semi-elliptical opening leading
into a small blind cavity. From the distal, convex margin of this
opening the ectoooecium takes its origin, while the endoooecium rises
from the proximal margin, and thence the ooecium expands round
the distal half of the aperture.
Not a few colonies incrusting stones.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Lepraliella contigua Smitt.
Cellepora ramulosa, forma contigua Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp.
31 and 189, Tab. XXVIII, figs. 198—210.
468 С. М. В. LEVINSEN.
Rhamphostomella contigua Nordgaard, Hydr. and Biol. Шу. р. 172,
Pl. V, figs. 18—20.
Lepralia vitrea Lorenz, Bryoz. v. Jan Mayen, p. 7, Taf. VII, figs. 4—5.
— — Andersson, op. cit. р. 542, Taf. 30, fig. 2.
(ENE 15 23950785910 Ш №5 м
The zooecia, which consist of a very hard, thick glistening cal-
careous substance, are hexagonally rhombical, and in the young
colonies divided by distinct sutures. The very convex and, towards
the aperture, strongly ascending, wavy-nodulous surface is provided
with 3—5 small, widely distant pores, placed some way within the
margin. The aperture, which is seated a little proximally to the
distal end of the zooecium is nearly semicircular, with an almost
straight or faintly concave proximal margin. It is provided with a
well developed, not beaded, vestibular arch, and on each side with
a large obtusely rounded hinge-tooth. Its distal margin presents 2—
5, sometimes very long, spines, the direction of which is nearly ver-
tical to the surface of the colony. As a rule there is found a well-
developed, asymmetrical peristome surrounding that portion of the
aperture not taken up by the spines, and consisting in most cases of
a higher median outwards obliquely ascending portion and two lower
lateral portions, more or less sharply separated from the median
one. The distal wall is provided with one (or two) and the distal
half of each lateral wall with a single pore-chamber with 1—4 pores.
When there is no avicularium the peristome may be symmetrical,
and is often more or less mucronate, but when an avicularium is
present the median portion is connected with the distal end of the
former, and by a triangular sinus separated from the adjacent lateral
portion of the peristome. The operculum is well chitinized and pro-
vided on each side with a well-developed marginal ridge.
In most zooecia there is found a very long, immersed sac-shaped
avicularium, provided with a triangular mandible. It stretches from
about the middle of the one lateral margin and opens at the opposite
corner of the aperture. It is absent in a fairly large number of the
zooecia surrounding the ancestrula; the latter has a large nearly
half-elliptical aperture without peristome, surrounded by 10 spines
and provided with a concave proximal margin.
The ooecia, which are developed in niche-like hollows, are elon-
gate, hood-shaped, somewhat compressed, and (in dry state) provided
with a very large, semi-elliptical or roundedly triangular obliquely
outwards slanting opening. They are more or less perfectly con-
cealed by the deposition of calcareous layers. There is found a spine
on each side immediately proximal to the lateral margin of the
opening, while the rest of the spines are included within the ooecium.
Bryozoa. 469
Ooecia with a similar form and size of aperture have hitherto
only been found within the family Reteporidae; namely in the three
species Retepora nove zelandiæ, В. soladeria and В. imperati, of which
I have only been able to examine the latter. The ooecia are here
very much compressed, avicularia-like, and therefore provided with
a very long narrow aperture, which in old ooecia becomes closed
by means of a calcareous lamina.
A few colonies on stones,
St. 68, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 m.
Fam. Myriozoidae.
Myriozoum crustaceum Smitt.
Myriozoum crustaceum Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 18 and 114,
Tab. XXV, figs. 88—91.
Schizoporella — Lorenz, Bryoz. Jan Mayen, р. 87, Taf. УП, fig. 2.
— — . Waiters, ор. cit. р. 64, pl. 8, figs. 11—18.
Myriozoum crustaceum Robertson, Uniy. Cal. Publ. vol. 4, Nr. 5, р.
295. Pls 215 05194.
Leieschara plana Norman, Ann. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, Vol. XII, p. 110.
Numerous small colonies on hydroids and alge.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20--40 m.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 m.
St. 71, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
St. 72, Danmarks Havn, 10—15 m.
Fam. Celleporidae.
Cellepora incrassata Smitt.
Cellepora incrassata Smitt, op. cit. 1867, Bihang, pp. 33 and 198, Tab.
ХХУШ, figs. 212—216.
— cervicornis Lorenz, Bryoz. Jan Mayen, р. 95, Taf. УП, fig. 12.
= incrassata Waters, ор. си. р. 93, Pl. XII, figs. 11—14.
== — Nordgaard, Hydr. and Biol. Inv. р. 172, Pl. Ш,
65: 25)
A few colonies.
St. 66, Stormbugt, 30—40 m.
St. 95a, The Sound between Renskæret and Maatten, 50—100 m.
Cellepora avicularis Hincks.
Cellepora ramulosa, forma avicularis Smitt, op. cit. 1861, Bihang, pp.
32 and 194, figs. 202—210.
470 С. М. В. LEVINSEN.
Cellepora avicularis Hincks, ор. си. р. 406, Pl. LIV, figs. 4—6.
— — Nordgaard, Berg. Mus. Aarb. 1904, р. 98, Taf. II,
figs. 37, 39.
Numerous small round colonies on hydroids.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 62. Stormbugt, 10—20 m.
St. 68a, Oresund, 40—60 m.
St. 95a, The Sound between Renskæret and Maatten, 50—100 m.
Ordo Cyclostomata.
Fam. Tubuliporid«.
Idmonea atlantica Forbes.
Tubulipora atlantica, forma erecta Smitt, op. cit. 1865, pp. 398 and 434,
Tab. Ш, figs. 6—7, Tab. IV, figs. 4—13.
= — Hincks, ор. cit. р. 451, Pl. LXV, figs. 1—4.
— == Osburn; ор: cit: р. 217.171 XIX 110529793
А single young colony with two zooecia in each transverse row.
St. 68a, Øresund, 40—60 m,
Tubulipora flabellaris Fabricius.
Tubipora flabellaris Fabricius, Fauna Groenl. p. 429.
Tubulipora — Smitt, op. cit. 1866, pp. 401 and 455, Tab. IX, figs.
6—8.
— — Levinsen, Мозауг, р. 76, Tab. VI, figs. 1—8.
— — Harmer, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc. п. $. vol. 41, р.
99, Pl. VIII, fig. 4.
— — Osburn opel ap 273. РЁ ХХ Не ТЕ
— — Robertson, Univ. of California Publ. in Zoology,
Volo У MDN D TRE ER XI 655. 25.26
А single small colony.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 m.
Tubulipora sp.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Diastopora obelia Johnst.
Diastopora hyalina, « obelia Smitt, op. cit. 1866, pp. 396 and 421.
— obelia Hincks, op. cit. р. 462, Pl. LXVI, figs. 10, 10а.
3 small colonies, two on algæ and one on a stone.
Bryozoa. 471
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30 — 40 m.
Diastopora diastoporides Norman.
Diastopora diastoporides Smitt, ор. cit. 1871, р. 1116, Tab. XX, fig. 4.
Stomatopora —- Hincks, ор. cit. р. 434, Pl. LXIII, figs. 3, 4.
— — Osburn ‘ор. cit р. 218, Pl ХУШ fie: 12 12а.
Not a few colonies on stones.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 т.
St. 71, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
Fam. Lichenoporide.
Lichenopora regularis d’Orbigny.
Lichenopora regularis Hincks, op. cit. 1866, р. 479, Pl. LXVIII, fig. 11.
Of this interesting species which has been described from cre-
taceous specimens and has been found in recent state only at the
Shetland Islands, five colonies have been found. The largest of them
has a larger diameter of 13 mm.
St. 63 (4 specimens), Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 72, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
Lichenopora verrucaria Fabricius.
Маагерога verrucaria Fabricius, Fauna Groenl. р. 430.
Discoporella — Smitt, op. cit. 1866, рр. 405 and 479, Tab. X,
figs. 6-8, Tab. XI, figs. 1—6.
Lichenopora verrucaria Hincks, op. eit. p. 478, Pl. LXIV, figs. 4, 5.
— — Waters, ор. cit. Vol. ХХХ, р. 176.
— — Osburn, ор. си. р. 219, Pl. XVIII, figs. 13—13 b.
17 colonies' on algæ.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 66, Stormbugt, 30—40 m.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 m.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
St. 72, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
Lichenopora crassiuscula Smitt.
Discoporella crassiuscula Smitt, op. cit. 1866, pp. 406 and 482, Tab. XI,
figs. 7—9.
Lichenopora — Nordgaard, Bryozoa 24. Fram Exp. р. 37.
= — Waters, ор. cit. Vol. XXIX, р. 177.
472 С. М. В. LEVINSEN. Bryozoa.
Two small colonies, one on a stone and another on Saxicava.
St. 71a, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 m.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
Ordo Ctenostomata.
Alcyonidium Mytili Dal.?
Alcyonidium Mytili Smitt, op. cit. 1866, рр. 496 and 507, Tab. XII,
figs. 1—2.
— — Hincks, ор. си. р. 498, Pl. LXX, figs. 2, 3.
I am not quite sure that the small colonies examined really
belong to A. Mytili. They agree, indeed, with the colonies of this
species in the form and position of the single zooecia, the distal end
of which is only very little projecting, but in opposition to what is
the case in other colonies of A. Mytili the zooecia are very opaque.
A number of colonies on alge.
St. 66, Stormbugt, 30—40 m.
St. 69, Stormbugt, 20—30 m.
St. 72, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
Alcyonidium mamillatum Alder.
Alcyonidium hirsutum, forma membranacea Smitt, op. cit. 1866, pp-
497 and 508, Tab. XII, figs. 3—8.
— mamillatum Hincks, ор. cit. р. 495, Pl. LXIX, figs. 7, 8.
A colony on balanus sp.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
Fam. Vesiculartide.
Bowerbankia caudata Hincks.
A few colonies on hydroids.
St. 63, Stormbugt, 20—40 m.
St. 71а, off Cape Bismarck, 30—40 т.
St. 72, Stormbugt, 20—40 т.
PLATE XIX.
Kiez:
ВН ХВ
Scrupocellaria scabra у. BEN.
Zooecia from the basal surface with pore-chambers.
Figs. 2, 3 Scrupocellaria ternata Етллз & Sou. var. gracilis SMITT.
Ее. 2:
BB!
| Ra FE 27:
Fig. 4.
— 5.
— 6.
— 1.
Figs. 8—10
Fig. 8
er rg:
— 10.
Figs. 11—14.
Figs 11,
— 12.
— 13.
— 14.
Figs. 15—17.
Bısals:
— 16.
— 17.
Zooecium in basal view with vibraculum and radical
fibre.
Isolated vibraculum.
Membranipora /Callopora) craticula ALDER.
Zooecia with large independent avicularia.
Zooecia and avicularia with pore-chambers.
Zooecia with ooecia and small avicularia placed on
the top.
Ooecium and zooecium with a small lateral avicularium.
Membranipora (Callopora) spatulifera SMITT.
Zooecia with spatulate spines seated proximally to the
aperture.
Ovate-pyriform zooecium with membraneous frontal
area, lateral avicularia and an avicularium placed on
the top of the ooecium.
Hexagonal zooecia with lateral avicularia
spines.
Membranipora (Callopora) Whiteavesi NORMAN.
Pear-shaped ovate zooecium with ovate frontal area
and granular cryptocyst surrounded by a great number
of spines.
Zooecium with spines of different thickness.
Zooecium with a calcareous plate in the aperture. This
plate is perforated in the middle by an ovate opening
and is undoubtedly the cryptocyst of a regenerated
zooecium.
Zooecium with a densely granular ooecium.
Harmeria scutulata Busk.
Colony with an ovate membraniporidan ancestrula sur-
rounded by 5 larger and 3 smaller zooecia.
Ancestrula with the 5 surrounding larger zooecia.
Smaller zooecia with a nearly semicircular aperture.
and oral
PI. XIX.
Medd. om Grönland XLIL. №16. (GMA. Levinsen)
TN. Möller se.
N
Levinsen del.
А |
ANR PATIO
Ат чи #
LENS u
— Er
pre _ В i
| | | nu
м sn
C2 i 0 le
|
и rs
5
| Len vi
i
ra
JER tal NE
ОВ д
i At ao
a р
i a
В
и i — u В u
5 SE <i SN
— а
ah и 2 i L
ne. We
TAN |? Wow
3 FO
в ОВ
<= i
— D) DIET
N |
——g ink! Lan
и i i > >.
rey ОГ i
‚a ee
M al Na & =
В EN VTT ме
u Bas) hr hie at = À
er N i
7 EA № 7
RI ва 4 =
AT
Ku}
CNT u SY
i x 2 wk KA
è u iy Pe Te i
vr =
NS LE
on u _
> BL a, AR i
ay eee 5
CT АХ . BE |
PLATE ХХ.
155. 1, 2:
Fig.
Figs. 3—
Fig.
PLATE ХХ.
Escharella indivisa n. sp.
ID
9
Figs. 10—14.
ig. 10.
IR
12
13.
14.
Zooecia and ooecia.
Zooecia in basal view showing the arrangement of
the pore-chambers.
Escharella labiata BoEck.
Zooecia showing the marginal pores and the spout-
shaped projection towards the aperture.
Basal view of the zooecia showing the arrangement
of the pore-chambers.
Upper part of a zooecium in basal view.
Lateral view of a zooecium.
Lateral view of an ooecium and the upper part of а
zooecium.
Aperture with oral spines.
Base of an ooecium.
Esharella abyssicola NORMAN.
Upper part of a zooecium with oral spines and mar-
ginal pores.
Upper part of a zooecium showing the screen-shaped
peristomal projection.
Aperture with surrounding spines and median tooth.
Basal wall of a zooecium.
Basal wall of an ooecium in connection with the
upper part of the zooecium.
Medd. om trönland XL. №6. (@.M.R.Levinsen)
— JT
—
о 00 00000
Levinsen del. TN. Möller se.
Ном mn
ae et h
| TA AN В
LE i у Kol LUS
von
И OF А "AR ve |
y
TA
Ay, Bun NÅS RY MAE
0
vit i
eM a
W au ie ox
i Kj
ut
STELL
een
nn 0 ET
DR А В i a KR un ni
САУ ie i 7 В
№
HOR iw, hat
ne wR
| UN É { 4
i EM i |
MM inh RR
PEATE XXE
РА Е LOSE
Fig. 1. Discopora plicata var. spinigera у. LORENZ.
Zooecia and ooecia.
| eel
id jo}
—
оное,
—
—_
Lepraliella contigua SMITT.
Zooecia with avicularia.
Zooecia with oral spines.
Spines.
Ooeciferous zooecia.
Zooecia provided with pores.
Zooecia with apertures of different forms.
Avicularium.
Triangular mandible.
Aperture with oral teeth.
Zooecium with a mucronate peristome.
Ancestrula.
Operculum showing the marginal ridges.
Smittina minuscula (SMITT) NORDGAARD.
Zooecia and ooecia.
Peristome of a zooecium with the avicularian cham-
ber, median tooth and the two peristomal triangular
plates.
Medd. om Grénland IL. Dr. (@ MR Levinsen)
Levinsen : TN. Möller se.
PEAK XXIE
Figs. 1— 3.
Fig 1:
— 2.
= 3.
Figs. 4— 9.
— 4.
— 6,
— 6.
— 7.
— 8.
— 9.
Figs. 10—14.
Fig. 10.
— 11.
— 12.
— 13.
PLATE ХХИ,
Smittina arctica NORMAN.
Zooecia and ooecia.
Distal part of a zooecium showing avicularium, me-
dian tooth and operculum.
Operculum with the chitinous ridges.
Porella fragilis n. sp.
Zooecia and ooecia, frontal surface.
Avicularia.
Zooecia in lateral view.
Aperture.
Basal wall of the zooecia.
Operculum.
Lepraliella hippopus Suirr.
Zooecia.
Upper part of a zooecium showing the aperture and
two triangular hinge teeth.
Zooecia with ovate avicularia.
Zooecia and ooecia with sutural lines.
— 14a, b, с. Opercuia.
Pl. XXI .
Medd. om Grönland XLII. №16. (@.М.В. Levinsen)
РУ. Moller se.
L,
PLATE ХХПЕ
Figs.
Figs.
11522
Fig. 1
er
. d— 7.
Fig. 3.
— 4.
— 5.
— 6.
— 7.
8—11.
Fig. 8.
— 9.
— 10.
— 11.
12—13
Fig. 12
— 13.
PEATE ХХ.
Discopora scabra FABR.
Zooecia and ooecia.
Operculum.
Schizoporella /Emballotheca) stylifera LEVINSEN.
Zooecia and ooecia.
Zooecia in basal view.
Aperture of a zooecium with the two large rounded
hinge-teeth.
Operculum.
Zooecia showing marginal pores.
Escharina vulgaris MOLL.
Ancestrula with surrounding zooecia.
Zooecia with ooecium and avicularium.
Zooecia with marginal and frontal pores and two
oral spines.
Upper part of a zooecium showing the proximal sinus
and four oral spines.
Schizoporella unicornis JOHNSTON.
Upper part of a zooecium with proximal sinus of the
aperture and two oral spines.
Operculum with chitineous ridges.
PL XXL.
Medd. om Grönland XL Nr l6 (& MR. Levinsen)
TN Moller sc.
Levinsen del.
PLATE XXIV.
iss. 12.
Figs 1.
— 2.
Figs. 3— 6.
Fig. 3.
— 4.
— 5.
— 6.
Figs. 17—12.
Figs. 7, 8.
Fig. 9.
— 10.
Pigs: ti
Figs. 13, 14.
— 14.
PEATE ХХГУ
Escharella macrodonta п. sp.
Zooecia with an ooecium.
Upper part of a zooecium in basal view.
Escharella stenostoma SMITT.
Discopora stenostoma Е. A. SMıTT, Kritisk forteckn.
öfver Skandinaviens Hafsbryozoer. Ofvers. Kgl. Vet.
Akad. Förh. 1871, nr. 9, р. 1130, tab. 21, figs. 29, 30.
Zooecia.
Aperture with surrounding spines.
Operculum.
Zooecium in basal view.
Micropora n. sp.
Zooecia.
Zooecia in basal view.
Operculum.
Upper part of a zooecium.
Porella bella Busk.
For synonyms see Norman, A month on the Trond-
hjem Fjord. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 6, “vol, 15
p. 125.
Zooecia and ooecia with sutural lines.
Aperture with surrounding oral denticles.
Medd. om Gronland XLII. Nr16. (GMB. Levinsen) PUANIV.
Levinsen del. à TN Môller se.
FUR EAN
ro 7 утв ИО At LAN HM Bu
NN у | nur
ANUS TR 4 iy Ar, |
ANA и zu 5 er VR м
i NORS Net i PT: Let, Im
~ O° в N р
— LA и En [PER
uo
у i
Ut HAr О 2
cu oe "u "km
№ hø A iy DN
Ei. ZAR
ner г
a р
в и pure
ye ON LA А?
ii ia A A Å Serge
‘A NAR MA D à TRE ЖЖ u
LAD MIN ея wd cas RUM 1 FR Lie a, om | .
LEE eu ee
MM i Al: ат um: К ий ran ый u
ren | 0 EH | ou vun A Fan ve NA) D о.
ХУП.
REPORT ON THE PORIFERA
COLLECTED BY THE DANMARK EXPEDITION
AT NORTH-EAST GREENLAND
BY
H. У. BRØNDSTED
XLIII. 36
he sponges treated in this paper were collected by the Danmark
Expedition at North-East Greenland in 1906—08.
The material is astonishing small, only 12 species and also few
specimens; whether this circumstance is due to the fact that the
dredgings were nearly all undertaken in comparatively shallow water,
or to other facts, it is impossible to state.
The material is for the greater part badly preserved, in not too
strong alcohol; hence the condition only allowed a study on skeletal
arrangement and on spicules: a purely systematic study.
The methods employed have been the usual: dry cutting for
study on skeletal arrangements; isolating of spicules by means of
Eau de Javelle, which proved far better than Kaliumhydroxyd.
Sponges were obtained at the following stations: 63, 64, 68а,
120 95с 96. 93: 102 Ь.
The material is much too small to yield matter for a discussion
on any biological topic, its value in itself is mainly to contribute
to our knowledge on arctic sponge-stock; but in connection with
the more considerable materials of other arctic expeditions (as that
of the Danish Ingolf-Expedition) it will also possess biological (mainly
zoogeographical) interest.
As to the paper itself the following is to be said: 12 species are
mentioned: Calcareous: Leucosolenia coriacea Mont., Grantia arctica
H., Leuconia ananas Mont., Hexactinellides: Rhabdocalyptus arcticus
nov. spec., Asconema setubalense Sav. Kent., Monaxonides: Halichondria
tenuispiculata nov. spec., Reniera cinerea Grant, Reniera laxa Ldbck.,
Mycale thaumatochela Ldbck., Lissodendoryx indistincta Frstdt., Lisso-
dendoryx complicata Arm. Hans., Higginsia pyriformis nov. spec. As
will be seen, 3 of these are new species; the remaining 9 species are
so well known, described and figured that further report is super-
fluous.
The figures are all drawn by myself, Pl. XXV by means of Abbes
drawing-apparatus from Zeiss. The microscope employed was a Stativ
from Zeiss with acromatic systems, oculars of Huyghens.
I shall here express my gratitude to the late Inspector G. M. R.
LEVINSEN of the Zoological Museum of Copenhagen, and to Inspector
W. LUNDBECK, also of the Zoological Museum, for several valuable
hints concerning the preparing of this paper.
36*
476 У. H. BRØNDSTED.
PORIFERA
Class I. Calcarea.
Order I. Homocoela.
Fam. Asconidae.
Genus Leucosolenia Bow.
Leucosolenia eoriacea Mont.
1818. Spongia coriacea Montagu [21], p. 116.
1842. Grantia — Johnston [13], р. 183, Pl. XXI, fig. 9.
1866. Leucosolenia coriacea Bowerbank [3b], p. 34.
1872. Ascetta — Haeckel, [11], П, р. 2% Dat. 3) Tate:
1887. — — Fristedt, [8], р. 405, Pl. 22, fig. 1—2.
3 specimens; color dark brown; greatest length ca. 18 mm.,
thickness 1—2 mm.
Station 63. Stormbugt, hard bottom, 20—40 m.
Geographical distribution: Cosmopolitan.
Depth: 0—1000 m.
Order II. Heterocoela.
Fam. Syconidae.
Genus Grantia Flem.
Grantia arctica H.
1872. Sycandra arctica Haeckel [11], p. 353, Taf. 55, fig. 1a-v; Taf.
60, fig. 15.
1883. Sycon — Polejactts (22), D 40; PI Ш, 55.5.
1898. Grantia — Breitfuss [4], р. 302.
1898. — — — [5 р. 21.
3 specimens; greatest length 20 mm., breadth 10 mm.; one of the
specimens (from Station 95c) with comparatively slender rhabdes,
but then a few more in each bundle.
Station 68a. Off Cape Bismarck. 40—60 m.
— 72b. Danmarks Havn. 10—20 m.
= 95; The sound between Renskæret and Maatten.
50—100 m.
Geographical distribution: Arctic circumpolar.
Depth: 20—2000 m.
Report оп the Porifera collected by the Danmark Expedition. 477
Fam. Leuconiidae.
Leuconia Grant.
Leuconia ananas Mont.
1818. Spongia ananas Montagu [21], p. 97, Pl. 16, figs. 2—3.
1872. Leuconia — ' Haeckel [11], р. 200, Taf. 32, fig. 5a—f, Taf.
40, figs. 1—8.
1898. — — breitiuss [4] р. 223.
1898. — — [5], p. 31.
One specimen, oval, length 10 mm., breadth 4 mm., color whitish
yellow.
Station 63. Stormbugt, hard bottom, 20——40 m.
Geographical distribution: Greenland, Spitzbergen, Mur-
man-coast, White-Sea, off Norway, Shetland Islands, English coasts,
Normandy.
Depth: 10—130 m.
Class II. Hexactinellida.
Subciass I. Lyssacina. |
Order I. Hexasterophora.
Fam. Rossellidae.
Genus Rhabdocalyptus Л].
Rhabdocalyptus arcticus nov. spec.
РЕ eas, BIEXRRVT fies) 127:
The present form is perhaps not at all a Rhabdocalyptus, but
for the present I refer the sponge to this genus, because its structure
and the greater part of the spiculation agree with those of Rhabdoca-
lyptus. The fact that makes me doubtful as to the right genus-deter-
mination is, that discohexacts are missing entirely, so far as I have
observed. The referring of the form to the genus Bathydorus is con-
tradicted by the presence of the big prostalia pleuralia.
The sponge (Pl. XXV) is cylindrical, somewhat compressed and
constricted towards the summit and the base; 3 specimens form a
little colony, the one, however, nipped off. The oscular opening
has a diameter of са. 30 mm. in the biggest specimen, in the smaller
са. 20mm. The length of the biggest specimen is ca. 110 mm., by
40 mm., of the smaller 80 by 25mm. The wall varies in thickness
478 Н. У. BRØNDSTED.
from 1—ca. 8 mm., the consistency is like that of loose felt; color grey;
the surface (both dermal and gastral) hispid. The characteristic
pentactine prostalia pleuralia project 4—5 mm. from the dermal sur-
face of the sponge, the cross naturally placed distally, outside the
spongebody; these pentacts, whose rays are imbedded in mud, are
only found in a few places, especially where the 3 individuals to-
gether form a corner; in other places they are rubbed off (on the
figure, Pl. XXV, more are drawn than really observed). The summits
of the sponge-individuals are provided with a damaged fringe of
prostalia marginalia. The canal system and skeletal arrangement
are as in the Rosellidae in general, and Rhabdocalyptus especially.
Spiculation. 1°. Oxydiacts, length about 10 mm., form the main
Skeleton, in fibres principally parallel with the sponge-surface; 2°.
Pentacts (Pl. XXVI, fig. 4), ca. 6 mm., very strongly hispid (a pro-
nounced Rhabdocalyptus criterion); these form the prostalia pleuralia,
but are also imbedded in the sponge-corpus itself, the tangential
rays immediately beneath the dermal membrane; 3°. Oxypentacts,
(Pl. XXVI, fig. 3), hispid, sustaining the dermal membrane, the distal
radial ray rudimentary (criterion for Rosellidae). 3a°. Oxypentacts,
smooth, the radial ray 3—5 times the tangential ones, in the dermal
membrane (?) very rarely found; I regard these spicules as strange
elements to the sponge itself. 4°. Oxyhexasters, hispid, (Pl. XXVI,
fig. 2) form the gastral skeleton (Pl. XXVI, fig. 1), and are also distri-
buted in the parenchyma. 5. Oxydiacts (Pl. XXVI, figs. 5—5 с) hispid,
the ends rather blunt, a swelling near the middle, a swelling which
often assumes the form of 4 knots or even 4 short rays; distributed
in the parenchyma. 6°. Diacts (Pl. XXVI, fig. 6—6b) styliform,
hispid, length 1—2 mm., somewhat bent near the blunt end, where the
axial cross is to be found. 7°. Oxyhexacts (Pl. XXVI, figs. 7—7 a)
hispid, ca. 0,120 mm.; one or more rays often divided in two (fig. 7 a),
always bent in the end; occur everywhere in the sponge.
Station 104b. Lat. 76°06’ N. Long. 13°26’ W., gravelled clay
bottom.
Depth: 250—200 m.
Fam. Asconematidae.
Subfam. Asconematinae.
Genus Asconema Saville Kent.
Asconema setubalense Sav. Kent.
1870. Asconema setubalense Saville Kent [14], p. 241.
1887. — — Schulze [26], р. 116, Pl. XXI.
Report on the Porifera collected by the Danmark Expedition. 479
The specimens in hand fully agree with the descriptions given
of A. s. in the litterature. Whether the fragments have formed one
or more specimens, it is impossible to state. The biggest fragment
has an extension of ca. 150 mm.
Station 104b. Lat. 76°06’ N. Long. 13°26’ W., gravelled clay
bottom.
Depth: 250—200 m.
Geographical distribution: Atlantic to Arctic ocean.
Class Ш. Demospongiae.
Subclass I. Monaxonida.
Order Halichondrina.
Fam. Homorrhaphidae.
Subfam. Renierinæ.
Genus Halichondria Flem.
Halichondria tenuispiculata nov. spec.
One specimen, somewhat damaged, 25mm. in length, breadth
10 mm.; consistency tolerably firm; color yellowish brown; surface
finely hispid; ostiae ca. 0,1—0,2 mm. in diameter. In the skeleton
one can just distinguish vague beginnings towards polyspicular fibres,
some of these tending towards the surface of the sponge, and ending
with spicules projecting slightly beyond the surface, making this
hispid; dermal membrane very delicate, transparent.
The characteristic of the species is, however, the spicules: These
are oxea (Pl. XXVI, fig. 8a—d), slightly bent in the middle, rather
abruptly pointed, with nearly parallel edges; the length rather constant,
about 0,180 by 0,008 mm.: smaller than in any Halichondria species,
so far as I know; many developmental forms of spicules are found.
Station 63. Stormbugt, hard bottom.
Depth: 20—40 т.
Genus Reniera Nardo.
Reniera cinerea Grant.
1827. Spongia cinerea Grant [9], p. 204.
1842. Halichondria cinerea Johnson [13], p. 110, Pl. IV, fig. 4.
1866. Isodictya — Bowerbank [3b], р. 241, Pl. XLVIII, figs.
1—5.
480 H. V. BRONDSTED.
1870. Reniera cinerea O. Schmidt [25], p. 77.
1902, — — Lundbeck [17], р. 43, Pl. XI, fig. 10.
Some insignificant, damaged specimens, color brownish, on De-
lesseria sanguinea.
Station 72 c. Stormbugt. 15—20 m.
Geographical distribution: Greenland, Jan Mayen, Mossel
Bay, Gullmaren, English coasts, The Philippines, British Columbia.
Depth: 20—200 m.
Reniera laxa Ldbck.
1902. Reniera laxa Lundbeck [17], р. 46, Pl. II, fig. 6, Pl. XI, flg. 13.
2 specimens agree with the description given by LUNDBECK, only
the average length of oxea is slightly smaller than in the specimens
from the Ingolf Expedition (as the original specimen is found
in the Zoological Museum in Copenhagen I have had it for exami-
nation). Specimens in hand 5—8 mm., on Delesseria.
Station 72 c. Stormbugt. 15—20 m.
Geographical distribution: Davis Strait to Iceland.
Depth: 100—200 m.
Fam. Desmacidonidae.
Subfam. Mycalinae.
Group 1. Mycaleae.
Genus Mycale Gray.
Myeale thaumatochela Ldbck.
1897. Esperella intermedia Vanhöffen [29], р. 248.
1905. Mycale thaumatochela Lundbeck [18], р. 39, Pl. X, figs. 2 a—g.
19097 7 — — — [20], р. 437.
3 specimens, incrusting on Balanus-shells, at largest 1 mm. thick,
ca. 10mm. in length; agrees with Lundbecks specimens, only the
styli may diminish to 0,300 mm.
Station 63. Stormbngt. 20—40 т.
— 94. The sound at Cape Bismarck, 20—40 m.
Geographical distribution: Greenland.
Depth: 20—60 m.
Group 2. Myxilleae.
Genus Lissodendoryx Tops.
Lissodendoryx indistineta Frstdt.
1887. Hastatus indistincta Fristedt [8], р. 444, Pl. 25, figs. 18—19.
1905. Lissodendoryx indistincta Lundbeck [18], p. 162, Pl. V, fig. 10,
PIEXVI fig. Зав.
Report on the Porifera collected by the Danmark Expedition. 481
1909. Lissodendoryx indistincta Lundbeck [20], p. 440.
Several damaged specimens, one of them completely filled with
sand. Fully agree with the description given by Гомовеск. Color
yellowish to light-grey.
Station 63. Stormbugt, hard bottom, depth 20—40 m.
Geographical distribution: Greenland, Spitzbergen.
Depth: 10—200 т.
Lissodendoryx complicata Arm. Hans.
1885. Reniera complicata Armauer Hansen [12], р. 7, PI. 1, fig. 8,
Pl Vil ties:
1885: Муха grisea Armauer Hansen [12], р. 12; РЁ I, fig: 3, Pl.
УТ: fig: 9:
1887. Clathria corallorhizoides Fristedt [8], р. 460, Pl. 25, figs. 78—77,
PI 298 (1023
1905. Lissodendoryx complicata Lundbeck [18], p. 167, Pl. V, fig. 11,
Pl. XVI, figs. 4a—9.
1909. = — — [20], р. 440.
Of this beautiful sponge we have 2 specimens; greatest extension
са. 80mm. Spiculation as in Lundbecks description. On gravel.
Color white-yellowish.
Station 96. Off Maroussia. 160—180 т.
Geographical distribution: Greenland, Arctic Sea.
Depth: 300—1400 m.
Fam. Axinellidae.
Genus Higginsia Higgins.
Higginsia pyriformis nov. spec.
Sponge small, pear-shaped, with a long slender stalk; the whole
length barely 10 mm., the corpus itself 3mm. by 2mm.; diameter of
stalk са. 0,3 mm. Osculum at the top of the sponge, diameter ca.
0,4 mm.; a delicate transparent dermal membrane covers the body;
color yellowish-brownish, stalk, however, white and clear on account
of the small amount of organic matter found in it. The skeleton
composed of spiculo-fibres ascending from the base, forming the stalk,
ending at the summit, and forming a little spiculo-fringe surrounding
the osculum.
Spiculation: Of the known Higginsia species H. pyriformis
mostly resembles Н. Thielei Topsent as to the spiculation. But in H.
482
Н. У. BRONDSTED.
pyriformis only two sorts of spicules are found: 1°, Megascleres tylostyles
(PI. XXVI, figs. 9—9b) of a very elegant form; slightly curved, the greatest
thickness is about the middle, then gradually tapering to both ends;
very finely and quite near the end rather abruptly pointed; 0,60—
0,43 mm. by 0,014—0,010 mm. 2°, Microscleres oxea, (Pl. XXVI. fig. 10),
follow the tylostyles, spined, slightly bent, with a constant swelling
near the middle, form much varying; 0,020—0,055 by 0,002—0,003 mm.
Station 99. Lat. 77° М. Long. 171/2° W. 300 m.
List of litterature.
ARNESEN, Емих: Spongier fra den norske Kyst. I. Calcarea. (Bestimmungstafel
in deutscher Sprache). Bergens Museums Aarbog for 1900. Bergen 1901.
—: Spongien von der norwegischen Kuste. II. Monaxonida: Halichondrina.
Berg. Mus. Aarb, for 1903. Bergen 1904.
BOWERBANK, J. S.: Monogr. Brit. Spongiadae. I, London 1864.
— Il, — 1866.
= = — Ш, — 1814.
— — — IV, (Norman ed.) London 1882.
Breitruss, L. L.: Die arktische Kalkschwammfauna. Arch. Natg. 64. Jahrg.
В9: 1 1898-
— : Kalkschwammfauna des Weissen Meeres und der Eismeerküsten des euro-
paischen Russlands. Мет. de ГАсаа. Imp. de Sc. de St. Péterb.’s VIII ser.
Vol VI. 1898.
BRØNDSTED, H. V.: Porifera in Conspectus Faunae Groenlandicae. Medd. om
Grønland XXIII. Kbh. 1914.
FLEMING, J.: A History of British Animals. Edingb. 1828.
FRISTEDT, F.: Sponges from the Atlantic and Arctic Oceans and the Behring
Sea. Vega-Exp. vetensk. Iaktt. IV, 1887.
Grant, G.: Observations and experiments on the structure and functions of
the Sponge. Edingb. New Phil. Journ. Vol. II, 1827.
Gray, J. E.: Note on the Arrangement of Sponges, with the description of
some New Genera. Proc. Zool. Soc., Ld. 1867.
HAECKEL, E.: Die Kalkschwamme I—III. 1872.
HANSEN, ARMAUER: Spongiadae. Den norske Nordhavs Exp. 1876—78. Kristiania
1885. (Also English text).
JoHnsTon, I.: History of British Sponges and Lithophytes. Edingb. 1842.
KENT, SAVILLE: In Monthly Micr. Journ. Nov. 1870.
LAMBE, L. M.: Sponges from the Western Coast of North America. Proc. and
Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada. XII. 1895.
—: Sponges from the Atlantic Coast of Canada, ibid. Second Ser. Vol. II,
Sect. 4, 1896.
LUNDBECK, W.: РогИега. Homorrhaphidae and Heterorrhaphidae. The Danish
Ingolf-Exp. Vol. VI, Part 1. Copenhagen 1902.
—: Porifera. Desmacidonidae. Pars. ibid. 1905.
—: — = ibid. 1910.
Report on the Porifera collected by the Danmark Expedition. 483
LUNDBECK, W.: The Porifera of East-Greenland. Medd. om Grønland. Vol. XXIX.
København 1909.
Моктадсо, G.: Essay on Sponges. Mem. Vern. Soc. II, 1, 1818.
POLEJAEFF: Calcarea in Rep. Chall. Zool. Vol. VIII. 1883.
RIDLEY and Оехру: Monaxonida in Rep. Chall. Zool. Vol. XX, 1887.
SCHMIDT, O.: Die Spongien des Adriatischen Meeres. Cum Suppl. Lpz. 1862—66.
—: Grundzüge einer Spongienfauna des Atl. Geb. 1870.
ScHULZE: Hexactinellida. Chall. Rep. Zool. XXI.
TopsEnT, E.: Porifera in Résultats des Campagn. sc. du Prince de Monaco. Fasc.
II, 1892. Е
—: Spongiaires des Асогез. Rés. Camp. Sc. Monaco, Fase. ХХУ, 1904.
VANHÖFFEN. C.: Die Fauna und Flora Grönlands. Grönl.-Exp. der Gesellsch. für
Erdkunde zu Berlin 1891—93. 1897.
20.—-5.—1916.
PEATE XXV
РГАТЕ ХХУ.
‘п. Rhabdocalyptus arcticus nov. sp. pag. 477.
MEDD. ом GRONL. XLIII. Nr. 17. [BRØNDSTED].
PL. XXV.
=
Brendsted del.
Pacht & Crone phototyp.
PLATE XXVI.
PLATE XXVI.
Figs. 1—7. Rhabdocalyptus arcticus nov. sp., p. 477.
Fig. 1. Gastral membrane with hexacts. x 90.
— 2. Oxyhexacts. x 90.
— 3. Oxypentacts from dermal membrane. >< 225.
— 4. Tangential ray of prostalia pleuralia. >< 50.
Figs. 5—5c. Oxydiacts. fig. 5 х 130; figs. 5a—c x 345.
— 6—6b. Diac® fig. 6 > 50; figs. 6a—b >< 345.
— (fi, leew, 2405
Fig. 8. Halichondria tenuispiculata nov. spec. pag. 479.
Figs. 8a—d. Oxea, grown up and developmental forms. >< 345.
Figs. 9—10. Higginsia pyriformis nov. spec. pag. 481.
Figs. 9—9b. Tylostyles. fig. 9 x 130; fig. 9a—b. x 405.
Fig. 10. Minute oxea. >< 900.
Pr. ХХУГ
MEDD. ом GRONL. XLIII. Nr. 17. (BRØNDSTED).
Pacht & Crone phototyp.
Brendsted del.
ХУ.
THE ALCYONARIA OF EAST-GREENLAND
BY
HECTOR Е. ESJUNGERSEN
XLIII. 37
N little, next to nothing, has been published hitherto regarding
the occurrence of Alcyonarians at the eastern and north-eastern
coasts of Greenland. In 1874 MoegBıus mentioned Briareum grandiflo-
rum Sars as taken by the second German North-Polar-Expedition 1869
— 70 (Die zweite Deutsche Nordpolarfahrt etc. Vol. II, р. 260); this
statement, however, turns out to be wrong, the form in question being
an Eunephthya (see below under Е. glomerata). In 1904 I made known
three different localities where Umbellula encrinus (L.) had been capt-
ured (Pennatulida Ingolf-Exped. р. 86—87). Nothing more is to be
found in the literature. The occurrence, however, at Eastern Green-
land of one or more of the widely distributed arctic species of the
genus Eunephthya might at least seem extremely probable; and in
fact specimens representing four species of this genus were several
years ago handed over to the Zoological Museum of Copenhagen
from Capt. RypEeR’s Expedition with the “Hekla” in 1891—92 and
the Carlsbergfond-Expedition with the “Antarctic” in 1900. Be-
sides, a single specimen of a Virgularia has been taken on the latter
expedition, a fact unknown to me, when I worked out my report of
the northern Pennatulida quoted above.
As the somewhat scanty material of the Danmark Expedition
only contains four out of the six species of Alcyonarians already
brought back by the previous expeditions mentioned, and as no
account of this material has ever appeared, I take the opportunity
now to enumerate in the following lines all the species hitherto
found at Eastern Greenland, and the localities where they have been
caught.
Alcyonacea.
Fam. Nephthyide Verrill.
Eunephthya rubiformis (Ehrenberg).
Lobularia rubiformis Ehrenberg: Corallenthiere des Rothen Meeres.
1834, p. 282.
Alcyonium rubiforme Dana: Zoophytes. Un. St. Explor. Exped.
1846, p. 625.
= — Verrill: Rev. Polyps East Coast Un. St. Mem.
Boston Soc. N. Hist. Vol. I, 1864, p. 4.
488
HEcToR Е. Е. JUNGERSEN.
Alcyonium rubiforme Verrill: Synops. Pol. and Cor. North Pacif. Expl.
Paraspongodes rubra
. Alcyonium rubiforme
Exp. 1853—56. Proc. Essex Inst. Vol. IV, 1865,
р. 190.
Verrill: Polyps and Echinod. New England.
Proc. Bost. Soc. N. H., Vol. X, 1864—66, p. 355.
Verrill: Notes on Radiata No. 6. Review Cor.
and Polyps W. Coast Am. Trans. Conn. Acad.,
Vol. I, 1868, р. 459:
v. Marenzeller: Poriferen etc. Die internat. Po-
larforschung 1882—83. Die oesterr. Polarst. Jan.
Mayen, Vol. III, 1886, Zool., р. 15.
Jungersen: Karahavets Alcyonider. Dijmphna
Togtets zool. botan. Udbytte 1887, р. 379, Pl.
XXXII, Figs. 14—22.
May.: Alcyon. у. Ostspitzbergen. Zool. Jahrb.
Syst. Abt, Vol. ХГ 1898, р. 393, Bigs) Зам
(Ehrb.) — Paraspongodes rubra -- P. globosa +
?P. uveformis May.: Die arkt. etc. Alc. fauna.
Fauna arctica, Vol. I, 1900 p. 386, 400, 395.
Eunephthya rubiformis Kükenthal: Aleyon. Zool. Ergebn.... „Olga”.
Wiss. Meeresuntersuch. N. F. Vol. VIII. Abt.
Helgoland, Hft. 1, 1906, p. 21.
-- ?E. uveformis Kükenthal: Aleyon. Wiss Erg.
Deutsch. Tiefsee-Exp. 1898—99 (“Valdivia”),
Vol XTi 1906p 72:
Kükenthal: Versuch e. Revis. 4. Aleyon. Fam.
Nephthyidæ, 3. Zool. Jahrb. Abt. System., Vol.
XXIV, 1907, p. 331, 335.
Kükenthal: Zur Kenntn. 4. Alcyon. d. Sibir.
Eismeeres. Мет. Acad. Imp. Sc. St. Peters-
bourg, (8) Vol. XVIII, No. 15, 1909, p. 2.
Broch: Alcvon. 4. Kolafjordes. Trav. Soc. Imp.
Natur. St. Pétersbourg, Vol. XLI, 4, 1911, p. 5.
Broch: Coelentérés du Fond. Duc d’Orleans
Campzarck Че 1907, 1912, р. 19.
Broch: Arkt. Alcyon. Tromso Mus. Tromsø
Mus. Aarshft. XXIV, 1913, p. 179.
Mr. Frirz JOHANSEN, Zoologist to the Danmark Expedition, has
taken with an algæ-dredge, in the Hydroid-region, among stones and
shells of Balanus, 8 specimens; two of these are large, the largest
measuring more than 50 mm. in height, ca. 35 mm. across the broadest
part, with about 40 contracted, rounded branches, and a short, broad
stem; the smaller ones are from 7 to 12mm. high. The colour of
The Alcyonaria of East-Greenland. 489
the living colony is stated by Mr. JoHANSEN to be “wine-red, the
stem brownish.”. Now the colour, as usual with this species when
preserved in spirit, is uniform red or pink (the colour in this species
is due to red spicules, which keep their colour like those of f. inst.
Corallium, Gorgonia pinnata, Pennatula phosphorea etc., while all
other arctic species of Eunephthya, possessing colourless spicules, either
completely lose their colour in alcohol or show a uniform yellowish
or greyish or brownish hue, more or less intense).
Locality: 5. of Cape Bismarck: St. 95 and 95a, the sound be-
tween “Renskar” (76°41' №) and “Maatten” (76°42' N), 25—50 fthms.;
19/7 1908.
The late S. JENSEN, Zoologist to the Carlsber gfond-Expedition,
has taken this species at the following places, farther south in East-
Greenland: Hurry Inlet (70°50' N), 50 fthms., clay with stones; 14/s
1900 (2 small colonies on shells of Arca glacialis); Henry Land
(69°34 N), 20 fathoms, stones and alge; %/7 1900 (2 specimens, the
one fairly large); Tasiusak (65°37' М), 25—30 fthms.; */5 1899 (a single
large colony, ca.50 mm. high).
Е. rubiformis is widely distributed in arctic regions; it seems
to be circumpolar, but hitherto it is not known from the greater
part of Arctic N. America nor from the N. Asiatic region east of the
New Siberian Islands, where — as far as I know — no thorough
investigations have been carried on, or from which at least nothing
has been published. It is mainly littoral or occuring in shallower
parts of the open sea, ranging from 15 to 180 fathoms, and is often
found where the bottom temperature is below zero. It has not
been found at the coasts of Iceland or in Danmark Strait, nor in
Baffin Bay and Davis Strait or at the coasts of Western Greenland.
At the eastern coasts of N. America it passes the arctic regions,
having been found at New Foundland and off Maine (Eastport).
Actually it is known from the following regions outside Eastern
Greenland: Jan Mayen, Spitsbergen, Barents Sea, Novaya Zemlya, Kara
Sea, off the northern coast of Siberia including the New Siberian
Islands; Bering Strait and Arctic Ocean north of Bering Str.; eastern
part of the Murman-Sea, Kola-Fjord and Porsanger Fjord (but in no
other fjord of Norway); further, on the American side, at the northern
coasts of Jones Sound (north of 76° N. L.), at New Foundland and
Maine.
Eunephthya fruticosa (M. Sars, emend. Jungs.).
Alcyonium sp. Naturhist. Tillæg til Rink’s Grønland Vol. II, 1857,
p. 105, No. 6.
— fruticosum Mich. Sars: Bem. over norske Coelenterater.
Forh. Vid. Selsk. Christiania 1860, p. 140.
490 Hector Е. Е. JUNGERSEN.
Alcyonium sp. Lütken: Manual of the N. Hist. etc. Ed. В. Jones, 1875,
ХХ. р. 186, №. 11:
— fruticosum Koren and Danielssen: Nogle nye norske Сое-
lenterater. Fauna littor. Norvegiæ, Vol. 111, 1877.
р. 81, Pl. Ш, Figs. 8—11.
Gersemia florida + ?G. loricata у. Marenzeller: Coelent., Echinod. etc.
österr.-ung. Nordp.-Exp. Denkschr. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
Vol. ХХХУ, 1878, р. 375, 377, Pl. Ш, Figs: 2—5.
9 — — Carter in list р. 259 of D’Urban: Zoology of the
Barents Sea. Ann. Mag. N. H. (5), Vol. VI, 1880, p. 253.
? — longiflora Verrill: Res. expl. St. “Albatross” etc. U.S. Comm.
Fish and Fisheries. Rep. 1883 (1885), p. 513, 533,
Pl. 1, igs 13; and: Rep. Ав 0202... “Blake!
and “Fish Hawk”. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol.
XI, 1883, р. 44,-Pl. Ш Fig. 6.
— danielssenii у. Marenzeller: Porif., Anthoz. etc. Die intern.
Polarf. 1882--83. Die österr. Polar. Jan Mayen.
Vol. III, 1886, p. 16.
Voeringia fruticosa + V. arborea Jungersen: Kara Havets Alcyonider.
Dijmphna Togt. zool.-bot. Udbytte, 1887, р. 375, 378,
PI. XXXII, Figs. 1—13, Pl. ХХХШ, Figs. 1—12.
— mirabilis + У. fruticosa + У. abyssicola + У. polaris + У.
рудтеа + У. dryopsis + У. Jan Mayeni + У. cla-
vata + У. capitata — Barathrobius digitatus + В.
palmatus + Krystallofanes polaris + Fulla Schiertzit
+ Nannodendron elegans + Nidalia arctica + Or-
ganidus Nordenskiöldii + Sarakka crassa + ?Sym-
podium abyssorum Danielssen: N. Nordhavs Exped.
Alcyonida, 1887, р. 1—35, 69—81, 104—137, 141;
Pl. I, II, Figs. 1—41, Pl. УП, Figs. 45—47, VIII,
IX, X, XV, Figs. 14—70, XVI—XXI, XXII, Figs.
67—63, XXIII.
Paraspongodes fruticosa + P. glacialis + P. clavata + Р. capitata May:
Alcyon. Ost-Spitzbergen. Zool. Jahrb. Syst.
Abt., Vol. XI, 1898, р. 388—97, Pl. XXIII,
Figs. 1—2, 4.
= — + mirabilis + P. caduca + P. abyssicola +
Р. clavata + Р. capitata + P. griegi + Sym-
podium abyssorum + Organidus Nordenskiöldi
+ Nidalia arctica + Krystallofanes polaris +
Sarakka crassa May.: Die arkt. ete. Alcyon.
Fauna arctica, Vol. I, 1900, p. 388, 394, 395,
396, 398, 384, 385, 386, 387.
The Alcyonaria of East-Greenland. 491
Paraspongodes clavata Studer: Res. Camp. scient. Pr. de Monaco. Al-
cyonaires ... de l’Hirondelle, Vol. XX, 1901,
p. 31.
Eunephthya — + Е. fruticosa + Е. mirabilis + Nidalia arc-
tica (+ Krystallofanes + Sarakka) Kükenthal:
Alcyonacea. Wiss. Erg. D. Tiefsee-Exp. 1898—
99 (“Valdivia”), Vol. XIII, 1906, р. 73, 74, 37 (26).
— — + E. fruticosa + Е. mirabilis + Gersemia агс-
Нса + G. crassa + ?G. loricata Kükenthal:
Vers. e. Revis. d. Alcyon. 3, Il, Fam. Neph-
thyidæ. Zool. Jahrb. Abt. Syst. Vol. XXIV,
1907, p. 336, 339, 345, 386.
— fruticosa Broch: Duc d’Orléans. Croisiére océanogr....
Belgica 1905 (1907), p. 532.
— clavata +E. fruticosa Kukenthal: Alcyon. Zool. Erg...
«Olga” 1898. Wiss. Meeresunt. etc. N. F. Vol.
VIII. Abt. Helgoland, НН. 1, 1906 (1908), р.
29. 25. Bly Г SES
— fruticosa + Е. mirabilis + Е. clavata + ? Gersemia lori-
cata Kükenthal: Zur Kenntn. der Alc. 4. Sibir.
Eism. Mém. Ac. Imp. Sc. St. Petersb. (8), Vol.
ХУШ, No. 15, 1909, р. 5, 6.
=== clavata -— Е. fruticosa + Е. mirabilis Broch: Coelenter.
du Fond. Duc d’Orleans Camp. arct. 1907.
1919 D 219721:
= — + E. fruticosa Broch: Alcyon. Kolafjordes. Trav.
Soc. Imp. Nat. St. Petersb. Vol. XLI, 1911
(19122) to, LU):
== — + Gersemia loricata Broch: Alc. Trondhjemsf].
K. Norske Vid. S. Skr. 1911, No. 7 (1912), p.
36, 44.
He fruticosa + G. loricata —- G. abyssorum Broch: Arkt. Alc.
Tromso Mus. Tromso Mus. Aarshefter, Vol.
XXXIV, 1913; p. 180, 181.
The reasons why I have united into one species of Eunephthya
the many “genera” and “species” established by previous authors
and named in the above list of synonyms, will be set forth in my
account of the Alcyonarians etc. of the Ingolf-Expedition, now in
preparation. Here I only wish to state that I quite agree with KU-
KENTHAL as to the great reductions already made by him after careful
examination of a vast material, including most of the original spec-
imens which served previous authors for investigation and determi-
nation; having myself, however, examined not only most of the same
492 Hector Е. Е. JUNGERSEN.
original specimens but, besides, a still larger — in fact an extremely
large — material from the greater part of the distributional area of
the northern representatives of the genus Eunephthya, I feel convinced
that a further reduction is needed, as no tangible differences are to
be found which might really separate and characterize several forms
still maintained by KÜkEnTHAL. For all these forms which in-
sensibly pass into each other by every structural degree I have
kept the oldest specific name, given by MICHAEL Sars in 1860.
Most of the specimens in hand from Eastern Greenland are
rather small and contracted, showing the shape of “forma clavata”,
while some are more or less “Gersemia’-like; only two large spec-
imens, with most of the polyps fully protruded, belong to the “forma
fruticosa”.
The Danmark Expedition has provided this species from the
same locality as the preceding: St. 95, the sound between “ВепзКаег”
and “Маа еп”, 25 fthms.; 1%/7 1908 (three small specimens, more
or less “Gersemia”-like).
Ryper’s Expedition: Entrance to Scoresby Sound (probably
at Cape Hooker: 70°28’ N., 23° W.), 10—65 fathoms, */s 1891 (three
small colonies, taken with swabbers; “forma clavata”, polyps mostly
expanded).
Carlsbergfond Expedition ($. JENSEN): Hurry Inlet (70°50'
N.), 50 fthms., !!/s 1900 (three loose colonies, of which two large,
measuring in height 55 and 65mm, of the “forma fruticosa”; 15
mostly small — some simply single polyps — of “forma clavata”,
fixed on shells of Arca glacialis).
This species probably is circumpolar but by no means only arctic,
its distribution comprising also the boreal part of the Atlantic, per-
haps reaching as far south as the Azores (STuDER, “l’Hirondelle”
1887), and on the American side to off Delaware Bay (if the identity
with Gersemia longiflora Verrill proves to be correct). From the
greater part of the arctic North-American seas it is not known hitherto,
nor from the Siberian Polar Sea, east of the estuary of the Lena.
Otherwise it is known from the coasts and fjords of Western Green-
land — from Jakobshavn to Bredefjord —; from Baffin Bay and
Davis Strait; from the northern coast and fjords of Jones Sound;
from Danmark Strait; round Iceland, Jan Mayen, Spitsbergen, Beeren
Eiland, Franz Joseph Land, Barents-Sea, Murman Sea, Kara-Sea and
along the Siberian coast to the mouth of the Lena; further in the
Kola-fjord, the Norwegian fjords from Varanger- to Stavanger-fjord
and in the North Atlantic between Norway, the Færoes and Iceland
as well as farther north in the open sea of the arctic regions. Thus
it is by no means littoral, its bathymetrical distribution ranging
The Alcyonaria of East-Greenland.
493
from ca. 10 to 1300 fthms.; and it occurs in the deep and cold polar
basin as well as in bottom temperatures above zero.
Eunephthya glomerata (Ltk. М. S.) Verrill.
Nephthya sp. aff. №. florida (Rathke): Nath. Tillæg Rink’s Grid. Vol.
№ 1657, ip. 105: Nort.
Eunephthya glomerata Verrill:
Briareum grandiflorum
Ammothea arctica
Litkeni
Alcyonium Liitkeni
Ammothea glomerata
Gersemia candida
Ammothea arctica
Eunephthya Litkeni
АттоШеа Liitkeni
Nephthya polaris +
Paraspongodes polaris
lütkeni
Critic. Rem. on Halcyonid Polyps.
Am. Journ. Sc., Vol. XLVII, 1869, p. 284; and:
Proce Essex Inst. УЕ 1869. р. 97.
Moebius: Die zweite deutsche Nordpolarfahrt
etc. Vol. II, 1874, р. 260: |
Lütken: Manual of the М. Н. etc. Greenl. Ed.
R. Jones, 1875, p. 186, No. 10 (only name).
Norman: Biol. Valorous Cruise, 1875. Pr. R.
Soc. Ld., Vol. XXV, 1876, p. 208:
v. Marenzeller: Coel. etc. K. K. oesterr.-ung.
Nordp.-Exp. Denkschr. Ak. Wiss. Wien. Vol.
RRRV, 1518, р. 572. PIZIN Biel:
Verrill: Notice rec. add. to mar. Invertebr. etc.
PEAU 5. Nat Muss, Vol Ш. 1879, р. 200:
Carter, р. 269 and 259 in: D’Urban, Zoology
of the Barents Sea. Ann. Mag. N. H. (5), Vol.
VI, 1880, р. 253.
Koren and Danielssen: Nye Alcyonider etc. Ber-
gens Museum 1883, p. 9, Pl. V, Figs. 1—15.
Lütken in Wandel: En Fremst, af vort Kjendsk.
til Grønlands Østkyst etc. Medd. om Grønland,
Мо УГ 1883, р. 29.
Verrill: Rep. Anthoz. ... “Blake” etc. Bull. Mus.
Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll., Vol. XI, 1883, p.
Asa ei op EE STE
у. Marenzeller: Porif. etc. Die intern.. Polarf.
1882—83. Die oesterr. Pol. St. Jan Mayen. Vol.
Ш. #386, р. 16:
N. flavescens + №. rosea + Drifa islandica + D.
hyalina + Gersemiopsis arctica Danielssen: N.
Nordhavs-Exp., Vol. V, Alcyon. 1887, р. 92, 83,
87, 65, 59, 99; Pl. VI, УП, XI—XV.
May: Alcyon. v. Ost-Spitzbergen. Zool. Jb. Abt.
Syst. Vol. XI, 1898, р. 397.
+ P. polaris May: Beitr. 2. System. etc. Jen.
Zeitschr. Nat. Vol. XXXIII, 1899, p, 148, 154.
494 Нестов Е. Е. JUNGERSEN.
Paraspongodes lütkeni + P. sarsi May: Die arkt. etc. Alc. faun.
Fauna arctica, Vol. I, 1900, p. 398, 399.
Eunephthya glomerata + Е. hylina Kükenthal: Alcyonacea. Wiss.
Erg. d. deutsch. Tiefsee-Exp. (“Valdivia”), Vol.
XIII, 1906, р. 78, 79.
— — + Е. hyalina Kükenthal (Versuch e. Revis. 4.
Alcyon. Fam. d. Nephthyid. 3. Zool. Jb. Abt.
System. etc. Vol. XXIV, 1907, p. 351, 358.
—- — Kükenthal: Alcyon. 4. “Olga”-Exp. Wiss. Meeres-
unt. etc. N. F. Vol. VIII. Abt. Helgoland. Hf. 1.
1906, p. 26.
— — Thomson: Note on E. gl. from the Færoe
Channel. Proc. R. Phys. Soc. Edinb., Vol.
XVII, 1910, р. 95.
-- — Broch: Die А! суопасееп 4. Kolafjordes. Trav.
Soc. Imp. Nat. de St. Pétersbourg, Vol. XLI,
1911 (4), р. 12.
— — Broch: Coelentérés du Fond. Duc d’Orleans
Gamp-aret2de21907 219 P 7p 221:
Like the preceding two species E. glomerata has been taken by
the Danmark Expedition on St. 95, the sound between “Renskxr”
and “Maatten”, 25—50 fthms., '” 1908 (6 specimens, the largest ca.
40 mm. high, 25 mm. where broadest, the smaller colonies 11—15 mm.
high); further on St. 15 (76°35' N, 18°26’ W, off “Sonja Harbour”,
i. e. off the southern end of Little Koldewey), 150 M., stones and
pebbles (Delesseria-region), !*/s 1906. The journal of Mr. JOHANSEN
adds: “among ice-flakes”, and that a square dredge was used for
half an hour (2 small colonies, са. 4—5 mm. high, on a stone). The
colony in the living state is said to be: “polyps pink, stem brown”;
in spirit these colours have faded completely away.
The Carlsbergfond Expedition: Tasiusak (65°37’ N), 26—
30 fthms., 2/5 1899 (4 specimens of medium size, 20—25 mm. high);
Henry Land (69°34 N), 20 fthms., among stones and alge, 71/7
1900 (3 large colonies, 40—50 mm. high); Cape Tobin (northern
side of entrance to Scoresby Sound, 70°23’ N, са. 22° W), 57 fthms.,
clay with stones (beam-trawl), *"/s 1900 (2 specimens 37 mm. high);
Hurry Inlet (70°50’ N), 50 fthms., 1113 1900 (a single colony 30 mm.
high). Once more the species has been taken at Tasiusak (65°35
N) by Mr. KRUUSE, 30—50 fthms., 2?/з 1902.
To the above localities has to be added: Shannon Island
(ca. 75°25’ N.), a few specimens on Hornera lichenoides Lin., the largest
one са. 18 mm. high, provided by the second German N. Polar Ex-
pedition 1869—70. As already mentioned Moesivs in his report on
the Mollusca, Echinoderms and Coelenterata of this expedition (1. с.
The Alcyonaria of East-Greenland. 495
p. 260) notes this find as “Briareum grandiflorum Sars”. The occur-
rence, however, in decidedly arctic surroundings, at the high lati-
tude of 75°, of an Alcyonarian otherwise only known from the warm
area of the Atlantic must seem at least very improbable; and already
LUTKEN evidently suspected the determination to be wrong, since he
in the “Manual etc.” under his “Ammothea arctica М. $.” — al-
though with a query — quotes “Briareum grandiflorum Moebius” as
a synonym. To settle the question I asked Professor BRANDT in Kiel
for permission to examine the original specimens of Moesius, and
he kindly sent them to me. In spite of their extremely bad preser-
vation they were easily and without the least doubt recognized as
Eunephthya glomerata.
Like the preceding species E. glomerata is widely distributed,
probably circumpolar, arctic as well as boreal. It is, however, not
known off the Siberian coast east of the Kara Sea nor in the greater
part of the N. American arctic seas. It has been found at the northern
coast of Jones Sound, in Smith Sound!, in Baffin Bay and Davis
Strait, and at the western coasts of Greenland from Jakobshavn
to Bredefjord; along the east coast of N. America from N. Scotia
to Delaware Bay (38°16' L. N.); in Danmark Strait, round Iceland,
Jan Mayen, Spitsbergen, Beeren Eiland; in the Barents Sea, the
Kola-Fjord, round Novaya Zemlya; further in the North Atlantic and
in some of the Norwegian Fjords between Nordfjord and Varanger-
fjord. It occurs in bottom temperatures below as well as above
zero, and ranges from littoral regions to great depths in the open
sea — from c. 10 to at least 800 fathoms (1497 fthms, Verrill).
Eunephthya florida (Rathke).
Gorgonia florida Rathke: Zoologia Danica. Vol. ТУ, 1806, p. 20, Pl. 137.
Nephthya Rathkiana Ehrenberg: Die Corallenthiere des Rothen
Meeres, 1834, p. 61.
— — (Gorgonia florida ВФК.) Storm: Bidr. Kundsk.
Throndhjemsfj. Fauna. Kgl. N. Vid. Selsk. Skr.
1878, [1879] p. 23.
Alcyonium multiflorum Verrill: Notice rec. add. Mar. Invertebrata etc.
Proc. UNS Nat. Mus.) Vol. Ш, 1879. р. 200.
Duva rosea + D. pellucida + D. ршсга + D. florida Koren and
Danielssen: Nye Alcyon. etc. Bergens Mus., 1883,
р: 1—7, Pl. I-.
— arborescens + D. aurantiaca + D. frigida + D. glacialis + D.
spitsbergensis — D. violacea + D. flava + D. cinerea
Danielssen: Alcyon. Norske Nordh.-Exp. 1887, p.
87—59; PI. II—V, VI, Figs. 1—29.
1 Teste CARTER |. с. р. 70.
496 Нестов Е. Е. JUNGERSEN.
Paraspongodes rosea + Р. pellucida + P. pulcra + Р. arborescens +
P. aurantiaca + P. frigida + P. glacialis + P.
spitsbergensis + P. violacea — P. flava + P. cine-
rea + P. florida + P.caduca May: Die arkt. etc.
Alc. fauna. Fauna arctica. Vol. I, 1900, p. 391—94.
= — Nordgaard: Hydrograph. und Biol. Investig. in
Norw. Fjords, 1905, p. 158.
Eunephthya rosea — Е. spitzbergensis + Е. florida Kükenthal: Ale.
Erg. а. D. Tiefsee-Exped. (“Valdivia”), Vol. XIII,
1906, p. 79—81 and: Vers. e. Revision d. Alcyon.
etc. Zool. Jb. Abt. System. etc., Vol. XXIV, 1907,
p. 361, 366, 374; and E. rosea, var. umbellata:
Zool. Erg.... “Olga”. Alcyon. Wiss. Meeresunt.
etc. N. F., Vol. VIll,, 1906. Abt. Helgoland, 7p:
26 РЕ Е ICS 36.
— — Hickson and Stephens: Alc. and Madrep. Cor. of
the Irish Coasts. Fisheries, Ireland, Sc. Inv. 1907,
№909) pao:
— florida Broch: Alcyon. d. Kolafjordes. Trav. Soc. Imp.
Natur. de St. Pétersbourg, Vol. XLI, 1911, р. 14.
= — Broch: Die Alcyon. d. Trondhjemsfjordes. 1 Al-
eyon. К. М. Vid? Selsk. экг. 191 No ре
— — Broch: Arkt. Ale. Tromso Mus. Tromsø Mus.
Aarshft., Vol. XXXIV, 1913, p. 181.
As will be seen from the list of synonyms I quite agree with
Ввосн (1. с. 1911 р. 43) in joining together the three forms which
KÜKENTHAL kept separate in his group “Umbellata”, with the sugge-
stion, however, that they possibly later might be united into one
species, an opinion which also Hickson (l. с. 1907, р. 6) seems to
share. That in this case the specific name must be that given by
RATHKE needs no further justification.
E. florida has only been taken by the Carlsbergfond Ex-
pedition, and at the following localities: Turner Sound (69°45 N,
23°20’ W), 3 fthms. *#/7 1900 (a single small specimen); Cape Tobin
(at the northern side of the entrance to Scoresby Sound, 70°23’ М,
ca. 22° W), 57 fthms., ?/s 1900 (2 well sized colonies, resp. 65 mm.
and 50 mm. high).
This species seems to be arctic as well as boreal, but according
to the facts hitherto known its geographical distribution is consider-
ably more restricted than that of any of the preceding species, no
specimens having been taken east of the Kolafjord nor in any part
of the N. American arctic archipelago; it therefore seems doubtful,
if the species really should turn out to be circumpolar.
The Alcyonaria of East-Greenland. 497
At the western coasts of Greenland it has only been found in
one of the southernmost fjords, viz. Bredefjord, but in the open sea
off Western Greenland, Baffin Bay and Davis Strait, it has been
captured at several points between 70°42’ N and 63°30’ N and out
to 55°54’ Long. W.; further it has been found in Danmark Strait,
off the northern coast of Iceland, at Spitsbergen; in the North At-
lantic south and east of Iceland, round the Færoes, and off Norway;
in some of the Norwegian Fjords from Nordfjord to Oxfjord, and in
the Kolafjord ; the southernmost locality hitherto recorded is off Achill
Head, Western Ireland. 1
The depth mentioned above for Turner Sound — 3 fathoms —
seems to be the lowest bathymetrical limit observed, while the
maximum depth lies between 600 and 700 fathoms; like the preceding
species it may be found where the bottom temperature is above
or below zero.
Pennatulacea.
Fam. Virgulartide Kôlliker (emend. Jungersen 1904).
Virgularia affinis Koren & Danielssen.
Virgularia affinis Koren M. S. (name given by Koren 1855 in la-
belling the first specimen found in the Varanger-
fjord and preserved in the Museum in Bergen).
= glacialis M. Sars M. S. (only on labels in the Museums of
Christiania and Copenhagen on specimens found
1857 at Vadso, Varanger Fjord).
— — [| Kölliker: Die Pennatuliden. Abhdl. d. Sencken-
bergisch. Naturf. Gesellsch. Bd. УП, УШ, 1872,
р: 198, Pl XII, Bigs) 116, 117.
— Steenstrupii Kôlliker, ibid. p. 199, Pl. XVI, Figs. 128, 129.
— affinis Koren & Danielssen: Contrib. to the natur. hist.
of the Pennatul. living on the Norwegian coast.
Fauna littoralis Norvegiæ. Vol. Ш, 1877, р. 90,
Pl. IV, Figs. 1—7.
— — Grieg: Oversigt over Norges pennatulider. Bergens
Mus. Aarsberetning 1891, No. 1, p. 11.
! The “Alcyonium тшИЙогит” described by Уеввил, (Proc. U. $. Nat. Mus., 1879,
р. 200, and mentioned again in Вер. U. S. Comm. Fish and Fisheries 1883 (1885) р.
533), seems to be identical with E. florida. Granted the correctness of this identi-
fication — of which I have not the least doubt — the known distribution of Е. florida
in the western part of the N. Atlantic extends from Baffin Bay to off the N. Ame-
rican east coast, at least to 44°06’ Lat. N.
498
Fig.1. Virgulariaaffinis K.& D.
Young specimen from Canning
>< са. 5.
Land.
Ventral aspect.
HECTOR Е. Е. JUNGERSEN.
Virgularia affinis Kikenthal & Broch: Pen-
natulacea. Wiss. Erg. d.
Deutsch. Tiefsee-Expedi-
tion 1898—99 (‘Valdivia’),
Vol ХИ 1911 р 6"
A single specimen was caught on the
Carlsbergfond Expedition by Mag. sc.
SOREN JENSEN at Canning Land (71°30’
N, 21°55’ W), 202 fathoms, № 1900.
It is a young colony, broken just below
the polyp-bearing part of the rhachis; the
soft parts below the fracture are, how-
ever, still adherent but badly damaged and
without any calcareous axis. The total
length is — approximately — 123 mm.,
the breadth across a pair of opposite wings
in the middle of the rhachis с. 2 mm.; the
diameter of the rhachis between the wings
са. 0,8mm.; ca. 17 sets of wings are рге-
served, the upper ones, as usual in the
genus Virgularia, rudimentary towards the
naked end of the calcareous axis; the
number of polyps in each wing mostly 4;
the polyps of each wing coalesced to the
calyx openings, which are toothless; the
lines of attachment of each wing very obli-
que; the opposite wings are in contact along
the mid-ventral line of the rhachis; zooids
few, scattered in the diastemes between
the wings, not visible from the dorsal face
of the rhachis; the radial canals on this
side form a longitudinal swelling along the
rhachis.
In spite of the damaged condition the
single series of “stalk-zooids”, characteristic
of the genus Virgularia, is plainly visible
with a strong lens.
The facts mentioned, as well as the
figures, clearly show this specimen to belong
to the genus Virgularia; only as to the
species some doubt might be entertained.
At first I thought to have before me a new
species, but very nearly related to V. affinis.
The Alcyonaria of East-Greenland. 499
Closer examination, however, revealed to me no essential differences
from the latter which might not be explained by the youthful age
of the specimen; and in fact comparison with a complete, young,
specimen of about the same size of V. affinis in the Bergen Museum,
preserved among a lot of larger and large ones taken by G. O.
Sars at Vadsø, has removed my last doubts as to the correctness
of referring the East-Greenland specimen to the same species.
In clearing this specimen
with glycerine — otherwise leav-
ing it intact as the only docu-
ment of the occurrence of the
species at Greenland — Г have
been able to state the presence,
in the inner soft parts of the
stalk, of minute spicules like
those of other species of Virgu-
laria; and in examining the ex-
tremity of the stalk of a spec-
преп from Varangerfjord, pre-
served in our Museum (the type
specimen of KOLLIKER’s У. Steen-
гири), I found the same mi-
nute calcareous bodies. Thus
the question, left open by Kü-
KENTHAL and Ввосн as to the
presence or absence of these
spicules, now is settled.
The occurrence of this spec-
ies at Eastern Greenland is a
fact of some interest. Hitherto
it has only been found at dif-
ferent places in the Varanger-
fjord, especially at Vadse, in
depths of 60—100 fathoms. GRIEG, however, adds (1. с. р. 11) that
it has been found besides in the Trondhjemsfjord and in the Ber-
gensfjord, a specimen from the latter locality being preserved in the
Museum at Stockholm; and G.’s statements are repeated by Küken-
THAL and Ввосн (1. с. р. 337). But later Ввосн (Alcyon. Trond-
hjemsip. И Penn. REIN. №9 5. Ske. 1912, No. 10) [1913], p.'25)
declares that the occurrence in the Trondhjemsfjord has not been
proved, and that this species therefore, for the present, has to be
withdrawn from the fauna of that fjord. The specimen said to
be from Bergensfjord has kindly been lent to me for inspection by
<
%
En
a
`
*
*
“
Fig. 2. Part of rhachis of the same speci-
men (between the two markings in Fig. 1);
dorsal, lateral and ventral aspect. >< ca. 7.
500 Hector Е. Е. JUNGERSEN.
Prof. THEEL, Director of the Riksmuseum at Stockholm; it turned
out that every probability points towards Varangerfjord as its real
home".
Thus, so far, this species is only recorded from two widely se-
parated areas north of the polar circle, which areas may have in
common certain hydrographical features, Г. inst. а certain amount
of temporary oscillation of cold and warm bottom temperatures,
features the probability of which I only venture to suggest, as I have
no positive knowledge about the real facts.
Fam. Umbellulidæ Kôlliker.
Umbellula encrinus (L.).
Isis encrinus Linné: Systema naturæ Ed. X, 1758, p. 800.
Pennatula encrinus Pallas: Elenchus Zoophytorum, 1766, p. 355.
Vorticella encrinus Linné: Syst. nat., Ed. XII, 1767, р. 1317.
Ombellula Cuvier: Tableau élémentaire de lhist. nat., 1798, р. 675.
Umbellularia groenlandica Lamarck: Animaux sans vertèbres. Ed. I,
Vol. II, 1801, р. 436.
Umbellula encrinus + U. miniacea + U. pallida Lindahl: Om Pen-
natulidslagtet Umb. Cuv. К. Sv. Vetensk. Ak.
Halg., Vol. XIII, 1874, No. 3, Pi. I—III.
— Lindahli Kolliker: Die Pennatulide Umbellula u. zwei. п.
Typen d. Alcyonaria. Festschr. z. Feier 4. 25 jahr.
Best. d. Phys. Med. Ges. in Würzburg, 1874, р. 11.
— encrinus Lutken: Manual of the N. Hist. etc., XX, 1875,
р. 186, №. 12.
— — у. Marenzeller: Die Coelent. etc. österr.-ung. Nordp.-
exp. Denkschr. Ak. Wiss. Wien, Vol. XXXV, 1878,
о 9.
1 No other information could be obtained than that of the label, running thus:
“Virgularia affinis.
Bergen. Danielssen”.
This of course does not prove that the locality is “Bergensfjord”. In my
opinion it simply means that this specimen has been acquired from Dr. DANIELSSEN,
Bergen. Dr. D., of Bergen’s Museum, had collected a lot of specimens in Varanger-
fjord 1857; and in 1877, in describing and figuring the species, he only gives this
fjord as its home. Later he never mentions its occurrence anywhere else; and if
nevertheless a single specimen should have been found in the immediate vicinity of
Bergen, it must seem extremely improbable that the only proof of this occurrence
should by D. himself be sent away to Sweden and not be preserved in the Bergen
Museum, where he tried to store as complete a representation as possible of the
marine fauna of Norway. Moreover the specimen in question is a fine and typically
developed Virg. affinis, in every respect fully like other large samples from Varan-
gerfjord, still kept in the Bergen collection.
The Alcyonaria of East-Greenland. 501
Umbellula encrinus Danielssen and Koren: Pennatulida, N. Nordh.-
Exp., 1884, p. 13, Pl. V—XII.
7 — Baird Verrill: Not: rem.‘ Mar.. Faun. ‘etc: No.‘9} Ami
Journ. Sc. Vol. XX XVIII, 1884, р. 219 (Note); and:
Res. Expl. St. “Albatross” 1883 etc. U. S. Comm.
Fish & Fisheries, Rep. 1883 (1885), p. 509, 533,
Pl. I, Figs. 1—2.
= encrinus Stuxberg: Evertebratf. i. Sibir. Ishaf etc. Vega-
Exp. vetensk. Iaktt., Vol. I, 1882, р. 692; Vol. У,
1887, p. 163.
7 — = Studer: Вер. dredg. Oper.... St. “Albatross” 1891.
X. Note prélim. sur les Alcyon. Bull. Mus. Comp.
Zool., Vol. XXV, No. 5, 1894, р. 57.
— Nathorst: Två somrar i Norra Ishafvet. Vol. П,
1900, р. 93 (cfr. The “Antarctic” in the Arctic.
Nat. Science, 1899, p. 319).
— = Kolthoff: Till Spetsbergen och Norrôstra Grön-
land Ar 1900, 1901, p. 176.
— — + U. Lindahlii Jungersen: Pennatulida. The Dan.
Ingolf’ Ехр., Volz У, Р. 1,1904. р. 75, 79, Pl Tm
Figs. 37—51.
7 = — Roule: Not. prélim. Penn. recueillies par le “Тга-
vailleur” et le “Talisman” etc. Bull. Mus. d’Hist.
nat., Vol. XI, 1905, р. 456.
— — + U. Lindahli (pro parte) Kükenthal and Broch:
Pennatulacea. Wiss. Erg. 4. О. Tiefsee-Exp. (“Val-
divia”) 1898—99. Vol. XIII, 1910, р. 285.
— — Balss: Not. ü. einige Penn. des Zool. Mus. 4. К.
Ak. Wiss. zu St. Petersburg. Ann. du Mus. zool.
Че Acad. Imp. d..Se. 9. St. Petersbourg, Vol.
ХУ 1911, р. 158.
— == — U. Lindahli Kükenthal: Zur Systematik d. Um-
belluliden. Zool. Anz. Vol. XLIII, No. 13, 1914,
p. 631.
The list of synonyms shows that I now unite U. Lindahlii with
U. encrinus, while in my report on the Ingolf-Pennatulids I thought
it convenient to distinguish two separate, although very closely re-
lated, species, the one characteristic of the “warm” the other of the
“cold” area of the northern Ocean. Since the publication of the
account mentioned I have had the opportunity to examine a large
number of Umbellulas, old ones as well as young, from Greenland
LIN 38
502 Нестов Е. Е. JuNGERSEN.
waters, from the North Atlantic and from the Polar Sea; and I have
been convinced of the impossibility of maintaining the above two
as distinct species. Consequently the oldest specific name, given by
Lınnzus, has to be used for the northern Umbellula.
The occurrence of Umbelllula encrinus at Eastern Greenland has
previously been stated (cfr. JUNGERSEN 1. с. 1904, р. 86); now the
Danmark-Expedition has added the following new locality: Off Ma-
roussia (76°40’ N, east of Little Koldewey), 150 fathoms, mud with
a little gravel, ””/7 1908. The single specimen, captured with a beam-
trawl working for half an hour, is complete; the stalk is 420 mm. in
total length, its bulbous part 60mm. long, ca. 6mm. in diameter
where it is thickest, while the thinnest part of the stalk is less
than 1 mm. in diameter; the length of the upper ‘sheath formed”
dilatation is ca. 6 mm., that of the rhachis-club ca. 12mm. The cluster
contains 9 polyps, two of which still undeveloped; the body of the
longest polyp measures about 12mm, with tentacles ca. 27 mm. in
length. Thus this specimen is a young one; it is more slender than
any of the specimens described as U. encrinus in my account of the
Ingolf Pennatulids, and the tentacles are much longer in proportion
to the body of the polyps; in which respects it agrees with several
specimens among a large number of Umbellule, captured in the
Umanakfjord in 1908 by the “Tjalfe”.
The East-Greenland localities formerly published are: Саре
Brewster (70°9 N, 22°5' W, on the southern side of the entrance
to Scoresby Sound), 250 fthms.; Canning Land (71°30'N), 202 fthms.
(Carlsbergfond Exped. 1900); entrance of Franz Joseph Fjord
(73°20' N), 200—300 М. (KoLTHOFF, 1900).
U. encrinus is known from the Arctic Sea and the nearest sub-
arctic parts of the North Atlantic, viz.: Baffin Bay and the Uma-
nakfjord (here in great numbers), Davis Strait; Danmark Strait; be-
tween East Greenland and Spitsbergen, at Spitsbergen, Jan Mayen,
north and north-east and east of Iceland; between the Færoes and
Norway; in the Færoe-channel; east of Franz Joseph Land, and in
the Kara Sea.
If the species really — as indicated by some authors (J. STEPHENS:
Alcyon. etc. of the Irish Coasts р. 21, Route: Bull. Mus. d’Hist.
nat. Vol. XI, 1905, p. 416) — is distributed far south in the Atlantic
— to off Marocco — seems to me extremely doubtful; and the same
may be said regarding its occurrence in the Pacific, near the Gala-
pagos Islands (Studer: Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. XXV, 1894, р. 57);
cfr. my remarks in Conspectus Fauna Groenlandice. Alcyon. etc.
Medd. Gronld. Vol. XXIII. Inside the area mentioned above, this
The Alcyonaria of East-Greenland. 503
species has been found in depths from 122 to ca. 700 fathoms, but
apparently reaching its maximum — and really gigantic — develop-
ment in comparatively shallow water (i. e. 200—300 fthms.), where
the bottom temperature remains constantly below zero or oscillates
round the freezing point (as in the Umanakfjord). In depths sur-
passing 700 fthms. hitherto only quite young stages have been found.
Novbr. 1915.
16.—5.— 1916.
го
А uw! bel da Lu i | 7 KR у | mi
SAN HER ENT “as CHAN STE esi À Lage IL (rh в
«qui > Re Kelle ПА oe LION ая ST
ES us ae Bee SV Rear nae TRE 7 м dde al т
= ВОИ О чо ны и Пес data er
“te 2
T4 i
w “ Ех ] мы i РИ SS
a 1e CA Tita av. se Ге р Per at À CEE AN ud LEA ME и N у Ky AA N ет
D y i EN RAR [we i I Кол. Bu $.
НК еее НН a ul:
Ru en Lei We + Te | | |
| | ' . у
L2 W
ы ov
i i
4
5
' LI
+
ms т
р
» ro »
UL
= К. ur
er i
= wee м i
kj n
i г
у
| L |
Br 7 м
i “> x
a _ =
AL
Es | =
” 2 x Pi
os …
£ u :
,” Гоа
Е :
e 7
a =
i i
v
FS : .
i
—
ed &
7 a Paz
u >
rues:
À Sj з ve 4
1 u F 1
om = u
р
i 7 —
_ . u m
о i
—
ur
‘= 0
-
я
u К. м
NI
ACTINIARIA AND ZOANTHARIA OF THE
DANMARK EXPEDITION
BY
OSKAR CARLGREN
Actiniaria.
Fam. Cribrinidae.
Urticina (Rhodactinia, Tealia) davisii (Agass.).
Locality: The sound between Maatten and Rensker St. 95.
25—50 fthm. 15.7. 1908. Hydroid region. Several specimens.
Fam. Paractidae.
Anthosactis jan mayeni Dan.
Locality: 76°6' М. В. 13°26’ W. L. St.104b. 100-125 fthm. Clay
and gravel. 28. 7. 1908. 1 specimen.
Fam. Actinostolidae.
Actinostola spitsbergensis Carlgr.
Locality: The sound between Maatten and Renskaer 25—50 fthm.
St. 95. 19. 7. 1900. Hydroid region. Several specimens.
Fam. Sagartidae.
Chondractinia nodosa (Fabr.) Lütk.
Localities: Stormbugt off Baadskeret 20 fthm. St. 66. 28. 8.
1907. 1 specimen. Danmarks Havn 10—15 fthm. St. 67. 29. 8. 1907.
Delesseria region. 1 specimen. “Огезипа” 10—15 fthm. St. 71 b. 5.9.
1907. Delesseria region. 1 specimen. Stormbugt 8—10 fthm. St. 72.
9. 9. 1907. Delesseria region. 1 specimen. The sound between
Maatten and Renskær 25—50 fthm. 19.7.1908. Hydroid region. Several
specimens.
Zoantharia.
Epizoanthus lindahli Carlgr.
Locality: 77°N.B. 17,5°W.L. 304m. St. 99. 22. 7. 1908. 1 colony.
XX:
THE MARINE CARBONIFEROUS OF
NORTH-EAST GREENLAND AND ITS
BRACHIOPOD FAUNA
BY
KARL A. GRONWALL.
1916.
X LILI. 39
RUS. a tLe
i a i
7 a >
gø
№?
FE
| м _ =. у
о
—
|. Introduction.
MONG the most important discoveries of the “Danmark” Expedi-
A tion, from а geological point of view, must be certainly
included the establishment of the fact of the occurrence of Carboni-
ferous Formations on the east coast of northern Greenland, between
80° and 81° north latitude, on Holm’s and Amdrup’s Land — at
Hekla Sound and Ingolf’s Fjord, the Mallemukfjæld, and other places
— and the collection of fossils there.
In this district Captain Косн and Dr. WEGENER have made
collections of fossiliferous rocks, some of them containing a fossil
land flora, others a fossil marine fauna. The plant-fossils have already
been dealt with by Professor А. а. NATHORST in his paper which
is to be found in “Meddelelser om Grønland”, Vol. XLII, Nr. 12.
The marine Carboniferous rocks occur within exactly the same local-
ities as the plant-bearing formations, and directly cover these latter,
so that a description of the general geological conditions here coin-
cides almost exactly with that given by NATHORST, and, like that
account, is, for the most part, based on the report made by Mr. Ha-
KON JARNER, the geologist of the Expedition.
The map given here (Pl. XXX) is based on the map of North-
east Greenland drawn by Captain Косн in accordance with the
measurements made by the Expedition, and all the names given
are in accordance with the map in question. The localities of the
finds have been entered in accordance with the information given
by JARNER and, partly, according to Dr. WEGENER’s diary and com-
munications of Captain Косн.
The following summary is given from JARNER’s Communication
in NATHORSTS paper:
“The Carboniferous formations occur on the coast outside the
Archæan rocks, and here form a plateau which, at the farthermost
point of the coast, attains а greatest height of 500 metres, but which,
39*
3,12 KARL A. GRÖNWALL.
more inland, is somewhat lower, the land-surface sloping gently to-
wards the west. West of the Carboniferous formations, the Archæan
rocks usually rise to a height of
about 1,000 m.
There is a gentle dip of the
Carboniferous strata towards the
east and north, and the oldest de-
posits are, consequently, found at
the western boundary of the form-
ation. On the northern shore of
Hekla Sound, about 7 km. east of
Depot 80°09’, there were found loose
slabs of a micaceous slate with plant
Fig. 1. Section of the Carboniferous rocks fossils. At Depot 80°09’ there was
at the Depot 80°09’. (a), fine and soft black drawn the accompanying profile
shale; (b), gray shale; (c), conglomerate; (Fig. 1). From the foot of the
(d), sandstone without fossils; (9), el mountain up to 100 metres above
ferous sandstone; (e), limestone rich 4 x
sea-level, the rock is hidden by
loose debris, but, at the height
mentioned, black and grey shale become visible as a 30-metre thick
bed. It is this shale which has given the greater part of the plant
fossils that form the basis of NATHORST’s account. The shale is cov-
ered by a conglomerate about 70 metres thick, dark red in colour,
in corals.
Fig. 2. Coast between “Depöt 80°09" and ‘“Mallemukfjæld”.
and containing well-rounded pebbles of the size of a hazel-nut; their
size gradually diminishes upwards, and the conglomerate passes
into a red sandstone which forms the rock until a height of 275
metres above sea-level is reached. The lowest part of the sandstone
contains no fossils, but from 240 to 275 metres there is an abund-
ance of them, brachiopods especially. From 275 m. to the summit
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 518
(about 500 metres), the mountain is composed of a dense limestone,
rich in corals.
Judging from the dip of the strata, the uppermost layers at
Depot 80°09' (Fig. 2) form the base of the Mallemukfjæld. As that
mountain, which is about 500 metres in height, also consists of lime-
stone, the total thickness of the Carboniferous formations can be
estimated as being at least 700 metres.
No faults have been observed within the Carboniferous form-
ations”.
From this communication of Mr. JARNER one must, with NAT-
HORST, draw the conclusion that the plant-bearing beds occupy the
basis of the Carboniferous deposits of North-east Greenland, and
that the entire formation is probably a downthrow block outside
the boundary-fault of the Archean “Horst”. In NATHORST's opinion
there can be no doubt as to the age of these plant-bearing forma-
tions in their entirety, and he refers them to the Lower Carboni-
ferous, although the material available is too little and too badly
preserved to allow of any more detailed conclusions being drawn.
NATHORST compares several of the plant-species occurring here with
those found in the Lower Carboniferous of Spitzbergen.
Mr. JARNER has, further, favoured me with some extracts from
Dr. WEGENER’s diary, which have been of great value for the unrav-
elling of the stratigraphical connection between the various localities,
and my account is based essentially on these communications, in
addition to the investigation of the material collected, both from a
petrological and a paleontological point of view.
The collections are not specially extensive — numbering altogether
a little more than one hundred specimens — and, consequently, the
description of the sections, for instance, is somewhat imperfect, in
addition to which, the state of preservation of the fossils is some-
times rather poor. But material collected under such difficult cir-
cumstances, and conveyed some 600 km by means of dog-sledges,
from a district to which it can hardly be expected that a fresh
expedition will soon be sent, makes it the duty of the examiner to
make the most far-reaching deduclions that are possible from the
specimens placed at his disposal. This is the explanation of the
circumstance that, in many instances, all the material or every fossil
obtained by the Expedition has been made the object of a special
mention.
Throughout the work there is employed, given in italicised
figures, the numbering of the specimens which was made at the
Mineralogical Museum in Copenhagen, as, during the course of my
work, I made constant use of these numbers, and clearly perceived
514 KARL А. GRONWALL.
that such a system was advisable for a future identification of the
specimens treated of in these pages.
In AMDRuP's account of the Danmark Expedition (“Meddelelser
om Grønland” vol. XLI), a little is said respecting the geological
finds, but the present writer thinks it advisable to recapitulate what
was given there. The Carboniferous formations in this district were
observed during the course of the great sledge-journey northwards,
in April and May, 1907. The two sledge-expeditions, each consisting
of three men, which, under the command of MyLius-ERICHSEN and
Captain Косн, were to carry out the great exploring journeys to the
most northern of the then altogether unknown parts of East Green-
land, here separated from the parties that accompanied them
so far for the purpose of provisioning, etc. One of these provision-
ing parties returned on the 23 of April from the Mallemukfjæld, and
the other on the 26 of the same month from Sophus Miller's Naze.
This latter party consisted of Dr. WEGENER, the meterologist of the
Expedition, and G. Тнозтвор, and was not to return direct to Dan-
marks Harbour, but was to carry out geological investigations in
Ingolf’s Fjord and Dijmphna and Неа Sounds.
The places in AMpRup’s account where the geological conditions
are mentioned are the following:
Ве: April20:the 222: Косн and WEGENER made geological
investigations at Mallemukfjæld and collected specimens of the саг-
bon formation there... .. x
р. 118—119; “April 24h. 222 At Eskimo Мате. are Almost
all went to work to collect either Eskimo relics, such as darts, snow-
knives, fragments of sledges and kaiaks, etc., or fossils, of which
many occurred here even in the sandstone used by the Eskimo as
building material. The collections were deposited in a depot at the
spot, to be fetched on the return journey. ... . 2 |
Ball April 26 In Sophus Miller's Мате. .... At this
settlement also the sandstone was full of fossils, especially bivalves
and corals. In the course of half an hour a very considerable col-
lection had been made and deposited at the place to await their
return. MyLius-ERICHSEN, however, specially requested Koch not
to take the Eskimo objects, if he should arrive first at the tenting
The following may be quoted from the account of Captain Kocn’s
return journey:
В Ламе Э.И From Eskimo Naze they took with
them a number of fossils deposited there by WEGENER..... g
On the other hand, the account does not report that, on his
return journey, Captain Косн carried with him any geological col-
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 515
lections from Sophus Miller's Naze, which, however, he сег-
tainly did.
The main part of the geological observations, as well as of the
collections of fossils, were made by WEGENER and G. THOSTRUP,
and on pp. 143—145 there is some mention made of their labours.
The first day after their saying farewell to the sledge expedi-
tions that continued northwards was:
“April 27:th. After making some survey observations at the
tent-place, G. Tuostrup and WEGENER at 10.30 а. m. drove out to
the Henrik Kröyer’s Islets in order to investigate these skerries,
which are only 20 metres high. . . ..
On the islands as well as on the land itself they found numerous
Tossils. 5... i
“On April 29:th the tent was pitched on the northern side of the
(Ingolf’s) fjord, and here they were obliged to wait until the 3:rd
of May, before they had clear enough weather to make the neces-
sary surveys and observations.
During this delay, however, WEGENER had the Dune of
thoroughly examining the surrounding landscape. . . ..
During this wait, fossils were collected and profiles were taken
in two rivers and west of Cape Jungersen.
The time from May 3 to May 11 was employed to the journey
along the coast of Holms Land to Mallemukfjæld.
“On May 11:th they drove into the district south of Holm’s Land.
It proved to be a sound, the two branches of which, Hekla Sound
and Dijmphna Sound, encircled Lynn Island and afterwards ran
between the mainland and Hovgaard’s Island down to the Nioghalv-
fjerdsfjord.
During the days from the 11:th to the 18:!h of May, Hekla- and
Dijmphna Sounds were examined and surveyed. .... A lot of fos-
29
stlss were found! there. ...
The fossils collected in this district were of marine animals,
some of which are described in the present paper, and also the land
plant-fossils described by NATHORST in his paper mentioned above.
In Amprup’s account there are no other remarks referring to
the Carboniferous formations in this district.
The collections that have been confided to me for the purpose
of examination are only in part derived from the solid rock, and
consist in a great degree of loose fragments found on the shore, or
talus-boulders found on the slopes. In many places, however, not
only have specimens of rock or fossils been collected in situ, but
more or less complete sections of the series of strata have been
obtained, for which reason the localities have been marked on the
516 KARL А GRONWALL.
map Pl. XXX according to their value: + = sections; + = finds
of rocks and fossils in situ, and © = finds of loose fossils or loose
stones.
Sections have been made in 4 places, the most southern in two
spots on the outer part of Hekla Sound, and the most northern in
two places in the outer part of Ingolf’s Fjord. The two southern-
most sections lie direct W. of Mallemukfjæld, at a distance from
each other of a couple of hundred metres; the most western, on
the labels and in the diaries, has been called Kocn’s section, and
the most eastern, the Conglomerate section. They lie in the
immediate vicinity of Depöt 80°09’, and from them have been
obtained the greater part of the plant-fossils described by NATHORST
and the profile figure communicated by JARNER to NATHORST, and
which is reproduced here too, is referable just to these sections,
perhaps Kocn’s chiefly (see below).
On the north coast of Ingolfs Fjord, two profiles have been taken,
one, the most westerly, in the “Western river”, and one at the
mouth of the fjord, about 3 miles W. of Cape Jungersen called the
Cape Jungersen section. In addition, the specimens collected
at the Eastern river are so related that conclusions can be drawn
from them respecting the sequence of the strata, and that, with a
tolerable amount of accuracy, they can be formed into а profile
connected with that from the eastern river.
Fossils from the solid rock have also been collected: at Malle-
mukfjæld, on the north coast of Ingolt’s Fjord, on the Henrik Kröyer’s
Islets and on the mainland behind these latter (depot 80°43’).
Free-lying fossils and rock specimens have been collected: in
Hekla Sound, W. of Косн’$ profile; at Mallemukfjæld; at Eskimo
Naze; on the north shore of Ingolf’s Fjord; on the Henrik Kröyer’s
Islets; on the mainland behind these, and at Sophus Miller's
Naze, i.e., in addition to the find-localities for solid rock, collections
of free-lying material have been made at Eskimo Naze and at
Sophus Miller's Naze.
Аз the sections that have been taken — incomplete although, it
is true, they are — contain fossils that can be referred to certain
geological levels, and also certain characteristic rocks, a comparison
between them can give a fairly collective view of the stratigraphy
of the district. In the following pages, therefore, a detailed description
of the various occurrences of the fossils will be given.
It has not always been possible to make the petrological des-
cription of the various kinds of rock sufficiently positive, in conse-
quence of the often rather small supply of material available, so
that the comparison between the different rocks from the various
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 517
localities is, occasionally, somewhat uncertain. In many cases,
however, a microscopical examination has given specially reliable
characterizations for the determination of the relationship or divers-
ity of the various rocks, a fact of great importance, as, for carrying
out the megascopical examination, the material available was often
less than equal to a clenched hand in size. The microscopical
investigation has given specially valuable information respecting the
occurrence of certain smaller organisms — Fusulina, especially —
in the series of strata, as well as with regard to the fragments of
larger or smaller organisms forming part of the various rocks.
In addition, the microscope has made valuable contributions to
the solution of the problem of the process of formation of the rocks
occurring in the districts mentioned above.
For the purpose of comparing the rocks in question with mate-
rial from the Carboniferous Formations of Spitzbergen and Beeren
Eiland, I have had the opportunity to avail myself of the rich col-
lections brought home to the State Museum of Stockholm by Swedish
expeditions, and I am happy to have this opportunity of giving my
heartiest thanks to Professor GERHARD HOLM, the head of the Zoopale-
ontological Department, for the readiness with which he has allowed
me access to the collections, both of fossils and of the specimens
of rock, under his care. My friend, Professor Cart Wiman, of Upp-
sala, who has examined the rich brachiopod fauna in the Carboniferous
of Spitzbergen and Beeren Eiland, has, during the whole period of
my work, assisted me with information, not only regarding the
brachiopod fauna, but also as regards the rocks composing the Car-
boniferous series of strata of these regions. Without his valuable
assistance, indeed, my deductions, in several instances, would not
have been at all as safe as I am now able to consider them.
My heartiest thanks are due to Mr. Enwarp ÅDAMS-Ray of Stock-
holm, for the translation to English.
The fossils have been photographed by Mr. А. Hs. Orssox of
the Geological Survey of Sweden, Stockholm, and the photographs
have been retouched by Mr. J. У. EnGrunn of Stockholm. Both of
these gentlemen have carried out their task most successfully.
Il. Description of the localities.
A. The localities of Holm’s Land.
These places are, firstly, the two profiles in the outer part of
Hekla Sound, at Depot 80°09’, Kocn’s section and the Conglomerate
section; secondly, the Mallemukfjæld, and, finally, Eskimo Мате,
where, however, only boulders were collected, though these prove
to be very nearly related to the rocks from the Mallemukfjæld.
In addition to the localities just mentioned, collections, both
from the solid rock and from boulders, were made from a place to
the west of Kocu’s section, about 7 km. west of Depöt 80°09’.
Specimens from the solid rock have been obtained from two levels
— at 85 and at 155 metres above sea-level — consisting of sand-
stone and sandy shale.
The rock specimens «from 85 metres above the sea (№0 188)
are a greyish, coarse-grained shaly sandstone, containing indistinct
plant-impressions. This sandstone contains a large amount of mica,
both muscovite and biotite, and fragments of only slightly decom-
posed felspar. The grains of quartz are fairly well rolled, and are
held together by a cement containing both silica and some clay-
substance. This sandstone seems to contain all the constituent
parts of a granite or a gneiss, and has, very probably, been depos-
ited in the immediate neighbourhood of a coast consisting of fairly
new cliffs of such rock. According to Dr. WEGENER’s statement in
the list of the collections, this sandstone lies beneath the principal
shales containing Lower Carboniferous flora.
The other specimen obtained from the solid rock (N:0 171) was
got from a height of 155 metres above the sea. The rock in this
specimen is very nearly related to the foregoing and, like this, con-
tains indistinct plant impressions. The rock is a somewhat brown-
ish dark gray, thick-bedded, evenly deposited sandstone, containing
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 519
a large amount of mica (biotile) and some felspar; the cementing
substance is brownish, clayey or chloritic. Compared with the rock
described above, from 85 metres above sea-level, the constituent
parts of the original granite or gneiss must have undergone a more
thorough alteration, the clayey cementing substance, especially,
pointing to deposition at a somewhat greater distance from the coast.
According to Dr. WEGENER, this rock covers the sandstone shales
which contain the plant-fossils. The level of these shales,. then
should be between 85 and 155 metres above sea-level.
At the same place, W. of Kocn’s section, there have been found
at a level of 10 metres above the sea, some fragments (N:os 180, 193,
199, 200, 202) of a red-gray to chocolate-coloured limestone with
some dark slickensides without other megascopically visible fossils
than fairly large trunks of Chaetetes radians Fiscu. Megascopically,
the rock looks almost close-grained, but, under the microscope, it
proves to be very finely crystalline in structure, containing numerous
spherical bodies about 0.2 mm. in diameter, and a few fragments
of fossils, including rotaliform Foraminifera, no Fusulina being ob-
served. These fragments have, of a certainty, fallen from higher
levels.
Kocn’s section. From this locality there is a series of lime-
stones, all of which have been obtained at a height of 200 metres
or more above sea-level, partly from the solid rock and partly as
free-lying stones.
At 200 metres above the sea there have been obtained from the
solid rock, partly a gray limestone (N:o 144), and also a reddish
limestone (N:o 155). The gray limestone is almost close-grained, with
small veins of calcite, which are more clearly visible under the
microscope; of the smaller fragmentary fossils the greater part were
particles of crinoids, but there are also rotaliform Foraminifera
and some few Fusulinae. It is fairly evident that this gray lime-
stone has been stratified alternately with more shaly deposits. Of
fossils it contained a gastropod shell, probably Euomphalus sp., a
pygidium of a trilobite and small crinoid stem-joints. The red lime-
stone (N-o 155) is an impure, clayey, greatly re-crystallized red or
red-brown rock, which has evidently alternated with shales and
clays. This rock agrees very nearly with the rock from Beeren
Eiland, called by J. G. ANDERSSON Ambigua limestone. Of the
same rock (WEGENER mentions “red sandstone” in his list) there are
a couple of loose fragments (N:os 143 and 194) containing 2 specimens
of Euomphalus sp., found somewhat lower than 200 metres above
the sea; а rugose coral (N:o 145) derives from the solid rock at 200 m.
At the same level, 200 metres above the sea, there has been
520 KARL А. GRONWALL.
obtained another species of limestone — I am uncertain whether it
was from the solid rock or from free-lying stones — viz., a light
reddish-gray limestone (N:o 150), which, to the naked eye, looks
like a close-grained rock containing numerous small stem-joints of
crinoids; under the microscope, however, it proves to consist of a
finely crystalline matrix, in which lie imbedded numerous fragments
of fossils, mostly remains of crinoids, followed by brachiopod spines
and Foraminifera, Bigenerina, Tetrataxis and Fusulina.
The next level where rock specimens were obtained from the
solid rock is 240 metres above sea-level (N:o 140, a and b). N:o 140 a
is an almost black, somewhat shaly limestone, alternating with de-
posits of a more shaly and clayey nature which, for the most part,
consist of small fragments of fossils of various species. In conse-
quence of weathering, this rock has obtained a lighter colour, and,
on the surface, is grayish or gray-green, a closer examination show-
ing that the dark, almost black colour, depends on the presence of
organic substances, as, on heating, it becomes of a light gray colour.
Under the microscope this rock proved to consist of numerous frag-
ments of fossils, most of them crinoid stem-joints, brachiopod spines
and shells, zoaries of Bryozoa, and some few rotaliform Foramini-
fera, inbedded in a matrix which is somewhat re-crystallized and
contains a dark bituminous pigment, fairly evenly distributed over
the whole. This rock is characterized by Spirifer supramosquensis
NIKITIN, of which there are several specimens in the same rock
from other localities, partly in Kocn’s section, at 275 metres above
the sea (N:o 152), and also in the Conglomerate Section. Other fossils
than this species of Spirifer cannot be given as distinctive of the rock
in question; its petrographical appearance is, however, so peculiar,
that, within this relatively restricted tract, a certain stratigraphical
importance should be ascribed to it. It is also of some importance
for comparison with the Carboniferous deposits of Spitzbergen, as
it possesses certain clear points of connection with the Fusulina
limestone of Spitzbergen, or, аз У. STAFF and WEDEKIND call it, the
“Foraminiferal sapropelite”. A more detailed account of the relation
borne by these two rocks to each other will be given in the com-
parative survey, Chapter IV, p. 597.
From the same level there has been gathered a limestone show-
ing traces of a more thorough re-crystallization, containing fragments
of fossils which are entirely transformed into large individuals of
crystalline calcite, and the matrix to a finely crystallized limestone.
In one free-lying boulder (N:o 157) from the same level there lies
a badly preserved Spirifer, although this, too, is a Sp. supramos-
quensis Nik., in a light gray, somewhat reddish limestone; on the
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 521
shore, in the same locality, in a free-lying boulder of similar rock
(N:o 141), there has been discovered a Spirifer Fritschi SCHELLW., very
badly preserved, it is true.
Close by, higher up on the cliff, at a level of 275 metres above
the sea, there have been collected specimens of the solid rock.
Here we find the same bituminous limestone as at 240 metres,
but at the higher level the rock contains, in addition to crinoid
stems, numerous small Fusulinae. Among the larger fossils there
come from this level the specimen, already mentioned. of Spirifer
supramosquensis Nik. (N:o 152), and also Spirifer fulmari, п. sp.
(N:o 166). In this locality, too, the bituminous, somewhat shaly
limestone seems to stand in connection with a more evenly bedded
and denser limestone (N:o 165). This kind of rock somewhat gives
the impression of being silicified, and contains a piece of a brachio-
pod shell which can very well belong to Sp. supramosquensis, and
of smaller fragments of fossils, in addition to crinoid stem-joints
pipes, brachiopod spines and fragments of Bryozoa, a number of
Foraminifera — mostly Fusulinae, but also some few specimens of
Bigenerina and Tetrataxis.
Somewhat to the eastward of Kocn’s section lies the Conglom-
erate section, from which there also exists a series of specimens.
The Conglomerate section. According to Dr. WEGENER’s
diarynotes, the lower part of the slope, up to 120 metres above the sea
consists of detritus and snow which cover shale and shaly sand-
stone. At the level mentioned we find a dark-red, stratified con-
glomerate containing pieces of rock-as large as a fist, pebbles of
Archean rock. There is only one little specimen of this conglomer-
ate (N:o 185) which, besides, is unfortunately greatly weathered, so
that it is impossible to draw as safe conclusions from it as is desir-
able. The conglomerate seems to be composed of a not very speci-
ally well-rounded weathered detritus, the grains of which are of
greatly varying size; in the specimen at hand they varied from the
size of a hazel-nut to that of a mustard-seed. The greater part of
the pebbles consist of quartz, but some appear to be granite, or
some other crystalline rock of a fairly light colour. The weathered
part of our specimen is red, and the grains are so loosely cemented
that the rock can easily be crumbled; the interior, sound part is
somewhat lighter in colour and presents the conglomerate grains
inbedded in a white, opaque matrix, which is crystalline and pos-
sesses a lustre like that of mother-of-pearl or silk; it is not very
hard and is insoluble in acids. By means of chemical and optical
examination it proved to be baryte. The unimportant amount avail-
able of this rock does not allow of any account being given of the
522 KARL A. GRÖNWALL.
nature and formation of the conglomerate; it is not even possible
to see from the material how the rock is stratified. A conglomerate
with baryte as the matrix is, however, probably of rare occurrence.
Neither the labels in the collection nor Dr. WEGENER’S diary-
notes make any definite statement respecting the thickness of the
conglomerate, but from the diary it is clearly evident that, upwards,
it passes into sandstone, and, in the lower part, it alternates with
limestone. For, from 130 metres above sea-level there has been
obtained material (N:o 176), of light limestone, regarding which the
diary states as follows: — “130 m. Heller Kalk mit wenigen Fossilien,
in 3 m. dicken Bändern wechsellagernd mit dem Conglomerate, das.
nach oben immer feinkörniger wird and bei 150 m. schon fast einem
Sandstein gleich sieht (N:o 183). Zerfallt leicht in rote Erde”.
The limestone is a very light yellow-gray, finely crystalline and
very compact, with a few glide surfaces. No fossils were observable
with the pocket lens. The sandstone from 150 metres is very loose,
and consists of unevenly large quartz-grains, which, in the unim-
portant material at hand, are sometimes as large as a pea, and are
cemented together by means of a red-brown matrix which seems
to contain clay and mica.
At 175 metres there was found a thick bed of limestone, of
which 10 metres lay exposed; it was rich in fossils and a drawing
in the diary indicates rugose corals. The fragments that have been
brought home (N:os 182 and 184) show, however, little of determinable
fossil remains. N:o 184 is a gray, dense, somewhat clayey limestone
and, of larger fossil fragments, contains the umbonal part of a brachio-
pod (probably a Spirifer) and other fragments of fossils: among
others brachiopod spines. Specimen N:o 182 seems to consist of
another species of limestone, as far as can be made from the unim-
portant material at hand. On the one surface, which is weathered
and worn, or polished by the wind (by means of snow or sand)
the rock is of a light-gray colour, and here can be seen a number
of small fragments of fossils, mostly stems of crinoids, and also a
number of small Fusuline. On the inner surface the material shows
a somewhat clayey and darker matrix, which points to the presence
of bituminous substances. It reminds one somewhat of other bitu-
minous limestones of this series.
At 190 metres above the sea there begins a gray-green, some-
what calcareous sandstone (N:o 186), fairly fine-grained, containing
a pretty large number of grains of felspar, together with mica, both
dark and white; this sandstone, consequently, is formed of products
of degradation, which have been but little altered, probably from a
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 528
granite. WEGENER says of it: “Es waren nur sehr undeutliche Spuren
von Fossilien in dieser Schicht zu sehen (Kriechspuren)”.
At 200 metres above the sea there was exposed a peculiar series
of strata, of which WEGENER speaks as follows: “200 m. sehr dunk-
ler schwarzer Kalk (violetter Ton) mit zahlreichen deutlichen Fos-
silien, auch Muscheln. Mit 4 schiefrigen oder erdigen, mit dem
Messer spaltbaren Zwischenlagen (je 1 dem. dick). Die 3 obersten
wimmeln von Muscheln”. This bituminous limestone with inter-
mediate marl-shale partings is probably the same stratum as that
in this profile at 175 metres above sea-level; and that in Kocn’s sect-
ion at 240 metres above the sea; the fossil-contents confirm the
relationship with the bed in question in Kocn’s profile. The “Mu-
scheln” mentioned by WEGENER are certainly brachiopods; in the
specimens (N:os 190 and 192) obtained from this locality, there are
5 specimens of Spirifer supramosquensis Nik., 3 specimens of Spirifer
rectangulus Кот., var. alta п. уаг., 1 specimen of Productus simensis
TSCHERN., 1 specimen of Chonetella nasuta Waac. and some few
rugose corals. Both the harder limestone and the alternating marly
beds are highly bituminous, but, on heating, become of a gray-yel-
lowish colour; in consequence of weathering they have, on the sur-
face, obtained a gray-green tinge. The limestone contains a large
number of small crinoid stems, and, under the microscope it shows,
in an almost close-grained matrix a number of fossil-fragments of
calcite, with fragments of crinoids and bryozoa a few brachiopod
spines and Fusuline.
This bituminous limestone, of the thickness of which no state-
ment is made, is underlaid by a sandstone (N:o 177), of which,
however, only one layer, 1 decimetre in thickness, was observed.
The rock was friable and not very compact; it was brown in colour,
rich in mica and finely bedded. The rock overlying the bituminous
limestone consists immediately of sandstone, of which WEGENER says
in his notes: “Probe aus dem Geröll unmittelbar über dem vorigen
— grüner Sandstein, offenbar unmittelbar über dem Kalk in 20 m.
dicker Lage anstehend (was wenig mehr östlich zu sehen war). Dann
kommen wieder helle und violette Kalke mit dunkelroten Bändern
von Conglomerate oder Sandstein wechselnd. Anscheinend vorherr-
schend Kalk bis zum Gipfel”.
The specimen of this green sandstone (N:o 187), which is a loose
piece weathered out from the rock-wall, and collected in the talus
greatly resembles the sandstone found at 190 m. above the sea and,
like the latter, is somewhat calcareous.
To judge by WEGENER’S notes, his ascent of the Mallemukfjaeld
524 KARL А. GRONWALL.
at the Conglomerate section did not much exceed the level of the
bituminous limestone and the sandstone superimposed on it, i.e., 200
—220 metres above the sea.
There are no specimens from a higher level, but only a loose
fragment which was obtained at a height of 170 m. above the sea
(N:o 174), but which probably comes from a higher bed above the
bituminous limestone. The rock is a gray, dense, clayey limestone,
probably with partings of a marly or shaly nature; it contains rich
fragments of fossils and, of megascopical remains, an Euomphalus
and a number of small Fusuline.
On the shore below the cliff, there have been collected a number
of free-lying boulders of various limestones, partly fossiliferous. Some
are stated to have been found W. of Kocn’s section and have been
mentioned in connection with that locality. Of others nothing more
is said respecting the locality where they were found than “Fugle-
fjældet”, and have probably been collected somewhat more to the
east than the profiles, and below the Mallemukfjæld itself. A great
number of these specimens must be considered as being derived
from the upper limestone strata in the Mallemukfjæld. These spe-
cimens will be discussed somewhat later on, in connection with the
collections that were made of free-lying stones at Eskimo Naze,
and in consequence of the great agreement existing between these
rock-specimens, one can, with tolerably great certainty, assume the
identity of some of them.
We shall, instead, now continue the discussion of this profile,
especially as compared with the profile contributed by JARNER to
NATHORST’s paper on the plant-fossils.
For the sake of lucidity, we must review the series of strata
that have been observed at the three localities W. of the Mallemuk-
fjeeld.
1) W. of Косн’ $ section.
There are specimens of sandstone from 85 and 155 metres above
the sea, and between these levels, shales have been found contain-
ing plant-fossils. Of the occurrence of limestone in the profile we
know only that boulders of limestone have been collected on the
shore.
2) KocH's Section.
At the following levels characteristic rocks have been observed
in the solid rock:
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 525
275 metres. Dark gray limestone, alternating with black, bitu-
minous shales.
240 —- Dark (gray) limestone, alternating with a black,
bituminous, shaly limestone.
200 — Gray limestone and red limestone (resembling the
Ambigua limestone of Beeren Eiland.)
100-130 — Shales.
o) the Conglomerate section.
At the following levels characteristic rocks have been observed
in the solid rock:
220 metres. Sandstone.
200 — Dark gray limestone, alternating with bituminous
shales.
199 — Sandstone.
185 = Limestone with traces of bituminous partings.
150 — Sandstone.
130 — Light limestone.
120 —. Conglomerate.
4) The profile communicated by JARNER to NATHORST has the fol-
lowing appearance:
500—275 metres e Limestone rich in corals.
275—240 — d" Fossiliferous sandstone.
240—200 — d Sandstone without fossils.
200—130 — с Conglomerate.
130—105 — b Gray shale.
105—100 — a Fine and soft black shale.
If we compare these conflicting statements, it will still be pos-
sible, however, to come to some result respecting the actual order
of the strata, and also to see the origin of JaRNER’s profile and
what is intended by it. The statements cannot be brought into full
agreement, however, but it is evident that, to obtain his profile,
JARNER has adopted the sequence of strata given in Kocn’s section
XLII. 40
526 KARL А. GRONWALL.
but has added to the latter some details from the Conglomerate
section. In addition it should be pointed out that a more detailed
examination of the rocks shows other results than those given in
the notes made by JARNER after the first cursory determination made
on the spot and entered in the diaries.
Fig. 3 shows a profile of the Mallemukfjæld, based on that given
by JARNER (Fig. 1), but corrected
in agreement with what has been
communicated above.
According to the extracts from
the diaries that:I have obtained,
the profile in question has its origin
in Captain Kocn’s diary: 20.4—
26.4 1907, from which the follow-
ing citations are given unaltered:
“80.09 Mallemukfjældet.
Up to 100 m. fell-debris.
Fig.3. Section of the carboniferous rocks 30 m. Shale with plant-fossils.
at Depot 80°09’. Revised according to 240—275 m. many fossil-shells.
the collected specimens. The cliff itself about 500 m. Sand-
100—105 m. fine and soft black shale
to the top. 7
105—130 m. gray shale, 130—200 m. intet à Sp Ascent not above
À m.
conglomerate alternating with sandstone
and light limestone. 200—275 m, dark 700 т. Sandstone in the whole”.
gray limestone, alternating with black
bituminous shale. The above communicated re-
view of the finds at Hekla Sound
show that JARNER’S profile is, in a high degree, generalized, and in
part must be modified. It should first of all be pointed out that
the thickness, as given, of the conglomerate cannot be controlled or
confirmed by the collections or by the notes that I have available
(WEGENER states — see above — thal the conglomerate alternates
with a light limestone). Secondly, JARNER’s series of strata, 200—
275 m. of sandstone, must be interpreted as a series of a partly bitu-
minous limestone alternating with layers of shales and sandstones of
various character. The series of strata from 200 to 275 m. in Kocn’s
Section probably corresponds to the series 150—220 m. in the Con-
glomerate Section, the bituminous rocks, especially, show such a
great agreement in regard to their fossils that a correlation can by
no means be considered as bold (the distance between these two
sections is not so very great, a few hundred metres, but unfortun-
ately it is not known with exactness: in accordance with this
combination of the series of strata, the deposits at the Conglo-
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 527
merate Section should lie about 50 m. lower than those at Kocn’s
Section).
However, the profile is, evidently, not so simple as JARNER has
drawn И, i.e., a simple transgression with basal conglomerate and
an even transition through somewhat finer-grained sandstones to
limestones that are certainly marine. In the Conglomerate Section,
as summarized above, there have been observed, in addition to the
conglomerate, three different beds of sandstone stratified alternately
with limestone, and WEGENER’s diary notes mention an alternate
stratification of conglomerate and a light limestone!.
The unconformity which is characterized by limestone strata
with marine fauna covering the sandstone which contains a land
flora, is evidently not the effect of a simple process, but the trans-
gression has taken place very slowly under slight oscil-
lations.
On the shore below the Mallemukfjæld there has been collected
a number of boulders containing fossils. Of these stones some
have been found У. of Kocn’s Section, and are connected with the
same rocks of that locality, and have been briefly mentioned above;
the others have probably been collected at the Mallemukfjæld itself,
where the ice-edge goes pretty high up on the side of the cliff.
These rocks present no agreement with the rocks in the two sect-
ions already mentioned, but are, in all certainty, derived from strata at
a higher level. On the other hand, these free-lying stones that have
been collected at the Mallemukfjæld show far greater agreement —
both as regards their petrological character and their fossil contents
— with the rock specimens that were collected at the Eskimo Naze,
these, too, being only free-lying stones. The Eskimo Naze is the
outermost north-eastern point of Holm’s Land, and lies a good 30 km.
north-east of the Mallemukfjæld. Here the shore is low and no solid
rock is seen there.
The specimens that were found at these two places can be divided
into three different groups, viz.:
a) coarse-grained limestone.
b) fined-grained —
c) silicified —
1 A quotation from Dr. WEGENER's diary kindly communicated to me by Captain
Косн includes the following remark on this matter: "Ein genaues Profil unter
Berucksichtigung aller Bånder erwies sich sehr kompliziert, da alle Lagen an
den Ubergangsstellen mehrfach wechsellagern”.
40%
528 KARL А. GRONWALL.
Of these, a) and b) appear to pass into each other, but the
silicified limestone does not seem to have any definite connection
with the other more pure limestones, but can very well derive its
origin, however, from some limestone of approximately similar char-
acter.
The coarse-grained limestone is gray in colour, often dark-mottled,
in consequence of the fact that a part of the fragments of fossils,
especially brachiopod spines, of which it contains a fairly large
number, are almost black. Of smaller-sized fossil-fragments, it con-
tains crinoid stems, fragments of bryozoa and brachiopod spines,
the latter being probably the most numerous. The fine-grained
limestone is lighter in colour, and has often a vellow-grayish tinge,
and contains considerably more of a crystalline matrix than the
coarse-grained. Here, of the smaller fossil fragments the brachiopod
spines diminish greatly in numbers, the fragments of bryozoa pro-
bably playing the more important röle.
The silicified limestone when freshly broken is dark gray in
colour, sometimes almost black, while on weathered surfaces it is
usually buff, with darker fossil-fragments, especially bryozoa of the
genus Fenestella. In the fracture it is almost dense and flint-like,
so that it is astonishing that, under the microscope, this rock proves
to have originally been a rather coarse-grained limestone which has
been altered by later infiltrations of silica. In its general appear-
ance, this rock may very well agree with the coarse-grained lime-
stone found here, but the fossil contents are somewhat different and
so are the structural details. Under the microscope this rock proves
to consist of numerous fragments of fossils in a very scanty matrix
containing only inconsiderable calcite, and consisting mostly of
chalcedon in aggregate-polarizing masses. The fossil-fragments which
are, partly, of a fairly considerable size, are crinoid stem-joints (in
a majority), parts of bryozoa and brachiopod spines; they have not
become silicified but the calcite substance they contain is unaltered.
In addition to the brachiopods, these rocks contain but few
forms of preserved fossils, although fragments occur very numerously.
The two limestone species contain about the same fossils, of which
may be noted Alveolites sp. and a bryozoan with a very wide and
prostrate zoary. In the silicified rock, the genus Fenestella is fairly
numerous. The fossil contents of these rocks are about the same,
both from the Mallemukfjæld and from the Eskimo Мате.
These rocks present a certain resemblance to certain rocks
occurring in the carboniferous deposits of Spitzbergen; thus, certain
fragments of the coarse-grained limestone resemble the Spirifer lime-
stone of Lovén’s Mountain on the Hinlopen Strait, and the silicified
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Green]. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 529
limestone, especially as regards the weathered specimens, the Pro-
ductus flint of Spitzbergen.
Of these rocks there are the following numbers in the col-
lections:
a) Of the coarse-grained limestone:
from the Mallemukfjæld: N:os 142 and 167.
— - Eskimo Naze: N:0s196,197,205b, 208 and 213 (pars).
b) Of the fine-grained limestone:
from the Mallemukfjæld: N:os 149, 153 and 154.
— - Eskimo Naze: N:os 198, 203 and 204.
c) Of the silicified limestone:
from the Mallemukfjæld: N:o 159.
— - Eskimo Nase: N:os 205 а, 207, 210, 211, 212 and
213 (pars).
These rocks contain fairly numerous brachiopods, and, in the
paleontological description it is stated in which of the specimens
named the respective species are found, while in the list given
p. 589, there is mentioned only the fossil-contents of the diffe-
rent kinds of rock. Regarding specimen 154 of the fine-grained
limestone which has given such a wealth of species that their
unquestionable occurrence in one stratum is specially worthy of
mention, see p. 591.
B. The localities on the South Coast of Amdrup’s Land.
On the northern side of Ingolf’s Fjord, on the south coast of
Amdrup’s Land, fossils and fossiliferous rock have been collected
by Dr. WEGENER. at several places, which, reckoning from west to
east, can be summarized under three headings: the Western river;
the Eastern river and the Cape Jungersen section. I
should be mentioned now that Kocn’s map shows only one river,
which goes down to the shore here on the south coast of Amdrup’s
Land, and that this river lies W. of WEGENER’s camping place 29/4
—2/5. If the hut marked on WEGENER’s sketch stands for this
camping place, the river marked on the map would, therefore, be
the western one, and then we should be able to calculate the
distance between the Eastern and the Western rivers at 8—9
km. This was also ascertained by kind communication of Captain
Koch and amended on the map Pl. XXX. These three localities,
consequently, lie approximately in the direction of the dip of the
strata, and the difference in age between the various levels can here
(as was the case for the localities at Hekla Sound) be noted with
fairly great probability, even if, in consequence of our wanting exact
530 KARL А. GRONWALL.
information respecting the dip, it is impossible to draw up any reli-
able, continuous profile.
A sketch by WEGENER, shown in Fig. 4, gives, however, a fairly
acceptable grouping of the material obtained at the western river,
\ West) Elf Ost. EU.
Uryeste\ Gletscher Moränen 6 782
Ge end | д
Fundorte der Stücke 6 -17.
Fig. 4. The localities on the south coast of Amdrup’s Land.
Sketch by Wegener.
if taken in connection with the notes in his diary. In the follow-
ing account of the rocks, the numbers employed by WEGENER are
given in leaded type near the margin.
The Western River and the Coast on both sides of it,
to the Eastern River.
“6. Küstenfelsen, Gipfel (nur hier im Tage tretend), westlichster
Punkt mit festem Gestein, 110 т.”.
The material (N:o 147) consists of a light-gray, somewhat red-
dish, fairly crystalline limestone, where the fossils consist of some
small ostracoda, unimportant fragments of trilobites and a number
of crinoid stems. Under the microscope one can see some frag-
mentary fossils of various kind inbedded in a matrix of crystalline
calcite.
“7. Gipfelgestein, wenig mehr südöstlich, 100 m.; anscheinend
ohne Foss.”
“8. Gipfelgestein, N:o 7, ähnlich, mehr fest mit Foss. Steht
etwas mehr südöstlich ап”.
Of these rocks, there are two specimens (N:os 137 and 156),
both of which are a grayish, somewhat calcareous sandstone res-
embling the sandstones occurring in the sections at Hekla Sound,
and evidently formed like these direct from the degradation-products
of archæan rocks. The specimen from the most western locality
shows a somewhat thinner bedded and shaly sandstone than that
from the most eastern — 8 — which is a thick-bedded and com-
pact sandstone. The specimen shows no fossils, but the character
of the rock makes it probable that it contains plant remains.
“9. Gipfelgestein. Dunkel-violetter Kalk mit Foss. 110 m. Et-
was weiter südöstlich auf dem vorigen aufsitzend. NB. dasselbe
wie 15—19?”
This limestone (N:o 163) is a dark, somewhat bituminous lime-
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 931
stone, which, of megascopic fossils contains only crinoid stem-
joints and a short species of Fusulina or, perhaps, Fusulinella, rather.
Under the microscope it proves to consist of very closely packed
fragments of fossils, with but little matrix, that which exists of the
latter, however, being calcite. This rock bears a great resemblance
to the dark limestone (N:o 146) mentioned below, which, however,
lies considerably lower in the series of strata.
All the specimens previously treated of are derived from the
low hill-tops west of the western river, and next follows a series of
specimens collected at the river and direct eastwards from it. From
the profile and the notes in the diary it can be concluded that
these last named specimens are derived from beds lying lower in
the series of strata than the mountain-tops in the west.
“10. Nahe östlich von dem vorigen, an der Mündung eines Elfs
(Cannon) 10 m. also wohl das tiefste anstehende Gestein. Mit Foss.
(wenig), fast schwarz’.
This rock (N.o 158) is a dense dark-gray, somewhat bituminous
limestone, the larger fossil contents of which include fragments of
brachiopods and of some smaller Primitia-like ostracoda and, pro-
bably, Fusulinella.
‘Та, №. Darüber lagernd mehr grünliche, durch Verwitterung
auch rotgefärbte Kalk- oder Sandsteine (wechsellagernd mehrere Male
mit dem dunkeln Gestein, von dem wenigstens 2 dunkle Bander in
dem Sandstein gesehen wurden; das dunkle Gestein bisweilen schie-
ferig). Reihenfolge wahrscheinlich unten 10, darüber 11a, darüber
11b, dann wieder Ila, Ilb, Ша und ähnliche, mehr und mehr
gelblich rote Sandsteine (wie 6, 7, 8), bis zum Gipfel”.
The specimens belonging to this group (N:o 164) are, firstly
(11а), a gray-green sandy clay-shale or, possibly, a sandstone shale,
slightly calcareous, and irregularly bedded; secondly, (115), a very
impure gray-green limestone in which no fossils could be observed
megascopically, with the exception of some unimportant fragments
of coal-substance. The rock contains iron in a very high degree,
and is very similar to clay ironstone.
On microscopic examination, it proved to be greatly different
to the other limestones occurring in these sections. The matrix
consists chiefly of particles of calcite, mostly of a crystalline nature,
but sometimes containing impurities, being then only slightly cryst-
alline in structure. There also occurs yellowish siderite in fairly
large quantities, usually rusty and weathered. Small angular grains
of quartz lie fairly evenly distributed throughout the whole mass.
Organic parts are exceedingly scarce, the only ones distinguish-
able being irregular shell-fragments of crystalline calcite, probably
532 KARL А. GRÖNWALL.
derived from molluscan shells (gastropoda and lamellibranchiata); all
the fragments of bryozoa, brachiopod spines and foraminifera, which
were so common in the other limestones, are, on the other hand,
entirely absent. As was stated above, this rock alternates with an
irregularly stratified clayey sandstone, its nature recalling in a high
degree deposits of impure clay ironstone (spherosiderite) in terrestrial
strata. The coal fragments it contains also support such an inter-
pretation, as does the absence of smaller organic fragments, which
are so prominent in the other limestones in the series, even if, mega-
scopically, these appear perfectly dense.
Somewhat further eastwards, east of the mouth of the river,
some rock specimens were also obtained:
“12 (bildet mit 13 und 14 ein Profil) etwas östlich von der EIf-
mündung, ca. 10 m. über d. Meere. Dunkler Kalk, etwas grünlich
getönt, mit kleinen weissen Fossilien. Untere Grenze verdeckt, ca.
2 m. Dicke freilegend. Oben übergehend in
13. Dem vorigen ähnlich, mehr schieferig. Anscheinend ohne
Foss. Nur etwa Ч m. dick.
14. Rötlicher Sandstein (?) mit zahlreichen in Nestern zusam-
mensitzenden Fossilien, von ca. 5 m. über dem Meere ab aufwärts,
ca. 30 m. freiliegend”.
This series consists of three specimens; 12 of a limestone (N:o
146) almost black and somewhat bituminous; it is unevenly bedded
and appears to possess partings of more shaly or marly character.
13 is a gray clay shale (N:o 162), fairly well stratified and slightly
calcareous. 14 is a yellow-red limestone (N:o 136) with alternat-
ing deposits of clay, recalling the Ambigua limestone of Beeren
Eiland, and agreeing perfectly with the red limestone which, in
Kocn’s profile, was found, partly in situ at 200 т. (№0 155) and
partly as boulders at a somewhat lower level (N:os 143, 144 and 194).
The dark limestone (№0 146) contains of megascopically visible
fossils nothing but crinoid stem-joints and a few ostracoda. Under
the microscope it proves to contain numerous fragments of organ-
isms in addition to crinoid-parts, foraminifera, which are specially
numerous, both a Fusulina (fairly numerously represented) and,
more rarely, Tetrataxis and Bigenerina and rotaliform species. There
are, in addition some few young forms of gastropods and fragments
of brachiopod shells. These fossil-fragments which are, partly, pre-
served in crystalline calcite or enclose this substance, seem to lie
inbedded in an almost dense matrix.
The red limestone (N:o 136) has, megascopically, a uniform, very
finely crystalline appearance, which is broken only by some few
crinoid stem-joints. Under the microscope this rock proves to consist
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 5383
of small fragments of organisms, the origin of which can but seldom
be determined, but which, as a rule, are rounded and are probably
rolled, and cemented together by crystalline calcite. In the lime-
stone there were observable some fragments of brachiopod shells
and a couple of Fusulinae. In the limestone mass there occurs in
the joints of strata a red-brown clayey mass, pointing to shaly
partings.
As far as can be judged from the diary-notes and the sketch
of the find-localities, the sequence of the deposits reckoning from
below upwards should be as follows: 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 6, 7, 8, 9,
1.е., a series of strata consisting of alternate deposits of limestone
(predominantly dark-gray and almost black, but also reddish and
red-brown) and shales, in the superior part of which series there
exists an intermediate stratum of sandstone.
The other material found were free-lying stones and are probably
derived from about the same level as 9, or probably somewhat
higher up in the series. WEGENER speaks as follows of these pieces:
“15. Muschel (?) in dunklem Kalk auf dem Meereise aufgesam-
melt. Offenbar anstehend (durch dunkle Färbung markiert) in etwa 80 m.
Höhe (von unten geschätzt). Etwas länger östlich vom letzten Profil.
16. Dasselbe, grösseres Stück mit kleineren Foss. Diese beide
Stücke gehören also sicher über das letzte Profil.
“17. Offenbar dasselbe, wie 16. 20 minuten von unserem Zelt als vor-
springende Klippe in ca.60 m. Höhe aufstehend (die best erhaltene Steil-
klippe westlich unseres Lagers). Am Abhang im Geröll aufgesammelt”.
Although these pieces were found free-lying, and their strati-
graphical position, consequently, is somewhat uncertain, still they
are of fairly great importance on account of the fossils they contain.
15, is a fragment of dark-gray clayey limestone (N:o 161), or,
perhaps, and, equally well, a marly shale with interbeddings of a
somewhat more calcareous nature. On the surface the colour is
somewhat lighter, in consequence of weathering, and the dark colour,
as well as other circumstances point to some percentage of bitumen.
The rock contains a number of small fragments, such as of brachio-
pod spines, etc., and a part of a Spirifer — the umbonal portion of
a ventral valve. This is specially badly preserved, but both its
general form, the great thickness and massive build of the shell,
and what can be seen of the cardinal teeth and the dental plates
make it extremely probable that this shell belongs to Spirifer supra-
mosquensis Nik., even if nothing of the sculpture of the shell is
visible. The petrographical character of the rock, as far as can be
judged by the unimportant fragment at my disposal, speaks, too, for
a relationship with the limestone and shale beds in Kocn’s section
534 KARL А. GRONWALL.
and, still more, with those in the Conglomerate section containing
Spirifer supramosquensis. In addition to this Spirifer the material
contains a fragment of a very small brachiopod shell preserved in
light-blue calcedon, which forms a connection with specimen 16,
which, however, is somewhat more red-gray and lighter in colour,
and is a denser limestone. This fragment (№0 158) contains, in
addition to the above-mentioned brachiopod-shell in blue chalcedon,
probably belonging to a species of Chonetes, a couple of indetermin-
able shell-fragments of another brachiopod and crinoid stems. The
third piece, 17, which WEGENER wishes to place in the same
category with the two already mentioned, presents some points of
dissimilarity from these. The rock (N:o 160) is a light red-gray
limestone, containing both larger and smaller fossils. Of brachio-
pods it contains a somewhat large dorsal valve of Productus punctatus
MARTIN, and a couple of compressed and badly preserved specimens
— both the ventral and dorsal valves — of a species of Productus be-
longing to the semireticulatus group, and a little ventral valve of another
Productus. In the rock there lie scattered fine, short spines of Prod.
punctatus, and also coarser, as much as 2 cin. long spines of the
species belonging to the semireticulatus group. Of smaller fossils the
material contains numerous crinoid stem-joints, and also some scat-
tered specimens of Fusulinella.
Even if the darker (158) and the lighter limestone (160) present,
exteriorly, a certain dissimilarity, still, the texture of the rock in
both is fairly analogous and, under the microscope, the two speci-
mens have a great resemblance to each other and to the red lime-
stone (№0 136). The dark limestone contains a fairly large amount
of a dark clayey substance filling the interstices between the part-
icles of calcite, and has only rarely foraminifera, partly rotaliform
and partly of the genus Tetrataxis. The light-red limestone shows
numerous sections of Fusulinide.
The Eastern River.
Farther to the east, at the river in the immediate neighbour-
hood of the camping-place, WEGENER has measured a profile through
the strata, or, more correctly speaking, he has made two, connected
with each other, the one at the mouth of the river, embracing
WEGENER’S specimens 18—23, and one farther up the river: spe-
cimens 34—31.
The lowest levels in these profiles present a certain likeness
to the rocks from the hill-tops farther to the west, and, according
to WEGENER’s sketch, they should lie pretty close above these
latter.
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 585
The lowest stratum in the profile at the river-mouth (N:os 106
and 118) consists of a limestone or a calcareous shale with numer-
ous fossils, which occur chiefly in the alternating calcareous depos-
its; of these may be noticed corals: a Syringopora and a large trunk
of a tabulate coral; of bryozoa especially a Fenestella, and several
examples of a Bellerophon and of a little gastropod. The rock is
dark-gray, with a tinge of violet; the shaly layers with fossils in
the more calcareous alternating deposits are probably the most
prevalent, but there occurs, in addition — to judge from the free-
lying material (N:o 118), an impure, very compact limestone, which
is highly recrystallized, and does not contain any other mega-
scopic fossils than some few branches of Bryozoa and, possibly, a
little species of Cladochonus. Of this rock only 2 metres are exposed,
and its position is 2 metres above sea-level.
Above this limestone follows a series of limestones, termed by
WEGENER “Knollenkalk” and with regard to which he states:
“Ca. 50 m. dick, von demselben Character. Probe aus den
untersten Lagen, hier hell und sauber, weiter oben dunkler”. There
are specimens of different limestones from several places in this
series of strata, as a rule dense in appearance, but which, on closer
examination, prove to contain fossils in smaller or greater numbers.
The specimens from the various levels are given in the sequence
in which they occur.
From the lowest part of this limestone series there are speci-
mens ofa light, gray-yellow, dense limestone (N:os 117, 127 and 105),
which, under the microscope, proves to contain a fairly large amount
of organic fragments: crinoid stem-joints, brachiopod spines and
foraminifera, inbedded in a pretty dense matrix. Here and there
the rock presents slickensides covered with a dark coating. In this
limestone there are silicified portions which have a more or less
flint-like and concretional appearance, to which WEGENER’s term
“Knollenkalk’’, evidently refers. On a microscopic examination of
the limestone it proved to contain parts where a silicification had
begun. A thin section from N:o 105, especially — which specimen
also contained a flint-like concretion — presented a silicification of
fragments of crinoid-stems, which showed a transformation to chal-
cedon, of a yellowish colour. A thin section from N:o 127 proved
to contain a few Fusuline.
Somewhat higher up in the profile, 15 metres above the level
of the sea, begins a dense gray limestone without any larger fossils
(N:o 114), from which, on the weathered surface project a few
fragments of crinoid stems, preserved in a red-yellow chalce-
don substance. The weathered surface presents fairly richly sec-
536 KARL А. GRÖNWALL.
tions of Fusuline. Under the microscope the rock agrees fully with
N:o 105.
The next higher level from which there is material available
is 35 m. above the sea-level. Here begins a red-gray, highly re-
erystallized dolomite (N:o 124), in which fossils are no longer pre-
served. The entire mass is crystalline, with some few holes, probably
after fossils. Here and there exist larger erystal-masses which, prob-
ably, chiefly represent fragments of crinoids. On treatment with
LEMBERG’s re-agent, the whole mass proved to consist of dolomite.
From the same
level (35 m. above
sea-level) there is
a specimen (№0
107) of another
rock, which has
also been highly
altered, but in an-
other direction. No
mention is made,
however, of the
relative positions
of the two rocks.
The rock now
in question is an
almost white or
faintly yellowish-
gray, mottled sili-
ceous rock, which
does not at all ef-
Fig. 5. Slide of the siliceous rock from “the Eastern River”. fervesce on treat-
Amdrup’s Land. Specimen N:o 107. Enlarged 12 diam. ment with hydro-
chloric acid, so
that the original calcareous constituents have been entirely removed.
The rock is porous, however, so that it cannot be called a flint, but
probably represents an intermediate stage in the formation of flint
or of a siliceous rock. Of larger fossils it contains only some few
imprints of larger crinoid stem-joints, which, like other cavities
after fossils, can be clothed with secondary quartz-crystals. As above
mentioned, the rock-mass is almost white, but it is filled with more
or less perfect specimens of foraminifera, chiefly Fusulina, although
Bigenerina and rotaliform species are also present. The shells of
these foraminifera are preserved in a yellowish-red chalcedon-mass
which, to some degree, gives the rock a mottled appearance. Under
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 537
the microscope the silicification is distinctly visible, and both the
chalcedon — usually of a somewhat yellowish-red colour in the
transformed shell parts — and the new-formed colourless quartz,
can be observed very clearly. Fig. 5 shows a thin section of this
rock.
There have been obtained some pieces of Chaetetes radians
FıscH. (№0 100) from a height of 60 metres above the sea-level,
entirely altered into dolomite, but otherwise extraordinarily well pre-
served. In colour they are of a yellowish-white, and the fragments
of rock to which they were attached are a dense, light gray-red
rock, which does not re-act on the addition of hydrochloric acid
and, consequently, is probably entirely altered into dolomite.
At two higher levels there occur highly recrystallized limestones,
dolomitic in a high degree, but still retaining some of the original
calcareous matter. Neither contain fossils. At a height of 75—80
metres there occurred, in a bed 5 metres thick, a very hard, almost
black or dark gray rock, which effervesced but feebly on the
addition of hydrochloric acid (N:o 104) and thus forming a fairly pure
crystalline dolomite. Somewhat higher, at 85 m. above the sea,
there was a closely allied rock (N:o 116); it was yellowish-gray in
colour and fairly loose in texture, finely crystalline and, on a super-
ficial examination, resembled a sandstone. On the addition of hydro-
chloric acid, effervescence ensued, and so it possibly still contains
some carbonate of lime. In the rock there were some gliding-sur-
faces with a black coating which at once attracts the attention.
At a level of 90 metres above the sea there occur other rocks
viz., partly, a shaly bituminous, almost black limestone (N:o 119),
containing rather numerous fossil fragments, especially crinoid stem-
joints and brachiopod spines, which are specially prominent on
weathered rock surfaces, that acquire a greenish-gray tinge and,
secondly, a somewhat crystalline dark gray limestone (N:o 125) which,
with some amount of certainty, may be stated to alternate with the
more shaly rocks. This bituminous shale agrees very well in ha-
bitus with similar rocks on the north side of Hekla Sound, both in
Косн’$ section and in the Conglomerate section. The specimen
brought home from this locality in Ingolf’s Fjord has not given any
fossil allowing of a closer comparison between these rocks in Ingolf’s
Fjord, while, of the fossils found in the more compact rock (№0 125),
it has only been possible to determine Productus longispinus Sow.
WEGENER’S diary gives the following information respecting the
rocks lying at a higher level and above this bituminous limestone:
“Schiefer ohne Foss. 105 m.
“Sehr bröckliger Sandstein, den grünen Lehm liefernd, ohne
538 KARL А. GRONWALL.
Foss. 120 m. Verwitterungsprodukte hiervon bis 5 m. unter dem
Gipfel (130 m.)”.
The shale (N:o 126) is a black shale with straight cleavage, con-
taining a fairly great amount of combustible matter, and some per-
centage of carbonate of lime. Of organic remains there was only
one object, 2 mm. in size, which is possibly a fish-vertebra, and
there is nothing to tell us with certitude if this is a marine or a
terrestrial deposit.
The sandstone (N:o 101) is light-gray in colour, does not efferv-
esce on the addition of hydrochloric acid, very much resembles
other light sandstones within the district and, like these, seems to
be formed of the products of degradation of a granite. As mentioned
before, this sandstone is the highest stratum reached in these sections.
Here, in Ingolf’s Fjord, consequently, there have been measured
profiles which, as will be seen by what has already been stated,
represent a series of strata of at least 200 metres. This series very
much resembles that which was observed in the sections at Hekla
Sound, and the transgression of the marine Carboniferous deposits
has, here too, progressed in several stages, and oscillations in the
sea-level have led to the alternate deposition of the fossiliferous lime-
stone series and the sandstone deposits. The analogy between the
profiles becomes all the more striking if we take into consideration
that, here, in Ingolf’s Fjord too, there is, farther to the east, a profile
which, in a predominant degree consists of the limestones in the
Cape Jungersen section, of which a more detailed account will be
given below.
The Cape Jungersen Section.
This section has been measured in a mountain on the south
coast of Amdrup’s Land, at the mouth of Ingolf’s Fjord, east of the
two river profiles that have just been described. If close attention
be paid to the map Pl. XXX, there will be found given there as
the promontory forming the southernmost extremity of Amdrup’s
Land, Cape Jungersen, and, directly westwards of this name, two
mountain tops, the most westerly, 510 metres, and the easternmost
400 metres in height. It is impossible to decide with certainty from
which of these tops the collection designated as the Cape Jungersen
section has been obtained. From WEGENER’s sketch-map I am most
inclined to take the western height, but, on the other hand, he
mentions in his notes that the rocks of which the top consists, have
been taken from a height of between 300 and 400 metres.
Captain Косн has kindly communicated to me that Cape Jun-
gersen is the whole mountain and that the fossils were collected by
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 539
Dr. WEGENER on the land that lies nearest to the camping place of
4/5, and the probable place for the Cape Jungersen section is marked
on the map Pl. XXX according to this statement.
Up to a height of 65 metres above the sea, the foot of the hill
is covered with talus; at the height mentioned there begins a white
limestone (N:o 112) in which, at a height of 70 metres above sea-
level, there is interstratified a 5 metres thick bed of a light-gray
limestone (№0 135) with a somewhat reddish or yellowish tinge.
This limestone is very dense and somewhat splintery, and, of fossils,
contains some bra-
chiopods, among
which Dielasma sp,
whose shells in
this dense rock are
entirely decompo-
sed, so that they
cannot be specifi-
cally determined.
The white lime-
stone (N:o 112),
presents some pe-
trographical pecu-
liarities which it
possesses in com-
mon with a lime-
stone (N:o 102)
which has been
obtained at а some-
what higher level,
between 100 and Fig. 6. Slide of the gray limestone, specimen N:o 102,
from the Cape Jungersen section. Enlarged 12 diam.
110 metres above
the sea. A detailed
description of the structure of these two rock-species will, therefore,
be given below.
№0 102 is a stratified limestone without megascopic fossils; it
is of a light gray colour with black particles. On a closer examin-
ation of a surface of stratification it is found that this rock is, so
to say, “а conglomerate in miniature’, for the surface in question
presents numerous, somewhat irregular rounded or oblong grains
about 1 to 2 mm. in length, which often possess such a smooth sur-
face that, in the case of grains of a more regular form, one is led
to imagine the possibility of an organic origin, ostracodan shells,
for example. The microscopic examination spreads full light on the
540 Kart А. GRÖNWALL.
nature and formation of this rock. Fig.6, shows a microphotograph
of this rock, the section taken a right angles to the stratification.
It shows clearly that the rock consists of rolled fragments of various
parts of fossils, inbedded in a matrix consisting chiefly of crystal-
line calcite. These “pebbles”, however, do not consist entirely of
rolled fossils and fragments of fossils, but also of parts of a rock
containing fossils; 1.е., the products of the degradation of a rock
that was already solidified. Among the fossils that can be deter-
mined with certainty, Fusuline and other foraminifera are speci-
ally numerous, be-
sides which there
also occur frag-
ments of bryozoa
and crinoids. Of
inorganic matter
there are numer-
ous small grains
of quartz, about
0.1 mm. in size. In
some laminæ the
quartz is more
prominent, so as
to form almost
a sandstone, as
shown in the up-
per part of fig. 6.
The white lime-
stone (N:0 112) has,
megascopically,
Fig. 7. Slide of the white crystalline limestone, specimen Very little resem-
N:o 112, from the Cape Jungersen section. Enlarged 15 diam. blance to the rock
just described, it
being an entirely white rock of almost crystalline appearance, with
small cavities spread within the mass; the fracture of the rock is
uneven but, even with the aid of a pocket-lens magnifying to ten
diam., it is impossible to distinguish with certainty the constituent
parts of the rock. Under the microscope, on the other hand, the
real nature of the rock becomes very clear, and the microphotograph,
Fig. 7, gives a good representation of its appearance. It is seen at
once that the original formation of this rock is almost analogous
with that of the rock described above, but that it has undergone a
more complete diagenesis than the latter. The “pebbles” found here
are somewhat larger, and sometimes even exceed 3 mm. in length;
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 541
among them the fragments of crinoid-stems and foraminifera, Fusul-
ina especially, are the most numerous. There is a total absence of
quartz-grains, and the matrix is here more prominent than in N:o
102. This rock too, has undergone a more complete diagenesis than
N:o 102, being entirely transformed into crystalline calcite. In addit-
ion to this re-crystallization, a subordinate silicification has taken
place, which has affected parts of the matrix and the “pebbles”,
and which has there been observed in the crinoid-stems.
It is evident that these rocks have been formed in very shallow
water, and perhaps actually at the shore, as such a rolling and
attrition as are seen here can hardly have taken place in deeper
waters. In addition to the fact that they give us further examples
of the oscillations of level that occurred during the formation of
this series of carboniferous strata, they also afford support to the
opinion that has been brought forward from other quarters! respect-
ing the conditions of existence of the Fusulinide, i.e., that these
organisms belonged to the benthonic fauna of shallow seas. The
greatest possibility is, of course, that these rolled fragments are de-
rived from the organic life that existed in the shallow water off the
shore, even if we cannot entirely deny the possibility of a rock —
a Fusulina limestone — which was already deposited and solidified,
having undergone entire degradation along the edge of the shore.
At a somewhat higher level, between 100 and 110 metres above
the sea, there outcrop limestone deposits; a gray-green, fairly
dense limestone (N:o 131) in which only crinoid stem-joints could
be observed; a light yellow-gray, very finely crystalline limestone
(N:o 122) from 115 metres above sea-level, and a red-gray tinged
limestone (N:os 103 and 134), greatly resembling the foregoing from
120 metres above the sea. In this rock there were numerous crinoid
stem-joints and some few sections of a rugose coral and a Fusulina.
At 150 metres above the level of the sea there were found talus
boulders of limestone (N:os 109, 113 and 133), which Dr. WEGENER
assumes to be derived from the limestone lying at the same level.
The fossils are two specimens of an Euomphalus and some frag-
ments of rugose corals and bryozoa. The rock is a reddish-gray,
dense and somewhat variable limestone of coarser grain than any
of the limestones forming part of the Cape Jungersen section. То
some degree, but not perfectly, it bears a resemblance to the finer
grained limestone (р. 528) occurring in the Mallemukfjæld, and among
the loose blocks on the Eskimo Naze.
Afterwards there have been no specimens collected from the
1 STAFF u. WEDEKIND, 1910. Pp. 85—86.
XLIII. 41
542 KARL А. GRONWALL.
solid rock before a height is reached of 210 metres above the sea,
from which we have one of a white, crystalline limestone (N:o 110),
a rock which agrees perfectly with that previously described (N:o
112), and evidently of the same origin as the latter.
In his diary-notes Dr. WEGENER states: “Bei 210 m. beginnt
еше grosse Schutthalde, welche roten und grünen Sandstein verhüllt,
und fast ganz aus Bruchstücken des Gipfelkalkes besteht (nach der
grünlichen Farbe)”, — There are two specimens of this red “sand-
stone”, both procured as talus boulders, one (N:o 150) at 210 metres
above the sea, the other (N:o 132) at 100 metres. On closer examin-
ation, this rock
proves, how-
ever, to be, not
a sandstone but
a limestone. It
is extremely
finely crystal-
line, and, on
weathering, the
rock gives the
impression of
being а fine-
grained sand-
stone. Diluted
hydrochloric
acid dissolves
Fig. 8. Slide of the red limestone, containing quartz- the rock com-
grains from the Cape Jungersen section, specimen N:o pletely, leaving
132. Enlarged 3 diam. This thin section shows the an unimportant
irregular shape and extension of the tubes,
considered to be “alge”. residuum of
reddish quartz-
grains. Both pieces are red, with white spots, and have a mottled
surface. From specimen 132, the surface of which is somewhat
weathered, it is seen that these white calcareous parts are definitely
outlined remains of some organic origin (the case is probably the
same with N:o 130, but I have not been able to decide the matter
with certainty, as I did not consider it right to sacrifice any of the
little fragment at my disposal to make a thin section). These tube-
shaped calcareous formations are about 1 mm. thick, have a wind-
ing, irregular course and sometimes have ramifications. In some
of the specimens one can see on the surface that they are hollow,
so that their form can be called cylindrical.
A thin section of these formations (Fig. 8—9) shows, on micro-
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 548
scopical examination, that the limestone contains small angular
grains of quartz, and also that the organic formations above-ment-
ioned, are preserved in calcite, and that it is easy to determine
their shape. Their forms lead us to think more immediately of a
connection with algæ. My thin sections show that they possess a
perceptible cavity in the middle, and also a fairly thick exterior
wall which appears to be undulate interiorly, and thereby appar-
ently able to enclose small, divided compartments in the said wall.
A closer, expert examination of this peculiar fossil will, prob-
ably, be carried out
before any very
great time has
elapsed.
In addition to
the purely phyto-
paleontological
importance of this
discovery, it is also
of stratigraphical
weight, as it points
to a shallow water,
and to an algal
vegetation grow-
ing there.
The whole of
the profile that has
been observed
with certainty in
the Cape Junger-
sen section, con-
Fig. 9. Slide of the red limestone, containing quartz-grains
| å from the Cape Jungersen section, specimen N:o 132. Enlarged
sists, therefore, of 8 diam. This thin section shows some tubes of the “alge”
limestone, and presenting the interior cavity and the undulate structure
there exists no of the wall.
evidence showing
the presence of any interbedding of sandstone in the series. The
limestones that have thus been found in situ present no decided
resemblances to the rocks in the Mallemukfjeld and at Eskimo
Naze, but, in general, are somewhat finer in grain than these, and
only some few fragments (N:os 109, 113 and 133), which, in addi-
tion, are not known, of a certainty, to have been found in situ,
have any connection with the finer-grained rocks from the Malle-
mukfjæld.
On the slope of the hill there have been found several limestone
41*
544 KARL А. GRONWALL.
boulders (N:os 111, 120, 128 and 129) containing fossil remains, the
rocks in these cases presenting a nearer agreement with those from
the Mallemukfjæld and the Eskimo Naze, especially as regards the
finer-grained specimens, even if there also exists some connection
with the coarser-grained too.
Ata height of 60 metres above the sea there was found in gray,
fairly fine-grained limestone (N:o 129), a large trunk of a Syringo-
pora, and unimportant remains of other corals.
At 165 metres above the sea were found the other three (N-os
111, 120 and 128), all containing brachiopods, and Dr. WEGENER
considers them to derive their origin from the limestone at the
summit of the mountain. N:o 111 is the rock in closest agreement
with those from Mallemukfjzld—Eskimo Naze, and can hardly be
distinguished from them. It is a grayish-yellow,. fairly finely cry-
stalline limestone, containing some few grains of a dark mineral,
and some fossil remains, especially silicified brachiopod shells.
There is also a fairly well preserved ventral valve of a Spirifer (n.
sp., ex. aff. Sp. duplicicostae PHILL.).
Each of the other two fragments (N:os 120 and 128) contains a
silicified speeimen of the ventral valve of a large Productus; N:o
120 of Pr. boliviensis 4’Овв., and N:o 128 of Pr. inflatus М’Снезм.
Both rocks are somewhat more coarsely crystalline than N:o 111,
and do not seem to contain any dark constituent parts.
As the strata here in Ingolf’s fjord, like those at Hekla Sound,
dip to the east, we have here, in the Cape Jungersen section and
the River sections, too, parts of a continuous profile, where the
purer limestones at the top are superimposed on the alternating
sandstone and limestone strata in the lower parts of the profile.
С. Sophus Müller’s Naze and Henrik Kréyer’s Islets.
In addition to the collections that-were made on the south coast
of Amdrup’s Land in Ingolf’s fjord, there are also some smaller ones
from the eastern part of Amdrup’s Land, on the south side of Ant-
arctic Bay, viz., a) WEGENER’S collections from Henrik Kröyer’s Islets
and the mainland behind them (27. 4. 1907), which places, in WE-
GENER’S diaries, and on the labels, are given as “Observationse ved
nordligste Teltplads” (Observation island; the most northern camp-
ing-place) and “nordligste Teltplads paa Fastlandet” (the northern-
most camping place on the mainland), and b) the collections that
were made (26.4) at Sophus Miller's Naze (on the labels marked
“Eskimoboplads 80°55’), and probably carried home to the vessel by
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 545
Captain Косн on his return from the great sledging expedition. At
the former places the collections were made both from the solid
rock and of free-lying fragments; at the last-named place, of free-
lying boulders alone.
Henrik Kröyer’s Islets and the Mainland behind them.
The rocks visible here are all dolomites of fairly crystalline
character.
On the mainland there outcrops ata height of 30 metres above
the sea, a light gray yellow, strongly crystalline dolomite (N:o 201),
in which no fossils could be observed. Similar rocks occur on the
islets, one of them a pure, light-gray dolomite (N:o 172), without
fossils, found at 10 metres above the sea, and another a dark
gray, fairly porous and loose dolomite (N:o 173), at 3 metres above
sea-level. In this rock there were found traces of fossils, probably
belonging to a coral of a genus closely related to Amplexus; other
remains could not be at all clearly identified. In all these dolomites,
there exist small groups of dolomite crystals.
On Henrik Kroyer’s islets there were collected a number of
free-lying fossils (№0 191), altogether 16 specimens of different kinds.
Among those must be noticed a silicified specimen of Productus timani-
cus STUCK., as the only brachiopod, preserved in a white dolomitic
limestone which is in very close agreement with the white limestone
from the Cape Jungersen section. In addition, there are a number
of fragments of a rugose coral, some with rock attached; it is a light
gray limestone with a faint reddish tinge; is almost dense or very
finely crystalline in structure, and contains some scattered specimens
of Schwagerina princeps MÖLL.; it much resembles the fine-grained
limestones found free-lying at about 150 metres above the sea in
the Cape Jungersen section (N:os 100, 113 and 133). The other frag-
ments are, in general, more or less silicified, and are portions of
the rugose coral already mentioned, or also of trunks of a Syringopora.
From the mainland behind Henrik Kröyer’s islets there are
also a number of free-lying fossils and fragments of rock contain-
ing fossils (N:os 206 and 214). |
N:o 206 are silicified fragments of a light rock containing the
same coral as that found on Henrik Kröyer’s Islets, and some poor
examples of a Spirifer.
N:o 214 embraces limestone fragments of various kinds con-
taining fossils of several different species.
N:o 214a is a trunk of a Syringopora, probably S. geniculata
PHILL., preserved in a finely crystalline light gray yellow limestone.
546 KARL А. GRONWALL.
N:o 214 b is an almost dense, gray yellow limestone, containing
Schwagerina princeps, and, possibly, Fusulina; it recalls the Henrik
Kröyer’s islets rock containing Schwagerina, and contains of other
fossils nothing but an impression of a Productus.
214 с is a gray, somewhat mottled limestone containing a speci-
men of Productus pseudohorridus WimAN, and a specimen of a little
Productus and one of an Alveolites.
214d is a gray, somewhat mottled limestone, recalling the more
finely crystalline limestone of the Mallemukfjæld, but with the trans-
ition to the more coarsely grained; a thin section showed perfect
agreement with this rock. Of fossils, the fragment contains a spe-
cimen of Productus pseudohorridus WiMAN, and a poor specimen of
a Spirifer, or rather, perhaps, Spiriferella, and impressions of several
Spirifers as well as an impression of an Alveolites.
214e is a gray limestone, fairly like the fine-grained rock from
the Mallemukfjæld, containing partly a silicified Spiriferella and
also the ventral shell of a Chonetes and a Productus, somewhat
poorly preserved.
214f, g, i, h are silicified specimens of Spirifers, more or less
complete; the best is Spiriferella sp. (Pl. XXVII, figs. 8, 9); the frag-
ment had some rock of light gray limestone attached and, on work-
ing out these silificied skeletons of brachiopod shells by means of
acid, there were obtained among them particles of moulds constitu-
ting the filling of foraminifera, for the most part Bigenerina, but
of other forms too, although not Fusuline or rotaliform foramini-
fera. A part of these moulds represent nearly the whole of the
body cavity, others again, only some few chambers.
Sophus Müller’s Naze.
The finds made here are derived entirely from free-lying stones,
and consist of loose fossils, corals, bryozoa and brachiopods, as well
as fragments with larger or smaller portions of rock attached.
The rocks represented here vary very much; the commonest is
a white limestone, somewhat dolomitic in character, agreeing with
rock N:o 112 from the Cape profile. Of the rock now in question
there are three specimens (N:os 170, 178 b and 179), which, mega-
scopically, are in full agreement with the Cape Jungersen section
rock. А thin section of N:o 178b shows that the microscopic re-
semblance, too, is very striking, and that rolled fragments occur in
a fairly crystalline matrix, which fragments, however, are not pre-
sent in such a preponderant degree as in N:o 112, the matrix also
containing a number of smaller, irregular fragments of various organ-
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 547
isms, partly not rolled. The rolled fragments are, too, more various
in size, than is the case in N:o 112, while the rock in 178b is
re-crystallized in a less degree than in 112. Among the fossils ob-
served in the slide, the foraminifera are most numerously represented,
with some few specimens of Fusuline and Bigenerina, with numer-
ous rotaliform species; there are also seen some few crinoid stem-
joints and fragments of bryozoa. Of larger fossils, N:o 178 b con-
tains a badly preserved Euomphalus ; N:o 179 Spirifer cfr. striatus
MARTIN, and a Productus of the semireticulatus group, and N:o 170
a similar Productus.
A similar rock is found in N:o 209 which, megascopically, and
in part, entirely agrees with those just described above, but has
undergone more thorough re-crystallization, and has smaller cavities
containing crystals of calcite. It also presents layers of a finer
crystalline rock which, even under the pocket-lens, appears to be
quite dense in structure. On a microscopic examination it proves
to agree perfectly with №0 112, the matrix consisting entirely of
crystalline calcite, in which lie imbedded numerous rolled fragments,
although the size of these latter differs from that in N:o 112. While,
in some parts of the rock in question this size can amount to as
much as that in N:o 112, viz., 1—2 mm. it is in other parts con-
siderably less, or from 0.05—0.20 mm., these small grains, too, being,
in general, altered to crystalline calcite, while the larger retain their
original organic structure as fragments of Fusuline, crinoid stem-
joints, or other organisms, The process of re-crystallization the rock
has undergone does not seem to have been accompanied by any
dolomitising or silicification.
Of larger fossils the boulder contains two well preserved spe-
cimens of Spiriferina Mylii п. sp. and a couple of specimens of
Schwagerina princeps MOLL., together with several specimens of a
long Fusulina.
A rock, which, at first sight, appears to be fairly different from
those mentioned above but which is probably connected with them,
13 N:o 169, a light gray-red mottled rock which, in its darker рог-
tions, contains small lighter coloured “pebbles” resembling those
observed in N:o 112 and the rocks agreeing with the one last-named.
Under the microscope the rock in question presents a structure
perfectly analogous to that of N:o 112, but it seems to contain, in
addition to well-rounded fragments, large angular pieces of another,
almost dense limestone, embedded in the crystalline matrix of cal-
cite. In this rock there occur, as in N:o 209, finer calcareous part-
icles, about 0.1 mm. in size, strewn among the coarser particles.
The red colour in the rock is, probably, mainly due to the fact
RO
548 KARL А. GRONWALL.
that the crystalline calcite in the “pebbles’ has а fairly evenly
distributed reddish pigment.
Of megascopic fossils this rock contains a couple of specimens
of a rugose simple coral, and several specimens of Schwagerina
princeps.
A fragment that is in perfect agreement with N:o 191, obtained
on Henrik Kröyer’s islets, is №0 178 a, which is an almost dense
or very finely crystalline limestone, containing Schwagerina princeps
and also the same coral as N:o 191.
There is also a trunk of a coral, probably Petalaxis or Phil-
lipsastraea (N:o 195) in a sandy limestone. Both the coral and the
rock present a great resemblance to the corals that J. G. ANDERS-
son collected at Beeren Eiland on the slope of Fogelberget towards
Ymersdal, in sandstone with beds of coral-limestone, belonging to
the lower part of the Upper Carboniferous.
Finally, from this locality may be mentioned two entirely sili-
cified corals (N:os 175 and 181), a species of Syringoporide and a
rugose simple coral.
Of the collections made at the easternmost localities on Am-
drup’s Land, special attention is drawn by the rocks containing
Schwagerina princeps MOLL., as, of course, the occurrence of this species
of Fusulinide definitely determines them as belonging to the upper
part of the Upper Carboniferous series. Schwagerina princeps has
been found both on Henrik Kröyer’s islets and on the mainland
behind, and at Sophus Müller’s Naze.
D. Summary of the Carboniferous deposits of
North-east Greenland.
Having, in the preceding pages, given a detailed description
of the various kinds of rock belonging to the Carboniferous of
North-east Greenland, and also of the stratigraphical conditions under
which they may be supposed to occur, we shall now attempt to
collect these deposits into larger groups and to compare the different
formations that have been observed at the various localities and in
the several sections.
This work, too, will be restricted by the character of the ma-
terial, as a consequence of the unfavourable conditions under which
it was obtained.
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 549
On the whole, the Carboniferous measures of north-east Green-
land can be divided into three groups, a Lower, terrestrial, and two
Upper, marine, in the following series:
С. Upper Marine Group: Limestones without intermediate
marl-shale strata; light in colour;
partly silicified or altered into
dolomite.
B. Lower Marine Group: Limestones with marl-shale inter-
mediate strata; partly light, fine-
grained or almost dense; partly
dark and bituminous and then,
as a rule, coarser; sometimes
alternating with sandstones.
A. Terrestrial Group: Sandstones and sandy shales with
plant-fossils.
A. The Terrestrial Group consists of a continuous series of
sandstones and sandy shales, containing a flora (poor, it is true) of
Lower Carboniferous age which, as stated before, has been described
by NATHORST. These deposits have evidently been formed on a
continent consisting of greatly weathered Archæan, or of some
similar crystalline rocks, in small fresh water basins which, after
the transgression of the Carboniferous sea, have become portions of
the latter.
Formations belonging to this group have been met with, with
certainty, only at localities in Holm’s Land; in Amdrup’s Land they
have probably been covered by detritus and were, therefore, not
accessible.
Some of the places where these beds were observed lie pretty
far to the west on the shore, where only free-lying boulders were
found, while others were rather near to the profiles made here:
Kocn’s section and the Conglomerate section.
West of Kocn’s section we have absolute certainty that the plant-
bearing shales occupy a position between 85 and 155 metres above
sea-level, but, on the other hand, we do not know what lies above
them. On the shore, it is true, there have been discovered free-
lying boulders of light-red limestones, derived from some unknown
higher level.
In Косн’$ section there have been obtained plant-fossils at dif-
ferent levels which we cannot more definitely determine, but of
the localities which NATHORST (1911, рр. 344—345) gives for his
plant-fossils, 1 and 3 are levels in Kocn’s section, while 4—6 refer
550 KARL А. GRONWALL.
to a place about 100 metres eastwards of that section about 90—
115 metres above the sea (found both as free-lying boulders and in
situ). N:o 10 and 11, again, are from the westernmost spot in Hekla
Sound where plant-fossils were discovered.
It is impossible to ascertain with perfect certainty the thickness
of this group, but in Kocn’s section no limesiones have been found
lower than 200 metres above the sea, and, in the Conglomerate
section they do not make their appearance before a height of 130
metres over sea-level, alternating with the conglomerate. We ven-
ture to assume that the conglomerate which alternates with the lime-
stone is the basal conglomerate of the Lower marine group, and
occupies the same level as that of the sub-stratum of the lowest
limestones in Kocn’s section. We should presume, then, that 200
metres is the probable minimum thickness of these terrestrial beds,
even if there exists a great possibility that, in consequence of the
further extension of the deposit westwards, the actual thickness 1$
two or three times as great.
B. The Lower Marine Group has been formed during the
transgression of the Carboniferous sea over the terrestrial formations.
As we have already pointed out, this transgression has occurred
gradually, and accompanied by slight oscillations which become
very evident by the alternating of formations with different develop-
ment of facies: limestones with marl-shales and sandstones, That
the limestones, too, point to the vicinity of land and shallow water
is clearly shown by their character, as they are seldom entirely
pure limestones but, as a rule, clayey; the terrigenous material, the
original mud, which was carried out to sea, is, too, found collected
in beds of marl-shale which alternate with the limestone. The large
amount of bituminous substances contained both in the marl-shale
and in the dark limestone, need by no means point to a great depth
of sea for the formation of these rocks, as the remaining character-
istics of the rocks give such decided indications of a fairly shal-
low sea.
The profiles from Holm’s Land and Amdrup’s Land present
certain differences which, it is true, for the most part are, probably,
the result of some fortuitous circumstances in making the collections
but which, nevertheless, make it necessary to undertake somewhat
detailed comparisons between the rock-specimens collected at the
two places in question. The differences existing between Kocn’s
section and the Conglomerate section are not very important, and
are in part the result of the dip of the strata, so that the comparison
of these sections does not present very great difficulties. The mutual
connection, too, between the sections from Amdrup’s Land, the two
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Green]. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 551
river sections and the Cape Jungersen section, is fairly clear and
evident (see too, fig. 4). ;
A comparison between the rocks from Koch’s section and the
Conglomerate section makes it very probable that the bituminous
limestones with the alternating strata of marl-shale, which, in Koch’s
section are seen between 240 and 275 metres above the sea, are
identical with the limestones found in the Conglomerate seetion at
175—200 metres above sea-level. The Spirifer supramosquensis Мак.
occurring so abundantly in the Conglomerate section is, it is true,
not found in Koch’s section in such well-preserved specimens that
their identity is undisputable, but the peculiar character of the rock,
and the agreement in position between the light limestones lying
beneath the bituminous beds, and which are found about 40 metres
under the lowest strata of the latter deposits, make the identification
very reliable (see the comparison between the profiles, рр. 524—525).
In this series of strata we have at least 5 superpositions of
limestone over sandstone, signifying phases of oscillation in the great
transgression, while the alternation of the bituminous limestone with
the marl-shale ought, probably, only to be considered as smaller
changes, resulting from periodical preponderances of the organic
or the terrigenous material during the process of deposition, when
the conditions, in other respects, were almost uniform. As we have
already stated, no plant-fossils were found in the sections from Am-
drup’s Land, so that it is impossible to state, with absolute security, the
presence of the terrestrial group there. According to Dr. WEGENER’S pro-
file-sketch, Fig. 4, the oldest strata here should consist of those
found lowest down on the westernmost river, above which should
come the rocks found on the hill-summits to the west of the
river. The lowest stratum in the river is a dark gray, somewhat
bituminous limestone which presents a certain likeness to the
bituminous limestone in the sections from Holm’s Land. The lime-
stone in question is covered with a gray-green sandy clay-shale
alternating with an impure limestone or spherosiderite, which, as
well from its exterior appearance as from the microscopical exam-
ination, seems to be a terrestrial formation. These beds probably
represent a transition from marine to terrestrial conditions, and
show an oscillation between them. The succeeding strata in the river
consist, reckoning from below, of dark, bituminous limestone (N:0
146), gray clay-shale (N:o 162), and a yellow-red limestone (N:0 136)
resembling the Ambigua limestone of Beeren Eiland, and agreeing
perfectly with the limestone (N:o 155) from 200 metres above the
sea in Kocn’s section.
The next following strata in the hill-summits to the west of the
552 KARL А. GRÔNWALL.
river present, probably, the following series of strata; а light, gray-
green limestone (№0 147), lowest, then, on two hill-tops, sandstone
(N:os 137 and 156), and, uppermost, dark, bituminous limestone
(N:o 163). The thickness of this series cannot be judged of, but,
in the western river, about 40 metres of rock have been accessible,
and, possibly, we may be justified in estimating the whole of the
series in the eastern river at about 100 metres. At a geological
level which, approximately, lies next above this series, a fragment
has been found which probably belongs to Spirifer supramosquensis
Nik., and is preserved in a rock very much resembling that rock in
the profiles from Holm’s Land for which this fossil is characteristical,
while, in connection with this find there occurred red and red-
gray limestone.
A bituminous dark limestone with intermediate marl-shale
deposits of the same type and, probably, occurring at the same
level, forms the lowest bed of the in the Eastern river section and
above this comes approximately 50 metres of light limestones, among
which there occur silicified strata and also dolomite. At about 90
metres above the level of the sea there occurs a bituminous lime-
stone of a type similar to the other bituminors limestones in this
group. Above this there is found a black, bituminous shale, with
straight cleavage, which is not to be connected with the above-
mentioned deposits, while, uppermost in the series, we have sand-
stone to a height of about 130 metres above the sea.
We have here in all, consequently, a series of somewhat more
than 200 metres of rock, which, on the whole, present points of
agreement with the beds occurring in the sections from Holm’s Land,
but which, in their arrangement offer certain irregularities that
render direct comparisons impossible. When we consider the in-
completeness of the profiles, they give, however, some basis for an
hypothesis. In the profiles from Amdrup’s Land we have, it will
be remembered, dark-gray, bituminous limestone at various levels,
and this rock occurs both at the lowest and the highest horizons,
with a difference of level between them of about 180 metres. In
the collections from Holm’s Land, the light limestones are repres-
ented at a higher level than are the dark, bituminous, and this dif-
ference from Amdrup’s Land probably depends on the fact that, at
the various localities, different outcropping strata have been more
easily accessible to investigation.
In any case, the petrographical agreement and, in part, the
paleontological too, give indisputable grounds for bringing together
for the sake of comparison the formations occurring in these sections,
although it is difficult to express an opinion respecting the thick-
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 553
ness of the beds in question. In this respect we must be satisfied
with giving that of the exposed part of the series of strata, viz., about
100 metres on Holm’s Land and about 200 metres on Amdrup’s
Land.
C. The Upper Marine Group consists of limestones which,
as far as we know, have no intermediate beds of sandstones or shales,
nor have the limestones any marly character although, however,
they can be in part altered into dolomite or to siliceous rocks.
Some of the limestones contain quartz sand, but clay is very rare.
The petrographical character of the limestones which, as regards
some of them, has been given in detail in the description of the
localities, points, in many cases, to shallow water and, perhaps,
even to shore deposits. The entire character of the formations does
not point to deep water, nor, in many cases, to a great distance
from the shore, but, what it does point to is, above all, a specially
unimportant supply of terrigenous material, while that of the organic
must have been greatly preponderant.
The incompleteness of the material for investigation at our com-
mand, resulting from the conditions under which it was obtained,
makes itself felt in this instance in a far higher degree than in re-
gard to the two groups already treated of, as a not unimportant part
of the material belonging to the present division was collected in
the form of free-lying boulders some of which were found on the
shore.
Specimens obtained from а profile occur only in the case
of the Cape Jungersen section, and specimens obtained from the
solid rock only from Henrik Kröyer’s Islets and the mainland behind
them, while moreover boulders have been collected at the Mallemuk-
fjæld, the Eskimo Naze and at Sophus Miller's Naze.
It has been possible, however, to recognize certain types of rock,
both in the specimens obtained from the solid rock and also from
boulders; it has been of special value for judging of the stratigra-
phical importance of the whole of these carboniferous formations
(N:o 154) that, in one large limestone boulder from the Mallemuk-
fjeld, there were found numerous brachiopods of various species.
The Cape Jungersen section clearly marks the lowest portion
of this upper marine group, which is shown, partly by the close
connection between the River profiles and the Cape Jungersen sect-
ion, and also by the rocks occurring in those localities; of these
rocks, those found between 100 and 110 metres above sea-level are
fairly fine-grained, and remind one of similar rocks in the river pro-
files. The same may be said, although in a lesser degree, of some
free-lying boulders of limestone from 150 metres above the sea.
554 KARL А. GRONWALL.
Characteristic rocks from the Cape Jungersen section are the
white limestone, consisting of rolled calcareous fragments (pp. 538—
540), and the red sandy limestone, in which algae have been found.
Of the free-lying fragments, the greater part has been obtained,
partly at the Mallemukfjæld, and partly from Esquimo Naze. It
has been found possible to divide the rocks obtained at these places
into three groups: a) coarse-graind limestone; b) fine-grained like-
stone; с) silicified limestone, of which groups, however, a) and b)
pass into each other: for the description, see рр. 527—528. All these
limestones have been deposited in fairly shallow water, and under
approximately similar conditions; the silicified limestone has pos-
sessed about the same characteristics as the others in their original
development. At present it forms an almost completely silice-
ous, dense rock, and can easily be distinguished from the fragments
of the other limestones whose fossils have become silicified, possibly
during a later period. The silicification in this case has occurred
with the fossil valves, in the well-known rings of silica.
The connection between the succession of the strata in the
Cape Jungersen section and the free-lying boulders from the Malle-
mukfjæld and the Eskimo Naze becomes very evident from the
finds of the characteristic rocks; for example, there has also been
found at the foot of the Mallemukfjæld a boulder (N:o 168) of the
white, crystalline limestone which consists of rolled calcareous frag-
ments, while, on the cliffside in the Cape Jungersen section there
were collected talus boulders, both of the coarse-grained and the
fine-grained limestone that had been obtained from the Mallemuk-
fjeld and the Eskimo Naze.
North-east of the Cape Jungersen section, collections have been
made on Amdrup’s Land, partly from the solid rock on Henrik
Kréyer’s Islets and the mainland behind them, and partly of boulders
at both these places and also at Sophus Müller’s Naze.
All the above-mentioned rocks in situ are crystalline dolomites,
evidently greatly altered limestones.
The boulders from these localities present a number of peculi-
arities, and they cannot all be referred to the rocks that have been
obtained from the localities already treated of.
White, and somewhat crystalline limestone, consisting of rolled
calcareous fragments, and which has, later on, been greatly re-crys-
tallized, occurs fairly abundantly, as at Henrik Kröyer’s Islets there
has been obtained a boulder of this rock, containing Productus
timanicus Stuck., while at Sophus Miller’s Naze, 3 boulders were col-
lected containing 2 specimens of a Productus belonging to the semire-
ticulatus group, and also a specimen of Spirifer cfr. striatus MARTIN.
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 555
Of the rock-types found at the Mallemukfjæld and the Eskimo
Naze, the fine-grained limestone is richly represented from all three
localities, and sometimes it contains greatly silicified fossils which
can be developed from the unaltered limestone matrix. Some boulders
of the other types have also been found.
In addition to the rocks already mentioned, the free-lying finds
from the north-eastern part of Amdrup’s Land contain some rocks
which were not obtained at the other localities, but all are charac-
terized by the occurrence of Schwagerina princeps, this fact giving a
reliable determination of their level.
These rocks are, first, a light-gray limestone with a tinge of red,
containing a large, rugose coral; the rock is very fine-grained or
finely crystalline, and recalls the rock-species (N:os 109, 113, 133)
obtained free-lying at 150 metres above sea-level from the Cape
Jungersen section; several specimens of this rock were found on
Henrik Kroyer’s Islets, and one at Sophus Miillers Naze. On the
mainland behind Henrik Kröyer’s Islets there was obtained an almost
dense gray-yellow limestone containing numerous specimens of
Schwagerina princeps MÖLL., and approaching very closely to the rock
above mentioned.
At Sophus Miller's Naze there were found two boulders of
limestone (№:05 209, 169), containing Schwagerina, and which, in
structure, are in very close agreement with the limestone consisting
of rolled calcareous fragments, although each of the boulders presents
evident deviations from the general type (see p. 547).
Like the other rock-types found at the Mallemukfjæld and the
Eskimo Naze, the rocks containing Schwagerina have not been
obtained from the solid rock, but, still, from the fossil contents, the
conclusion can be drawn — as will be shown later on in more
detail — that the rocks from the Mallemukfjæld and Eskimo Naze
are of about the same age as the Schwagerina horizon in the Car-
boniferous of Russia. A closer grouping of the rocks that have
been discovered as free-lying, cannot be carried out and as the
white limestone with rolled calcareous fragments, so characteristic
of the Cape Jungersen section, was also obtained as free-lying mate-
rial at many of the localities where such collections were made, it
would seem as if we are justified in grouping the whole of the Cape
Jungersen section with the finds of free-lying limestones, even if,
thereby, the upper marine group probably obtains immensely greater
dimensions than the Lower. With the material at our disposal,
however, it would be impossible to carry out a classification based
on natural grounds.
556
KARL А. GRONWALL.
The classification of our material, therefore, will be approxim-
ately as follows:
| Localities: Rock-species:
С. The Cape Junger- | In situ: fine-grained light limestones and white
Upper sen section (oldest); detrital limestone with “pebbles” of fragments of
Marine Henrik Kröyer’s Is- organic origin, and dolomites. Collected as bould-
Group. lets and the main- | ers: Partly the rocks also obtained in situ, partly
| land behind; free- limestones consisting to a great extent of organic
lying boulders at | fragments, viz., a) fine-grained, light; b) coarse-
| the Mallemukfjæld, | grained, dark; с) silicified rocks resembling flint;
| the Eskimo Naze, and, in addition, fine-grained light limestones
Henrik Kröyer's Is- | and also limestones connected with the detrital
| lets and the main- one in the Cape Jungersen section, all of which
land behind, and at | contain Schwagerina.
Sophus Miuller’s The thickness impossible to determine, but
Naze. | may be estimated at from 500 to 1000 metres.
B. | At Holm’s Land, | Limestone with beds of marl-shale interstra-
Lower Koch’s section and | tified with sandstones and shales. At different
Marine the Conglomerate | levels within the group there occur, light, fine-
Group. section, and at Am- | grained or almost dense limestones, dark, more
drup's Land, the Ri- | coarse-grained, bituminous limestones. The mari-
ver sections. shales are, as a rule, bituminous. The thickness
can be put at 200—300 metres.
A. ' Lower part of the | Sandstones and shales with plant-fossils.
Terrestrial | profiles or Holm’s Exposed not more than 200 metres, but their
Group. Land. thickness probably amounts to about 500 metres,
or possibly more.
Ш. Palæontological Description of the :
Brachiopod Fauna.
Dielasma sp.
A little, oblong smooth form, without sinus, 4 mm. high and
3 mm. broad; from the Cape Jungersen section (N:o 135). As, how-
ever, only one specimen has been found, it is useless to endeavour
to identify it with any of the numerous species described.
N:o 1. Rhynehopora Nikitini Tschern.
For synonyms, see Wıman, 1914, р. 26, TSCHERNYSCHEW, 1902,
р. 13.
Of this characteristic species there are 3 specimens in our ma-
terial, which were injured in developing from the rock; 1 is from
the Mallemukfjæld (N:o 154), and 2 from the Eskimo Naze (N:o 204),
all in boulders. The specimen from the Mallemukfjæld is larger,
with a width of about 13 mm., and with 5 ribs in the mesial fold,
than the best preserved specimen from the Eskimo Naze which
measures about 10 mm. in width and has 4 ribs in the sinus and 3
in the mesial fold; this latter specimen is evidently not full-grown.
The species occurs abundantly both in Spitzbergen and on Bee-
ren Eiland, and, in Russia, goes from the Omphalotrochus horizon
quite up into the Permian deposits.
N:o 2. Camarophoria efr. Karpinskii Tschern.
Pl. XXVII, Figs. 1—2.
A somewhat damaged specimen, found in boulder N:o 154 from
the Mallemukfjaeld, appears to us to be most in agreement with С.
Karpinskii TSCHERNYSCHEW (1902, р. 496, PI. 60, Figs. 2—3) and also
presents some points of similarity with C. globosa TscHERN., which
is related to the preceding.
The difference from the first-named species is, however, so
marked that we cannot at once identify our specimen with it. Had
XLIII. 42
=e Fr ec
358 KARL A. GRÖNWALL.
there been a richer and more complete material at our command it
would, perhaps, have been possible to classify this North-east Green-
land form as a variety of the species in question.
The greatest difference is that our form has a greater length,
with more acute-angled outline of the shell, a narrower beak and
less thickness. In order to accentuate this difference we shall, be-
low, compare the dimensions of our specimen and of TscHERNY-
SCHEW’S PI. 60, Fig. 2, although it should be remarked that our spe-
cimen is somewhat younger, which may, to some extent, be the
cause of these divergences.
C. Karpinskü TSCHERN. P1.60, Fig. 2: length 19, width 22, thickness 17 mm.
C. cfr. Karpinskti — 15, — 15, — 2 —.
In our specimen the surface of the shell is desquamated in the
umbonal region, so that the sculpture is not quite distinct, but the
ribs are otherwise the same, with the exception that they are some-
what narrower, which, possibly, may depend on the lesser width of
the shell, or also from the fact that an indication of a fifth pair of
ribs can be distinguished on the lateral portions of both valves. The
sinus of the ventral valve can first be observed at about the middle
of the valve, but the median ribs of the dorsal valve appear as
such already above the middle of the valve.
С. Karpinskii TSCHERN. occurs in the Urals in the Schwagerina
horizon.
N:o 3. Athyris Royssii L’Eveille.
For synonyms see WAAGEN, 1882—84, р. 475.
It is with hesitation that I venture to refer two specimens from
the light, fine-grained limestone, N:o 154, from the Mallemukfjæld,
to the above-mentioned species, respecting whose difference from
A. pectinifera Sow. there exists some doubt.
TSCHERNYSCHEW, 1884, p. 290, has expressed himself in such a
manner that one can understand that he is most inclined to identify
these two forms as one species, but in 1902, p. 102, he gives them
as separate species, and notes several distinctive features between
them, in addition to that of size in general, viz., the absence of a
sinus in A. pectinifera; the straighter hinge-line, the more powerfully
developed beak, with a larger foramen, and the finer and closer-
lying spines on the striae of growth in A. Royssii.
WAAGEN, on the whole, follows Davipson’s views respecting the
difference between these two species, and considers that the smaller
form where not even an indication of a sinus in the ventral valve
is seen, should be classified as A. pectinifera.
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Еаппа. 559
The two specimens at our disposal must, as regards dimensions,
almost be considered as small ones, their width, length and thick-
ness being, respectively, 18, 17.5, 12 mm., and 15.5, 15, 10 mm. Both
present some indication of a sinus, the larger specimen to a greater
degree than the smaller. Both in their proportions and in form
they agree very nearly with smaller specimens figured by WaaGeEn,
e.g., on his Pl. 40, Fig. 10 a—d, only that the latter are somewhat
broader. WAAGEN mentions specimens 46 mm. broad, while Da-
vipson, for A. Royssii, gives a width of 70—80 mm., and for А.
pectinifera, about 30 mm.
If a distinction of species is to be maintained, our specimens
must be referred to A. Roysstt L’EvEILLE, but the slight material at
our service gives no guidance in solving the chief question. From
another quarter, however, it should be possible to obtain an argu-
ment to show that a complete ontogenetic series of these species
would probably present transitional forms and variations so closely
connected with each other that these two species, A. Royssii and A.
pectinifera, must be classified as but one. We allude here to the
development series of the closely related species, A. Royssiana Kry-
SERLING, that Wıman, 1914, р. 30, Pl. 1 and 2, has figured from the
Spirifer limestone of Spitzbergen. Regarding this series, which con-
sists of more than 40 specimens, Wimax states as follows: “Irgend
eine Correlation der Merkmale låsst sich nicht beobachten und die
Variation ist richtungslos. Uberhaupt zeigt diese Serie wie unvor-
sichtig es ist, Artbeschreibungen auf zu kleines Material zu grunden.
Aus der abgebildeten Serie könnte man leicht Exemplare aussuchen,
die man als zu verschiedenen Arten gehörig betrachten könnte, wenn
man nicht die ganze Serie hätte, und doch ist in diesem Fall die
Erhaltung tadellos’.
According to Davınson, А. Royssii is a species occurring abund-
antly in the Mountain Limestone of England and Belgium, while 4.
pectinifera occurs spread through the Permian of England, Germany
and Russia. According to WAAGEN, A. Royssii is also found in the
Permian deposits of Russia, and, according to TSCHERNYSCHEW, A.
pectinifera occurs already in the Cora horizon, and continues into
the Permian. In the East Indies, according to WAAGEN, A. Royssii
is found in the upper and middle parts of the Productus limestone
in the Salt Range, and the same writer has described several nearly
related forms as independent species. DIENER, in several works, has
described both A. Royssii and nearly related species, both from the
Productus limestone, and from higher, Permian deposits. No strati-
graphical importance, therefore, can be ascribed to this form.
42%
560 KARL А. GRONWALL.
N:o 4. Spiriferina Муш п. sp.
Pl. XXVII, Figs. 3—7.
Large shell, strongly arched, with its greatest width at the hinge-
line; its outline (determined along the hinge-line and the front line
of the shell) triangularly ovate. The cardinal area high and some-
what concave, of the same breadth as the hinge-line, bent backwards
so that it forms an angle of about 115° with the plane of articula-
tion for both valves, limited laterally by distinct, sharp margins.
The delthyrium occupies about one-quarter of the hinge-line, and
extends almost to the beak.
The dorsal valve strongly arched, the greatest arching somewhat
below the beak which is small and faintly incurved and extends
somewhat beyond the hinge-line. The dorsal valve shows a strongly
vaulted median rib which, from the beak, rapidly expands, so that,
at the anterior margin, it occupies almost one-third of the same.
On each side of this rib there are 5—6 ribs, gradually decreasing
in size; the valve shows in the front a fairly evenly rounded out-
line. The ventral valve is strongly arched at the beak, but is flatter
anteriorly. The beak is small, but is strongly arched towards and
above the area. The sinus is broad and posteriorly fairly deep but,
anteriorly it becomes shallower, at the same time that it increases
in breadth, so that, at the anterior margin, it occupies nearly one-
third of the entire outline of the valve; here it is possible to observe
indications of two flat ribs, one on each side of the sinus. The valve
has 6—7 ribs on each side of the sinus, which decrease uniformly
in size. The front line of the ventral valve projects at the sinus
as an indication of a tongue, corresponding to the median rib of the
dorsal valve.
The sculpture of the shell is well marked, with sharp, imbri-
cated laminæ of growth. In addition, the surface of the shell is
punctuated with fine pores, arranged in quincunx; the pores are
almost about as large as the intermediate spaces, and number about
5—6 per mm.
Dimensions: Length of the hinge-line (width of shell) 25 mm.
Thickness of shell, 19 mm. Height of area (measured across the
umbo) 7 mm. Length of the ventral valve, 25 mm. Length of the
dorsal valve, 19 mm.
Of this species we have, first, one complete specimen, freely
worked out from the rock, and the dimensions of which have been
given above, and which has been figured in Pl. XXVII, Figs. 3—7,
and secondly, a fairly well preserved dorsal valve and a somewhat
corroded ventral valve, still remaining in the rock. They all
occur in the same piece of rock (N:o 209), in a white limestone,
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 561
with Schwagerina princeps, found as boulder at Sophus Miller's Naze
(Eskimo dwelling-place, 80°55’).
I name this new species after Myrius-ERICHSEN, the leader of
the Danmark Expedition, who, during the course of the great sledge-
journey towards the north, discovered this locality, afterwards
called Sophus Miller’s Naze, just where the two north-going parties
separated from each other.
Spiriferina Mylii is very closely related to several of the species
that have been described from the Carboniferous and the Permian
beds, but, as far as we have been able to discern, it differs distinctly
from them, both as regards the form and the sculpture. For example,
the difference in form between our species and Sp. nasuta WAAGEN
(1882—1884, Pl. 49, Figs. 1—2) is somewhat inconsiderable, but our
form has more sharply defined ribs and more vaulted valves.
Spiriferina Panderi MOLLER, which TSCHERNYSCHEW (1902, р. 517, PI.
37, Figs. 3—4) considers as also including WAAGEN's Sp. nasuta, has
the tongue-like expansion of the anterior edge of the ventral valve
so distinct, that the outline of the shell forms a triangle with inflexed
sides. Sp. Welleri Girty (1908, Pl. 14, Figs. 17--19), has the form
of the shell in fairly close agreement with ours, but both the arch-
ing and the sculpture are very different, which latter feature, in the
case of the other species before mentioned, also differs considerably
from that of Sp. Му.
The writers who have discussed this genus thoroughly have
divided it into groups, each possessing some typical species, and for
our species we find room in the group which, by WAAGEn and
TSCHERNYSCHEW is characterized by Sp. insculpta Рнил., and by
GirTy in the section, “lamellosæ” which comprises the groups char-
acterized by Sp. Billingsi SHum. and Sp. transversa M'CHESN. The
species which the writers in question refer to the groups mentioned
differ very considerably from our species as regards the general
form, etc. On the other hand, the figuring of the shell-sculpture of
Sp. Billingsi, given by Girry (1908, Pl. 14, Fig. 16), is in perfect
agreement with Sp. Муш.
A species which, in many points, agrees with Sp. Mylü is Sp.
salemensis WELLER (WELLER 1914, р. 296, Pl. 36, Figs. 1—5) from
the Salem limestone in Illinois. This species has a broader shell,
and a narrower mesial sinus and median rib than ours, but, other-
wise, the profile of the shell and the structure of the cardinal area
especially, present a great analogy to that of Sp. Mylii.
As regards the size of the shell, it should be pointed out that
Sp. Муш is one of the largest species hitherto described.
562 KARL А. GRONWALL.
Spiriferina sp.
In boulders of a highly silicified limestone, recalling the Pro-
ductus flint of Spitzbergen, and obtained at the Eskimo Naze, there
occur some brachiopod remains which can probably be referred
to this genus, but, in consequence of the slight amount of material
available, this cannot be determined with certainty.
In boulder N:o 205 there are found impressions of two dorsal
valves, one almost perfect, with a length of 10 mm., the other frag-
mentary, belonging to a larger specimen. In this form the beak
has projected considerably beyond the curved hinge-line. The valve
has had a markedly vaulted median rib, with about 5 ribs on each
side of this. The sculpture cannot be seen with clearness on the
cast, but it has not been laminated, as, in the cast, only some few
isolated striæ of growth could be observed nearest the anterior
margin of the valve.
Among the species of Spiriferina that I have had the opportunity
of seeing figured, there is none — neither from England, Russia,
nor India — that has the beak of the dorsal valve projecting so far
beyond the hinge-line. The species in which the beak projects most
is Sp. evax Girty (1908, Pl. 13, Figs. 22—22d), but still not to the
extent found in our specimen.
In boulder N:o 210, there is a mould of a dorsal valve of a
Spiriferina, about 12 mm. broad and 9 mm. long. The valve is
rounded and provided with 9 ribs of which the median rib is com-
paratively little prominent among the others. On the mould the ribs
appear narrower and sharper than would be the case in specimens
with the shell preserved.
In spite of the very defective condition of preservation, our spe-
cimen can very well be compared with certain figurings of Spirife-
rina cristata v. SCHLOTH., but still, I consider it would be too daring
to identify it with this variable species. Sp. cristata v. SCHLOTH.
occurs in Russia from the Cora horizon inclusive, up to the Permian.
Spirifer or Spiriferella sp.
P]. XXVII, Figs. 8—9.
Among the fossils that were obtained free-lying on the main-
land behind Henrik Kröyer’s Islets, there were also found some
silicified brachiopods — all ventral valves belonging to the genus
Spirifer, or, more probably, its sub-genus Spiriferella. Several of
these were worked out by means of dilute hydrochloric acid, and I
succeeded by this means in obtaining a view of the interior of these
ventral valves.
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 563
Although they cannot be identified with any species previously
described, I have wished, however, to figure and mention them.
Fig. 8 shows a ventral valve which, both as regards form and
the interior structure, recalls very closely younger specimens of Sp.
polaris Wiman (Pl. IV, Figs. 5—7), which, however, are somewhat
smaller (15—23 mm. in width) than our specimen, which measures
about 40 mm. in width.
Fig. 9 shows a somewhat imperfect specimen of a form which
is characterized by a specially high area, and very powerful cardinal
teeth, supported by faintly developed dental plates, and with, in
general, a very compact umbonal part. The internal structure of
the valve agrees very well with the type that TSCHERNYSCHEW
describes in such detail in Spiriferella sarane VERN. (1902, pp. 522
—526).
In addition to the specimens figured, there are two fragments
of ventral valves closely related to that shown in Fig. 9, and cer-
tainly belonging to the same species as that, and also a rolled frag-
ment of a form which bears a greater resemblance to the original
of Fig. 8. It also recalls the rolled specimens of the umbonal part
of Sp. polaris that Wıman figures in Pl. У, Figs. 1—4.
Fig. 8 pretty certainly belongs to a species nearly related to Sp.
polaris Wıman, but I dare not express any opinion as to the rela-
tionship to the form figured in Fig. 9. Sp. polaris is one of the
commonest species in the Carboniferous deposits of Spitzbergen and
Beeren Eiland.
N:o 5. Spirifer п. sp.? ex aff. Sp. duplicicostz Phill.
Pl. ХХУП, Figs. 10—11.
This form, which is represented only by one specimen of a ven-
tral valve found in a boulder in the Cape Jungersen section (N:o 111),
stands probably nearest to Sp. duplicicosta Рнил.. and Sp. Wynnei
WAAGEN, but differs so considerably from both that I do not con--
sider that I am able to refer it to either of these species, even as a
variety. On the other hand, the form does not appear to me to be
sufficiently sharply characterized, nor the material, either, rich
enough to justify my giving a special name to this form.
The valve is oval; the length somewhat less than the width;
the greatest width of the valve somewhat greater than the hinge-
line. The valve is fairly evenly arched from the anterior margin
to the beak, which is bent somewhat beyond the high cardinal area.
The beak is greatly compressed and projects from the lateral portions
of the valve, which slope sharply towards the angles of the valve.
From the beak there runs a fairly deep and moderately broad sinus
564 KARL А. GRONWALL.
down to the front-line; the margins of the sinus towards the lateral
portions of the valve are not quite sharp, but the sinus retains
approximately the same width on the anterior two-thirds of the
valve, increasing somewhat in depth, however. In the sinus there
are visible 6 ribs. On the lateral portions there are about 25 fairly
coarse ribs, irregularly in direction, which decrease in distinctness
and strength outwards. On the anterior portion of the valve, new
ribs intercalate between the older ones, and the ribs are indistinctly
united into 5 bundles, which also grow less distinct outwards. In
one or two places, the ribs are intersected by ridges of growth, and
in these places the irregularity of the ribs becomes still clearer.
Dimensions: Length 36 mm., width 41 mm., length of hinge-
line 34 mm., height of area about 10 mm.
Our form differs from Sp. duplicicosta PHILL. as figured by Davin-
SON, by the height of the cardinal area and the great projection of the
umbo beyond the hinge-line, while it is distinguished from Sp.
Wynnei Waac. by its greater width and by the sculpture, Sp. Wyn-
nei having more regular ribs, which are not united into bundles.
Here it should be noted that Diener (1897 Part III. Pl. 7, Figs.
1—4) figures specimens of Sp. Wynnei from the Himalayas which
have a lesser width Шар WaaGeEn’s Sp. Wynnei, and he remarks
that, in some few specimens, the shell is as high as it is broad.
N:o 6. Spirifer cfr. striatus Martin.
Pl. XXVII, Figs. 12—13.
For synonyms see TSCHERNYSCHEW, 1902, p. 137.
A little specimen of a Spirifer, found free-lying at the Eskimo
dwelling-place at Sophus Miller's Naze (N:o 179) must, in spite of
its small size, be proximately referred to Sp. striatus, as it presents
definite differences from other species belonging to the same group,
such as, Sp. fasciger KEYs., Sp. cameratus Мовт., Sp. Магсош
Waaa., etc.
Dimensions: Length 18 mm., width 25 mm.
The form of the shell, with the umbo projecting beyond the
hinge-line, the circumstance that the sinus (which, however, is less
accentuated than is usually the case with Sp. striatus) passes, with-
out a sharp limit, into the lateral portions, and the character of the
sculpture, in which the very fine ribs, about 10 in the sinus and
15 on each side, are indistinctly gathered into bundles, are all cha-
racteristics that refer this specimen to Sp. striatus,
Our specimen agrees fairly well with younger specimens from
the Mountain Limestone of England, shown by Davinson in Pl. 2,
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 565
Figs. 9, 10 and 11, while some great difference exists between it and
the adult specimens he has figured; these have, especially, the ven-
tral valve more strongly arched, and the sinus deeper.
This species has its principal occurrence in the Sub-Carbonifer-
ous deposits, but it also occurs, although very rarely, in the Urals,
in the Schwagerina level, and in India, in the lower part of the
Productus limestone. These forms, too, present some slight differ-
ences from the typical Sub-Carboniferous form; thus TSCHERNYSCHEW
states that his form from the Urals has the sinus somewhat narrower,
and WAAGEN states that the form from the Salt Range has a flatter
ventral valve than the European forms.
Our specimen agrees more closely with the form from the upper
Carboniferous beds, especially the Indian, while TscHERNYSCHEW’S
figure, which shows an older specimen of about 75 mm. in width
presents some difference, especially that the sinus is somewhat nar-
rower. The figure of Sp. striatus that agrees most nearly with our
specimen, is WAAGEN’s Fig. 5b, Pl. XLIV, which, however, shows а
very young specimen of 18 mm. width.
It is possible that one could unite these forms of Sp. striatus
from the Urals, the Salt Range and North-east Greenland, which
occur in younger deposits, as a variety of Sp. striatus MART., as they
really agree very closely with each other.
N:o 7. Spirifer supramosquensis Nik.
Pl. XXVII, Figs. 14—16.
For synonyms see TSCHERNYSCHEW, 1902, р. 155; УМмАм, 1914,
p. 47.
This species is the brachiopod form that is most numerously
represented in the Lower Marine group in North-east Greenland. Of
this species, 7 specimens have been obtained from the Mallemuk-
fjeld — 4 of them under N:o 190, and 1 each under N:os 192, 152
and 157. The six first-named were found in the solid rock of bitu-
minous, marly limestone, and represent only the ventral valve. The
last (№0 157) was found free-lying and is inbedded in the fine-grained
reddish limestone, which is so common in the Lower Marine group.
This specimen has both valves preserved, but is so greatly com-
pressed that, unfortunately, it does not give any reliable information.
No fully reliable specimen of this species occurs from the loca-
lities on Amdrup’s Land, but а little piece of the umbonal part of
the ventral valve of a Spirifer (№0 161) can scarcely belong to any
other species.
The species belonging to the Sp. mosquensis group are so closely
566 KARL А. GRONWALL.
related to each other, that, in many instances, it is difficult to dis-
tinguish them from each other, and a thorough revision is probably
required, especially of the 3 species, Sp. supramosquensis N1K., Sp.
Fritschi SCHELLW. and Sp. Nikitini TSCHERN.
The specimens from North-east Greenland which are at my dis-
posal are not so well preserved that they can throw any light over
the other species, but I have to be contented with establishing their
proximate relationship with Sp. supramosquensis, and their difference
from the other forms, such as these have been described.
They are fairly easily distinguished from Sp. mosquensis, first
by the dental plates and secondly by the sculpture.
As shown by Fig. 16, the dental plates, which are almost straight,
do not reach farther in the shell than to somewhat beyond its
middle, while those of Sp. mosquensis, where the plates form convex
arcs with the median line of the shell, reach to 3/4 or 4/5 of its length
The best illustrations of the interior of Sp. mosquensis, which are
found, both in TrRAuTscHOLD (Pl. XXXVII, Fig. 1—2), and in FRECH
(Lethæa palæozoica, Pl. 47 a, Fig. 5 as new figures after TRAUTSCHOLD’S
original), are in want, both of any statement of dimensions or of
any hint as to the outline of the complete shell, so that, by their
help, it is only possible to give an approximate estimation of the
relative length of the dental plates. DE Коммск (1883, р. 381, PI.
XIV, Fig. 11), states that the dental plates reach almost to the ante-
rior margin of the shell, and his figures show this. HOLTEDAHL’s
statements point in the same direction.
The sculpture, as is seen by Fig. 14, shows dichotomy in the
case of several of the ribs, which is not the case with Sp. mos-
quensis.
We meet with greater difficulties, on the other hand, when
endeavouring to decide whether our specimens shall be referred to
Sp. supramosquensis, Fritschi or to Nikitini; between the first two of
these species, especially, the difference has not been very clearly
pointed out, and it is only gradually that this has been done. Spi-
rifer Fritschi was established as a distinct species by SCHELLWIEN
(1892) but, later on (1894, p. 75, Foot-note), the same author has
expressed his doubts as to the correctness of giving Sp. Fritschi as
a distinct species, and has supposed it to be identical with Sp. supra-
mosquensis. In Lethæa palæozoica (1897—1902) Евесн takes these two
species as identical, so that his comparison between Sp. mosquensis
and Sp. supramosquensis Nik. cannot be admitted as evidence. As
far as I can see, Frecu, for his figuring of the latter, has probably
employed both Sp. supramosquensis and Sp. Fritschi as originals (Pl.
47b, Fig. 1a; and the Fig. in the text, p. 260, Sp. Fritschi from the
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 567
Auernigg beds in the Carnian Alps, and Pl. 47Ъ, Fig. 1b, possibly
Sp. supramosquensis Nik. from Nova Zembla; the piece is an original
figured also by TouLa, but as Sp. mosquensis).
SCHELLWIEN has later on (1900, pp. 71—72, text-figs. 10 and 11)
more definitely pointed out the difference between Sp. Fritschi and
Sp. supramosquensis, and has described it, while referring to Russian
specimens of Sp. supramosquensis. He gives as a specific characteri-
stic of Sp. supramosquensis the shape of the sinus of the ventral
valve, which possesses a markedly deeper groove in the middle of
the otherwise somewhat shallow depression that the sinus forms.
This characteristic has been observed by Wiman too in specimens
of Sp. supramosquensis from Beeren Eiland. This feature alone,
however, is not sufficient to characterize Sp. supramosquensis, as
Sp. Nikitini TscHERN. also possesses a sinus of the same shape,
which SCHELLWIEN gives as distinctive for Sp. supramosquensis.
TSCHERNYSCHEW, in his description of these two species, does not
mention this deepening of the sinus, but gives, as the characteristic
features, the form of the shell, and the height and width of the
cardinal area.
Sp. Fritschi is the broadest of these three species, with the width
of the shell considerably exceeding the length, and with the cardinal
area almost equal to the greatest width of the shell, fairly low, and
provided with a peculiar sculpture; the beak is abruptly pointed and
projects only inconsiderably beyond the hinge-line. Sp. supramos-
quensis and Sp. Nikitini are probably very nearly related, the length
and width of the shell are approximately equal, in both species the
hinge-line is shorter than the greatest width of the shell, but, in con-
sequence of the beak in Sp. Nikitini being higher and very sharply
pointed, the cardinal area in this species is both higher and narrower
than that of Sp. supramosquensis; in Sp. Nikitini it occupies about
one-half of the greatest width of the shell, while, in the case of Sp.
supramosquensis, it occupies about two-thirds.
As regards the interior structure of the shell, TscHERNYSCHEW
points out that Sp. supramosquensis and Nikitini agree in respect to
the “geraden, verkürzten Zahnplatten”, and that Sp. Fritschi and
Sp. supramosquensis can, with sufficient positiveness, be distinguished
from each other by means of the interior structure of the shell. He
does not, however, point out any special characteristic features. If,
however, we compare SCHELLWIEN’s figure (1892, Pl. V, Fig. 8) of
the internal structure of Sp. Frilschi with Fig. 16 and NikiTiN's
description of the internal structure of the shell of Sp. supramos-
quensis, one can no longer feel any doubt as to the importance of
this difference.
568 KARL А. GRONWALL.
The ventral valves which I refer to Sp. supramosquensis, closely
agree, as shown by the figures and the brief description given below,
with the earlier figurings of Sp. supramosquensis; the one detail
which can, proximately, give rise to any doubt is that of the dimen-
sions. NIKITIN’s figures give а length of 31 and 37 mm., and SCHELL-
WIEN’S text-figures give 28 and 47 mm., but as по scale-measure-
ment is given for any of these figurings, we are probably entitled
to consider them as drawn to natural size. The specimens given
by WIMAN attain a height of only 16 mm. The North-east Greenland spe-
cimens, as a rule, have larger dimensions; as, however, the anterior
margin is defective in every instance, the length can only approxi-
mately be determined, this being, for the six specimens, 72, 60, 50,
45, 35 and 31 mm. Sp. Fritschi and Sp. Nikilini, on the other hand,
attain dimensions more nearly in agreement with the specimens
from Greenland, as SCHELLWIEN gives for the first-mentioned a great-
est observed length of 55 mm. and Wıman mentions a specimen
from Cape Fanshave (Hinlopen Strait) Spitzbergen, 68 mm. in length.
In the case of Sp. Nikitini, the length of the largest specimen figured
amounts to 53 mm.
As regards form, the North-east Greenland specimens agree very
well with the illustrations given of the species, and, in this matter,
too, it can be observed that younger specimens present a greater
width than length (in the case of Sp. Nikitini, the opposite appears
to be the case); in the oldest specimens, the width is, probably,
only slightly in excess of the length, while, in the younger speci-
mens, the proportion between width and length can rise to 8:7
(SCHELLWIEN’S text-figure 8 gives width: length 32:22). The greatest
width of the shell lies approximately just between the anterior mar-
gin of the shell and the hinge-line; the width of the hinge-line
amounts probably to about two-thirds of the entire width of the
shell. The umbo is pointed and incurved, and projects considerably
beyond the hinge-line. In consequence of the defectiveness of the
specimen, no details can be given of the structure of the cardinal
area and of the relation between the hinge-line and the lateral
margins of the shell, a relation which might, possibly, afford fur-
ther characteristic features for the determination of the species.
N:o 8. Spirifer Fritschi Schellwien.
For synonyms see TSCHERNYSCHEW 1902, р. 156; Wıman 1914,
p. 48.
In spite of the damaged state of the specimen, I consider that
I ought to refer to this species a Spirifer, found on the shore at the
Mallemukfjæld (N:o 141), in a boulder of the fine-grained reddish
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Green]. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 569
limestone. Its agreement with both SCHELLWIEN’s figures and TSCHERNY-
SCHEW’s, which latter, it is true, is classified under the title Sp. efr.
Fritschi SCHELLW. (1902, Pl. 13, Fig. 1), and also with specimens
from Spitzbergen, make me quite certain as to the determination.
The relation borne by the species to related forms, especially
to Sp. supramosquensis №к. has been dealt with in some detail under
that species, but it will probably be found suitable if we pay some
further attention to its occurrence in Arctic regions, and to the inter-
pretation given by earlier writers to its presence there. Wiman
mentions the species both from King’s Bay, from which locality he
has had 3 specimens for examination, and also from Cape Fanshave
(Hinlopen Strait), from which he has seen one specimen, which,
however, he considers cannot be specifically determined.
On inspecting the Spitzbergen collections of the Swedish Riks-
Museum, I found, however, two additional specimens of Sp. Fritschi,
having on their label: “Spirifer mosquensis” (in the handwriting of
the late Professor LinpsTROm), “Cape Fanshave” (in the handwriting
of Professor JOH. GUNNAR ANDERSSON). These specimens from Cape
Fanshave have formed the basis of the presumption of the occur-
rence of the mosquensis horizon in Spitzbergen of authors previous
to HoLTEDAHL. Wıman mentions something of the historical deve-
lopment and assumes a contradiction in the mention made by
TSCHERNYSCHEW (1902, р. 688) of the specimens determined by Глмо-
STRÔM and JOH. GUNNAR ANDERSSON as Sp. mosquensis, as TSCHER-
NYSCHEW, when mentioning Sp. Fritschi, says “Exemplare”, and
only one then was at Wiman’s hands. Wimax has not had
these specimens for examination, but they confirm in a very high
degree, the determination of Sp. Fritschi SCHELLWIEN from Spitz-
bergen.
N:o 9. Spirifer fulmari п. sp.
Pl. XXVII, Figs. 17—19.
I consider that I ought to classify as а new species а specimen
of a Spirifer belonging to the mosquensis group, and obtained from
the solid rock, 275 metres above sea-level in the Mallemukfjæld
(N:o 166). i do so in consequence of the great difference it shows
from the other species belonging to the above-mentioned group, in
spite of the material being restricted to an isolated ventral valve
which in addition, sufferred some damage during the life of the
animal, which healed later on. The name of the new species has
been given after the bird — Fulmarus glacialis — from which the
Mallemukfjæld has obtained its name.
570 KARL А. GRONWALL.
The ventral valve is greatly convex with rounded rectangular
outline and a straight hinge-line, across which projects the short
and broad, but strongly bent beak. The extreme point of the beak
has been corroded away, so that it is not possible to give its appear-
ance with certainty, nor to be quite sure as to the structure of the
cardinal area. However, there are definite indications that the beak ~
projected only inconsiderably backwards beyond the hinge-line; and
the height of the cardinal area has been rather inconsiderable, or
about 4 mm. The area increases gradually in height towards the
middle of the shell, and forms an obtuse angle with the mesial plane
of the shell. It is provided with a double sculpture, consisting
partly of fine, horizontal strie of growth, and partly of coarser,
irregular vertical lines which almost give the impression of wrinkles.
The beak occupies about '/s of the length of the hinge-line. The
hinge-line is long and straight, about °/10 of the greatest width of
the valve, and passes, with evenly rounded corners into the lateral
contours. The lateral portions of the valve slope fairly abruptly,
forming, thereby, small ears, which are not clearly distinguished
from the main part of the valve. The anterior margin of the valve
forms a circular line. The width of the valve is somewhat greater
than its length.
From the point of the beak to the anterior margin of the valve
runs a narrow, grooved sinus, embracing about 3 of the ribs of the
valve, and which only gradually increases in breadth and also be-
comes somewhat flatter; the sinus causes some little inflexion of the
anterior margin.
The valve is ornamented with close-lying ribs, pretty flat, of
varying breadth, and with a distinct groove between them which
diminish in intensity towards the flanks, and also by exceedingly
fine, straight striae of growth. On each side of the sinus there can
be counted 40—50 ribs; in the ‘umbonal region the ribs lie more
closely together and are fewer in number, and some few dichotomies
are observable there.
The interior of the ventral valve shows a pair of well developed
but relatively thin dental plates which descend almost direct down
towards the anterior margin of the valve to about */5 of its length.
The dental plates diverge considerably from the wall of the shell
towards the interior, as is clearly seen by Fig. 19, where the dental
plate to the left is seen to be considerably more distant from the
mesial line of the valve, the reason being that that part of the fossil
which is visible to the left, has been less corroded and dissolved
than that to the right.
Dimensions: Length about 43 mm., width about 45 mm., length
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 571
of the hinge-line 40 mm., thickness of the ventral valve about
19 mm.
By the internal structure of the valve and its well developed
dental plates, this species must, most undoubtedly, be referred to
that group of Spirifers characterized by Sp. mosquensis, but it is
distinctly differentiated from all the other species belonging to the
group by its fine sculpture. The species to which Sp. fulmari bears
the greatest resemblance is Sp. Frilschi which possesses the same
general form but, in addition to its characteristic sculpture, Sp. ful-
mari, differs from Sp. Fritschi by its greatly convex shell, its power-
ful and greatly projecting beak and its weak sinus.
N:o 10. Spirifer rectangulus Kut. var. alta, nov. var.?
P]. XXVIII, Fig. 1—6.
The three specimens — differing somewhat from each other —
of a species belonging to the Sp. trigonalis group that form the pre-
sent material, it has been impossible to identify with cerlainty as
belonging to any species previously described; neither, from the ma-
terial at hand, have I been able to establish a new species, especially
as the species which belong to this group present rather great limits
of variation.
The designation chosen above for the form now in question,
indicates that I am most inclined to refer it as a variety to Sp. rect-
angulus Кот., although, in certain respects, it considerably exceeds
the limits for variation which we, in accordance with TscHERNY-
SCHEW’S wealth of illustrations (1902, Pl. VIII, Fig. 1; Pl. XLI, Figs.
1—5, pp. 545—548) should consider as appertaining to this species.
Евесн’з (1900, Pl. 47 с, Fig. 7) figuring of Sp. rectangulus Кот., from
Almasnaja, at Donetz, points rather to a variation in the same direc-
tion as these specimens from North-east Greenland. In STUCKENBERG,
too (1905, Pl. 3, Figs. 3—7) there are figured specimens of Sp. rect-
angulus Кот. which have the variation of a higher shell and a
greatly rounded anterior margin.
For the sake of comparison, therefore, all three specimens have
been figured here: Specimen I, Figs. 1—4, shows a wider form;
specimen II, Fig. 5, presents a considerably longer form, but, as
shown by the course of the striae of growth, it proves to stand in
connection with the broader form, so that the shell’s greater length
has increased with age. Specimen III, Fig. 6, agrees in form pretty
well with the preceding, but the shell is so weathered that the
sculpture is indistinct, nothing being visible of the striæ of growth,
especially.
or
ml
N
KARL А. GRONWALL.
The dimensions of the three specimens are as follows:
I. width 34 mm., length 23 mm.: width: length = 100 :68
IL. — 2 — — 26 — u — 100 : 81
Ш. — 40 — — 38 — — : — = 100:82
The description given below refers to specimen I, and the varia-
tions from this form presented by the other specimens, are then
given separately.
The outline of the shell forms, approximately, a parallel trapez-
ium. The ventral valve is evenly arched, with the beak rapidly
tapering off, with an involute, blunted point projecting beyond
the hinge-line. The hinge-line is equal to the greatest width of the
shell, and from the angles of the shell the outline goes in an even,
flattened arc to the anterior margin of the shell, where the sinus
forms a shallow inflexion. In the umbonal region the sinus is deep
and its margins well marked; it increases in width anteriorly and,
at the same time, becomes shallower, so that it passes more and
more into the lateral portions. The cardinal area is moderately
high with almost the same height in its whole width, and is limited
towards the shell by a clearly marked elevated ridge. Towards the
interior of the shell the edge of the area is bent upwards, so that
the area forms a groove. It has possessed an evident horizontal
sculpture of fine striæ, the greater part of which, however, disap-
peared on working out; it is uncertain if any vertical sculpture
existed; on the inner side of the edge of the area there is visible a
faint crenulation.
The shell is ornamented with rounded ribs of almost uniform
size; in the umbonal region there are seen only 3 ribs on each side
of the sinus and, on the anterior margin there can be seen 8, which
gradually vanish towards the sides. The sinus, in which are visible
3 ribs of almost equal size, is separated from the lateral parts by
a specially prominent rib. On the ribs there is seen a very fine
radial sculpture which, together with the faintly undulating strie of
growth, form an imbricate sculpture as shown by Fig. 4. The faint
strie of growth are, in certain places on the anterior part of the
shell, bunched together, becoming thereby more prominent, but on
the posterior part too of the shell they can be clearly seen when
magnified, so that it is possible to follow the growth of the shell.
It is then clearly seen that, with the growth due to age, a certain
definite alteration of form of the shell has taken place, so that the
shell, in the younger stages, has pointed wings, and considerably
less length than the grown shell. From the striæ of growth it can
be determined that the proportion of length of shell to the width
of the hinge-line should be as follows:
|
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 978
Width 34 mm., length 23 mm.: width: length = 100: 68
ese. eh. b= И = 100850
9° DGA ini = CNE 100-41
16 Oa ee erg
Fig. 1 shows these shell-contours.
The differences from specimen I, described above, occurring in
specimens II and Ш, are briefly, as follows. Sp. II possesses a
broader and deeper sinus which is sharply limited from the lateral
portions of the valve; sp. III has the sinus relatively broad and
shallow, and passes fairly evenly into the lateral parts of the valve.
As far as regards the ribs of the sinus, sp. II appears to correspond
perfectly with sp. I, while, in the case of sp. III, the sinus in the
posterior part of the valve seems to have 3 ribs and, in the anterior
part, 5; both specimens show fairly clearly that, of the wings occur-
ring in the juvenile stages, there have been formed well developed
ears.
The specimen Г described above is in very close agreement with
TSCHERNYSCHEW’s Figs. 3 and 4, Pl. ХМ, which figure younger indi-
viduals, but the North-east Greenland specimen attains only *: the
size of the specimens from the Urals. The older specimens figured
by TscHERNYSCHEW — Pl. XLI, Fig. 1, for example, differ consider-
ably from our sp. I, and still more from our older specimens, II
and III. The above-mentioned figure possesses, with a width of 80
mm., a length of 35 mm., which gives a proportion of 100:44. In
the shell-sculpture, too, it presents considerable differences, as it has
much coarser ribs, which, in general, are doubled. TSCHERNYSCHEW
compares these older specimens with Sp. grandicostatus M’Coy.
A comparison with TsCHERNYSCHEW’s figures shows that the
only difference between our form and his figures of specimens from
the Urals are, in addition to the dimensions, the general contour
which, during growth, alters in a specially distinctive manner. In
the juvenile stages, the form of the shell agrees fairly well — judg-
ing by the striæ of growth on TsCHERNYSCHEW’S figures, at least —
and, in the form from the Urals, the superiority of width over length
is retained during the entire period of growth, in about the same
proportions.
Of allied species, special mention may be made of Sp. trigonalis
MARTIN, but a comparison with DE Коммск’$ figures at once shows
the fairly great difference, both in sculpture and form. Another
species, to which one would be more inclined to refer these Green-
land specimens, might be Sp. Strangwaysi VERN., but, from TRAUT-
SCHOLD’s figures (Pl. XXXV, Fig. 4) which, it is true, are not very
successful, the differences are of sufficient importance to allow us
XLIIL. 43
574 KARL А. GRONWALL.
to distinguish our form from the species mentioned. Sp. Strangwayst
is of considerably less thickness, and has a larger number of ribs
— 10 to 14 on each side of the sinus — which continue to the
edge of the shell.
Our specimens are derived from the bituminous limestone (N:o
190), at a height of 200 m. above the sea, in the Conglomerate
section.
Spirifer sp. indet. 2.
Of undeterminable Spirifer fragments we consider that we ought
to mention two specimens of wide forms.
The one, which is silicified, was found on the mainland behind
Henrik Kröyers Islets (№0 206) and belongs to a species with a very
wide shell, about 3 times as wide as it is long; the shell is rather
flat, with 12—15 flattened ribs on each side of the shallow sinus,
which, at the anterior margin, is almost half as broad as the length
of the shell (which was about 20 mm.).
The other is a cast of a shell preserved in a free-lying boulder
of limestone (N:o 153), found at the Mallemukfjæld. The fragment
shows only the one flank of the shell, but points to its being a
specimen with a width of approximately 60 mm., the width being
somewhat more than 3 times as great as the length. The shell has
had 10—12 flattened ribs on each side of the sinus and sinuous,
imbricate striæ of growth. This sculpture, as well as the form of
the shell, points to a relationship with that group of Spirifers that
includes the Sub-Carboniferous Sp. triangularis Martin, Sp. Dieneri
TscHERN. from the Schwagerina horizon of Russia, and the Permian
Sp. alatus v. SCHLOTH.
N:o 11. Martinia coreulum Kut.
For synonyms see TSCHERNYSCHEW 1902, p. 180.
A few specimens of smooth brachiopods have been found in a
free-lying boulder of red limestone (N:o 168.2) obtained at the foot
of the Mallemukfjæld, and very much recalling the red limestone
found in many places in the lower part of the profiles, e. g., west
of Koch’s section, They should, probably be referred to the species
above-mentioned.
These specimens are rather badly preserved, and only two give
any reliable evidence as to the relationship of the form to the
species as formerly described. But these two specimens, too, are
incomplete at the anterior margin. It should seem, however, as
if our specimens were somewhat wider than TSCHERNYSCHEW’S figures
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 575
(PI. 15, Figs. 6—7); the size, too, is different, the specimens in ques-
tion attaining a width of only 11—13 mm., while TscHERNYSCHEW’S
figures have a width of 18 mm.
N:o 12. Reticularia lineata Martin.
For synonyms see TSCHERNYSCHEW 1902, p. 193.
In the free-lying boulder N:o 154, of fine-grained, light limestone
from the Mallemukfjæld, there was obtained an imperfect specimen
af a ventral valve, with the umbonal region and the area well pre-
served, which I consider I can refer to this species. The specimen
when entire has measured about 22 mm. in width, 17 mm. in length
and 12 mm. in thickness.
The species is widely distributed, both horizontally and verti-
cally.
N:o 13. Strophalosia sp. indet. N:o 1.
PIOXX Vili Pigs 7
A specimen of a Strophalosia, which I did not succeed in work-
ing out from the rock, will now be described, in spite of the fact
that it is impossible even approximately to determine its relation-
ship to forms already described. The stratigraphical distribution of
the genus Strophalosia, however, is so definite, appearing first in
any great number in the Upper Carboniferous beds, and with its
greatest distribution in the Permian formation, that the occurrence
here of its species is worthy of mention.
In form, the shell is rounded triangular, with the length and
width equal, and with the greatest width near the anterior margin.
The ventral valve is fairly evenly arched, the arching being increased
in the anterior portion; there is visible here a very faint sinus, too.
The dorsal valve is concave, adhering pretty closely to the form of
the ventral valve and, consequently, giving a fairly small visceral
room. The length of the shell is about 18 mm., the width being
about the same; the thickness of the shell is about 7 mm., and the
distance between the valves about 4 mm. The hinge-line is straight
and fairly short (about 6 mm.) and the beak has probably been
truncated and did not project beyond the hinge-line. The shell
is characteristically sculptured; the ventral valve is covered with 2
to 4 mm. long spines which seem to be arranged in radiating rows
with intermediate spaces of from 1!/2 to 2 mm. distance, while in
the rows themselves, the spines have a distance from each other of
about 2 mm. The spine-bases are almost circular, forming a minute
pustle. The dorsal valve is irregularly wrinkled, and is provided
with very fine strie of growth.
43*
ел
—1
(ep)
KARL А. GRONWALL.
The specimen occurs in a free-lying boulder (N:o 203) of the
fine-grained limestone from the Eskimo Naze; there is also another
specimen, probably of the same species, but almost concealed by the
rock. Of other fossils, the boulder contains only Alveolites sp.
Of the species accessible to me in the literature, the species
that appears to offer the greatest analogies to our specimen, is Str.
Cornelliana DERBY, which, however, has often grown fast, throughout
the whole of its length, with its growing-bed. (1874, р. 45; Pl. 3,
Figs: 29. 30, 32, 33, 35, 36. 37, 58; 21. 4 Fig. 5; РЕЗ Pigs, 17 РЕ
9, Figs. 10—11).
N:o 14. Strophalosia sp. indet. N:o 2.
Pl. ХХУШ, Fig. 8—9.
A specimen of the ventral valve, chiefly a mould with a small
fragment of the shell, obtained from the fine-grained limestone N:o
154, from the Mallemukfjæld, ought probably to be referred to the
genus Strophalosia, even though with some hesitation.
The valve is triangular, rounded anteriorly; the height 12 mm.
and with the greatest width somewhat less, being 11 mm. immedi-
ately behind the anterior margin. The greatest arching of the valve
is at the irregularly formed beak, whence the valve slopes fairly
sharply towards the flanks, and more gently towards the anterior
margin. The hinge-line is about 5 mm. long and is almost straight.
The sculpture of the shell consists of finely radiating ribs on which,
here and there, a spine has been attached, starting from an elongated
base. On the poorly developed ears and on the flanks nearest to
the beak, the spines have been most numerous. Of concentric sculp-
ture the valve has had only weak, irregular wrinkles, most accentu-
ated on the umbonal part and vanishing towards the anterior
margin.
Among the figures and descriptions of species belonging to the
genus Strophalosia, to which I have had access, especially in WaAa-
GEN and NETSCHAJEW, I have not been able to discover any species
with a similarly shaped valve, and, above all, there is none with a
similar irregular umbonal portion. The distinct indication of an area
below the hinge-line, and the evident scar of attachment at the point
of the beak, I consider, however, as being good reasons for referring
this form to the genus Strophalosia.
N:o 15. Chonetella nasuta Waag.
Pl. XXVIII, Figs. 10—14.
WAAGEN 1882—84, рр. 657—660, PI. 81, Figs. 3— 8.
ROTHPLETZ 1892, p. 77, Pl. 10, Figs. 12 and 16.
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Green]. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 977
Of this characteristic form there is a specimen from the black
bituminous limestone with Spirifer supramosquensis, in the Conglo-
merate section (N:o 190).
The specimen is complete, with the two valves attached to each
other, but the dorsal valve has been concealed by rock substance
which it has not been possible to entirely remove. In consequence
of its state of preservation, it has been impossible to discern among
the peculiar characteristics distinguishing the genus more than the
little deltidial fissure below the beak. The spines on the hinge-line
are also wanting, even if there exist indications that they have form-
erly been present, but that they have been worn away. There is
no doubt, however, but that our form belongs to the above-named
genus and species in question.
Our specimen is larger than those of WAAGEN (from one-half
to once as large again), with a total length of 17 mm.; the width
at the hinge-line about 20 mm., and the thickness 11 mm. As con-
trasted with the specimens figured by WAAGEN, our specimen pre-
sents certain marks of senility; this being specially visible in Fig.
13, which gives a lateral view of the shell. WaaGEx distinguishes
two varieties of the species; the one strongly inflated, with small
wings, and the other less strongly inflated, with larger wings. Our
specimen belongs to the strongly inflated variety, and agrees fairly
closely in form with WaaGen’s Figs. 7a—d. Our specimen, how-
ever, has had its greatest width at the hinge-line, which, unfortun-
ately, is somewhat defect, while WAAGEN’s figure has its greatest
width at the middle of the shell.
In the sculpture, our form presents certain small differences
from WaAAGEN’s description and figure. The radial sculpture with
ribs, the sinus and the nose-shaped projection at the anterior mar-
gin, are in entire agreement with the exception of some small lesions
suffered by the shell during the animal’s life, but which had healed
again. A distinct difference, however, is that, in our specimen, the
umbonal portion of the ventral valve possesses concentric wrinkles
or rounded ribs, which are most evident pretly near to the umbo
and decrease in strength anteriorly. The valve presents scars of
spines in several places.
We do not wish to express any opinion whether these differ-
ences: the concentric sculpture on the umbonal portion and the
richer occurrence of spines — are of such importance that they
entitle us to add a variety to WAAGEN’s species, as the material
available consists of but one specimen, and as WAAGEN’s description
suggests that there exists a certain space of variation in the case of
the Indian species.
578 KARL А. GRÖNWALL,
WAAGEN describes this species from various parts of the middle
and upper Productus limestone, and ROTHPLETZ mentions it from
the Permian of the Indian archipelago.
N:o 16. Produettis boliviensis D’Orb.
For synonyms see TSCHERNYSCHEW 1902, р. 250 and Wiman 1914,
р: 63.
Of this species there are two specimens, both found in free-lying
boulders; the one at the Cape Jungersen section (N:o 120), and the
other at the Eskimo Naze (N:o 197), both of them being of con-
siderable dimensions.
The fragment from the Cape Jungersen section is fairly well
preserved, and clearly shows the strong involution of the ventral
valve, and the sharp projecting of the ears out from the umbonal
part. Something is seen of the dorsal valve, too, suggesting its con-
cave form and the small dimensions of the visceral room. The
sculpture is somewhat indistinct, the shell being partially silicified.
The other specimen is, in several respects, fragmentary.
The species occurs in Spitzbergen, in the mosquensis limestone
on the Brogger peninsula, and in Beeren Eiland in the Cora lime-
stone. In Russia this species begins in the Cora limestone and goes
up into the Arta stage.
N:o 17. Produetus inflatus M’Chesney.
Pl. XXIX, Figs. 17—19.
For synonyms see Wiman, 1914, р. 66; TscHERNYSCHEW, 1902,
р. 261 and STUART WELLER, 1914, р. 111.
I consider that to this species I ought to refer two specimens;
the one found free-lying in the Cape Jungersen section (N:o 128),
and the other free-lying at the Eskimo Naze (N:o 212).
The first, the figured is a large specimen, agreeing perfectly with
those from Spitzbergen (Skansbay), and may specially be compared
with the senile specimens figured by Wıman, Pl. 14, Fig. 2, and :
Pl. 15, Figs. 3, 4. Our specimen also shows the dorsal valve (which
however, has been displaced somewhat from its original position)
with its characteristic sculpture of both concentric wrinkles and
radiating ribs (see TSCHERNYSCHEW, 1902, Pl. 28, Fig. 4c). The
position and form of the dorsal valve points distinctly to a high
visceral room. The ears are very large, so that, in our specimen
— which, in general dimensions, is somewhat smaller than the
Wıman’s specimen spoken of, but which, however, is equally senile
in characteristics — they have attained a width, from point to point,
of 75—80 mm.
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 579
The other specimen is smaller and not so well preserved, but
this one, too, shows the characteristic of a high visceral room.
Specimens from Russia, Spitzbergen and North-east Greenland
have, in general, the same dimensions, while those from North
America, figured by STUART WELLER, are considerably smaller.
The species is abundant in Spitzbergen and Beeren Eiland in
the Spirifer limestone, and in Russia it goes from the Omphalotro-
chus horizon up into the Arta stage. In North America it occurs
in the Mississipian (Chester Group).
Productus sp. indet. 2 (of the semireticulatus group).
Of forms belonging to the semireticulatus group, there have been
found fragmentary specimens, all ventral valves: — 2 specimens in
the grey, fine-grained limestone (N:o 204) found as free-lying frag-
ments at the Eskimo Naze, and 2 specimens, each found in a
boulder of the white “conglomerate”-like limestone from Eskimo
Мате (N:o 204) and from the mainland behind Henrik Kröyer’s Islets
(N:o 179). There is some difference between these two types, each
of which probably represents a species.
The first have the concentric ornamentation well developed and
regular, so that the reticulate sculpture appears rather plainly. The
specimens are fairly young, and show just a beginning of the geni-
culation of the ventral valve for the visceral room. The length is
almost 30 mm.
The latter have the concentrical sculpture less sharp, appearing
more in the form of wrinkles, so that the reticulate sculpture be-
comes fairly irregular. The specimens are somewhat compressed;
this species has been of smaller dimensions than the former, as the
ventral valve, with a length of about 20 mm., proves an evident
geniculation.
N:o 18. Productus longispinus Sow.
For synonyms see FLIEGEL, 1901, p. 100.
Of this species, a ventral valve has been found 90 metres above
sea-level on Amdrup’s Land at the Eastern river, in a dark, some-
what crystalline limestone (N:o 125).
The specimen has a length of 13 mm., and a height of 17 mm.
and belongs to that form of the species without sinus, and con-
sequently has had the shell equally vaulted.
The agreement is very great between our specimen and those
which SCHELLWIEN (1900, р. 56, Pl. VII, Figs. 4—7) mentions and
figures from Teufelschlucht in Trogkofel and Nikitin (1890, р. 159,
Pl. I, Figs. 7—12), from the Gshel stage of the Russian Carboniferous.
580 KARL А. GRONWALL.
Productus longispinus Sow. is a fairly variable form, of which
a number of different species have been drawn up, but which Da-
VIDSON, however, groups together. Its stratigraphical distribution
is, too, fairly wide, so that it can hardly make a very valuable
contribution to the determination of the horizon. Productus lobatus
Sow. which TscHERNYSCHEW (1902, p. 263) mentions from the Ompha-
lotrochus and Schwagerina horizons of Russia, is considered by
Davipson to be a variety of Pr. longispinus Sow.
N:o 19. Productus compressus Waag.
Р1. XXVIII, Figs. 15—18.
WAAGEN, 1882—84, р. 710, pl. 81. Figs. 1-2.
A specimen of a form appertaining to the Pr. striatus group,
and found in the very fossiliferous limestone, N:o 154 from the
Mallemukfjæld, ought probably, although somewhat doubtfully, be
referred to this species.
The forms belonging to the striatus group are fairly closely
related to each other, and here, as in the case of the Cora group,
GRÔBER denies that we are entitled to establish more than one
species.
The specimen we have figured here is triangular in outline,
and wants a proper hinge-line. Of the ears there remain only
faintly discernible remains, which show that they have a direction
vertical to the valve. The beak is pointed, and the umbonal portion
strongly compressed.
The ventral valve has no indication of a sinus, and, from the
beak it is arched in an even curvature, until it meets the concave
dorsal valve where it bends sharply anteriorly. In consequence of
this form of the shell, the visceral room becomes low and small.
The sculpture of the ventral valve is not preserved, as the
valve, as is usually the case with this group, is very thin, but the
mould clearly shows irregular wrinkles of the same form and appea-
rance as those shown in WAAGEN’s figure, although they are not so
numerous. The mould also shows traces of about 4 spines on the
one flank.
The dorsal valve is ornamented with fine striæ which increase
in number through intercalation, and spread fan-wise over the entire
surface of the valve, so that they meet the margin at about right
angles.
The characteristics in which our specimen differs from Waa-
GEN’s are: the size — the length, in specimens from the Productus
limestone of the Salt Range reaching as much as 55 mm. — and
also the arching of the ventral valve. This latter character is stated
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 581
by WaaGEN to be specially variable, and the specimens figured pre-
sent little resemblance to each other but, in the description it is
stated that sometimes the curve “remains rather flat in the apical
region and then suddenly bends down to the front”.
Our specimen exhibits evident differences from other forms be-
longing to the striatus group. Pr. anomalus Keys. (figured in
TSCHERNYSCHEW, 1902, Pl. LXII, Fig. 10) and Pr. mytiloides WAAGEN
have a more regular sculpture, with the longitudinal striæ straighter
and more continuous, while the ventral valve is considerably flatter.
Pr. mongolicus DIENER (1897: Part Ш, Pl. 4, Figs. 8—10 and 1899, PI. 6,
Figs. 7—8) agrees, perhaps, somewhat more closely with our specimen
as far as size is concerned (an entire specimen is about30 mm., in length)
and in the general form and the arching of the shell, but it differs
from it by the umbo projecting somewhat beyond the hinge-line,
and also by its different sculpture which, in the case of Pr. mongo-
licus DIEN., consists of fairly distinct and regular radial striæ and
close, sharp transverse wrinkles.
Prod. striatus FISCHER, as figured by Davipson, has a sharper
and more regular radial sculpture, while the shell is flatter.
N:o 20. Produetus simensis Tschern.
TSCHERNYSCHEW, 1902, pp. 626—628, Pl. 35, Fig. 5; Pl. 55, Figs.
2—5.
A compressed specimen of the ventral valve of a finely striated
Productus, found in the black shaly rock (N:o 190) in the Conglo-
merate section, at about 200 metres above sea-level, together with
Spirifer supramosquensis Nik. and Sp. rectangulus Кот. var. alta, ought
probably be referred to this species.
The specimen is too badly preserved to be figured, but from its
character it may easily be discerned that it is most closely con-
nected with the species mentioned above. Its elongated form speaks
most decidedly against Из being referred to Prod. Cora d’Ors. and
the nearest related forms, and brings it into closest connection with
Prod. tenuistriatus VERN., and Prod. simensis TSCHERN.
The absence of wrinkles on the flanks, and the abrupt involu-
tion of the valve near the beak speaks most for Prod. simensis, but
the compression that the valve has undergone, makes it impossible
to decide if its transverse profile in the anterior part possesses the
elevation in the middle and the sharp slope towards the flanks,
which are characteristic for Prod. simensis.
In this connection reference should be made to the doubts ex-
pressed by GRÖBER (1908 and 1909) respecting the value, from a
stratigraphical point of view, that can be ascribed to Productus Cora
582 KARL А. GRONWALL.
d’Ors. and related species: Pr. corrugatus M’Coy, Pr. lineatus WAAG.,
Pr. tenuistriatus VERN., Pr. simensis TSCHERN. — and to his opinion
respecting the relationship of these forms to each others. In 1908
(p. 220) he classifies both Pr. tenuistriatus VERN. and Pr. simensis
TSCHERN. as varieties of Pr. Cora 4’Овв. and denies TSCHERNYSCHEW’S
assertion that Pr. Cora d’Ore. is a species characteristic of the Upper
Carboniferous. I cannot, of course, express any opinion on this
matter, but, supported by the statements before me, I should like to
point out that TscHERNYSCHEW (1902, рр. 626—628) gives Pr. simen-
sis as belonging to the Schwagerina horizon in the Urals, while
GrOBER (1908, р. 220), mentions it from the Lower Carboniferous in
southern Tian-Schan. Consequently, if GROBER's identification of
these two forms is correct, this form is of little importance for a
closer determination of the niveau of these strala.
The related Pr. Cora is, in Beeren Eiland, found in the Cora
limestone, and, in Spitzbergen, in the Cyathophyllum limestone
(УУтмам, р. 69), and, possible, in the mosquensis limestone (HOLTE-
DAHL, 1911, p. 34).
N:o 21. Produetus cancriniformis Tschern.
Pl. ХХУШ, Figs. 19—22.
Pr. cancriniformis TSCHERNYSCHEW 1889, р. 283, Pl. 7, Figs. 32—33.
- — SCHELLWIEN 1892, р. 22, Pl. 8, Figs. 20—21.
- — Diener 1897: Part Ш, р. 25, Pl. 4, Figs. 6—7.
- — DIENER 1897: Part ТУ, р. 31, Pl. 1, Figs. 7—10.
- — SCHELLWIEN 1900, р. 43, Pl. 9, Figs. 1—6.
- — TSCHERNYSCHEW 1902, р. 292, PI. 52, Figs. 5—6.
The available figures show that this species varies pretty con-
siderably, both with respect to the form of the shell, the proportion
between length and width, the arching of the dorsal valve, and the
occurrence of a sinus. Our specimens are all fairly large and attain
at least the same size as those figured; the width, too, of the shell
is fairly considerable, and almost agrees with the broadest of the
specimens previously figured. The ventral valve is almost spirally
involute and presents a fairly evenly arched curve; in this respect
our specimens agree best with DIENER's (1897: Part IV) figures of speci-
mens from the Himalayas, although, on the other hand, Отемев re-
marks that, in his material, broad forms are rare. The specimen
given in Fig. 19 presents an indication of a sinus, something like
that shown in SCHELLWIEN, 1900, Pl. 9, Fig. 4. The other specimens
have the shell evenly arched. The dorsal margin and the ears are
not perfectly preserved, but there is nothing that indicates variations
from the typical form. The same may be said about the sculpture,
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 583
and it should, perhaps, be specially pointed out that the characteri-
stic feature distinguishing Pr. cancriniformis TSCHERN. from the nearly
related Pr. Cancrini VERN., viz., the continuation of the transverse
wrinkles from the flanks of the shell across the median portion, is
clearly apparent.
This species occurs in 4 fairly well preserved specimens of the
dorsal valve, in the light limestone N:o 154 from the Mallemukfjæld.
By TscHERNYSCHEW and other writers, this species is considered
to be a leading form for the Arta stage’, the lowest portion of the
Permo-Carboniferous of Russia, and is mentioned from the Auernigg
strata of the Carnian Alps, which, by ScHELLWIEN is reckoned as
the uppermost bed of the Upper Carboniferous. In the Hima-
layas, the species occurs in the Chitichun fauna, which DIENER con-
siders as belonging to the lowest Permo-Carboniferous, and in the
Productus shales from Kumaon and Gurwhal in the Niti pass —
strata which Diener refers to the Permian. From Spitzbergen,
TSCHERNYSCHEW mentions the species from the Productus-bearing
siliceous rocks, but Wıman has only a line about this species.
Productus cancriniformis TscHERN., in Russia, goes down into
the Schwagerina horizon. This species should, therefore, even though
its vertical extension is fairly wide, be one of the forms which here
indicate a higher horizon of the formations now in question, and
consequently it points to a Schwagerina horizon as the lowest poss-
ible level.
N:o 22. Produetus Wallacianus Derby.
Pl. XXIX, Figs. 1—4.
1874, Productus Wallacianus DERBY, р. 57, Pl. 3, Figs. 46—48;
Pl 6, Ее. 5.
1902, — Wallacei TSCHERNYSCHEW, р. 270, Pl. 30, Fig. 8;
Pl. 60, Figs. 19—23.
Two specimens of a Productus found in a light fine-grained lime-
stone on the Eskimo Naze (№0 213), a ventral and a dorsal valve,
I consider I should refer to the above-mentioned species, in spite
of the fact that the original figures are by no means very clear, even
1 The manner in which Евесн mentions this species in “Геза palæozoica” (Vol.
I, 2), is somewhat peculiar, and is worthy of mention. On page 655 he mentions
the species as „eine Leitform der Arta-stufe“, while, on page 358 b, in a later
addition, he includes it among ,stratigraphisch bedeutungslose Arten von langer
geologischer Lebensdauer“. This last opinion is based on SCHELLWIEN (of 1902),
but, even if the importance of this species for the determination of levels in the
Permo-Carboniferous and the Permian is not very great, still, for us it is an
important leading fossil which indicates the Schwagerina horizon as the lowest
point of comparison.
584 KARL А. GRONWALL.
if they can be fairly well supplemented by the description belonging
to them.
TSCHERNYSCHEW’S figures give a considerably clearer picture of
the species, and our specimens agree very well with them, especially
the ventral valve — our Pl. XXIX, Figs. 1—2 — with TSCHERNYSCHEW’S
Pl. 30, Fig. 8. The only difference from the American form that
TSCHERNYSCHEW emphasizes, is, that, on the lower part of the valve,
the tubercles serving as the bases of the spines are somewhat elon-
gated, a feature which is clearest evident on the mould, although
TSCHERNYSCHEW also remarks about this, that a longitudinal exten-
sion in the case of these tubercles can also be observed in one of
Dersy’s figures (Pl. 6, Fig. 5). In our specimens, these tubercles
are not fully round but somewhat greater in length than width,
although they have not that swollen, oval form of Productus spinu-
losus Sow. (DavipDSON, 1857—62, Pl. 34), to which species Pr. Walla-
cianus DERBY has been referred by SCHELLWIEN (1900, р. 49), while
TSCHERNYSCHEW denies the identity.
Our specimens present a little difference from Оевву’$ descrip-
tion, the hinge-line being somewhat shorter than the greatest width
of the shell. The case is the same in several of TSCHERNYSCHEW’S
figures, and Dersy’s Fig. 5, Pl. 6 also shows an indication of the
same feature. Another difference is that, in our specimens the hinge-
line is faintly curved; this is especially noticeable on the dorsal
valve. Derpy’s figure 46, Pl. 3, indicates that the hinge-line there
is straight, while in TSCHERNYSCHEW, especially in Pl. 60, Figs. 22—
23 indicate a curving of the hinge-line which, however, is lesser
than in our specimens.
As regards dimensions, the specimens from North-east Greenland
agree with those given, both from Russia and from Brazil.
The species occurs in the Cora- and in the Schwagerina hori-
zons in the Urals.
As to the identity of our species with the Pr. cfr. Wallacei from
the mosquensis strata of Spitzbergen described by HorLTEDAHL (1911,
р. 31, Pl. 5, Fig. 14), it is impossible to form any decided opinion
based on HOLTEDAHL's description and figures.
N:o 23. Productus Lovéni Wiman.
Pl. XXVIII, Fig. 23.
WIMAN р. 72, Pl. 17, Figs. 12—18.
Of this species there is in a boulder of grey limestone (№0 204)
collected at Eskimo Naze, a fairly well preserved specimen, which,
on splitting the rock, showed itself in such a way that both the
dorsal and the ventral valve appeared as a cast, the visceral room
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Green]. and its Brachiopod Fauna, 9585
having been filled with calcite which could be worked away. In
the same boulder there is visible on the surface the sections, filled
with calcite, of two Productus shells which, with tolerable certainty,
may be ascribed to this species. The figure shows the cast of the
sculpture of the dorsal valve, a fragment of the latter and finally,
a part of the calcareous mass that had filled the visceral room.
Our specimen agrees very well with Wiman’s figures, both as
regards sculpture and form; a wax impression of the ventral valve
shows the agreement still better. Our specimen has not reached
such an age that a geniculation of the ventral valve towards the
front line can be noticed, such as is pictured by Wimax from older
specimens.
This species occurs numerously in Spitzbergen in the white,
sandy Spirifer limestone on Lovén’s Mountain, and some likeness
can be noted between the rock in which the specimen from North-
east Greenland occurs, and the Spirifer limestone of Lovén’s Mountain.
N:o 24. Produetus punctatus Martin.
Pl. XXIX, Fig. 5.
For synonyms see TSCHERNYSCHEW, 1902, pp. 296, 297; GIRTY
1903, р. 368, FLIEGEL, р. 101 and THomas р. 303.
Of this species I have only the specimen figured, a dorsal valve,
found on Amdrup’s Land at the Eastern river in light-red limestone
(N-o 160). In dimensions it attains the figures given for large spe-
cimens, and, on the whole, it agrees with, e. g., Davipson’s figuring,
Pl. 44, Figs. 9 and 11. As regards the sculpture of the valve, no
difference can be observed between our specimen and Davınson’s
figure 10Ъ, Pl. 44, and the description that VAUGHAN (1906, р. 307)
gives of the shell-sculpture of this species as compared with that of
Pr. pustulosus Puiu. and Pr. fimbriatus Sow., is perfectly applicable to
our specimen. VAUGHAN says: “In the type of Pr. punctatus the
spine-bases are extremely numerous, small, and closely packed, three
to four concentric rows ornamenting each concentric band (the spines
which compose the uppermost row on each band are always longer
than those of the lower rows)’. On one piece of the surface of the
valve there are visible spines still remaining, and spines are spread
pretty abundantly in the rock.
This species is widely distributed, both horizontally and verti-
cally. It seems to have its chief niveau in the Lower Carboniferous,
but HOLTEDAHL (1911, р. 35) states that it occurs abundantly in the
mosquensis limestone at King’s Bay, in Spitzbergen, while TSCHERNY-
SCHEW mentions it both from the Omphalotrochus limestone in Ti-
man, and the Schwagerina horizon in the Urals.
586 KARL А. GRONWALL.
JAKOWLEW (1912, Pl. 4, Fig. 8), mentions this species from the
Permo-Carboniferous (Arta stage) in the Donetz basin.
For the group of Productus of which Pr. punctatus is the type,
STUART WELLER (1914, р. 138) has proposed the establishment of a
new genus, under the name of Echinoconchus, and THomas the
genus Pustula.
N:o 25. Produetus pseudohorridus Wiman.
Pl. XXIX, Figs. 6—10.
Wiman, р. 74, Pl. 17, Figs. 1—11.
Of this typical species there are 3 unquestionable specimens:
one full grown, showing both the ventral and the dorsal valve (the
figured), found in a boulder at the Eskimo Naze (N-o 215); a
fairly full-grown specimen of a ventral valve found at the same
place (№0 197), while a young specimen was found on the mainland
behind Henrik Kröyer’s Islets (N:o 214d). All these occur in the
same rock, a light-grey, fine-grained, somewhat sandy limestone.
There is, in addition, a ventral valve (N-o 214 с) from the mainland
at Henrik Kröyer’s Islets, which however, is not so well preserved
as to allow of fully positive identification.
These specimens agree so closely with Wıman’s description that
only unimportant additions need to be made. Specially deserving of
attention is that Fig. 9 shows the correctness of WIMAN's supposi-
tion that, in the case of fully complete specimens, the greatest width
lies somewhat in advance of the ears. The cast of the dorsal valve
shows how deep this is, and the form of the mesial fold, which
corresponds to the sinus of the ventral valve, as well as the even
curving of the anterior part of the dorsal valve towards the margin
without any geniculation at the limit of the visceral room.
In Spitzbergen, this species occurs in the Spirifer limestone and
in the Productus flint.
N:o 26. Productus timanicus Stuckenberg.
Pl. XXIX, Figs.) 11—16.
STUCKENBERG, 1875, p. 86, Pl. 1, Figs. 1—7.
TSCHERNYSCHEW, 1902, рр. 306, 638, Pl. 30, Fig. 5; Pl. 57, Figs.
1—6.
STUCKENBERG, 1905, p. 65, Pl. 6, Fig. 10.
Wiman, 1914, р. 75, Pl. 17, Figs. 19—21; Pl. 18, Figs. 1—6.
This species is one of the fossils that occur most numerously
in our collection, and is represented both by fairly young specimens
and by fully grown ones, a fact which, at first, rendered identifica-
tion difficult.
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 587
In the limestone boulder, №0 154 there are 3 fairly complete
specimens of the ventral valve — 2 of them younger ones (figured
here) and 1 older one. There are, in addition, 2 fragments of ven-
tral valves. Of the dorsal valve, there is one imperfect specimen. In
the limestone boulder, №0 197, from the Eskimo Naze (together
with Pr. pseudohorridus WimaN) there are 3 partly fragmentary spe-
cimens of the ventral valve, 2 younger and 1 older; in the limestone
boulder, N-o 196, also from the Eskimo Naze, a younger, fairly
complete specimen of a ventral valve. From Henrik Kråyer's Islets
there was obtained (N-o 191), an older specimen, partially silicified.
The available illustrations of younger specimens (STUCKENBERG,
1875, Bl. 1, Figs. 5, 6, 7, and TSCHERNYSCHEw, 1902, Pl. 57, Figs:
За, 3b) do not spread sufficient light on the structure of the spe-
cimens in question, but both STUCKENBERG in his original diagnosis
and TSCHERNYSCHEW State that the sinus of the ventral valve begins
at the apex itself and gradually increases outwards towards the
anterior margin and that ears are wanting in the young individual.
Our figures, 11—18, shows plainly that no ears can be distinguished
and that the hinge-line is straight and very short; here, too, we
have one of the characteristics distinguishing the younger specimens
from the older, viz., that the hinge-line becomes longer with age,
just as the valve, in general, increases in width. In one respect,
possibly, our specimens differ both from the Russian and those from
Spitzbergen, viz., that, nearest the beak, the median portion of the
ventral valve is rather greatly compressed, so that it abruptly
rises above the flanks and increases rapidly in width. The specimen
shown in Figs. 14—16, is older than the specimens which are de-
signated by STUCKENBERG and TSCHERNYSCHEW as young. The oldest
specimen obtained from North-east Greenland has a width of about
43 mm., but is not so strongly involute and, consequently, not so
old as TSCHERNYSCHEw’S oldest specimens, Pl. 57, Figs. 4, 5, 6, even
if this specimen is not very much superior in width, its maximum
in this respect being only 50 mm. The specimens from Spitzbergen
are much wider (75—80 mm.) and yet at the same time they do
not present by far such a degree of involution as that shown by
TSCHERNYSCHEW’s figures. For the sake of comparison, the reader
is referred to Wiman’s Fig. 20, Pl. 17. In the above respects, Pr.
timanicus probably presents a fairly considerable space of variation,
so that the mentioned difference in the appearance of the species, as
found in the several localities, might possibly be made the basis for
distinguishing various types.
The dorsal valve found here has been of fairly considerable
dimensions, the width being about 35 mm., without spines, and does
588 KARL А. GRONWALL.
not lead to any addition to what Wiman has already mentioned
with regard to the dorsal valve.
This species is one of the most common in the Spirifer lime-
stone of Spitzbergen, and also occurs in the same horizon in Beeren
Eiland. In Russia it is specially general in the Timan district, be-
ginning there in the Omphalotrochus horizon, and having its chief
occurrence in the Schwagerina horizon. In the Ural district again
it is rare, being found there in the Cora horizon and also in dolo-
mites belonging to the Arta stage.
I have not been able to find any younger specimens among the
material from Spitzbergen in the State Museum at Stockholm that
has been determined by Wiman, but among fragments which have
been characterized by him as “undeterminable Productide” I suc-
ceeded in discovering some younger specimens of Pr. timanicus, which
agreed perfectly with those from North-east Greenland. In the col-
lection from Spitzbergen of the Geological Institute of Uppsala there
were found no younger specimens that could throw any light over
the question of the structure of the juvenile forms.
As to the possible occurrence of this species in the Arctic North
America the reader may be referred to the detailed unravelling of
this problem, that is given below, pp. 602—604, where, too, the litera-
ture dealing with the question is also mentioned.
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna.
589
Table of the Distribution of the Brachiopod Fauna on the
Localities of North-east Greenland.
| Holm’ 5 Land | re 5 Land
| j |
| >; 2 [1 [2a aac at SIE
x | Drelasınanspa. rc. en ae SE UE Te | IRA: | =
| N:o 1 Rhynchopora Nikitini TSCHERN. .............|.. | | |
т №0 2 Camarophoria Karpinskü TSCHERN. .. ..... | LE
HN OS Athyris Royssii WEVEILLE. ие. | al SE
EN a Spiniferina”Myla m. Sp PR ko: asc. | | EN ke Sen
+ | — SPESSART а | | ir | I ee
+ | Spinijeral. Spiriferella sp, 2... || Peale eee Sr
+ || №0 5 Spirifer п. зр.? ex aff. Sp. duplicicoste Рнил.|.. .. | - | AE
+ | N:o 6 — CT БН MART ооо рес eee | ба Wace | |
* | №0 7 — supramosquensis Nik. ............... |X | ?
* | N:o 8 о о О 2 en || +
* | N:o 9 ulm ann ES De acmcserbac | X
* | №0 10 — rectangulus Кот., var. alta п. var.? . | Ж |
+ | 'Spinifera spinde BR at ee И +
Ао DIE Mantiniascoreulum Run... | + | |
3° | №0 IDEReticulanta@lıneata@ MAR AR PR | .| +]
+ | №0 13 Strophalosia sp. indet. №0 1................ .|+ |
pO Ue — - — и a Е
aN OmllonGhronmetella masulaaWiAAG ne rer "SÆDE
+ | N:o 16 Productus boliviensis D'ORB. ................ | + | .. | ER |
+ | № 17 — — inflatus M’Cuesn................. Re le.
+ | == (В PEER RER UE jee | |
* | №0 18 = longispinus2Sowe nennen а |
+ | №0 19 = compressus WAAG................. a | I | |
* | N:o 20 — SIMENSISMOSCHERN RP Er IX |
+ | N:o 21 = cancriniformis TSCHERN. ..........|..|.. |
+. | №0 22 — Wallacianus DERBY .............. | +
+ || N:o 23 — ODEN WAMAN.. и | +
* | №0 24 — DUNCLALUS МО eee eae | Sie | 7 IX
+ | N:o 25 — pseudohorridus WIMAN............ | ola Sa Se. | +-
de | N:o 26 — timanicus STUCK... | iy | + | |
* indicates a species occurring in
T
Holm’s Land.
1. The south coast from west to the Malle-
= — Upper
The localities are the following:
mukfjzld; mostly finds in situ.
2. Finds of boulders at the Mallemukfjæld
and on Eskimo Naze.
a. the coarse-grained limestone.
b. the fine-grained
c. the silicified
V7
AN
==
XLIII.
Amdrup's Land.
. Cape Jungersen.
. Sophus Muller's Naze.
Ш © Ot BR oo
indicates a species found in solid rock.
boulders.
. Henrik Kroyer’s Islets.
. The mainland at Henrik Kröyer’s
the Lower Marine ЕВЕ:
Islets.
44
. The south coast west. of Cape Jungersen.
590 KARL А. GRONWALL.
The Distribution of the Brachiopod Fauna on the two horizons
of the Carboniferous deposits of North-east Greenland.
As shown by the table above, the Brachiopod Fauna consists of
24 species of determined forms, to which should be added the two
species of Strophalosia, so that, for the purpose of this comparative
survey we have 26 species, 9 of which occur in the Lower, and 17
in the Upper group. It should be specially observed that no forms
are common to the two groups.
The Lower group contains the following species:
Spirifer supramosquensis NIKITIN.
— Fritschi SCHELLW.
Ла: Ш. Зр-
— rectangulus Кот. var. alta п. var.
Martinia corculum Kur.
Chonetella nasuta WAAG.
Productus longispinus Sow.
— simensis TSCHERN.
— punctatus MARTIN.
The Upper group contains the following species:
Rhynchopora Nikitini TSCHERN.
Camarophoria cfr. Karpinskii TSCHERN.
Athyris Royssti L’EvEILLE.
Spiriferina Муш п. sp.
Spirifer п. sp. ex aff. Sp. duplicicoste Рнил..
СН. striatus MARTIN.
Reticularia lineata MARTIN.
Strophalosia sp. indet. N:o 1.
— sp=indet. N°02:
Productus boliviensis D’OR».
— inflatus M’CHESN.
— compressus WAAG.
— cancriniformis TSCHERN.
— Wallacianus DERBY.
= Lovéni WIMAN.
= pseudohorridus WIMAN.
— timanicus STUCK.
These fossils, however, are found so scattered throughout the
profiles, and often in talus boulders, that we cannot positively assert,
as regards these lists, that the fossils given in them belong to any
determined geological horizon, but that they rather belong to a com-
plex of beds which, stratigraphically, are not more nearly determined
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 591
than can be ascertained from the grouping laid down in the pre-
ceding general review.
If we wish to distinguish and collectively discuss forms that
really belong stratigraphically to the same horizon, we must go
further into detail, and give those fossils that have been found
either in the same stratum at a definitely known level — with a
definite and assured statement that they have been discovered in
the solid rock — or else those fossils that have been found in the
same boulder.
Of the fossils from the Lower group of beds, the following,
therefore, are connected with each other, which were found at the
same level in the bituminous limestone with the marl-shales: Spi-
rifer supramosquensis Nik., Sp. rectangulus Кот., var. alta п. var.,
Chonetella nasuta WAAG. and Productus simensis TSCHERN., i. e., 4
species of 8. All the others were found isolated.
Of the collections belonging to the Upper group, the specimens
N-o 154, from the Mallemukfjæld, and №05 197 and 204 from the
Eskimo Naze, contain more than one species of brachiopod.
In boulder N-o 154 were found: Rhynchopora Nikitini TSCHERN.,
Camarophoria cfr. Karpinskii TSCHERN., Athyris Royssii L'EVEILLÉ, Reti-
cularia lineata Martin, Sirophalosia sp. indet. N:o 2, Productus com-
pressus Waac., Pr. cancriniformis TSCHERN., and Pr. timanicus STUCK.
i.e., 8 species out of 18. Specimen N:o 197 contains 3 species: Pro-
ductus boliviensis D’Ors., Pr. pseudohorridus WiMAN and Pr. timani-
cus Stuck., while specimen N-o 204 contains only 2 species, viz., Rhyn-
chopora Nikitini TscHERN. and Productus Lovéni Wimax and an un-
determined Productus belonging to the semireticulatus group. Special
attention must be paid to the forms occurring in specimen №:0 154,
when attempting to distinguish from this region a fauna belonging
to a definite epoch of the Carboniferous.
44*
IV. Review of the Upper Carboniferous in other
regions as compared with the Carboniferous of
North-east Greenland.
The decisive feature of the Carboniferous deposits is the form
of development to which the strata in question can be referred:
marine or terrestrial. During the Carboniferous period, contin-
ental conditions have existed over extensive tracts, during the preval-
ence of which the economically important productive coal forma-
tions were deposited. Other tracts were covered by sea in which
were laid down marine formations — in north-western Europe,
where these formations were first studied, the so-called Mountain
limestone. During this period, too, there occurred somewhat con-
siderable changes in the distribution of land and sea on the surface
of the globe, the extension of the sea, especially during the latter
part of the Carboniferous period, being considerably increased, under
great transgressions. Just this alternation of marine and terrestrial
deposits is of specially great importance for the classification of the
Carboniferous formations, and for a comparison of their strata from
various districts.
In the following pages we shall employ a division of the Car-
boniferous system into two groups: the Lower and the Upper
Carboniferous. This is in agreement with the plan adopted, for
example, by Kayser (Lehrbuch der Geologie II, 4:th Ed. 1911) and
FRECH (Lethza Geognostica), but not with that triple division of the
system into Lower, Middle and Upper Carboniferous which, in
general, is employed by Russian geologists.
In North-Western Europe, the Lower Carboniferous deposits
are, as a rule, of marine origin, and are represented both in Eng-
land and in the north of France and in Belgium by Mountain lime-
stone, which is also found in some few places in Germany. The
Upper Carboniferous beds, on the other hand, have been devel-
oped in terrestrial facies, with coal beds.
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 593
In Russia, the Carboniferous is of immense extent, and occurs
in three large districts; a western — to which belongs the so-called
Moscow-basin — an eastern and northern, along the western slopes
of the Ural mountains and on the shores of the Arctic Ocean in
the Timan tundra, and a southern, which includes the coal-fields of
Donetz. In Russia, the series of strata chiefly consists of marine
deposits among which Fusulina limestones are specially prominent,
and the formations of terrestrial facies which are found here, occur
chiefly in the Lower Carboniferous and in the lowest part of the
Upper Carboniferous. The marine formations of the Lower Carbon-
iferous have as a zone fossil, among others, Productus giganteus.
The marine Upper Carboniferous group has, in its lower part,
beds with Spirifer mosquensis, which are found specially well devel-
oped in the limestone-quarries at Miatschkowa, near Moscow. Fusulina
cylindrica, too, occurs here.
The middle part of the Russian Upper Carboniferous is called
the Omphalotrochus-horizon, and is sometimes divided into two sub-
divisions: a lower distinguished by Spirifer Marcoui WaaG., and an
upper, with Omphalotrochus Whitneyi MEEK. This upper part embraces
the beds distinguished by Nıkırın as the Gshel stage, while other
geologists term it the beds with Spirifer supramosquensis.
In the upper part of the Upper Carboniferous, we have, lowest
down, the horizon with Productus Cora, the Cora horizon, and, above,
the Schwagerina-horizon — the uppermost level in the Carboniferous
of Russia, and which, especially in the Volga district and in north-
ern Russia, is of great extent and contains a rich brachiopod fauna.
Then comes the Arta stage, which belongs to the Permo-Car-
boniferous, and, above this, the Permian.
In the eastern Alps (the Carnian and Carinthian Alps) there
also occur marine Upper Carboniferous deposits with a rich brachi-
opod fauna, which, in the main, corresponds to the Cora horizon
of Russia, and, to some slight degree, to the Schwagerina horizon.
From the principal locality, these formations are termed the Auer-
nigg beds. They are covered by Fusulina limestone belonging to
the oldest Permian deposits, the so-called Trogkofel beds.
In Asia, marine Upper Carboniferous and Permian strata are
discovered in many places, in Asia Minor, the East Indies, Timor,
Indo-China, Junnan, and in many places in China and Central Asia.
Special mention should here be made of the Productus limestone
in the Salt Range of India (the northern Punjab) for its rich fauna,
which has, too, some forms in common with our North-east Green-
land Carboniferous deposits. From WAAGEN's great monograph we
have a fairly close acquaintance with the fauna of the Productus
594 KARL А. GRONWALL.
limestone, but, as regards its geological age there exists a difference
of opinion to which a brief reference must be made. WAAGEN
divides this formation into three divisions; — the lower, the middle
and the upper Productus limestone, and was originally inclined to
consider the entire series as Carboniferous, but later on, was led to
include only the lower beds in that group, and referred the upper
deposits to the Permian. NôrriNG and Евесн refer the whole of
the Productus limestone to the Permian, and compare it with the
Zechstein of Germany. To this, again, lively opposition was raised
by Russian geologists, TSCHERNYSCHEW especially, who compares the
lower Productus limestone with the Omphalotrochus horizon (Spirifer
Marcoui occurring in both these formations), the middle with the
Cora and the Schwagerina horizons, and the upper with the Arta
stage. In general, however, the Productus limestone is, nowadays,
regarded as Permo-Carboniferous (the lower beds), and Permian (the
middle and upper Productus limestone), the Carboniferous forms in
its brachiopod fauna being explained by the theory that, in the
main, the brachiopods suffered but unimportant alterations during
the course of time. As an argument for a younger age for those
formations which, consequently, it is wished to consider as purely
Permian, the occurrence is pointed out of peculiar, new elements
in the brachiopod fauna (Richthofenia, Lyttonia, etc.).
It is probably unnecessary to give any detailed account of the
marine Carboniferous deposits in North and South America, but such
an examination is all the more necessary, on the other hand, as
regards those of the Arctic regions. Nearest to the most northern
parts of the great Russian Carboniferous district in the Urals and
Timan, we have the Carboniferous of Nova Zembla, partly the Upper
Carboniferous marine formations, which have been known a long
time, and, partly, newer discoveries (LEE, 1909) of Lower Carboni-
ferous Mountain limestone, with Productus giganteus, which, conse-
quently, shows that, in this part of the Arctic district, the Carboni-
ferous transgression had already begun during the later part of the
Lower Carboniferous period. We ought to pay special attention to
the fact that this Lower Carboniferous fauna here occurs in a bitum-
inous limestone.
Further in the north we have marine Carboniferous deposits in
Beeren Eiland, and Spitzbergen, and here we encounter the
formations that possess the closest analogy to those of North-east
Greenland, both from a paleontological and a petrotogical point of
view. Thanks to works published of late years by Jon. Gun-
NAR ANDERSSON, NATHORST, HOLTEDAHL and Wıman, our know-
ledge of the Carboniferous deposits of Spitzbergen and Beeren Eiland
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 595
has become fairly thorough, and, more especially, Wıman’s mono-
graph has given us a detailed account of their brachiopod fauna.
The classification of the Carboniferous of Beren Eiland made
by Лон. GUNNAR ANDERSSON (1901, Tab. 1) is that shown by the
following Table, although the reader should first be reminded that
here ANDERSSON — like Wıman, too, in his summary-table, р. 10 —
employs the triple division of the Carboniferous system employed
by Russian geologists
С. Spirifer limestone .
Unconformity. Upper
15255 Conan lintestOMeCes 2.2 20 ee... Garboniterous
BE ХО ОКО nd a fe er strata.
Unconformity.
Вон аа: Плеве 2. ur. na ae
É sk Middle
Аз. Sandstone (non-fossiliferous) . 1
: : Carboniferous
At. Ambigua limestone. .
р strata.
Unconformity.
To this classification NATHORST (1910, р. 284) adds the remark
that: “die Abwechselung der Sedimente, das Vorkommen von Sand-
steinsbänken im Spiriferen Kalk, u. $. w. auf noch mehr Veränder-
ungen des Meeresniveaus deuten(?), als aus dem obigen Schema
allein hervorgeht’.
It is just these great changes in the strata that appear to me
to be worthy of our attention when making a comparison between
the Carboniferous of North-east Greenland and other similar deposits
in the Arctic regions.
The oldest limestone deposit, the ambigua limestone, is a red
and white mottled limestone possessing definite petrographical ana-
logies in the Lower marine group in our collections from North-east
Greenland. Of brachiopods, the ambigua limestone contains (after
Wıman’s revision), Athyris ambigua Sow., Eumetria serpentina DE
Kon., Spirifer supramosquensis №к., and Spirifer cameratus MORTON.
Both ANDERSSON and Wıman compare the Ambigua limestone with
the mosquensis level, a connection, the correctness of which appears
to me somewhat doubtful; Spirifer supramosquensis belongs, in any
case, to a higher level than Sp. mosquensis (see for example, FRECH.
Lethæa, р. 301), and Sp. cameratus is a typical Upper Carboniferous
species. The Fusulina limestone is a bituminous limestone both on
Beeren Eiland and on Spitzbergen, even if, in the former locality it
has no claim to the denomination “sapropelite”. Later investigat-
ions have proved that the Fusulina occurring in Beeren Eiland is
not the Russian Fusulina cylindrica, but a species, belonging to the
subgenus Schellwienia. Consequently, the Fusulina limestone of the
596 KARL А. GRONWALL.
locality in question is now considered as belonging to the lower
part of the Upper Carboniferous system.
We have nothing special to remark concerning the next mem-
bers of the sequence — the Cora limestone and the Spirifer lime-
stone — in the Beeren Eiland Carboniferous series, other than the
decided unconformity existing between these two deposits.
The oldest part of the marine Carboniferous of Spitzbergen is
embraced under the denomination “Cyathophyllum limestone”; it
covers, unconformably, the Kulm or Devonian, and, in some places,
a basal conglomerate has been observed. In the Cyathophyllum
limestone, immediately above this conglomerate, HOLTEDAHL has
obtained in King’s Bay a fauna belonging to the mosquensis zone;
otherwise no fossils have been observed in the lower part of this
deposit. Within the Cyathophyllum limestone, an ancient division
has been made of a Fusulina level and, beneath this, the Cora lime-
stone. Wıman, in his discussion of the brachiopod fauna, has neg-
lected these divisions, and has placed the species occurring in the
Cyatophyllum limestone under one head in his list. As regards the
Fusulina limestone, HOLTEDAHL (1912, р. 38) has made observations
that tend to show that the Fusulina limestone lies at various levels
in various places, although he sees no reason to doubt (p. 36) that
the Fusulina limestone investigated by him really represents a strati-
graphical zone, belonging to a certain epoch. Wimax draws the
conclusion that, in these enormous sections, more than one Fusu-
lina zone can be encountered, at such places where, for one reason
or another, a foraminiferal facies has been developed. The Fusulina
limestone proper here in Spitzbergen is highly bituminous, and
has received the denomination from STAFF and WEDEKIND of “For-
aminiferal sapropelite”, but Fusulinae occur also in the ordinary
Cyathophyllum limestone, so that the Fusulina-bearing zone is evid-
ently of greater thickness than that of the Fusulina limestone proper.
The Cyathophyllum limestone of Spitzbergen is of considerable
thickness; Wıman and В. HOGBOM have, at Cape Anser in Klas Bil-
len Bay, measured a section of about 460 metres (NATHORST, 1910,
р. 347, and Wiman, 1914, р. 11), and НогтерАнг. (1912, р. 41) gives
from King’s Вау for Kjærs Berg 400—450 metres, and for Scheteligs
Berg 450—500 metres.
Petrologically, certain divisions of the Cyathophyllum lime-
stone present fairly great agreement with certain parts of the strata
of North-east Greenland, especially as regards the almost dense or
very fine-grained limestones (W. of and in Koch’s section), which
are usually of a light grayish-red tinge — with the dense, light lime-
stones with stylolithes, and with the bituminous shales. This rock,
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 597
as far as the matrix is concerned, has a great resemblance to the
Fusulina limestone of Spitzbergen, but, among the smaller fossil
remains, contains fairly numerous fragments of echinoderms, mostly
crinoid stem-joints, but only some few Fusulinæ. As regards the
conclusions reached by Starr and WEDEKIND (1909, pp. 84—86), I
merely wish to point out that, in general, they ascribe to the Fusu-
line “ein benthonisches Flachseeleben” and that they suppose the
Fusulina limestone to have been deposited in shallow sea-bays, or la-
goons, with comparatively quiet waters, having little connection with
the open sea, and possessing a maximum depth of about 60—80 metres.
The Cyathophyllum limestone is covered by the exceedingly fos-
siliferous Spirifer limestone, which is specially distinguished by its
brachiopod fauna, which Wiman (1914, р. 88), compares with the
Schwagerina horizon of Russia. The strata referred to the Spirifer
limestone are far from possessing the thickness of the Cyathophyllum
limestone. The Spirifer limestone proper is about 10 metres thick,
and Wiman reckons together with this 20 to 30 metres of other
rocks; on Beeren Eiland, ANDERSSON estimates the thickness of the
Spirifer limestone at 71 metres. According to Wiman, the Spirifer
limestone is a shallow water, or litoral formation (litoral — that
space within which the surf exercises its influence), and almost
always contains grains of sand and, sometimes beds of conglomerate
in which brachiopod shells are included as pebbles. In the same
way, the brachiopod shells are often more or less rolled.
It is not possible to make any definite, close comparison between
the Spirifer limestone and the rocks in the Carboniferous formations
of North-east Greenland, even if there exists a fairly great exterior
resemblance between certain of the specimens found free-lying at
the Mallemukfjæld and at Eskimo Naze. That rock especially which
occurs at Lovén’s Mountain (Spitzbergen) is represented among the
boulders collected at the localities mentioned.
In Spitzbergen, the voungest part of the formations referred to
the Carboniferous system, or, more definitely, the Permo-Carboni-
ferous, are the siliceous rocks containing Productus. These are cor-
related to the Russian Arta stage, and represent a very considerable
thickness; HOLTEDAHL (1912, р. 41) gives very varying figures, from
a minimum of 170 metres up to about 500 metres. It is impossible
to decide with certainty whether this horizon is represented in North-
east Greenland. Among the loose boulders found at the Mallemuk-
fjeld and at Eskimo Naze, some few were discovered that, petro-
logically, agreed fairly well with the Productus-bearing, flint-like
rocks of Spitzbergen, but they contained so few fossils that a com-
parison could lead to no result. This seems to be a reason to refer
KARL А. GRONWALL.
598
N a N
NN
a
TS
\\ BAF FIN
SNL. LAND
Ÿ DN SAR
=
MAP OF THE
ARCTIC REGIONS
+ Marine Carboniferous
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 599
the reader to the discussion of the character of the brachiopod fauna
(pp. 608—609), where the possibility has been dealt with of a Permo-
Carboniferous or a Permian age for some portion of our Carboni-
ferous formations in North-east Greenland. It was argued that the
brachiopod fauna could scarcely give any great support to such a
possibility, even if the theory could not be entirely neglected.
In the comparison with the Carboniferous formations of the
Spitzbergen archipelago, there is another locality to be taken into
consideration, viz., Kung Karl’s Land (King Charles’ Land). The
NATHORST Expedition found in 1908 in Kung Karl’s О (King Charles’
Island) at Andrées Bay, a number of boulders of Carboniferous lime-
stone, resembling those existing at Lovén’s Berg, and other places in
Hinlopen Strait’ (NATHORST, 1901, р. 372). In these boulders there
were found a number of fossils, of which TscHERNYSCHEW deter-
mined some species, but which say little about the level, however.
Among these boulders, which I have had the opportunity of study-
ing at the paleontological Department of the State Museum in Stock-
holm, there were several different types of rocks represented, and I
wish to direct special attention to a fragment perfectly in agreement
with the white, and apparently crystalline, but, in reality, conglom-
eratic limestone, belonging to the collection treated of in this paper,
and which was found in situ in the Cape Jungersen section, and in
free-lying boulders from the Eskimo Naze and Sophus Miller's
Naze.
Arctic North America makes us acquainted with marine
Carboniferous at several places. First we must mention the finds
on Grant or Grinnell Land, just in the tract that lies nearest to
northern Greenland, being separated from Greenland by (Smith Sound,
Kennedy Channel and) Robbeson Channel. The localities here are
situated on the easternmost point of Grant Land, partly on the Feild-
ing Peninsula with Cape Joseph Henry, and Parry Peninsula with
Cape Hecla, the localities lying between 82°30’—82°55’ N. Lat. and
about 65° W. from Greenwich, from which places Nares’ Expedition
brought home collections, and, partly, at Cape Sheridan 82°27’ М.
Lat. and 61°30' W. from Greenwich, from which the PEAry Exped-
ition brought home fossils. The fossils from the former locality
have been described by В. ETHERIDGE, and the geological conditions
by FEILDEN and DE Rance; the fossils from the latter locality have
been dealt with by WhuitriELp. The distance between the two
localities is no more than about 30—36 miles, so that they can
suitably be mentioned in the same connection.
Next we have to note that marine Carboniferous has been dis-
covered more to the west on the islands west of Baffin’s Bay by
600 KARL А. GRONWALL.
M’CLintock' оп his travels in search of Sir JoHN FRANKLIN. At 76°
and 77° N. Lat. he found on Grinnell Island, Bathurst Island, and
Prince Patrick Island fossiliferous limestones belonging to the marine
Carboniferous. As localities for fossils may specially be named
Hillock Point, Melville Island (76° N. Lat. and 111°45’ W. Long.)
and Cape Lady Franklin, Bathurst Island (76°40’ N. Lat. and 99°
W. Long.),
The location of these islands as well as of the main localities
for marine Carboniferous in the arctic regions, mentioned in this
paper, is shown in the map p. 598.
HAuGHTon!, in his investigation of the fossils collected by
M’Crintock, has described and figured two species of Carboniferous
Brachiopoda; Productus sulcatus Sow., var. borealis HAUGHTON, a form
that partly may be identified with Prod. timanicus STUCK., as we
shall endeavour to prove below, and Spirifer arcticus HAUGHTON.
Respecting these fossils and the figures of HAuGHTON’s, TSCHERNY-
SCHEW (1902, p. 692) has expressed the opinion that he considers the
Spirifer arcticus HAUGHTON to belong to the subgenus Spiriferella and
probably to be identical with Sp. sarane VERN.; on the figurings of
Prod. sulcatus Sow., var. borealis HAUGHTON he makes the following
remark: “— — —, so scheinen sie mir nicht weniger als zwei
verschiedenen Species zu entsprechen: Fig. 1 giebt offenbar eine
unserem uralischen Pr. uralicus nahe stehenden Form wieder, wah-
rend Fig. 7 recht lebhaft an die grossen Representanten von Pr.
timanicus STUCK. erinnert”.
Another locality of marine Carboniferous in the archipelago of
Arctic North America is represented by Exmouth Island, N. of Grin-
nell Island (77°15' N. Lat. and 95°30' W. Long.) where Sir Epwarp
BELCHER found marine fossils that were investigated and figured by
SALTER. The fauna contained 3 species of Brachiopoda, that were
determined аз: Spirifer Keilhavii у. Восн, Productus Cora 4’Овв. and
Prod. semireticulatus MART., var. frigidus SALT. Respecting this fossil
fauna and its stratigraphical importance the reader is referred to
TSCHERNYSCHEW (1902, p. 690—692), where, too, a closer interpretation
of the fossils is presented.
The marine Carboniferous of the Arctic North America TSCHER-
NYSCHEW (1902, p. 695) generally ascribes to the Upper Carboniferous;
after having emphasized the paleontological correspondence between
the Arctic North American deposits with those of the Urals and the
i Reminiscences of Arctic Ice-Travel in Search of Sir John Franklin and his Com-
panions. By Captain Е. Г. М’Сммтоск. With Geological Notes and Illustra-
tions. By SAMUEL HAUGHTON. Journ. Royal Dublin Soc. Vol. I, р. 188—250.
Pls. V—X and Map. Dublin 1856—57.
The marine Carboniferons of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 601
Timan, he suggests it as possible that the great transgression of the
Upper Carboniferous has taken place from Spitzbergen round Green-
land to the Arctic North America. i
In his description of the Grant Land fauna, ETHERIDGE has deter-
mined and in part, given a detailed account of 12 species of brachiopods,
belonging to 5 genera, and also of a number of other fossils, bryozoa;
and corals, etc. The age of the fauna he gives as “the Carboniferous
limestone” (i. e., most probably the Lower Carboniferous Mountain
limestone). It is perhaps unnecessary to deal with ETHERIDGE’s deter-
mination of the brachiopoda, but, on the other hand, I shall give
extracts from three expressions of opinion in this regard which very
much question the reliability of his conclusions. FrecH (Lethæa, р.
401) mentions that ETHERIDGE describes “die ganze in 83° п. Br.
gefundene Fauna als aus dem “Carboniferous limestone” stammend.
Jedoch muss die grosse Häufigkeit der Bryozoen und die häufige
Beziehung auf die Arbeiten TouLa’s über Spitzbergen Bedenken an
der Richtigkeit dieser Anschauung erwecken.
Von Productiden werden nur solche Arten beschrieben (1. с. р.
629), welche im Obercarbon vorkommen oder durch ähnliche Muta-
tionen vertreten werden, während typisch untercarbonische Gestalten
wie Prod. giganteus und latissimus fehlen. Besonders wichtig ist
auch die Angabe von Prod. Weyprechti TouLa (einer Form des
obersten Karbon) bei Cap Joseph Henry. Immerhin kann nur eine
Revision volle Klarheit über die Horizontierung dieses ‘Carboniferous
Limestone’ bringen”.
TSCHERNYSCHEW (1902, pp. 693—695) expresses himself to the
same effect and reproduces the fossil-list of brachiopoda and bryozoa,
and declares that this “Fossilienverzeichniss bietet ein Gemisch sol-
cher Formen dar, die sich absolut nirgends zusammen vorfinden”.
He supposes that a want of sufficient material for comparison has
been the reason for these determinations, and that a thorough revi-
sion would result in other species being determined, “die den in
Rede stehenden Kalken ein jüngeres Alter zuschreiben, und zwar das
obercarbonische”.
When WHITFIELD obtained for examination a collection of Car-
boniferous brachiopods that the PEary Expedition (1905 —06) brought
home from Cape Sheridan, his determinations led to the result that
these species were “eminently an expression of an American Coal
Measure fauna, according to identifications of the species as usually
recognized in this country”. On examining the older literature, he,
too, objects to ETHERIDGE’s determinations, and compares them with
his own opinions respecting the separate species and says, in this
connection: “this I do because I cannot agree precisely with Mr.
602 KARL А. GRONWALL.
ETHERIDGE’S interpretations of their relationship with European
species”.
WHITFIELD’s revision of ETHERIDGE’s determinations leads him
to the result that in the greater number of the cases, where he
considers his specimens are in agreement with a name given by
ETHERIDGE, he has been able to identify the specimen in question
with an Upper Carboniferous species, or as showing a certain relat-
ionship with one. As regards age the Coal Measures of North
America are, of course, Upper Carboniferous.
Of the little fauna at his disposal he gives illustrations of a
couple of species, and some of these plates afford us an opportunity
of drawing comparisons with forms from the Carboniferous fauna
of North-east Greenland and of Spitzbergen. A species of Productus
is referred to Pr. semireticulatus, with the following reservation (I. с.
p. 55): “If it is to be referred to it at all I would suggest it to be
coupled with the term arctica as Productus semireticulatus arctica”.
This form is pictured on Pl. 2 as Figs. 8, 9, 10, and а careful exam-
ination of these figures places it beyond all doubt that it is the same
as the one from Spitzbergen that Wıman determined as Prod. infla-
tus M'CHESN., and which is also found in the Carboniferous deposits
of North-east Greenland, In the group of fossils reproduced in PI.
1, all the Productus shells, with the exception of the uppermost
(marked 1), belong to Pr. inflatus М’Снезм., viz., 4 more or less complete
ventral valves, and a fragment of a dorsal valve, at the bottom to.
the left of the plate.
The commonest Productus species in the Carboniferous deposits,
both of Spitzbergen and of North-east Greenland, is Pr. timanicus
Зтоск., and this species is probably also represented among the
fossils from Cape Sheridan, for, of the specimens figured by Wuir-
FIELD, I am inclined to refer 4 to this species.
Of these four, 2 are figures of older individuals thal have attained
larger dimensions than any of my specimens, and are little inferior
in size to those given by Wiman, with which I wish to compare
WHITFIELD’s specimens, viz., Pl. 1, with the specimen marked 1 in
the upper part of the photograph, and Pl. 2, Fig. 11. The former
shows a ventral valve, which I should like to compare proximately
with Wıman’s Pl. 17, Fig. 20, while Fig. 11, Pl. 2 I should like to
compare (in spite of the fact that WuirrieLp’s figure shows few
details) with Wiman’s Pl. 17, Fig. 21; it (WuHiTFIELD’s) is a dorsal
valve seen posteriorly, and the figure shows both the evident
mesial elevation corresponding to the sinus, and the flattening of
the valve towards the corners, indicating the wings, and the spines.
at the hinge-line.
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 605
WHITFIELD refers these two figures to Productus sulcatus Sow.,
var. borealis HAUGHTON (1857 р. 242, Pl. 7, Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7), but
compares them only with Figs. 1 and 7, which picture full-grown
specimens, and prefers to call them Prod. borealis HAUGHTON, as
Davipson gives Pr. sulcatus Sow., as synonymous with Prod. costa-
tus Sow. It is easy to agree with WITHFIELD that these two figures
of HAUGHTON’S cannot rightly be referred to Prod. sulcatus Sow.,
but, on the other hand, it would probably be difficult to identify
them with absolute certainty. Still one can venture to advance
the possibility that the original of the figures has been Pro-
ductus timanicus STUCK., especially since WHITFIELD identified his fossil
with HAUGHTON's species. The characteristics which are specially
applicable to Pr. timanicus are the deep sinus, which begins at the
outermost point of the umbo, and the form of the dorsal valve. Of
the remainder of HauGurTon’s figures, 2 and 3 may very well repres-
ent younger specimens of Pr. timanicus, while Figure 4 presents
certain differences, which make its identity with this species less
probable. HAUGHTON’s diagnosis includes among other things the
striking characteristic: “sinu lato, alto, usque in umbonem producto”,
but on the other hand, “margine cardinali non extenso”, does not
accord with Fig. 7, which pictures the most full-grown specimen,
although, it is true, it is somewhat damaged along the cardinal margin,
but has large wings, which give the cardinal margin the greatest
breadth of the valve. WHuiTFIELD’s figures do not indicate such
full-grown specimens as this figure of НАоснтох’$, or as the figures
quoted from Wiman, PI. 17, Figs. 20, 21.
WHITFIELD considers his Productus borealis HAUGHTON to be
the same as that identified by ETHERIDGE as Prod. Weyprechti TouLa
and if a careful examination be made of what ETHERIDGE (1. с. р.
631) states about Productus Weyprechti TouLa, especially his hesitation
whether he should refer the form in question to Pr. Weyprechti or
to Pr. horridus, we cannot avoid entertaining the thought that it was
just Pr. timanicus Stuck. that ETHERIDGE had before him.
The two younger specimens that I consider should probably be
referred to Pr. timanicus Struck. are pictured by WuHiTriELD on Pl.
2, Fig. 6 and 7, and are given under the name Pr. Verneuilianus
Ре Комгхск (Recherches sur les Animaux Foss., Productus and Cho-
netes р. 163, Pl. 18, Fig. 6, teste УУнитетег.о). I have not succeeded
in obtaining the work of DE Koninck's quoted, but from what
WHITFIELD says in the text, “with the name appended as a suggest-
ion, and future collections may, or may not, confirm the reference”,
his hesitation may be seen. WHITFIELD’s figures I hardly hesitate to
identify with younger specimens of Pr. timanicus. They show spe-
604 KARL А. GRONWALL.
cimens 19—22 mm. in width, and can here be compared with our
figures, Pl. XXIX, Fig. 11—13, and STUCKENBERG's figures, 1875, PI.
Г Е. 5, 6,2.
In this review we have brought forward reasons in support of the
theory a) that Productus timanicus STuck., which occurs in the Upper
Carboniferous formations of Arctic North America, and which, in
Spitzbergen, is an exceedingly common species, and which is also
found in great numbers in the Tıman tundra of northern Russia, is
probably a representative species, as is Pr. inflatus М. CHESN., and
b) that thereby we have proved for the fauna of our formations in
North-east Greenland analogies with homotaxial formations in the
Arctic regions both to the east and the west. Still, the agreement
between the brachiopod fauna of the Upper Carboniferous deposits of
North-east Greenland and the corresponding faunas in Russia, on
Spitzbergen and Beeren Eiland is — as will be developed in our
next section — a very close one, and, in respect to the number of
species in North-east Greenland, very complete, while in consequence
of our scanty knowledge of the formations in the regions last
mentioned, the connection with the Upper Carboniferous of Arctic
North America can hardly be said to be more than indications.
V. Discussion of the testimony borne by the
Brachiopod Fauna regarding the relations of
the Carboniferous of North-east Greenland to
other Carboniferous formations.
It is very difficult to estimate the value of a brachiopod as an
indicator of the more minute divisions of the Carboniferous and
Permian deposits, partly in consequence of the widely diverging
principles applied by paleontologists in their descriptions of fauna
(the reader need but be reminded of the difference in the determin-
ation of the species existing between Davipson and WAAGEN), but
also, in some degree, as a result of the varying opinions held with
regard to some of the formations now in question; we need only
mention, for example, the Productus limestone of Salt Range, India.
But the determination of the age of a formation by means of
the brachiopod fauna is impeded to a considerable degree, by, above
all, the extensive vertical distribution of various elements of the
fauna, so that, in some cases, a purely quantitative statistic method
is not the correct one to be employed, but it becomes necessary to
attach a certain importance to the occurrence or absence of certain
fauna-elements or to their first appearance or their extinction for
the determination of the geological stage.
The vertical extension of the Brachiopod Fauna.
The 21 forms occurring in other localities, which has been spe-
cifically determined (or which have been closely compared with some
determined species), that have been given in the list on page 607,
and are divided into: 8 in the Lower group and 13 in the Upper,
can, as far as I am able (with the help of the literature at my dis-
posal) to ascertain their distribution, be placed in 5 different divis-
ions, VIZ;
XLIII. 45
606
Kari А. GRÖNWALL.
Species which begin in the Lower Carboniferous and ascend as
far as to the Permo-Carboniferous, or the Permian (stratigraphi-
cally worthless) ;
Species which begin in the Lower Carboniferous deposits and
ascend into the Upper Carboniferous;
Species that have, hitherto, been found only in the Upper Car-
boniferous;
Species that begin in the Upper Carboniferous and ascend into
the Permo-Carboniferous and Permian;
Species that have, hitherto, only been found in the Permian.
Below we shall now group our forms into these divisions, when a
= will stand for the species belonging to the Lower group of the
Carboniferous deposits of North-east Greenland, while a + will signify
the species belonging to the Upper group. Forms respecting which
there may exist some doubt will be placed within parentheses in
the division to which we consider the species in question not to
belong.
NG
D.
+ Athyris Royssii L’'EVEILLÉ.
+ Reticularia lineata MARTIN.
* Productus longispinus Sow.
(+ Spirifer cfr. striatus MARTIN).
(1 Productus inflatus М’Снезм.). — 3 Sp.
+ Spirifer cfr. striatus MARTIN.
* Productus punctatus MARTIN.
|. = simensis TSCHERN.). = 2 Sp.
+ Camarophoria cfr. Karpinskit TSCHERN.
* Spirifer rectangulus Кот. var. alta п. var.?
* Martinia corculum Кот.
* Produclus simensis TSCHERN.
fi -- Wallacianus DERBy.
li — Lovéni WIMAN.
7 —- timanicus STUCKENB.
T == pseudohorridus WiMAN. — 8 Sp.
Of this division, those species that ascend into the Permo-Car-
boniferous are marked PC. after the author’s name, and those
that go up into the Permian with a P.
+ Rhynchopora Nikitini TSCHERN. P.
* Spirifer supramosquensis Nik. PC.
* — Frilschi SCHELLW. P.
607
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna.
VIHOUY PION эцоау | + | + | +
|+ +
meg | ae
‘Sdiy uerugen + | +
NE
‘asuvy 38$ jo эчод5эщи] зпзопрола лэаай =
“QUOJSOWIT итезипойд ‘атезыаа 18919 ы | $
‘uviddississyq ‘BOOT UJION 9101Y sea rule
-osejppdıyoay ивтра| Jo иецилаа | au |e | AE |
"вомэшу 4300$ pur UJION J
‘asuey yes |
jo auojsomly зпзопрола лэ44й pue appr J |
sdjy ueruen | ran ege | at
‘SUB ES JO auojsawr] snjonpoig лэмот f | | |
'sdjy четилео | |
| as |
‘ту uermen an | |
+ | +
‘asuvy JUS JO эчоззащ SNJONPOIY I2MO' Fee
“But yes || . i JERN eh
6 6 6 6
Jo auojsawr] зпзопрола aaddn pue s[ppiN /| cae
|
fare Wear | ae Par eae |
ee n 5 ©
а ен
а Ее
3 a. S а Е Е
SUOIBOI 19430 UL s99u911n990 meg nl mi)
B Da RE En = 0 |
© | . ' |
us =
ии + 'MDALS зпошрии] —
hen eects 9629 NYWIM 5причоцорпазА —
+ + TEA || Re re a LUYW sm707ound
a le Ge) Brenn ran NVINI\\ 1U9a077
SEA ST Re gli rer AGUA SNUDIIDIJD M
ее 'NHHHOST, SIWIO/iurIoun9 —
ZI ale | RAGE c CCS ‘NUAHOS], SISUOUIIS —
| ЕО "ЭУУЛА $15594 105 —
— aah | LESC ME CCE CEE "mos snuidsibuo] —
Я re NSHHD WW зпрруит —
a en [| nn riet AAO, $15и21а104 snJjonpolgq
| ce eee ““OVV AX DJNSDU D]JaJau0y")
| ale ECR) SEE Зое Tee => a Abe:
Se ae | ct ee Ca Го:М ‘yoput ‘ds pısojpydo.s
++ + ) +4 et Dr “LUVIN DJDaun D1UD]NI1AY
a | + | О ХА Lay wn]n9109 DIUIJIDIU
+ | | + | BAU РИО ‘тел “LAY snmnbunoar —
| | + RO ое CO Ce ds u 1mun/ ==
+ | a a ee “MTTAHOS OST] —
+ | + | + | AE ER SEAL MIN sısuonbsoum.dns -
+ .. | + . о OT ао о оба LUVIN snj]p1ijs “179 ==
Kon | “TMH а21$09121апр ‘dg ‘це xa yds "u zafındg
| + | ee re DA EOE ‘ds "u ШИ punr/inds
+ + TE TA IRL IS SO TE SET UP
= lar | 00 “NUAHOST пузиарЯ ‘о рыоцаолрию’)
+ ое REDE NUAHOS |, 117171 Diodoyouflyy
| |
ео
ЕЕ
sels 8 ose
| [2525
Zi | ee tS aS]
IE |? ej? a
‘SUOISOI 19410 ит ээцэллиээо pue
эЗаел |еэцлэл Moy] pue PUPIUS9I) ISe9-UJION JO epodorypeig зполэдиоале ou} Jo эает,
3)
608 KARL А. GRONWALL.
+ Productus inflatus М’Снезм. PC.
+ — boliviensis D’OrB. РС.
TT — cancriniformis TSCHERN. P.
(= Martinia corculum Кот.) P.?. = 6 Sp.
Е. * Chonetella nasuta Waac.
+ Productus compressus WAaG. — 2 Sp.
In a tabulated summary the ratios existing between these various.
divisions of the species can be expressed as follows:
| | | | |
| АВ сто REE юм
eee ER nes ll | le à 1. ВАА
| | | I
LOWErZSLOUD AN ee a ee! 3 2 1 8
Upper soup er. Е ak eae ete eae 152 | и | 5 4 1 13
Total. BE,
In this table consequently, the species that are either restricted
to the Upper Carboniferous, or, from that level ascend into the
Permo-Carboniferous or the Permian, are in a decided majority, as
they form 8 — 6 — 14 species, or 7/3 of the entire number. Another
striking fact is, that there is no species here that is restricted to
the Lower Carboniferous, so that we must consider the possibility
of these formations from North-east Greenland belonging to the
Lower Carboniferous deposits, as being entirely excluded. As regards
the possibility of a Permo-Carboniferous or a Permian age for these
formations or for any part of them, this, in consequence of the fauna-
elements, cannot, of course, be denied, especially when we take into
consideration that such a large proportion of the collections was
made from talus boulders or free-lying fragments. However, the
support given by the fauna for a younger age than the Upper Car-
boniferous is not specially strong. Of the species, Div. D., which,
from the Upper Carboniferous deposits ascend into the Permo-Car-
boniferous and the Permian, there is none that can be considered
as a precursor of the Permian fauna, but all of them possess a purely
Carboniferous character. Of the two forms that, hitherto, have been
found only in Permian deposits, Produclus compressus Waac. is a
purely Carboniferous type, with closely related forms, in the Upper
Carboniferous above all, but also in the Lower Carboniferous deposits,
while Chonetella nasuta WAAG. is a more isolated type of the family
Productide which has by no means any special younger character,
but can very well be derived from older species of Chonetes. HALL
and CLARKE (Vol. I, р. 313) say speaking of the genus Chonelella:
“Aside from the broadly curved brachial ridges, its characters are
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 609
so strongly chonetoid as to render its separation from Chonetes
exceedingly difficult”. Of the brachiopod genera specially charact-
eristic for the Permian there are no representatives in the Carboni-
ferous deposits of North-east Greenland. Of the whole of the bra-
chiopod fauna occurring here (in North-east Greenland) the two
undetermined species of the genus Strophalosia are the ones that
have most of a Permian character (see for example, WAAGEN, pp.
‘640—641), this genus having its principal extension in the Permian
formation, even if it have precursors in the superior part of the
Upper Carboniferous (the Schwagerina horizon), and still more so
in the Permo-Carboniferous.
A further argument against a younger age is offered when we
consider the species of the fauna which have, with certainty, been
determined as belonging to the same definite level (see p. 591); the
species here, especially in the bituminous limestone from the pro-
files in Holm’s Land (№0 190), and in the light limestone from the
Mallemukfjæld, present — as will be further developed later on —
no special accumulation of forms that possess a Permian character,
but show an assemblage of species which must be said to have an
Upper Carboniferous aspect.
For a more detailed classification of the North-east Greenland
‘Carboniferous formations within the Upper Carboniferous beds, we
shall be obliged to have recourse to a comparison with the form-
ations with related fauna, which we meet in the, geographically,
nearest situated deposits in Beeren Eiland and Spitzbergen, and in
Russia, especially in the Urals and the Timan tundra. Of the close
connection between the Carboniferous deposits of Spitzbergen-Beeren
Eiland and those of Russia, especially in the Urals and the Timan,
we have good testimony in Wıman’s (1914, рр. 87—88) statement
respecting their close connection, and in his comparative tables of the
brachiopod fauna in these formations.
The horizontal Distribution of the Brachiopod Fauna.
Of the 21 determined species, the greater number, or 17 species
can also be found in the Carboniferous of Russia, or are represented
there by very closely related forms. Of the same 21 forms, 14 are
found again in Spitzbergen and Beeren Eiland (taken as one loca-
lity), and of these 14 forms, 12 (i. e., all but 2) are also to be found
in the Carboniferous formations of Russia. The 2 forms that occur
neither in Russia nor in Spitzbergen—Beeren Eiland, are species
from the Productus limestone of the Salt Range (India).
If to this total number of forms that are specifically determined,
610 KARL А. GRONWALL.
we add the three forms determined as п. sp., the two sp. indet. of
Strophalosia, and leave the undeterminable forms out of the reckon-
ing, it thus proves that the brachiopod fauna of our North-east
Greenland Upper Carboniferous deposits are so nearly connected
with that of the Russo-Arctic district, that these faunas must have
lived in seas possessing free and open communication with each
other. |
The division of the forms common to the various localities into
Lower and Upper groups within the Carboniferous of North-east
Greenland, presents approximately the same proportions as the
number of the brachiopods that have been found within the respective
groups.
The ratio is shown by the following table:
| pCt. of | North-east Greenl.
Number | whole | as -
| er Younger
| number | Group | Group
| |
Motalenumber of forms arm EL We || _ | 9 17
Forms known from other localities........ 21 | 82 8 13
News species mater ое Re eater 3 oo 1 2
Forms from the Russo-Arctic district...... | 19 | 73 6 13
= — Spitzbergen-Beeren Eiland..... | 14 | 54 | 5 9
= ЕЕ | | 6 11
ee i | |
— — — ,wanting in Spitzbergen- | | |
Beeren Eiland.......... | 5 | 19 | 1 | 4
— — Spitzbergen-Beeren Eiland, wan- | | |
DB RSS A EE ieee | 8 a | ©
— common to Russia and Spitzbergen- | | |
Beerenvlviland rie G 20 eee ar | 12 | 46 5 7
If we pay special attention to the vertical distribution of the
brachiopods of North-east Greenland within the Carboniferous form-
ations of Russia we find that they occur chiefly within the divi-
sions that have been termed the Omphalotrochus-, Cora-, and Schwa-
gerina horizons. Species that can really be said to point to a lower
level, the mosquensis horizon especially, are wanting, if we deduct
those that persist from the Lower Carboniferous to the Permian,
while, though, it is true, species pointing to the Permo-Carboniferous
are not absent, still, as we have shown above, they can scarcely
entitle us to consider them as determinative of any part of the form-
ations in question as being Permo-Carboniferous or Permian.
We must, therefore express the opinion that the marine Car-
boniferous measures of North-east Greenland belong to
the middle and upper part of the Upper Carboniferous
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 611
deposits, or tothe divisions which, in Russia, are termed:
the Omphalotrochus horizon, the Cora horizon and the Schwa-
gerina horizon.
When we thus give a general determination of the age of
these formations, the question presents itself, whether a more exact
division of the measures can be carried out based on the age
of the brachiopod fauna. Here, of course, we again meet with
the difficulty that the greater part of the collections was obtained
from free-lying boulders, and that it was but rarely that several
species were found together so as to entitle us to say that they lived
together. We have given these instances above, and shall now pro-
ceed to make a further investigation of the vertical distribution of
these species thus occurring here in company.
Of the 8 species belonging to the Lower group, there occur in
the bituminous marl-shale 4 together; of these, Spirifer supramos-
quensis is characteristic for the middle Upper Carboniferous beds,
but ascends to a higher level, while, of the other species, Productus
simensis and Spirifer rectangulus are found in the Schwagerina lime-
stone, and Chonetella nasuta is described from the Productus lime-
stone in the Salt Range. An attempt to compare this special assemb-
lage of fossils with the Omphalotrochus horizon, can, consequently,
hardly be called satisfactory.
Considerably better, however, will be the result of an examina-
tion of those fossils from the Upper group that occur together. In
the limestone boulder, N:o 154, from the Mallemukfjæld, there occur
8 species of the 17 belonging to the group: In addition to the ubi-
quitous Athyris Royssii and Reticularia lineata, there are also dis-
covered here the Upper Carboniferous Camarophoria cfr. Karpinskii,
and, of species that ascend from the measures just mentioned to the
Permo-Carboniferous, Rhynchopora Nikitini, Productus cancriniformis
and timanicus, and Pr. compressus from the Productus limestone of
the Salt Range, and last Strophalosia sp. indet. N:o 2. This associa-
tion of species contains, it is true, relatively many forms that ascend
into the younger Permo-Carboniferous deposits and into the Permian,
but a careful examination shows, however, that it is just in the
Schwagerina horizon that such an assemblage is found. Another, quite
similar, but considerably poorer, embracing no more than 3 species,
occurs in the boulder N:o 197 from the Eskimo Naze, where Pro-
ductus boliviensis and timanicus, which, from the Upper Carbonife-
rous measures ascend into the Permo-Carboniferous, occur together
with Pr. pseudohorridus from the Spitzbergen Spirifer limestone and
Productus flint. These fossils point very decidedly to the Schwage-
rina horizon, and from them it would be difficult to discover any
612 KARL А. GRÖNWALL.
cogent reason for ascribing to these small faunas a younger age, this
deduction being quite in agreement with what I have stated above
respecting the associated existence of the fauna as a whole.
We can, consequently, state with certainty that, according to
the testimony of the brachiopod fauna, there exist in the Upper
group of the Carboniferous deposits of North-east Greenland, forma-
tions equivalent to the Schwagerina horizon of Russia, while, in
addition, Schwagerina princeps itself occurs in many localities in
these North-east Greenland Measures.
The comparison with the brachiopod fauna of the Upper Car-
boniferous measures of Spitzbergen can also be said to lead to the
result that, especially, the Upper group of the North-east Greenland
marine Carboniferous contains a brachiopod fauna bearing a great
analogy to that of the Spirifer limestone.
VI. Conclusions.
1) North-east Greenland possesses a series of marine Upper Car-
boniferous deposits which, as in Spitzbergen, transgrediate over Lower
Carboniferous measures of terrestrial development undetermined as to
stratigraphical level.
2) This transgression has occurred gradually, so that repeated
oscillations of level have taken place in the lower part of the series of
strata; the upper part of the series has a more constant marine aspect,
but this part too, in some degree at least, has been deposited in very
shallow water or even in the littoral zone, as is shown by certain
peculiar rock-species, which are conglomerates in miniature.
3) The Brachiopod Fauna occurring here points to the middle and
upper part of the Upper Carboniferous series, the OMPHALOTROCHUS-,
CORA-, and SCHWAGERINA horizons in the Upper Carboniferous
measures of Russia; the possibility of the sequence of strata ascending
higher up to the Permo-Carboniferous is not altogether excluded, even
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Greenl. and Из Brachiopod Fauna. 613
if the composition of the Brachiopod Fauna makes such an assumption
hardly probable.
4) The Brachiopod Fauna has a decided Russo-Palæarctic character,
but presents, however, some points of connection with the /far less per-
fectly known) Brachiopod Fauna of the Upper Carboniferous deposits of
Arctic North America.
5) The North Polar Sea of the Upper Carboniferous period has
been in connection from Russia-Spitzbergen, via Northern Greenland,
with a sea in Arctic North America.
Literature.
The works quoted in the preceding pages are, in general, referred to merely by
giving each authors name, with the year of publication and the cited page or
figure in parenthesis.
ÅNDERSSON, J. G., Uber die Stratigraphie und Tektonik der Baren Insel. — Bull. Geol.
Inst. Upsala. Vol. 4. (1898—99) pag. 243—284, Upsala 1901.
AMDRUP, G., Report on the Danmark-Expedition to the North-east Coast of Greenland
1906—1908. — Meddel. om Grønland. Vol. XLI, pag. 1—270, København 1913.
DERBY, О. A., On the Carboniferous Brachiopoda of Itaituba, Rio Tapajos, Prov. of
Para, Brazil. — Bulletin of the Cornell University. Vol. 1, N:o 2, Ithaca N. Y. 1874.
Davipson, Tu., British Fossil Brachiopoda. Vol. II. Permian and Carboniferous spe-
cies. Palæontographical Society. 1857—1862. London.
DIENER, C., In Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India.
Ser. XV, Himalayan fossils. Vol. I.
Part II. Anthracolithic fossils of Kashmir and Spiti. 1899.
Part Ш. The Permo-carboniferous Fauna of Chitichun. N:o 1. 1897.
Part IV. The Permian Fossils of the Productus Shales of Kumaon and Gurhwal.
1897.!
Part V. Permian Fossils of the Central Himalayas. 1903.
ETHERIDGE, R., Paleontology of the Coasts of the Arctic Lands visited by the late
British Expedition under Captain Sir George Nares, — Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc.
Vol. 34. р. 568—639, pl. 25—29. London 1878.
FEILDEN, H. W. and DE RANCE, С. E., Geology of the coasts of the Arctic Lands visited
by the late British Expedition under Captain Sir George Nares. — Quart. Journ.
Geol. Soc. Vol. 34, р. 556—567, pl. 24. London 1878.
FLIEGEL, G., Uber obercarbonische Faunen aus Ost- und Siidasien. — Palæontogra-
phica. Band 48, р. 91—136, Pl. VI— VII. Stuttgart 1902.
Girty, G. Н., The Carboniferous Formations and Faunas of Colorado. — U.S.G.S.
Professional Paper N:o 16. Washington 1903.
Girty, G. H., The Guadelupian Fauna. — U.S. @. $. Professional Paper N:o 58. Wash-
ington 1908.
GRÔBER, PAUL, Ueber die Faunen des untercarbonischen Transgressionsmeeres des
zentralen Tian-schan, die in der Umgebung des Sart-Oscol-Passes gefunden wor-
den sind. — Neues Jahrbuch f. Min. Pal. u. Geol. Beilageband XXVI, pag. 213 —
248. Тай. XXV—XXX. Stuttgart 1908.
GRÖBER, PAUL, Carbon und Carbonfossilien des nördlichen und zentralen Tian-Schan.
Aus den wissenschaftlichen Ergebnissen der Mersbacherschen Tian-Schan-Expedi-
tion. — Abh. d. math. physikal. Klasse d. kön. Bayer. Akad. d. Wissenschaften.
Bd. 24, Afd. 2, $. 339—384, Taf. 1—3. München 1909.
The marine Carboniferous of North-east Green]. and its Brachiopod Fauna. 615
HAUGHTON, S., Description of the Plates to illustrate the Geology of Captain M’Clin-
tocks Ice-travels, in Search of Sir John Franklin. — Journ. Roy. Dublin Soc.
Vol. I p. 239—250, pl. 5—11. Dublin 1857.
HOLTEDAHL, O., Zur Kenntniss der Karbonablagerungen des westlichen Spitzbergens.
I. Eine Fauna der Moskauer Stufe. — Videnskapsselskapets Skrifter. I. Mat.-naturv.
Klasse 1911, N:o 10. Kristiania 1911.
II. Allgemeine stratigraphische und tektonische Beobachtungen. — Videnskaps-
selskapets Skrifter. I. Mat.-naturv. Klasse 1912. N:o 23. Kristiania 1913.
DE Konincx, L. G., Sur le Spirifer mosquensis et sur ses affinités avec quelques autres
especes du méme genre. — Bulletin du Musée Royal d’Histoire naturelle de Bel-
gique. Tome II, р. 371—403. Pl. XIIIXV. Bruxelles 1883.
LEE, G. W., A Carboniferous Fauna from Nowaja Semlja, collected by Dr. W. S.
Bruce. — Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh. Vol. XLVII. Part 1. N:o VII, (р. 143—
186, pl. 1—2). Edinburgh 1909.
NATHORST, A. G., Bidrag till Kung Karls Lands geologi. — Geol. Får. Förhandl., Bd.
23, р. 341—378, pl. 13--14. Stockholm 1901.
NATHORST, А. G., Beiträge zur Geologie der Bären-insel, Spitzbergens und des König-
Karl-Landes. — Bull. Geol. Instit. Upsala. Vol. X, pag. 261—416. Taf. 14—15.
Upsala 1910.
NATHORST, A. G., Contributions to the Carboniferous Flora of North-Eastern Green-
land. — Meddel. om Grenl. Vol. XLIII, pag. 337—346. København 1911.
NETSCHAJEW, A. W., Die Fauna der Perm-Ablagerungen vom Osten und vom äusser-
sten Norden des Europäischen Russlands. I. Brachiopoda. — Mém. Com. Géol.
Nouv. Serie, N:o 61. St. Petersburg 1911.
Nikitin, S., Depöts carboniferes et puits artésiens dans la region de Moscou. — Mém.
Com. Géol. Vol. У. N:o 5. St. Petersburg 1890.
ROTHPLETZ, А., Die Perm-, Trias- und Jura-Formation auf Timor und Rotti im in-
dischen Archipel. — Palæontographica. Bd. 39, р. 57—106. PI. 9—14. Stuttgart
1892.
SCHELLWIEN, E., Die Fauna des karnischen Fusulinenkalks. I. — Palæontographica. Bd.
39, р. 1-56. Taf. I—VIIL Stuttgart 1892.
SCHELLWIEN, E., Ueber eine angebliche Kohlenkalkfauna aus der aegyptisch-arabischen
Wüste. — Zeitschr. 4. 4. geol. Ges. Bd. 46. $. 68—78. Taf. УП. Berlin 1894.
SCHELLWIEN, E., Die Fauna der Trogkofelschichten in den karnischen Alpen und den
Karawanken. I. Theil: Die Brachiopoden. — Abhandl. d. k. k. geol. Reichsan-
stalt. Bd. XVI. Heft 1. Wien 1900.
STAFF, H. У. und WEDEKIND, R., Der oberkarbone Foraminifersapropelit Spitzbergens.
— Bull. Geol. Inst. Upsala. Vol. 10, pag. 81-123. Upsala 1910.
STUCKENBERG, A. (In Russian language only). Report on a geological voyage to the
Petschora Land and the Timan Tundra. — Collections to the Geology of Russia
(edited by the Imp. St. Petersburg Mineral. Society). Vol. 6. р. 1—126. 5 pl.
St. Petersburg 1875.
STUCKENBERG, A., Die Fauna der obercarbonischen Suite des Wolgadurchbruches bei
Samara. — Мет. Com. Geol. Nouv. Serie. N:o 23. St. Petersburg 1905.
Tuomas, Ivor, The British Carboniferous Producti. I. Genera Pustula and Overtonia.
— Memoirs of the Geological Survey of Great Britain. Vol. I, Part 4. London
1914.
TRAUTSCHOLD, H., Die Kalkbrüche von Miatschkowa. Eine Monographie des oberen Berg-
kalks. Nouveaux Memoires de la Société Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscou.
Tome XIII, Tome XIV. Moscou 1876 and 1879.
TSCHERNYSCHEW, TH, Der permische Kalkstein im Gouvernement Kostroma. — Ver-
handl. 4. Russ. Kais. Mineralog. Gesellschaft zu St. Petersburg. Ser. 2. Bd. 20,
p. 265—317, pl. 15—18. St. Petersburg 1885.
TSCHERNYSCHEW, Тн., Beschreibung des Central-Urals und des Westabhanges. — All-
616 KARL А. GRONWALL.
gemeine Geol. Karte von Russland. Blatt 139. Мет. Com. Geol. Vol. 3. N:o 4.
Petersburg 1889.
TSCHERNYSCHEW, TH., Die obercarbonischen Brachiopoden des Ural und des Timan.
— Мет. Com. Géol. Vol. XVI. N:o 2. St. Petersburg 1902.
VAUGHAN, ARTHUR, An account of the Faunal Succession and Correlation [of the Car-
boniferous Rocks at Rush, County Dublin]. — Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. Vol. 62.
р. 295—322. pl. 29—30. London 1906.
WaaGEN, W., Productus limestone fossils. Brachiopoda. — Palæontologia Indica. Ser.
XIII. Salt Range fossils. Vol. 4. — Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India.
Calcutta 1882—84.
WELLER, STUART, The Mississippian Brachiopoda of the Mississippi Valley Basin.
— Geol. Survey of Illinois. Monograph I. Text and Plates. Urbana 1914.
WHITFIELD, В. P., Notes and observations on Carboniferous Fossils and semifossil
shells, brought home by members of the Peary Expedition of 1905—1906. —
Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History. — Vol. 24, p. 51—58, pl.
1—4. New York 1908.
Wiman, C., Uber die Karbonbrachiopoden Spitzbergens und Beeren Eilands. — Nova
Acta Regie Societatis Scientiarum Upsaliensis. Ser. IV. Vol. 3. N:o 8. Upsala
1914.
YAKOWLEW, N., Die Fauna der oberen Abteilung der palzozoischen Ablagerungen im
Donez-bassin. III. Die Brachiopoden. — Geologische Resultate der Bearbeitung
der Fauna. — Mém. Com. Geol. Nouv. Série. N:o 79. St. Petersburg 1912.
Table of Contents,
Page
TÆT tro dte ti one О о ee dr 511
II. Description of the localities.
Л Миа ПОЕТ бе 190 EAN EE вобро бо обобоососо ов aioe 518
В. The localities оп the South Coast of Amdrup’s Land................... 528
The Western river and the coast on both sides of it, to the Eastern
DIV CE а ооо mis ба о о се о ось 529
Met EASTERD FIVE ее 533
1905. (ЕТО Лан SCO RE собообоосоаароововосс 537
@ySophus) МаЩех Мате and Henrik) Kroyer's Пе 543
Henrik Kröyer’s Islets and the mainland behind them .............. 544
SophussMuller:SEN az ее 545
D. Summary of the Carboniferous deposits of North-east Greenland ........ 547
Ш. Palæontological Description of the Brachiopod Fauna...................... 557
Dielasma spyt. eee eo ee а Зе 557
Мож. и Алуленорога: Моем = eae coe nee eee 557
N:o 2. Camarophoria) cir. Karpinskii TSCHERN. 4.) 2/42 4220-4 oe ee 557
NORD Нан ПОЛЕЙ ИВАН Ei ee een ce eee eee 558
N'OSE Spirifenina Мои ро 560
Spiriferina:sp. we SSR ee fo ern RMA OCS a eh) See 562
Spini feral RS pitfehellais Dee ems: EEE EE ae ee eee 562
N:o 5. Sa nesp.}rexall. эр. duplicicost@ PHILE 2 D 563
№0 6. cir striatus MARTIN ee eee 564
N:o 7. — ЭНА Мо, ооо ооо бовосоовобы оо боясеосое 565
№0 8. == БГЗ СНЕ SCHELL Wu Ne nee ео GN 568
N:o 9. итал ть SP AE waren eco naib ee 569
N:o 10. А тесалои! и Кит. уаг. AUG п. Vials cae eye eee 571
= Оо ne ee ee поза оо 572
NO ИЛЬ ба ЧОН НО WHS оообоов ое со зово ооо во вобо вое асов с 572
NOM eReticulanraalıneata® MARTIN RE EP ECC CRE ee EE 575
NOMS PES ÉTODRAIOSIAES D INA ее 575
N:o 14. = STOUT LEN 2. 576
Niomlos Ghonetellamnasul@aiAnG ecm rca i ee fie eerie ie rier 576
Neo) WG; JOC ОУ WOM. с 6560000 OP 578
N:o 17. — ОАО ООС По es оо оо ee 578
spp. indet 2. (of the semireticulatus group)......... 579
N:o 18. — ООО Зо дор ооо ро ео ооо оо але 579
N:0219: — Com press ИА 580
№0 20. — SUTENSISEISCHERN ee Beet 581
N:o 21. == CUNCTINUOLMNISMUS CHER Nay Eee ices 582
618 KARL А. GRONWALL.
Page
Non? 2,e2Roductismyallacianus Юнус rer see eer. erie 583
N:o 23. — IEQUENTGWIAMAN? ee и 5 584
N:o 24. — punctatus MARIN Eee eee ere SEEREN 585
N:o 25. — IpseudoNornıd usaVV 1 MAN eee eben enero 586
N:o 26. — HMANICUSZSTUCKS оо ыы зерна во Oo eee 586
TablesofathevDistribution EC PAR ER ree eee 589
The distribution of the Brachiopod Fauna on the two horizons of the
Carboniferous deposits of North-east Greenland ........................ 590
IV. Review of the Upper Carboniferous in other regions as compared with the
CarboniferouslofsNorth-east Greenland m 592
V. Discussion of the testimony borne by the Brachiopod Fauna regarding the
relations of the Carboniferous of North-east Greenland to other Carboniferous
ола RE 605
The vertical extension of the Brachiopod Fauna ....................... 605
Table ofsthexGarboniterousrBrachiopodaseter 2.20. sei eee 607
The horizontal distribution of the Brachiopod Fauna................... 609
У Со ВЕ 612
Literaturen. о ее оо NE 614
Explanation of the Plates.
All the specimens figured belong to the Mineralogical Museum
of Copenhagen.
All the figures are natural size, unless otherwise stated.
The fossils are photographed by Mr. А. Hs. OLsson and the photographs retouched
by Mr. J. У. ENGLUND, both of Stockholm.
РЕ У
Fig.
a ae lone)
PLATE XXVI:
Camarophoria cfr. Karpinskii TSCHERN. р. 557. — Boulder,
Mallemukfjæld. (№0 154).
Ventral view.
Anterior view.
Spiriferina Му п. sp. р. 560. — Boulder, Sophus Miller's
Naze (N:o 209).
Ventral view of the holotype.
Dorsal — - - ==
Lateral — - - —
Posterior — - - —
Shell surface of the ventral valve, enlarged ca. 5 diam.
Spirifer 1. Spiriferella sp. indet. p. 562. — Boulder, the main-
land behind Henrik Kröyer’s Islets (№0 214).
Ventral view.
Spirifer 1. Spiriferella sp. indet. p. 562. — Boulder, the main-
land behind Henrik Kröyer’s Islets (№0 214).
Posterior view of ventral valve.
Spirifer п. sp.?, ex aff. Sp. duplicicoste Рнил.. р. 563. —
Boulder, Cape Jungersen section (N-o 111).
. Ventral view.
. Lateral view.
Spirifer cfr. striatus Mart. р. 564. — Boulder, Sophus Mül-
ler’s Naze (№0 179).
. Ventral view.
. Lateral view.
Spirifer supramosquensis Nix. р. 565. — The Conglomerate.
section (N-o 190).
. Ventral view.
. Lateral view.
. Interior of the ventral valve, showing the dental plates.
Spirifer fulmari п. sp. р. 569. — Mallemukfjæld (N-o 166).
. Ventral view of the holotype.
laterale - —
. View of the interior of the ventral valve.
XVI.
>
EL:
Meddel. om Gronl. XLII Nr. 20 (К. A. Grönwall.)
\. В. Lagrelius & Westphal, Stockholm
+
$
“a
%
a5
ay
”
7
-
:
.
La
EI
5
2
iy)
XLIII.
PLATE ХХУШ.
На
23
PEATE КУ
Spirifer rectangulus KuT., var. alta п. var.?, р. 571. — The
Conglomerate section (N-o 190).
Specimen I, Ventral view.
— Posterior view.
— Lateral view.
— Shell sculpture enlarged ca. 5 diam.
Specimen П. Ventral view.
Specimen Ш. Ventral view.
Sirophalosia sp. indet N:o 1. р. 575. — Boulder, Eskimo
Naze (N-o 203).
Ventral view.
Strophalosia sp. indet. N:o 2. p. 576. — Boulder, Mallemuk-
fjæld (N-o 154).
Ventral view.
Ventral valve, seen sideways from behind.
Chonetella nasuta WaaG. р. 576. — The Conglomerate sec-
tion (N-o 190).
. Ventral view of complete specimen.
. Dorsal — - — —
. Anterior — - = —
. Lateral — - — —
. Posterior — - — —
Productus compressus Waac. р. 580. — Boulder, Mallemuk-
fjæld (N-o 154).
. Ventral view.
. Lateral view of the entire specimen.
. = 16 with the ventral valve and the visceral room removed.
. The dorsal valve and its cast.
Productus cancriniformis TscHERN. р. 582. — Boulder, Malle-
mukfjæld (N-o 154).
. Specimen I. Ventral view.
_— Anterior view.
— Lateral view.
. Specimen II. Lateral view.
Productus Loveni Wiman, р. 584. — Boulder, Eskimo Naze
(№0о 204).
Dorsal valve, seen from the visceral room.
Meddel. om Стоп]. XLIII Nr. 20 (К. А. Grönwall.) PL ova
Ljustr. А. В. Lagrelius & Westphal, Stockholm
AS
PRAT EY ХХ.
Fig.
ae ee USE
pene OR ea er)
PLATE XXIX.
Productus Wallacianus DERBY. р. 583. — Boulder, Eskimo
Naze (N-o 213).
Specimen I. Ventral view of the ventral valve.
— Lateral — - - — ==
Specimen II. Cast of dorsal valve.
— The same, lateral view.
Productus punctatus MARTIN р. 585. — Amdrup's Land, West-
ern river (№0 160).
Dorsal valve.
Productus pseudohorridus WiMAX р. 586. — Boulder, Eskimo
Мате (№0 197).
Posterior view of entire specimen.
Anterior — - — —
Lateral = = — —
Dorsal — - — —
. Dorsal valve seen from the interior.
Productus timanicus Stuck. р. 586. — Boulder, Mallemuk-
fjæld (N:o 154).
Specimen I. A very young individual.
. Ventral view.
lateral р
. Showing the beak and the hinge-line.
Specimen II. An older, but yet not adult individual.
. Ventral view.
5. Lateral —
Anterior и —
Productus inflatus М’Снезх. р. 578. — The Cape Jungersen
Section (N-o 128).
. Ventral view.
laterale
. Dorsal —
Meddel. om Grønl. XLIII Nr. 20 (К. A. Grönwall.) Plo eae
Ljustr. A. В. Lagrelius & Westphal, Stockholm
р
=
Аа
+
ae ‘a =
.
| 5
> 5
к, u
BT in
Em
у
i 1G
hed
=
551
u ©
'
i
“4
os
far)
“i
Fy 2
FC
i i
i
» =
у à
i
‘+
р
р м —
= чл
.
Si : у _
'
р
р
ух
“LOENY \LIT'SYLS'NYS
MUDILD JOM „9р “buoy
= ite
„sr (NWT SIT
Ar OSOT
Là
@ZDN OULYSH
$72550/ 25007 LO SEPMOq JjOPIN О
TWAS UW 572550} PUD SYHIOL JO SPINY +
574012295 H+
UORTPOIXY
-HJIPUILUP(J 1] AQ
ONVIN3349 1SVI-HIHON
uy punoy
SHIOH SNOYASINOEUVD
JO зэвеэот ap 3mmoys
dvW
XXX Id 2 OZ 0:N IITTX AY ‘лмочо NO ‘тзаази
u L ~
В é = 7
= и. Е u .
> Hi
+ M Zu =
u a u . zu
ER Ka. 4
A . a à x
3
> 5 “>
в — bug «
В
> -
i xx ju
sais alte >
= € =
= +8
| *
в
. | у
EH р :
- = = un mu =
7 ga: - LP | 5
2 fr
2
è
+ и 1
> >= he > me
р :
= 1 — me a -
me »--
XXI.
QUATERNARY FOSSILS COLLECTED BY
THE DANMARK EXPEDITION
BY
AD. S. JENSEN.
1917:
XLII. 47
HE material brought home by the Danmark Expedition includes
T a number of quaternary fossils, for the most part mollusc sheils,
collected during the course of excursions starting from Danmarks
Havn. The samples are on the whole small, and present for the
most part the impression of having been gathered together in a casual
and unsystematic way. This is evident, partly from the fact that
smaller forms are wanting, partly also from the lack of represen-
tative samples of the soil with its mollusc content, which afford the
only possible means of obtaining a proper view of the fauna con-
cerned.
These shortcomings are, however, — apparently, at least — com-
pensated for by the uniformity of the fauna in all localities, and by |
the fact that all the forms found are, with a single exception, still
living on the north-east coast of Greenland.
The exception referred to is Pecten islandicus. This bivalve has
not been found living in East Greenland, albeit the present mollusc
fauna of that country may now be taken as well known; nor has
it been met with in other true high-Arctic seas, such as the Kara
Sea, the Polar Sea of Siberia, and the Polar Sea north of arctic
America. It lives, however, at Labrador, West Greenland, Jan Mayen,
Iceland and Spitzbergen, as also in the Barents Sea. Though it should
be considered as a comparatively Arctic form, this species is neverthe-
less not to be regarded as particularly high-Arctic'), and its presence
in a raised stratum in North-east Greenland would seem to indicate
a rise, although only slight, of temperature, with consequent deteri-
oration of the climate. Such rise of temperature would probably
coincide with the postglacial temperature optimum known from other
regions, both in West and East Greenland. In the case of East Green-
land, this feature is known especially from the finds of Mytilus edulis
1) cf. Ap. $. JENSEN, The Danish Ingolf Expedition, II, 5, Lamellibranchiata. Part I,
1912, p. 18—19.
47*
622 Ар. $. JENSEN.
made by the NATHORST Expedition in raised strata at Sophia Sound
and Franz Josephs Fjord’); also, moreover, from the specimens of
Pecten islandicus found by the Ryper Expedition in late-quaternary
deposits at Scoresby Sound”).
Another point worthy of note is the fact that marine quaternary
mollusc shells were met with by the Danmark Expedition up to a
height of some 125 metres above sea level, which is far in
excess of the greatest altitude noted in hitherto published finds from
East Greenland, none of which go up beyond about 50 metres.
The material comprises in all 18 species of determinable molluscs,
besides one serpulid, one Balanus species, and 1 echinoderm, apart
from Foraminifera and calcareous alge /Lithothamnion).
The determinable species are as follows:
Lamellibranchiata:
Yoldia (Portlandia) arctica Gray,
Modiolaria levigata Gray,
Pecten islandicus MÜLLER,
Astarte Banksii LEACH,
Astarte borealis CHEMNITZ,
Axinus flecuosus MONTAGU,
Tellina (Macoma/ calcaria CHEMNITZ,
Tellina /Macoma) Loveni STEENSTRUP,
Cardium ciliatum FABRICIUS,
Cardium groenlandicum CHEMNITZ,
Mya truncata L.,
Cyrtodaria Kurriana DUNKER,
Saxicava arctica L.,
Thracia septentrionalis JEFFREYS.
Gastropoda:
Natica affinis GMELIN,
Trophon clathratus L.,
Buccinum Belcheri REEVE,
Sipho (Tritonofusus) Kröyeri MÖLLER.
Serpulidæ :
Apomatus globifer THEEL.
Balanidæ :
Balanus porcatus DA CoSTA.
Echinidæ :
Strongylocentrotus dröbachiensis MÜLLER.
1) А. G. NATHORST: Bidrag till nordöstra Grönlands geologi. Geol. Foren. Förhandl.
Vol. 23, 1901, p. 304.
2) An. S. JENSEN: On the Mollusca of East Greenland, I. Lamellibranchiata. With an
introduction on Greenland’s fossil mollusc-fauna from the quaternary time. Meddel.
om Grenland XXIX, 1909, р. 301—02.
Quaternary Fossils collected by The Danmark Expedition. 623
Before proceeding to enumerate the localities where these quatern-
ary fossils were found, — I have for the sake of convenience arranged
them in order of latitude from south to north — and to the species,
some general observations by HAKON JARNER, Geologist to the Ex-
pedition, as to the occurrence of quaternary fossils on the territory
traversed by him, may here be quoted. Mr. JARNER states, it should
be noted, that the fossils brought home can only be regarded as
samples, and do not present any correct view of the actual distribution.
“Quaternary fossils are found throughout the whole of the low
moutonné coast region from the Hochstetter Vorland to Jokelbugten;
beyond this area I have no knowledge of the country from personal
observation. Here, however, they are present in numerous localities,
generally of but slight extent. Up to about 30 metres — or more
correctly, perhaps, 20 — above sea level, it is hardly necessary to
note “localities” in the plural; the whole area may be taken as one
locality of a most varying local character in consequence of the in-
sular landscape presented by this terrain moutonné under its earlier
partly submerged state, а landscape which still is to be found outside
along the coast. Normally, there is a thin layer of bottom moraine
above the rock. Beach formations do not appear as a regular covering
layer, but in many places gravel and sand have been washed up
into beach lines and terraces of a highly variable, but as a rule
inconsiderable extent. These — probably in most cases arisen under
disturbed conditions, — do not contain shells. Beside these form-
ations, however, which at the first glance mark the whole tract as
formerly submerged, we frequently find, in hollows and depressions,
deposits of loose matter. These are rarely of any considerable thick-
ness, but may in places be fairly rich in quaternary fossils. The
material is mainly gravel and sand, the fossils principally Saxicava
and Mya; certain spots, where more shelter was available, show clay
(with Yoldia).
In some few localities, — particularly Hvalsletten — the form-
ation is seen to be on a somewhat larger scale. Here, an abundance
of material was available, brought down by the glacier through Sæl-
søen. The masses were carried by the Salmon River (Lakseelven)
down to the northern part of Dove Bay, where they could be quietly
deposited on the inner side of Germania Land and the islands.
The formation here is still taking place on a larger scale than norm-
ally; the whole of “Lumskebugten” is at present in process of silting
up, and joining on to Hvalsletten. This, the largest deposit, is also
the richest in shells; on some parts of the slope facing down to the
Salmon River, they may be “shovelled” up.
In the more distant parts, towards Snenæs, sufficiently quiet
624 Ар. S. JENSEN.
conditions have also prevailed for the deposit of clay in somewhat
larger formation than the normal; Yoldia shells are here of fairly
frequent occurrence. Besides these large continuous tracts of clay,
smaller patches are found in several places on Hvalsletten, at times
of quite pygmean dimensions, some few metres square. These have
been formed in shelter, close to sharply rising ground, as for instance
beside the so-called “Bastion”.
Altogether an exception, both as regards thickness (some 5 metres)
and extent, and also level, is the tract of clay above the jurassic plateau
of Koldewey Island. Presumably, the high western portion of the
island has here played the same part as the “Bastion” of Hvalsletten
on a smaller scale, the quiet water in a sheltered corner behind these
rocks offering opportunity for formation of the deposit. Its altitude,
about 125 metres above sea level, is likewise unique. True, there
are numerous evidences of sea action over the whole investigated
region, even up to far greater heights, but quaternary fossils are
otherwise only found in the lower parts, and for the most part in
the very lowest. The peculiarity may be due to the fact that the
fossils were preserved in the clay and thus better able to withstand
the effects of weather than shells in the altogether superficial sand
formations; other conditions have, however, probably contributed,
and I hope in another publication to offer some further observations
on this point.”
I. Island in Bessels Fjord,
Ca T6 N. lat. ca.20%W:- Tong.
Raised sea bottom, 0—10 m above sea level. 23.5. 1908.
Saxicava arctica L.
5 shells, up to 37 mm. Of an elongated arctica-form.
II. Great Koldewey Island,
76°10 № 113351 №. long.
From clay above the Jura-deposits, 120 m above sea
level. 3:6! 1907.
Nucula sp.
Yoldia (Portlandia/ arctica GRAY.
3 spec., 15, 15°5 and 165 mm. The shells in several places broken
off, leaving the stone core more or less exposed; on one of the
shells, the finely undulating structure characteristic of the species
is still preserved.
Quaternary Fossils collected by The Danmark Expedition. 625
Portlandia sp.
1 small spec.
Astarte borealis CHEMNITZ.
1 spec., 11 shells and 2 stone cores, 6°5--40 mm. Some of the
pieces appear to differ sligthly from A. borealis, as for instance
in the prolonged fore-end.
Tellina calcaria CHEMNITZ. —
16 shells, ca. 22—30 mm.
Cardium ciliatum FABRICIUS.
Fragments of 15 shells, small and medium sized.
Cardium groenlandicum CHEMNITZ.
Fragments of 6 shells, small and medium sized.
Cyrtodaria Kurriana DUNKER.
1 spec., ligament still preserved, length 28 mm., height 13 mm.
Also a fragment of a stone core and of a shell.
Saxicava arctica L.
1 spec., 27 mm and 2 fragments.
Mya truncata L.
Fragments of grown specimens.
Ш. Depoteen near Cape Peschel,
76-14 N. lat. 19°56 W. long.
са. 2 mealbonesseasleyvel2295719072
Mya truncata L.
7 shells, 26—50 mm, shape medium-elongated or very short (udde-
vallensis/.
Saxicava arctica L.
3 shells of the pholadis-form, 41—46 mm.
IV. Camping ground N.W. of Teufelkap,
76°24' N. lat. 20°45' W. long.
23.—25./5. 1907.
Fr са 10 imeabove 5еа level.
Tellina calcaria CHEMNITZ.
1 shell, 33mm.
Mya truncata L.
17 shells, 27—-60 mm, of greatly varying shape; some as ovata- and
a blunter form of same, others of the truncated form down to
the short uddevallensis-type.
Saxicava arclica L.
17 shells, 28--49 mm, some of an elongated arctica-form, others
as pholadis-type.
626 Ар. $. JENSEN.
2. ‘ca. 125 m above sea level.
Saxicava arctica L.
Some small fragments.
V. Island due N. of Edwards Island in Dove Bay,
16237 Ча 2125 №. ош.
From the Yoldia clay, са. 5 m above sea level. 19.—20. 5.
1907.
Yoldia (Portlandia) arctica Gray var. portlandica Натсн.
4 spec. and abt. 20 shells, 6— ca. 25 mm.
Axinus flexuosus MONTAGU.
1 spec., 8 mm high.
Mya truncata L.
2 shells, ca. 22—31 mm, and a fragment of a larger one.
Saxicava arctica L.
Ca. 40 shells, 22'5—41 mm. Most are of an elongated arctica-form,
some few as the pholadis-form, on the whole of medium thickness.
VI. The Point at Borgfjord.
76°38 М. lat. 21°45’ W. long.
201 абоме sea levels) 2075; 1907.
Mya truncata L.
Some fragments.
Saxicava arctica L.
Some fragments.
УП. Renskeret,
716741 М. bat. 1823.5 \ long:
Near thiestop:
Sipho ( Tritonofusus) Kröyeri MOLLER.
1 medium sized spec., fragmentary and much eroded.
VIII. Peninsula east of Cape Bismarck,
са. 116 42 Ма са 182357 Mons:
са. т абоуе зеа Теуе[ 0. © 1907.
Astarte borealis CHEMNITZ.
5 shells, 22—28 mm.
Mya truncata L.
2 shells, 36 —48 mm, cut off in front, and a fragment.
Saxicava arctica L.
20 shells, 23°5—-37 mm, mostly of an elongated arctica-form, some
as pholadis, medium thickness, some few extremely thick.
Quaternary Fossils collected by The Danmark Expedition. 627
IX. Peninsula east of Cape Bismarck,
са. 76 42 М. Ла са: 18-35". М long,
20 m above sea level. 10.8. 1907.
Mya truncata L.
1 fragment of a large shell.
Saxicava arctica L.
4 shells, 28—31 mm, of the arctica-form, fairly thick in the shell
X. Cape Helgoland,
пол Ne vate 192102 \ 1005
ca.10 m above sea level.
Astarte borealis CHEMNITZ.
1 shell, 31 mm.
Saxicava arctica L.
7 shells, 29—46 mm, some of an elongated arctica-form, others
as pholadis, medium thickness, two enormously thickened.
XI. North of Cape Bismarck,
Can 16245 М TA CA 182402 Walons:
са. 10 ш above sea level.
Рес еп islandicus MÜLLER.
Fragments of 2 shells, one small, one larger.
XII. Østre Havnenæs,
76°45' N. lat. 18°44' W. long.
ca.10 m above sea level.
Saxicava arctica L.
56 shells, 21—88 mm, mostly of an elongated arctica-form :and
thick-shelled, some extremely so.
XIII. Slopes of river bank near Danmarks Науп,
16-101 М. lat. са. 18°45 АМ Тов.
Altitude less than 10 m.
Astarte borealis CHEMNITZ.
3 shells, 23—28 mm.
Mya truncata L.
5 shells, 28—53 mm, some of var. uddevallensis, others of a some-
what longer form; one (the largest) truncate-ovate.
Saxicava arctica L.
4 shells, 31—37 mm, of an elongated arctica-form, some very thick
in the shell, others rather thin.
628 Ар. 5. JENSEN.
XIV. Plain near Snenæs,
ПО ДЭ’ N. lat. 19°25’ М. long.
са. 5 ш above sea level. August 1906.
Astarte borealis CHEMNITZ.
9 shells, 18°5—33 mm.
Mya truncata L.
4 shells, 32—53 mm, short or of medium lenght.
Saxicava arctica L. .
15 shells, 23—40 mm, some of an elongated arctica-form, others
as pholadis, medium thickness, some enormously thick.
ХУ. Yoldia clay, nearly due north of Snenæs,
HORS ONTARIO) NV Elo nie
Ca. 30—40 m above sea level.
Yoldia arctica Gray var. portlandica Hircu.
1 spec. and 3 shells, 9—11 mm, also some fragments.
Saxicava arctica L.
Some fragments of medium sized specimens.
XVI Hvalsletten,
са. 76255 М. lat ca 20102 W Lone
|. са 2 ш абоуе: зеа level:
Cardium ciliatum FABRICIUS.
2 shells of same specimen, much eroded, adult size (52 mm).
2. 0-10 m above sea level.
Modiolaria levigata Gray var. substriata GRAY.
2 shells of same individual, a small one. (Length 8 mm).
Astarte Banksii LEACH.
4 shells, 10—19 mm.
Astarte borealis CHEMNITZ.
27 shells, 5—34 mm.
Cardium groenlandicum CHEMNITZ.
1 shell of an adult specimen (69 mm) and 7 fragments (ca. 42—
60 mm).
Mya truncata L.
14 shells, length 22—62 mm. Most are of a short form, either
var. uddevallensis, or approaching this, but the two largest shells
(from one and the same individual) are of fairly elongated shape,
and belong, apparently (the hinder edge is broken off) to the
var. ovata.
Saxicava arctica L.
15 shells, 9°5--37 mm long, some of the arctica-form, others of
Quaternary Fossils collected by The Danmark Expedition. 629
an elongated arctica-form or pholadis-form ; 6 shells exhibit holes
made by Natica.
Thracia septentrionalis JEFFREYS.
4 shells (one bored by Natica), of the following dimensions:
Length Height
20 mm 15 mm
2:00, 15:54 7;
21458 15755
BLD) = 23'5
Le]
Natica affinis GMELIN.
13 shells. The largest of the unbroken shells measures 19 mm, one
of the broken specimens, however, must have been considerably
larger.
Trophon clathratus L.
2 spec., 14—28'5 mm, and a fragment of a medium sized individual.
Buccinum Belcheri REEVE.
2 adult specimens and a fragment of a young one.
Principal dimensions of the adult specimens as follows:
Length (minus apex, which is broken off in both mm mm
SPECIMENS) au sa Re. PO ee Me eo PaO 51°5
Greateste diameters ва Бе о Зо ве не ef 29
Benstheof apertuner ме от a 25:5
Breadth of do. AL > Fr ls 16.5
The sculpture fairly well preserved, exhibiting the spiral ribs
and delicate spiral lines characteristic of the species.
The area of distribution of this species belongs to the extreme
Arctic: Dobbin Bay, Grinnell Land, 30 fath (Surrx); Port Refuge
(Wellington Channel), 11 а (REEVE); W. Greenland (PossELr);
Е. Greenland (77°31' N. lat. 18°24' W. long), 275 metres (GRIEG);
Jan Mayen (FRIELE).
Buccinum sp.
A fragment.
Sipho (Tritonofusus) Kröyeri MØLLER.
2 adult specimens, fragmentary, but form and parts of sculpture
sufficiently well preserved to permit of our regarding the determ
ination as certain.
Strongylocentrotus dröbachiensis MÜLLER.
A small fragment of the shell.
630 Ар. $. JENSEN.
a7 Hrom Tiersimetchot clay northeotf За том Ва cue
abt. 10 m above sea level.
Yoldia (Portlandia) arctica Gray var. portlandica HırcH.
i spec; 107mm:
XVII. From the terminal moraine in front of the Glacier to Sælsøen,
ЧМ lat. 21254’ Лопе.
5 à 10 m above sea level. March 1908.
Astarte borealis CHEMNITZ.
2 shells, 25 mm.
Tellina (Macoma) Loveni STEENSTRUP.
1 shell (the right), 11 mm.
Cardium groenlandicum CHEMNITZ.
Fragment of a medium sized shell.
Mya truncata L.
1 shell, posteriorly obliquely cut off forward, medium thickness.
Saxicava arctica L.
5 shells, 30—45 mm, of an elongated arctica-form.
Calcareous algæ (Lithothamnion) on shell fragments of Sipho (?).
XVIII. Moraine country near camping ground below the Jôkel,
TSP ON lat; 21°43 М lone:
Mya truncata L.
A fragment.
Saxicava arctica L.
A fragment.
Apomatus globifer THÉEL.
Fragment of a tube.
XIX. Edge of the inland ice (‘Moraine country”) '),
te 772.980, N. lat, 21°42 №. 1015.
са. 15 m above sea level. 5.5. 1908.
Mya truncata L.
A fragment.
Balanus porcatus DA COSTA.
Part of a shell.
2.172312. Naat ta? W. long.
ca.65 m.above sea level. 10.5.1908.
Saxicava arctica L.
4 shells, 28—34 mm, of an elongated arctica-form and of pholadis-
form.
1) ef. Meddelelser om Gronland, Vol. XLVI, p. 43-48, fig. 51-54.
Quaternary Fossils collected by The Danmark Expedition. 631
XX. Cape Amélie,
са. 7731 Nolatica 19715 Welome
Sloping mound of stratified sand and moraine-gravel
in frontof a glacier-wall. 0—5 m above sea level. 7. 10. 1906.
Astarte borealis CHEMNITZ.
2 medium sized shells, with well-preserved periostracum.
Mya truncata L.
A quantity of fragments of adult specimens.
Saxicava arctica L.
Some fragments.
XXI. Пе de France,
са 77736. Ne lait. ca, 18° W. lons 23.4: 1907.
Yoldia (Portlandia) arctica GRAY.
1 зрес., 13 mm, in a piece of clay. In a number of other lumps
of clay from same locality traces of Yoldia arctica were also
found, likewise a fragment of Dentalium (?).
XXII. East coast of Holms Land,
са. 8015 NE lat..car 163.0 We. lone:
са. 10 m above sea level, a few hundred m from coastline.
Mya truncata L.
2 shells, one a fragment, the other fairly thick and short in the
shell, 50 mm.
XXIII. Ingolfs Fjord, North side,
ca. 80°40’ М. lat. ca. 16°50’ W. long.
са 2 ш above sea level:
Astarte borealis CHEMNITZ.
2 small shells, fragments.
Mya truncata L.
9 shells, 35—48 mm, some short, posteriorly obliquely cut off
forward, others moderately elongated.
XXIV. Easternmost point of Greenland,
SIE2BEN Tat 122 W. hone.
Sample taken inthe inland ice, ca. 50 m above sea level.
Mya truncata L.
A few fragments.
632 An. $. JENSEN. Quaternary Fossils collected by The Danmark Expedition.
XXV. East coast of Peary Land,
82°46" М. dat. 21°5' W. long.
А few km from coastline, ca. 10 m above sea level.
Yoldia /Portlandia) arctica GRAY.
Fragments of two medium sized shells, with well-preserved
periostracum.
Clay samples from same place contained Foraminifera.
XXVI. Peary Land, North side of Hyde Fjord,
Ва М. Kat. 27. lone.
2D0kmeabove-seatlevel:
Saxicava arctica L.
2 shells of arctica-form, one fairly thick in the shell, 35—36 mm.
EL EN
A
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11